SIP5 7SS85 V09.30 Manual C019-G en

Preface
Table of Contents
Introduction 1
SIPROTEC 5 Basic Structure of the Function 2
Low-Impedance Busbar
Protection
System Functions 3
7SS85 Engineering 4
Function-Group Types and Bay Proxy 5
V9.30 and higher
Protection and Automation Functions 6
Control Functions 7
8
Manual
Supervision Functions
Measured Values and Supervision of the
Primary System 9
Functional Tests 10
Technical Data 11
Appendix A
Literature
Glossary
Index
C53000-G5040-C019-G
NOTE
i For your own safety, observe the warnings and safety instructions contained in this document, if available.
Disclaimer of Liability Copyright

Subject to changes and errors. The information given in Copyright © Siemens 2022. All rights reserved.
this document only contains general descriptions and/or The disclosure, duplication, distribution and editing of this
performance features which may not always specifically document, or utilization and communication of the content
reflect those described, or which may undergo modifica- are not permitted, unless authorized in writing. All rights,
tion in the course of further development of the products. including rights created by patent grant or registration of a
The requested performance features are binding only when utility model or a design, are reserved.
they are expressly agreed upon in the concluded contract.
Document version: C53000-G5040-C019-G.01 Trademarks
Edition: 07.2022
SIPROTEC, DIGSI, SIGRA, SIGUARD, SIMEAS, SAFIR, SICAM,
Version of the product described: V9.30 and higher and MindSphere are trademarks of Siemens. Any unauthor-
ized use is prohibited.
Preface
Purpose of the Manual

This manual describes the protection, automation, control, and monitoring functions of the SIPROTEC 5
devices.
Target Audience
Protection system engineers, commissioning engineers, persons entrusted with the setting, testing and main-
tenance of automation, selective protection and control equipment, and operational crew in electrical installa-
tions and power plants.
Scope
This manual applies to the SIPROTEC 5 device family.
Further Documentation
[dw_product-overview_SIP5_device-manual, 5, en_US]
• Device manuals
Each Device manual describes the functions and applications of a specific SIPROTEC 5 device. The printed
manual and the online help for the device have the same informational structure.
SIPROTEC 5, Low-Impedance Busbar Protection, Manual 3

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Preface
• Hardware manual
The Hardware manual describes the hardware building blocks and device combinations of the SIPROTEC 5
device family.
• Operating manual
The Operating manual describes the basic principles and procedures for operating and assembling the
devices of the SIPROTEC 5 range.
• Communication protocol manual

The Communication protocol manual contains a description of the protocols for communication within
the SIPROTEC 5 device family and to higher-level network control centers.
• Security manual
The Security manual describes the security features of the SIPROTEC 5 devices and DIGSI 5.
• Process bus manual

The process bus manual describes the functions and applications specific for process bus in SIPROTEC 5.
• Product information
The Product information includes general information about device installation, technical data, limiting
values for input and output modules, and conditions when preparing for operation. This document is
provided with each SIPROTEC 5 device.
• Engineering Guide
The Engineering Guide describes the essential steps when engineering with DIGSI 5. In addition, the Engi-
neering Guide shows you how to load a planned configuration to a SIPROTEC 5 device and update the
functionality of the SIPROTEC 5 device.
• DIGSI 5 online help

The DIGSI 5 online help contains a help package for DIGSI 5 and CFC.
The help package for DIGSI 5 includes a description of the basic operation of software, the DIGSI princi-
ples and editors. The help package for CFC includes an introduction to CFC programming, basic examples
of working with CFC, and a reference chapter with all the CFC blocks available for the SIPROTEC 5 range.
• SIPROTEC 5/DIGSI 5 Tutorial

The tutorial on the DVD contains brief information about important product features, more detailed infor-
mation about the individual technical areas, as well as operating sequences with tasks based on practical
operation and a brief explanation.
• SIPROTEC 5 catalog
The SIPROTEC 5 catalog describes the system features and the devices of SIPROTEC 5.
Indication of Conformity
This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities
on harmonization of the laws of the Member States concerning electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC Directive 2014/30/EU), restriction on usage of hazardous
substances in electrical and electronic equipment (RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU), and
electrical equipment for use within specified voltage limits (Low Voltage Directive
2014/35/EU).
This conformity has been proved by tests performed according to the Council Directive
in accordance with the product standard EN 60255-26 (for EMC directive), the standard
EN IEC 63000 (for RoHS directive), and with the product standard EN 60255-27 (for
Low Voltage Directive) by Siemens.
The device is designed and manufactured for application in an industrial environment.
The product conforms with the international standards of IEC 60255 and the German
standard VDE 0435.
Standards
IEEE Std C 37.90
4 SIPROTEC 5, Low-Impedance Busbar Protection, Manual

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Preface
The technical data of the product is approved in accordance with UL.

For more information about the UL database, see ul.com
You can find the product with the UL File Number E194016.
IND. CONT. EQ.

69CA
Additional Support
For questions about the system, contact your Siemens sales partner.
Customer Support Center

Our Customer Support Center provides a 24-hour service.
Siemens AG
Smart Infrastructure – Protection Automation Tel.: +49 911 2155 4466
Customer Support Center E-Mail: [email protected]
Training Courses
Inquiries regarding individual training courses should be addressed to our Training Center:
Siemens AG
Siemens Power Academy TD Phone: +49 911 9582 7100
Humboldtstraße 59 E-mail: [email protected]
90459 Nuremberg Internet: www.siemens.com/poweracademy
Germany
Notes on Safety
This document is not a complete index of all safety measures required for operation of the equipment (module
or device). However, it comprises important information that must be followed for personal safety, as well as
to avoid material damage. Information is highlighted and illustrated as follows according to the degree of
danger:
! DANGER
DANGER means that death or severe injury will result if the measures specified are not taken.
² Comply with all instructions, in order to avoid death or severe injuries.
! WARNING
WARNING means that death or severe injury may result if the measures specified are not taken.
² Comply with all instructions, in order to avoid death or severe injuries.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Preface
! CAUTION
CAUTION means that medium-severe or slight injuries can occur if the specified measures are not taken.
² Comply with all instructions, in order to avoid moderate or minor injuries.
NOTICE
NOTICE means that property damage can result if the measures specified are not taken.
² Comply with all instructions, in order to avoid property damage.
NOTE
i Important information about the product, product handling or a certain section of the documentation
which must be given attention.
Qualified Electrical Engineering Personnel

Only qualified electrical engineering personnel may commission and operate the equipment (module, device)
described in this document. Qualified electrical engineering personnel in the sense of this document are
people who can demonstrate technical qualifications as electrical technicians. These persons may commission,
isolate, ground and label devices, systems and circuits according to the standards of safety engineering.
Proper Use
The equipment (device, module) may be used only for such applications as set out in the catalogs and the
technical description, and only in combination with third-party equipment recommended and approved by
Siemens.
Problem-free and safe operation of the product depends on the following:
• Proper transport
• Proper storage, setup and installation
• Proper operation and maintenance

When electrical equipment is operated, hazardous voltages are inevitably present in certain parts. If proper
action is not taken, death, severe injury or property damage can result:
• The equipment must be grounded at the grounding terminal before any connections are made.
• All circuit components connected to the power supply may be subject to dangerous voltage.
• Hazardous voltages may be present in equipment even after the supply voltage has been disconnected
(capacitors can still be charged).
• Operation of equipment with exposed current-transformer circuits is prohibited. Before disconnecting the
equipment, ensure that the current-transformer circuits are short-circuited.
• The limiting values stated in the document must not be exceeded. This must also be considered during
testing and commissioning.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Preface
Selection of Used Symbols on the Device
No. Symbol Description
1 Direct current, IEC 60417, 5031
2 Alternating current, IEC 60417, 5032
3 Direct and alternating current, IEC 60417, 5033
4 Earth (ground) terminal, IEC 60417, 5017
5 Protective conductor terminal, IEC 60417, 5019
6 Caution, risk of electric shock
7 Caution, risk of danger, ISO 7000, 0434
8 Protective Insulation, IEC 60417, 5172, Safety Class II devices
9 Guideline 2002/96/EC for electrical and electronic devices
10 Guideline for the Eurasian Market
11 Mandatory Conformity Mark for Electronics and Electrotechnical Products in Morocco
OpenSSL
This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in OpenSSL Toolkit (http://
www.openssl.org/).
This product includes software written by Tim Hudson ([email protected]).
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young ([email protected]).

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Table of Contents
Preface.......................................................................................................................................................... 3
1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................29
1.1 General.............................................................................................................................30
1.2 Properties of SIPROTEC 5................................................................................................... 31
2 Basic Structure of the Function.................................................................................................................. 33

2.1 Function Embedding in the Device ................................................................................... 34
2.2 Adjustment of Application Templates/Functional Scope..................................................... 41
2.3 Function Control............................................................................................................... 43
2.4 Text Structure and Reference Number for Settings and Indications.....................................48
2.5 Information Lists............................................................................................................... 50
3 System Functions....................................................................................................................................... 51
3.1 Indications........................................................................................................................ 52
3.1.1 General....................................................................................................................... 52
3.1.2 Reading Indications on the On-Site Operation Panel..................................................... 52
3.1.3 Reading Indications from the PC with DIGSI 5............................................................... 54
3.1.4 Displaying Indications.................................................................................................. 55
3.1.5 Logs............................................................................................................................ 57
3.1.5.1 General..................................................................................................................57
3.1.5.2 Operational Log..................................................................................................... 59
3.1.5.3 Fault Log................................................................................................................60
3.1.5.4 Setting-History Log.................................................................................................61
3.1.5.5 User Log................................................................................................................ 63
3.1.5.6 Security Log........................................................................................................... 65
3.1.5.7 Device-Diagnosis Log............................................................................................. 66
3.1.5.8 Communication Log............................................................................................... 67
3.1.5.9 Communication-Supervision Log............................................................................ 69
3.1.6 Saving and Deleting the Logs....................................................................................... 70
3.1.7 Spontaneous Indication Display in DIGSI 5....................................................................72
3.1.8 Spontaneous Fault Display on the On-Site Operation Panel...........................................72
3.1.9 Stored Indications in the SIPROTEC 5 Device.................................................................74
3.1.10 Resetting Stored Indications of the Function Group ..................................................... 75
3.1.11 Test Mode and Influence of Indications on Substation Automation Technology ............75
3.2 Measured-Value Acquisition ............................................................................................. 76
3.3 Sampling-Frequency Tracking and Frequency Tracking Groups...........................................78
3.3.1 Overview.....................................................................................................................78
3.3.2 Sampling-Frequency Tracking...................................................................................... 78
3.3.3 Frequency Tracking Groups..........................................................................................81

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Table of Contents
3.4 Processing Quality Attributes.............................................................................................87

3.4.1 Overview.....................................................................................................................87
3.4.2 Quality Processing/Affected by the User for Received GOOSE Values............................. 88
3.4.3 Quality Processing/Affected by the User in CFC Charts.................................................. 94
3.4.4 Quality Processing/Affected by the User in Internal Device Functions............................ 98
3.5 Fault Recording...............................................................................................................103
3.5.1 Overview of Functions .............................................................................................. 103
3.5.2 Structure of the Function........................................................................................... 103
3.5.3 Function Description..................................................................................................103
3.5.4 Application and Setting Notes....................................................................................107
3.5.5 Settings.....................................................................................................................109
3.5.6 Information List......................................................................................................... 110
3.6 Protection Communication..............................................................................................111
3.6.1 Overview...................................................................................................................111
3.6.2 Protection Communication in the Overall System....................................................... 112
3.6.4 Available Variants for the Protection Communication................................................. 122
3.6.5 Classic Protection Communication............................................................................. 124
3.6.5.1 Overview............................................................................................................. 124
3.6.5.2 Classic Protection Communication in the Overall System.......................................124
3.6.5.3 Structure of the Function Group........................................................................... 124
3.6.5.4 Configuration of the Protection Interface in DIGSI 5.............................................. 126
3.6.5.5 Setting Notes for the Device Combination............................................................ 127
3.6.5.6 Setting Notes on Selecting the Communication Medium.......................................131
3.6.5.7 Setting Notes for the Classic Protection Interface.................................................. 131
3.6.5.8 Indications and Measured Values in the Classic Protection Interface...................... 136
3.6.5.9 Configuring Remote Data..................................................................................... 141
3.6.5.10 Constellation Measured Values for Type 1 and Type 2........................................... 145
3.6.5.11 Settings............................................................................................................... 146
3.6.5.12 Information List................................................................................................... 147
3.6.6 Advanced Protection Communication ........................................................................149
3.6.6.1 Overview............................................................................................................. 149
3.6.6.2 Advanced Protection Communication in the Overall System..................................150
3.6.6.3 Structure of the FG Protection Communication .................................................... 150
3.6.6.4 Configuration of the Advanced Protection Communication in DIGSI 5................... 152
3.6.6.5 Setting Notes for the Protection Interface............................................................. 156
3.6.6.6 Indications and Measured Values of the Advanced Protection Interface................. 160
3.6.6.7 Setting Notes for the Device Combination............................................................ 163
3.6.6.8 Constellation Measured Values for Type 1 and Type 2........................................... 168
3.6.6.9 Setting Notes for External Synchronization........................................................... 170
3.6.6.10 Indications and Measured Values of the External Synchronization......................... 175
3.6.6.11 Setting Notes for the Remote Data....................................................................... 176
3.6.6.12 Settings............................................................................................................... 176
3.6.7 Assignment of the Protection Function Group to the FG Protection Communication....179
3.6.8 Application Examples and Setting Notes for IP Communication...................................179
3.6.8.1 Overview............................................................................................................. 179
3.6.8.2 Device Combination of 2 Devices and Redundant Communication Connection...... 180
3.6.8.3 Device Combination of 3 Devices and Only IP Communication.............................. 180
3.6.8.4 Device Combination of 3 Devices and Hybrid Communication Media.....................181
3.6.8.5 Device Combination of 6 Devices and Hybrid Communication Media.....................183
3.6.8.6 Unsupported Configurations................................................................................ 186

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Table of Contents
3.7 Date and Time Synchronization....................................................................................... 188

3.7.1 Overview of Functions............................................................................................... 188
3.7.5 Settings.....................................................................................................................194
3.8 User-Defined Objects...................................................................................................... 196
3.8.1 Overview...................................................................................................................196
3.8.2 Basic Data Types........................................................................................................ 197
3.8.3 PulseMetered Values................................................................................................. 201
3.8.4 Additional Data Types................................................................................................ 201
3.8.5 External Signals......................................................................................................... 201
3.9 Other Functions.............................................................................................................. 203
3.9.1 Signal Filtering and Chatter Blocking for Input Signals................................................ 203
3.9.2 Acquisition Blocking and Manual Updating.................................................................207
3.9.3 Persistent Commands................................................................................................ 209
3.9.4 Device Logout........................................................................................................... 210
3.9.4.1 Overview............................................................................................................. 210
3.9.4.2 Application and Setting Notes.............................................................................. 211
3.10 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Protection Functions.............................214
3.10.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................214
3.10.2 Modifying the Transformer Ratios in DIGSI 5 ..............................................................214
3.10.3 Changing the Transformation Ratios of the Transformer on the Device....................... 217
3.11 Device Settings............................................................................................................... 218
3.11.1 Settings-Group Switching.......................................................................................... 218
3.11.1.1 Overview of Functions .........................................................................................218
3.11.1.2 Structure of the Function..................................................................................... 218
3.11.1.3 Function Description............................................................................................ 218
3.11.1.5 Settings............................................................................................................... 220
3.11.2 General Device Settings............................................................................................. 221
3.11.2.1 Overview ............................................................................................................ 221
3.11.2.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 223
3.12 Using a SIPROTEC 5 Device as a Client or Merging Unit ....................................................226
3.13 Power Quality Basics....................................................................................................... 229
4 Engineering.............................................................................................................................................. 231
4.1 Overview........................................................................................................................ 232
4.1.1 General..................................................................................................................... 232
4.1.2 Differentiation of the Busbar-Protection Variants........................................................232
4.1.3 Engineering Example.................................................................................................235
4.1.4 Busbars and Bays....................................................................................................... 236
4.1.5 Procedure ................................................................................................................. 236

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Table of Contents
4.1.6 Creating the Project and Representing the System Graphically in the Single-Line
Editor........................................................................................................................ 238
4.2 Selecting and Creating Devices........................................................................................240
4.2.1 Significant Features for Centralized and Distributed Busbar Protection
(IEC 61850 Compliant).............................................................................................. 240
4.2.2 Significant Features for the Distributed Busbar Protection ..........................................242
4.2.3 Creating Devices........................................................................................................243
4.2.4 Inserting and Connecting Bus Zones.......................................................................... 245
4.3 Configuration for the Centralized Busbar Protection and Distributed Busbar Protec-
tion (IEC 61850 Compliant)............................................................................................. 248
4.3.1 Differences in Project Engineering for the Different Busbar-Protection Variants...........248
4.3.2 Adding Bays, Function Groups, and Functions in 7SS85..............................................248
4.3.3 Current Measuring Points.......................................................................................... 249
4.3.3.1 Current Measuring Points for the Centralized Busbar Protection and Current
Measured Values for the Distributed Busbar Protection (IEC 61850 Compliant)......249
4.3.3.2 Adding Measuring Points for Centralized Busbar Protection 7SS85........................ 250
4.3.4 Current Measured Values (SMV) for the Distributed Busbar Protection (IEC
61850 Compliant)..................................................................................................... 252
4.3.4.1 Procedure for the Transmission of the Current Measured Values from the
Merging Unit to the Client.................................................................................... 252
4.3.4.2 Create and Check the Network Topology.............................................................. 252
4.3.4.3 Adding and Routing Measuring Points.................................................................. 256
4.3.4.4 IEC 61850 System Configurator (IEC 61850 Compliant)........................................ 259
4.3.4.5 Checking the Measuring-Point Routing in DIGSI ................................................... 263
4.3.5 Assigning Device Functions in the Single-Line Editor.................................................. 263
4.3.6 Transmitting Binary Information via GOOSE............................................................... 267
4.3.6.1 General................................................................................................................267
4.3.6.2 Carrying Out Routings ......................................................................................... 268
4.3.6.3 IEC 61850 System Configurator (GOOSE)..............................................................268
4.3.7 Information for Efficient Project Engineering of a Distributed Busbar Protection
(IEC 61850 Compliant) ............................................................................................. 271
4.4 Configuration for the Distributed Busbar Protection......................................................... 273
4.4.1 Creating and Checking the Network Topology............................................................ 273
4.4.2 Configuring Merging Units ........................................................................................276
4.4.3 Updating the Central Unit (Step 1) ............................................................................ 278
4.4.4 IEC 61850 System Configurator ................................................................................ 280
4.4.5 Updating the Central Unit (Step 2) ............................................................................ 283
4.4.6 Notes for Efficient Project Engineering of a Distributed Busbar Protection .................. 285
4.4.7 Routing Manager.......................................................................................................287
4.5 Additional Engineering Information.................................................................................292
4.5.1 General Information.................................................................................................. 292
4.5.2 Bus Coupler Bays....................................................................................................... 292
4.5.3 Combined Bus Coupler Bays.......................................................................................293
4.5.4 Transfer Busbars........................................................................................................ 294
4.5.5 Bus Section without Measuring System...................................................................... 295
4.5.6 Bus-Section Bays........................................................................................................298
4.5.7 Detecting the Line Disconnector ............................................................................... 298
4.5.8 Truck-Type Switchgear...............................................................................................299
4.5.9 Enabling of Tripping by Undervoltage Protection........................................................ 302
4.5.10 Backup Protection Functions ..................................................................................... 304

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Table of Contents
4.5.11 Overview of Blocking................................................................................................. 304

4.5.12 Further Information Regarding the Configuration.......................................................306
4.5.13 Further Information on the Distributed Busbar Protection (IEC 61850 Compliant)....... 309
4.5.14 Additional Information on the Distributed Busbar Protection...................................... 310
5 Function-Group Types and Bay Proxy.......................................................................................................313

5.1 Busbar Function-Group Type........................................................................................... 314
5.1.1 Overview...................................................................................................................314
5.1.2 Structure of the Function Group................................................................................ 315
5.1.4 Settings.....................................................................................................................318
5.2 Bay Proxy........................................................................................................................ 319
5.2.1 The Field in Centralized or Distributed Busbar Protection (IEC 61850-Compliant) ........319
5.2.3 Bay Types.................................................................................................................. 321
5.2.3.1 Overview............................................................................................................. 321
5.2.3.2 Bay Type Feeder...................................................................................................322
5.2.3.3 Bay Type Bus Coupler........................................................................................... 326
5.2.3.4 Bay Type Busbar-Section Disconnection ............................................................... 332
5.2.4 Application and Setting Notes ................................................................................... 333
5.2.5 Operating State: Bay Out of Service............................................................................333
5.2.6 Operating State: Measuring Point out of Operation.................................................... 333
5.2.7 Operating State: Bay Off............................................................................................ 334
5.2.8 Deactivating the Sampled Value Monitoring...............................................................334
5.2.9 Deactivating GOOSE Monitoring................................................................................ 335
5.2.10 Operating State Acquisition Blocking..........................................................................335
5.2.11 Settings.....................................................................................................................335
5.3 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker............................................................................... 337
5.3.1 Overview...................................................................................................................337
5.3.4 Settings.....................................................................................................................342
5.3.6 Circuit Breaker........................................................................................................... 345
5.3.6.1 Overview............................................................................................................. 345
5.3.6.2 Tripping, Opening, and Closing the Circuit Breaker............................................... 345
5.3.6.3 Acquisition of Circuit-Breaker Auxiliary Contacts and Further Information..............347
5.3.6.4 Circuit Breakers in Truck-Type Switchgear............................................................. 351
5.3.6.5 Tripping and Breaking Information....................................................................... 351
5.3.6.7 Settings............................................................................................................... 356
5.3.7 Circuit-Breaker Position Recognition for Protection-Related Auxiliary Functions........... 357
5.3.7.1 Overview............................................................................................................. 357
5.4 Current Transformer Function-Group Type.......................................................................359
5.4.1 Overview...................................................................................................................359

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Table of Contents

5.5 Disconnector Function-Group Type..................................................................................363
5.5.1 Overview...................................................................................................................363
5.5.4 Parameter................................................................................................................. 366
5.6 Function-Group Type Voltage 3-Phase............................................................................. 367
5.6.1 Overview...................................................................................................................367
5.6.2 Scope of Application.................................................................................................. 367
5.6.5 Settings.....................................................................................................................369
5.7 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 3-Phase................................................................. 370
5.7.1 Overview...................................................................................................................370
5.7.2 Scope of Application.................................................................................................. 370
5.7.5 Write-Protected Settings............................................................................................ 375
5.7.6 Settings.....................................................................................................................375
5.7.8 Process Monitor.........................................................................................................376
5.7.8.1 Overview of Functions......................................................................................... 376
5.7.8.3 Current-Flow Criterion..........................................................................................377
5.7.8.4 Application and Setting Notes (Current-Flow Criterion)......................................... 378
5.7.8.5 Circuit-Breaker Condition for the Protected Object................................................ 378
5.7.8.6 Closure Detection.................................................................................................379
5.7.8.7 Application and Setting Notes (Closure Detection)................................................ 379
5.7.8.8 Cold-Load Pickup Detection (Optional)..................................................................381
5.7.8.9 Application and Setting Notes (Cold-Load Pickup Detection) .................................382
5.7.8.10 Settings............................................................................................................... 383
5.8 Function-Group Type Analog Units.................................................................................. 384
5.8.1 Overview...................................................................................................................384
5.9 Function-Group Recording.............................................................................................. 385
5.9.1 Overview .................................................................................................................. 385
5.10 Power-System Data......................................................................................................... 387
5.10.1 Overview...................................................................................................................387
6 Protection and Automation Functions..................................................................................................... 389

6.1 Power-System Data......................................................................................................... 390
6.1.1 Overview...................................................................................................................390
6.1.2 Structure of the Power-System Data...........................................................................390
6.1.3 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring-Point Current 3-Phase (I-3ph)................ 390
6.1.4 Operating State: Measuring Point for Distributed Busbar Protection out of Service...... 391

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Table of Contents
6.1.5 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring Point Voltage 3‑Phase (V-3ph)............... 392
6.1.6 Settings.....................................................................................................................396
6.2 Busbar Differential Protection..........................................................................................402
6.2.4 Method of Measurement and Characteristic Curves.................................................... 404
6.2.5 Measurands...............................................................................................................407
6.2.6 Algorithms................................................................................................................ 410
6.2.6.1 Evaluation of the Measurands When a Fault Occurs.............................................. 410
6.2.6.2 Algorithm with Filtered Measured Values..............................................................410
6.2.7 Tripping.................................................................................................................... 411
6.2.7.1 Busbar Differential Protection Trip Logic............................................................... 411
6.2.7.2 Phase-Selective Release of Tripping...................................................................... 412
6.2.7.3 Zone-Specific Release of Tripping......................................................................... 412
6.2.7.4 Cross Stabilization ............................................................................................... 413
6.2.8 Disconnector Image .................................................................................................. 413
6.2.9 Check Zone............................................................................................................... 414
6.2.10 Supervision............................................................................................................... 415
6.2.11 Function Limits of the Busbar Differential Protection.................................................. 415
6.2.12 Application and Setting Notes – Busbar Differential Protection – General....................416
6.2.13 Application and Setting Notes – Busbar – General...................................................... 418
6.2.14 Application and Setting Notes – Check Zone ............................................................. 420
6.2.15 Application and Setting Notes – Cross Stabilization ....................................................422
6.2.16 Settings.....................................................................................................................422
6.3 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection (1-Pole/3-Pole)............................................................. 427
6.3.1 Overview of Function................................................................................................ 427
6.3.4 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection in Busbar Protection................................................438
6.3.6 Settings.....................................................................................................................448
6.4 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection (3-Pole)........................................................................451
6.4.4 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection in Busbar Protection................................................459
6.4.6 Settings.....................................................................................................................470
6.5 Inherent Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection.......................................................................473

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Table of Contents

6.5.5 Settings.....................................................................................................................479
6.6 End-Fault Protection in Busbar Protection........................................................................ 481
6.6.2 End-Fault Protection in the Feeder............................................................................. 481
6.6.3 Protection with Faults in the Bus Coupler (Dead Zone)............................................... 482
6.6.7 Parameter................................................................................................................. 487
6.7 External Tripping Busbar Section (Direct)......................................................................... 488
6.7.5 Settings.....................................................................................................................491
6.8 External Tripping Busbar Section (from Bay).................................................................... 494
6.8.5 Settings.....................................................................................................................497
6.9 Bus Coupler Differential Protection.................................................................................. 498
6.9.5 Settings.....................................................................................................................502
6.10 Overcurrent Protection, Phases........................................................................................504
6.10.2 Structure of the Function .......................................................................................... 504
6.10.3 Stage with Definite-Time Characteristic Curve............................................................ 505
6.10.3.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 505
6.10.3.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 508
6.10.4 Stage with Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve............................................................. 510
6.10.4.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 510
6.10.4.2 Application and Setting Notes ............................................................................. 511
6.10.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 512
6.11 Overcurrent Protection, Ground...................................................................................... 514

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Table of Contents

6.11.3.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 515
6.11.3.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 517
6.11.4.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 519
6.11.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 521
6.12 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases...................................................................... 523
6.12.3 Stage Control............................................................................................................ 524
6.12.3.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 524
6.12.4.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 526
6.12.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 528
6.12.5.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 530
6.12.5.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 532
6.12.6 Direction Determination............................................................................................ 533
6.12.6.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 533
6.12.7 Application Notes for Parallel Lines ............................................................................536
6.13 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground..................................................................... 538
6.13.3 Stage Control............................................................................................................ 539
6.13.3.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 539
6.13.4.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 541
6.13.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 543
6.13.5.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 545
6.13.5.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 548
6.14 Group Indications of Overcurrent Protection Functions.................................................... 550
6.14.1 Description ............................................................................................................... 550
6.15 Negative-Sequence Protection.........................................................................................552

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Table of Contents
6.16 Voltage Protection.......................................................................................................... 553

6.16.1 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage........................................................... 553
6.16.1.3 Stage with Definite-Time Characteristic Curve.......................................................554
6.16.1.5 Settings............................................................................................................... 559
6.16.1.7 Stage with Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve........................................................561
6.16.1.9 Settings............................................................................................................... 567
6.16.2 Undervoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage........................................... 568
6.16.2.2 Structure of the Function .................................................................................... 568
6.16.2.3 Stage Description ................................................................................................ 569
6.16.2.5 Settings............................................................................................................... 572
6.16.3 Undervoltage Protection with Any Voltage................................................................. 573
6.16.3.3 Stage Description................................................................................................. 574
6.16.3.5 Settings............................................................................................................... 577
6.16.4 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage............................................................. 579
6.16.4.3 Stage with Definite-Time Characteristic Curve ......................................................580
6.16.4.5 Settings............................................................................................................... 583
6.16.4.7 Stage with Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve ....................................................... 585
6.16.4.9 Settings............................................................................................................... 590
6.16.5 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage............................................. 591
6.16.5.3 Stage Description ................................................................................................ 591
6.16.5.5 Settings............................................................................................................... 592
6.16.6 Overvoltage Protection with Negative-Sequence Voltage............................................593
6.16.6.3 Description.......................................................................................................... 594
6.16.6.5 Settings............................................................................................................... 594
6.16.6.7 Description.......................................................................................................... 595
6.16.6.9 Settings............................................................................................................... 597
6.16.7 Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage........................ 598

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Table of Contents

6.16.7.3 Stage with Definite-Time Characteristic Curve.......................................................600
6.16.7.5 Settings............................................................................................................... 604
6.16.7.7 Stage with Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve........................................................605
6.16.7.9 Settings............................................................................................................... 610
6.16.8 Overvoltage Protection with Any Voltage................................................................... 611
6.16.8.3 Stage Description................................................................................................. 612
6.16.8.5 Settings............................................................................................................... 614
6.16.9 Overvoltage Protection with Negative-Sequence Voltage/Positive-Sequence Voltage ..616
6.16.9.3 Description.......................................................................................................... 616
6.16.9.5 Settings............................................................................................................... 618
6.16.9.7 Stage with Negative-Sequence Voltage/Positive-Sequence Voltage....................... 618
6.16.9.8 Description.......................................................................................................... 619
6.16.9.10 Settings............................................................................................................... 621
6.17 Frequency Protection...................................................................................................... 623
6.17.1 Overfrequency Protection.......................................................................................... 623
6.17.1.3 Overfrequency-Protection Stage........................................................................... 624
6.17.1.5 Settings............................................................................................................... 626
6.17.2 Underfrequency Protection........................................................................................ 628
6.17.2.3 Underfrequency-Protection Stage......................................................................... 629
6.17.2.5 Settings............................................................................................................... 632
6.17.3 Rate of Frequency Change Protection (Undervoltage Check, df/dt Calculation)............633
6.17.3.3 Description.......................................................................................................... 634
6.17.3.5 Description.......................................................................................................... 636
6.17.3.7 Settings............................................................................................................... 638
6.18 Impedance Protection..................................................................................................... 640
6.18.3 Description................................................................................................................ 640

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Table of Contents

6.18.5 Settings.....................................................................................................................655
6.19 Arc Protection................................................................................................................. 657
6.19.1 Overview of Function ................................................................................................657
6.19.4 Application and Setting Notes – General Settings....................................................... 660
6.19.5 Application and Setting Notes for the Stage............................................................... 661
6.19.6 Settings.....................................................................................................................662
6.19.8 Application Example for Arc Protection with Point Sensors in Operating Mode:
Light Only................................................................................................................. 665
6.19.8.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 665
Light and Current...................................................................................................... 668
6.19.9.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 668
6.19.10 Application Example for Arc Protection with Point Sensors via External Trip Initiation..670
6.19.10.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 670
6.19.11 Application Example for Arc Protection with a Line Sensor in Operating Mode:
Light and Current...................................................................................................... 674
6.19.11.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 674
6.20 Inrush-Current and 2nd Harmonic Detection....................................................................677
6.20.1 Inrush-Current Detection........................................................................................... 677
6.20.1.5 Settings............................................................................................................... 682
6.20.2 2nd Harmonic Ground Detection............................................................................... 683
6.20.2.5 Settings............................................................................................................... 685
6.21 Temperature Supervision................................................................................................ 687
6.22 Voltage-Jump Detection.................................................................................................. 688
6.22.4 Application and Setting Notes ................................................................................... 689
6.22.5 Settings.....................................................................................................................690
6.23 Voltage Measuring-Point Selection.................................................................................. 692

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Table of Contents
6.23.2 Further Information................................................................................................... 692
7 Control Functions..................................................................................................................................... 693

7.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................694
7.1.1 Overview...................................................................................................................694
7.1.2 Concept of Controllables............................................................................................694
7.2 Switching Devices........................................................................................................... 697
7.2.1 Overview...................................................................................................................697
7.2.2 Switching Device Circuit Breaker................................................................................ 697
7.2.2.1 Structure of the Circuit-Breaker Switching Device..................................................697
7.2.2.3 Connection Variants of the Circuit Breaker............................................................ 703
7.2.2.4 More Information.................................................................................................711
7.2.2.5 Settings............................................................................................................... 711
7.3 Switching Sequences...................................................................................................... 714
7.3.4 Settings.....................................................................................................................720
7.4 Control Functionality.......................................................................................................721
7.4.1 Command Checks and Switchgear Interlocking Protection.......................................... 721
7.4.2 Command Logging.................................................................................................... 740
7.4.3 Settings.....................................................................................................................745
7.5 User-Defined Function Block [Control]............................................................................. 747
7.5.4 Settings.....................................................................................................................750
7.6 CFC-Chart Settings.......................................................................................................... 752
7.6.4 Settings.....................................................................................................................753
7.7 Voltage Controller........................................................................................................... 755
8 Supervision Functions.............................................................................................................................. 757

8.1 Overview........................................................................................................................ 758
8.2 Resource-Consumption Supervision.................................................................................759
8.2.1 Load Model............................................................................................................... 759
8.2.2 Function Points..........................................................................................................761
8.2.3 CFC Resources........................................................................................................... 762
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System.............................................................................. 764
8.3.1 Overview...................................................................................................................764

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Table of Contents
8.3.2 Measuring-Voltage Failure......................................................................................... 764

8.3.2.3 Unbalanced Measuring-Voltage Failure.................................................................766
8.3.2.4 3-Phase Measuring-Voltage Failure.......................................................................767
8.3.2.5 Switching onto a 3-Phase Measuring-Voltage Failure, Low Load............................768
8.3.2.7 Settings............................................................................................................... 770
8.3.3 Signaling-Voltage Supervision....................................................................................771
8.3.3.5 Settings............................................................................................................... 775
8.3.4 Voltage-Transformer Circuit Breaker...........................................................................776
8.3.4.5 Settings............................................................................................................... 777
8.3.5 Differential Current Supervision................................................................................. 778
8.3.5.1 Function Overview .............................................................................................. 778
8.3.5.5 Settings............................................................................................................... 782
8.3.6 Zero-Crossing Supervision..........................................................................................783
8.3.7 Disconnector Supervision...........................................................................................785
8.3.7.5 Settings .............................................................................................................. 792
8.3.8 Circuit-Breaker Monitoring ........................................................................................ 793
8.3.8.5 Settings............................................................................................................... 798
8.3.9 Voltage-Balance Supervision...................................................................................... 798
8.3.9.5 Settings............................................................................................................... 800

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Table of Contents
8.3.10 Voltage-Sum Supervision........................................................................................... 801

8.3.10.5 Settings............................................................................................................... 803
8.3.11 Voltage Phase-Rotation Supervision........................................................................... 804
8.3.11.5 Settings............................................................................................................... 806
8.3.12 Trip-Circuit Supervision.............................................................................................. 806
8.3.12.3 Trip-Circuit Supervision with 2 Binary Inputs......................................................... 807
8.3.12.4 Trip-Circuit Supervision with 1 Binary Input...........................................................808
8.3.12.6 Settings............................................................................................................... 811
8.3.13 Supervision of Binary Inputs.......................................................................................812
8.4 Supervision of the Device Hardware................................................................................ 815
8.4.1 Overview...................................................................................................................815
8.4.2 Analog-Channel Supervision via Fast Current-Sum......................................................816
8.5 Supervision of Device Firmware.......................................................................................820
8.6 Supervision of Hardware Configuration........................................................................... 821
8.7 Supervision of Communication Connections....................................................................822
8.8 Error Responses and Corrective Measures........................................................................ 826
8.8.1 Overview...................................................................................................................826
8.8.2 Defect Severity 1....................................................................................................... 827
8.8.3 Defect Severity 2....................................................................................................... 831
8.8.4 Defect Severity 3....................................................................................................... 832
8.8.5 Defect Severity 4 (Group Alarm).................................................................................833
8.9 Group Indications............................................................................................................835
8.10 Group Indications Specific to the Busbar Protection......................................................... 837
9 Measured Values and Supervision of the Primary System....................................................................... 839

9.1 Overview of Functions.................................................................................................... 840
9.2 Structure of the Function................................................................................................ 841
9.3 Operational Measured Values.......................................................................................... 842
9.4 Fundamental and Symmetrical Components....................................................................843
9.5 Average Values............................................................................................................... 844
9.5.1 Function Description of Average Values..................................................................... 844
9.5.2 Application and Setting Notes for Average Values...................................................... 844
9.6 Minimum/Maximum Values.............................................................................................846
9.6.1 Function Description of Minimum/Maximum Values...................................................846

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Table of Contents
9.6.2 Application and Setting Notes for Minimum/Maximum Values.................................... 846

9.7 User-Defined Metered Values.......................................................................................... 848
9.7.1 Function Description of Pulse-Metered Values............................................................ 848
9.7.2 Application and Setting Notes for Pulse-Metered Values............................................. 849
9.8 Statistical Values of the Primary System........................................................................... 851
9.9 Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU).....................................................................................852
9.9.4 Transmitted Data....................................................................................................... 857
9.9.5 PMU Communication (IEEE C37.118)......................................................................... 857
9.9.6 Parameterizing the PMU with DIGSI............................................................................859
9.9.7 Parameterizing the PMU on the Device.......................................................................870
9.9.9 Settings.....................................................................................................................875
9.10 Measuring Transducers................................................................................................... 877
9.10.5 Settings.....................................................................................................................881
9.11 Circuit-Breaker Monitoring ............................................................................................. 884
9.11.3 General Functionality................................................................................................ 884
9.11.3.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 884
9.11.3.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 887
9.11.4 ΣIx Method................................................................................................................ 888
9.11.4.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 888
9.11.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 890
9.11.5 2P Method.................................................................................................................892
9.11.5.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 892
9.11.5.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 896
9.11.6 I2t Method................................................................................................................ 899
9.11.6.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 899
9.11.6.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 900
9.11.7 Make Time................................................................................................................ 902
9.11.7.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 902
9.11.7.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 903

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Table of Contents

9.11.8 Break Time................................................................................................................ 905
9.11.8.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 905
9.11.8.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 906
10 Functional Tests........................................................................................................................................909
10.1 General Notes................................................................................................................. 910
10.2 Checking the System Configuration and the Disconnector Image..................................... 911
10.3 System Visualization .......................................................................................................912
10.4 Checking with Secondary Quantities - General Information.............................................. 915
10.5 Pickup Characteristic of Busbar Protection....................................................................... 916
10.5.1 Overview...................................................................................................................916
10.5.2 Busbar-Selective Protection........................................................................................916
10.5.3 Check Zone............................................................................................................... 917
10.6 Differential Current Supervision.......................................................................................919
10.6.1 Busbar-Selective Protection........................................................................................919
10.6.2 Check Zone............................................................................................................... 919
10.6.3 Time Delay................................................................................................................ 920
10.7 Testing with Primary Values............................................................................................ 921
10.7.1 General..................................................................................................................... 921
10.7.2 Testing with a Test Current........................................................................................ 921
10.7.3 Testing with Operating Current..................................................................................922
10.8 Tests for Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection.......................................................................923
10.8.1 General..................................................................................................................... 923
10.8.2 Pickup Threshold of the Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection.......................................... 925
10.8.3 Time Delay of the Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection................................................... 926
10.9 Circuit-Breaker Test......................................................................................................... 927
10.10 Functional Test of the Trip-Circuit Supervision ................................................................ 930
10.11 Functional Test Protection Interfaces............................................................................... 931
10.11.1 Checking the Communication.................................................................................... 931
10.12 Functional Test of the Inrush-Current Detection .............................................................. 933
11 Technical Data.......................................................................................................................................... 935

11.1 General Device Data........................................................................................................937
11.1.1 Analog Inputs............................................................................................................ 937
11.1.2 Supply Voltage.......................................................................................................... 941
11.1.3 Binary Inputs............................................................................................................. 942
11.1.4 Relay Outputs............................................................................................................ 943
11.1.5 ETH-BD-2FO.............................................................................................................. 945
11.1.6 Design Data...............................................................................................................947
11.2 Date and Time Synchronization....................................................................................... 951
11.3 Busbar Differential Protection..........................................................................................952
11.4 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection 1-Pole/3-Pole................................................................954
11.5 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection 3-Pole.......................................................................... 956
11.6 Inherent Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection ......................................................................958

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Table of Contents
11.7 End-Fault Protection Disconnector Supervision ............................................................... 959

11.8 External Tripping Busbar Section (Direct)......................................................................... 960
11.9 External Tripping Busbar Section (from Bay).................................................................... 961
11.10 Bus Coupler Differential Protection.................................................................................. 962
11.11 Differential Current Supervision.......................................................................................963
11.12 Zero-Crossing Supervision............................................................................................... 964
11.13 Disconnector Supervision................................................................................................ 965
11.14 Circuit-Breaker Supervision..............................................................................................966
11.15 Overcurrent Protection, Phases........................................................................................967
11.16 Overcurrent Protection, Ground...................................................................................... 977
11.16.1 Stage with Definite-Time Characteristic Curve ........................................................... 977
11.17 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases...................................................................... 981
11.18 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground..................................................................... 985
11.19 Voltage Protection.......................................................................................................... 989
11.19.1 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage............................................................. 989
11.19.2 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage .............................................991
11.19.3 Overvoltage Protection with Negative-Sequence Voltage ...........................................991
11.19.4 Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage ....................... 992
11.19.5 Overvoltage Protection with Any Voltage................................................................... 994
11.19.6 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage........................................................... 995
11.19.7 Undervoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage........................................... 996
11.19.8 Undervoltage Protection with Any Voltage ................................................................ 998
11.19.9 Overvoltage Protection with Negative-Sequence Voltage/Positive-Sequence Voltage ..999
11.20 Frequency Protection.................................................................................................... 1000
11.20.1 Overfrequency Protection........................................................................................ 1000
11.20.2 Underfrequency Protection...................................................................................... 1001
11.20.3 Rate of Frequency Change Protection.......................................................................1001
11.21 Voltage-Jump Detection................................................................................................ 1003
11.22 Measuring-Voltage Failure Detection............................................................................. 1004
11.23 Voltage-Transformer Circuit Breaker ............................................................................. 1006
11.24 Voltage-Balance Supervision .........................................................................................1007
11.25 Voltage-Sum Supervision.............................................................................................. 1008
11.26 Voltage Phase-Rotation Supervision .............................................................................. 1009
11.27 Impedance Protection................................................................................................... 1010
11.28 Arc Protection............................................................................................................... 1011
11.29 Inrush-Current Detection...............................................................................................1012
11.30 2nd Harmonic Detection Ground................................................................................... 1014
11.31 Trip-Circuit Supervision................................................................................................. 1016

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Table of Contents
11.32 Analog Channel Supervision via Fast Current Sum .........................................................1017

11.33 Operational Measured Values and Statistical Values....................................................... 1018
11.34 Analog-Units Function Group........................................................................................ 1021
11.35 Temperature Supervision.............................................................................................. 1022
11.36 Protection Interface and Protection Topology................................................................ 1023
11.37 Phasor Measurement Unit............................................................................................. 1025
11.38 Measuring Transducers ................................................................................................ 1026
11.39 Circuit-Breaker Monitoring ........................................................................................... 1027
11.40 CFC...............................................................................................................................1028
A Appendix................................................................................................................................................ 1033
A.1 Order Configurator and Order Options...........................................................................1034
A.2 Ordering Accessories.....................................................................................................1035
A.3 Typographic and Symbol Conventions........................................................................... 1037
A.4 Standard Variants for 7SS85 ......................................................................................... 1040
A.5 Requirements for Phase Current Transformers .............................................................. 1044
A.6 Connection Examples for Current Transformers............................................................. 1049
A.7 Connection Examples of Voltage Transformers for Modular Devices............................... 1050
A.8 Preroutings 7SS85.........................................................................................................1056
Literature................................................................................................................................................ 1057
Glossary.................................................................................................................................................. 1059
Index.......................................................................................................................................................1081

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
1 Introduction
1.1 General 30
1.2 Properties of SIPROTEC 5 31

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Introduction
1.1 General
1.1 General
The digital multifunctional protection and bay controllers of the SIPROTEC 5 device series are equipped with a
powerful microprocessor. As a result, all tasks, from acquiring measurands to entering commands in the
circuit breaker, are processed digitally.
Analog Inputs
The measuring inputs transform the currents and voltages sent by the instrument transformers and adapt
them to the internal processing level of the device. A SIPROTEC 5 device consists of inputs for measuring
current and voltage. The current inputs are intended for the detection of phase currents and ground current.
The ground current can be detected sensitively using a core balance current transformer. The voltage inputs
detect the measuring voltage of device functions requiring current or voltage measured values.
The analog values are digitized in the microprocessor for data processing.
Microprocessor System
All device functions are processed in the microprocessor system.
This includes, for example:
• Filtering and preparation of the measurands
• Constant monitoring of the measurands
• Monitoring of the pickup conditions for the individual protection functions
• Querying of limiting values and time sequences
• Controlling of signals for logic functions
• Controlling of open and close commands
• Recording of indications, fault data, and fault values for fault analysis
• Administration of the operating system and its functions, for example data storage, real-time clock,
communication, interfaces
• External distribution of information
Binary Inputs and Outputs

Using the binary inputs and outputs, the device receives information from the system or from other devices
(such as locking commands). The most important outputs include the commands to the switching devices and
the indications for remote signaling of important events and states.
Front Elements
For devices with an integrated or offset operation panel, LEDs and an LC display on the front provide informa-
tion on the device function and report events, states, and measured values. In conjunction with the LC display,
the integrated keypad enables on-site operation of the device. All device information such as setting parame-
ters, operating and fault indications or measured values can be displayed, and setting parameters changed. In
addition, system equipment can be controlled via the user interface of the device.
Serial Interfaces
The serial interface in the front cover enables communication with a personal computer when using the DIGSI
operating program. As a result, the operation of all device functions is possible. Additional interfaces on the
back are used to realize various communication protocols.
Power Supply
The individual functional units of the device are powered by an internal power supply. Brief interruptions in
the supply voltage, which can occur during short circuits in the system auxiliary voltage supply, are bridged by
capacitor storage (see also the Technical Data).

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Introduction
1.2 Properties of SIPROTEC 5
1.2 Properties of SIPROTEC 5

The SIPROTEC 5devices at the bay level are compact and can be installed directly in medium and high-voltage
switchgear. They are characterized by comprehensive integration of protection and control functions.
General Properties
• Powerful microprocessor
• Fully digital measured-value processing and control, from sampling and digitizing of measurands to
closing and tripping decisions for the circuit breaker
• Complete galvanic and interference-free isolation of the internal processing circuits from the system
measuring, control, and supply circuits through instrument transformers, binary input and output
modules, and DC and AC voltage converters
• Easy operation using an integrated operator and display panel, or using a connected personal computer
with user interface
• Continuous display of measured and metered values
• Storage of fault indications for system incidents (faults in system) with real-time assignment and instan-
taneous values for fault recording
• Continuous monitoring of the measurands as well as the device hardware and software
• Communication with central control and storage devices possible via the device interface
• Battery-buffered, synchronizable clock

The availability of certain functions depends on the SIPROTEC 5 device model and the SIPROTEC 5 device
version.
Modular Concept
The SIPROTEC 5 modular concept ensures the consistency and integrity of all functionalities across the entire
device series. Significant features here include:
• Modular system design in hardware, software, and communication
• Functional integration of various applications, such as protection, control, and fault recorder
• The same expansion and communication modules for all devices in the family
• Innovative terminal technology with easy assembly and interchangeability and the highest possible
degree of safety
• The same functions can be configured individually across the entire family of devices
• Ability to upgrade with innovations possible at all times through libraries
• Open, scalable architecture for IT integration and new functions
• Multi-layered security mechanisms in all links of the security chain
• Self-monitoring routines for reliable localization and indication of device faults
• Automatic logging of access attempts and security-critical operations on the devices and systems
Redundant Communication
SIPROTEC 5devices maintain full communication redundancy:
• Multiple redundant communication interfaces
• Redundant and independent protocols to control centers possible (such as IEC 60870-5-103 and
IEC 61850, either single or redundant)
• Redundant time synchronization (such as IRIG B, SNTP or IEEE 1588).

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
2 Basic Structure of the Function
2.1 Function Embedding in the Device 34

2.2 Adjustment of Application Templates/Functional Scope 41
2.3 Function Control 43
2.4 Text Structure and Reference Number for Settings and Indications 48
2.5 Information Lists 50

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Basic Structure of the Function
2.1 Function Embedding in the Device

General
SIPROTEC 5 devices offer great flexibility in the handling of functions. Functions can be individually loaded
into the device. The necessary integration of functions in the device is illustrated by the following example.
NOTE
i The availability of certain settings and options depends on the device type and the functions available on
the device.
EXAMPLE
Here, a busbar-protection bay is used as an example. The following functions are required for application
(simplified and reduced):
• Circuit breaker
• Current transformer
• Disconnector
Several predefined function packages that are tailored to specific applications exist for each device family. A
predefined functional scope is called an application template. The existing application templates are offered
for selection automatically when you create a new device in DIGSI 5.
The application template Basic application template, 7SS85 busbar protection is available for the 7SS85
device.
EXAMPLE
If you install a device, you have the usually preferred option to use the product code to completely define the
device directly or to configure the device yourself. Select a device from the hardware catalog using the Signifi-
cant features. A basic variant of the hardware is specified using the Significant features. Later, you can also
expand the device with additional parts, one at a time. After selecting additional device characteristics, for
example, the voltage variant, and after selecting the application template Busbar protection basics, you
complete this step.
Then, add the necessary functional scope (see chapter 2.2 Adjustment of Application Templates/Functional
Scope).
Bay
For every feeder, bus coupler, or bus section disconnector of the busbar protection, a bay is used as superordi-
nate instance. In the bays, the function groups, for example, FG Circuit breaker or FG Disconnector, are
combined for this feeder.
Function Groups (FG)

Functions are arranged in function groups. This simplifies the handling of functions. The function groups are
assigned to primary objects, such as circuit breakers.
The function groups bundle functions with regard to the following basic tasks:
• Assignment of functions to current and/or voltage transformers (assignment of functions to the meas-
uring points and thus to the protected object)
• Exchange of information between function groups

When a function is copied into a function group, it automatically works with the measuring points assigned to
the function group. Their output signals are also automatically included in the configured interfaces of the
function group.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
EXAMPLE
The selected application template Basic application template, 7SS85 busbar protection includes the basic
functions:
• Device settings
• Power-system data
• FG Busbars
Then, you can add busbar-specific functions, function groups, and bays.
The following figure shows the embedding of functions via function groups and bays.
[dw_bb_over, 2, en_US]
Figure 2-1 Embedding of Functions via Function Groups and Bays
Depending on the type of device, there are different types of function groups:
• Protection function groups
• Circuit-breaker function groups

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Protection function groups bundle functions that are assigned to a protected object, for example, to the
busbar. Depending on the device type and nature of the protected object, there are different types of protec-
tion function groups (busbar protection, etc.).
Circuit-breaker function groups bundle functions (such as processing of tripping, circuit-breaker failure protec-
tion) assigned to the local switches, that is, circuit breakers and disconnectors.
You can add, copy, or even delete function groups for a specific application. You can also adapt the functional
scope within a function group according to the use case. Detailed information on this can be found in the
DIGSI 5 Online help manual.
Interface Between Function Group and Measuring Point

The function groups receive the measurands of the current and voltage transformers from measuring points.
For this, the function groups are connected to one or more measuring points.
EXAMPLE
As an example, in the previous figure, the currents of the transformer BE1 are assigned to Measuring point
I-3ph 2. The auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker and the disconnector are assigned to the 1st bay.
The user can change the assignment as needed, that is, function groups can be assigned to any available
measuring points of the device.
To check or change the assignment of measuring points to the function groups, double-click Function-group
connections in the DIGSI 5 project tree.
[sc_bbp_fgverb, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-2 Project Tree in DIGSI 5 (Detail)
In the working area, the window for routing the measuring points opens.
[sc_bbp_msfgbb, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-3 Connecting Measuring Points and Function Groups

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
NOTE
i For busbar protection, Siemens recommends making the assignment via the Single-line Editor (see chapter
4, Engineering).
NOTE
i As connection terminals, use protection-class current transformer terminals (type current 4x protection)
exclusively, for example, for the selection from the hardware catalog for the busbar protection.
Interface Between Protection and Circuit-Breaker Function Groups

The protection function group(s) is/are connected to one or several circuit-breaker function groups. This
connection generally determines:
• Which circuit breaker(s) is/are started by the protection functions of the protection FG.
• Starting the Circuit-breaker failure protection function (if available in the Circuit-breaker function
group) through the protection functions of the connected protection function group
NOTE
i The currents and the OFF signals are assigned dynamically for the circuit breakers by the disconnector
image for busbar differential protection, circuit-breaker failure protection, and external tripping.
Besides the general assignment of the protection function group(s) to the circuit-breaker function groups, you
can also configure the interface for specific functionalities in detail.
The user can change this connection, as needed. That is, the protection function groups can be assigned to
the Circuit-breaker function groups as desired.
To check or change the assignment of the protection function groups to the circuit-breaker function groups,
double-click Function group connections in the DIGSI 5 project tree → Name of device (see following
figure).
[sc_fgverb, 1, en_US]
In the working area, the window for general routing of the function groups opens.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[sc_bbp-fgcols, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-5 Connection of Protection Function Group with Circuit-Breaker Function Group
Besides the general assignment of the protection function group(s) to the circuit-breaker function groups, you
can also configure the interface for specific functionalities in detail. Proceed as follows:
• Open the SIPROTEC 5 device folder in the DIGSI 5 project tree.
• Open the function settings folder in the DIGSI 5 project tree.
• Open the appropriate protection function group in the DIGSI 5 project tree, for example, Curr. trans-
former 1.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[sc_bbp-ls_inta, 1, en_US]
• Double-click circuit-breaker interaction (see previous figure).
• The window for detailed configuration of the interface between the protection function group and the
circuit-breaker function group(s) opens in the working area.
• In this view, configure the interface via the context menu.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[sc_bbp-detail, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-7 Configuration of the Interface Between the Protection Function Group and the Circuit-Breaker
Function Group(s) (Detail)
In the detail configuration of the interface, you define:
• Which operate indications of the protection functions go into the generation of the trip command
• Which protection functions start the Circuit-breaker failure protection function
Functions (FN), Tripping Stages/Function Blocks (FB)

Functions can be further subdivided. For example, protection functions often consist of multiple protection
stages (for example, the Overcurrent protection function). Other functions can contain one or more function
blocks.
Each stage, each function block, and each function (without stages/function blocks) can be individually
switched into specific operating modes (for example, switch on/off). This is termed function control and is
explained in chapter 2.3 Function Control.
To adjust the functionality to the specific application, functions, tripping stages, and function blocks can be
added, copied, and deleted.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
2.2 Adjustment of Application Templates/Functional Scope

Application Template
The application template defines the preconfigured functional scope of the device for a specific use case. A
certain number of application templates is predefined for each device type. DIGSI 5 automatically offers the
application templates for selection when a new device is installed. The available application templates with
the respective functional scope are described in more detail in the following text.
The selection of the application template first predefines which function groups and functions are available in
the device (see also 2.1 Function Embedding in the Device ).
You can adjust the functional scope to your specific application.
Adjusting the Functional Scope

Adjust the functional scope based on the selected application template. You can add, copy or delete functions,
tripping stages, function blocks, or complete function groups.
In the DIGSI 5 project tree, this can be done via the following Editors:
• Single-line configuration
• Information routing
• Function settings
Siemens recommends the Single-line configuration Editor to adjust the functional scope.
Complete missing functionalities from the Global DIGSI 5 Library. Then, the default settings of the added func-
tionality are active. You can copy within a device and between devices as well. Settings and routings are also
copied when you copy functionalities.
NOTE
i If you delete a parameterized function group, function, or tripping stage from the device, all settings and
routings will be lost. The function group, function, or tripping stage can be added again, but then the
default settings are active.
In most cases, the adjustment of the functional scope consists of adding and deleting functions, tripping
stages, and function blocks. As previously described, the functions, tripping stages, and function blocks auto-
matically connect themselves to the measuring points assigned to the function group.
You can add function groups or bays. Check these newly added function groups for included (protection) func-
tions and add to these for your specific application. Connect the protection or circuit-breaker function group to
the measuring points (for this, see 2.1 Function Embedding in the Device ). You must connect newly added
protection function groups to a circuit-breaker function group (see 2.1 Function Embedding in the Device ).
Take note of the following:
• Check the routing of binary outputs with respect to fast and normal relays.
• Check the CFC charts for the group-warning indications and group-fault indications.
Functions, tripping stages, function blocks, and function groups can be added up to a certain maximum
number. The maximum number can be found in the respective function and function-group descriptions.
NOTE
i The availability of certain settings and setting options depends on the device type and the functions avail-
able on the device!
Function Points
Function points (FP) and bays are assigned to specific functions, but not to other functions. You can find more
detailed information in the description of application templates in the following chapter.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
The device is supplied with the acquired function-point credit. Functions with function points can be loaded
into the device only within the available function-point credit. The functional scope cannot be loaded into the
device if the required number of points of the functional scope is higher than the function-point credit. You
must either delete functions or upgrade the function-point credit of the device.
In addition to function-point classes (10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 75, 100 to 1400) beginning with firmware version
V09.20, any function-point values in the range from 0 to 5000 are supported as a credit in the device. Thus,
the precise function-point credit required can be loaded into the device by the Function-Point Manager. Alter-
natively, you can order classless devices with 0 points (new option beginning with V09.20) or class-bound
with the required function-point class.
Extending the Function-Point Credit

You can reorder function points if the function-point credit for the device is not enough or if you have ordered
a classless device with 0 points. Proceed as follows:
• Determine the function-point requirement of certain functions, for example, with DIGSI 5 or the
SIPROTEC 5 Configurator.
• Create a signed license file for your device with the SIPROTEC Function-Point Manager at www.siprotec-
function-point-manager.siemens.com or order the license file from your sales partner.
• Once you have ordered the license file using the Function-Point Manager, you can download it from
there directly.
• Once you have ordered the license file from your sales partner, you will receive it by e-mail or to down-
load.
• Use DIGSI 5 to load the signed license file onto your device. The procedure is described in the Online Help
of DIGSI 5.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
2.3 Function Control

Function control is used for:
• Functions that do not contain stages or function blocks
• Stages within functions
• Function blocks within functions
NOTE
i Simplifying functions and function control will be discussed in the following. The description also applies
to tripping stage control and function block control.
Functions can be switched to different operating modes. You use the parameter Mode to define whether you
want a function to run (on) or not (off). In addition, you can temporarily block a function or switch it into test
mode for the purpose of commissioning (parameter Mode = test). Additionally, the state of the stage can be
influenced using the controllable Mod in the IEC 61850 representation. The controllable Mod (_:51 Mode
(controllable) in the DIGSI 5 Information routing) supports the states On, Off, Test, Relay blocked,
and Test/Relay blk..
The function shows the current status – such as an Alarm – via the Health signal.
The following explains the different operating modes and mechanisms and how you set the functions into
these modes. The function control is shown in Figure 2-8. It is standardized for all functions. Therefore, this
control is not discussed further in the individual function descriptions.
[lo_steurg, 2, en_US]
Figure 2-8 General Control of a Function
State Control
You can control the state of a function via the parameter Mode, the controllable Mod and the input Superor-
dinate state.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
You set the specified operating state of the function via the parameter Mode. You can set the function mode
to on, off, and test. The operating principle is described in Table 2-2. You can set the parameter Mode via:
• DIGSI 5
• On-site operation at the device
• Browser-based user interface
• Certain systems control protocols (IEC 61850, IEC 60870-5-103)

You can also set the target operating state of the function using the controllable Mod. You can set the function
mode to On, Off, Test, Relay blocked and Test/Relay blk.. The operating principle is described in
Table 2-2. You can set the controllable Mod via:
• IEC 61850-8-1
• CFC
The superordinate state can have the values On, Relay blocked, Test, and Test/Relay blk..
The state of the function resulting from the parameter Mode, the controllable Mod, and the superordinate
state is shown in the following table. The resulting state of the functions results from the combination of all
sources (parameter Mode, controllable Mod, and superordinate state). As a simplification, the table only
shows the combination of 2 sources.
Table 2-1 Resulting State of the Function
Inputs State of the Function

Source A Source N
On On On
On Off Off
On Test Test1
On Relay blocked Relay blocked
On Test/Relay blk. Test/Relay blk.
Test On Test1
Test Off Off
Test Test Test1
Test Relay blocked Test/Relay blk.
Test Test/Relay blk. Test/Relay blk.
Off On Off
Off Off Off
Off Test Off
Off Relay blocked Off
Off Test/Relay blk. Off
Relay blocked On Relay blocked
Relay blocked Off Off
Relay blocked Test Test/Relay blk.
Relay blocked Relay blocked Relay blocked
Relay blocked Test/Relay blk. Test/Relay blk.
Test/Relay blk. On Test/Relay blk.
Test/Relay blk. Off Off
Test/Relay blk. Test Test/Relay blk.
1 With the parameter (_:151) Oper.bin.outp. under test, you can set whether the relay outputs are to be activated by functions in the
Test state. If this parameter is deactivated (default setting), the Test state of a function is changed to Test/Relay blk..

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Inputs State of the Function

Test/Relay blk. Relay blocked Test/Relay blk.
Test/Relay blk. Test/Relay blk. Test/Relay blk.
NOTE
i The browser-based user interface shows a clear list of the states of all functions, if they differ from the On
state.
The following table shows the possible function states:
Table 2-2 Possible States of a Function
Function State Explanation

On The function is activated and operating as defined. The prerequisite is that the health of the
function is OK.
Relay blocked The function is activated and operating as defined. The prerequisite is that the health of the
function is OK. All issuing of indications of this function to relays is blocked.
Note:
Logics outside this function block, for example, superordinate group indications, are not
affected by the blocking. Issuing these indications to a relay still leads to an activation.
Off The function is turned off. It does not create any information. The health of a disabled func-
tion always has the value OK.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Function State Explanation

Test The function is set to test mode. This state supports the commissioning. All outgoing infor-
mation from the function (indications and, if present, measured values) is provided with a
test bit. This test bit significantly influences the further processing of the information,
depending on the target.
Target of the Informa- Processing

tion
Log The indication is labeled Test in the log.
Contact An indication routed to contact is not triggering the contact.
Light-emitting diode (LED) An indication routed to the LED triggers the LED (normal
processing)
CFC Here, the behavior depends on the state of the CFC chart.
• CFC chart itself is not in test state:

The CFC chart is not triggered by a status change of infor-
mation with a set test bit. The initial state of the informa-
tion (state before test bit was set) is not processed during
execution of the CFC chart.
• CFC chart itself is in test state:
The CFC chart continues to process the information (indica-
tion or measured value) normally. The CFC outgoing infor-
mation is provided with a test bit. The definitions in this
table apply to its continued processing.
A CFC chart can be set to the test state only by switching the
entire device to test mode.
Protocol Indication and measured value are transmitted with set test bit,
provided that the protocol supports this functionality.
If an object is transmitted as a GOOSE message, the test bit is set
spontaneously and the GOOSE message is transmitted immedi-
ately. The receiver of the GOOSE message is automatically noti-
fied of transmitter test mode.
If an object is transmitted via the protection interface, the test bit
is not transmitted. The Test state must also be transmitted as
information for this state to be taken into account in the applica-
tion on the receiver side. You must route the Test signal in the
DIGSI 5 project tree → Device → Communication routing.
The test mode of the differential protection will be dealt with
separately in the application.
Test/Relay blk. The function operates as described under Test. All output indications (indications) of this
function routed to a relay are blocked.
All output indications of the function (indications and, if available, measured values) are
assigned a test bit. This test bit affects the further processing of the information in an impor-
tant way, depending on the target.
Logics outside this function block, for example, superordinate group indications, are not
affected by the blocking. If the state of these functions allows processing indications with a
test bit (target function in the state Test or Test/Relay blk.), the output indications routed to
a relay still lead to an activation of the relays.
Health
Health signals if a selected function can perform its designated functionality. If so, the health is OK. In case the
functionality is only possible in a limited way or not at all, due to state or problems within the device, the
health will signal Warning (limited functionality) or Alarm (no functionality).

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Internal self-monitoring can cause functions to assume the health Alarm (see chapter 8 Supervision Func-
tions). If a function assumes the health state Alarm, it is no longer active (indication not active is gener-
ated).
Only a few functions can signal the health state Warning. The health state Warning results from function-
specific supervision and - where it occurs - it is explained in the function description. If a function assumes the
Warning status, it will remain active, that is, the function can continue to work in a conditional manner and
trip in the case of a protection function.
Not Active
The indication Not active signals that a function is currently not working. The indication Not active is
active in the following cases:
• Function is disabled
• The function is in the health state Alarm
• Function is blocked by an input signal (see Figure 2-8)
• All protection-function steps are disabled via the Enable protection controllable (state = false). The
indication Protection inactive is active.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
2.4 Text Structure and Reference Number for Settings and Indications
Each parameter and each indication has a unique reference number within every SIPROTEC 5 device. The
reference number gives you a clear reference, for example, between an indication entry in the buffer of the
device and the corresponding description in the manual. You can find the reference numbers in this docu-
ment, for example, in the application and setting notes, in the logic diagrams, and in the parameter and infor-
mation lists.
In order to form unique texts and reference numbers, each bay, each function group, function, function block/
stage, and indication or parameter has a text and a number. This means that structured overall texts and
numbers are created.
The structure of the texts and reference numbers follows the already shown in Figure 2-1, hierarchy:
• Bay:Function group:Function:Stage/Function Block:Indication
• Bay:Function group:Function:Stage/Function Block:Parameter

The colon serves as a structure element to separate the hierarchy levels. Depending on the functionality, not
all hierarchy levels are always available. Bay, Function Group and Stage/Function block are optional. Since the
bay, function groups, functions as well as tripping stages/function blocks of the same type can be created
multiple times, a so-called instance number is added to these elements.
EXAMPLE
The busbar protection also includes the bays, which can in turn contain function groups themselves, in
parallel with or superordinate to the function groups.
The text and reference-number structure is shown as an example for the binary input >Acquisition
blocking and the indication Health (see the following figure). The illustration is simplified.
[dw_fg_tr_02, 1, en_US]
The following table shows the texts and numbers of the hierarchy elements concerned:
Name Number of the Instance Number
Type
Bay Bay 50 02
Function group Disconnector 70 1
Function Disconnector 5401 –
Binary input >Acquisition blocking 500 –
Indication Health 53 –
The number of the type is preassigned. The instance numbers result as follows:
• Bay: Bay 02
2nd instance, for the 2nd bay of n bays
• Function group: Disconnector 1

1st instance, for the 1st disconnector
This results in the following texts and numbers (including the instance numbers):
Parameter, indication: Number
Bay 02: Disconnector 1: Disconnector: >Acquisition blocking 5002:701:5401:500
Bay 02: Disconnector 1: Disconnector: Health 5002:701:5401:53

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
The structure is simplified accordingly for parameters and indications with fewer hierarchy levels.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
2.5 Information Lists
2.5 Information Lists

For the function groups, functions, and function blocks, settings and miscellaneous signals are defined that
are shown in the settings and information lists.
The information lists merge the signals. The data type of the information may differ. Possible data types are
ENS, ACD, ACT, SPS and MV.
One type is assigned to the individual data types. The following table shows the possible types:
Type Meaning
I Input – input signal
O Output – output signal
C Controllable – control signal
EXAMPLE:
The following table shows the types for some data types as examples:
Data Type Type
ENS O
ACD O
ACT O
SPS I or O
SPC C
MV O
For further information, refer to 3.8.2 Basic Data Types.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
3 System Functions
3.1 Indications 52
3.2 Measured-Value Acquisition 76
3.3 Sampling-Frequency Tracking and Frequency Tracking Groups 78
3.4 Processing Quality Attributes 87
3.5 Fault Recording 103
3.6 Protection Communication 111
3.7 Date and Time Synchronization 188
3.8 User-Defined Objects 196
3.9 Other Functions 203
3.10 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Protection Functions 214
3.11 Device Settings 218
3.12 Using a SIPROTEC 5 Device as a Client or Merging Unit 226
3.13 Power Quality Basics 229

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
3.1 Indications
3.1 Indications
3.1.1 General
During operation, indications deliver information about operational states. These include:
• Measured data
• Device supervisions
• Device functions
• Function procedures during testing and commissioning of the device

In addition, indications give an overview of important fault events after a failure in the system. All indications
are furnished with a time stamp at the time of their occurrence.
Indications are saved in logs inside the device and are available for later analyses. The following number of
indications are saved at least in the respective buffer (depending on the scope of the indications):
• Operational log 2000 indications
• Fault log 1000 indications
• Switching-device log 2000 indications
• User-defined log 200 indications

If the maximum capacity of the user-defined log or of the operational log is exhausted, the newest entries
overwrite the oldest entries. If the maximum capacity of the fault log or of the ground-fault log is reached, the
number of the last fault is output via the signal Fault recording buffer is full. You can route this signal in the
information routing. If indications in the information routing of DIGSI 5 are routed to a log, then they are also
saved. During a supply-voltage failure, recorded data are securely held by means of battery buffering or
storage in the flash memory. You can read and analyze the log from the device with DIGSI 5. The device
display and navigation using keys allow you to read and analyze the logs on site.
Indications can be output spontaneously via the communication interfaces of the device and through external
request via general interrogation. In DIGSI 5, indications can be tracked spontaneously duringonline mode in a
special indication window. Indications can be made accessible to higher-level control systems through
mapping on various communication protocols.
NOTE
i All indications are assigned to certain device functions. The text of each indication contains the corre-
sponding function designation. You can find explanations of the meaning of indications in the corre-
sponding device functions. However, you can also define indications yourself and group them into your
own function blocks. These can be set by binary inputs or CFC logic.
Reading Indications
To read the indications of your SIPROTEC 5 device you can use the on-site operation panel of the device or a PC
on which you have installed DIGSI 5. The subsequent section describes the general procedure.
3.1.2 Reading Indications on the On-Site Operation Panel
Procedure
The menus of the logs begin with a header and 2 numbers at the top right corner of the display. The number
after the slash signifies the number of indications that are available. The number before the slash indicates
how many indications have just been selected or shown. The end of the indication list is closed with the entry
***END***.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
3.1 Indications
[sc_oprlog, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-1 On-Site Display of an Indication List (Example: Operational Indications)
Menu Path Log

Main menu → Indications → Operational log
Fault log
Switch. device log
Setting-history log
User log 1
User log 2
Com supervision log
Main Menu → Test & Diagnosis → Log → Device diagnosis
Security log
Communication log
To reach the desired log from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation panel.
² Navigate inside the log using the navigation keys (top/bottom). You will find the most current indication
at the top of the list. The selected indication is shown with a dark background.
Which indications can be shown in the selected log depends on the assignments in the DIGSI 5 information
routing matrix or is predefined. Every indication contains date, time, and its state as additional information.
You will find information about this in chapter 3.1.5.1 General.
In some logs, you are given the option of deleting the entire indication list by softkey in the footer of the
display. To learn more about this, read chapter 3.1.6 Saving and Deleting the Logs.
NOTE
i No password entry is necessary to read indications from the device.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
3.1 Indications
3.1.3 Reading Indications from the PC with DIGSI 5
Procedure
Menu Path (Project) Log

Project → Device → Process data → Log → Operational log
Fault log
Switch. device log
Setting-history log
User log 1
User log 2
Com supervision log
Online access → Device → Device information → Device-diagnosis log
Logs tab → Security indications
Online access → Device → Test suite → Communica- Communication log
tion module → Hardware2
To read the indications with DIGSI 5 your PC must be connected via the USB user interface of the on-site
operation panel or via an Ethernet interface of the device. You can establish a direct connection to your PC
via the Ethernet interfaces. It is also possible to access all connected SIPROTEC 5 devices via a data network
from your DIGSI 5 PC.
² You reach the desired logs of the SIPROTEC 5 device using the project-tree window. If you have not
created the device within a project, you can also do this via the Online access menu item.
After selecting the desired log, you are shown the last state of the log loaded from the device. To update, it is
necessary to synchronize with the log in the device.
² Synchronize the log. For this purpose, click the appropriate button in the headline of the log (see the
ground-fault indications example in Figure 3-2 a)).
[sc_grflmd, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-2 DIGSI 5 Display of an Indication List (Example of Ground-Fault Log)
You will find additional information about deleting and saving logs in chapter 3.1.6 Saving and Deleting the
Logs.
2 There may potentially be several communication modules to select from

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
3.1 Indications
Which indications can be shown in the selected log depends on the assignments in the DIGSI 5 information
routing matrix or is predefined. You will find information about this in chapter 3.1.5.1 General.
Setting Relative Time Reference

² Reference the display of log entries, if needed, to the real time of a specific entry. In this way, you deter-
mine a relative time for all other indications. The real-time stamps of events remain unaffected.
3.1.4 Displaying Indications
Displayed indications are supplemented in DIGSI 5 and on the on-site operation panel with the following infor-
mation:
Table 3-1 Overview of Additional Information
Indications in DIGSI 5 Information Device Display Information

Log for operational indications and Time stamp (date and time), Time stamp (date and time),
log for user-defined and switching- Relative time, Function structure,
device indications Entry number, Name,
Function structure, Value
Name,
Value,
Quality,
Cause,
Number
Log for fault indications Time stamp (date and time), Time stamp (date and time),
Relative time, Fault number,
Fault number, Value
Entry number,
Function structure,
Name,
Value,
Quality,
Cause,
Number
Log for parameter changes Time stamp (date and time), Time stamp (date and time),
Relative time, Function structure,
Entry number, Name,
Name,
Value,
Quality,
Cause,
Number
Spontaneous indication window Time stamp (date and time), Time stamp (date and time),
(DIGSI 5) Relative time, Fault number,
Indication, Value
Value,
Quality,
Additional Information

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
3.1 Indications
Indications in DIGSI 5 Information Device Display Information

Log for safety indications3 Time stamp (date and time), Time stamp (date and time),
Indication number, Indication
Indication
Log for device-diagnostic indica- Time stamp (date and time), Time stamp (date and time),
tions3 Indication number, Indication
Indication
Log for communication indications3 Time stamp (date and time), Time stamp (date and time),
Indication number, Indication
Indication
Log for communication supervision Time stamp (date and time), Time stamp (date and time),
(GOOSE) Relative time, Function structure,
Entry number, Name,
Name,
Value,
Quality,
Cause,
Number
Overview of Displayed Quality Attributes

If values are shown on the device display or in DIGSI, the following quality attributes are different for meas-
ured values and metered values.
Table 3-2 Measured Values
IEC 61850 Device Display/ Description

Detail Quality Validity DIGSI
Good Invalid Questionable
– X Value The measured value is valid.
Failure X Fault The device is defective. Contact
Support.
Inaccurate X --- The measured value was not
calculated (for example, the
angle between current and
voltage if 1 of the 2 variables is
missing).
Bad Reference X ≈ Value The measured value can be inac-
curate (for example, outside the
frequency-tracking range).
Out of Range X > Value The measured value exceeds the
measuring range.
3 Only online access

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
3.1 Indications
Table 3-3 Metered Values
IEC 61850 Device Display/ Description

Validity DIGSI
Good Invalid Questionable
X Value The metered value is invalid.
X --- The metered value was not calcu-
lated.
X ≈ Value The metered value has no refer-
ence.
Indication Columns
The following table shows the meaning of the individual columns in the log:
Indication Column Meaning
Time stamp Time stamp of the indication in device time using the local time
zone of the device or the query time for the motor log
Relative time Relative time to a reference entry
Error number Number of the error that occurred in the device. This number incre-
ments continuously.
Entry number Entry identification of buffer entries. This identification displays the
sequence of buffer entries.
Indication number Number of the indication that occurred in the device. This number
increments continuously and is necessary for an analysis by
Siemens.
Indication Indication text
Function structure Path of the signal with the signal name
Name Signal name
Value Current state of the command. Also pay attention to the value
quality to check whether the value is up to date.
Quality The quality of the value shows the source of the value and whether
the value is up to date.
Cause Additional information such as the cause and validity
Number DIGSI address of the signal
3.1.5 Logs
3.1.5.1 General
Indications are saved in logs inside the device and are available for later analyses. Different logs allow catego-
rization of indication logging based on operating states (for example, operational and fault logs) and based on
fields of application.
Table 3-4 Log Overview
Log Logging
Operational log Operational indications
Fault log Fault indications
Switching-device log Switching operation and circuit-breaker statistics
Setting-history log Setting changes
User-defined log User-defined indication scope
Security log Access with safety relevance
Device-diagnosis log Error of the device (software, hardware) and the connection circuits

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
3.1 Indications
Log Logging
Communication log Status of communication interfaces
Communication-supervision log Communication supervision (GOOSE)
Log Management
Logs have a ring structure and are automatically managed. If the maximum capacity of a log is exhausted, the
oldest entries disappear before the newest entries. If the maximum capacity of the fault log is reached, the
number of the last fault is output via the signal Fault recording buffer is full. You can route this signal in the
information routing. If indications in the information routing of DIGSI 5 are routed to a log, then they are also
saved. During a supply-voltage failure, recorded data are securely held by means of battery buffering or
storage in the flash memory. You can read and analyze the log from the device with DIGSI 5. The device
display and the navigation allow you to read and evaluate the logs on site using keys.
Configurability of Logs
The indication capacity to be recorded in configurable logs (for example, ground-fault log) is laid down in
columns of the information routing (matrix) of DIGSI 5 specifically defined for this purpose.
Procedure
To reach the information routing of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window. Access is only
through the project:
• Open the information routing.

Project → Device → Information routing
• Select the appropriate routing column.

Destination → Logs → Column Fault log (G)
The routing of the selected indication is done via right click.
• Select one of the options in the list box shown:

– Routed (X)
– Unrouted
[sc_infpuf, 2, en_US]
Figure 3-3 Indication Configuration in DIGSI 5 (Example: Ground-Fault Log, Column G)
For non-configurable logs (for example, setting-history logs) scope and type of logged indications are
described separately (see following chapter about logs).

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
3.1 Indications
3.1.5.2 Operational Log

Operational indications are information that the device generates during operation. This includes information
about:
• State of device functions
• Measured data
Exceeding or dropping below limiting values is output as an operational indication. Short circuits in the
network are indicated as an operational indication Fault with sequential fault number. For detailed informa-
tion about the recording of system incidents, please refer to the description of the fault log (chapter
3.1.5.3 Fault Log). Up to 2000 indications can be stored in the log.
Reading from the PC with DIGSI 5
• To reach the operational log of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window.
Project → Device → Process Data → Log → Operational log
• The status of the operational log last loaded from the device is shown to you. To update (synchronization
with the device), click the button Read log entries in the headline of the indication list (Figure 3-4 a)).
[sc_betrmd, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-4 Reading the Operational Log with DIGSI 5
Reading on the Device via the On-Site Operation Panel
• To reach the operational log via the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation panel.
Main Menu → Indications → Operational log

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
3.1 Indications
• You can navigate within the displayed indication list using the navigation keys (up/down) on the on-site
operation panel.
• Using the Info softkey, you can retrieve auxiliary information on the entry depending on the context.
[sc_operlog1, 2, en_US]
Figure 3-5 On-Site Display of an Indication List (Example: Operational Indications)
Deletability
The operational log of your SIPROTEC 5 device can be deleted. This is done usually after testing or commis-
sioning the device. To know more about this, read chapter 3.1.6 Saving and Deleting the Logs.
Configurability
The indication scope of the operational log is configured in a specifically defined column of the information
routing (matrix) of DIGSI 5:
Target → Log → Operational log column
Selected application templates and functions from the library bring with them a predefined set of operational
indications which you can adjust individually at any time.
3.1.5.3 Fault Log

Fault indications are events which arise during a fault. They are logged in the fault log with real-time stamp
and relative-time stamp (reference point: fault occurrence) . Faults are numbered consecutively in rising order.
With fault recording engaged, a corresponding fault record with the same number exists for every fault logged
in the fault log. A maximum of 128 fault logs can be stored. A maximum of 1000 indications can be recorded
in each fault log.
Fault Definition
In general, a fault is started by the raising pickup of a protection function and ends with the cleared pickup
after the trip command.
When using an automatic reclosing function, the complete reclosing cycle (successful or unsuccessful) is pref-
erably integrated into the fault. If evolving faults appear within reclosing cycles, the entire clearing process is
logged under one fault number even in multiple pickup cycles. Without automatic reclosing function every
pickup is also recorded as its own fault.
User-defined configuration of a fault is also possible.
NOTE
i The definition of the fault is done through settings of the fault recording (see Device manual). Events are
logged in the fault log even when fault recording is switched off.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
3.1 Indications
Apart from the recording of fault indications in the fault log, spontaneous display of fault indications of the
last fault on the device display is also done. You will find details about this in chapter 3.1.8 Spontaneous Fault
Display on the On-Site Operation Panel.
Deletability
The fault log of your SIPROTEC 5 device can be deleted. For more details about this, refer to chapter
3.1.6 Saving and Deleting the Logs.
Reading on the Device through the On-Site Operation Panel
• To reach the fault log from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation panel.
Main Menu → Indications → Fault logs
operation panel.
[sc_faullg, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-6 Reading the Fault Log on the On-Site Operation Panel of the Device
Configurability
The indication scope of the fault log is configured in a specifically defined column of the information routing
(matrix) of DIGSI 5:
Target → Log → Fault log column
Selected application templates and functions from the library already bring a predefined set of operational
indications with them which you can adjust individually at any time.
The operational measured values and the measured values of the fundamental components and symmetrical
components (see Device Manual) are calculated every 9 cycles (at 50 Hz, this is every 180 ms). However, this
can mean that the data are not synchronized with the sampled values of the analog channels. The recording
of these measured values can be used to analyze the slowly changing processes.
3.1.5.4 Setting-History Log

All individual setting changes and the downloaded files of entire parameter sets are recorded in the log for
setting changes. This enables you to determine setting changes made are associated with events logged (for
example faults). On the other hand, it is possible to obtain verification with fault analyses, for example, that
the current status of all settings truly corresponds to their status at the time of the fault. Up to 200 indications
can be stored in the setting-history log.
• To reach the log for setting changes of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window.
Project → Device → Process data → Log → Setting changes
The status of the setting-history log last loaded from the device is shown to you.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
3.1 Indications
• To update (synchronization with the device), click the Read log entries button in the headline of the
indication list (Figure 3-7).
[sc_paramd, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-7 Reading the Setting-History Log with DIGSI 5
• To reach the setting-history log from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation
panel.
Main menu → Indications → Setting changes
operation panel.
[sc_hislog, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-8 Reading the Setting-History Log on the On-Site Operation Panel of the Device
Indication Categories in the Setting-History Log

For this log, there is selected information that is stored in case of successful as well as unsuccessful setting
changes. The following list gives you an overview of this information.
Table 3-5 Overview of Indication Types
Displayed Information Explanation

Selection edit+ Selection of settings group to be edited
Cancelation+ Cancelling of all changes successful
SG activation+ SG activation via command successful
SG activation- SG activation via command failed
Set+ Parameter value was changed
Confirmation+ Confirmation of change successful

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
3.1 Indications

Confirmation- Confirmation of change failed
DCF uploaded DCF loaded into device
SG 1 Settings group 1
NOTE
i • The logged indications are preconfigured and cannot be changed!
• The log, which is organized as a ring buffer, cannot be deleted by the user!
• If you want to archive security-relevant information of the device without loss of information, you
must regularly read this log.
• You cannot route additional indication objects to the setting-history log.
3.1.5.5 User Log

With the user-defined log (up to 2), you have the possibility of individual indication logging parallel to the
operational log. This is helpful, for example, in special monitoring tasks but also in the classification into
different areas of responsibility of the logs. Up to 200 indications can be stored in the user-defined log.
• To reach the user-defined log of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window.
Project → Device → Process Data → Log → User log 1/2
The status of the user-defined log last loaded from the device is shown to you.
• To update (synchronization with the device), click the Read log entries button in the headline of the
indication list (Figure 3-9 a)).
[sc_application_md, 2, en_US]
Figure 3-9 Reading the User-Defined Log with DIGSI 5
• To reach user-specific logs from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation panel.
Main Menu → Indications → User-defined log 1/2

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
3.1 Indications
operation panel.
• Using the Info softkey, you can retrieve auxiliary information on the entry depending on the context.
[sc_userrlog1, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-10 Reading the User-Defined Log on the On-Site Operation Panel of the Device
Deletability
The user-defined log of your SIPROTEC 5 device can be deleted. You will find details about this in chapter
Configuration of a User-Defined Log

The indication capacity of a created user-defined log can be configured freely in the associated column of the
information routing (matrix) of DIGSI 5:
Target → Log → U1 or U2

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
3.1 Indications
[sc_diu1u2, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-11 Indication Configuration in DIGSI 5 (Example: User-Defined Log U1/2)
3.1.5.6 Security Log

Access to areas of the device with restricted access rights is recorded in the security log. Unsuccessful and
unauthorized access attempts are also recorded. Up to 2048 indications can be stored in the security log.
• To reach the security log of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window. The device must be in
Online access.
Project → Online access → Device → Device Information → Logs tab → Security logs
The state of the security log last loaded from the device is displayed.
• Before this, refresh the contents by clicking the update arrows in the headline.
[sc_secmld, 2, en_US]
Figure 3-12 Reading the Security Indications with DIGSI 5

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
3.1 Indications
• To reach the security log from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation panel.
Main menu → Test & Diagnosis → Logs → Security log
• You can navigate on the on-site operation panel using the navigation keys (top/bottom) inside the
displayed indication list.
[sc_seclog, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-13 Reading the Security Log on the On-Site Operation Panel of the Device
NOTE
i • The logged indications are preconfigured and cannot be changed!
• This log, which is organized as a ring buffer, cannot be deleted by the user!
• If you want to archive security-relevant information of the device without loss of information, you
must regularly read this log.
3.1.5.7 Device-Diagnosis Log

Concrete take-action instructions are logged and displayed in the device-diagnosis log for the following items:
• Required maintenance (for example, battery supervision)
• Identified hardware defects
• Compatibility problems
Up to 500 indications can be stored in the device-diagnosis log. In normal operation of the device, it is suffi-
cient for diagnostic purposes to follow the entries of the operational log. This specific significance is assumed
by the device-diagnosis log when the device is no longer ready for operation due to hardware defect or
compatibility problems and the fallback system is active.
Reading from the PC with DIGSI 5 in Normal Operation
• To reach the device-diagnosis log of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window.
Project → Online access → Device → Device information → Logs tab → Device-diagnosis log
The status of the device-diagnosis log last loaded from the device is shown to you.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
3.1 Indications
[sc_devdia, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-14 Reading the Device-Diagnosis Log with DIGSI 5
Reading on the Device through the On-Site Operation Panel in Normal Operation
• To reach the diagnosis log from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation panel.
Main Menu → Test & Diagnosis → Logs → Device diagnosis
• You can navigate on the on-site operation panel using the navigation keys (top/bottom) inside the
displayed indication list.
[sc_devdia_01, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-15 Reading the Device-Diagnosis Log on the On-Site Operation Panel of the Device
NOTE
i • The device-diagnosis log cannot be deleted!
• The logged indications are preconfigured and cannot be changed!
3.1.5.8 Communication Log

The logging of the respective status such as ensuing faults, test and diagnosis operation, and communication
capacity utilizations is done for all hardware-based configured communication interfaces. Up to 500 indica-
tions can be stored in the communication log. Logging occurs separately for each communication port of the
configured communication modules.
• Use the project-tree window to reach the communication logs of your SIPROTEC 5 device.
Online access → Device → Test suite → Communication module
• Then select:
J:Onboard Ethernet → Communication log
The communication log is shown to you in the state last loaded from the device.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
3.1 Indications
[sc_compuf, 2, en_US]
Figure 3-16 Reading the Communication Log with DIGSI 5
• To reach the communication log from the main menu, use the navigation keys on the on-site operation
panel.
Main Menu → Test & Diagnosis → Logs → Communication logs
operation panel.
[sc_commlg, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-17 Reading the Communication Log on the On-Site Operation Panel of the Device
Deletability
The communication logs of your SIPROTEC 5 device can be deleted. Read details about this in chapter

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
3.1 Indications
Configurability
The communication logs are not freely configurable. The entries are preconfigured.
3.1.5.9 Communication-Supervision Log

The communication-supervision log is used to log communication events.
The following events are currently logged:
• Status for each GOOSE subscription (if configured)

A log is kept of whether the GOOSE subscription has received valid messages or not.
• Aggregated status for all GOOSE subscriptions

The status is TRUE if at least one GOOSE subscription does not receive any valid message.
• Subscriber in simulation mode

GOOSE messages are processed with a simulation flag. The status is TRUE if at least one GOOSE subscrip-
tion processes simulated messages.
• To reach the communication-supervision log of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window.
Project → Device → Process data → Logs → Com supervision log
The status of the communication-supervision log last loaded from the device is shown.
• To update (synchronization with the device), click the button Read log entries in the headline of the
indication list.
[sc_comsuperv, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-18 Reading the Communication-Supervision Log with DIGSI 5
• To reach the communication-supervision log from the main menu, use the navigation keys on the on-site
operation panel.
Main menu → Logs → Com supervision log
operation panel.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
3.1 Indications
[sc_comsupervlg, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-19 Reading the Communication-Supervision Log on the On-Site Operation Panel of the Device
Deletability
The communication-supervision log of your SIPROTEC 5 device can be deleted. Read details about this in
chapter 3.1.6 Saving and Deleting the Logs.
Configurability
The communication-supervision log cannot be freely configured. The entries are preconfigured.
3.1.6 Saving and Deleting the Logs
Deleting the logs of the device in the operating state is unnecessary. If storage capacity is no longer sufficient
for new indications, the oldest indications are automatically overwritten with new incoming events. In order
for the memory to contain information about the new faults in the future, for example, after a revision of the
system, a deletion of the log makes sense. Resetting the logs is done separately for the various logs.
NOTE
i Before you delete the content of a log on your SIPROTEC 5 device, save the log with DIGSI 5 on the hard
disk drive of your PC.
NOTE
i Not all logs of your SIPROTEC 5 device can be deleted. These limitations apply especially to logs with rele-
vance for security and after-sales (security log, device-diagnosis log, setting-history log).
NOTE
i Upon deletion of the fault log, the associated fault records are also deleted. In addition, the meters for fault
number and fault-record number are reset to 0. In contrast, if you delete fault records, the content of the
fault log, including the allocated fault numbers, remains.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
3.1 Indications
NOTE
i If the device executes an initial start, for example after an update of the device software, the following logs
are automatically deleted:
• Operational log
• Fault log
• Switching-device log
• Setting-history log
• User-defined log
• Communication-supervision log
Back up the deletable logs using DIGSI 5.
NOTE
i If a ground fault is currently active, the ground-fault log cannot be deleted.
Deleting Logs on the On-Site Operation Panel
• To reach the selected log from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation panel
(example operational log):
Main menu → Logs → Operational log
[sc_oprlog, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-20 Deleting the Operational Log on the On-Site Operation Panel
operation panel.
• The option to delete the entire log is offered to you in the footer of the display at the bottom left. Use the
softkeys below under the display to activate the command prompts. Confirm the request to Delete.
• After being requested, enter the password and confirm with Enter.
• After being requested, confirm the Deletion of all entries with Ok.
Deleting Logs from the PC with DIGSI 5
• To reach the selected log of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window (for example opera-
tional log).
Project → Device → Process data → Logs → Operational log

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
3.1 Indications
3.1.7 Spontaneous Indication Display in DIGSI 5
With DIGSI 5 you have the possibility of displaying all currently transmitted indications of the selected device
in a special indication window.
Procedure
• Call up the spontaneous indications of your selected device in the navigation window under Online
access.
• Click Indications in the path:

Online access → Interface → Device → Indications
• The raising indications appear immediately without you having to wait for a cyclical update or initiate the
manual update.
[sc_spnmld, 2, en_US]
Figure 3-21 Displaying Spontaneous Device Indications in DIGSI 5
3.1.8 Spontaneous Fault Display on the On-Site Operation Panel
After a fault, the most important data of the last fault can be displayed automatically on the device display
without further operational measures. In SIPROTEC 5 devices, protected objects and even circuit breakers can
be freely created and configured depending on the application (even several instances). In DIGSI 5, several
spontaneous fault displays can be configured, depending on the application, with each individual one being
assigned a particular circuit breaker. These displays remain stored in the device until they are manually
confirmed or released by LED reset.
Configuration of a Spontaneous Fault Display with DIGSI 5
• To reach the Fault-display configuration of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window.
Project → Device → Display pages → Fault-display configuration
• In the main window, all configured circuit breakers are displayed. A list of a maximum of 6 configurable
display lines is offered for each circuit breaker. The activation of a spontaneous fault display occurs for
each circuit breaker by selection via checkmark in the column Display.
• With the parameter (_:139) Fault-display (under Device → Parameter → Device settings) you
determine whether spontaneous fault displays should be shown for each pickup or only pickups with the
trip command.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
3.1 Indications
[sc_konstf, 2, en_US]
Figure 3-22 Configuration of the Spontaneous Fault Display on the Device
For every display line the following display options can be selected:
Table 3-6 Overview of Display Options

Pickup indication Display of the first function stage picked up in a fault, as needed with auxiliary
information (phases, ground, direction)
PU time Display of the entire pickup duration of the fault
Operate indication Display of the first function stage triggered in a fault, as needed with auxiliary
information (phases)
Trip time Display of the operate time related to the beginning of the fault (pickup start)
Fault distance Display of the measured fault-location distance
Operate result indication Display of the control or switching device triggered in a fault, with auxiliary
information (phases) where necessary
Acknowledgment of the Spontaneous Fault Display on the Device

After faults, the last occurred fault is always displayed to you. In cases where more than one circuit breaker is
configured, several stored fault displays can be present after faults, with the latest being displayed. These
displays remain stored in the device until manual acknowledgment or release by LED reset.
[sc_stfanz, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-23 Spontaneous Fault Display on the Device
Method 1: Manual acknowledgment
• Press the softkey button Quit in the base bar of the display. The display is irretrievably closed. Repeat this
step until no further spontaneous fault displays appear.
• After completion of all confirmations the last display view is showed before the faults.
Method 2: Acknowledgment via LED reset
• An LED reset (device) causes the reset of all stored LEDs and binary output contacts of the device and also
to the confirmation of all fault displays stored in the display.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
3.1 Indications
You can find more details on the topic of LED reset in chapter 3.1.9 Stored Indications in the SIPROTEC 5
Device
3.1.9 Stored Indications in the SIPROTEC 5 Device
In your SIPROTEC 5 device, you can also configure indications as stored. This type of configuration can be
used for LEDs as well as for output contacts. The configured output (LED or contact) is activated until it is
acknowledged. Acknowledgment occurs via:
• On-site operation panel
• DIGSI 5
• Binary input
• Protocol of substation automation technology
Configuration of Stored Indications with DIGSI 5

In the Information Routing of each device set up in DIGSI 5, you can route binary signals, among others, to
LEDs and output contacts.
• To do this, proceed in the project tree to:

Project → Device → Information routing
• Right-click the routing field of your binary indication in the desired LED or binary output column in the
routing range of the targets.
You are offered the following options:
Table 3-7 Overview of Routing Options
Routing Options LEDs BOs BIs Description

H (active) X The signal is routed as active with voltage.
L (active) X The signal is routed as active without voltage.
V (unlatched) X X The signal is routed as unlatched. Activation and reset of
the output (LED, BO) occurs automatically via the binary-
signal value.
G (latched) X X The binary signal is latched when the output (LED) is acti-
vated. To reset, a targeted confirmation must occur.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
3.1 Indications
Routing Options LEDs BOs BIs Description

NT (conditioned latching) X Fault indications are stored during control of the output
(LED) as a function of the parameter (_:91:139)
Fault-display. In the event of a new fault, the previ-
ously stored states are reset.
• If the fault gets terminated via a trip command, the

status of an indication remains as latched with the
setting option with trip.
This occurs separately for the following tripping cases:
– Trippings caused by busbar protection (busbar
differential protection, busbar tripping following
a circuit-breaker failure protection trip in the bay
or busbar tripping due to external tripping)
– Trippings caused by functions within the corre-
sponding bay (for example, end-fault protection,
circuit-breaker failure protection trip repeat or
overcurrent protection)
• With the setting option with pickup, the current
indication image is saved using the same rules as with
the setting with trip but together with the pickup
of the protection function.
TL (stored only with tripping) X Routing option TL (tripping stored) is only possible for the
switching object circuit breaker.
The output is saved with protection tripping. The contact
remains activated until acknowledged.
Control commands are not affected. A control command is
pending above the parameterized command period until
feedback has been successfully received.
Note:
You can realize the functionality of the Lockout (ANSI 86)
by storing the output relay with the routing option TL.
3.1.10 Resetting Stored Indications of the Function Group
You can configure indications of individual functions as "stored" in a function group. This type of configuration
can be used for LEDs as well as for output contacts. The configured output (LED or contact) is activated until it
is acknowledged.
The protection and the circuit-breaker function groups contain the block Reset LED FG. The block
Reset LED FG is visible only in the Information routing under the corresponding function group in DIGSI 5.
You use the binary input signal >Reset LED to reset the stored LEDs in the respective function group. The
configured outputs (contacts) are not reset.
3.1.11 Test Mode and Influence of Indications on Substation Automation Technology
If the test mode of the device or of individual functions is switched on, the SIPROTEC 5 device marks indica-
tions sent to substation automation technology station control system with an additional test bit. This test bit
makes it possible to determine that an indication was set during a test. Necessary reactions in normal opera-
tion on the basis of an indication can thus be suppressed.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
3.2 Measured-Value Acquisition

Basic Principle
SIPROTEC 5 devices are equipped with a powerful measured-value acquisition function. In addition to a high
sampling frequency, they have a high measurand resolution. This ensures a high degree of measuring accu-
racy across a wide dynamic range. The 24-bit sigma/delta analog-digital converter represents the core of
measured-value acquisition. In addition, the oversampling function supports the high measurand resolution.
Depending on the requirements of the individual method of measurement, the sampling frequency is reduced
(Downsampling).
In digital systems, deviations from the rated frequency lead to additional errors. In order to avoid this, 2 algo-
rithm-dependent processes are used in all SIPROTEC 5 devices:
• Sampling-frequency tracking:
The analog input channels are scanned for valid signals in cycles. The current power frequency is deter-
mined and the required sampling frequency is defined by using a resampling algorithm. The tracking is
effective in the frequency range between 10 Hz and 90 Hz.
• Fixed sampling frequency – correction of the filter coefficients:

This method operates in a limited frequency range (frated +/- 5 Hz). The power frequency is determined
and, depending on the degree of the frequency deviation, the filter coefficients are corrected.
The following figure shows the basics of dealing with sampled values (SAV) in the measured-value acquisition
chain. It shows to whom the various sampling frequencies are made available. In order to limit the bandwidth
of the input signals, a low-pass filter (anti-aliasing filter to maintain the sampling theorem) is installed down-
stream. After sampling, the current input channels are adjusted. Meaning that the magnitude, phase, and the
transformer time constant are corrected. The compensation is designed to ensure that the current transformer
terminal blocks can be exchanged randomly between the devices.
[dw_mesess, 2, en_US]
Figure 3-24 Measured-Value Acquisition Chain
fa Sampling frequency
SMV Sampled measured value
CMV Conventional measured value
LPIT Low-power instrument transformer
The internal sampling frequency of the SIPROTEC 5 devices is fixed at 16 kHz (sampling rate: 320 samplings
per 50-Hz cycle). All current and voltage inputs are sampled. If the magnitude, phase, and transformer time
constant are corrected, the sampling frequency is reduced to 8 kHz (160 samplings per 50-Hz cycle). This is

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
the basic sampling frequency to which various processes, such as fault recording, RMS measured values, refer.
For the RMS measurement, the measured-value window is adjusted on the basis of the power frequency. For
numerous measurement and protection applications 20 samplings per cycle are sufficient (if frated = 50 Hz:
sampling every 1 ms). This sampling rate is an adequate compromise between accuracy and the parallel
processing of the functions (multi-functionality).
The 20 samplings per cycle will be made available to the algorithms processed in the function groups in 2
variants:
• Fixed (not resampled)
• Resampled (frequency range from 10 Hz to 90 Hz)

Depending on the algorithms (see function descriptions), the respective data flow is considered. A higher
sampling frequency is used for selected methods of measurement.
In the event of a disturbance in the measured-value preprocessing or at the analog-digital converter, the
measured values are marked as invalid for the protection. Once the disturbance is canceled, the measured
values become valid again immediately.
NOTE
i The measuring points for current and voltage are in the Power-system data (starting in 5.10 Power-System
Data). Each measuring point has its own parameters.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
3.3 Sampling-Frequency Tracking and Frequency Tracking Groups
3.3.1 Overview
Starting from platform version V07.80, you can merge measuring points into Frequency tracking groups in
SIPROTEC 5 devices. The device operates with a maximum of 6 Frequency tracking groups.
The chapter 3.3.2 Sampling-Frequency Tracking provides the necessary hints on the operating principle of
sampling-frequency tracking and its application.
The chapter 3.3.3 Frequency Tracking Groups describes the principle and application of frequency tracking
groups.
3.3.2 Sampling-Frequency Tracking
SIPROTEC 5 devices are equipped with powerful sampling-frequency tracking as explained in the chapter
3.2 Measured-Value Acquisition . This ensures high measuring accuracy over a wide frequency operating
range (10 Hz to 90 Hz).
To determine the actual sampling frequency, the voltage and current measuring points are checked for valid
input signals, the actual power frequency is determined and the tracking frequency (sampling
frequency = 20 ⋅ tracking frequency) is adapted. The method is implemented in such a way that the number of
samplings per actual power frequency or the frequency of the system is always constant. The number of
samplings is 20 per cycle, as per chapter 3.2 Measured-Value Acquisition .
During engineering, you set the parameters specifying which measuring points are used for frequency
tracking. All 3-phase voltage and current measuring points and 1-phase voltage and current measuring points
are allowed.
NOTE
i Using a measuring point for sampling-frequency tracking requires this measuring point to be suitable for
reliably determining the power frequency. This is the case, as long as the measuring point is connected to
the power system and the rated voltages and currents are measured. If the measured values for the rated
voltages and currents are unavailable, the sampling-frequency tracking must be switched off for this meas-
uring point.
Examples of these kind of conditions are as follows:
• 1-phase measuring points: Measuring points that measure zero-sequence voltages or zero-sequence
currents must not be used for frequency tracking.
• 3-phase measuring points: Measuring points that measure unbalanced currents and voltages for a
capacitor bank must not be used for frequency tracking.
The following figure shows where you set the parameters for the corresponding measuring point and activate
sampling-frequency tracking in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Settings → Power-system data.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
[sc_MP_Powersys trackfreq, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-25 Using the Measuring Point to Determine the Sampling Frequency
If the parameter Tracking = active, the measuring point is used to determine the actual tracking
frequency. If the parameter Tracking is set to active for several measuring points, the ID of the measuring
point determines the sequence in which these are checked for valid input signals. The algorithm starts with
the lowest ID number, as follows:
• First, the 3-phase measuring points are scanned. If no valid voltage is found, the selected current meas-
uring points are next. In this case, the following sequence applies:
3-phase voltage measuring point → 3-phase current measuring point → 1-phase voltage measuring point
→ 1-phase current measuring point
If a trigger signal comes from a current measuring point, the voltage measuring points are still continu-
ously scanned for valid voltages and switched immediately if a voltage is found.
• If the true RMS value is greater than 2.5 % of the set secondary device rated value, a measuring point is
valid. For example, this is 2.5 V at 100 V, 25 mA at 1 A or 125 mA at 5 A.
• A 3-phase measuring point is scanned in the sequence of phase A → phase B → phase C.

In the case of the voltage measuring points, the phase-to-phase voltage VAB, VBC, and VCA is always used
for evaluation. The phase-to-phase voltage is calculated in the event of a phase-to-ground connection.
• The tracking frequency is tracked using different interval steps. If the tracking frequency deviates only
slightly from the measured frequency, the frequency is tracked using small steps of 0.010 Hz. In the case
of greater deviations, the interval is 1 Hz. To react faster in the event of larger deviations, for example in
switchover conditions, tracking occurs in 5-Hz steps. When switching on measurands immediately the
measured tracking frequency is used.
• If no tracking frequency can be determined, the appropriate rated frequency of the electrical power
system is used as the tracking frequency. This case occurs before the measurands are switched on, after
they are switched off or when the device is powered on. If the measurands are switched on, the starting
frequency is the set power frequency, for example 50 Hz or 60 Hz. Since rated-frequency input variables
can be assumed for most applications, the measuring algorithms start with the fixed sampling frequency,
for example, 1 kHz for 50 Hz and 1.2 kHz for 60 Hz.
Figure 3-26 shows the behavior of sampling-frequency tracking across the frequency band and at the
frequency limits.
The x-axis shows the actual power frequency (fsys) and the y-axis shows the set tracking frequency (ftrack).
Between 10 Hz and 90 Hz, the relationship is linear. If the actual power frequency is less than 10 Hz, the
tracking frequency is kept at 10 Hz. In this case, sampling occurs at 20 ⋅ 10 Hz = 200 Hz. If the power
frequency is greater than 90 Hz, the tracking frequency is kept constant at 90 Hz.
If the frequency is outside the frequency operating range (10 Hz to 90 Hz), frequency tracking generates the
indication Freq. out of range. The individual protection functions evaluate this indication. If an over-
function can occur, the protection functions are blocked internally to avoid a failure.
You can find more detailed information on the behavior of the protection functions in the chapter 11 Tech-
nical Data.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
[dw_working-area_sampling-frequency-tracking, 2, en_US]
Figure 3-26 Operating Range of Sampling-Frequency Tracking
Siemens recommends routing the calculated power frequency (fsys) and the determined tracking frequency
(ftrack) as a measured value trace in the fault record. In this way, you can document the behavior of the device
in transient conditions. The following figure shows that you find the both measured values in the information
routing under Power-system data → General:
[sc_rout meas freq, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-27 Routing of the Frequency Measured Values
EXAMPLE:
Figure 3-28 shows the behavior of sampling-frequency tracking using an example.
The voltage was reduced linearly from 57.7 V (100 V phase-to-phase) to 35 V (60.6 V phase-to-phase) and, at
the same time, the frequency was reduced from 50 Hz to 35 Hz, for example motor coasting down. Then, an
abrupt switch to the rated values of 57.7 V at 50 Hz was made.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
The upper trace shows the power-system voltage on 1 phase (A) as an example. The center trace is the calcu-
lated power frequency and the lower trace is the determined tracking frequency. If you multiply the deter-
mined tracking frequency of the lower trace by 20, you can determine the sampling frequency.
[sc_example freqtrack, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-28 Example of Frequency Tracking and Reaction to a Step Change in the Input Variable
3.3.3 Frequency Tracking Groups
In the SIPROTEC 5 devices before platform version V07.80, sampling-frequency tracking applies to the entire
device. This means that the 1st valid measuring point, for example, a 3-phase voltage measuring point, deter-
mines the selected tracking frequency based on the detected frequency.
If all measuring points in a system are galvanically coupled to each other, the power frequency is identical for
all measuring points.
There are problems with electrical power system states or system states where galvanic separation is possible
and measuring points of the separated system parts are connected to the SIPROTEC 5 device. For these prob-
lematic electrical power system states or system states, different frequencies are possible for a limited time.
Depending on the measuring point set for tracking, the device selects which frequency to use. As a result,
measuring errors and a failure of protection functions are possible.
Starting with platform version V7.80, you can assign the measuring points to different frequency tracking
groups. This ensures high flexibility and high measuring accuracy for a variety of applications. In this case,
every frequency tracking group specifies its own sampling frequency. In the case of galvanic separation and
different system frequencies, different sampling frequencies arise as a result. This occurs temporarily in
systems with rotating machines, for example. A way to achieve galvanic separation is to use an open circuit
breaker.
NOTE
i In the measured-value acquisition chain in in the chapter 3.2 Measured-Value Acquisition , only the data
stream designated as tracked is adapted. The data stream represented as fixed derives its sampling
frequency exclusively from the set rated frequency. In this case, the constant sampling frequency of 1 kHz
at frated = 50 Hz and 1.2 kHz at frated = 60 Hz is used. This applies to every measuring point, regardless of the
frequency tracking group to which it is assigned.
EXAMPLE:
Figure 3-29 shows an example for the necessity of frequency tracking groups. The generator circuit breaker
(GCB) and the high-voltage circuit breaker (HVCB) are the galvanic disconnection points. In this way, different
switching states are possible. The device uses current measuring points (CTs 1 to 6) and voltage measuring
points (VTs 1 to 4) located on different sides of the circuit breakers. In addition, it is assumed that the gener-
ator is started using a starting-frequency converter. In a gas-turbine application, the starting-frequency
converter accelerates the generator from 0 Hz to about 70 % of the rated speed (roughly 35 Hz at
frated = 50 Hz). After this, the gas turbine is fired up and brings the generator to the rated speed. Then, the
voltage is built up to the rated voltage and synchronized. During this start-up operation, the GCB is open and
the HVCB is closed. As a result, the measuring points VT 1, CTs 1, 2, 4 have a frequency that deviates from the

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
other measuring points during start-up operation. The other measuring points are usually at the rated
frequency due of the connection to the power system.
Furthermore, protection tripping can result in a switching state where the HVCB is open and the GCB remains
closed. In this case, the generator and a generator transformer can assume a frequency that deviates from the
power frequency. In the event of load shedding, the generator accelerates before the speed controller inter-
venes. This is particularly pronounced in hydro generators.
An evaluation of the individual scenarios shows that different frequencies can occur at the different meas-
uring points for a limited time. For this reason, 3 frequency tracking groups are necessary in this example.
These groups are marked with different colors in the following figure.
NOTE
i The measuring point (CT 4) marked with 1) in the following figure will be discussed later.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
[dw_example_frequency-tracking-groups, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-29 Example of the Necessity of Frequency Tracking Groups
To strike a balance between application flexibility and the required computing power, the number of addi-
tional frequency tracking groups was limited to 5. Together with the basic functionality, a total of 6 frequency
tracking groups are possible.
If you wish to use frequency tracking groups, use the following engineering recommendations. Before starting
work, make sure you know how many frequency tracking groups are needed. Select only the required
number.
If you start with an application template that you have expanded by the necessary measuring points, you must
load the necessary number of additional frequency tracking groups from the Global DIGSI 5 Library into the
Power system folder.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
[sc_loading freq group, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-30 Loading the Required Frequency Tracking Groups
If you instantiate an additional frequency tracking group, the system automatically assigns the ID of the
frequency tracking group in DIGSI using consecutive numbers. As the device already has 1 frequency tracking
group, the ID numbering for additional frequency tracking groups starts with 2.
[sc_ID freqgroup, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-31 ID of the Frequency Tracking Group
NOTE
i If you have activated several frequency tracking groups during engineering and you then delete a
frequency tracking group again later, the assigned ID is also deleted. All other frequency tracking groups
retain their assigned IDs.
Try to avoid discontinuities by deleting the frequency tracking group with the highest ID if possible.
You will find the frequency measured values and the indications of the corresponding frequency tracking
group in the routing matrix (see Figure 3-27).
Assign the measuring points to the frequency tracking groups in the Function-group connections Editor. As
soon as you have instantiated another frequency tracking group from the Global DIGSI 5 Library, the addi-
tional column Frequency tracking group ID appears in the routing matrix. In this column, you select the
number of the corresponding frequency tracking group for each measuring point using the list box.
[sc_routing MP to freqgroup, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-32 Assignment of the Measuring Point to the Frequency Tracking Group

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
NOTE
i Keep the following in mind when assigning the measuring points to the frequency tracking groups:
• The function groups (FGs) can operate only with 1 frequency tracking group.
• This applies also to interconnections between the function groups as for the Transformer differential
protection.
In the case of the Transformer differential protection, the Transformer side FG is interconnected
with the Transformer FG and all Transformer side FGs of one transformer must operate in the same
frequency tracking group.
The same applies when the neutral-point current is measured using a 1-phase function group.
There are also exceptions such as the FG Circuit breaker. The voltage measured values are processed by
the Synchronization function which operates only with a fixed sampling frequency. In this way, voltage
measuring points from different frequency tracking groups can be connected.
The cited rules are checked using scripts and infractions reported during engineering.
Now, you can select the measuring points to be used to determine the tracking frequency for the appropriate
frequency tracking group as explained in chapter 3.3.2 Sampling-Frequency Tracking. If possible, use at least
1 voltage measuring point and 1 current measuring point. Give preference to 3-phase measuring points.
When the tracking frequency has been determined, all measuring points of the frequency tracking group are
set to this frequency and the tracked sampling frequency is adapted.
NOTE
i As described in the chapter 3.2 Measured-Value Acquisition , the measured-value current with fixed
sampling frequency is unaffected by this.
To avoid errors, the ID of the measuring point and the ID of the assigned frequency tracking group are
displayed in the setting sheet of the measuring points in DIGSI 5 (see Figure 3-33).
[sc_MP additional setting freqgroup, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-33 Example: Settings of the 3-Phase Current Measuring Point; Additional Display of the ID for the
Frequency Tracking Group
In addition, the ID of the frequency tracking group is displayed in the function group in the General block (see
Figure 3-34). Here, you can also check the consistency.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
[sc_MP additional setting FG, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-34 Display of the ID for the Frequency Tracking Group in the Block General of the Function Group
A special feature is explained using Figure 3-29 as an example.

The measuring point marked in Figure 3-29 with 1) uses a current transformer that is located on the generator
side but is used by the transformer differential protection. As a result, this current transformer must be
assigned to the frequency tracking group 2 in accordance with the rules above. Since the generator is started
using a starting-frequency converter in the application example, the frequency at this measuring point devi-
ates from the frequency at the other measuring points of group 2. For this reason, the measuring point with
CT 4 must not be used to determine the tracking frequency.
Depending on the application, the current of the CT 4 acts as a disturbance variable when forming the Kirch-
hoff's current law. As a rule, this current is not particularly strong (< 15 % of Irated) so that the disturbance
effect remains small. If required, you must set the differential protection to be less sensitive. Decide this for
the specific application.
The following table shows the possible assignment of measuring points used to determine the tracked
sampling frequency for the example. For this purpose, the parameter Tracking = active in the corre-
sponding measuring point:
Frequency Tracking 1 2 3
Group
Recommended measuring VT 4 VT 3 VT 1
points for tracking VT 2 CT 1
CT 5

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
3.4 Processing Quality Attributes
3.4.1 Overview
The IEC 61850 standard defines certain quality attributes for data objects (DO), the so-called Quality. The
SIPROTEC 5 system automatically processes some of these quality attributes. In order to handle different appli-
cations, you can influence certain quality attributes and also the values of the data objects depending on these
quality attributes. This is how you can ensure the necessary functionality.
The following figure describes roughly the general data flow within a SIPROTEC 5 device. The following figure
also shows at which points the quality can be influenced. The building blocks presented in the figure are
described in more detail in the following.
[lo_quali1, 2, en_US]
Figure 3-35 Data Flow within a SIPROTEC 5 Device
Supported Quality Attributes

The following quality attributes are automatically processed within the SIPROTEC 5 system.
• Validity using the values good or invalid

The Validity quality attribute shows if an object transferred via a GOOSE message is received (valid,
invalid) or not received (invalid). The invalid state can be suppressed in the receiver device by also
setting a substitute value for the object that is not received (see following figure). The substitute value is
forwarded to the functions.
If the device receives one of these values, it is replaced by the invalid value and thus processed further
as invalid.
If one of the detailed quality attributes (detailQual) has the value TRUE, then Validity is set to the
invalid value, unless this was already done at the transmitter end.
• Test using the values TRUE, FALSE
The Test quality attribute indicates to the receiver device that the object received via a GOOSE message
was created under test conditions and not operating conditions.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
• OperatorBlocked using the values TRUE, FALSE

The OperatorBlocked quality attribute indicates whether an object transferred via GOOSE message origi-
nates from a device that is in a functional logoff state. When the sending device is switched off,
the object is no longer being received and assumes the invalid state. However, since the Operator-
Blocked quality was previously identified on the receiver device, the object can be treated differently at
the receiving end (see chapter 3.4.2 Quality Processing/Affected by the User for Received GOOSE Values).
At the receiving end, the object may be treated like a dropped signal.
• Source using the values process, substituted

The Source quality attribute indicates whether the object was updated in the sending device.
You can find more detailed information in chapter 3.9.2 Acquisition Blocking and Manual Updating.
Influencing Quality by the Operating Modes

In addition to the normal operation, the device also supports further operating modes that influence quality:
• Test mode of the device

You can switch the entire device to test mode. In this case, all data objects generated in the device (state
values and measured values) receive the quality attribute Test = TRUE.
The CFC charts are also in test mode and all output data receive the quality attribute Test =TRUE.
• Test mode for individual functions, stages, or function blocks

You can switch individual functions, stages, or function blocks into test mode. In this case, all data
objects generated by the function, stage, or function block (state values and measured values) receive
the quality attribute Test = True.
Influencing the Quality through Hardware Supervision

Supervision functions monitor the device hardware (see chapter 8.4 Supervision of the Device Hardware). If
the supervision functions identify failures in the data acquisition of the device, then all recorded data will
receive the quality attribute Validity = invalid.
Influencing the Quality through Voltage-Transformer Circuit Breakers

If tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker is detected (see chapter 8.3.4 Voltage-Transformer Circuit
Breaker), all recorded data will receive the quality attribute Validity = invalid.
Influencing the Quality by the User

You can influence the processing of data and their quality differently. In DIGSI 5, this is possible at the
following 3 locations:
• In the Information routing editor for external signals of GOOSE connections
• In the CFC chart
• In the Information routing editor for binary input signals of device-internal functions
The following chapters describe in more detail the options regarding this influence as well as the automatic
quality processing.
If a GOOSE connection is the data source of a binary input signal of a device-internal function, you can influ-
ence processing of the quality at 2 locations: at the GOOSE connection and at the input signal of the function.
This is based on the following: A GOOSE date can be distributed within the receiving device to several func-
tions. The GOOSE connection setting (influence) affects all functions. However, if different functions require
customized settings, these are then set directly at the binary input signal of the function.
3.4.2 Quality Processing/Affected by the User for Received GOOSE Values
The properties of quality processing have changed with the introduction of GOOSE Later Binding. You can find
information about the former quality processing in chapter Previous Quality Processing/Affected by the User
for Received GOOSE Values, Page 92.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
In the Information Routing Editor, you can influence the data value and quality of all data types. The
following figure shows the possible influence using the example of a DPC data type. All setting options are
effective for the device receiving the data.
• In the DIGSI 5 project tree, double-click Information Routing.
• Select either the desired signal in the External Signals group or the signal of a function activated via the
GOOSE column.
• Open the Properties window and select the Processing Quality Attributes sheet.
[sc_LB_GOOSE_2, 2, en_US]
Figure 3-36 Influence Option When Linking a DPC Type Data Object
Depending on the selected data type of the object, various selection options are offered to you for the Safe
state item in the Common settings section. At this point, you select the manually updated values that allow
a safe operating state as soon as the data access via the communication path is disturbed.
• Select the property for the selected data object.

You can also set the Advanced quality attributes of the data object for GOOSE Later Binding.
The following figure shows the advanced quality attributes using the example of a DPC data type.
• Open the Properties window and select the Advanced quality attributes sheet.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
Figure 3-37 Advanced Quality Attributes for GOOSE Later Binding
With the following advanced quality attributes, you can filter the transmitted GOOSE indications and check
and set their quality. The values that have been adapted, if necessary, are forwarded to the receiver.
For the tests, you can select from the following setting options depending on the data type.
Table 3-8 Value Definitions
Setting Value Description

Apply safe state value The value configured in the Safe state is forwarded as valid to the appli-
cation as soon as communication disturbance occurs.
Keep value The disturbed quality attribute is overwritten with good and the received
value is forwarded as valid to the application. If no value was received,
the output value is assumed being in safe state.
Keep last valid value If an invalid quality attribute is received, the last valid value is forwarded
to the application. If no value has yet been received, the output value is
assumed being in safe state.
Set value to "false" Applies only to Boolean communication objects. Every invalid quality
attribute causes the valid value false to be forwarded to the applica-
tion.
Set value to "true" Applies only to Boolean communication objects. Every invalid quality
attribute causes the valid value true to be forwarded to the application.
These settings of the Advanced quality attributes apply to the advanced quality attributes listed below. The
selection can vary depending on the data type.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
Figure 3-38 Value Definition of a Data Object of the SPS Type
You can also forward the quality attributes unchanged. To do this, you must mark the Keep flag check box.
Functional Logoff by Operator Blocked

You have set the Operation mode to Device logoff = true in the transmitting device. As a result, every
indication issued from the functions and subject to Device logoff is transmitted with the quality informa-
tion operator blocked and Validity = good. The receiver recognizes this for this indication and reacts
according to the settings (Table 3-8). A different quality processing can take place only once you have set the
Operation mode to Device logoff = false in the transmitting device.
Communication Outage
There is communication disturbance (time allowed to live) between the transmitter and the receiver indicated
by the transmitter. The indication is set in accordance with the settings (Table 3-8).
Invalidity
The transmitting device sends this indication with the quality information Validity = invalid. The receiver
recognizes this for this indication and reacts according to the settings (Table 3-8).
Questionable
The transmitting device sends this indication with the quality information Validity = questionable. The
receiver recognizes this for this indication and reacts according to the settings (Table 3-8).
Test Mismatch
The transmitting device or the function in the transmitting device that issues this indication is in test mode. As
a result, the indication is transmitted with the quality information test. The receiving function block recog-
nizes this for this indication and reacts, depending on its own test-mode state (specified in IEC 61850-7-4
Annex A), according to the settings (Table 3-8).
NOTE
i Follow the sequence of tests. First, the Functional logoff by operator blocked is tested. Then comes
Communication outage and so on. If a case is recognized as active, the test chain is canceled with the
configured setting for the active case.
In the case of Invalidity, the tests are first performed for Functional logoff by operator blocked (not appli-
cable) and then for Communication outage (not applicable) and canceled with the configured action for
Invalidity.
If an indication is routed into the log, manual updating of a value is also logged based on the conditions listed
above and on the reason for the manual update. Manually updating a value based on the conditions listed
above causes a change in the Health Warning function block, inherited up to Device health (specified
in IEC 61850-7-4).

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
Keep Flag
The quality attributes and values indicated by the transmitter are accepted without change. Quality processing
must be performed by the user via a logic diagram. The outputs of the logic diagram following the user-
specific quality processing can be connected to the function-block inputs as before.
Data Substitute Values

Depending on the data type, different data substitute values must be used.
Data Type Possible Data Substitute Values
ACD, ACT general 0 (False), 1 (True)
(The directional information is always manually updated with
unknown.
PhsA, phsB, phsC, and neut are manually updated with the same
value just like how the general value is set.)
BAC, APC mxVal Floating-point range and range of values according to IEEE 754
(single precision)
BCR actVal –263 to 263 – 1
CMV mag, ang Floating-point range and range of values according to IEEE 754
(single precision)
DPC, DPS stVal 0, 1, 2, 3 (intermediate-state, off, on, bad-state)
INC stVal –2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647
INS stVal –2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647
ISC, BSC valWTr.posVal –64 to 64
valWTr.transInd 0 (False), 1 (True)
SPC, SPS stVal 0 (False), 1 (True)
MV mag Floating-point range and range of values according to IEEE 754
(single precision)
For controllable types, the following substitute values apply in addition to the settable state values or meas-
ured values:
ctlNum = 0
stSeld = False
origin.orIdent = Substituted by quality processing
origin.orCat = AUTOMATIC_BAY
Previous Quality Processing/Affected by the User for Received GOOSE Values

In the Information Routing editor, you can influence the data value and quality of all data types. The
following figure shows the possible influence using the example of a DPC data type.
• In the DIGSI 5 project tree, double-click Information Routing.
• Select the desired signal in the External Signals group.
• Open the Properties window and select the Processing Quality Attributes sheet.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
[sc_GOOSE values, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-39 Influence Option When Linking a DPC Type Data Object
The setting options work for the device receiving the data.
Quality Attribute: Validity
The validity values reserved and questionable are replaced at the receiving end by the invalid value.
• Check box is not set. The validity attribute and data value are forwarded
without change.
• Check box is set and receipt of Validity = good
Check box is set and receipt of Validity = invalid is • The validity attribute is set to good and
set (also applies to values reserved and ques- processed further using this value.
tionable). • The data value is set to the defined substitute
value and processed further using this substitute
value.
Quality Attribute: OperatorBlocked (opBlk)

• Check box is not set. The OperatorBlocked attribute and data value are
forwarded without change.
• Check box is set and received OperatorBlocked
= FALSE
Check box is set and received OperatorBlocked = • The OperatorBlocked attribute is set to FALSE
TRUE and processed further using this value.
• The data value is set to the defined substitute
value and processed further using this substitute
value.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
Interaction of the Quality Attribute Validity and OperatorBlocked

OperatorBlocked check box is set and receipt of Oper- Regardless of whether the validity check box is set or
atorBlocked = TRUE not, and regardless of the current validity, the validity
attribute is set to good and the substitute value of
the OperatorBlocked data object is set. That is, the
OperatorBlocked settings overwrite the Validity
settings.
OperatorBlocked check box is not set and receipt of The OperatorBlocked attribute remains set and is
OperatorBlocked = TRUE forwarded.
If the Validity check box is set and the receipt of
validity = invalid is set, the respective data object
substitute value is used.
For continued signal processing and influence, it must
be taken into account that in this configuration the
data object substitute value for validity = invalid is
set, but the quality attribute OperatorBlocked is not
yet set.
3.4.3 Quality Processing/Affected by the User in CFC Charts
In DIGSI 5, you can control the quality processing of CFC charts. In the project tree, you can find the CFC
building block (see the following figure) under Device name →, Settings → Device settings in the editor:
[sc_quali_cfc, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-40 Influencing CFC Quality Handling in DIGSI 5
With the CFC chart quality handling parameter, you control whether you want to influence the
quality of CFC charts in a Manual or Automatic (default setting) manner.
If you select Manual, the quality attribute of the CFC chart is always valid regardless of the quality of indi-
vidual signals (Validity = good)!
Only the Test quality attribute of the CFC chart is processed. If the device is in test mode or the input TEST of
the CHART_STATE CFC building block is set, the quality attribute of the CFC chart is set to Test.
If you select Automatic, the quality processing of the CFC charts is influenced as follows:
In the case of CFC charts, a distinction has to be made between the general quality processing and certain CFC
building blocks that are specifically designed for quality processing.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
General Processing
Most of the CFC building blocks do not have an explicit quality processing. For these building blocks, the
following general mechanisms shall apply.
If one invalid signal is received in the case of CFC input data, then all CFC output data will also be set to
invalid if they originate from building blocks without explicit quality processing. In other words, the
quality is not processed sequentially from building block to building block but the output data are set glob-
ally.
This does not apply to CFC output data that originate from building blocks with explicit quality processing
(see next section).
Quality Attribute: Test

CFC chart is in normal state. CFC input data with the Test = TRUE attribute are ignored. When
the CFC chart is executed, then the data value that was used
before the Test = TRUE attribute is used. The quality of this old
value is also processed.
This means that on the output side, the attribute Test = FALSE.
CFC chart is in Test1) state. If the CFC chart is executed, then the attribute Test = TRUE is set
for all data leaving the CFC chart. This does not depend on
whether the data are formed via CFC building blocks with or
without quality processing.
1)ACFC chart can be switched to the test state by switching the entire device to test mode or the input TEST of
the CFC building block CHART_STATE is set.
Quality Attribute: OperatorBlocked
CFC chart is in normal state. In CFC charts for incoming data, the OperatorBlocked attribute
is ignored.
CFC chart is in functionally logged off1) In CFC charts for incoming data, the OperatorBlocked attribute
state . is ignored. All CFC output data are labeled as functionally logged
off.
1)This state only occurs if the device is functionally logged off. In this case, the quality attributes of all CFC
outputs are labeled as functionally logged off.
Quality Processing Building Blocks (Condition Processing)

The first 3 building blocks (x_SPS) process the quality automatically according to the stated logic. The other
building blocks are used to isolate the quality from a data object and add them back after separate logical
processing.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
Building Blocks Description

OR_SPS The building blocks also process the supported quality attributes according to their logic.
The following tables describe the logic using input values in connection with the quality
AND_SPS attribute Validity. The input values are 0 or 1, the quality attribute Validity can have the
value good (=g) or invalid (=i).
NEG_SPS
x = placeholder for the input value and quality attribute Validity
OR_SPS
A (Value, Attribute) B (Value, Attribute) Q (Value, Attribute)
0, i 0, x 0, i
0, g 0, g 0, g
1, g x, x 1, g
1, i 0, x 1, i
1, i 1, i 1, i
The output thus has the logical value 1 with Validity = good as soon as at least 1 input has
the logical value 1 with Validity = good. Otherwise, the inputs are treated according to the
OR operation and the INVALID bit is OR-gated for the quality.
AND_SPS
A (Value, Attribute) B (Value, Attribute) Q (Value, Attribute)
0, g x, x 0, g
0, i 1, x 0, i
1, i 1, x 1, i
1, g 1, g 1, g
The output thus has the logical value 0 with Validity = good as soon as at least 1 input has
the logical value 0 with Validity = good. Otherwise, the inputs are treated according to the
AND operation and the INVALID bit is OR-gated for the quality.
NEG_SPS
A (Value, Attribute) Q (Value, Attribute)
0, i 1, i
0, g 1, g
1, i 0, i
1, g 0, g
SPLIT_SPS The building blocks isolate the data value and quality of a data object.
The requirement is that the quality is available from the input end. This is the case if the
SPLIT_DPS building block is interconnected with CFC input data, or is connected downstream with a
quality processing building block (x_SPS). In other cases, the CFC editor does not allow a
SPLI_XMV
connection.
SPLIT_Q The building block performs binary separation of the quality into good, bad (= invalid),
test, off and OperatorBlocked.
These 5 attributes can then be processed individually in a binary operation. The building
block must be connected downstream to a SPLIT_(DO) building block.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
Building Blocks Description

BUILD_Q The building block enters a binary value for good and bad (= invalid) in each quality
structure. Thus, with this building block the quality attributes good and bad (=invalid)
can be set explicitly, for example, as the result of a monitoring logic.
All other quality attributes are set to the default state, for instance, Test = FALSE. If, for
example, the entire CFC chart is in the test state (see Quality Attribute: Test Under General
Processing), this default status can again be overwritten on the CFC output side.
The building block is normally connected downstream to a BUILD_(DO) building block.
BUILD_ACD These building blocks merge data value and quality. The building-block output is generally
used as a CFC output.
BUILD_ACT Generally, the BUILD_Q building block is connected upstream from these building blocks.
BUILD_BSC
BUILD_DPS
BUILD_ENS
BUILD_SPS
BUILD_XMV
CFC charts have a standard behavior in the processing of signals. If an input signal of the CFC chart has the
quality invalid, all output signals of the CFC chart also get the quality invalid. This standard behavior is
not desirable in some applications. If you use the building blocks for quality processing, the quality attributes
of the input signals in the CFC chart are processed.
EXAMPLE: Switchgear Interlocking via GOOSE

The following conditions apply to the example:
• The interlocking condition for switchgear interlocking protection is stored in the device as a CFC chart.
• The removed device sends the release signal for the interlocking condition via a GOOSE telegram.
If the communication connection has been interrupted, the release signal (GOOSEStr) incoming via the
GOOSE telegram gets the quality invalid. If the CFC chart obtains an invalid input signal, there are the
following possibilities: The last signal valid before the communication interruption is used (quality = good) or
a substitute data value with the quality good is used (True, False).
To do this, you have to create a separate CFC chart in addition to the interlocking plan of the switchgear inter-
locking. Use the building blocks for quality processing in a separate CFC chart. With the SPLIT_SPS building
block, split the input signal (data type = SPS) into data value and quality information. You can then continue to
process these signals separately in the CFC chart. Use the quality information as an input signal for a
BUILD_SPS building block and assign the quality good to the signal. You obtain an SPS signal as a result, with
the quality good. You can use this to process release messages correctly. You can process the release
messages with the quality good in the CFC chart of the actual interlocking. Therefore, the release signal for a
switch illustrated in the interlocking logic is available as a valid result with the quality good. The following
figure shows an example of the CFC chart with the building blocks for quality processing:

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
[sc_cfc_ran, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-41 CFC Chart with Building Blocks for Quality Processing (Switchgear Interlocking via GOOSE)
If you do not want to convert the invalid release signal to a valid signal, as described, during the communica-
tion interruption, you can also assign a defined data value to the release signal. Proceed as follows: With the
SPLIT_SPS building block, split the input signal (data type = SPS) into data value and quality information. Link
the VALID output of the SPLIT_SPS building block with the data value of the input signal (AND gate). This way,
you can set the value to a non-risk state with the valid input signals. In the example, the output of the CFC
chart is set to the value FALSE when the input signal is invalid.
3.4.4 Quality Processing/Affected by the User in Internal Device Functions
Figure 3-42 provides an overview for processing the quality of data objects within a device-internal function.
A function can receive internal data or input data that is routable by the user (binary input signal or double
commands). The respective quality attributes supported are evaluated by the function on the input side. The
attributes are not passed through the specific algorithm/the specific logic of the function. The output data are
supplied with a quality that is specified by the function state and device-operating mode.
NOTE
i Take into account that pickup of chatter blocking (see chapter 3.9.1 Signal Filtering and Chatter Blocking
for Input Signals) sets the corresponding Validity attribute to invalid.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
Figure 3-42 Overview for Processing Quality within an Internal Function
Internal Input Data

The quality processing is automatic for internal input data.
Supported Quality Attributes Description
Validity • At the receiving end, internal values can only be invalid
or good.
• If invalid, the function health is set to Alarm and the
function is reset.
Causes for invalid internal data are, for example:
• The frequency operating range of the device was left.

• The device is not calibrated.
• The A/D converter monitoring identified an error.
Routable Binary Input Signals (SPS Data Type)

Figure 3-43 shows the possible sources for connecting a binary input signal. Depending on the source,
different quality attributes can be set:
• CFC chart: See description in chapter 3.4.3 Quality Processing/Affected by the User in CFC Charts
• GOOSE connection: See description in chapter 3.4.2 Quality Processing/Affected by the User for Received
GOOSE Values
• Device hardware: No quality attributes are set and supported.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
Figure 3-43 Sources for Connecting a Binary Input Signal
For this signal type (SPS), you can influence the processing of the quality, see overview in Figure 3-42.
The following figure shows the possible influence on a binary input signal of a protection stage.
• In the DIGSI 5 project tree, double-click Information routing.
• In the operating range, select the desired binary input signal.
• In the Properties window, select the Details entry. There, you will find the item Processing quality
attributes.
[sc_influence, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-44 Influence Options for a Binary Input Signal (SPS Input Signal)

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions

The Validity attribute can have the values good or invalid (reserved and questionable were already
replaced at the input end of the device by the value invalid).
The input signal source is invalid. The current data value of the source signal is ignored. You can
select between the following options:
• Further process last valid data value of the source signal

(this is the default setting with only a few exceptions)
• Set the binary value to be processed further to 0.
• Set the binary value to be processed further to 1.
This configuration option is necessary to satisfy different
applications.
The function health switches to Warning.
The input signal source is good. The source signal data value is processed further.
Quality Attribute: Test

• The input signal source and The source signal data value is processed further.
processed function are in test state.
• The input signal source is not in test
state and the function to be
processed is in test state.
The input signal source is in a test state The data value of the source signal is ignored. You can select
and the function to be processed is in between the following options:
normal state.
• Further processing of the last valid source signal data value,
before the source switches to the test state (that is the
default setting)
• The binary value to be processed further is set to 0.
• The binary value to be processed further is set to 1.
This configuration option is necessary to satisfy different applica-
tions.
Quality Attribute OperatorBlocked

The quality cannot be influenced at this position and does not lead to a response within the logic
Output Data
The quality is not processed through the actual algorithm/logic of the function. The following table displays
the conditions required to set the quality of output signals of a function.
Cause D0 Value Quality Attribute
After internal (to To the IEC 61850
the SIPROTEC 5 interface, in buffer
system, for example,
in the direction of a
CFC chart)
Functional state = Test Unchanged Test = TRUE Test = TRUE
(thus, result of device operating
mode = Test or function mode
= Test)
Functional state = Off Function-specific, corre- Validity = good Validity = invalid
(thus, result of device operating sponding to the definition for
mode = Off) switched off

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
Cause D0 Value Quality Attribute

Function health = Alarm Function-specific, corre- Validity = good Validity = invalid
(for example, result of invalid sponding to the definition for
receive data) reset
Device operating mode = func- Unchanged Validity = good Validity = good
tionally logged off OperatorBlocked = detailQual =
TRUE oldData
OperatorBlocked =
TRUE

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
3.5 Fault Recording
3.5 Fault Recording
3.5.1 Overview of Functions
All SIPROTEC 5 devices have a fault memory in which fault recordings are kept securely. Fault recording docu-
ments operations within the power system and the way in which protection devices respond to them. You can
read out fault recordings from the device and analyze them afterwards using evaluation tools such as SIGRA.
A fault record contains the following information:
• Sample values of the analog input channels
• Measured values calculated internally
• Any binary signals (for example, pickup signals and trip signals of protection functions)
You can individually configure the signals to be recorded. Furthermore, you can define the starting condition,
the record duration, and the saving criterion of a recording. Fault records saved in the device are also available
after a loss of auxiliary voltage.
3.5.2 Structure of the Function
The Fault recorder function is a central device function. Both the recording criterion and the measured-value
and binary channels to be recorded are functionally preconfigured through the application templates. You are
able to individually adapt the configuration in DIGSI 5. The fault recording and the fault log are subject to the
same control. This ensures that real time, relative time, and numbering of the fault data are synchronized.
This means that all fault recordings function on the same real-time and relative-time basis.
The data read out via the DIGSI-PC are saved in COMTRADE format. Fault recording data can be transferred to
the substation automation technology by request in accordance with the standards via existing communica-
tion connections (such as IEC 61850, IEC 60870-5-103). The central device analyzes the data using appro-
priate programs.
3.5.3 Function Description
The Fault recorder function records the sampled values, specific to each device, of all analog inputs, the inter-
nally calculated measured values, and the binary signals. The configuration, which is predefined for each
device via an application template, can be adapted individually.
NOTE
i For detailed information about selecting and deleting fault records, refer to the Operating Manual
(C53000-G5040-C003).
The fault memory of the device is automatically updated with every recording. When the fault memory is filled
completely, the oldest recordings are overwritten automatically. Thus, the most recent recordings are always
stored safely. The maximum size of all recordings is 32 MB.
Sampling Frequency
The analog measuring channels are sampled at a different sampling rate for fault recording. The Sampling
frequency parameter is used to set the desired sampling frequency. Possible setting values are 1 kHz and
2 kHz . This setting value applies only to fault recording and does not affect protection functions or calculated
measured values.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
3.5 Fault Recording
Record Duration
The overall duration of a single fault recording comprises the total duration of the configurable recording
criterion, the Pre-trigger time and the Post-trigger time. You can set the parameters for these
components individually.
[dw_sigrar, 2, en_US]
Figure 3-45 Example of a Fault Recording
With the Fault recording parameter, you specify the start criterion of the recording.
You can set the following values:
• with pickup:
The fault recording records the complete fault until dropout. The resulting pickup and trip signals of all
function groups are taken into account.
• user-defined:
With this setting value, you can individually specify the recording criterion for the fault recording in
DIGSI 5. Function-specific recording criteria can be realized in this way.
If a recording criterion reoccurs during the post-trigger time, the recording which is currently active is
extended to include a new post-trigger time.
For a sampling frequency of 1 kHz and 24 analog channels to be recorded, the duration of one individual fault
recording can be up to 20 s.
The maximum record duration can be limited by the Maximum record time parameter.
In addition to starting the fault recording via the internal pickup and trip signals, the following alternatives are
possible:
• Externally via binary input signal >External start (for example, from an external protection device
without fault recording by an object transferred via a GOOSE message)
• By way of a configurable input signal >Manual start , you can start fault records with a configurable
length (parameter Manual record time).
• From DIGSI 5, you can start test fault records with a fixed length of 1 s.
• With a command from a central device via an existing communication connection (IEC 61850,
IEC 60870-5-103)
NOTE
i If a pickup signal is present continuously, the fault record is closed after the Maximum record time
expires and the fault recording is not restarted!

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
3.5 Fault Recording
Saving the Recording

Not every fault recording that is started actually needs to be saved. With the Storage parameter, you specify
whether you want to save the fault recording that has started. You can also save only fault data that also
caused a tripping. With this setting, faults beyond the self-protection range will not lead to replacing fault
recordings that have already been saved.
Configuration of Signals to Be Recorded

All configured analog inputs of the device (voltages, currents, differential currents, and restraint currents of
the differential protection) are recorded as sampled channels. Function-specific binary signals (for example,
pickup and trip signals) and measured value channels can be configured individually for recording in the DIGSI
Information-routing matrix. For this purpose, a separate Recorder column is available.
You can rename the signals in the DIGSI Information-routing matrix. You can change the order of the binary
signals and measured-value channels to be recorded in DIGSI under Signal order. You can find more detailed
information on this in the DIGSI 5 Online Help, version V07.50 and higher (Order number: C53000-D5000-
C001-D).
Numbering and Time Stamping

All fault recordings saved are automatically numbered in ascending order and assigned a real-time stamp for
the start time. The fault recording logs the fault with a relative time. The reference-time point is the start of
the recording. Every fault recording has a corresponding fault log with the same number. This ensures that the
fault recording can be uniquely assigned to the event log.
Fault Memory
The device manages its available fault memory dynamically, so that the maximum recording capacity is always
available. When exceeding the limits of the fault memory, the oldest recordings are automatically overwritten.
This means that the most recent recordings are always available. The sampling rate, length, type, and number
of measured value tracks to be recorded are the crucial variables when it comes to restricting the length and
number of recordings possible.
For the sake of simplicity, at a sampling rate of 1 kHz, approx. 5 kBps (at 2 kHz approx. 10 kBps) are recorded
per permanently prerouted channel/measured value. With a storage capacity of 32 MB and 64 measured
values, a maximum record duration of approx. 100 s results.
Fault-Record Channels
In 7SS85 , there are the following fault-record channels:
• I1, I2, I3, IN of the measuring points (field currents)
• Idiff A to Idiff C of the bus sections (with measuring system) and the check zone as instantaneous values
and filtered measured values
• Irest A to Irest C of the bus sections (with measuring system) and the check zone as instantaneous values
and filtered measured values
The following analog channels are set by default in the system configuration:
• For each current transformer, 4 currents, for example, 15 current transformers ⋅ 4 = 60
• For the check zone and for each of the bus sections, 12 analog channels each (Idiff and Irest as instanta-
neous values and filtered measured values for the 3 phases)
Example with 4 bus sections: (1 + 4) ⋅ 12 = 60
The maximum number of routable analog channels is 150; for binary values, it is 200.
Input and Output Signals

The Fault recorder function provides several input signals and commands that allow the precise starting, and
stopping of recordings. The output signals provide information about the function status.
In the following table, you can find input signals of the Fault recorder function:

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
3.5 Fault Recording
Name Type Description

Control: Start recording SPC Start recording via the function key
Control: Reset memory SPC Delete all recording via the function key. The
error numbers are reset.
Control: Delete memory SPC Delete all recording via the function key. The
error numbers remain as is.
Control: >External start SPS Start recording with an external binary signal,
for example, by the trip command of an external
protection device. The set pre-trigger and post-
trigger time are taken into account.
Control: >Manual start SPS Start a recording of fixed duration (parameter
Manual record time ) by way of an
external binary signal, for example, manually via
the function key or by an external binary signal.
In the following table, you can find output signals of the Fault recorder function:
Name Type Description
Control: Error number INS The indication of the current error number
allows a unique allocation of entries in the
message buffers for the recorded fault records.
Control: Recording started SPS Fault recording running
Control: Recording done SPS Fault recording done
Control: Tmax reduced SPS Fault recording ends before the set Maximum
record time expires, because the fault log is
full.
Control: Fault log is full INS The fault log is full.
Configuring Stored Indications Using DIGSI 5
• In the Information Routing of each device set up in DIGSI 5, you can route binary signals to LEDs and
output contacts. To do this, open the project tree.
Project -> Device -> Information routing
• Right-click the routing field of your binary indication in the desired LED or binary output column in the
routing range of the targets.
You are offered the following options:
Table 3-9 Overview of Routing Options
Routing Options LED BI4 BO5 FT 6 Description

Not routed X X X X The signal is not routed.
X (routed) X The signal is routed.
T (trigger) X The signal can trigger the recorders.
This option is only available for the fault recorder if you set
the parameter Fault recording to user-defined.
XT (routed + X The signal is routed and can trigger the recorders.
trigger) This option is only available for the fault recorder if you set
the parameter Fault recording to user-defined.
4 Binary input
5 Binary output
6 Function key

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
3.5 Fault Recording
[sc_FR_information routing, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-46 Routing of the Signals in the Information Routing
3.5.4 Application and Setting Notes
Parameter: Fault recording
• Recommended setting value (_:2761:130) Fault recording = with pickup

With the Fault recording parameter, you define the recording criterion for a fault recording. The total
record duration is defined as the duration of the fault plus the total of the parameters Pre-trigger time,
Post-trigger time and is limited by the maximum record duration.
Parameter Value Description
with pickup The fault recording criterion is determined by the total number of all protec-
tion pickups. The resulting pickup signals of all function groups are taken
into account.
user-defined The fault recording criterion is defined on a user-specific basis.
Note: You must specify all signals for individual definition of the fault
recording criterion in the DIGSI 5 information routing matrix. In the infor-
mation routing matrix in the Fault record column, the fault recording has
for this purpose a separate column Trigger. The record duration is calcu-
lated from the logical OR operation of all initiated, configured signals, as
well as the pre-trigger and post-trigger time.
Parameter: Storage
• Recommended setting value (_:2761:131) Storage = always

With the Storage parameter, you define the storage criterion for a fault recording that has already started.
always Each fault recording that has been started is saved.
with trip If at least one protection function issues an operate indication during the
record time, any fault recording that has been started will be saved.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
3.5 Fault Recording
Parameter: Maximum record time
• Default setting (_:2761:111) Maximum record time = 5.00 s

With the Maximum record time parameter, you configure the maximum record duration for an individual
fault recording. When the time configured expires, an ongoing fault recording is canceled. This parameter
merely limits the duration of the fault recording. It does not affect the logging of faults in the fault log.
Parameter: Pre-trigger time
• Recommended setting value (_:2761:112) Pre-trigger time = 0.50 s

With the Pre-trigger time parameter, you configure the pre-trigger time for an individual fault recording.
The set pre-trigger time is prepended to the actual recording criterion for the fault recording.
Parameter: Post-trigger time
• Recommended setting value (_:2761:113) Post-trigger time= 0.50 s

With the Post-trigger time parameter, you configure the post-trigger time for an individual fault
recording. The post-trigger time that has been configured is added to the actual recording criterion for the
fault recording after the dropout.
The following table shows how the setting range changes for the Post-trigger time parameter
depending on the Sampling frequency.
Sampling Frequency Setting Range for the Post-trigger time Parameter
2 kHz 0.05 s to 16 s
1 kHz 0.05 s to 24 s
Parameter: Manual record time
• Recommended setting value (_:2761:116) Manual record time = 0.50 s

With the Manual record time parameter, you set the length of a recording if the fault recording is acti-
vated dynamically (edge-triggered) via a separately configured input signal >Manual start.
In this case, pre-trigger and post-trigger times do not take effect.
Parameter: Sampling frequency
• Recommended setting value (_:2761:140) Sampling frequency = 2 kHz

With the Sampling frequency parameter, you define the sampling frequency of the fault record that you
want to download via DIGSI 5. Possible setting values are 1 kHz and 2 kHz.
Parameter: Sampl. freq. IEC 61850 rec.
• Recommended setting value (_:2761:141) Sampl. freq. IEC 61850 rec. = 2 kHz
With the Sampl. freq. IEC 61850 rec. parameter, you define the sampling frequency of the fault
record that you want to download using the IEC 61850 communication protocol. Possible setting values are
1 kHz and 2 kHz.
You cannot set the Sampl. freq. IEC 61850 rec. parameter to be greater than the maximum setting
value of the Sampling frequency parameter.
If the size of the COMTRADE file exceeds the maximum permissible storage capacity of the device, the original
recording is truncated. The truncated data are discarded.
NOTE
i If you have created a fault record with a certain sampling frequency and then set the sampling frequency to
a lower value, you can no longer download this fault record using the IEC 61850 communication protocol.
You must reset the sampling frequency to the original value. Then you can download the fault record again
using the IEC 61850 communication protocol.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
3.5 Fault Recording
Parameter: Cal.zero.seq.cur.channel
• Default setting (_:2761:129) Cal.zero.seq.cur.channel = no

With the Cal.zero.seq.cur.channel parameter, you determine whether the calculated zero-sequence
current 3I0 or -3I0 is recorded in a separate channel or not. The separate channel is visible in the DIGSI 5
Information routing under the I 3-phase measuring point.
The zero-sequence currents can be calculated only with the following current-transformer connection types:
• 3-phase + IN-separate
• 3-phase + IN
• 3-phase

no The zero-sequence current calculated from the sampled values of the
currents is not recorded.
-3I0 The calculated zero-sequence current -3I0 is recorded for each I 3-phase
measuring point.
-3I0 is calculated from the sampled current values using the following
equation: -3I0 = - (IA + IB + IC).
3I0 The calculated zero-sequence current 3I0 is recorded for each I 3-phase
measuring point.
3I0 is calculated from the sampled current values using the following equa-
tion: 3I0 = (IA + IB + IC).
Parameter: Cal.zero seq.volt.channel
• Default setting (_:2761:132) Cal.zero seq.volt.channel = no

With the Cal.zero seq.volt.channel parameter, you determine whether the calculated zero-sequence
voltage V0 or3V0 is recorded in a separate channel or not. The separate channel is visible in the DIGSI 5 Infor-
mation routing under the V 3-ph measuring point.
The zero-sequence voltages can be calculated only with the following current-transformer connection types:
• 3 ph-to-gnd volt. + VN
• 3 ph-to-gnd voltages

no The zero-sequence voltage calculated from the sampled voltage values is
not recorded.
V0 The calculated zero-sequence voltage V0 is recorded for each V 3-ph meas-
uring point.
V0 is calculated from the sampled voltage values using the following equa-
tion: V0 = (VA + VB + VC)/3.
3V0 The calculated zero-sequence voltage 3V0 is recorded for each V 3-ph
measuring point.
3V0 is calculated from the sampled voltage values using the following
equation: 3V0 = (VA + VB + VC).
3.5.5 Settings
Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting

Control
_:2761:130 Control:Fault recording • with pickup with pickup
• user-defined

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
3.5 Fault Recording

_:2761:131 Control:Storage • always always
• with trip
_:2761:111 Control:Maximum record 0.20 s to 20.00 s 5.00 s
time
_:2761:112 Control:Pre-trigger time 0.05 s to 4.00 s 0.50 s
_:2761:113 Control:Post-trigger time 0.05 s to 0.50 s 0.50 s
_:2761:116 Control:Manual record 0.20 s to 20.00 s 0.50 s
time
_:2761:140 Control:Sampling • 2 kHz 2 kHz
frequency
• 1 kHz
_:2761:141 Control:Sampl. freq. • 8 kHz 1 kHz
IEC 61850 rec.
• 4 kHz
• 2 kHz
• 1 kHz
_:2761:129 Control:Cal.zero.seq.cur. • no no
channel
• -3I0
• 3I0
_:2761:132 Control:Cal.zero • no no
seq.volt.channel
• V0
• 3V0
3.5.6 Information List
No. Information Data Class Type

(Type)
_:2761:300 Control:Start record SPC C
_:2761:305 Control:Reset memory SPC C
_:2761:306 Control:Clear memory SPC C
_:2761:502 Control:>External start SPS I
_:2761:503 Control:>Manual start SPS I
_:2761:310 Control:Fault number INS O
_:2761:311 Control:Recording started SPS O
_:2761:314 Control:Record made SPS O
_:2761:327 Control:Tmax reduced SPS O
_:2761:324 Control:Fault log is full INS O

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
3.6.1 Overview
The Protection communication includes all functionalities necessary for data exchange via the protection
interface (PI).
Devices that communicate with each other via protection interfaces form a device combination. A device
combination consists of 2 to 6 devices. The devices communicate via point-to-point connections (protection
connections). In this case, a device has only one connection to another device via a protection interface (PI).
With a 2nd protection interface, you can establish a connection to another device or a redundant connection
to the same device. With their protection connections, the devices form a protection topology in the form of a
redundant ring (ring topology) or as a chain structure (chain topology).
[dw_PDC_chain_3devices, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-47 Device Combination of 3 Devices in a Chain Topology
[dw_PDC_ring_3devices, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-48 Device Combination of 3 Devices in a Ring Topology
[dw_PDC_ring_2devices, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-49 Device Combination of 2 Devices in a Ring Topology
Within a device combination, the point-to-point connections can have different bandwidths. Depending on
the bandwidth, a certain amount of binary information and measured values can be transmitted bidirection-
ally between the devices. The connection with the lowest bandwidth defines the amount of binary informa-
tion and measured values.
The following information is important for protection communication and is transmitted additionally. You
cannot change this information:
• Topology data and values are exchanged for monitoring and testing the connection and displayed on the
device or with DIGSI 5.
• Protection data and measured values, such as line differential protection data or binary data of the tele-
protection schemes for distance protection and ground-fault protection are transmitted.
• The time synchronization of the devices is possible directly via the connection, whereby a device of the
protection topology assumes the role of the timing master.
The point-to-point connection between the devices is continuously monitored for data faults and failure and
the signal-transit time of the data is measured.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
The protection communication is typically used for line differential protection and with the teleprotection
schemes for distance protection and ground-fault protection. In SIPROTEC 5, you can configure the protection
communication in all devices and use it for further protection applications. At the same time, any binary infor-
mation and measured values can be transferred between the devices.
NOTE
i The protection communication is compatible with the successor versions from firmware version V04.00
and higher.
3.6.2 Protection Communication in the Overall System
The following figure illustrates the interaction of protection communication, protection function groups, and
communication modules. The Protection communication is integrated as follows in the overall system:
[dw_protcom_compl_system, 2, en_US]
Figure 3-50 Protection Communication in the Overall System
If protection functions want to use the protection interfaces, their superordinate protection function group,
for example, the FG Line 1, must be connected to a Protection communication function group. With this
connection, each protection function in the FG Line 1 can use protection communication.
In addition, a connection must be configured between the logical protection interface in the FG Protection
communication and a channel on the physical communication module. The physical communication module
must support the protection-interface protocol.
The following chapters describe the configuration of the connections.
Type of Protection Communication

The protection communication in a device can be either type 1 or type 2. The following table shows the typical
applications:

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
NOTE
i In device 7SS85, only type 2 is used for connecting 2 or 3 devices.
Types Description
Type 1 With type 1, the Line differential protection function is the primary appli-
cation. This application requires the greatest portion of the bandwidth, so
that with type 1 the number of available customer-specific remote data is
lower. This becomes noticeable with a 64 kBit/s protection connection via a
G703.1 or X21 interface.
A maximum of 6 line ends (devices) is possible.
If the Line differential protection and Teleprotection scheme functions
are to operate in parallel in the device, the bit rate must not be less than
512 kBit/s!
Type 2 Type 2 provides considerably more bandwidth for customer-specific remote
data. The transmission of protection data and other data, for example,
measured values as well as the teleprotection scheme, is predominant here.
Using type 2 protection communication, a maximum of 6 devices can be
connected to one another and different device types (for example, 6MD,
7VK, 7SA, and 7SJ) can exchange data.
NOTE
i In the case of devices with the Line differential protection function, for example 7SD and 7SL, protection
communication type 1 is preset in the application templates of the devices. Type 2 is preset in the applica-
tion templates for other devices, and is used for other data transmission.
Type 1 and type 2 protection communication do not work together in pairs via a protection function.
Device Combination with 2 Devices: Simple or Redundant Transmission

In a device combination with 2 devices, one protection communication with a protection interface is required
per device to establish a protection connection (see next figure).
The most frequent application is the point-to-point exchange of data between 2 devices (the protection
communication is of type 2), as performed by protection transmission devices.
[dw_interface, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-51 Data Exchange for 2 Devices, Each with Protection Connection
NOTE
i The index describes the consecutive numbering of the devices in a device combination (see parameter
Local device is device).
A maximum of 2 protection interfaces are possible per FG Protection communication in one device, see the
following figure. If the Protection communication function groups are connected to one another in the
devices via 2 protection connections of the same type, this results in 100 % redundancy regarding the trans-
mission route. The devices then search for the communication connection with the highest bandwidth (for
example, optical fiber). If this protection connection fails, the system switches over automatically to the 2nd

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
protection connection until the 1st protection connection is available again. As the protection connection with
lower bandwidth defines the maximum amount of transferable information, the same information is
exchanged via both protection connections. Both protection communications in the device are then of type 1.
[dw_intera, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-52 Data Exchange for 2 Devices, Each Having 2 Protection Connections, Redundant Transmission
Route
Remote Data
With the Remote data function, customer-specific indications and measured values can be communicated via
the protection interface with settable update cycles (priorities).
There are 3 different priorities for the transmission of remote data:
• Priority 1: Use Priority 1 for the transmission of fast protection signals that are transferred and updated
at a maximum of every 20 ms in a telegram.
• Priority 2: Use Priority 2 for the transmission of fast single-point or double-point indications that are
transferred and updated at a maximum of every 40 ms.
• Priority 3: Use Priority 3 for all indications, measured, and metered values that are transferred and
updated a maximum of every 100 ms.
The number of customer-specific signals, indications, and measured values available conform with the
remaining bandwidth. The remaining bandwidth is lower than with all other protection functions (type 2)
when using a line differential protection (type 1). Customer-specific measured values consume more band-
width than single-point indications.
Communication Media
The communication takes place via direct fiber-optic connections, via communication networks or via 2-wire
copper conductors. Siemens recommends a direct fiber-optic connection, as this offers a high transmission
rate and is immune to failures in the communication route while offering the shortest transmission time. This
also enables the transmission of a large amount of remote data in line differential protection applications and
the remote control of remote devices with DIGSI 5.
The distance to be bridged and the transmission paths (communication media) available determine the
settings of the protection interface. External communication converters are used for the connection to
communication networks via G703.1-, X21-, or G703.6 interfaces. The connection to 2-wire copper cores also
takes place via a communication converter. The C37.94 interface, for example, with 2 MBit/s, offers a direct
fiber-optic connection to a multiplexer with the corresponding interface.
Table 3-10 to Table 3-11 show examples of communication connections.
In the case of a direct connection, the transmission distance depends on the fiber type of the optical fiber. This
distance can also be extended via external repeaters.
The modules in the device can be replaced from outside, so that adaptation to a communication route is
possible. In the case of the 820-nm double module USART-AE-2FO, 2 protection-interface channels can be
operated on one module.
The modules can be located at slots E and F in the base device, and at slots N and P in the plug-in module
assembly with integrated power supply.
When using communication converters, the connection from the device to the communication converter by a
module is established via optical fibers.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
Table 3-10 Plug-In Modules for Applications with Protection Communication
Plug-In Modules
Module Type: USART-AY-2LDFO10

Module Type: USART-AH-1LDFO7
Module Type: USART-AX-2LDFO9

Module Type: USART-AW-2LDFO
Module Type: USART-AJ-1LDFO8

Module Type: USART-AG-1LDFO
Module Type: USART-AU-2LDFO
Module Type: USART-AK-1LDFO
Module Type: USART-AV-2LDFO

Module Type: USART-AF-1LDFO
Module Type: ETH-BD-2F011

Physical Connection
1 x optical serial, 1300 nm, duplex LC plug, 24 m via ●
9/125 μm singlemode optical fiber or 4 km via
62.5/125 μm multimode optical fiber
2 x optical serial, 1300 nm, duplex LC plug, 24 km via ●
9/125 μm singlemode optical fiber or 4 km via
62.5/125 μm multimode optical fiber
9/125 μm singlemode optical fiber
1 x optical serial, bidirectional using 1 optical fiber, ●
1300/1550 nm (Tx/Rx), simplex LC plug, 40 km using
1550/1300 nm (Tx/Rx), simplex LC plug, 40 km using
1300/1550 nm (Tx/Rx), 2 x simplex LC plug, 40 km using
1550/1300 nm (Tx/Rx), 2 x simplex LC plug, 40 km using
2 x optical Ethernet 100 Mbit/s, 1300 nm, duplex LC ●
plug, 2 km via 50/125 μm or 62.5/125 μm multimode
optical fiber
7 USART-AH-1LDFO only pairs with USART-AJ-1LDFO or USART-AY-2LDFO

8 USART-AJ-1LDFO only pairs with USART-AH-1LDFO or USART-AX-2LDFO
9 USART-AX-2LDFO only pairs with USART-AJ-1LDFO or USART-AY-2LDFO
10 USART-AY-2LDFO only pairs with USART-AH-1LDFO or USART-AX-2LDFO
11 Suitable for DIGSI 5, IEC 61850, process bus, busbar protection etc.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
Table 3-11 Plug-In Modules USART-AD-1FO and USART-AE-2FO
Plug-In Module
Plug-In Module USART-AD-1FO
USART-AE-2FO
Physical Connector
1 x optical serial, 820 nm, ST connector, 1.5 km via 62.5/125 μm multimode optical fibers ●
2 x optical serial, 820 nm, ST connector, 1.5 km via 62.5/125 μm multimode optical fibers ●
Application
Protection interface (Sync. HDLC, IEEE C37.94) ● ●
NOTE
i The USART plug-in module types can be used in slots E and F in the base module as well as in slots N and P
in the CB202 expansion module. They are not suitable for use in port M in the CB202 expansion module.
[dw_multim, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-53 Connection over Short Distances, 1.5 km to 2 km via Multimode Optical Fiber
[dw_multim-02, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-54 Connection over Maximum 4 km via Multimode Optical Fiber

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
[dw_single2, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-55 Connection via Different Distances via Singlemode Optical Fiber
[dw_attenuator, 2, en_US]
Figure 3-56 Optical Remote Connection with Attenuators
NOTE
i If you use the communication modules USART-AV-2LDFO or USART-AK-2LDFO for transmission routes
under 30 km, then connect 2 attenuators 7XV5107-0AA00. To continue using the duplex LC plug, attach
both attenuators to one end of the protection connection (see Figure 3-56).
[dw_single, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-57 Connection via Singlemode Optical Fiber

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
Figure 3-58 Connection via Communication Network with a G703.1 Interface
The connection to the multiplexer is established via a communication converter with a G703.1 interface (64
kBit/s) or X21 interface (64 kBit/s to 512 kBit/s). You can set the bit rate for the KU-XG-512 (for X21), KU-
XG-256 (for X21), KU-XG-128 (for X21), and KU-XG-64 (for X21 or G703.1) with the parameter Connection
via.
You can find more detailed information in Table 3-12.
Figure 3-59 Connection via Communication Network with a G703.6 Interface
The connection to the multiplexer is established with 512 kBit/s via a communication converter with a G703.6
interface (E1 with 2 MBit/s or T1 with 1.44 MBit/s). The communication converter offers a 2nd interface for the
connection of a further protection interface.
Adjust the setting for the bit rate with KU-2M-512 at 512 kBit/s in accordance with Table 3-12 with the param-
eter Connection via.
[dw_multi_7, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-60 Connection via 2-Wire Copper Cables

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
The connection to a communication converter with an integrated 5-kV isolation voltage is established with
128 kBit/s (KU-KU-128 setting in accordance with Table 3-12). A 20-kV isolation of the 2-wire connection is
possible via an external 7XR9516 isolating transformer.
[dw_repeat, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-61 Direct Fiber-Optic Connection via an External Repeater
The repeater offers an interface for connecting an additional protection interface. The connection to a
repeater is established with 512 kbit/s (repeater 512 setting in accordance with Table 3-12).
[dw_mutip8, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-62 Direct Optical Connection to a Multiplexer with a C37.94 N * 64 kBit/s Interface (Time Slot N =
1; 2 or 8)
NOTE
i The redundancy of different communication connections (for the ring topology) requires rigorous separa-
tion of all devices involved in the communication. Therefore, avoid different communication routes via the
same multiplexer board, as no more substitute paths are possible if the board fails.
Supervision of the Communication

The communication is continuously monitored by the devices and displayed with indications and measured
values.
If a number of defective data telegrams, or no data telegrams at all, are received, this is regarded as a failure
in the communication as soon as a failure time of 100 ms (default setting can be changed) is exceeded. For
each protection interface, a list of the measured values is shown in a window in DIGSI 5 (defective telegrams
per minute/hour; transmitted and received telegrams per minute/hour, percentage fault rate per minute/
hour). A corresponding failure indication is always available. If no alternative communication route exists (as
in the ring topology), the protection function operating with the protection interface is not operating and the
remote data is not updated on the receiver side.
If the communication is interrupted for longer than an adjustable time Data-connection failure, this is
regarded as a communication failure. A corresponding failure indication is always available.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
Time Synchronization via the Protection Interface, Timing Master

All devices in a device combination can synchronize their time with each other. Synchronization is carried out
with millisecond accuracy. The synchronization works independently of the protection function and is used
exclusively for simultaneous time keeping in the devices of a device combination.
The device you set in the parameter Address of device 1 is the device with index 1. This device functions
as the timing master in a device combination. If the timing master is logged off and switched off, the device
with the next highest device index takes on the function of the timing master. The timing master synchronizes
the clocks of the other devices via the protection interfaces.
The time of the timing master itself can be synchronized via the following time sources:
• IRIG B
• DCF77
• IEEE 1588
• SNTP
For this, these time sources must be set as the 1st time source and optionally as the 2nd time source in the
timing master. If available, if the 1st time source in the timing master fails, the system switches over to the
2nd time source.
The following chapters describe how you set a device as a timing master:
• For classic protection communication, refer to Parameter: Address of Device x, Page 129.
• For advanced protection communication, refer to Parameter: Device index, Page 165.
Set the protection interface as the 1st time source in the other devices of the device combination. You can
find the setting value in DIGSI 5 via the Project tree → Parameters → Time settings → Timer → Time
source 1 → PI.
In this way, all events in the devices of the device combination are recorded with the same time and are time-
synchronized even across different switchgears. This simplifies fault analysis and the fault records are recorded
with the same time in all devices.
[dw_time_sy, 2, en_US]
Figure 3-63 Time Synchronization in a Device Combination
Figure 3-63 shows how device 1 with index 1 is synchronized with devices 2, 3, and 4 via the protection inter-
face. Device 1 is the timing master, whose time is synchronized with a selectable, external time source.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
Constellation Measured Values

Constellation measured values are measured values predefined by Siemens with the following properties:
• They are synchronized in the devices in a device combination.
• They are substituted using the protection interface.
• They are available on every device.

You can view the constellation measured values with DIGSI 5.
In the device, current and voltage measured values are displayed in absolute value and phase as a percentage.
100 % conform to the rated current or the rated voltage of the line (see next figure). These measured values
are recorded every 2 seconds by the devices participating in the device combination and then sent to the other
respective devices. At the same time, the current and voltage values of the different devices are time-synchro-
nous with one another.
When displaying the constellation measured values, the local device is prioritized. The device connected
directly with DIGSI 5 is the local device.
For the protection communication, the display of the constellation measured values differs between Type 1
and Type 2.
• Protection communication Type 1:

The phasors of the current and voltage measured values of the local device have an angle of 0°. The
angles of the measured values of the other devices relate to the local values, meaning that the angle
difference to the remote ends is displayed.

The voltage phasor VA of the local device has an angle of 0°. The angles of the other local measured
values and the measured values of the remote devices relate to VA (0°).
You can find these measured values in the device under the following DIGSI mask:
[sc_const mv, 2, en_US]
Figure 3-64 Example of Constellation Measured Values with Phases

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
Multiplex Operation
With the extended protection communication, you have the option of having a physical USART channel used
by 2 logical protection interfaces. In this way, a communication route can be double used, for example to
implement Parallel line protection with Line differential protection without additional hardware. To do this,
configure the channel according to chapter 3.6.6.4 Configuration of the Advanced Protection Communication
in DIGSI 5.
[dw_channel-mux, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-65 Multiplex Operation
NOTE
i Note that in case of multiple use of a physical channel, the available bandwidth is divided equally between
the logical protection interfaces. Therefore, this operating mode is not suitable for baud rates under
128 kBit/s.
3.6.4 Available Variants for the Protection Communication
The following variants are available for the protection communication:
• Classic protection communication

The scope of parameterization is small for the classic protection communication. The classic protection
communication has the following constraints:
– IP-based communication protocols are not supported.
– If you must change the number of devices within a device combination, this results in an increased
parameterization effort.
• Advanced protection communication

– The advanced protection communication supports IP-based communication protocols.
– You can easily expand the number of devices in a device combination later on.
– The Advanced protection communication is visible in the DIGSI 5 project tree.
NOTE
i Do not confuse the 2 variants of the protection communication with type 1 and type 2 of the protection
communication!
The following decision tree helps you to select the variant:

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
[dw_decision_protcom, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-66 Decision Tree to Select the Variant of the Protection Communication
(1) Preconfigured parameter sets are new, prepared parameter sets which can be used as templates.
You start with the template and adapt the configuration of the protection communication to the
specific requirements. The retrospective adaptation of the configuration is only possible with the
advanced protection communication.
NOTE
i If you are unsure about the suitable variant for your use case during selection, use the advanced protection
communication.
NOTE
i If you want to change an existing classic protection communication to an advanced protection communica-
tion or vice versa, a window appears in DIGSI where you are asked whether you want to keep the mapping
or not - that is, the communication settings or communication-information routing that has previously
been set. In this case, click No

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
3.6.5 Classic Protection Communication
3.6.5.1 Overview
The classic protection communication enables the data exchange between the devices via synchronous serial
point-to-point connections from 64 kBit/s to 2 mBit/s. These connections can be directly via optical fiber or via
other communication media, for example, via dedicated lines or via communication networks. IP-based
communication is not supported.
The function groups of the classic protection communication always support a fixed number of devices in the
device combination:
• 2-device protection communication
3.6.5.2 Classic Protection Communication in the Overall System

The classic protection communication is integrated as follows in the overall system:
[dw_simple_protcom_compl_system, 2, en_US]
Figure 3-67 Classic Protection Communication in the Overall System
(1) The device automatically routes the connection between the protection FG and the Protection
communication FG in DIGSI 5.
3.6.5.3 Structure of the Function Group

If you select the communication protocol Protection interface and the amount of devices on a channel in
the communication module, the classic function group Protection communication is automatically created.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
The classic function group Protection communication contains the following functionalities and function
blocks (FB):
• The Device combination
• A Protection interface
• The FBs for the Remote data
• The FB External synchronization for the synchronization of the transferred data through an external
synchronous pulse (1-second-pulse, PPS12)
[dw_structure_FG_protcom_simple, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-68 Structure of the Classic FG Protection Communication
The function Device combination manages the devices that exchange data via the protection communica-
tion. In the device-combination settings, you set the general settings for the device combination and the
device addresses.
The function Device combination issues the following indications:
• General indications like the

– Amount of device
– Type and status of the device topology
• Indications of the devices in the device combination like:

– The availability of the device
– The state of the device, that is whether the device is logged on or off in the device combination
Measured values that are acquired and exchanged at the same time in the devices are transmitted via the
protection communication. The synchronization of the measured-value acquisition can be done either inter-
nally via the telegram measurement or via an external synchronous pulse (1-second pulse, PPS) using the
function block External synchronization. The external synchronization is switched on in the function block of
the protection interface. You can find the indications of the external synchronization in the function block
External synchronization.
The function block Remote data is used to transfer selected and user-specific signals and measured values
from the SIPROTEC 5 system. You select the signals and measured values to be transmitted in the DIGSI
communication mapping. The remote data does not issue status indications.
The function block Protection interface is automatically connected to a physical channel of a communication
module and can therefore send signals and measured values to the neighboring device or receive them from
the neighboring device. You can find the status indications of the FB Protection interface n in the DIGSI 5
Information routing in the function group Protection communication.
12 PPS - Pulse Per Second

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
NOTE
i In contrast to the protection interface in the extended protection communication, the protection interface
in the classic protection communication is automatically connected to a physical channel of the communi-
cation module (refer to Figure 3-67).
3.6.5.4 Configuration of the Protection Interface in DIGSI 5

If the device is provided with modules, proceed as follows:
• Select the desired communication module in the rear view of the device.
• In the Properties of the communication module > Protocols > Channel x Protocols, select the
Protection interface protocol.
[sc_PDC_classic_protocol, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-69 Selection of the Communication Protocol

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
• Then select the number of devices under Mapping (see next figure).
Depending on the device, the selection of device combinations can be restricted to 2 or 3 devices.
[sc_PDC_classic_mapping, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-70 Selecting the Device Combination
NOTE
i The function groups shown in Figure 3-70 are not available in the DIGSI library.
You can change the number of devices (for example 2 protection communication devices) any way you
like via the Mapping text box.
If you change the number of devices via the Mapping text box, all activated remote data, settings of the
device combination and of the protection interface are lost.
If the module slot is not yet provided with modules, proceed as follows:
• Select the desired communication module in the rear view of the device.
• Select the module from the catalog and drag it to a channel. Thus is the channel configured with a
module. DIGSI 5 indicates whether the module can be used for protection communication under Device
Information.
• Use the Protocols text box to select the Protection interface, see Figure 3-69.
• Then use the Mapping text box to select the number of devices, for example 2 devices protection com.,
see Figure 3-70.
3.6.5.5 Setting Notes for the Device Combination

In the Project tree > Hardware and protocols in the Device view, select the communication module. In the
properties of the communication module, you can find the setting sheets for the parameterization of the
device-combination settings and the settings for protection communication.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
[sc_config1, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-71 Selecting the Protocol: Communication via the Protection Interface
[sc_config, 4, en_US]
Figure 3-72 Protection-Interface Initialization and Configuration
Changes in the device-combination settings are always visible on the other channel as well. All further param-
eters can be set separately for individual channels.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
Parameter: Address of Device x
• Default setting (_:5131:102) Address of device 1 = 101

The parameters Address of device 1 to Address of device 6 can be used to give an address to each
device. Set a unique and unambiguous address for each device.
NOTE
i The number of device addresses displayed corresponds to that of the number selected during the device-
combination configuration.
NOTE
i The device 1 is the timing-master device in a device combination.

If all other devices in the device combination are to obtain their time from the timing-master device,
consider the following:
• Under Address of device 1, set the address for the timing-master device.
• Parameterize the other devices in such a way that they get their time from the timing-master device
via the protection connections.
For more information, refer to 3.7.3 Function Description. Select Protection interface as the
adjustable synchronization option.
In the timing-master device, you must not set the protection interface as the synchronization source!
Parameter: Local device is device
• Default setting (_:5131:101) Local device is device = 1

With the Local device is device parameter, you set the index (number) of your device in the device
combination. A maximum of 6 devices can be available in a device combination.
APPLICATION EXAMPLE
You have a device combination with 2 devices.
For example, in DIGSI 5, select the parameter setting Address of device 1 with the parameter value 101
for device 1 and the parameter setting Address of device 2 with the parameter value 102 for device 2.
Then, use the Local device is device parameter to set the index of the local device. The local device is
the device that you parametrize.
The addresses must be set identically for all devices in the device combination. A functional protection
communication requires that you also assign the same index in all devices of the device combination for a
device with a unique address.
Parameter: Lowest appearing bit rate
• Default setting (_:5131:122) Lowest appearing bit rate = 64 kBit/s

The Lowest appearing bit rate parameter is used to set the lowest bit rate occurring in the device
group. Set the lowest value in each device with a three-end constellation with 2 fiber-optic connections (2
MBit/s) and a 64 kBit/s connection with the lowest value (64 kBit/s). This value determines the maximum

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
number of selected and self-created signals and measured values which are to be transmitted within the
device combination (refer to 3.6.5.9 Configuring Remote Data).
Apart from the default value, you can also set the following bit rates:
• 128 kBit/s
• 512 kBit/s
• 2048 kBit/s
NOTE
i If you use optical fibers for a connection between the devices, set the value to 2048 kBit/s.
Parameter: Number of devices
• Default setting (_:5131:125) Number of devices = 6

With the Number of devices parameter, you set the number of devices actually connected via protection
interfaces. This parameter is set by default to the maximum number of devices permitted in the device combi-
nation.
With this parameter, you can configure a planned final expansion of a system with a planned number of
devices already at this point in time and commission it with a lower number of devices. When configuring the
protection interface, select the number of devices present in the final phase of the system in the Mapping text
box. If you set the parameter Number of devices to a smaller value than the maximum value, you achieve
a functional protection communication with fewer devices. In this procedure, all settings, for example,
routing, you made for the device combination are retained, even if you subsequently increase the number of
devices. For example, if you operate a planned 3-device protection communication as a 2-device protection
communication, you must set the parameter Number of devices = 2. If you expand the system later,
change the Number of devices parameter to the planned maximum number.
For more detailed information regarding the configuration of the protection interface, refer to chapter
3.6.5.4 Configuration of the Protection Interface in DIGSI 5.
NOTE
i The Number of devices parameter is only visible for device combinations with more than 2 devices.
Set the same number of devices used in all devices that are part of the device combination.
Connection mode
• Default setting Connection mode = SIPROTEC 5

With the Connection mode parameter, you select the device type with which the SIPROTEC 5 device works
in the device combination. As soon as a SIPROTEC 4 device works in the device combination, you must set
Connection mode parameter accordingly.
SIPROTEC 5 The SIPROTEC 5 device only works with SIPROTEC 5 devices in the device
combination.
SIPROTEC 4 7SD610 The SIPROTEC 5 device works with at least one SIPROTEC 4 differential
protection device 7SD610 with firmware version V4.70 and higher in the
device combination.
SIPROTEC 4 7SD5 The SIPROTEC 5 device works with at least one SIPROTEC 4 differential
protection device 7SD5x with firmware version V4.70 and higher in the
device combination.
SIPROTEC 4 7SA5/6 The SIPROTEC 5 device works with at least one SIPROTEC 4 distance protec-
tion device 7SA522 and 7SA6x with firmware version V4.70 and higher in
the device combination.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
Protection-Interface Information Transfer

With the protection-interface information transfer, customer-specific indications and measured values can be
communicated via the protection interface with settable update cycles (priorities).
There are 3 different priorities when transferring protection-interface information:
• Priority 1: Use Priority 1 for the transmission of fast protection signals.
• Priority 2: Use Priority 2 for the transmission of fast single-point or double-point indications.
• Priority 3: Use Priority 3 for all indications, measured and metered values.
The number of customer-specific signals, indications, and measured values conform with the remaining band-
width. Customer-specific measured values consume more bandwidth than single-point indications.
3.6.5.6 Setting Notes on Selecting the Communication Medium
• Default setting (_:105) Connection via = fiber optic

The Connection via parameter is used to set the bit rate required for the protection interface. Different
discrete values can be entered depending on the means of communication (see following table).
Also refer to Communication Media, Page 114
Table 3-12 Means of Communication
Means of Communication See Setting Value Bit Rate

Fiber-optic direct connection Figure 3-5 fiber optic 2 MBit/s
3 to
Figure 3-5
7
CC-XG-512 communication converter Figure 3-5 CCXG 512 kBit/s 512 kBit/s
8
8
8
Repeater 512 communication converter Figure 3-6 repeater 512 kBit/s 512 kBit/s
1
CC-CC-128 Communication converter Figure 3-6 CCPW 128 kBit/s 128 kBit/s
0
CC-2M-512 Communication converter Figure 3-5 CC2M 512 kBit/s 512 kBit/s
9
Multiplexer with C37.94 interface Figure 3-6 C37.94 1 * 64 kBit/s 64 kBit/s
2 C37.94 2 * 64 kBit/s 128 kBit/s
C37.94 8 * 64 kBit/s 512 kBit/s
Other (freely adjustable bit rates for a direct 64 kBit/s 64 kBit/s
connection for special applications) 128 kBit/s 128 kBit/s
512 kBit/s 512 kBit/s
2048 kBit/s 2,048
kBit/s
3.6.5.7 Setting Notes for the Classic Protection Interface
Parameter: Max. error rate per hour
• Default setting (_:5161:105) Max. error rate per hour = 1.0%

If the number of faulty telegrams per hour exceeds the value set in the parameter Max. error rate per
hour, you receive the error message Error rate / hour exc..

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
Parameter: Max. error rate per min
• Default setting (_:5161:106) Max. error rate per min = 1.0%

If the number of faulty telegrams per minute exceeds the value set in the parameter Max. error rate per
min, you receive the error message Error rate / min exc..
Parameter: Disturbance alarm after
• Default setting (_:5161:107) Disturbance alarm after = 100 ms

With the parameter Disturbance alarm after, you determine the time delay after which defective or
missing telegrams are signaled as faulty with the indication Status of lay. 1 and 2 is PI data
fault.
Parameter: Transm. fail. alarm after
• Default setting (_:5161:108) Transm. fail. alarm after = 6.0 s

With the parameter Transm. fail. alarm after, you determine the time delay after which a failure of
the communication is signaled with the indication Status of lay. 1 and 2 is PI data failure.
Parameter: Delay time threshold
• Default setting (_:5161:109) Delay time threshold = 30.0 ms

The time taken to transmit and receive a signal via a protection connection is the signal-transit time. You can
monitor the signal-transit time. For the Delay time threshold, the default setting is selected in such a
way that normal communication networks do not exceed the signal-transit time. If this signal-transit time is
exceeded during operation (for example upon switchover to another transmission route), the indication Time
delay exceeded is issued.
Increased runtimes only affect the operate time, and therefore the fault-clearing time of the protection func-
tions using the protection interface. If you use the Line differential protection function, this remains in
effect.
Parameter: Difference Tx and Rx time
• Default setting (_:5161:110) Difference Tx and Rx time = 0.1 ms

For time synchronization of the measured values with microsecond accuracy using telegram measurement,
the signal-transit times in the transmission and reception direction must be approximately the same. The
device monitors the signal-transit times in the transmission and reception direction.
With the parameter Difference Tx and Rx time, you can set a maximum permitted signal-transit time
difference between the send and receive paths (runtimes unbalanced). Set the parameter Difference Tx
and Rx time to the maximum difference expected.
Set this value to 0 for a direct fiber-optic connection. A higher value is necessary for transmission via commu-
nication networks. Reference value: 0.1 ms (recommended setting value).
If the difference in the signal-transit times between the send and receive path exceeds the value set, the indi-
cation Time delay jump is issued.
If the difference in the signal-transit times between the send and receive path exceeds the value set and
remains for more than 5 s, the indication Time delay different is issued. The Line differential protec-
tion function is no longer working properly and is ineffective.
NOTE
i The parameter Difference Tx and Rx time only appears when the function Line differential protec-
tion is instantiated and the parameter External synch. only is not set to Synchronization.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
NOTE
i If you use a multiplexer with a C37.94 interface as a means of communication, Siemens recommends a
setting value of 0.25 ms to 0.6 ms.
Parameter: Synchronization
• Default setting (_:5161:113) Synchronization = External synchron. off

With the parameter Synchronization, you control the time synchronization of the measured values with
microsecond accuracy.
If the SIPROTEC device operates with the external synchronization, use the Synchronization parameter to
define how the protection is activated after restoration of the communication connection (basic state or after
transmission fault). See Figure 3-74.
External synchron. off The external synchronization is disabled:
No external synchronization is performed at the protection interface. Select
this setting value if you do not expect any differences between the signal-
transit times in the transmission and reception directions. Then the meas-
ured values are only synchronized internally with the telegram measure-
ment.
Telegr. and ext. synch. Synchronization via telegram measurement and external synchronization:
The measured values are synchronized internally with the telegram meas-
urement, supported by the external synchronization. You can set the
external synchronization with the parameter External synchroniza-
tion. The synchronization is possible via the IEEE 1588 protocol or via the
synchronous pulse of a satellite receiver.
In this case, an existing line differential protection is only released when a
new connection is established and one of the following conditions is met.
• The protection connection is synchronized with the help of the

external synchronization.
• Symmetric signal-transit times are signaled via the binary input signal
>Sync reset or the controllable Reset synchronization. This
means that the signal-transit times are the same in the send and
receive direction.
Telegr. or ext. synch. Synchronization via telegram measurement or external synchronization:
urement, supported by the external synchronization. You can set the
external synchronization with the parameter External synchroniza-
tion. The synchronization is possible via the IEEE 1588 protocol or via the
An available line differential protection is enabled immediately upon
renewed establishment of connection (data telegrams are received). The
internal synchronization is used up to synchronization.
External synch. only External synchronization only:
The measured values are synchronized only through the external synchroni-
zation.
You can set the external synchronization with the parameter External
synchronization. The synchronization is possible via the IEEE 1588
protocol or via the synchronous pulse of a satellite receiver.
Parameter: External synchronization
• Default setting (_:5161:117) External synchronization = PPS electrical (Port G)

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
The parameter External synchronization is visible only if the parameter Synchronization is not set
to External synchron. off.
External synchronization is possible separately for each protection interface.
PPS electrical (Port G) The electrical synchronous pulse of a satellite receiver (1-second-pulse,
PPS13) is the synchronization source on the port G, the time synchronization
interface.
IEEE 1588 The time synchronization protocol IEEE 1588 for an Ethernet-BD communi-
cation module is used for synchronization.
NOTE
i The configuration option IEEE 1588 is only visible if the device has an Ethernet-BD communication
module and you have selected the communication protocol IEEE 1588, see the following figure.
[sc_BD_1588, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-73 Ethernet-BD Communication Module: Selection of the IEEE 1588 Protocol
NOTE
i External synchronization takes into account the signal-transit time in the transmission and reception direc-
tions. If external synchronization fails for a short time, for example, due to a receiving interference or an
unfavorable satellite position for a brief period, internal synchronization via telegram measurement is still
active.
13 PPS - Pulse Per Second

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
NOTE
i In contrast to the protection interface in extended protection communication, the protection interface in
classic protection communication is automatically connected to a channel of a communication module (see
Figure 3-67).
Protection-Interface Information Transfer

With the protection-interface information transfer, customer-specific indications and measured values can be
communicated via the protection interface with settable update cycles (priorities).
There are 3 different priorities for the transmission of protection-interface information:
• Priority 1: Use Priority 1 for the transmission of fast protection signals that are transferred and updated
at a maximum of every 20 ms in a telegram.
• Priority 2: Use Priority 2 for the transmission of fast single-point or double-point indications that are
transferred and updated at a maximum of every 40 ms.
• Priority 3: Use Priority 3 for all indications, measured, and metered values that are transferred and
updated a maximum of every 100 ms.
The number of customer-specific signals, indications, and measured values conform with the remaining band-
width. Customer-specific measured values consume more bandwidth than single-point indications.
Parameter: Max. inaccuracy
• Default setting (_:5161:119) Max. inaccuracy = 0.500 ms

With the parameter Max. inaccuracy, you configure the maximum expected inaccuracy of the synchroni-
zation sourced used. The set value is only effective if the synchronization source used does not supply any
information on the current inaccuracy in the synchronization signals. If you have not used any of the informa-
tion on the inaccuracy of the synchronization source used, use the default setting.
NOTE
i The inaccuracy of the synchronization source enters the stabilization of the Line differential protection as
an error signal.
This means that a greater inaccuracy increases the calculated restraining quantity and makes the Line
differential protection less sensitive.
If IEEE 1588 is used as the synchronization source in the synchronization status SmpSynch = global, accu-
racy values are supplied with the synchronization signals and the parameter Max. inaccuracy is not used.
If the supplied accuracy values become invalid, the value set in the parameter Max. inaccuracy is used.
If the synchronization source IEEE 1588 works in the synchronization status SmpSynch = local, then the
value set in the parameter Max. inaccuracy is used as permanently available inaccuracy.
If the synchronization source PPS electrical (Port G) or PPS optical (USART) is used, then the value set in the
parameter Max. inaccuracy is used as permanently available inaccuracy.
If a USART communication module with the PPS protocol and the PPS generatoroperating mode is also used
as a synchronization source at the same time, the value set in the parameter Max. inaccuracy is used as
permanently available inaccuracy.
Parameter: Check synchron.-source
• Default setting value (_:5161:121) Check synchron.-source = yes

With the parameter Check synchron.-source, you can switch on or off the synchronization-sources
check. During the check of the synchronization sources on the ends of a protection connection, a check is
conducted as to whether both synchronization sources are working in the same synchronization status
SmpSynch.
If both synchronization sources are working in the synchronization status SmpSynch = global, the check has
been passed.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
If both synchronization sources are working in the synchronization statusSmpSynch = local, that is decou-
pled from a global reference time, an additional check is conducted as to whether the synchronization source
(gmIdentity) is the same. Synchronicity can only be guaranteed if the synchronization sources are the
same.
If the synchronization sources display a different synchronization status, that is one displays the synchroniza-
tion status SmpSynch = local and the other the synchronization status SmpSynch = global, synchroniza-
tion cannot be guaranteed.
Siemens recommends using the default setting Check synchron.-source = yes.
If you have problems with the synchronization-source check, you can switch off the synchronization-source
check. Switch off the synchronization-source check only if the synchronization sources are synchronous at the
end of their protection connection.
The parameter Check synchron.-source is visible only if the parameter (_:5161:113) Synchroni-
zation is set to External synch. only.
NOTE
i If you use PPS electrical (Port G) as the synchronization source, the synchronization status (SmpSynch) is
permanently set to global.
If you use PPS optical (USART) as the synchronization source, you can use the setting (_:107)
Received. SmpSynch to set the synchronization status to (SmpSynch) local or global.
For synchronization with microsecond accuracy, for example with the Line differential protection, adjust
the setting (_:107) to Accepted. SmpSynch = global.
3.6.5.8 Indications and Measured Values in the Classic Protection Interface

Each individual protection interface provides different indications for commissioning and diagnostics of
communication:
Indication (_:5161:301) Status of lay. 1 and 2

The indication (_:5161:301) Status of lay. 1 and 2 informs you about the status of the connec-
tion. The following indications are possible:
Table 3-13 Status Indications Status of lay. 1 and 2
Indication Description
initialized: The protection interface is not connected and is in the Initial state.
PI connected: The protection interface is connected to the protection interface of the
partner device.
PI data fault: The protection interface has not received any valid telegrams for the time
set in parameter (_:5161:107) Disturbance alarm after.
PI data failure: The protection interface has not received any valid telegrams for the time
set in parameter (_:5161:108) Transm. fail. alarm after.
not existing: The protection interface has not been assigned to a communication
channel.

The indication (_:5161:302) Status of lay. 3 and 4 informs about errors during the connection
establishment. The following indications values are possible:
Status Indication Description
no error: No errors occurred during the connection establishment.
SW ver.incomp.: The connection is not established because the firmware versions of the
devices are incompatible.
Update the firmware.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
Status Indication Description

wrong dev. ID: The connection is not established because the device address of the local
device or the partner device is incorrect or set incorrectly.
Check the settings for the parameters Address of device 1 to
Address of device n (_:5131:102 and following).
const.sett.error: The connection is not established because the parameters are set differ-
ently.
Check whether the parameter (_:5131:122) Lowest appearing bit
rate has been set the same in all devices in the device combination.
diff.sett error: The connection is not established because the parameters are set differ-
ently.
The line differential protection settings for the connected devices are
incompatible. Check whether the devices are set to operate with or without
line differential protection.
The rated current of the line (parameter (_:9001:101) Rated
current) must have the same setting in all devices.
With a transformer in the line, the (_:9001:103) Rated apparent
power must be set to the same value in all devices.
net mirroring The connection is not established. The protection interface is receiving its
own data.
Check the wiring.
wrong dev. idx. The connection is not established because the device index of the local
device or the partner device is incorrect.
Check the setting for the parameter (_:5131:101) Local device is
device.
Furthermore, the following output signals are available:

Output Signal Description
(_:5161:303) Connection The signal Connection broken indicates that during a parameterized
broken time (parameter (_:5161:107) Disturbance alarm after) no tele-
grams or faulty telegrams were continuously received. If the indication
Connection broken is issued, the affected protection connection is
reset. This can cause the blocking of an active line differential protection or
a ring topology can change to a chain topology.
(_:5161:316) Error The signal Error rate / min exc. indicates that the set maximum
rate / min exc. error rate per minute (parameter (_:5161:106) Max. error rate
per min) has been exceeded.
In this manner, a brief increase of the operate time and thus of the fault-
clearing time is possible for the protection functions using the protection
interface. If you use the Line differential protection function, this remains
in effect.
(_:5161:317) Error The signal Error rate / hour exc. indicates that the set maximum
rate / hour exc. error rate per hour (Parameter (_:5161:105) Max. error rate per
hour) has been exceeded.
in effect.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions

(_:5161:318) Time delay The signal Time delay exceeded indicates that the threshold value for
exceeded the set signal-transit time (Parameter (_:5161:109) Delay time
threshold) has been exceeded.
Increased transmission times only affect the operate time, and therefore the
fault-clearing time of the protection functions using the protection inter-
face. If you use the Line differential protection function, this remains in
effect.
(_:5161:319) Time delay The signal Time delay different indicates that the threshold value for
different the difference in signal runtimes in the transmission and reception direction
(asymmetrical runtimes) has been exceeded. The setting value results from
the setting value of the parameter (_:5161:110) Difference Tx and
Rx time.
The indication is visible only if the parameter (_:5161:113) Synchro-
nization is not set to External synch. only.
If the indication Time delay different appears, the Line differential
protection function is no longer working properly and is ineffective.
(_:5161:320) Time delay The signal Time delay jump indicates that the signal runtimes of the
jump data changed abruptly. This is caused by a switchover of the communica-
tion path in the communication network.
(_:5161:321) PI The signal PI synchronized indicates that the synchronization with
synchronized microsecond accuracy of the measured values transferred between the local
device and partner device is working correctly.
(_:5161:340) Telegram The signal Telegram lost indicates that an expected telegram has failed
lost to arrive or a faulty telegram has been received. Reasons for this can be for
example switching operations in the primary system or operations on the
components of the communication network.
If you want to assign the communication failures or faults to other events,
route the signal Telegram lost temporarily into the operational log.
Note: If the signal is constantly routed, the operational log can overflow.
Siemens recommends routing the signal only for clarification of problems.
(_:5161:343) Partner The indication shows the address of the partner device. A value of 0 means
that no partner address is available.
(_:5161:323) PPS: time This indication is only visible if you are working with a synchronous pulse.
del. unsym. The indication shows that the difference in the signal runtimes between the
sending and receiving path exceeds the value set with the parameter
(_:5161:110) Difference Tx and Rx time.
Note: The Line differential protection function remains effective.
(_:5161:324) PI with This indication is only visible if you are working with a synchronous pulse.
PPS synchron. This indication is only visible if, in parallel to synchronization with the
synchronization pulse, you are also working with the synchronization via
telegram measurement. If both synchronization methods are working prop-
erly, the indication PI with PPS synchron. = RAISING is generated.
Measured Values of the Protection Interface

The protection interface provides the following measured value for the diagnosis of the protection-interface
communication:

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
Measured Value Description

(_:5161:308) Tx tel/h Telegrams transmitted during the last hour
(_:5161:309) Rx tel/h Telegrams received during the last hour
(_:5161:310) Tx tel/min Telegrams transmitted during the last minute
(_:5161:311) Rx tel/min Telegrams received during the last minute
(_:5161:312) Tx err/h Transmission failure rate during the last hour
(_:5161:313) Rx err/h Receive error rate during the last hour
(_:5161:314) Tx err/min Transmission failure rate during the last minute
(_:5161:315) Rx err/min Receive error rate during the last minute
(_:5161:325) Aver.Δt Average singal runtime (average value of the runtime in transmission and
reception path divided by 2, without external synchronization)
(_:5161:326) Rec. Δt Signal runtime for reception path (with external synchronization)
(_:5161:327) Sen. Δt Signal runtime for transmission path (with external synchronization)
(_:5161:334) Number of telegram failures within the last minute
Miss.tel/min
(_:5161:335) Miss.tel/h Number of telegram failures within the last hour
(_:5161:336) Miss.tel/d Number of telegram failures within the last day
(_:5161:337) Miss.tel/w Number of telegram failures within the last week
(_:5161:338) M. loss/d Longest lasting telegram failure within the last day
(_:5161:339) M. loss/w Longest lasting telegram failures within the last week
(_:5161:331) Recept. Receipt of a telegram (0 = no receipt, 1 = receipt)
You can use this indication to make the telegram exchange visible in the
fault record.
NOTE
i You can reset the measured values of the protection interface directly in the device. Proceed as follows:
Device functions > x Device protection comm. > Protection interface y > Release measured values.
Indications of External Synchronization

The following indications are visible only if the parameter (_:5161:117) External synchronization
is set to PPS electrical (Port G).
• (_:9181:501) >PPS pulse loss

• (_:9181:301) PPS pulse loss
• (_:9181:302) PPS pulse
• (_:9181:303) PPS pulse OK
The following indications are visible only if the parameter (_:5161:117) External synchronization
is set to IEEE 1588.
• (_:304) Synchronization loss

• (_:305) Synchronization OK
• (_:306) Synchronization pulse

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
(_:9181:500) >Block This indication shows the blocking of the external synchronization via a
stage binary input. The external synchronization can be set to inactive through
this binary input indication.
(_:9181:501) >PPS pulse The binary input (_:9181:501) >PPS pulse loss can be used to
loss signal an externally detected failure in the PPS synchronous pulse (for
example, an error message from the satellite receiver). Setting this binary
input also leads to the indication (_:9181:301) PPS pulse loss. The
external synchronization detects immediately that there is a problem with
the connected synchronization pulse. Otherwise, the problem will only be
noticed after approx. 2.1 s – after the test for synchronous-pulse failure.
(_:9181:301) PPS pulse This indication shows that the synchronization has failed. This can be due to
loss the following reasons:
• The input indication (_:9181:501) >PPS pulse loss has

occurred.
• The synchronous pulse has failed.
• The quality of the synchronous pulse is inadequate.
• There is another problem with the synchronization source.
If no further PPS synchronous pulse is received within 2.1 s, the time-out
monitoring responds. If no new second pulse occurs after the expiry of the
monitoring time, the indication (_:9181:301) PPS pulse loss is
issued (see Figure 3-74).
(_:9181:302) PPS pulse This indication displays the synchronous pulse directly. As a rule, one pulse
is generated per second. This indication works well to make the synchro-
nous pulse visible.
(_:9181:303) PPS pulse This indication shows that the synchronization is working properly.
OK
(_:9181:304) Synchroni- The synchronization has failed. This can be due to a problem with the
zation loss synchronization source.
(_:9181:305) Synchroni- The synchronization is working properly.
zation OK
(_:9181:306) Synchroni- You can use this indication to make the virtual synchronous pulse visible. As
zation pulse a rule, one pulse is generated per second.
(_:9181:307) Synchron. impre- If the set synchronization source operates in the global synchronization
cise status (SmpSynch) and the time of the synchronization source deviates
from the global time by more than 0.5 ms, the indication Synchron.
impreciseis generated and the Line differential protection becomes
ineffective.
The indication Synchron. imprecise is visible only if the parameter
External synchronization is set to IEEE 1588.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
[lo_pps_syn, 2, en_US]
Figure 3-74 Logic for the Generation of the Indication PPS pulse loss
3.6.5.9 Configuring Remote Data

Between the devices in a device combination, a data bar is exchanged which can be described or read by the
devices. This can be used for exchanging various signals between the devices. In this case, each signal
demands a certain number of data fields.
[dw_data, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-75 Data Bar Exchanged Between Devices
The data bar is divided into 3 priorities, which also have different transmission rates and data volumes.
For all signals to be sent, the basic principle is that only pure data contents are transmitted. The quality (for
example, Valid) is not automatically transmitted as well. If you want to transmit the quality as well (for
example, for further processing of GOOSE messages), the quality must be transmitted separately (for example,
by using CFC). If a signal that has a test flag is transmitted (because its function is in test mode, for example),
all signals are provided with a test flag on the receiving side. If the connection is broken, all received signals
are flagged with the quality Invalid. If desired, the value can also be set to a predefined state after a select-
able dropout time or the last value received can be retained (Hold setting). This can be configured separately
for each received signal (see Table 3-17).
NOTE
i For ACT type signals, only the phase information is transmitted.
Signals that are transferred data fields of priority 1 are sent with every telegram. They are preferably used for
the transmission of rapid signals, for example, release for circuit-breaker intertripping. A strictly deterministic,
rapid transmission is required there.
Signals of priority 2 are transmitted with at least every 2nd telegram. For bit rates >256 kbit, there are no
differences between priority 1 and priority 2.
Priority 3 signals are transmitted at least every 100 ms. This priority is used for transmission of measured and
metered values. Complex values must be routed separately as the real and the imaginary part for transmission.
Measured-value thresholds that lead to an updating of a measured value are set centrally as a property of the

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
measured value. These measured-value thresholds apply with the corresponding reporting, for example, also
for the transfer via IEC 61850 to a substation automation technology.
Signals which are written to a data area x under a priority on the data bar must be routed to an indication of
the same type in the device reading this information. Otherwise, they are processed incorrectly on the
receiving side. The data bar is organized in terms of bits. For information on the bit requirement of each signal
type, refer to Table 3-16.
Table 3-14 and Table 3-15 show the number of data areas in the data bar in relation to the available baud
rate.
NOTE
i Set the parameter Lowest appearing bit rate in each device for the protection interfaces in a device
combination. This determines the number of data areas.
If, for example, in a device combination with 3 devices with a type 2 chain topology 2 devices are connected
via direct optical fibers and 2 devices with a bit rate of 64 kBit/s, the 64 kBit/s section is the limiting factor for
the entire device combination.
Table 3-14 Available Bits - Minimum Constellation Baud Rate 64/128 kBit/s
Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 3

Type 1 8 bits 24 bits 128 bits
Table 3-15 Available Bits - Minimum Constellation Baud Rate 512/2048 kBit/s
Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 3

Table 3-16 Requirement in Bits
Signal Type Size in Bits

SP (single-point indication) 1 bit
DP (double-point indication) 2 bits
IN (metered values) 32 bits
MW (measured values)14 32 bits
ACT 4 bits
Table 3-17 Possible Dropout Values
Signal Type Dropout Thresholds

SP (single-point indication) Outgoing, Incoming, Hold
DP (double-point indication) On, Off, Intermediate Position, Disturbed Position,
Hold
IN (metered values) 0, Hold
MW (measured values) 0, Hold
ACT Hold
NOTE
i If the protection link fails, these values can be set on the receiver side.
14 The complex phasors of a measuring point are prerouted

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
Remote Data Transmission: Routing the Indications to the Protection Interface

The transmission is organized in the form of a data bar which is continuously exchanged between the devices.
See the previous figure.
A device indication or measured value is routed to a definite data area of the bar. The following figures show
the routing for a communication topology of protection interface type 2.
To transmit signals to other devices, these signals must be routed in the communication matrix under
Transmit. Add a User-defined function group and a User-defined block to the bay from the Global Library.
Go to User-defined signals and add a Double-point indication (DPS), for example, a switch position that is
transferred by device 1. A double-point indication occupies 2 positions on the data bar.
[sc_txrmbb, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-76 Routing of Double-Point Indications Routed to Binary Inputs to be Transmitted

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
[sc_txcobb, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-77 Routing of a Double-Point Indication (Transmit) to the Protection Interface in Device 1
The following figure shows the routing in the 2nd device. Here, the signal with priority 1 will be routed to
position 1. As a user, you are therefore responsible for the correct routing.
[sc_rxcobb, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-78 Routing of a Double-Point Indication (Receive) to the Protection Interface in Device 2
The signals of the 1st device are linked with the signal (Receive) in the 2nd device. This takes place via the
data areas at positions 1 and 2 of the data bar, which transfer the state of the indications. Other devices can
also read this information and link it to their internal signals. Here, too, the secure state, which is assumed
when the protection connection is interrupted, is entered. This state depends on the information. For single-

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
point indications, the condition is 0 or 1. For double-point indications, the bit combinations 00, 01, 10 or 11
are possible. Siemens recommends indicating 00 as disturbed position with outage of the data connection.
You can transfer up to 250 customer-specific indications and measured values per device.
3.6.5.10 Constellation Measured Values for Type 1 and Type 2
NOTE
i The constellation measured values are only available for the FG Line.
Each device in the device combination determines measured values predefined by Siemens, known as constel-
lation measured values. You can find the constellation measured values in the DIGSI 5 information routing
under the FG n Device protection comm. > Constell. measured values. The following measured values and
indications are issued for each device:
Measured Value Meaning
(_:1351:6811:302) Vph This measured value shows the voltage of the 3 phases that is synchronized
with all devices of the device combination. The absolute value and angle are
issued for each phase.
(_:1351:6811:303) Iph This measured value shows the current of the 3 phases that is synchronized
(_:1351:6811:300) Dev.adr. This indication shows the device address. This allows you to assign the
measured values and the circuit-breaker position in a better way.
(_:1351:6811:301) CB This indication shows the position of the local circuit breaker and can have
the following values:
• 0:
The switch position of the local circuit breaker is unknown.
• 1
The local circuit breaker is open.
• 2
The local circuit breaker is closed.
The constellation measured values have the following properties:
• They are available on every device in the device combination.

100 % conform to the rated current or the rated voltage of the line (see Figure 3-79). These measured values
are recorded every 2 seconds by the devices and then sent to the other respective devices. At the same time,
the current and voltage values of the different devices are time-synchronous with one another.
When displaying the constellation measured values, the local device is prioritized. The device connected
The angle reference depends on the type of the FG Protection communication used:

– The angle values of the voltages show the angle difference between the local and the remote
voltage. The local voltage serves as the reference with an angle of 0°.
– The angle values of the currents show the angle difference between the local and the remote
current. The local current serves as the reference with an angle of 0°.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions

The angles of the phase-to-ground voltages and the phase currents relate to the voltage VA of the remote
device.
3.6.5.11 Settings

Device combin.
_:5131:102 Device combin.:Address 1 to 65534 101
of device 1
of device 2
of device 3
of device 4
of device 5
of device 6
_:5131:101 Device combin.:Local 1 to 6 1
device is device
_:5131:122 Device combin.:Lowest • 64 kBit/s 64 kBit/s
appearing bit rate
• 128 kBit/s
• 512 kBit/s
• 2048 kBit/s

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions

_:5131:125 Device combin.:Number 2 to 6 6
of devices
_:5131:127 Device combin.:Dev. • no yes
comb. is time source
• yes
Prot. interf.1
_:5161:1 Prot. interf.1:Mode • off on
• on
_:5161:105 Prot. interf.1:Max. error 0.000 % to 100.000 % 1.000 %
rate per hour
rate per min
_:5161:107 Prot. interf.1:Distur- 0.05 s to 2.00 s 0.10 s
bance alarm after
_:5161:108 Prot. interf.1:Transm. 0.0 s to 6.0 s 6.0 s
fail. alarm after
_:5161:109 Prot. interf.1:Delay time 0.1 ms to 30.0 ms 30.0 ms
threshold
_:5161:110 Prot. interf.1:Difference 0.000 ms to 3.000 ms 0.100 ms
Tx and Rx time
_:5161:113 Prot. interf.1:Synchroni- • External synchron. off External
zation synchron. off
• Telegr. and ext. synch.
• Telegr. or ext. synch.
• External synch. only
_:5161:117 Prot. interf.1:External • PPS electrical (Port G) PPS electrical
synchronization (Port G)
• IEEE 1588
3.6.5.12 Information List

(Type)
Device combin.
_:5131:52 Device combin.:Behavior ENS O
_:5131:53 Device combin.:Health ENS O
_:5131:301 Device combin.:Status of topo. recog. ENS O
_:5131:302 Device combin.:Topology is ENS O
_:5131:303 Device combin.:Devices form ENS O
_:5131:304 Device combin.:Number of detect. dev. INS O
_:5131:305 Device combin.:Fct. logout device 1 SPS O
_:5131:312 Device combin.:Device 1 available SPS O

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions

(Type)
Prot. interf.1
_:5161:81 Prot. interf.1:>Block stage SPS I
_:5161:500 Prot. interf.1:>Sync reset SPS I
_:5161:341 Prot. interf.1:Reset synchronization SPC C
_:5161:342 Prot. interf.1:Reset measurements SPC C
_:5161:52 Prot. interf.1:Behavior ENS O
_:5161:53 Prot. interf.1:Health ENS O
_:5161:301 Prot. interf.1:Status of lay. 1 and 2 ENS O
_:5161:303 Prot. interf.1:Connection broken SPS O
_:5161:316 Prot. interf.1:Error rate / min exc. SPS O
_:5161:317 Prot. interf.1:Error rate / hour exc. SPS O
_:5161:318 Prot. interf.1:Time delay exceeded SPS O
_:5161:319 Prot. interf.1:Time delay different SPS O
_:5161:320 Prot. interf.1:Time delay jump SPS O
_:5161:321 Prot. interf.1:PI synchronized SPS O
_:5161:340 Prot. interf.1:Telegram lost SPS O
_:5161:308 Prot. interf.1:Tx tel/h MV O
_:5161:309 Prot. interf.1:Rx tel/h MV O
_:5161:310 Prot. interf.1:Tx tel/min MV O
_:5161:311 Prot. interf.1:Rx tel/min MV O
_:5161:312 Prot. interf.1:Tx err/h MV O
_:5161:313 Prot. interf.1:Rx err/h MV O
_:5161:314 Prot. interf.1:Tx err/min MV O
_:5161:315 Prot. interf.1:Rx err/min MV O
_:5161:334 Prot. interf.1:Miss.tel/min MV O
_:5161:335 Prot. interf.1:Miss.tel/h MV O
_:5161:336 Prot. interf.1:Miss.tel/d MV O
_:5161:337 Prot. interf.1:Miss.tel/w MV O
_:5161:338 Prot. interf.1:M. loss/d MV O
_:5161:339 Prot. interf.1:M. loss/w MV O
_:5161:331 Prot. interf.1:Recept. MV O
_:5161:323 Prot. interf.1:PPS: time del. unsym. SPS O
_:5161:324 Prot. interf.1:PI with PPS synchron. SPS O
_:5161:325 Prot. interf.1:Aver.Δt MV O
_:5161:326 Prot. interf.1:Rec. Δt MV O
_:5161:327 Prot. interf.1:Sen. Δt MV O
Ext. Synchron.
_:9181:500 Ext. Synchron.:>Block stage SPS I
_:9181:501 Ext. Synchron.:>PPS pulse loss SPS I
_:9181:52 Ext. Synchron.:Behavior ENS O
_:9181:54 Ext. Synchron.:Inactive SPS O
_:9181:53 Ext. Synchron.:Health ENS O
_:9181:301 Ext. Synchron.:PPS pulse loss SPS O
_:9181:303 Ext. Synchron.:PPS pulse OK SPS O

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions

(Type)
_:9181:302 Ext. Synchron.:PPS pulse SPS O
_:9181:304 Ext. Synchron.:Synchronization loss SPS O
_:9181:305 Ext. Synchron.:Synchronization OK SPS O
_:9181:306 Ext. Synchron.:Synchronization pulse SPS O
Meas.val.dev.1
_:1351:6811:300 Meas.val.dev.1:Dev.adr. INS O
_:1351:6811:301 Meas.val.dev.1:CB ENS O
_:1351:6811:302 Meas.val.dev.1:Vph WYE O
_:1351:6811:303 Meas.val.dev.1:Iph WYE O
Meas.val.dev.2
Meas.val.dev.3
Meas.val.dev.4
Meas.val.dev.5
_:1351:6931:300 Meas val.dev.5:Dev.adr. INS O
_:1351:6931:301 Meas val.dev.5:CB ENS O
_:1351:6931:302 Meas val.dev.5:Vph WYE O
_:1351:6931:303 Meas val.dev.5:Iph WYE O
Meas.val.dev.6
3.6.6 Advanced Protection Communication
3.6.6.1 Overview
The advanced protection communication contains all functionalities of the classic protection communication.
The view of parameters and indications is structured differently in DIGSI 5. In addition, the advanced protec-
tion communication supports the IP-based communication protocol.
You can easily change the number of devices in the device combination. Further differences are in the support
of external synchronization sources.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
In the Global DIGSI 5 library, you can find the available function groups for the advanced protection communi-
cation in the Advanced protection communication folder. The following function-group types can be instan-
tiated:
• FG Protection communication type 1 (line differential protection)
• FG Protection communication type 2

For configurations with line differential protection, instantiate the FG Protection communication type 1 (line
differential protection). In all other cases, instantiate the FG Protection communication type 2.
3.6.6.2 Advanced Protection Communication in the Overall System

The Advanced protection communication is integrated as follows in the overall system:
[dw_advanced_protcom_compl_system, 2, en_US]
Figure 3-80 Advanced Protection Communication in the Overall System
(1) The following applies for the FG Line and the FG Voltage/Current 3-phase: You must route the
connection between the protection FG and the FG Protection communication in DIGSI 5.
(2) You must assign a channel to the protection interface, see Parameter: PI assignment, Page 156.
3.6.6.3 Structure of the FG Protection Communication

The instantiated FG Protection communication contains the FBs for a protection interface and for the device
combination. If you need a 2nd protection interface, add another instance.
The FG Protection communication contains the following functionalities and function blocks (FB):
• FB Device combination
• FB for the Protection interface

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
In addition, the following FBs can be instantiated:
• A 2nd protection interface

You can find the 2nd protection interface in the Global DIGSI 5 library under Extended protection
communication > Second protection interface.
• 1 or 2 FBs for the External synchronization of the transmitted measured values by an external synchro-
nization pulse (1-second pulse, PPS) or via the IEEE 1588 synchronization protocol
You can find the FB External synchronization in the Global DIGSI 5 library under Extended protection
communication > Synchronization.
• The FB Remote data is instantiated automatically, as soon as you configure remote data.
[dw_structure_FG_protcom_advanced, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-81 Structure of the FG Extended Protection Communication
Device Combination
The function Device combination manages the devices that exchange data via the protection communica-
tion.
The following FBs are preconfigured in the device combination:
• FB General
• FBs for each device in the device combination

In the Device combination, you configure general settings for the protection communication and the device
addresses. The function Device combination issues the following indications:
• General indications like the

– Amount of devices
– Type and status of the device topology
• Indications of the devices in the device combination like:

– The availability of the device
– The state of the device, that is whether the device is logged on or off in the device combination
– Measured values of the device that have been recorded and synchronized through the device combi-
nation (constellation measured values)
Protection Interface
The FB Protection interface transmits and receives signals and measured values to/from the partner device.
For this, the protection interface uses the channel of a communication module.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
External Synchronization
Measured values that are acquired and exchanged in the devices at the same time, with microsecond accuracy
are transmitted via the protection communication. The measured values can be synchronized as follows:
• Internally via the telegram measurement with the Ping-Pong method
• Externally via
– An external, synchronous pulse 1-second-pulse (PPS)
– Via the IEEE 1588 protocol
If you want to use an external synchronization, you must instantiate the FB External synchronization.
You can use a different synchronization procedure for the 2nd protection interface than for the 1st
protection interface.
Remote Data
If you want to exchange selected and user-specific data or measured values via the protection communication,
you must use the Remote data function. If you route a specific signal or a measured value to the protection
communication, the device automatically creates the Remote data functionality. The routed signals are then
transmitted and received via the protection interface. The available bandwidth limits the amount of remote
data that can be transmitted.
3.6.6.4 Configuration of the Advanced Protection Communication in DIGSI 5
Steps during Configuration

Siemens recommends the following procedure when configuring the advanced protection communication:
• Select the desired communication module.
• Select the protocol Adv.Prot.Intf..
• The further parameterization depends on the selected communication module and is described in the
following under:
– Advanced Protection Interface for a USART Communication Module, Page 153
– Advanced Protection Interface for an Ethernet-BD Communication Module, Page 155

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
Advanced Protection Interface for a USART Communication Module
[sc_USART_01, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-82 USART Communication Module: Selection of the Protocol Advanced Protection Interface
After selecting the protocol, click Settings in the right column to get to the connection settings of the USART
protection-interface module for channel 1.
[sc_USART_02, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-83 USART Communication Module: Settings for the Advanced Protection Interface
Parameter: Connection via
• Default setting (_:105) Connection via = fiber optic

The Connection via parameter is used to set the bit rate required for the protection interface. Different
discrete values can be entered depending on the means of communication (see following table).

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
Table 3-18 Communication Media
Communication Media See Setting Value Bit Rate

Fiber-optic direct connection Figure 3-5 fiber optic 2 MBit/s
3 to
Figure 3-5
7
8
8
8
Repeater 512 communication converter Figure 3-6 repeater 512 kBit/s 512 kBit/s
1
CC-CC-128 communication converter Figure 3-6 CCPW 128 kBit/s 128 kBit/s
0
CC-2M-512 communication converter Figure 3-5 CC2M 512 kBit/s 512 kBit/s
9
Multiplexer with C37.94 interface Figure 3-6 C37.94 1 * 64 kBit/s 64 kBit/s
2 C37.94 2 * 64 kBit/s 128 kBit/s
C37.94 8 * 64 kBit/s 512 kBit/s
Other (freely adjustable bit rates for a direct 64 kBit/s 64 kBit/s
connection for special applications) 128 kBit/s 128 kBit/s
512 kBit/s 512 kBit/s
2048 kBit/s 2048 kbit/s
Parameter: Multiplex operation
• Default setting (_:112) Multiplex operation = no

With the parameter Multiplex operation, you can designate the physical channel for multiplex opera-
tion. You can then route 2 protection interfaces to this channel.
Refer to 3.6.3 Function Description.
NOTE
i For safety reasons, you cannot route 2 protection interfaces from the same device combination to one
channel, as this results in apparent redundancy.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
Advanced Protection Interface for an Ethernet-BD Communication Module
[sc_ETH-BD_01, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-84 Ethernet-BD Communication Module: Selection of the Protocol Advanced Protection Interface
After selecting the protocol, click Settings in the right column to get to the connection settings of the
Ethernet-BD communication module for channel 1.
[sc_ETH-BD_02, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-85 Ethernet-BD Communication Module: Settings for the Advanced Protection Interface
Parameter: UDP Port
• Default setting (_:112) User port = 33000

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
With the UDP port parameter, you set the value of the destination port in the UDP header of the protection-
interface IP messages. You must set the same value for the parameter UDP port for all protection devices of
a device combination that use the IP-based protection interface. Different device combinations can use the
same value for the UDP port parameter. Normally, the default setting can always be applied. It can be neces-
sary, for example, due to firewall policies, to configure a UDP port that differs from the default setting.
Parameterize the IP address of the Ethernet-BD communication module in the properties of the module.
[sc_IPadr, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-86 Parameterization of the IP Address for the Ethernet-BD Communication Module
The configuration and parameterization of the protection-interface communication module is now complete.
3.6.6.5 Setting Notes for the Protection Interface

The chapters provides setting notes for the logical protection interface (FB Protection interface).
Parameter: PI assignment
• Default setting (_:5161:120) PI assignment = Setting options depend on configura-

tion
In addition, you must select the channel for the protection interface in DIGSI 5 as follows: Project tree > Prot.
com. > Prot. interf..
In the input area under PI assignment, select the channel of a communication module that supports the
required protection-interface protocol. As a prerequisite for this, you must have selected the protocol
Advanced protection interface for the channel of the desired communication module, see 3.6.6.4
Configuration of the Advanced Protection Communication in DIGSI 5.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
[sc_WSselect, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-87 Assignment of the Protection-Interface Channel to the Protection Interface
Parameter: Max. error rate per hour
• Default setting (_:5161:105) Max. error rate per hour = 1.0%

If the number of faulty telegrams per hour exceeds the value set in the parameter Max. error rate per
hour, you receive the error message Error rate / hour exc..
Parameter: Max. error rate per min
• Default setting (_:5161:106) Max. error rate per min = 1.0%

If the number of faulty telegrams per minute exceeds the value set in the parameter Max. error rate per
min, you receive the error message Error rate / min exc..
Parameter: Disturbance alarm after
• Default setting (_:5161:107) Disturbance alarm after = 100 ms

With the parameter Disturbance alarm after, you determine the time delay after which faulty or
missing telegrams are signaled as disturbed with the indication Status of lay. 1 and 2 = PI data
fault.
Parameter: Transm. fail. alarm after
• Default setting (_:5161:108) Transm. fail. alarm after = 6.0 s

With the parameter Transm. fail. alarm after, you determine the time delay after which a communi-
cation failure is signaled with the indication Status of lay. 1 and 2 = PI data failure.
Parameter: Delay time threshold
• Default setting (_:5161:109) Delay time threshold = 30.0 ms

The time taken to transmit and receive a signal via a protection connection is called the signal-transit time.
You can monitor the signal-transit time. For the Delay time threshold, the default setting is selected in
such a way that it is not exceeded by normal communication networks. If the signal-transit time is exceeded
during operation (for example, upon switchover to another transmission path), the indication Time delay
exceeded is issued.
Increased runtimes only affect the operate time, and therefore the fault-clearing time of the protection func-
tions that use the protection interface. If you use the Line differential protection function, this remains in
effect.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
Parameter: Difference Tx and Rx time
• Default setting (_:5161:110) Difference Tx and Rx time = 0.1 ms

For a time synchronization of the measured values with microsecond accuracy by means of telegram measure-
ment, the signal-transit times in the transmission and receive direction must be approximately the same. The
device monitors the signal-transit times in the transmission and reception direction.
With the Difference Tx and Rx time parameter, you can set a maximum permitted signal-transit time
difference between the transmission and reception paths (runtimes unbalanced). Set the parameter Differ-
ence Tx and Rx time to the maximum difference expected.
Set this value to 0 for a direct fiber-optic connection. A higher value is necessary for transmission via commu-
nication networks. 0.1 ms (recommended setting value) is the reference value.
If the difference in the signal-transit times between the transmission and reception path exceeds the set value,
the indication Time delay jump is issued.
If the difference in the signal-transit times between the transmission and reception path exceeds the set value
and remains for more than 5 s, the indication Time delay different is issued. The Line differential
NOTE
i TheDifference Tx and Rx time parameter only visible if the Line differential protection function is
instantiated and the parameter Synchronization is not set to External synch. only.
NOTE
i If you use a multiplexer with a C37.94 interface as a communication medium, Siemens recommends a
setting value of 0.25 ms to 0.6 ms.
Parameter: Synchronization
• Default setting (_:5161:113) Synchronization = External synchron. off

With the parameter Synchronization, you control the time synchronization of the measured values with
microsecond accuracy.
The parameter Synchronization is only visible if you have instantiated the FB External synchronization
from the Global DIGSI 5 library in the FG Protection communication.
If you have not instantiated the FB External synchronization, the measured values are time-synchronized
internally with microsecond accuracy.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions

External synchron. off The external synchronization is disabled:
No external synchronization is performed on the protection interface. Select
this setting value if you do not expect any differences between the signal-
transit times in the transmission and reception directions. Then, the meas-
ured values are only synchronized internally with the telegram measure-
ment.
Telegr. and ext. synch. Synchronization via telegram measurement and external synchronization:
urement, supported by the external synchronization. The synchronization is
possible via the IEEE 1588 protocol or via the synchronous pulse of a satel-
lite receiver and configurable in the FB External synchronization.
In this case, an existing line differential protection is only enabled when a
new connection is established and one of the following conditions is met.
• The protection connection is synchronized with the help of the

external synchronization.
• Symmetric signal-transit times are signaled via the binary input signal
<Sync-Reset or the controllable Resetting sync.. This means
that the signal-transit times are the same in the send and receive direc-
tion.
Telegr. or ext. synch. Telegram measurement or external synchronization:
urement, supported by the external synchronization. The synchronization is
possible via the IEEE 1588 protocol or via the synchronous pulse of a satel-
lite receiver and configurable in the FB External synchronization.
An existing line differential protection is enabled immediately upon
renewed establishment of a connection (data telegrams are received). The
internal synchronization is used up to synchronization.
External synch. only External synchronization only:
The measured values are synchronized only via the external synchroniza-
tion.
You can set the external synchronization in the FB External synchroniza-
tion. This enables synchronization via the IEEE 1588 protocol or via the
NOTE
i If the protection interface is connected to a channel on a USART communication module (see Parameter: PI
assignment, Page 156), the external synchronization is used to take into account the signal-transit times in
the transmission and receive direction.
If the external synchronization fails for a short time, for example, due to a receiving interference or an
unfavorable satellite position for a brief period, the internal synchronization via the telegram measurement
is still active.
NOTE
i If the protection interface is connected to a channel on an Ethernet-BD communication module (see

Parameter: PI assignment, Page 156), the parameter Synchronization is permanently set to External
synch. only.
Parameter: FB External synchron.
• Default setting (_:5161:117) FB External synchron. = Ext. synchronization 1

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
With the external synchronization, the time synchronization of the measured values with microsecond accu-
racy is possible through an external synchronization source.
The parameter FB External synchron. is only visible if you have instantiated at least 1 FB External
synchronization from the Global DIGSI 5 library into the FG Protection communication. You can instantiate a
maximum of 2 FBs for external synchronization.
With the parameter FB External synchron., you specify whether the protection interface uses the FB
Ext. synchronization 1 or the FB Ext. synchronization 2 for the synchronization. You parameterize the
synchronization source in the corresponding FB External synchronization, see 3.6.6.9 Setting Notes for
External Synchronization.
NOTE
i The external synchronization is possible separately for each protection interface.
Parameter: Check synchron.-source
• Default setting (_:5161:121) Check synchron.-source = yes

With the parameter Check synchron.-source, you can switch the synchronization-sources check on or
off. During the check of the synchronization sources on the ends of a protection connection, a check is
conducted as to whether both synchronization sources are working in the same synchronization status
SmpSynch.
If both synchronization sources are working in the synchronization status SmpSynch = global, the inspec-
tion has been passed.
If both synchronization sources are working in the synchronization status SmpSynch = local, that is decou-
pled from a global reference time, an additional check is conducted as to whether the synchronization source
(gmIdentity) is the same. Synchronicity can only be guaranteed if the synchronization sources are the
same.
If the synchronization sources display a different synchronization status, that is one displays the synchroniza-
tion status SmpSynch = local and the other the synchronization status SmpSynch = global, synchroniza-
tion cannot be guaranteed.
Siemens recommends using the default setting Check synchron.-source = yes.
If you have problems with the synchronization-source check, you can switch off the synchronization-source
check. Switch off the synchronization-source check only if the synchronization sources are synchronous at the
end of their protection connection.
The parameter Check synchron.-source is visible only if the parameter (_:5161:113) Synchroni-
zation is set to External synch. only.
NOTE
i If you use PPS electrical (port G) as the synchronization source, the synchronization status (SmpSynch) is
permanently set to global.
If you use PPS optical (USART) as the synchronization source, you can use the parameter (_:107)
Received. SmpSynch to set the synchronization status to (SmpSynch) local or global.
For a synchronization with microsecond accuracy, for example, for the Line differential protection, set the
parameter (_:107) Received. SmpSynch = global.
3.6.6.6 Indications and Measured Values of the Advanced Protection Interface

Each individual protection interface provides different indications for commissioning and diagnostics of
communication:

The indication (_:5161:301) Status of lay. 1 and 2 informs you about the status of the connec-
tion. The following indications are possible:

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
Table 3-19 Status Indications Status of lay. 1 and 2
initialized: The protection interface is not connected and is in the Initial state.
PI connected: The protection interface is connected to the protection interface of the
partner device.
PI data fault: The protection interface has not received any valid telegrams for the time
set in parameter (_:5161:107) Disturbance alarm after.
PI data failure: The protection interface has not received any valid telegrams for the time
set in parameter (_:5161:108) Transm. fail. alarm after.
not existing: The protection interface has not been assigned to a communication
channel.

The indication (_:5161:302) Status of lay. 3 and 4 informs about errors during the connection
establishment. The following indications are possible:
Status indication Description
no error: No errors occurred during the connection establishment.
SW ver.incomp.: The connection is not established because the firmware versions of the
devices are incompatible.
Update the firmware.
wrong dev. ID: The connection is not established because the device address of the local
device or the partner device is incorrect or set incorrectly.
Check the settings for the parameters Address of device 1 to
Address of device n (_:5131:102 and following).
const.sett.error: The connection is not established because the parameters are set differ-
ently.
Check whether the parameter (_:5131:122) Lowest appearing bit
rate has been set the same in all devices in the device combination.
diff.sett error: The connection is not established because the parameters are set differ-
ently.
The line differential protection settings for the connected devices are
incompatible. Check whether both devices are set to operate with or
without line differential protection.
The rated current of the line (parameter (_:9001:101) Rated
current) must have the same setting in all devices.
With a transformer in the line, the (_:9001:103) Rated apparent
power must be set to the same value in all devices.
net mirroring The connection is not established. The protection interface is receiving its
own data.
Check the wiring.
wrong dev. idx. The connection is not established because the device index of the local
device or the partner device is incorrect.
Check the setting for the parameter (_:5131:101) Local device is
device.
Furthermore, the following output signals are available:

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions

(_:5161:303) Connection The signal Connection broken indicates that during a parameterized
broken time (parameter (_:5161:107) Disturbance alarm after) no tele-
grams or faulty telegrams were continuously received. If the indication
Connection broken is issued, the affected protection connection is
reset. This can cause the blocking of an active line differential protection or
a ring topology can change to a chain topology.
(_:5161:316) Error The signal Error rate / min exc. indicates that the set maximum
rate / min exc. error rate per minute (Parameter (_:5161:106) Max. error rate
per min) has been exceeded.
in effect.
(_:5161:317) Error The signal Error rate / hour exc. indicates that the set maximum
rate / hour exc. error rate per hour (Parameter (_:5161:105) Max. error rate per
hour) has been exceeded.
In this manner, a brief increase in operate time and thus the fault-clearing
time is possible for the protection functions using the protection interface.
If you use the Line differential protection function, this remains in effect.
(_:5161:318) Time delay The signal Time delay exceeded indicates that the threshold value for
exceeded the set signal runtime (parameter (_:5161:109) Delay time
threshold) has been exceeded.
Increased runtimes only affect the operate time, and therefore the fault-
clearing time of the protection functions using the protection interface. If
you use the Line differential protection function, this remains in effect.
(_:5161:319) Time delay The signal Time delay different indicates that the threshold value for
different the difference in signal runtimes in the transmission and reception direction
(asymmetrical runtimes) has been exceeded. The setting value results from
the setting value of the parameter (_:5161:110) Difference Tx and
Rx time.
If the indication Time delay different appears, the Line differential
(_:5161:320) Time delay The signal Time delay jump indicates that the signal runtimes of the
jump data changed abruptly. This is caused by a switchover of the communica-
tion path in the communication network.
(_:5161:321) PI The signal PI synchronized indicates that the synchronization with
synchronized microsecond accuracy of the measured values transferred between the local
device and partner device is working correctly.
(_:5161:340) Telegram The signal Telegram lost indicates that an expected telegram has failed
lost to arrive or a faulty telegram has been received.
If you want to assign the communication failures or faults to other events,
route the signal Telegram lost temporarily into the operational log.
Such events can be switching operations in the primary system or opera-
tions on the components of the communication network.
Note: If the signal is constantly routed, the operational log can overflow.
Siemens recommends routing the signal only for clarification of problems.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions

(_:5161:343) Partner The indication shows the address of the partner device. A value of 0 means
that no partner address is available.
(_:5161:323) PPS: time This indication is only visible if you are working with a synchronous pulse.
del. unsym. The indication shows that the difference in the signal runtimes between the
sending and receiving path exceeds the value set with the parameter
(_:5161:110) Difference Tx and Rx time.
Note: The Line differential protection function remains effective.
(_:5161:324) PI with This indication is only visible if you are working with a synchronous pulse.
PPS synchron. This indication is only visible if, in parallel to synchronization with the
synchronization pulse, you are also working with the synchronization via
telegram measurement. If both synchronization methods are working prop-
erly, the indication PI with PPS synchron. = RAISING is generated.
Measured Values of the Protection Interface

The protection interface provides the following measured value for the diagnosis of the protection-interface
communication:
(_:5161:308) Tx tel/h Telegrams transmitted during the last hour
(_:5161:309) Rx tel/h Telegrams received during the last hour
(_:5161:310) Tx tel/min Telegrams transmitted during the last minute
(_:5161:311) Rx tel/min Telegrams received during the last minute
(_:5161:312) Tx err/h Transmission failure rate during the last hour
(_:5161:313) Rx err/h Receive error rate during the last hour
(_:5161:314) Tx err/min Transmission failure rate during the last minute
(_:5161:315) Rx err/min Receive error rate during the last minute
(_:5161:325) Aver.Δt Average signal runtime (average value of the runtime in transmission and
reception direction divided by 2, without external synchronization)
(_:5161:326) Rec. Δt Signal runtime for reception path (with external synchronization)
(_:5161:327) Sen. Δt Signal runtime for transmission path (with external synchronization)
(_:5161:334) Number of telegram failures within the last minute
Miss.tel/min
(_:5161:335) Miss.tel/h Number of telegram failures within the last hour
(_:5161:336) Miss.tel/d Number of telegram failures within the last day
(_:5161:337) Miss.tel/w Number of telegram failures within the last week
(_:5161:338) M. loss/d Longest lasting telegram failure within the last day
(_:5161:339) M. loss/w Longest lasting telegram failures within the last week
(_:5161:331) Recept. Receipt of a telegram (0 = no receipt, 1 = receipt)
You can use this indication to make the telegram exchange visible in the
fault record.
NOTE
i You can reset the measured values of the protection interface directly in the device. Proceed as follows:
Device functions > Protection comm. (Type x) > Protection interface y > Reset measured values.
3.6.6.7 Setting Notes for the Device Combination

In the Project tree > Settings > Protection comm. (type 1) or Protection comm. (type 2), select the function
block Device combination. In the input area, parameterize the general settings for the device combination
and the settings for each device. A device combination consists of at least 2 devices.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
Parameter: Local device is device
• Default setting (_:2311:101) Local device is device = 1

With the Local device is device parameter, you set the index (number) of your device in the device
combination. A maximum of 6 devices can be present in a device combination.
Parameter: Lowest appearing bit rate
• Default setting (_:2311:122) Lowest appearing bit rate = 64 kBit/s

With the Lowest appearing bit rate parameter, you set the lowest bit rate occurring in the device
combination. This value determines the maximum number of signals and measured values to be transferred in
the Remote data function within the device combination.
EXAMPLE:
For a device combination consisting of 3 devices in a ring topology with 2 fiber-optic connections (2 MBit/s)
and a 64-kBit/s connection, set the smallest value (64 kBit/s) in each device.
Apart from the default value, you can set the following bit rates:
• 128 kBit/s
• 512 kBit/s
• 2048 kBit/s
NOTE
i If you use optical fibers for all protection connections, set the value to 2048 kBit/s.
Connection mode
• Default setting (_:2311:126) Connection mode = SIPROTEC 5

With the Connection mode parameter, you select the device type with which the SIPROTEC 5 device works
in the device combination via the protection connections.
NOTE
i As soon as a SIPROTEC 4 device is present in the device combination, the SIPROTEC 5 devices must operate
in a compatibility mode. For this reason, the Connection mode parameter must be set to the same value
in all SIPROTEC 5 devices in the device combination. Select the type of SIPROTEC 4 device from the
following table:

SIPROTEC 5 The SIPROTEC 5 device works with a SIPROTEC 5 device in the device combi-
nation.
SIPROTEC 4 7SD610 The SIPROTEC 5 device works with a SIPROTEC 4 differential protection
device 7SD610 with firmware version V4.70 and higher in the device combi-
nation.
SIPROTEC 4 7SD5 The SIPROTEC 5 device works with a SIPROTEC 4 differential protection
device 7SD5x with firmware version V4.70 and higher in the device combi-
nation.
SIPROTEC 4 7SA5/6 The SIPROTEC 5 device works with a SIPROTEC 4 distance protection device
7SA522 and 7SA6x with firmware version V4.70 and higher in the device
combination.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
Parameter: Dev. comb. is time source
• Default setting (_:2311:129) Dev. comb. is time source = yes

The parameter Dev. comb. is time source is only visible if you have instantiated several Protection
comm. function groups and you have selected the setting value PI for the parameters Time source 1 or
Time source 2.
The parameter Dev. comb. is time source determines from which Protection comm. FG the time is
taken over.
Parameter: Protection com.
• Default setting (_:2311:128) Protection com. = Type 1 (Line diff. prot.)

The parameter Protection com. is write-protected and displays only the type of the instantiated device
combination.
The device combination Type 1 (Line diff. prot.) supports the Line differential protection function.
The device combination Type 2 (no Line diff. pr.) does not support the Line differential protec-
tion function.
NOTE
i In the Global DIGSI 5 library, the function groups Protection communication type 1 (line diff. protection)
and Protection com. Type 2 are available for the advanced protection communication. When instantiating
the respective function group, the corresponding type of the device combination is automatically pre-
instantiated.
NOTE
i If you have instantiated the FG Protection com. Type 2, the Device combination Type 2 is automatically
pre-instantiated in this FG and the Line differential protection function is not supported.
If you subsequently want to use the Line differential protection function in the device combination of the
FG Protection com. Type 2, proceed as follows:
• In the DIGSI 5 project tree, delete the function block Device combination from the FG protection
comm. (type 2).
• Instantiate the function block Device combination type 1 (line diff. protection) from the Global
DIGSI 5 library into the FG Protection com. Type 2.
• Parameterize the device combination in the input area again.
• Reroute the indications of the device combination in the DIGSI 5 information routing.
All other parameterizations and routings are retained!
Parameter: Device index
• Default setting (_:22711:101) Device index = 1

The value of the Device index parameter is the number of the device in the device combination. Set the
device index in all devices of a device combination for the same devices in the same way. The device indices
must start with 1 and be incremented continuously. DIGSI 5 assigns the device indices automatically. You can
change the device indices if necessary.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
NOTE
i The device with the Device index = 1 is the timing-master device in a device combination.
If all other devices in the device combination are to obtain their time from the timing-master device,
consider the following
• Set the Device index to 1 for the timing-master device.
• Parameterize the other devices in such a way that they get their time from the timing-master device
For more information, refer to 3.7.3 Function Description. Select Protection interface as the
adjustable synchronization option.
In the timing-master device, you must not set the protection interface as the synchronization source!
Parameter: Address in Device combi.
• Default setting (_:22711:102) Address in Device combi. = 101

With the Address in Device combi. parameter, you assign a unique and unambiguous address for each
device.
NOTE
i If the preset values do not fit, Siemens recommends the following procedure:
Define a number for the device combination that is unambiguous in your area of responsibility and that
must be at least 2 digits, for example, 100. The setting value of the parameter Address in Device
combi. is then calculated as follows: Number in the device combination + Device index.
For device 2, this leads to Address in Device combi. = 102.
Parameter: IP Address
• Default setting (_:22711.103) IP address = 0.0.0.0

The IP address of the local device is taken from the settings of the Ethernet-BD communication module and
displayed. The local IP address cannot be edited at this point.
NOTE
i If all devices of a device combination are equipped with an Ethernet-BD communication module and use
the IP communication, you must enter the IP addresses for all other devices in the device combination here.
The topology detection automatically sets a ring or chain topology.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
NOTE
i If you have a hybrid configuration, that is not all protection connections of a device combination use the IP
communication, you must observe the following when setting the IP addresses:
• The topology detection does not generate the topology automatically.
• First define the order for the communication between the devices. Define chain or ring topologies for
this purpose.
The defined topology results in the partner devices for each device, with which the device communi-
cates directly.
Only set the IP addresses for the partner devices that are equipped with an Ethernet-BD communica-
tion module here.
• You can find examples of the parameterization of the IP addresses in hybrid configurations in the
chapters 3.6.8.4 Device Combination of 3 Devices and Hybrid Communication Media
and3.6.8.5 Device Combination of 6 Devices and Hybrid Communication Media.
Indications and Measured Values in the Device Combination
Indication Meaning
(_:3321:2311:301) The devices form a topology via the protection connections. This indication
Status of topo. recog. shows the status of the topology detection and can have the following
values:
• Unknown:
The topology is unknown.
• Invalid:
The detected topology is not supported.
• Transient:
The topology has just been modified.
• Valid:
The topology has been detected. The indication Devices form
shows the type of the detected topology.
(_:3321:2311:302) The indication shows whether all configured devices in the device combina-
Topology is tion communicate with each other via the protection connections. The indi-
cation can have the following values:
• Unknown:
• Incomplete:
At least one device in the device combination does not communicate
• Complete:
All configured devices in the device combination communicate via the
protection connections.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
Indication Meaning
(_:3321:2311:303) This indication shows the type of the detected topology that the devices in
Devices form the device combination form via the protection connections. The indication
can have the following values:
• Unknown topol:
• Chain topology:
The devices and their protection connections form a chain topology.
• Ring topology
The devices and their protection connections form a ring topology.
(_:3321:2311:304) The indication shows the number of devices that communicate via the
Number of detect. dev. protection connections in the device combination.
Indication and Measured Values of the Devices

The following indications and measured values are displayed for each device in the device combination and
are explained using the example of a device.
Indication Meaning
(_:22711:300) Dev.addr. This indication shows the address of the device.
(_:22711:318) is This indication shows whether the device is involved in protection commu-
present nication.
(_:22711:317) is logged This indication shows whether the local device has been logged off. If the
off device has been logged off, it is no longer involved in communication via
the protection interfaces. If a device has been logged off, information rele-
vant for the protection functions is no longer exchanged.
(_:22711:301) circuit This indication shows the position of the circuit breaker and can have the
breaker following values:
• 0:
The switch position of the circuit breaker is unknown.
• 1
The circuit breaker is open.
• 2
The circuit breaker is closed.
3.6.6.8 Constellation Measured Values for Type 1 and Type 2
NOTE
i The constellation measured values are only available for the FG Line.
Each device in the device combination determines measured values predefined by Siemens, known as constel-
lation measured values. You can find the constellation measured values in the DIGSI 5 information routing
under the FG Protection comm. (Type x) > Device combination > Device x. The following measured values
and indications are issued for each device:

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
Measured value Meaning

(_:3321:22711:302) Vph This measured value shows the voltage of the 3 phases that is synchronized
(_:3321:22711:303) Iph This measured value shows the current of the 3 phases that is synchronized
(_:3321:22711:304) f The measured value supplies the locally calculated frequency of the meas-
ured voltage or the current.
The constellation measured values have the following properties:
• They are available on every device.

100 % conform to the rated current or the rated voltage of the line (see Figure 3-88). These measured values
are recorded every 2 seconds by the devices involved in the device combination and then sent to the other
respective devices. At the same time, the current and voltage values of the different devices are time-synchro-
nous with one another.
When displaying the constellation measured values the local device is prioritized. The device connected
The reference of the angle information depends on whether a line differential protection has been instanti-
ated in the FG Line. If a line differential protection is instantiated, the protection communication is type 1,
otherwise type 2.

– The angle values of the voltages show the angle difference between the local and the remote
voltage. The local voltage serves as the reference with an angle of 0°.
– The angle values of the currents show the angle difference between the local and the remote
current. The local current serves as the reference with an angle of 0°.

The angles of the phase-to-ground voltages and the phase currents relate to the voltage VA of the rele-
vant device.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
3.6.6.9 Setting Notes for External Synchronization

With the FB External synchronization, you can synchronize the measured values of the devices connected via
protection connections with microsecond accuracy using external synchronization sources (1*10E-06 s).
The measured values transmitted via protection communication for the line differential protection must be
time-synchronized. The synchronization is possible as follows:
• Internally via telegram measurement
• Externally via the IEEE 1588 protocol
• Externally via a synchronous pulse from a satellite receiver

If you use Ethernet-BD communication modules for the protection communication of the line differential
protection, the external synchronization of the measured values transmitted via the protection interface is
mandatory.
If you use USART communication modules, you can synchronize the transmitted measured values either inter-
nally via telegram measurement or via external synchronization. If you do not use the external synchroniza-
tion, the device automatically uses the internal synchronization.
If you want to use the external synchronization of the measured values, you must instantiate the FB External
synchronization from the Global DIGSI 5 library into the FG Protection comm.. You can find the External
synchronization in the Global DIGSI 5 library under Advanced protection communication > Synchroniza-
tion.
The external synchronization is possible for line differential protection applications or synchrophasor meas-
uring devices as follows:
• Via a high-precision electrical synchronous pulse (PPS electrical (Port G), 1-second pulse) from a
satellite receiver at the time-synchronization interface (Port G)
• Via a high-precision optical synchronous pulse (PPS optical (USART), 1-second pulse) from a satel-
lite receiver at a USART communication module
• Via the IEEE 1588 time-synchronization protocol

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
With external synchronization, you can measure and display the signal-transit time of the transmission and
receive path separately. This allows you to achieve maximum sensitivity even with unequal (unbalanced)
signal-transit times in communication networks with the line differential protection. For the transmission of
protection data in the type 2 protection communication, different signal-transit times do not play a role.
If an FB External synchronization is instantiated, the parameter Synchronization is visible in the FB
Protection interf.. With this parameter, you establish the connection between the protection interface and
the type of external synchronization. See 3.6.6.5 Setting Notes for the Protection Interface.
If you use 2 protection interfaces in the FG Protection comm., you can set a different synchronization source
for each protection interface if required. For this use case, you must instantiate 2 FBs External synchroniza-
tion into the FG Protection comm. and set the desired synchronization source separately.
Parameter: Name of synchron. block
• Default setting (_:101) Name of synchron. block = Ext. synchronization 1

The parameter FB External synchron. shows the name of the FB External synchronization.
If you have instantiated 2 FBs External synchronization into the FG Protection comm., you can use this
parameter to switch between the FB Ext. synchronization 1 and the FB Ext. synchronization 2.
Parameter: Synchronization source
• Default setting (_:117) Synchronization source = nothing

With the parameter Synchronization source, you select the desired synchronization source for the
external synchronization of the measured values.
NOTE
i The possible setting options of the parameter Synchronization source depend on the configuration
of the protocol for the respective channel of the communication module.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
To display the selection text for the selection of an optical synchronous pulse, you must configure the protocol
PPS on a USART communication module as follows:
[sc_PPS, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-89 Configuration of the Optical Synchronous Pulse (PPS) on a Channel of a USART Communication
Module

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
To display the selection text for the selection of the protocol IEEE 1588, you must configure the protocol IEEE
1588 on an Ethernet-BD communication module as follows:
[sc_1588, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-90 Configuration of the Protocol IEEE 1588 on an Ethernet-BD Communication Module
The setting options for the parameter Synchronization source then look as follows, for example:
[sc_syncopt, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-91 Possible Setting Options for the Synchronization Source
Depending on the configuration, the following synchronization sources are displayed:

G:Timesynchron..PPS The electrical synchronization pulse of a satellite receiver (PPS: 1 Pulse Per
Second) at the time-synchronization interface Port G is the synchronization
source.
[Port]:USART-AD-1FO.Channel The optical synchronization pulse of a satellite receiver (PPS: 1 Pulse Per
1.PPS Second) on channel 1 of a USART communication module is the synchroni-
zation source.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions

[Port]:USART-AE-2FO.Channel The optical synchronization pulse of a satellite receiver (PPS: 1 Pulse Per
2.PPS Second) on channel 2 of a USART communication module is the synchroni-
zation source.
[Port]:ETH-BD-2FO.Channel The time-synchronization standard IEEE 1588 on an Ethernet-BD communi-
1.IEEE 1588 cation module is the synchronization source.
NOTE
i You can select different synchronization sources for the same protection connection in the devices
involved, for example, the synchronization via the IEEE 1588 protocol in device 1 and via the protocol PPS
electrical in device 2.
Siemens recommends using the same synchronization source for the same protection connection. If it is
not possible to use the same synchronization source, check the differential current in the line differential
protection in the mode Test on all devices. If the differential current is not in the expected range, the set
synchronization sources are not synchronous to each other and therefore not usable.
NOTE
i For detailed information on the communication protocols, refer to the SIPROTEC 5 manual Communication
Protocols.
Parameter: Synchronization using
• Default setting (_:118) Synchronization using = nothing

This parameter Synchronization using cannot be adjusted. The parameter shows further information for
the selected synchronization source:
nothing You have not selected any external synchronization source.
PPS electrical (Port G) The electrical synchronization pulse of a satellite receiver (PPS: 1 Pulse Per
Second) at the time-synchronization interface Port G is the synchronization
source.
PPS optical (USART) The optical synchronization pulse of a satellite receiver (PPS: 1 Pulse Per
Second) on channel 1 of a USART communication module is the synchroni-
zation source.
IEEE 1588 The time-synchronization standard IEEE 1588 on a BD communication
module is the synchronization source.
Parameter: Max. inaccuracy
• Default setting (_:119) Max. inaccuracy = 0.500 ms

With the Max. inaccuracy parameter, you set the maximum expected inaccuracy of the synchronization
sourced used. The set value is only effective if the synchronization source used does not supply any informa-
tion on the current inaccuracy in the synchronization signals. If you no information on the inaccuracy of the
synchronization source used, use the default setting.
NOTE
i The inaccuracy of the synchronization source enters the stabilization of the Line differential protection as
an error signal.
This means that greater inaccuracy increases the calculated stabilization quantity and makes the Line
differential protection less sensitive.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
If IEEE 1588 is used as the synchronization source in the synchronization status SmpSynch = global, accu-
racy values are supplied with the synchronization signals and the parameter Max. inaccuracy is not used.
If the supplied accuracy values become invalid, the value set in the parameter Max. inaccuracy is used.
If the synchronization source IEEE 1588 works in the synchronization status SmpSynch = local, then the
value set in the parameter Max. inaccuracy is used as permanently available inaccuracy.
If PPS electrical (Port G) or PPS optical (USART) are used as synchronization source, then the value set in the
parameter Max. inaccuracy is used as permanently available inaccuracy.
If a USART communication module with the PPS protocol and the PPS generator operating mode is also used
as a synchronization source at the same time, the value set in the parameter Max. inaccuracy is used as
permanently available inaccuracy.
3.6.6.10 Indications and Measured Values of the External Synchronization
(_:501) >PPS pulse loss The indication (_:501) >PPS pulse loss is only visible with the
following setting options of the parameter (_:117) Synchronization
source:
• G:Timesynchron.PPS
• [Port]:USART-AD-1FO.Channel x.PPS
• [Port]:USART-AE-2FO.Channel x.PPS
The binary input (_:501) >PPS pulse loss can be used to signal an
externally detected failure in the PPS synchronous pulse, for example, an
error message from the satellite receiver. If the binary input (_:501)
>PPS pulse loss is set, this leads to the indication (_:304)
Synchronization loss. The external synchronization detects immedi-
ately that there is a problem with the connected synchronization pulse.
Otherwise, the problem will only be noticed after approx. 2.1 s – after the
test for synchronous-pulse failure.
(_:304) Synchronization The synchronization has failed. This can be due to a problem with the
loss synchronization source.
The indication (_:304) Synchronization loss shows that the
synchronization has failed. This can be due to the following reasons:
• The input indication (_:501) >PPS pulse loss has occurred.

• The synchronous pulse has failed.
• The quality of the synchronous pulse is inadequate.
• There is another problem with the synchronization source.
(_:305) Synchronization The synchronization is operating correctly.
OK
(_:306) Synchronization You can use this indication to make the synchronous pulse visible. As a rule,
pulse one pulse is generated per second.
(_:307) Synchron. If the set synchronization source operates in the global synchronization
imprecise status and the time of the synchronization source deviates from the global
time by more than 0.5 ms, the indication Synchron. imprecise is
generated and the line differential protection becomes ineffective.
The indication Synchron. imprecise is visible if you select ETH-
BD-2FO.Channel1.IEEE1588 in the parameter _:103 Synchronization
source. The read-only parameter (_:118) Synchronization using
then displays IEEE 1588.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
[lo_pps_syn, 2, en_US]
Figure 3-92 Logic for the Generation of the Indication >PPS pulse loss
3.6.6.11 Setting Notes for the Remote Data
Parameter: Dropout Time Prio. x
• Default setting (_:22741:111) Dropout time prio. 1 = 2.00 s

If you use user-specific remote data, you can set how long the last received state of your remote data is held in
case of a communication failure. This allows you to bridge short-term communication failures. The time can
be set separately for each priority of the remote data.
3.6.6.12 Settings

Remote data
_:22741:111 Remote data:Dropout 0.00 s to 300.00 s 2.00 s
time prio. 1
time prio. 2
time prio. 3
Prot. interf.1
_:5161:1 Prot. interf.1:Mode • off on
• on
rate per hour
rate per min
_:5161:107 Prot. interf.1:Distur- 0.05 s to 2.00 s 0.10 s
bance alarm after
_:5161:108 Prot. interf.1:Transm. 0.0 s to 6.0 s 6.0 s
fail. alarm after
_:5161:109 Prot. interf.1:Delay time 0.1 ms to 30.0 ms 30.0 ms
threshold

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions

_:5161:110 Prot. interf.1:Difference 0.000 ms to 3.000 ms 0.100 ms
Tx and Rx time
_:5161:113 Prot. interf.1:Synchroni- • External synchron. off External
zation synchron. off
• Telegr. and ext. synch.
• Telegr. or ext. synch.
• External synch. only
_:5161:117 Prot. interf.1:FB External • Ext. synchronization 1 Ext. synchroni-
synchron. zation 1
• Ext. synchronization 2
_:5161:120 Prot. interf.1:Check • no yes
synchron.-source
• yes
_:5161:120 Prot. interf.1:PI assign- Setting options depend on
ment configuration

(Type)
Prot. interf.1
_:5161:81 Prot. interf.1:>Block stage SPS I
_:5161:500 Prot. interf.1:>Sync reset SPS I
_:5161:341 Prot. interf.1:Reset synchronization SPC C
_:5161:342 Prot. interf.1:Reset measurements SPC C
_:5161:52 Prot. interf.1:Behavior ENS O
_:5161:53 Prot. interf.1:Health ENS O
_:5161:303 Prot. interf.1:Connection broken SPS O
_:5161:316 Prot. interf.1:Error rate / min exc. SPS O
_:5161:317 Prot. interf.1:Error rate / hour exc. SPS O
_:5161:318 Prot. interf.1:Time delay exceeded SPS O
_:5161:319 Prot. interf.1:Time delay different SPS O
_:5161:320 Prot. interf.1:Time delay jump SPS O
_:5161:321 Prot. interf.1:PI synchronized SPS O
_:5161:340 Prot. interf.1:Telegram lost SPS O
_:5161:323 Prot. interf.1:PPS: time del. unsym. SPS O
_:5161:324 Prot. interf.1:PI with PPS synchron. SPS O
_:5161:343 Prot. interf.1:Partner INS O
_:5161:308 Prot. interf.1:Tx tel/h MV O
_:5161:309 Prot. interf.1:Rx tel/h MV O
_:5161:310 Prot. interf.1:Tx tel/min MV O
_:5161:311 Prot. interf.1:Rx tel/min MV O
_:5161:312 Prot. interf.1:Tx err/h MV O
_:5161:313 Prot. interf.1:Rx err/h MV O
_:5161:314 Prot. interf.1:Tx err/min MV O
_:5161:315 Prot. interf.1:Rx err/min MV O
_:5161:334 Prot. interf.1:Miss.tel/min MV O
_:5161:335 Prot. interf.1:Miss.tel/h MV O
_:5161:336 Prot. interf.1:Miss.tel/d MV O

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions

(Type)
_:5161:337 Prot. interf.1:Miss.tel/w MV O
_:5161:338 Prot. interf.1:M. loss/d MV O
_:5161:339 Prot. interf.1:M. loss/w MV O
_:5161:331 Prot. interf.1:Recept. MV O
_:5161:325 Prot. interf.1:Aver.Δt MV O
_:5161:326 Prot. interf.1:Rec. Δt MV O
_:5161:327 Prot. interf.1:Sen. Δt MV O
Prot.interf.1B
_:23461:81 Prot.interf.1B:>Block stage SPS I
_:23461:500 Prot.interf.1B:>Sync reset SPS I
_:23461:341 Prot.interf.1B:Reset synchronization SPC C
_:23461:342 Prot.interf.1B:Reset measurements SPC C
_:23461:52 Prot.interf.1B:Behavior ENS O
_:23461:53 Prot.interf.1B:Health ENS O
_:23461:301 Prot.interf.1B:Status of lay. 1 and 2 ENS O
_:23461:302 Prot.interf.1B:Status of lay. 3 and 4 ENS O
_:23461:303 Prot.interf.1B:Connection broken SPS O
_:23461:316 Prot.interf.1B:Error rate / min exc. SPS O
_:23461:317 Prot.interf.1B:Error rate / hour exc. SPS O
_:23461:318 Prot.interf.1B:Time delay exceeded SPS O
_:23461:340 Prot.interf.1B:Telegram lost SPS O
_:23461:323 Prot.interf.1B:PPS: time del. unsym. SPS O
_:23461:324 Prot.interf.1B:PI with PPS synchron. SPS O
_:23461:343 Prot.interf.1B:Partner INS O
_:23461:308 Prot.interf.1B:Tx tel/h MV O
_:23461:309 Prot.interf.1B:Rx tel/h MV O
_:23461:310 Prot.interf.1B:Tx tel/min MV O
_:23461:311 Prot.interf.1B:Rx tel/min MV O
_:23461:312 Prot.interf.1B:Tx err/h MV O
_:23461:313 Prot.interf.1B:Rx err/h MV O
_:23461:314 Prot.interf.1B:Tx err/min MV O
_:23461:315 Prot.interf.1B:Rx err/min MV O
_:23461:334 Prot.interf.1B:Miss.tel/min MV O
_:23461:335 Prot.interf.1B:Miss.tel/h MV O
_:23461:336 Prot.interf.1B:Miss.tel/d MV O
_:23461:337 Prot.interf.1B:Miss.tel/w MV O
_:23461:338 Prot.interf.1B:M. loss/d MV O
_:23461:339 Prot.interf.1B:M. loss/w MV O
_:23461:331 Prot.interf.1B:Recept. MV O
_:23461:325 Prot.interf.1B:Aver.Δt MV O
_:23461:326 Prot.interf.1B:Rec. Δt MV O
_:23461:327 Prot.interf.1B:Sen. Δt MV O

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
3.6.7 Assignment of the Protection Function Group to the FG Protection

Communication
If protection functions want to use the protection interfaces in a protection function group, you must route
the connection of the protection function group, for example, the FG Line 1, with a function group Protection
communication in DIGSI 5. Then, each protection function in the FG Line 1 can use the protection communi-
cation.
Route the connection between the FG Line and the FG Protection communication in DIGSI 5 as follows:
Project tree > Function-group connections > Tab Protection FG ↔ Protection FG. Right-click to route the
connection in the desired line/column.
[sc_PDC_rout1, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-93 Routing of the Connection between the Protection FG and the FG Protection Communication
in DIGSI 5
NOTE
i If only one protection function group and one FG Protection communication are instantiated in the
device, DIGSI 5 connects both function groups automatically.
3.6.8 Application Examples and Setting Notes for IP Communication
3.6.8.1 Overview
The advanced protection communication supports the IP communication via MPLS15 communication
networks.
• If existing systems are to be upgraded for protection-interface communication via IP, you must retrofit an
Ethernet-BD communication module in the respective SIPROTEC 5 devices.
• The protection-interface communication via IP requires an Ethernet-BD communication module per

device in the device combination.
• In a device, only one Ethernet-BD communication module can be used per device combination.
• However, another device combination can use the same Ethernet-BD communication module of the
device.
The following application examples show what you must consider when using the IP communication via MPLS
communication networks.
15 MPLS = Multi-Protocol Label Switching

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
3.6.8.2 Device Combination of 2 Devices and Redundant Communication Connection

If redundancy of the communication connection is required for a device combination consisting of 2 devices, 2
different procedures are possible:
• You can use the redundancy mechanisms of the LAN and the Ethernet-BD communication module (PRP,
HSR, RSTP). In this case, the redundant communication route runs through the same Ethernet-BD
communication module.
• You can set up a 2nd communication connection via a physically separate path. It is best to use a
different medium for this, for example, a fiber-optic direct connection, a direct cable connection (pilot
wire), or a connection based on C37.94. That is, for the 2nd communication connection, you must use
another communication module in each device. The following figure shows this case from a physical and
logical view:
[dw_network_with_2-device_redundant-comm, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-94 Device Combination with 2 Devices and Redundant Communication Connection
3.6.8.3 Device Combination of 3 Devices and Only IP Communication

If you configure a device combination with 3 devices and all devices are using the IP communication, then,
from the view of a device, the 2 other devices in the network are visible and reachable. For this, you configure
in each device the protocol Advanced protection interface on the Ethernet-BD communication
module and the Protection interface 1. The Ethernet-BD communication module is assigned to the Protec-
tion interface 1.
The special feature of this configuration is that the topology detection automatically generates a 3-device ring
topology (logical view). That is, 3 point-to-point communication connections are established between the
devices. In addition, another Protection interface 1B is automatically visible in each device, which provides
the necessary 2nd communication channel for the ring topology, see the following figure:

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
Figure 3-95 Device Combination with 3 Devices in the IP Communication Network
The Protection interface 1B takes over the settings of Protection interface 1, that is Protection interface 1B
does not have its own settings view. The Protection interface 1B has its own indications and measured
values, which you can see in the information routing.
NOTE
i If you use 3 devices in the device combination with IP communication, the aim of the topology detection is
to form a ring topology, as in addition to a redundant connection, shorter transmission times are also
possible.
If you have instantiated a 2nd protection interface, for example to establish a communication connection via
another medium, the device hides the Protection interface 1B.
NOTE
i In the following cases, the Protection interface 1B becomes inactive and does not have any messages or
measured values:
• A 2nd protection interface is instantiated.
• Only 2 devices are present in the device combination.
• No protection interface is assigned to an Ethernet-BD communication module.
3.6.8.4 Device Combination of 3 Devices and Hybrid Communication Media

If you extend a system, it can be necessary to extend a device combination consisting of 2 existing devices by
1 device, see the following figure.
The previous 2 devices are connected to each other, for example, via a fiber-optic direct connection or via
other communication media. The left device, for example, a SIPROTEC 4 device, and the middle SIPROTEC 5

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
device are the 2 devices previously present in the system. This device combination is to be extended by adding
the right SIPROTEC 5 device. The communication between the middle and the right device is to take place via
an IP communication network.
[dw_network_with_3-device_mixed-comm, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-96 Device Combination with 3 Devices and Hybrid Communication Media
For this configuration of a 3-device chain topology, you must configure a device combination with 3 devices
in all devices.
In the middle device, an Ethernet-BD communication module is additionally required. Configure the protocol
Advanced protection interface in the properties of the Ethernet-BD communication module. Instan-
tiate the function block Protection interface 2 in the FG Protection communication. Assign the Ethernet-BD
communication module to the Protection interface 2.
The device on the right must also have an Ethernet-BD communication module. Also configure here the
protocol Advanced protection interface in the properties of the Ethernet-BD communication module
and assign the Ethernet-BD communication module to the Protection interface 1. Protection interface 1B is
created here as a special feature, but it is not used.
If a redundant communication connection is required for this configuration, Siemens recommends estab-
lishing a 3-device ring topology. For this purpose, you must connect the left and right devices via another
communication channel. This creates the 3-device ring topology. The following figure shows this configura-
tion:

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
[dw_3-device_and_mixed-comm, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-97 Device Combination with 3 Devices and Hybrid Communication Media and Redundant
Communication Connection
The SIPROTEC 4 device (left device) does not support any IP communication. In this case, you must switch to
another communication medium and retrofit a corresponding SIPROTEC 4 communication module. In any
case, the communication medium used is also supported by the SIPROTEC 5 device on the right side, by retro-
fitting a corresponding equivalent communication module there. Configure this communication module with
the protocol Advanced protection interface, add an additional Protection interface 2 to the FG
Protection communication. Assign the Protection interface 2 to the communication module.
3.6.8.5 Device Combination of 6 Devices and Hybrid Communication Media
IP Addresses in Hybrid Topologies

To ensure redundancy or downward compatibility, the devices also allow a mix of classic and IP-based commu-
nication media.
In such applications, special consideration must be given to the configuration of the IP addresses. When para-
metrizing the devices, you must first clarify which path the communication is to take through the network.
That is, it must be clear which devices communicate with each other. To define a route, you may only
configure its planned communication partners in a device. The following examples illustrate the correct IP
configuration.
For device combinations with more than 3 devices and hybrid communication media, different configurations
are possible. If you want to use the IP communication, consider that only one Ethernet-BD communication
module per device combination is supported for the protection-interface communication.
The following figure shows a device combination with 6 devices. In the example, several devices are
connected by other communication media, which form 3 device groups. The device groups are connected by
an IP network. The result is a 6-device chain topology. The yellow line illustrates the communication route.
To establish this communication route, you may only parameterize the IP addresses of their direct communica-
tion partners in the devices. The following example applies:
• The devices 2 and 4 only know the IP address of device 3.
• Device 3 only knows the IP addresses of the devices 2 and 4.
• Leave all other IP addresses at 0.0.0.0.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
Figure 3-98 Example 1 of a Device Combination with 6 Devices
Another example shows 2 device groups whose devices are connected to each other via IP networks. The 2
device groups are connected to each other by a different communication medium. The topology detection in
turn forms a 6-device chain topology.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
To establish this communication route, you may only parameterize the IP addresses of their direct communica-
tion partners in the devices. The following example applies:
• Leave all other IP addresses at 0.0.0.0.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
[dw_network_with_6-device, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-99 Example 2 of a Device Combination with 6 Devices
3.6.8.6 Unsupported Configurations

The following figure shows an example of a device combination with 3 devices. In the example, all devices use
the IP communication. The middle device contains 2 Ethernet-BD communication modules, which are both
configured with the Advanced protection interface protocol.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
NOTE
i You can only use 1 Ethernet-BD communication module in one device!

2 Ethernet-BD communication modules with the Advanced protection interface protocol are not
supported.
[dw_non-supported-confic_network_with_3-device, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-100 Unsupported Configuration of a Device Combination with 3 Devices
NOTE
i If you use the IP communication, the aim of the topology detection is to form a chain topology if there are
4 or more devices. For certain configurations, the topology detection cannot form a working chain
topology.
The following figure shows an example of a device combination with 6 devices and hybrid communication
media. In this case, the topology detection cannot form a functioning 6-device chain topology.
[dw_non-supported-confic_network_with_6-device, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-101 Unsupported Configuration of a Device Combination with 6 Devices

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
3.7 Date and Time Synchronization
Timely recording of process data requires precise time synchronization of the devices. The integrated date/
time synchronization allows the exact chronological assignment of events to an internally managed device
time that is used to time stamp events in logs, which are then transmitted to a substation automation tech-
nology or transferred via the protection interface. A clock module internal to the device and having battery
backup is synchronized cyclically with the current device time so that the right device time is available and
used even in case of auxiliary-voltage failure. At the same time, this permits hardware-supported monitoring
of the device time.
The integrated date/time synchronization is a supervisory device function. Setting parameters and indications
can be found in the following menus for the DIGSI and the device:
Set date and time:
• DIGSI: Online access -> Interface -> Device -> Device Information -> Time Information
• Device: Main menu → Device functions → Date & Time

Parameter:
• DIGSI: Project -> Device -> Parameter -> Time Settings

Indications:
• DIGSI: Project -> Device -> Information routing ->Time keeping or Time Sync.
Every SIPROTEC 5 device maintains an internal device time with date. The date and time can also be set on the
device via the on-site operation panel or via DIGSI 5. Within a system, or even beyond, it is usually necessary to
record the time of process data accurately and to have exact time synchronization of all devices. For SIPROTEC
5 devices, the sources of time and synchronization options can be configured.
Configurable Synchronization Options:
• None (default setting)

The device functions without any external time synchronization. The internal time synchronization
continues to work with the help of the back-up battery even when the auxiliary voltage is shut down
temporarily. The time can be adjusted manually.
• Telegram
The time is synchronized via a telegram with an appropriately configured communication interface in
accordance with the IEC 60870-5-103 or DNP3 protocol.
• Connection to a radio clock

The time synchronization takes place with the set time telegram from an external IRIG B or DCF77
receiver via the time synchronization interface of the device.
• Ethernet
The time synchronization is done via Ethernet-based SNTP protocol (Simple Network Time Protocol), for
example with IEC 61850 stations or via IEEE 1588. If you enable both services during configuration of
Ethernet interfaces, these protocols are available as an option for the time synchronization.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
• Protection interface
The time synchronization takes place via the protection interfaces configured for your SIPROTEC 5 device.
Here, the timing master takes over the time management.
Configurable Time Sources:
• 2 time sources can be taken into consideration with the SIPROTEC 5 devices. For each time source, the
synchronization type may be selected based on the options provided.
• Time source 1 takes precedence over Time source 2, that is, Time source 2 will be effective for
the synchronization of the device time only if Time source 1 fails. If only one time source is available
and it fails, then only the internal clock continues unsynchronized. The status of the time sources is indi-
cated.
• For every time source, it is possible to define via the Time zone time source 1 parameter (or Time
zone time source 2) if this source transmits its time by UTC (universal time) or if the settings corre-
spond to the local time zone of the device.
NOTE
i Make sure that the settings for the time sources coincide with the actual hardware configuration of your
SIPROTEC 5 device. In any event, incorrect settings cause the status indications of time sources to pick up.
Configurable Date Format

Regardless of a feed time-synchronization source, a uniform format is maintained internally within the device.
The following options are available for the customary local representation of the date format:
• Day.Month.Year: 24.12.2009
• Month/Day/Year: 12/24/2009
• Year-Month-Day: 2009-12-24
Taking Local Time Zones into Account

The internal device time is maintained in universal time (UTC). To display time stamps in DIGSI and on the
device display, you can define the local time zone of the device (parameter Offset time zone for GMT),
including the applicable daylight saving times (start, end, and offset of daylight saving time) using parame-
ters. This allows the display of the local time.
NOTE
i • For time sources that transmit the status of the switch to daylight saving time, this will be taken into
account automatically when creating the internal device time in the UTC format. The differential time
of the daylight saving time set in the device (parameter Offset daylight saving time) is taken into
consideration. However, in contrast, the settings of the start of daylight saving time and end of the
daylight saving times are ignored when converting into the device internal UTC format.
• For active time sources, it is not possible to set the time via the device display or DIGSI 5.An exception
is setting the calendar year for active time protocol IRIG B.
Status, Supervision, and Indications of Time Management

Your SIPROTEC 5 device generates status and monitoring indications that provide important information
regarding the correct configuration of the time source and the status of the internal time management during
startup and device operation.
Internal time synchronization is monitored cyclically. Important synchronization processes, the status of the
time sources and errors detected are reported. A device time that has become invalid will be marked accord-
ingly so that affected functions can go to a safe state.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
Device: This indication signals a high difference between the
Clock fail internally managed time and the time of the clock
module that is not permissible. The pickup of the indi-
cation can point to a defect in the clock module or to
an unacceptable high drift of the system quartz
crystal. The time maintained internally is marked as
invalid.
Time management: This indication signals whether daylight saving time
Daylight saving time has been enabled.
Time management: This indication signals that the device time has been
Clock set manually set manually via the on-site operation panel or via
DIGSI 5.
Time synchronization: These 2 indications signal whether the active time
Status time source 1 sources are recognized as valid and active from the
Status time source 2 device point of view. When the indications pick up, it
can also be an indication that an incorrect configura-
tion of the port or channel numbers was done at the
on-site operation panel.
Time synchronization: This indication signals after the parameterized time
Time sync. error Fault indication after that synchronization
using an external time source has failed.
Time synchronization: This indication signals that a Leap second has
Leap second occurred during time synchronization using an
external GPS receiver (protocol variant IRIG B
005(004) with extension according to IEEE
C37.118-2005).
Time synchronization: This indication signals that the device is synchronized
High accuracy with an accuracy better than 1 μs The indication is
only of significance when the PMU function is used.
NOTE
i In case of a missing or discharged battery, the device starts without active external time synchronization
with the device time 2011-01-01 00:00:00 (UTC).
For the device, DIGSI 5 provides a compact overview of the status of the time synchronization of your
SIPROTEC 5 device in online mode. All displays are updated continuously. You can access the overview in the
project-tree window via Online access.
DIGSI: Online access -> Interface -> Device -> Device Information -> Time Information

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
[sc_time_dg, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-102 Time Information in DIGSI
For every time source, you see the following:
• Last received time (with date)
• Receipt time of the last received time telegram
• Configured type of timer
• Indication of timer outage or failure
• Whether the device time is currently synchronized from the time source
The lower section displays the device time, which is continuously updated. If the internal device time and the
infeed time source were synchronous at the time of telegram receipt, both displayed times are identical.
NOTE
i All times displayed (also the time source) take into consideration the local time settings (zone and daylight
saving time of the device) in the form of a numerical offset for UTC (universal time).
Parameter: Date Format
• Default setting Date format = YYYY-MM-DD

With the Date format parameter, you define the local customary format of the date display.
DD.MM.YYYY Day.Month.Year: Typical European display
Example: 24.12.2010
MM/DD/YYYY Month/Day/Year: Typical US representation
Example: 12/24/2010
YYYY-MM-DD Year-Month-Day: Typical Chinese display
Example: 2010-12-24
Parameter: Time zone time source 1, Time zone time source 2
• Default setting Time zone time source 1 = local, Time zone time source 2 = local
With the Time zone time source 1 and Time zone time source 2 parameters, you define the
handling of time zones of the external timer.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions

local Local time zone and daylight saving time are considered as time zone
offsets to GMT.
UTC Time format according to UTC (universal time)
Parameter: Time source 1, Time source 2
• Default setting Time source 1 = none, Time source 2 = none

With the Time source 1 and Time source 2 parameters, you can configure an external timer. The
prerequisite is to have the corresponding hardware configuration of the communication interfaces of your
SIPROTEC 5 device. This is listed as a prefix when making a selection in DIGSI 5.
none The time source is not configured.
IRIG-B Time synchronization by an external GPS receiver:
SIPROTEC 5 devices support several protocol variants of the IRIG-B standard:
• IRIG-B 002(003)
The control function bits of the signal are not occupied. The missing
year is formed from the current device time. In this case, it is possible
to set the year via the online access in DIGSI 5.
• IRIG-B 006(007)
The bits for the calendar year are not equal to 00. The calendar year is
set automatically by the time protocol.
• IRIG-B 005(004) with extension according to IEEE C37.118-2005
If, in the time signal, other control function bits are occupied in addi-
tion to the calendar year, then the device takes the additional informa-
tion into consideration for leap seconds, daylight saving time, time
offset (zone, daylight saving time), and time accuracy.
Time zone time source 1 or Time zone time source 2: The
value of this setting is not evaluated by the device, since this protocol
either transmits in UTC or in the case of local time, specifies the appro-
priate offset to UTC in each set time telegram.
DCF77 Time synchronization by an external DCF 77 receiver
Time zone time source 1 or Time zone time source 2 = local
Please note: There are also clocks that generate a DCF77 signal representing
UTC. In this case, UTC must be set.
PI The time synchronization takes place via the protection interfaces config-
ured for your SIPROTEC 5 device. Here, the timing master takes over the
time management. Signal-transit times of the protection interface commu-
nication are calculated automatically.
Time zone time source 1 or Time zone time source 2 = UTC
A slave that receives a time or a SIPROTEC 5 master, receives its system time
kept in UTC.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions

SNTP The time synchronization is done via the Ethernet service SNTP (SNTP server
or via IEC 61850).
SIPROTEC 5 devices support both Edition1 and Edition2 in accordance with
IEC 61850-7-2. In Edition2, the logical attributes LeapSecondsKnown, Clock-
Failure, ClockNotSynchronized, and the value TimeAccuracy are maintained
in each time stamp. For Edition1, these signals contain default settings.
Thus, the interoperability for substation automation technology is ensured
for both editions!
The SNTP service must be enabled during configuration of Ethernet inter-
faces so that it is available as an option for the time synchronization.
Time zone time source 1 or Time zone time source 2 = UTC
IEC 60870-5-103 The time is synchronized via telegram with an appropriately configured
communication interface in accordance with the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol.
Time zone time source 1 or Time zone time source 2 = local
However, there are also T103 systems that send the UTC.
DNP3 The time is synchronized via telegram with the appropriately configured
communication interface in accordance with the DNP3 protocol.
2 characteristics are supported in the process:
• Time synchronization via UTC

• Time synchronization with local time
The daylight saving time status is not transmitted. The device assumes
that the DNP3 master follows the same rules for the start and end of
the daylight saving time as those that were set for the device.
Time zone time source 1 or Time zone time source 2 =
UTC is the current implementation, local concerns older implementa-
tions.
IEEE 1588 Time is synchronized via an IEEE 1588 timing master. In this case, SIPROTEC
5 devices operate as slave-only clocks. IEEE 1588 v2 is supported with P2P
and Ethernet Transport.
The IEEE 1588 service must be enabled during configuration of Ethernet
interfaces so that it is available as an option for the time synchronization.
Time zone time source 1 or Time zone time source 2 = UTC.
Parameter: Fault indication after
• Default setting Fault indication after = 600 s

With the Fault indication after parameter, you set the time delay after which the unsuccessful
attempts of time synchronization with external time sources configured are indicated.
Parameter: Time Zone and Daylight Saving Time

This parameter block contains all the settings for the local time zone and daylight saving time of your
SIPROTEC 5 device. In addition to the individual parameters, configure the basic settings by preselecting via
the option buttons or check box.
[sc_time_zo, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-103 Settings for Time Zone and Daylight Saving Time in DIGSI

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
Selection Button Description

Manual settings (local time This setting must be selected if you want to select the local time zone and
zone and daylight saving time daylight saving time zone regulations of your SIPROTEC 5 device regardless
regulation) of the PC settings.
Input: Offset time zone for GMT [min]
Selection: Switchover to daylight saving time [yes/no] via check box
• Input: Start of daylight saving time [Day and time]

• Input: End of daylight saving time [Day and time]
• Input: Offset daylight saving time [min]
• Default settings as in the picture above
3.7.5 Settings

Time sync.
_:102 Time sync.:Time source • none none
1
• IRIG-B
• DCF77
• PI
• SNTP
• IEC 60870-5-103
• PROFIBUS DP
• Modbus
• DNP3
• IEEE 1588
• IEC 60870-5-104
_:103 Time sync.:Time source • port J
1 port
• port F
• port E
• port P
• port N
• port G
_:104 Time sync.:Time source • Ch1
1 channel
• Ch2

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions

_:105 Time sync.:Time source • none none
2
• IRIG-B
• DCF77
• PI
• SNTP
• IEC 60870-5-103
• PROFIBUS DP
• Modbus
• DNP3
• IEEE 1588
• IEC 60870-5-104
_:106 Time sync.:Time source • port J
2 port
• port F
• port E
• port P
• port N
• port G
_:107 Time sync.:Time source • Ch1
2 channel
• Ch2
_:108 Time sync.:Time zone • UTC local
time source 1
• local
_:109 Time sync.:Time zone • UTC local
time source 2
• local
_:101 Time sync.:Fault indica- 0 s to 3600 s 600 s
tion after

(Type)
Time managem.
_:300 Time managem.:Daylight saving time SPS O
_:301 Time managem.:Clock set manually SPS O

(Type)
Time sync.
_:303 Time sync.:Status time source 1 SPS O
_:304 Time sync.:Status time source 2 SPS O
_:305 Time sync.:Time sync. error SPS O
_:306 Time sync.:Leap second SPS O
_:307 Time sync.:High accuracy SPS O

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
3.8 User-Defined Objects
3.8.1 Overview
With help from user-defined function groups and user-defined functions you can group user-defined objects,
for example user-defined function blocks. 2 user-defined function blocks are available (see following figure).
[sc_udef_lib, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-104 User-Defined Objects in the DIGSI 5 Library
The user-defined function block allows you to add (see following figure) single-point indications, pickup indi-
cations, operate indications (ADC, ACT), single and double commands, commands with a controllable whole
number as well as measured values. You can assign the group a superordinate name (for example process
indications for a group of single-point indications which are read via binary inputs). This function can be deac-
tivated using the mode. The standby mode is also analyzed or displayed.
The user-defined function blocks can be instantiated at the highest level (alongside other function groups) as
well as within function groups and functions.
In addition, there is a user-defined function block [control]. Alongside the aforementioned possibilities
presented by user-defined function blocks, this block offers additional tests for user-defined control signals,
for example SPC or DPC.
[sc_user, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-105 Information Routing with Incorporated User-Defined Function Block: Process Indications and
some Single-Point Indications

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
3.8.2 Basic Data Types
The following data types are available for user-defined objects in the DIGSI 5 library under the heading User-
defined signals. Additionally, a folder for external signals is available (see chapter 3.8.5 External Signals).
User-Defined Signals
[sc_LB_userdefsig, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-106 User-Defined Signals
Single-Point Indication (Type SPS: Single-Point Status)

The status of a binary input can be registered in the form of a single-point indication or forwarded as the
binary result from a CFC chart.
EXAMPLE
Acquisition using binary input, further processing in a CFC and/or signaling using an LED.
Single-Point Indication (Type SPS unsaved: Single-Point Status Unsaved)

In contrast to SPS single-point indications, the state of the SPS unsaved indication is not maintained after the
device restarts.
For this purpose, go to Properties > Details > Initialization > Restart and set the Value.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
[sc_spsfas, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-107 Single-Point Indication SPS Unsaved (Example: 7KE85 Fault Recorder)
Double-Point Indication (Type DPS: Double-Point Status)

When using a double-point indication, the status of 2 binary inputs can be captured simultaneously and
mapped in an indication with 4 possible conditions (ON, Intermediate position, OFF, Disturbed
position).
EXAMPLE
Acquisition of a disconnector or circuit-breaker switch position.
Marker Command (Type SPC, Single-Point Controllable)

This data type can be used as a command without feedback for simple signaling or as an internal variable
(marker).
Integer Status Value (Type INS)

The data type INS is used to create a whole number that represents a CFC result.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
EXAMPLE
The output of the CFC block ADD_D can, for example, be connected with the data type INS. The result can be
shown on the display of the device.
State of an Enumeration Value (Type ENS)

The data type ENS is used to create an enumerated value that represents a CFC result.
Controllable Single-Point Indication (SPC, Single-Point Controllable)

This can be used to issue a command (to one or several relays, selectable under information routing) that is
monitored via a single feedback.
Command with Double-Point Feedback (DPC, Double-Point Controllable)

This can be used to issue a command (to one or several relays, selectable under information routing) that is
monitored via double-point indication as feedback.
Command with a Whole Number (INC, Controllable Integer Status)

This can be used to issue a command (to one or more relays, selectable under information routing) that is
monitored via a whole number as feedback.
Complex Measured Values (CMV)

This data type provides a complex measured value that can be used as a CFC result, for example.
Measured Values (MV)

This data type provides a measured value that can be used as a CFC result, for example.
NOTE
i Additional data types can be found under other headings in the DIGSI 5 library as well as in the corre-
sponding function blocks. This applies to the following data types:
• Pulse-metered values (see User-defined functions in the DIGSI 5 library)
• Transformer taps
• Metered values
Phase-to-Ground Measured Values (WYE)

This data type represents the phase-to-ground measured values of a 3-phase system.
Phase-to-Phase Measured Values (DEL, Delta)

This data type represents the phase-to-phase measured values of a 3-phase system.
Protection Activation Information (ACT)

This object type is used by the protection functions for Tripping. It is available in the library for receiving
protection information via the protection interface, which could also indicate Tripping.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
The status indications for the ACT data type are built as follows:
[lo_ACT-information, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-108 Building of the Status Indications ACT
Protection Activation Information with Direction (ACD)

This object type is used by the protection functions for Pickup. It is available in the library for receiving protec-
tion information via the protection interface, which could also indicate Pickup. In addition, both ACD and ACT,
can be generated and processed by CFC charts.
The status indications for the ACD data type are built as follows:
[lo_ACD-information, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-109 Building of the Status Indications ACD
(1) Further information, see Table 3-20

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
Table 3-20 Building of the Direction Information for the Data Type ACD
Direction Information Description

forward All picked up phases have picked up in forward direction.
backward All picked up phases have picked up in backward direction.
unknown The direction could not be determined for the pickup.
both At least 1 phase has picked up in forward direction and at least 1 phase has
picked up in backward direction.
3.8.3 PulseMetered Values
Pulse-Metered Values
Pulse-metered values are available as data types BCR (Binary Counter Reading) in the DIGSI library under User-
defined Functions.
.
3.8.4 Additional Data Types
The following data types are also used in the system, but they are not contained in the information catalog for
general use:
• ENC (Enumerated Setting Controllable)

The data type ENC models a command with which the user can set predefined values.
• SEQ (Sequence)
3.8.5 External Signals
User-defined signals of different types (see Figure 3-110) are available for GOOSE Later Binding. After instan-
tiation in a logical node, an external reference is generated during IID export and provided to a IEC 61850
system tool (for example, System Configurator) for GOOSE Later Binding (according to the Later-Binding
procedure specified in IEC 61850-6).

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
[sc_LB_extsign, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-110 External Signals
NOTE
i Consider the chapter on GOOSE Later Binding in the DIGSI Online Help. User-defined signals exist as
external signals and as preconfigured inputs that have been activated via the GOOSE column.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
3.9 Other Functions
3.9 Other Functions
3.9.1 Signal Filtering and Chatter Blocking for Input Signals
Input signals can be filtered to suppress brief changes at the binary input. Chatter blocking can be used to
prevent continuously changing indications from clogging the event list. After an adjustable number of
changes, the indication is blocked for a certain period.
The settings for indication filtering can be found at the individual signals. The next figure shows the settings
using the example of a controllable (circuit-breaker switch position).
NOTE
i The software filtering time is available only for the circuit breaker and disconnector in the controllable
Cmd. with feedback (control function block), as this is used for logging purposes. The controllable posi-
tion (circuit breaker or disconnector function block) is used for interlocking conditions and must always
show the unfiltered position of the switching object.
[sc_lposi, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-111 Settings for Circuit-Breaker Switch Position
The setting range for the Software filter time parameter ranges from 0 ms to 100 000 ms in ms incre-
ments. The Retrigger filter check box can be used to select whether to restart the filtering time when-
ever a status change is performed within the software filtering time. When activated, the Indication
timestamp before filtering check box backdates the time stamp by the set software filtering time. In
this case, the time stamp corresponds to the actual status change of the signal. If you activate the Suppress
intermediate position check box, the intermediate position is suppressed for the duration of this soft-
ware filtering time.
If you leave the software filtering time at 0 ms, the time for the suppression of the intermediate position is
also 0 ms. The activated Suppress intermediate position check box then remains ineffective.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
3.9 Other Functions
If you do not activate the Suppress intermediate position check box, the software filtering time
affects the on, off, intermediate, and disturbed positions of the circuit breaker or disconnector switch.
With the parameter Spontaneous position changes filtered by:, you set how such position
changes are to be filtered. Spontaneous position changes are caused by external switching commands, for
example. If you select the General software filter setting, the general settings for software filtering of
spontaneous position changes and for position changes caused by a switching command apply. The settings
for spontaneous position changes then cannot be edited. A separate filtering for spontaneous position
changes is activated with the Spontaneous software filter setting and you can edit the settings for
this.
Chatter blocking can be activated or deactivated as an input parameter, for example as a parameter of the
position in the Circuit breaker or Disconnector function block.
[sc_flatte, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-112 Setting Chatter Blocking
The settings for the chatter blocking function are set centrally for the entire device in DIGSI. They are acces-
sible as settings in the General function group (see the following figure).
The chatter-blocking settings have the following meaning (see also Figure 3-113 and Figure 3-114 in the
examples shown in the following):
• No. permis.state changes

This number specifies how often the state of a signal may toggle within the chatter-test time and the
chatter-checking time. If this number is exceeded, the signal will be or remains blocked.
Enter a number from 0 to 65535 in this field. If the entry is 0, chatter blocking is essentially inactive.
• Initial test time

During this time, the number of times a signal changes its status is checked. This time is started if chatter
blocking is configured for at least one signal and this signal changes its status. If the configured number
of permissible status changes is exceeded during the initial test time, the signal is temporarily blocked
and the indication Chatter blocking is set.
Enter a number from 1 to 65535 in this field. The number entered corresponds to the time in seconds.
When the set time has expired, the timer restarts automatically (cycle time).

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
3.9 Other Functions
• No. of chatter tests

This number specifies the maximum number of test cycles to be run. If the number of permissible status
changes of the signal stays exceeded during the initial test time of the last test cycle, the signal is finally
blocked. In this case, the indication Group warning (Alarm handling group and Device group) is set
additionally to the Chatter blocking indication after expiry of the set number. Restarting the devices
removes this block again.
Enter a number from 0 to 32767 in this field. The value Infinite (∞) is also permissible here.
Enter this value as character string oo.
• Chatter idle time

If the number of permissible status changes for a signal is exceeded during the initial test time or the
subsequent test time, the Chatter idle time starts. Within this time, this signal is blocked tempora-
rily and the Chatter blocking indication is set. The blocked input signal is assigned the oscillatory
quality.
Enter a number from 1 to 65535 in this field. The number entered corresponds to the time in minutes. An
entry here is only considered if the number of chatter tests does not equal to 0.
• Subsequent test time

During this second test time, the number of times a signal changes its status is checked once again. The
time begins when the Chatter idle time expires. If the number of status changes is within the
permissible limits, the signal is released. Otherwise, an additional dead time begins, unless the maximum
number of chatter tests has been reached.
Enter a number from 2 to 65535 in this field. The number entered corresponds to the time in seconds. An
entry here is only considered if the number of chatter tests does not equal 0.
Example 1: Permanent Blocking

The chatter-blocking settings are set as follows:
• No. permis.state changes = 4
• No. of chatter tests = 2

After more than 4 state changes within the Initial test time, the input signal is set to the original state
by the chatter blocking and the oscillatory quality is assigned. Additionally, a corresponding indication is
added to the operational log. At the same time, the Chatter blocking indication is set. After expiry of the
settable Chatter idle time, during the following Subsequent test time, it is checked whether the
input signal is still chattering. This check is repeated, as the No. of chatter tests is set to 2 in this
example.
If, during the 2nd Subsequent test time, it has been detected that the number of status changes of the
input signal exceeds the set No. permis.state changes, the chatter blocking detects a persistent viola-
tion of the signal stability and sets the Group warning indication. The original state of the signal is perma-
nently frozen. Only a device restart removes the chatter blocking again.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
3.9 Other Functions
[dw_chatter-block-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-113 Signal Change during Chatter Blocking with too Important Number of Signal State Changes
During 2nd Subsequent Test Time
(1) The input signal is permanently blocked starting from this point in time.
Example 2: Temporary Blocking

The chatter-blocking settings are set as follows:
• No. permis.state changes = 4
• No. of chatter tests = 2

After more than 4 state changes within the Initial test time, the input signal is set to the original state
by the chatter blocking and the oscillatory quality is assigned. Additionally, a corresponding indication is
added to the operational log. At the same time, the Chatter blocking indication is set. After expiry of the
settable Chatter idle time, during the following Subsequent test time, it is checked whether the
input signal is still chattering. This check is repeated, as the No. of chatter tests is set to 2 in this
example.
If, during the 2nd Subsequent test time, it has been detected that the number of state changes of the
input signal is within the set No. permis.state changes, the temporary blocking of state changes of the
signal is removed and the actual signal state is released.
The quality bit oscillatory is removed and the Chatter blocking indication is reset. As the temporary
blocking of the signal is removed, the Group warning indication is not set. The chatter test starts again.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
3.9 Other Functions
[dw_chatter-block-02, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-114 Signal Change during Chatter Blocking with Permissible Number of Signal State Changes
During 2nd Subsequent Test Time
3.9.2 Acquisition Blocking and Manual Updating
During commissioning, maintenance, or testing, a brief interruption of the connection between the logical
signals and binary inputs may be useful. It allows you to manually update the status of a switching device that
is not providing feedback correctly. Before this can take place, you must first set acquisition blocking.
To set the acquisition blocking, proceed as follows:
• Using the navigation keys, move in the main menu of the device display to
Commands→Equipment→Aq.blkman. update.
• Select the appropriate device (for example, a circuit breaker) from among the several switching devices
using the navigation keys.
• Press the Change softkey.
• Enter the confirmation ID (not relevant for active role-based access control (RBAC) in the device).
• Confirm the process with the softkey marked OK in the display.

After entering the confirmation ID (only with the RBAC inactive), acquisition blocking is switched on.
[sc_detection, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-115 Activating the Acquisition Blocking

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
3.9 Other Functions
Manual updating of the switching device is possible from within the same menu.
• Select Manual update (Figure 3-116) using the navigation keys.
• Select the switching device setting to be manually updated using the navigation keys (for example, off,
Figure 3-117).
• Confirm the process with the softkey marked Ok in the display.
[sc_status, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-116 Activating Manual Update
[sc_statu2, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-117 Selecting Position
The manually updated position of the switching device will be displayed.
[sc_statu3, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-118 Position of the Switching Device
NOTE
i For security reasons, manual updating is possible only directly through the on-site operation panel of the
device and not through DIGSI 5.
NOTE
i Setting acquisition blocking and the subsequent manual updating are also possible via the IEC 61850
system interface.
You can set acquisition blocking also via a binary input. If you want to put in the feeder or the switching
device in revision, you can set the acquisition blocking with an external toggle switch for one or more
switching devices. For this purpose, every switching device in the Switch function block (circuit breaker or
disconnector switch) has the input signal >Acquisition blocking. This signal can also be set from the
CFC.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
3.9 Other Functions
[sc_beerfa, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-119 Input Signals >Acquisition Block and >Release Acquisition Block & Manual
Updating on the Switching Device
With acquisition blocking, the feedback does not correspond to the switch position of the disconnectors (for
example, when checking the auxiliary contacts or switched off auxiliary voltage for disconnector position indi-
cation). In this case, the previous disconnector status is frozen and remains the same until removing the func-
tion. Monitoring of the disconnectors and the resulting indications are suppressed for this time period.
NOTE
i Interlockings are carried out with the status changes of the switching device. Remove acquisition blocking
again manually. Otherwise, position changes of the switching device are not detected and interlockings are
ineffective.
If the acquisition blocking and the manually updated position are set using the operation panel of the device
or the system interface IEC 61850, these are retained until the acquisition blocking is manually deactivated.
When you initially start the device, the acquisition blocking is deactivated.
Except for a restart, the acquisition blocking and the manually updated position are retained.
If the acquisition blocking is activated via the input signal >Acquisition blocking, it is retained as long as
the binary input is active.
To set the acquisition blocking of a switching device, the following sources are possible:
• Operation panel of the device
• System interface IEC 61850
• Input signal >Acquisition blocking

All sources undergo OR operations, that is, the acquisition blocking remains set until all the sources are deacti-
vated.
After deactivation of the acquisition blocking, the actual position of the switching device is adopted and
displayed in the operation panel of the device.
NOTE
i When the acquisition blocking is activated or the switching device updated manually while the entire
device or the switching device is in test mode, these states are not saved. The acquisition blocking and the
manual updating are not retained after a restart.
The acquisition blocking and the manual update for the circuit breaker, the disconnector, and the tap changer
are reset by way of the >Reset AcqBlk&Subst binary input. Setting acquisition blocking and manual
update is blocked with the input activated.
3.9.3 Persistent Commands
In addition to the switching commands, which are issued as pulse commands, and stored for the standard
switching devices (circuit breaker, disconnector switch), persistent commands are also possible. In this case, a

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
3.9 Other Functions
distinction must be drawn between controllables with the Continuous output operating mode and a stored
signal output that is immune to reset.
You can change a controllable from pulse to persistent command with the Command output parameter.
[sc_command, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-120 Setting the Command Type in DIGSI 5
Select Pulse output or Continuous output for the command output type. If a persistent command is
selected, the Pulse parameter is irrelevant.
3.9.4 Device Logout
3.9.4.1 Overview
In the case of multibay functions, a device uses information from one or more other devices. For some applica-
tions, it may be necessary for you to remove a device with all effective functions temporarily from the plant
and even to switch it off. These applications are, for example:
• Maintenance work
• System upgrades
• Testing the local protection functions

The Device logout functionality informs the receiver devices about the imminent disconnection of the
transmitter devices. To do this, the last valid received information is stored in the receiver devices and used for
the multibay functions.
NOTE
i If you need to remove a device temporarily from the plant, you must log off the device.
Protection functions distributed to several devices operate in a healthy manner with the remaining devices
only if you have logged off the device.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
3.9 Other Functions
You can log off the device as follows:
• Via the on-site operation panel
• Via a communication interface using the Device logout (_:319) controllable
• Via the binary inputs, general: >Dev. funct.logout on (_:507) or >Dev. funct.logout off
(_:508)
You can find the controllable and the binary inputs in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name of the device →
Information routing in the working area in the General block.
During the log-off process, the device checks whether all conditions for a logout have been met. If the condi-
tions for the log off have not been met, the logout is rejected.
The logout is rejected under the following conditions:
• The devices are communicating via the protection interface and switching off the device leads to an
interruption in protection-interface communication.
NOTE
i The path used to log the device off is stored in the operational log.
Even if you switch off the device after logout, the Device logged off (_:315) state is stored.
If you want to establish the initial state again after logging off the device, you must log on the device again.
To log on the device, you must use the same option used for logout. For example, if you have logged off the
device via binary inputs, you must log it on again via the binary inputs. This applies in similar manner if you
have logged off the device via DIGSI or via on-site operation.
3.9.4.2 Application and Setting Notes
Logoff Options for a Device

You can log a device off as follows:
• Via the on-site operation panel
• Via communication through the controllable Device logout (_:319)
• Via the binary inputs, general: >Dev. funct.logout on (_:507) or >Dev. funct.logout off
(_:508)
Conditions for Logging off the Device
[lo_functional logoff device, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-121 Logic for Logging off the Device
The conditions for a successful logout of the device result from the conditions for every activated protection
function.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
3.9 Other Functions
Logoff of a Device from a Device Combination with Communication via the IEC 61850-8-1 (GOOSE) Protocol
If devices are exchanging data using the IEC 61850-8-1 (GOOSE) protocol – for example in the case of substa-
tion interlocking – for each received data point the value of this data point can be set in the receiver device
when the transmitter device logs off. This value remains effective in the receiver device until the logout is
canceled by the transmitter device, even if the transmitter and/or the receiver are switched off in the mean-
time.
Logoff of a Device from a Device Combination Using Protection Communication

If devices in a device combination communicate via the protection interface, you can only log off a device
under the following conditions:
• Logging off and switching off a device in a device combination must not result in an interruption in the
protection communication.
• For series-connected topologies, the device must be located at one end of the communication chain as
otherwise the protection communication is interrupted when the device is logged off and switched off.
For this reason, devices not at one of the ends in series-connected topologies cannot be logged off.
Logout via Binary Inputs

The following diagrams show potential variants on how to control binary inputs. If you want to use push-
buttons, switch on this function as shown in the following figure. Log off the device using the push-button
Key2; log on the device again with the push-button Key1.
[lo_extta logoff device, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-122 External Push-Button Wiring for Logging off the Device
If a switch is being used for control, route the binary input >Dev. funct.logout on as H (active with
voltage) and the binary input >Dev. funct.logout off as L (active without voltage). If the
switch S is closed, the device is logged off.
[lo_extsx logoff device, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-123 External Switch Wiring for Logging off the Device
Indications
The logged-off device reports the status ((_:315) Device logged off) and cause of the logout.
If you have logged off the device using binary inputs, the indication (_:313) Logged off via BI is
issued.
If you have logged off the device using on-site operation, via DIGSI 5 or via the protection interface,the indica-
tion (_:314) Logged off via control is issued.
The indications are stored in the operational log.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
3.9 Other Functions

(Type)
General
_:507 General:>Dev. funct.logout on SPS I
_:508 General:>Dev. funct.logout off SPS I
_:319 General:Device logout SPC C
_:313 General:Logged off via BI SPS O
_:314 General:Logged off via control SPS O
_:315 General:Device logged off SPS O

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
3.10 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Protection Functions
3.10 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Protection

Functions
3.10.1 Overview
You can set the threshold values of protection functions directly on the device or by using DIGSI 5.
An innovative design was implemented for the protection settings.
You can switchover the edit mode between the following setting views:
• Primary
• Secondary
• Percent
If you change settings in a setting view, DIGSI 5 calculates the settings of the 2 inactive views in the back-
ground. If you wish to save, for example, conversion to secondary values, then select the primary view.
Configure all the settings and switchover to the secondary view.
Edit Mode: Primary

The parameters are set as primary values and thus refer directly to the primary system. The manual conversion
on the secondary circuit omitted.
Edit Mode: Secondary

The settings refer to the secondary circuit of the transformer. This means that the settings must be converted.
The secondary setting is the customary setting view. For secondary tests, the pickup values can be read
directly.
Edit Mode: Percent

This setting type is beneficial for electric machines (generators, transformers, motors, and busbars). The
setting values can be standardized regardless of the machine size. The reference values for the percentage
settings are the rated values of the function groups, for example, rated current. The setting values are, thus,
related exclusively to the primary settings. If other reference values are used, then this is documented for the
respective protection function in the application and setting notes.
If parameters are selected for example, busbar protection functions, it may happen that they are set only in
percent in all 3 setting views.
Recommendation for Setting Sequence

When setting the protection function, Siemens recommends the following procedure:
• First set the transformation ratios of the transformers. You can find these under Power-system data.
• In addition, set the reference parameters for the percent setting. You will find these parameters in func-
tion group .
• Next, set the parameter of the protection functions.

If the transformer data have changed after completing the protection setting, remain in the setting sheet
(for example, primary setting) and change the transformer data. In the background, DIGSI 5 obtains the
new settings in the inactive setting views (for example, new secondary values).
The following section explains, by way of an example, how to modify the transformer ratios in DIGSI 5 using
the corresponding alternatives.
3.10.2 Modifying the Transformer Ratios in DIGSI 5
In the delivery setting, DIGSI 5 is set to the Secondary edit mode.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
The following setting example shows how you can change the transformer ratio in DIGSI 5, and what impact
this has on the settings in the setting views Primary and Secondary. The protection setting is shown in the
example of the Power-system data function.
The following output data are assumed:
Current transformer: 1000 A/1 A
The following figure shows the protection setting in the Power-system data function in the secondary view.
[sc_mod_s_bbp-oh, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-124 Protection Setting, Display of the Active Setting Sheet
When you click the green arrow in the setting sheet at the upper left, you get to the window for switching
over to the setting view (see the following figure). Select the setting view you prefer.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
[sc_mod_u_bbp-oh, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-125 Switchover to the Desired Setting View
In the example, the current-transformer ratio changes from 1000 A/1 A to 1000 A/5 A. Change the secondary
rated current of the current transformer in the setting sheet of the transformer data from 1 A to 5 A (Edit
mode: Secondary). If you change the transformer data, a window will appear (see the following figure) that
will ask you for the action desired.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
[sc_fragewbbp, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-126 Query after Changing the Transformer Data (Setting View: Secondary)
If you have already set the settings in the secondary view by including the new transformation ratio of the
transformer in the calculation, then answer the question with No. In this case, the protection settings in the
secondary view remain unchanged. DIGSI 5 recalculates the settings (threshold values) of the primary view.
Changing the Transformation Ratio in the Single-Line Editor

If you want to change the primary or secondary rated currents of the current transformers in the Single-line
Editor, select the current transformer. You can view and change the currents in the Properties tab of the
object bar.
If you change the rated currents, the corresponding bay has a red border to indicate currents that differ
between the Single-line Editor and the power-system data. During synchronization in the Single-line Editor,
these rated currents are adopted into the power-system data.
3.10.3 Changing the Transformation Ratios of the Transformer on the Device
In the delivery setting, the device is preset to secondary values. Only secondary values can be set directly on
the device.
If you change transformer data directly on the device, it is not followed by a query, like in DIGSI 5 (see
previous image). Instead, the device assumes that all settings remain unchanged in the secondary view.
NOTE
i If the device works with IEC 61850 protocol, then change the transformer data only via DIGSI 5 and not
directly on the device. If you change the transformer data directly on the device, the IEC 61850 configura-
tion of the measurement and metered values can be faulty.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
3.11 Device Settings
3.11.1 Settings-Group Switching
3.11.1.1 Overview of Functions

For different applications you can save the respective function settings in so-called Settings groups, and if
necessary enable them quickly.
You can save up to 8 different settings groups in the device. In the process, only one settings group is active at
any given time. During operation, you can switch between settings groups. The source of the switchover can
be selected via a parameter.
You can switchover the settings groups via the following alternatives:
• Via the on-site operation panel directly on the device
• Via an online DIGSI connection to the device
• Via binary inputs
• Via a communication connection to the substation automation technology.

The communication protocols IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 60870-5-104, IEC 61850, DNP, or Modbus TCP can
be used for switching the settings groups.
A settings group includes all switchable settings of the device. Except for a few exceptions (for example,
general device settings such as rated frequency), all device settings can be switched.
For detailed information about the settings groups, refer to the Operating Manual and to the DIGSI 5 Online
Help.
3.11.1.2 Structure of the Function

The function of the Settings group switching is a supervisory device function. Accordingly, the settings and
indications of the settings group switching can be found in DIGSI 5 and at the on-site operation panel of the
device, below the general device settings respectively.
If you want to switchover a settings group, navigate to DIGSI 5 or proceed on the on-site operation panel of
the device, as follows:
• Via the project tree in DIGSI 5:

Project -> Device -> Settings -> Device settings
• Via the on-site operation panel of the device:

Main menu → Settings → General → Group switchover
The indications for the settings group switching can be found in the DIGSI 5 project tree under:
Project → Device → Information routing → General
3.11.1.3 Function Description
Activation
If you want to use the Settings group switching function, you must first set at least 2 settings groups in DIGSI
5 (parameter Number of settings groups > 1). You can set up a maximum of 8 settings groups. The settings
groups set in DIGSI 5 are subsequently loaded into the device.
Mechanism of the Switchover

When switching over from one settings group to another, the device operation is not interrupted. With the
Active settings group parameter, you are either specifying a certain settings group or you allow
switching via control (IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 61850) or via binary input.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
Switching via Control

When using the Control function for switching, the settings groups can be switched via a communication
connection from the substation automation technology or via a CFC chart.
The communication protocols IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 60870-5-104, IEC 61850, DNP, or Modbus TCP can be
used for switching the settings groups via a communication connection.
In order to use a CFC chart for switching, you must create a new CFC chart in DIGSI 5. Create the CFC chart in
the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name of the device →Charts →Add new chart. Link the signals that control
settings group switching in the CFC chart.
Switching via Binary Input

There are 3 appropriate input signals available for switching via binary inputs. These input signals allow selec-
tion of the settings group via a binary code. If one of the 3 signals changes, the signal image present will, after
100 ms (stabilization time), result in switching over to the appropriate settings group. If only 2 settings groups
must be switched over, only 1 binary input is required. The following table shows the possible binary codes
(BCD) and applicable settings groups (PG).
Table 3-21 Binary Codes of the Input Signals and Applicable Settings Groups
BCD Code via Binary Inputs PG 1 PG 2 PG 3 PG 4 PG 5 PG 6 PG 7 PG 8

>PG selection bit 3 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
Copying and Comparing Settings Groups

In DIGSI 5, you can copy or compare settings groups with each other.
If you want to copy settings groups, select a source and target parameter group in DIGSI 5 in the device
settings, and then start the copy process. The device settings can be found in the DIGSI 5 project tree under
Project → Device → Settings → Device settings.
If you want to compare settings groups, it is possible to do so in all setting sheets for settings. You will then
select in addition to the active settings group, a 2nd settings group for comparison. Active setting values and
the comparable values are displayed next to each other. For settings that cannot be switched over, no compa-
rable values are displayed.
Indication of Settings Group Switchings

Every settings group shows an applicable binary indication as well as its activation and deactivation. The
process of settings group switching is also logged in the log for settings changes.
Parameter: Number settings groups
• Default setting (_:113) Number settings groups = 1

With the Number settings groups parameter, you can set the number of available settings groups; you
can switch between these.
Parameter: Activat. of settings group
• Default setting (_:114) Activat. of settings group = settings group 1

With the Activat. of settings group parameter, you specify the settings groups that you want to acti-
vate, or the mechanisms via which the switchover is allowed. You can switchover only between the settings
groups specified with the Number settings groups parameter.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions

via control The switchover between the settings groups can only be initiated via a
communication connection from a substation automation technology or via
a CFC chart.
The communication protocols IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 60870-5-104, IEC
61850, DNP, or Modbus TCP can be used for switching the settings groups
via a communication connection.
via binary input The switchover between the settings groups functions exclusively via the
binary input signals routed to the settings group switching.
settings group 1 They define the active settings groups. You can define the active settings
... groups in DIGSI 5, or directly on the device via the on-site operation.
settings group 8
3.11.1.5 Settings

Change group
_:113 General:Number settings 1 to 8 1
groups
_:114 General:Activat. of • via control settings group 1
settings group
• via binary input
• settings group 1

(Type)
General
_:500 General:>SG choice bit 1 SPS I
_:300 General:Act. settings group 1 SPC C

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
3.11.2 General Device Settings
3.11.2.1 Overview
In Device settings in DIGSI 5, you find the following general settings.
[sc_deSeDe1, 1, en_US]
[sc_deSeAl, 4, en_US]
[sc_deSeBB, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-127 General Device Settings
The following list shows you the chapters containing the desired information.
You can find more about:
• Chatter blocking in chapter 3.9.1 Signal Filtering and Chatter Blocking for Input Signals.
• Continuous Function Chart Quality Treatment in chapter 3.4.3 Quality Processing/Affected by the User
in CFC Charts.
Under Device, you set the parameters for the device that are valid across functions.
With Test support, indications issued via communication interfaces are labeled with an additional test bit, if
this is supported by the protocol. With this test bit you can determine whether an indication is generated in a
test and whether all or individual functions of the device are in the test mode. In this manner the reactions
that are necessary in normal operation due to an indication can be suppressed in other devices that receive
these indications. You can also permit, for example, a trip command to close an energized binary output for
test purposes. Siemens recommends deactivating the Test support again after the test phase.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions

The major portion of the settings is described in the chapters cited above. Then, the parameters on the section
Device, Spontaneous indication, and Test support are described.
Parameter: Rated frequency
• Default setting (_:101) Rated frequency = 50 Hz

With the parameter Rated frequency, you set the rated frequency of the electrical power system.
Parameter: Minimum operate time
• Default setting (_:102) Minimum operate time = 0.00 s

With the parameter Minimum operate time , you set the minimum duration for the trip command of the
functions. The trip command is maintained for the set duration.
Parameter: Block monitoring dir.
• Default setting (_:138) Block monitoring dir. = off

With the parameter Block monitoring dir., you set whether indications are output via the system inter-
face(s) of the SIPROTEC 5 device or not.
If transmission blocking is switched on, no indications are output via the system interface(s) of a SIPROTEC 5
device, except via the IEC 61850 interface(s).
To avoid receiving IEC 61850 data, the corresponding IEC 61850 Client must stop the reporting or freeze the
data. You can find more information in the Communication Protocols Manual (C53000-L1840-C055-3).
Parameter: Fault-display
• Default setting (_:139) Fault-display = with trip

The spontaneous indications are output following tripping.
Parameter: Activate device test mode
• Default setting (_:150) Activate device test mode = inactive

With the Activate device test mode parameter, you can activate the test mode for the complete
device. This means that all indications generated in the device are given a test bit.
Apart from activating the test mode via this parameter, you can also activate the test mode using the
IEC 61850-8-1 protocol. For more information, refer to the SIPROTEC 5 Communication protocol manual.
When the test mode is activated for the complete device, but the parameter Oper.bin.outp. under test
is not, the routed relay outputs of the device are not activated by the generated the indications.
NOTE
i The device remains in test mode during every restart until you intentionally set the device back into the
process mode or you have carried out an initial start.
You can set the process mode by switching the parameter Activate device test mode to inactive
again (removing the check mark) or by deactivating the test mode again via the IEC 61850-8-1 protocol.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
NOTE
i Besides the cross device test mode, you also have the option to place an individual function or stage into
test mode depending on the supported operating modes of a function or stage. To do this, see the descrip-
tion of the relevant function or stage.
When you place an individual function or stage into the test mode, all indications issued by this function or
stage are given a test bit.
When you activate the test mode for an individual function or stage, but not the parameter
Oper.bin.outp. under test, the routed relay outputs of the function or stage are not activated by
the generated indications.
An individual function or stage remains in the test mode during every restart until you have intentionally
deactivated the test mode for this function or stage again or carried out an initial start.
Parameter: Oper.bin.outp. under test
• Default setting (_:151) Oper.bin.outp. under test = inactive

If you activate the Oper.bin.outp. under test parameter, the indications generated in the device and
marked with a test bit can be issued to a routed relay output of the device, that is, you enable the relay
outputs of the device to be opened and closed.
If only one individual function or stage of the device is in test mode, that is, the cross device tested mode has
not been activated, only the indications of this function or stage are marked with a test bit and the routed
relay outputs of the device are activated.
NOTE
i If the Oper.bin.outp. under test parameter is inactive (default setting), the Test state of a function
or stage is changed to Test/Relays blocked.
Output Signal: Functions in Test mode

Normally, the output signal Functions in Test mode is prerouted to the last LED of the device base
module. If one or more protection or control functions are in test mode, the output signal Functions in
Test mode is generated and the corresponding LED of the device lights up red.
3.11.2.3 Settings

Device
_:101 General:Rated frequency • 50 Hz 50 Hz
• 60 Hz
_:102 General:Minimum 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
operate time
_:138 General:Block moni- • off off
toring dir.
• on
Setting change
_:163 General:Reserv.time for 0 s to 65535 s 120 s
com.prot.
Spontan.indic.
_:139 General:Fault-display • with trip with trip
Control
_:166 General:Shows inter- • 0 false
lock.cond. HMI
• 1

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions

Test support
_:150 General:Activate device • 0 false
test mode
• 1
_:151 General:Oper.bin.outp. • 0 false
under test
• 1

(Type)
General
_:503 General:>Sw. authority local SPS I
_:504 General:>Sw. authority remote SPS I
_:505 General:>Sw. mode interlocked SPS I
_:506 General:>Sw. mode non-interl. SPS I
_:510 General:>Test mode on SPS I
_:511 General:>Test mode off SPS I
_:507 General:>Dev. funct.logout on SPS I
_:508 General:>Dev. funct.logout off SPS I
_:512 General:>LED reset SPS I
_:513 General:>Light on SPS I
_:318 General:Active settings group INS O
_:308 General:Switching auth. station SPC C
_:324 General:Enable sw. auth. 1 SPC C
_:311 General:Switching authority ENS O
_:312 General:Switching mode ENS O
_:309 General:Sw.authority key/set ENS O
_:310 General:Sw.mode key/set ENS O
_:52 General:Behavior ENS O
_:53 General:Health ENS O
_:51 General:Test mode ENC C
_:321 General:Protection on SPC C
_:54 General:Protection inactive SPS O

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions

(Type)
_:319 General:Device logout SPC C
_:313 General:Logged off via BI SPS O
_:314 General:Logged off via control SPS O
_:315 General:Device logged off SPS O
_:323 General:LED reset SPC C
_:320 General:LED have been reset SPS O
_:509 General:>Block monitoring dir. SPS I
_:317 General:Block monitoring dir. SPS O
_:329 General:Functions in Test mode SPS O

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
3.12 Using a SIPROTEC 5 Device as a Client or Merging Unit

Overview with the Distributed Busbar Protection as an Example (IEC 61850 Compliant):
• Process bus: for cross-device transmission of the measured values for current and voltage
• GOOSE: For cross-device transmission of the position information of disconnectors and circuit breakers,
their trip commands and additional signals
• Distributed busbar protection
• Further information
Process Bus:
The process bus is available for the modular SIPROTEC 5 devices. The current and voltage measured values can
be transmitted across devices using the process bus. Prerequisite: a ETH-BD-2FO communication module with
the appropriate communication protocols. In the following figure, you can see the 7SS85 as an example of the
client, and the 6MU85 and other modular SIPROTEC 5 devices as merging units.
[dw_bb8_proj-71-star, 2, en_US]
Figure 3-128 Star Structure for Distributed Busbar Protection with Merging Units Connected via Optical
Fibers
Prerequisites for the Merging Units for the Distributed Busbar Protection (IEC 61850 Compliant)
You can use all modular SIPROTEC 5 devices (except the railway protection devices 7ST8x and 6MD89) and
other IEC 61850 compliant devices as merging units. The following prerequisites apply:
• All clients and merging units must have the firmware version V8.0x or higher.
• All clients and merging units must be connected to the ETH-BD-2FO communication module and must
use the process-bus protocols. These include:
– Consistent use of IEC 61850 Edition 2.x. Siemens recommends IEC 61850 Edition 2.1.
– Process-bus protocol 9-2 Merging Unit for Merging Units and 9-2 Client for clients
– Joint time synchronization. Siemens recommends the IEEE 1588 protocol.
• The current and voltage transformers suitable for the target application in the client must be present in
the merging units.
GOOSE:
As an alternative to using the local binary inputs and binary outputs of a SIPROTEC 5 device, you can use the
inputs and outputs of other SIPROTEC 5 devices and transmit them via IEC 61850 including GOOSE.
Examples of binary routings for transmission using GOOSE.
• Circuit-breaker and disconnector position information from the transmitters to the receivers
• Circuit-breaker trip commands from the transmitter to the receivers

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
Distributed Busbar Protection

The distributed busbar protection is a distributed protection system with the 7SS85 as the central unit (CU)
and other SIPROTEC 5 devices, the merging units (MU) as bay units.
The distributed busbar protection provides the following advantages over the centralized busbar protection or
the distributed busbar protection (IEC 61850 compliant):
• Transmission of current measured values (SMV) as per IEC 61850-9-2 (process bus) from the merging
units
• Automatic interconnection of current measured values, disconnector-switch and circuit-breaker switch

positions
• Local functional enhancements of the merging units
• Maximum number of bays and busbar zones
Functional Enhancements in the Devices

Starting with V8.40, the merging units have the following functional enhancements that are especially
intended for use with the distributed busbar protection and evaluated there:
• End-fault protection (1-pole/3-pole, 3-pole)
• External tripping
• Inherent circuit-breaker failure protection
• Extension in circuit-breaker failure protection
• Measuring point out of service
NOTE
i You can find these functional enhancements in the Global DIGSI 5 Library in the respective device, under
FG Circuit breaker > dBBP Function extensions. You can find the function Measuring point out of
service under Measuring inputs > Current 3-phase > dBBP Function extensions in the respective device.
Functional Enhancement in DIGSI 5

If a distributed busbar protection is present in the project, the following functional enhancements especially
intended for use with the distributed busbar protection are provided in the Single-Line Editor:
• New CU – BU assignment tab with the Update central unit function.
• Additional Include in distributed busbar system check box for current transformers, circuit breakers,
and disconnectors in the Properties tab.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
[sc_bbp8_SLE_incl, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-129 Extension in the Properties Tab if the Distributed Busbar Protection is Available
Further Information
NOTE
i Analog measured values, binary inputs, and binary outputs are routed across devices in the IEC 61850
System Configurator.
For a detailed description of how to use it as a Merging Unit/bay unit for the distributed busbar protection or
distributed busbar protection (IEC 61850 compliant), refer to the following Project Engineering chapter.
For further information on the process bus, GOOSE, IEC 61850 System Configurator, descriptions of stream
types, GOOSE Later Binding, VLAN priority, network redundancies, for example, PRP protocol or the sample
and time synchronization using IEEE 1588, refer to the Process Bus, Communication Protocols, IEC 61850
System Configurator and the DIGSI 5 Help manuals.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
System Functions
3.13 Power Quality Basics
3.13 Power Quality Basics

The Power quality basic consist of the following 4 functions:
• Voltage Variation
• Voltage Unbalance
• THD and harmonics
• Total demand distortion
Voltage variation
The Voltage variation function is used for measuring and monitoring a short-duration variation of the voltage
in distribution and industrial power systems. The power-quality events such as voltage dips, swells, and inter-
ruptions in 3-phase systems are detected. By measuring the RMS value of the voltage, the function obtains the
maximum dip or swell magnitude and the duration, even in case of an interruption.
Voltage unbalance
In a 3-phase power system, the voltages are normally balanced, as well as the connected loads. In some cases,
however, the balanced conditions can be disturbed due to various influences.
Voltage unbalances can be caused by various factors:
• Unbalanced load, for example, caused by different consumers in the individual phases
• Phase failure, for example, due to a tripped 1-phase fuse or a broken conductor
• Faults in the primary system, for example, at the transformer

The Voltage unbalance function:
• Detects the voltage-unbalance conditions in the distribution and industrial power systems.
• Monitors the voltage-unbalance conditions.
THD and harmonics

At the connection point to the public power system, the allowed total harmonic distortion (THD) is limited
according to the power-quality related standards. The function THD and harmonics is introduced to monitor
the THD.
The function THD and harmonics serves for the calculation of the following values:
• THD values of the 3-phase currents and 3-phase voltages
• Aggregated THD values of the 3-phase voltages

If the aggregated THD value exceeds the threshold, a warning is generated.
• 2nd to 20th harmonics of the 3-phase currents and 3-phase voltages
Total demand distortion

At the connection point to the public power system, the allowed total demand distortion (TDD) is limited
according to the power‑quality related standards. The Total demand distortion function is introduced to
monitor the TDD.
The Total demand distortion function serves for calculating the following values of the 3‑phase currents:
• 3-s TDD values
• TDD values within the demand interval, indicated in the following as demand TDD values
If the demand TDD values exceed the threshold, warnings are generated.
You can find a detailed description of the Power quality basic functions in the device manual Merging Unit
6MU85.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
4 Engineering
4.1 Overview 232

4.2 Selecting and Creating Devices 240
4.3 Configuration for the Centralized Busbar Protection and Distributed Busbar Protection 248
(IEC 61850 Compliant)
4.4 Configuration for the Distributed Busbar Protection 273
4.5 Additional Engineering Information 292

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
4.1 Overview
4.1 Overview
4.1.1 General
Use DIGSI 5 for engineering and parameterization purposes of the devices. Create and configure the devices
according to their hardware-specific and functional design. To do this, the functions of the DIGSI 5 Libraries
are available. With the single-line configuration, you can create a topological image of your system configura-
tion and connect the equipment with the used functions. For the Single-Line Editor, you need the standard or
premium version of DIGSI 5.
In the following chapters, an example is used to describe the specific components for the engineering and
configuration of a 7SS85. You can find the basic procedure during engineering and configuration in the
manual SIPROTEC 5 Engineering Guide DIGSI 5.
4.1.2 Differentiation of the Busbar-Protection Variants
You can use 7SS85 busbar protection as centralized busbar protection, as distributed busbar protection
(IEC 61850 compliant) or as distributed busbar protection with the current measured values and switch
positions detected in separate merging units and transmitted via optical fibers.
• Centralized busbar protection:

Explained in a simplified way, the device functions entirely autonomously. There are corresponding
current transformers and binary inputs and outputs in the device for every current measurement and for
every signaling contact. The device design and number of current transformers here depend on the
number of bays to be configured. The advantages are low hardware expenditure and simple parameteri-
zation of this single device.
• Distributed busbar protection (IEC 61850 Compliant):

In the case of distributed busbar protection (IEC 61850 compliant), current measured values (SMVs)
are transmitted from the merging units to the 7SS85 (client) according to IEC 61850-9-2 (process bus).
The switch positions, trip commands, and other necessary signals can be substituted between the 7SS85
and the merging units using IEC 61850 GOOSE. The current measured values and signals are routed in
the IEC 61850 System Configurator. The 7SS85 corresponds to the central unit and the merging units
correspond to the bay units. The 7SS85 is used here without its own current transformers, but, like the
merging units, it requires at least one ETH-BD-2FO communication module with IEC 61850-9-2 protocol.
The number of merging units depends on the number of bays to be configured. This variant offers the
advantages of distributed busbar protection with simpler wiring in the bay and the use of the current
transformers of available SIPROTEC 5 devices.
Functionally, distributed busbar protection (IEC 61850 compliant) corresponds to centralized busbar
protection where the local current measured values of the merging units are transmitted and the binary
signals are exchanged according to IEC 61850 GOOSE.
For the distributed busbar protection (IEC 61850 compliant), mixed operation of current measured
values in the 7SS85 and the current measured values (SMV) transmitted by the merging units is possible,
according to IEC 61850-9-2 (process bus). You can also wire the inputs and outputs of the 7SS85 directly
to the switching devices in the bay, or wire the binary signals to the merging units and exchange them
according to IEC 61850 GOOSE.
You can find a detailed description of the process bus in the Process Bus manual.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
4.1 Overview
• Distributed busbar protection:

Distributed busbar protection is a distributed protection system with the 7SS85 as the central unit (CU)
and other SIPROTEC 5 devices, the merging units (MU) as bay units.
The distributed busbar protection provides the following advantages over the centralized busbar protec-
tion or the distributed busbar protection (IEC 61850 compliant):
– Maximum number of bays and busbar zones
– Automatic interconnection of current measured values, disconnector switch and circuit-breaker
switch positions
– Local functional enhancements of the merging units
Table 4-1 Variants of the 7SS85 Busbar Protection and its Significant Features:
Centralized Busbar Distributed Busbar Distributed Busbar

Protection Protection (IEC 61850 Protection
Compliant)
Significant features 9, A, B, C, D, E F, G, H, J, K
with 1, 2, or up to 6 busbar sections with 6 or up to 20 busbar
sections
Recommended hardware V1, V2, V3 V4 V4
standard variants with corresponding for mixed operation of without current trans-
number of current trans- current transformers and formers
formers (expandable) SMVs, even V1 to V3 are
possible and expandable
Location of the current 20/0 20/24 (if mixed, max. 20) 0/45
transformers in the 7SS85
or in the bay units
Communication module Optional ETH-BD-2FO (max. 4) ETH-BD-2FO (max. 4)
Communication protocol Optional 9-2 client (in the 7SS85) 9-2 CL 7SS85CU
9-2 merging unit 9-2 MU 7SS85CU
SMV routing using the – Manually Partially automated
System Configurator
Interconnection of the MU Optionally expandable via Manually via GOOSE Automatically
disconnector and circuit- GOOSE
breaker switch positions
Busbar protection-specific – No Inherent circuit-breaker
functional enhancements failure protection and
in the merging units end-fault protection
Routing in the single-line Busbars and bay functions on the 7SS85 Busbars on the 7SS85
configuration Bay functions on the
merging units

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
4.1 Overview
Topologies
Figure 4-1 Star Topology for Distributed Busbar Protection with Merging Units Connected via Optical
Fibers
[dw_7ss85_HSR-ringstruktur, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-2 HSR Ring Topology for a Central Unit with Bay Units in up to 3 Rings with up to 15 Devices
At the time of publication of the manual, Siemens recommends using the HSR ring structure.
Integrating Communication Modules

With a centralized busbar-protection variant, the current measured values necessary for the power system
protection and the high-precision time signal needed for synchronization are transmitted via the common
fiber-optic network. In the 7SS85, you can plug in up to 4 ETH-BD-2FO communication modules for transmit-
ting the current measured values. In the base module, in slots E or F, and in the CB202 expansion module, in
slots N or P. With distributed busbar protection, you can receive up to 15 current measuring points (with 4
current measured values each) per module using these communication modules, up to 14 current measuring
points are possible with distributed busbar protection (IEC 61850 compliant).
Each merging unit must be connected to the 7SS85 via an ETH-BD-2FO communication module. Accordingly,
each communication module requires an IP address within the subnetwork range specified by you.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
4.1 Overview
Prerequisites for the Merging Units for Distributed Busbar Protection (IEC 61850 Compliant)
You can use all modular SIPROTEC 5 devices (except the railway protection devices 7ST8x and 6MD89) and
other IEC 61850 compliant devices as merging units. The following prerequisites apply.
• All clients and merging units must have the firmware version V8.0x or higher.
• All clients and merging units must be connected to the ETH-BD-2FO communication module and must
use the process bus protocols. These include:
– Consistent use of IEC 61850 Edition 2.x. Siemens recommends IEC 61850 Edition 2.1.
– Process bus protocol 9-2 Merg.Unit for merging units and 9-2 Client for clients
– Joint time synchronization. Siemens recommends the IEEE 1588 protocol.
• The current and voltage transformers suitable for the target application in the client must be present in
the merging units.
Prerequisites for Merging Units for Distributed Busbar Protection

You can use all modular SIPROTEC 5 devices (except the railway protection devices 7ST8x and 6MD89) as
merging units. The following prerequisites apply.
• For distributed busbar protection, you must create all merging units in the same DIGSI 5 project as the
7SS85CU.
• The merging units require firmware version V8.40 or higher.
• All merging units require an ETH-BD-2FO communication module using the 9-2 MU 7SS85CU protocol.
• All merging units require 1 up to a maximum of 8 protection current transformers (current 4x protection)
as Measuring point I-3ph with 3-phase + IN connection type.
• A sufficient supply of function points must be available for the 9-2 MU 7SS85CU protocol and the
required functions.
4.1.3 Engineering Example
The engineering example includes the following system parts with all disconnectors, current transformers,
and the circuit breaker:
• Double busbar
• Feeder bay with current transformer located on the busbar side
• Feeder bay with current transformer located on the line side
• Bus coupler bay with 2 current transformers

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
4.1 Overview
[sc_slbges, 2, en_US]
Figure 4-3 Engineering Example for Centralized and Distributed Busbar Protection (IEC 61850 Compliant)
4.1.4 Busbars and Bays
Use the DIGSI 5 Single-Line Editor to configure the graphical representation of the busbars and the various
bay types. In doing this, you define the assignment of the switching devices and current transformers among
one another in the bays and the assignment to the busbars.
You can configure the following bay types:
• Feeder
• Bus coupler bay

– Bus coupler with 1 current transformer
– Bus coupler with 2 current transformers
– Bus coupler without circuit breaker
– Combined bus coupler
• Busbar section disconnection bay

You can find additional information in chapter 5.2.3.1 Overview of the bay types.
The options for engineering of the busbars are determined by the selected Significant features. If busbars
with section disconnection or busbar section couplers are used, each part is counted as a busbar section. A
transfer busbar can be configured as a busbar section with measuring system or as a busbar section without
measuring system.
4.1.5 Procedure
The following description of the procedure is limited to one option for engineering.
For engineering a busbar-protection system and configuring the devices, proceed as follows:

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
4.1 Overview
• Creating project and system graphically in the Single-Line Editor (SLE) or importing an existing single-line
diagram (.SSD).
• Creating devices and assigning functions
• Routing measuring points and binary information

The objective is to represent the bays of the actual plant graphically and to connect current transformers,
circuit breakers, and disconnectors to the functions contained in the devices.
You can see the essential elements in the following figure.
[sc_bbp8_proj_10_overall, 2, en_US]
Figure 4-4 Overview of Project Tree and Single-Line Configuration
(1) Project tree with the created project and the devices it contains, including their function groups
and parameterization
(2) Single-line-configuration with the graphical representation of the busbar system and the protec-
tion devices used, including the functions and their connections to the switching devices and
current transformers in the bays.
(3) Global libraries with the device-specific functions in the upper section and the graphical single-
line elements in the lower section.
NOTE
i The prerequisite is that the required device drivers (for example Devices_BusbarProt_FW...ddd and for
distributed measured-value acquisition also other device drivers such as Devices_MergingUnit_FW...ddd)
have been imported. For more detailed information on this, refer to the DIGSI 5 Online Help.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
4.1 Overview
4.1.6 Creating the Project and Representing the System Graphically in the Single-
Line Editor
• To create a new project, open the Project menu and click New. The project appears in the Project tree.
• Generate a graphical representation of the busbars and bays with their switching devices and current
transformers using the Global DIGSI 5 Library. Alternatively, you can also import an existing single-line
diagram (.SSD).
To do so, click Single-line configuration.
[sc_bbp8_proj_15_SLE_over, 2, en_US]
Figure 4-5 Graphical Representation of the System
The graphical representation of the system in the Single-Line Editor shows the layout of the switching equip-
ment and current transformers and their connections to the busbars.
Proceed as follows:
Busbars
• Click Global DIGSI 5 library > Types > Single-line and display elements.
The available graphical elements are displayed.
• Click Horizontal busbar and drag and drop the busbar into the working area. Repeat the procedure for
the second busbar BB2.
Bay 1:
• Drag and drop the Circuit breaker into the working area. Bay 1 is generated in the working area with the
circuit breaker QA1.
• Change the designation for the bay, for example, E01.
• Drag and drop the Disconnector into the bay. Repeat the procedure for a 2nd disconnector. Connect
disconnector QB1 with busbar BB1 and disconnector QB2 with busbar BB2.
• Connect circuit breaker QA1 with the disconnectors QB1 and QB2.
• Drag and drop the Current transformer 3-phase into the Bay below the circuit breaker (external current
transformer).

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
4.1 Overview
• Connect current transformer BE1 with circuit breaker QA1.
• Click a Feeder and drag and drop it into Bay and connect it with circuit breaker QA1.
Bay 2:
• Select Bay 1, copy it (for example, <CTRL> + C), click the target position, insert it (for example, <CTRL> +
V).
• Change the designation for the bay, for example E02.
• Delete the connections to circuit breaker QA1 and current transformer BE1.
• Move circuit breaker QA1 and current transformer BE1 and establish the connections again (internal
current transformer). Establish also the connections up to the busbar.
Bay 3:
• Select a bay, copy it, click the target position, and insert it.
• Change the designation for the bay, for example E03 Bus Coupler Bay.
• Adjust the circuiting. To do this, proceed as follows:

– Delete the feeder and the connections.
– Copy a current transformer and insert it again, for example as BE1/BE2.
– Again, establish the connections up to the busbar.
You can find additional information on the graphical representation of the system in the Single-Line Editor in
the manual SIPROTEC 5 Engineering Guide DIGSI 5.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
4.2 Selecting and Creating Devices
4.2.1 Significant Features for Centralized and Distributed Busbar Protection

(IEC 61850 Compliant)
When ordering the 7SS85, use Significant features to select the type and scope of the configurable busbar
sections. One busbar section corresponds to one protection range. You require 4 current transformers for a
measuring point.
For the centralized busbar protection, the number of configurable bays is limited by the expansion of the
device hardware. The number of no-cost bays contained in the variants of the respective Significant features
is listed in the following table.
The distributed busbar protection (IEC 61850 compliant) is functionally identical to the centralized busbar
protection. Project engineering must be performed in a similar manner in the Single-Line Editor. It is distin-
guished by the sampled measured values (SMV), switch positions, and their routings provided by the merging
units via the process bus. Considering the hardware, the current transformers are therefore not necessary, but
at least one communication module with the process-bus protocol is mandatory. Siemens recommends
configuring the 7SS85 in such a way that no more than 14 current measuring points (14 * (3-phase + IN) = 56
analog current inputs) are received by one ETH-BD-2FO communication module. For a larger number, you
need an additional communication module in the 7SS85.
A maximum of 20 measuring points are possible for central busbar protection, of which up to 4 voltage meas-
uring points are possible. Up to 24 current measuring points are possible for distributed busbar protection
(IEC 61850-compliant). Instantiate the backup protection and circuit-breaker failure protection only in the
Merging Units.
The following maximum scope is provided:
• 30 bays (feeders, bus couplers, busbar-section disconnections)
• 20 ⋅ 3-phase current measuring points locally on the 7SS85 (current transformers with the connection
type 3-phase + IN) or 24 ⋅ 3-phase current measuring points via IEC 61850-9-2
• 4 ⋅ 3-phase voltage measuring points (voltage transformers)
• 6 bus zones (with measuring system)
• 6 bus couplers (with 1 or 2 current transformers)
• 3 reserve busbars (busbar zones without measuring system)
• Triple busbar
NOTE
i For the centralized busbar protection, keep in mind that as the number of current and voltage measuring
points increases, the maximum possible number of binary inputs and outputs decreases. As a result, with a
configuration having 20 current measuring points, only 43 binary inputs and 43 binary outputs are
possible. Siemens recommends in this case detecting the disconnector-switch positions with only one
binary input or using protection communication or GOOSE.
NOTE
i During project engineering of resource-intensive functions such as the VI 3ph function group, for example
with impedance protection, keep in mind that you can instantiate a maximum of 12 VI 3ph function
groups. For more information on monitoring resource consumption, see also 8.2.1 Load Model.
NOTE
i If you use 24 ⋅ 3-pole current measuring points via IEC 61850-9-2, you cannot instantiate a backup protec-
tion function in 7SS85. End-fault protection is possible, circuit-breaker failure protection or overcurrent
protection are not permitted.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
In the device configuration, you first select one of the standard hardware variants, and then select one of the
Significant features. The following table shows in the column Significant features the number of possible
busbar sections and the free bays included.
Significant Features Standard Variant Applications
9 1 bus zone without discon- V1 12 I-trans- T-network, single busbar
nector image formers 1 1/2 circuit-breaker arrangement
3 bus zones without meas- 15 BIs
uring system 13 BOs
A 2 bus zones without discon- V2 16 I-trans- Single busbars,
nector image formers 1 1/2 circuit-breaker arrangement,
3 bus zones without meas- 11 BIs Double busbar/double circuit-breaker system
uring system 11 BOs with current transformer,
H switch
B 2 bus zones with discon- V2 16 I-trans- Double busbar (with or without combined
nector image formers busbar),
3 bus zones without meas- 11 BIs Single busbar with transfer busbar
uring system 11 BOs
C 6 bus zones without discon- V3 24 I-trans- Single busbars,
nector image formers 1 1/2 circuit-breaker arrangement,
3 bus zones without meas- 15 BIs Double busbar/double circuit-breaker system
uring system 15 BOs with current transformer,
Ring bus,
Meshed system
D 6 bus zones with discon- V3 24 I-trans- Double busbar (with or without combined
nector image formers busbar),
3 bus zones without meas- 15 BIs Single, double, or triple busbar or double
uring system 15 BOs busbar with transfer busbar
Gnd Only Circuit-breaker failure V3 24 I-trans- Double busbar (with or without combined
protection formers busbar),
6 bus zones with discon- 15 BIs Single, double, or triple busbar or double
nector image 15 BOs busbar with transfer busbar
3 bus zones without meas-
uring system
9 to E as above V4 19 BI As above
11 BOs The V4 standard variant is the preferred
Communication variant for the distributed busbar protection
module (ETH- (IEC 61850 compliant)
BD-2FO)
With Significant features = E, the system configuration is possible as with D but the following functions are
not available:
• Busbar differential protection
• External tripping bus zone (direct)

A differential current is still calculated in the event of unbalancing due to the circuit-breaker failure protection.
The affected busbars trip in the event of a circuit-breaker failure due to this differential current.
NOTE
i A significant feature with disconnector image is always necessary if the current transformer of a feeder
can be assigned to more than one bus zone. Line disconnector switches, bus section disconnector switches,
or disconnectors in bus couplers are also available in Significant features without a disconnector image.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
4.2.2 Significant Features for the Distributed Busbar Protection
The Distributed busbar protection is a distributed protection system with the central unit (CU) 7SS85 and
other SIPROTEC 5 devices (merging units) as bay units.
When ordering the 7SS85, select the Significant features F, G, H, J, or K for the distributed busbar protec-
tion. In this way, you also define the type and scope of the configurable busbar sections. One busbar section
corresponds to one protection range.
One 7SS85 can receive and process the SMVs of up to 45 current measuring points. Siemens recommends
configuring the 7SS85 in such a way that no more than 15 current measuring points (15 * (3-phase + IN) = 60
analog current values) are received by one ETH-BD-2FO communication module. For a larger number, you
require an additional communication module in the 7SS85. A merging unit can send a maximum of 8 meas-
uring points (32 SMV channels).
The following table provides a description of the Significant features of the 7SS85CU.
The 7SS85 distributed busbar protection is intended for the following maximum scope:
• 45 ⋅ 3-phase current measuring points (current transformers with the connection type 3-phase + IN)
• 20 bus zones (with measuring system)
• 20 bus couplers (with 1 or 2 current transformers)
• 12 reserve busbars (bus zones without measuring system)

When using 45 current measuring points, up to 20 bus zones with measuring system and triple busbar are
possible. When using 45 current measuring points and quintuple busbar with included transfer busbar, up to
12 bus zones with measuring system are possible.
NOTE
i For the distributed busbar protection, keep in mind that all the currents must be provided by the merging
units. Mixing local current transformers in the central unit and current measured values of the merging
units is not allowed.
NOTE
i In case of extensive configurations it is helpful to reduce the scope of IEC 61850 messages for memory
reasons. To do this, deactivate messages that are not required in the IEC structure.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
Significant Properties Standard Variant Applications

F 6 bus zones without discon- V4 19 BIs Single busbars,
nector image 11 BOs 1 1/2 circuit-breaker arrangement,
6 bus zones without meas- Communication Double busbar/double circuit-breaker system
uring system module (ETH- with current transformer,
BD-2FO) Ring bus,
Meshed system
G 20 bus zones without Double busbar (with or without combined
disconnector image busbar),
12 bus zones without meas- Single, double, triple, quadruple busbar or
uring system double, triple busbar with transfer busbar
H Only circuit-breaker failure Double busbar (with or without combined
protection busbar),
20 bus zones with discon- Single, double, triple, quadruple busbar or
nector image double, triple busbar with transfer busbar
12 bus zones without meas-
uring system
J 6 bus zones with discon- Double busbar (with or without combined
nector image busbar),
6 bus zones without meas- Single, double, or triple busbar or
uring system double busbar with transfer busbar
K 20 bus zones with discon- Double busbar (with or without combined
nector image busbar),
12 bus zones without meas- Single, double, triple, quadruple busbar or
uring system double, triple busbar with transfer busbar
With Significant features = H, the system configuration is possible as with K, but the following functions are
not available:
• External tripping bus zone (direct)

A differential current is still calculated in the event of unbalancing due to the circuit-breaker failure protection.
The affected busbars trip in the event of a circuit-breaker failure due to this differential current.
NOTE
i A significant feature with disconnector image is always necessary if the current transformer of a feeder
can be assigned to more than one bus zone. Line disconnector switches, bus section disconnector switches,
or disconnectors in bus couplers are also available in Significant features without a disconnector image.
4.2.3 Creating Devices
Creating 7SS85
With the hardware selection and the Significant features, you decide which busbar protection you create.
• Centralized busbar protection
• Distributed busbar protection (IEC 61850 compliant) with process-bus communication
• Distributed busbar protection without integral current transformers

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
Proceed as follows:
• In the DIGSI 5 project tree, click Add new device, and enter the product code of your device in the
subsequent dialog, for example
– 7SS85-DAAA-AA0-0AAAA0-A9D212-53113A-EAC000-000AC0-CC1BA2-CC1CC1-CC1CE0
for a centralized busbar protection with locally included current transformers
– 7SS85-DAAA-AA0-0AAAA0-A9D212-13113A-ABD000-000AC0-CG0BA2
for a distributed busbar protection (IEC 61850 compliant) with process-bus communication
– 7SS85-DAAA-AA0-0AAAA0-A9K212-13113A-ABD000-000AC0-CG0BA2
for a distributed busbar protection without integral current transformers
• Click the Verify button.
• Then select the application template and communication configuration.

The device appears in the Project tree and in the Single-line configuration.
• If you have created a distributed busbar protection variant (even IEC 61850 compliant), open the device
information, adapt the Name, for example, 7SS85CU, and the IEC 61850 name, for example CU for
central unit, and select IEC 61850 Edition 2.x.
Siemens recommends activating the GOOSE supervision. In the project tree, click [Device name] >
Settings > Device settings and activate the check box Enable GOOSE Supervision. Thus, additional
GOOSE messages are available under communication supervision during information routing.
[sc_bbp8_proj_20_ZE_create, 2, en_US]
Figure 4-6 Creating a Device

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
The devices appear in the project tree and in the Single-line configuration.
NOTE
i If you configure a distributed busbar protection, select the device with the ETH-BD-2FO communication
module in the hardware selection and make sure to use ...CU only ... in the F to K selection in the Signifi-
cant features. For an existing device, you see the Significant features used in the project tree under
[Device name] > Settings > Device settings > Important feature.
The Significant features are an integral part of the device function and can only be changed within the 2
groups 9 to E for centralized busbar protection or F to K for distributed busbar protection with a simulta-
neous function update.
Creating a Merging Unit

If you have selected a distributed busbar protection variant, then you create another SIPROTEC 5 device as the
merging unit, for example, a 6MU85, at the same time. Adapt the Name, for example 6MU85_MU01, and the
IEC 61850 Name, for example MU01_E01, and select the IEC 61850 Edition.
Siemens recommends activating the GOOSE supervision. In the project tree, click [Device name] > Settings >
Device settings and mark the Enable GOOSE Supervision check box. This makes additional GOOSE messages
available in the Information routing under the communication supervision.
Devices with 2 current transformers can be used in a very flexible manner. For example, they are suitable for 1
coupler bay with 2 current transformers, or, alternatively, for 2 feeder bays. You can already take this into
account when creating the devices.
For most of the SIPROTEC 5 devices, current measuring points and circuit breakers are already instantiated via
the device and application-template selections.
Check and add the required function groups and functions in the Project tree or directly in the Single-line
configuration if necessary.
• Current measuring points with instantiated current protection function, for example, FG Line or FG VI.
• Circuit breaker
• Disconnector
In the Function-group connections Editor, check and add the assignments of the current measuring points and
the circuit breakers or add the assignment later in the single-line configuration. For additional information on
adding function groups and functions, refer to the corresponding device manuals.
4.2.4 Inserting and Connecting Bus Zones
Inserting Bus Zone

In this example, the bays are connected to a double busbar via busbar disconnectors. For parameterization,
you need the Busbar function group and 2 bus zones.
The Busbar function group with 1 bus zone is already created when adding a device.
To create the 2nd bus zone, proceed as follows:
• In the project tree, click Single-line configuration and open the 7SS85.
• In the global DIGSI 5 library, click Types > Busbar protection > 7SS85 Busbar protection > FG Busbar >
Busbar protection > Function extensions and drag and drop a Bus zone into the Busbar function
group.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
[sc_bbp8_proj_25_SLE_BB2, 2, en_US]
Figure 4-7 Inserting and Connecting Bus Zones
Connecting Busbars
Proceed as follows:
• In the function group Busbar, click the Bus zone 1 icon and connect it to busbar BB1.
• Connect Bus zone 2 to busbar BB2.

A dashed line is displayed to indicate the connections.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
If you have selected the busbar, you can specify in the Properties the color used for representing the bar in
the online display Single-line supervision.
[sc_bbp_sle_color, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-8 Color Selection for the Busbar Display

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
4.3 Configuration for the Centralized Busbar Protection and Distributed Busbar Protection (IEC 61850 Compliant)
4.3 Configuration for the Centralized Busbar Protection and

Distributed Busbar Protection (IEC 61850 Compliant)
4.3.1 Differences in Project Engineering for the Different Busbar-Protection

Variants
Centralized Busbar Protection and Distributed Busbar Protection (IEC 61850 Compliant)
The editing process in the single-line diagram is the same for the centralized and the distributed busbar
protection (IEC 61850 compliant). There are essential differences in the measuring-point routing between the
measuring points contained in the 7SS85 and the SMV values of the merging units transmitted via the process
bus. You can find the description of this in the following chapters.
Distributed Busbar Protection

The differences between the centralized and the distributed busbar protection are fundamental. With the
centralized busbar protection, you must create device functions such as bays, current transformers, and circuit
breakers in the 7SS85 and connect them to the graphical representation in the single-line diagram. With the
distributed busbar protection, you connect the device functions of the merging units to the graphical repre-
sentations of the bays in the single-line diagram and then update the central unit.
You can find a description of this starting in chapter 4.4.1 Creating and Checking the Network Topology.
4.3.2 Adding Bays, Function Groups, and Functions in 7SS85
Inserting Feeder Bay and Bus Coupler Bay in 7SS85

The parameterization in this example requires 3 bays. The current transformers, circuit breakers, and discon-
nectors are added to these bays.
Proceed as follows:
• In the global DIGSI 5 library, click Types > 7SS85 Busbar protection > Bay and drag and drop a Bay into
the device.
Repeat the procedure for 2 additional bays.
• Click for example FG Circuit breaker 1/3pole and drag and drop a Circuit brk. 1/3pol into Bay 1.
Repeat the procedure for Bay 2 and the Bus coupler bay.
• Click FG Current transformer and drag and drop a Curr. transformer into Bay 1.
Repeat the procedure for Bay 2.
Add 2 current transformers into the bus coupler bay.
• Click FG Disconnector and drag and drop a Disconnector into Bay 1.

Repeat the procedure for the second disconnector.
• Drag and drop 2 disconnectors into Bay 2 and 2 disconnectors into the Bus coupler bay.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
[sc_slfeei, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-9 Inserting Bays
4.3.3 Current Measuring Points
4.3.3.1 Current Measuring Points for the Centralized Busbar Protection and Current Measured Values for the
Distributed Busbar Protection (IEC 61850 Compliant)
There are 2 options for detecting current measured values in the busbar protection:
• Local current transformers available in 7SS85 as centralized busbar protection
• Current transformers available in other devices (merging units), the current measured values (SMV) of
which are transmitted to the 7SS85 via optical fibers according to IEC 61850-9-2 (process bus)
In the following figures, you can see both options for creating the current measuring points.
7SS85 as a Process-Bus Client

The column PB Client is only available in the table if the corresponding IEC 61850-8-1 (GOOSE) and IEC
61850-9-2 client protocols have been activated for the ETH-BD-2FO communication module. The measuring
points should already be renamed here according to their use, for example MeasPt_I-3ph_E01. Perform cross-
device logical assignment to the real measuring points in other devices later in the IEC 61850 System Config-
urator.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
[sc_bbp_IEC_22_MP, 2, en_US]
Figure 4-10 Current Measuring Points via Process Bus
Any Device
The following figure shows any device, here, as an example, the 6MU85, with a physically available current
transformer in the device.
The measuring points should already be renamed here according to their use, for example MU01_E01 I-3ph 1.
This facilitates subsequent assignments in the IEC 61850 System Configurator.
[sc_bbp_IEC_23_MP, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-11 Local Current Measuring Point with the Assigned 3 Phases and Ground
4.3.3.2 Adding Measuring Points for Centralized Busbar Protection 7SS85

The example shows a current transformer in each bay. The bus coupler bay contains 2 current transformers.
First, add a measuring point for each current transformer.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
Proceed as follows:
• Go to the project tree and click 7SS85 > Measuring-point routing.
• Click Add new and add 4 l-3ph measuring points.
• Go to the Working area and route the phase currents and the ground current to the current-transformer
inputs of the device.
[sc_mesran, 2, en_US]
Figure 4-12 Routing Measuring Points

Incomplete routings are displayed by a warning symbol in the project tree.
To display or, if necessary, change the parameters of the added measuring points, go to Power-system data
in the project tree.
Checking and Adding Function-Group Connections

Connect the measuring points, for example I-3ph 1, to the current transformers, for example BE1 and the
circuit breakers, for example QA1, in the bays. You can preroute this in the Function-group connections
editor or draw the connector lines directly in the Single-Line Editor.
Check and add the assignments of the current transformers and of the circuit breakers to the Meas.points
I-3ph in the Function-group connections editor.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
[sc_bbp8_proj_36_FG-verb, 2, en_US]
Figure 4-13 Function-Group Connections Editor
4.3.4 Current Measured Values (SMV) for the Distributed Busbar Protection (IEC
61850 Compliant)
4.3.4.1 Procedure for the Transmission of the Current Measured Values from the Merging Unit to the Client
In a distributed system, the current transformers are physically present in the merging units. These current
measured values must be transmitted to the target device (process-bus client), for example the 7SS85.
Proceed as follows:
• Create and check the network topology
• Add and route measuring points
• Cross-device assignments in the IEC 61850 System Configurator
• Completing the measuring-points routing in DIGSI
4.3.4.2 Create and Check the Network Topology
Overview
The process bus is available for most of the modular SIPROTEC 5 devices. With the process bus, the current and
voltage measured values can be transmitted across devices. A requirement for this is an ETH-BD-2FO commu-
nication module with the corresponding activated communication protocols. You can find a detailed descrip-
tion of how to use IEC 61850-9-2 in the Process Bus manual, and a description for IEC 61850-8-1 GOOSE in
the Communication manual.
In the following figure, you can see the 7SS85 as an example of the destination device (client), and the
6MU85 and other modular SIPROTEC 5 devices as merging units.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
Figure 4-14 Star Topology
Use the IEC 61850 System Configurator to determine the cross-device routings.
Creating a Network Topology for the Devices
All participating devices must have the same IEC 61850 edition 2.x. You can check or change this by opening
the device information for each device in the project tree and selecting IEC 61850 Edition 2 or IEC 61850
Edition 2.1. Siemens recommends using IEC 61850 Edition 2.1.
• Select the communication protocols under Devices and power systems in the Device view in Proper-
ties under Protocols once the ETH-BD-2FO communication module has been selected. For example for
the merging units 9-2 Merg.Unit for sending sample measured values (SMV) and 9-2 Client for receiving
sample measured values in the process-bus client (7SS85). IEC 61850-8-1 is selected automatically,
provided that 9-2 Merg.Unit or 9-2 Client is active.
• Activate the protocol necessary for time synchronization, for example, IEEE 1588.
• Check and change the Ethernet addresses for all ETH-BD-2FO communication modules in Properties. All
devices must be in the same subnetwork, for example x.x.x.60 for the client and for the merging units,
for example x.x.x.1, ...2, ...3 consecutively.
You can find other descriptions of network redundancy, for example PRP, or sample and time synchronization
via IEEE 1588, as well as information on the Ethernet modules, in the SIPROTEC 5 Communication Protocols
manual.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
[sc_bbp_IEC_20, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-15 Protocol Selection for the Communication Module
Creating the IEC 61850 Station
Check your devices before you create a new IEC 61850 station:
• In the device properties, have you provided the IEC 61850 names with meaningful names such as
MU01_E01?
• Do all devices consistently have IEC 61850 Edition 2.x?
• Did you assign an unambiguous IP address for each communication module within the same subnet-
work?
• Create a new IEC 61850 station for your project via the project tree.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
• For the properties, select the same IEC 61850 Edition 2.x as the one used in the devices.
• Determine the storage path for the IEC 61850 Substation Configuration Description file.
Figure 4-16 Properties of the IEC 61850 Station
NOTE
i For example, use the project path as the storage path. If you are copying projects, consider copying the IEC
61850 Substation Configuration Description and updating the path in the IEC 61850 station properties
accordingly.
Open the IEC 61850 station and select the device(s) you require from the Available devices.
• Select the devices individually by pressing the [>] button.
• Select all devices by pressing the [>>] button.

These devices then appear among the Assigned devices.
Siemens recommends that you create a merging unit pattern (typical) including all objects:
• Current transformers
• Circuit breaker with instantiated functions such as Circuit-breaker failure protection
• All routings
• All name adjustments

Copy this merging unit and reinsert the required number of bays. Check and change the following objects:
• IEC 61850 name
• IP addresses
• Measuring-point names

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
Figure 4-17 IEC 61850 Station in DIGSI
4.3.4.3 Adding and Routing Measuring Points
Overview
The physical current and voltage transformers are in the merging units, the logical measuring points are
located in the client, for example 7SS85. You define the connection of the physical measuring points to the
logical measuring points via the process bus using the IEC 61850 System Configurator.
Protection Device as a Process-Bus Client, for Example 7SS85 Distributed Busbar Protection (IEC 61850 Compliant)
To add measuring points, proceed as follows:
• In the project tree, click the client, [Device name] > Measuring-point routing.
• In the Current-measuring points tab, use the Add new button to add, for example, 4 I-3ph current
measuring points.
You can also set up 1-phase or 3-phase voltage measuring points in the Voltage-measuring points tab.
You subsequently also have to route these analogously to the described current measuring points.
• Route the measuring points in the working area to the PB Client column.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
[sc_bbp_proj_05_prerouting_smv, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-18 Routing Measuring Points
Incomplete routings are indicated by a warning symbol in the project tree. To display or change the parame-
ters of the added measuring points, if required, go to Power system in the project tree in the device.
NOTE
i Measuring points routed to the process-bus client require further parameterization steps in the IEC 61850
System Configurator in order to connect the merging unit to the process-bus client. After successful import
of the IEC 61850 station, the connection details are shown in the measuring-point properties and the
warning symbol is removed.
Checking and Adding Function-Group Connections

Connect the measuring points, for example I-3ph 1, to the current transformers, for example BE1 and the
circuit breakers, for example QA1, in the bays.
You can preroute this in the Function-group connections editor, or, even better, drag and drop the connector
lines directly in the Single-Line Editor.
Check and add the assignments of the current transformer and the circuit breaker to the Meas.points I-3ph in
the Function-group connections editor.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
[sc_bbp8_proj_36_FG-verb, 2, en_US]
Figure 4-19 Function-Group Connections Editor
Merging Unit
A current measuring point is already available for most SIPROTEC 5 devices by selecting the device and appli-
cation template. The insertion of an additional measuring point is thus only occasionally required. If you must
insert an additional measuring point, first check in Devices and networks whether you have also physically
provided an appropriate number of current transformers (for example, current 4x protection).
To be able to add and transfer measuring points, proceed as follows:
• In the project tree, click [Device name] > Measuring-points routing and create the required current
measuring points by clicking the Add new button. You can select between I-1ph and I-3ph. Use I-3ph for
the example.
You can also set up 1-phase or 3-phase voltage measuring points in the Voltage-measuring points tab.
You subsequently also have to route these analogously to the described current measuring points.
• Add a Voltage/current 3ph FG to the device from the global DIGSI 5 Library, if required.
• Open the Function-group connections editor and connect the Meas.points I-3ph to the VI 3ph function
groups.
• Open the Merging-unit routing editor and check/route the measuring point to be transferred.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
[sc_bbp_proj_13_routing_smv, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-20 Merging-Unit Routing Editor
With the module selected, you can view and change the parameters such as Stream Type in the Properties
tab. Siemens recommends activating the GOOSE supervision. Siemens recommends leaving the setting IEC
61869-9 for Stream type and 4000 Hz, 1 ASDU for Sampling-rate config..
You can find additional information regarding the process bus, GOOSE, the IEC 61850 System Configurator, as
well as descriptions of the stream types, GOOSE Later Binding, VLAN priority, network redundancy, for
example PRP or sample and time synchronization via IEEE 1588 in the Process Bus, Communication Protocols,
IEC 61850 System Configurator, and DIGSI 5 Online Help manuals.
NOTE
i The Merging-unit routing editor is only visible in the merging unit if you have selected the 9-2 Merg.Unit
communication protocol for the communication module ETH-BD-2FO.
Incomplete routings are indicated by a warning symbol in the project tree. To display or change the parame-
ters of the added measuring points, if required, go to Power system in the project tree in the device.
NOTE
i For the busbar protection, you require the Meas.point I-3ph, type 3-phase + IN.
4.3.4.4 IEC 61850 System Configurator (IEC 61850 Compliant)

You must export the SMV and the binary information to be transmitted from the merging units from DIGSI to
the IEC 61850 System Configurator and assign and reimport them to DIGSI.
• Export the SMV values from DIGSI 5
• Define the SMV assignments
• Define the binary-information assignments
• Import the SMV and binary assignments to DIGSI 5

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
Exporting the Measuring Points to the IEC 61850 System Configurator
Export the device data to an IID file for the IEC 61850 System Configurator. Proceed as follows:
• Select the IEC 61850 station in the project tree and add a New station ..., if necessary.
• Drag the respective devices (client and merging units) to the IEC 61850 station.
• Export the IEC 61850 station for the system configurator. This starts the IEC 61850 System Configu-
rator.
To do this, use the context menu or the Export changes to IEC 61850 System Configurator button.
[sc_bbp_proj_07_export_iid, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-21 Exporting the Device Data to the IEC 61850 System Configurator using the Left Marked
Button
Defining the Measuring Point Assignment

The IEC 61850 System Configurator is a tool that works independently of DIGSI. It allows for cross-manufac-
turer communication between the protection devices, for example transmitting the current and voltage meas-
ured values and sending GOOSE messages.
The IEC 61850 System Configurator is started automatically by exporting the IEC 61850 station. Carry out the
desired routings of the physical measuring point(s) in the merging unit.
• All the measured values routed in the Merging-unit routing editor appear as sources. You must connect
them to the measured values set up in 7SS85
A list of the available SMV values is then displayed in the SMV view. Drag and drop the measuring points
available in the Destination catalog to the SMV values in the SMV message area. You can connect indi-
vidual measured values or entire measuring points to one another.
• Save your routings.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
[sc_bbp_proj_syscon, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-22 Assignments in the IEC 61850 System Configurator
You can find further information in the Process Bus and IEC 61850 System Configurator manuals.
Importing the Measuring Points from the IEC 61850 System Configurator
To complete the measuring-point routing via the process bus, open the IEC station in DIGSI and reimport the
file previously processed and saved in the IEC 61850 System Configurator.
To do this, use the context menu or the Import changes from IEC 61850 System Configurator button.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
[sc_bbp8_proj_syscon_import, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-23 Importing Data from the IEC 61850 System Configurator with Confirmation Screen

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
4.3.4.5 Checking the Measuring-Point Routing in DIGSI
[sc_bbp_proj_11-pb_smv, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-24 Example of a Completed Measuring Point Mapping via the Process Bus
4.3.5 Assigning Device Functions in the Single-Line Editor
Moving Bays
For better arrangement, use the Single-Line Editor, detach the bays from the device and drag them beneath
the graphical bay representation. Only then you can create the connector lines.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
[sc_sle_movebay, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-25 Moving Bays, Creating Connections
Connecting Current Transformers

Proceed as follows:
• Go to Bay 1 and click the Curr. transformer 1 symbol, connecting it with the current transformer BE1 in
Bay 1.
• In the following dialog, select the measuring point to which the current transformer is routed.
• Connect the current transformer for Bay 2 and both current transformers of the Bus coupler bay in the
same way.
A green line is displayed to indicate this connection.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
[sc_slmszu, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-26 Assigning Current Transformers and Routed Measuring Points
NOTE
i If you have selected the current transformer icon in the single-line configuration, you can set the
grounding direction of the primary current transformer using the Change grounding direction context
menu. This means a change in the direction of electric current in the busbar differential protection.
If you have set the parameter (_:8881:116) Neutr.point in dir.of ref.obj = no in the power-
system data of the merging unit, set the parameter Invert currents = yes in the 7SS85.
Connecting Circuit Breaker

Proceed as follows:
• Go to Bay 1 and click the Circuit breaker symbol and connect it with the circuit breaker QA1 in Bay 1.
• In CB 1/3pol 1, click the Meas.point I-3ph 1 icon and connect it to Current transformer 1.
• Connect the circuit breaker for Bay 2 in the same way.
• Connect the circuit breaker for the bus coupler bay to the current transformer that is to be used for the
circuit-breaker failure protection in the busbar protection.
When using systems with transfer busbars and combined bus coupler bays, the specific parameter
settings must be considered for the assignment of the current transformer and circuit breaker. You can
find more information in the following chapter 4.5.3 Combined Bus Coupler Bays.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
[sc_slfezu, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-27 Connecting Circuit Breakers
Connecting Disconnectors
Proceed as follows:
• In the Bus coupler bay, click the Disconnector icon and connect it to the disconnector QB1.
• Connect the disconnectors QB2 of the bus coupler and the disconnectors of Bay 1 and Bay 2 in the same
way.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
[sc_slkuzu, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-28 Connecting System Parts with the Device, Example: Bus Coupler
4.3.6 Transmitting Binary Information via GOOSE
4.3.6.1 General
You can use the inputs and outputs of the merging unit and transfer them via GOOSE as an alternative to
using local binary inputs and binary outputs, for example, of the 7SS85.
The following example shows the 7SS85 as the receiver of the contact positions and the 6MU85 as the trans-
mitter. The main requirements in terms of hardware and communication protocols have already been met by
having the option to transfer current measured values from the merging unit to the client. Both devices can be
transmitters and receivers.
Examples of binary routings for transmission using GOOSE:
• Circuit breaker and disconnector position information from the transmitters to the receiver (7SS85 in this
example)
• Circuit-breaker trip commands from the transmitter (7SS85 in this example) to the receivers.
A requirement for this is a functioning network topology, as described in chapter 4.3.4.2 Create and Check the
Network Topology.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
To route the binary information, proceed as follows:
• Carry out and export routings in the DIGSI 5 information routing
• Carry out cross-device assignments in the IEC 61850 System Configurator
• Import external routings in the DIGSI 5 information routing
4.3.6.2 Carrying Out Routings
Information Routings (Transmitter and Receiver)

To be able to transmit the disconnector and circuit-breaker positions from the merging units to the client,
proceed as follows, for example, for a disconnector position:
• In the transmitter, for example, the merging unit, route the disconnector and circuit-breaker positions in
the Information routing to the binary inputs.
• In the receiver, for example, a 7SS85, add a 1 in the GOOSE column for the corresponding element.
In this way, you determine that the disconnector position of the merging unit can be transmitted via GOOSE
and received in the client. Carry out consecutive, unambiguous assignment later in the IEC 61850 System
Configurator. For further information on the GOOSE Later Binding, refer to the Communication Protocols
manual.
[sc_bbp_goose, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-29 Example Routing of a Disconnector Position
Default Settings in the IEC 61850 Structure Editor

The signals that will subsequently be available in the IEC 61850 System Configurator are preset in the
IEC 61850 structure Editor. Check these default settings and add the signals necessary for your plant.
4.3.6.3 IEC 61850 System Configurator (GOOSE)
Cross-Device Routings for Binary Inputs and Binary Outputs in the IEC 61850 System Configurator
For the added routings of the measuring unit to be available in the client, you must create the IEC 61850
System Configurator project or update an existing one.
• Open the IEC 61850 station in the DIGSI 5 project tree and click the Export changes to IEC 61850
System Configurator icon or use the context menu.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
The IEC 61850 System Configurator is started automatically. The available devices are shown in the Device
view. The GOOSE view as shown in the following figure consists of the following 3 sections:
• GOOSE messages at the top, which contain the Source on the left and the Destination on the right
• The Source catalog in the bottom left
• The Destination catalog in the bottom right
Figure 4-30 IEC 61850 System Configurator
Select your IEC station in the GOOSE messages and add GOOSE applications for disconnector positions or
trip commands via the context menu. For example, a GOOSE application merging unit => 7SS85 and a
GOOSE application 7SS85 => Merging Unit. Change the names of the GOOSE applications in the Properties
window.
The aim is to connect the required binary information of the transmitter to the appropriate binary information
of the receiver.
Proceed as follows, for example for the QA1 circuit-breaker switch position:
• Expand the Source catalog as far as necessary and drag the desired binary information from the trans-
mitter to the upper left to the source in the GOOSE application. An example would be the circuit breaker
(CB1) position (XCBR1/Pos) of the merging unit (MU01); see the following figure. MU01/CB1/XCBR1/Pos
here corresponds to the IEC 61850 path of the circuit-breaker switch position in the properties for the
information routing.
• Expand the Destination catalog as far as necessary and drag and drop the desired destinations from the
receiver, for example the circuit-breaker switch positions of the 7SS85, upward and to the right onto the
appropriate destination line of the GOOSE application. An example would be CU/Bay1_CB3p1/XCBR1/
RxPos1; see the following figure.
Carry out analogous routings for other circuit breakers or disconnectors, such as QB1.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
Figure 4-31 Example Assignments in the IEC 61850 System Configurator
The same applies for the routing of circuit-breaker trip commands from the 7SS85 to the merging unit.
• In the Source catalog, expand the 7SS85 and use the Trip indication in the trip logic.
• Route it to the GOOSE messages.
• To send the trip commands from the 7SS85 to the merging unit, an FG VI 3ph function group with func-
tion External trip must be available and connected to the Circuit-breaker function group. Route the Trip
indication from the 7SS85 to the indication >External trip of the function External trip. This pres-
ents the advantage, that the trip command uses the circuit-breaker object of the merging unit (CB main-
tenance).
In the previous figure, you see in the GOOSE application GOOSE 7SS85 the trip/close commands from the
7SS85 to the merging unit (MU02) and in GOOSE MU02 E02 the operate command T2 of the circuit-breaker
failure protection in the bay as examples. For this, additional parameterizations are necessary in the devices,
for example for circuit-breaker failure protection in the merging unit Start via binary input and the
routing of the binary inputs and outputs in the information routing.
The IEC 61850 paths necessary for the assignment in the IEC 61850 System Configurator are displayed in the
DIGSI 5 information routing in the Properties dialog of the selected element.
Repeat the process for all required binary routings, for example for all circuit breakers and disconnectors for
each bay. Complete the routing for the binary inputs and binary outputs in the IEC 61850 System Configurator
by clicking Save.
For more information on the IEC 61850 System Configurator, refer to the IEC 61850 System Configurator
manual.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
Importing Data into DIGSI and Checking Routing

To complete the binary routing via the process bus, open the IEC station in DIGSI and import the data previ-
ously edited and saved in the IEC 61850 System Configurator. To do this, use the context menu or the
Import changes from IEC 61850 System Configurator button. Check the result in the information routing.
4.3.7 Information for Efficient Project Engineering of a Distributed Busbar

Protection (IEC 61850 Compliant)
For Efficient Project Engineering with Identical Merging Units, for Example 6MU85, Siemens Recommends the
Following Procedure:
If you use consistent devices, this facilitates project engineering because you can create typicals. For example,
6MU85 for feeder bays and busbar couplers or 7UT85 for transformer bays.
• Create a project with the 7SS85 and the typicals. Drive this project as far as possible.
• Conclude the single-line configuration with the assignments to the 7SS85 functions.
• Carry out all the settings and routings for these typicals.
• Copy these processed typicals and adapt the (IEC) names, IP addresses, and measuring-point designa-
tions.
This facilitates the assignments of the measuring points (process bus) and binary inputs and outputs (GOOSE)
between the 7SS85 and the merging units that are necessary in the IEC 61850 System Configurator.
In the following, you can find an overview of the topics already described. Proceed as follows:
• Create a project with a single-line configuration.
• Create 7SS85 including all required elements (busbar sections, measuring points, bays and the discon-
nectors, circuit breakers, and current transformers contained in them).
• Connect the elements with the functions of the 7SS85 in the Single-Line Editor.
• Prepare 7SS85 for process bus/GOOSE:

– Prepare the routing of the disconnector and circuit-breaker positions via GOOSE.
– Prepare the routing of the trip commands of the 7SS85 to the binary outputs in the merging units
– Adapt the IEC 61850 edition, assign meaningful IEC 61850 names and measuring-point designa-
tions.
– In the measuring-point routing, route current measuring points to the PB client.
– Prepare external tripping (bay) for CBFP in the merging unit for starting via GOOSE from the trip
command T2 of the merging unit (Start and release).
– In device settings, activate the GOOSE monitoring.
• Create and edit typicals:

– Create a merging unit, including all required elements (measuring points, disconnectors; circuit
breakers, circuit-breaker failure protection, VI 3ph function groups)
– Adapt the IEC 61850 edition and select the protocol
– In device settings, activate the GOOSE monitoring.
– Carry out information routings.
• Copy typicals, insert them multiple times, adapt names, IP addresses, and measuring-point designations,
and check the routings.
• Generate an IEC station, add devices, and export the data from DIGSI 5 to the IEC 61850 System Configu-
rator.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
• In the IEC 61850 System Configurator, create the connection in the GOOSE and SMV views
– Create SMV connections.
– Create GOOSE connections. Siemens recommends creating a GOOSE application with one dataset
per device.
• In DIGSI 5, import the data from the IEC 61850 System Configurator. Check the connections in DIGSI 5 (at
the receivers)
For further information regarding the process bus, GOOSE, IEC 61850 System Configurator and descriptions of
stream types, GOOSE Later Binding, VLAN priority, network redundancy, for example PRP or sample and time
synchronization via IEEE 1588, refer to the Process Bus, Communication Protocols, IEC 61850 System Configu-
rator, and DIGSI 5 Help manuals.
You have now completed a simple project engineering for the centralized busbar protection or the distributed
busbar protection. For more detailed information, for example, regarding the various bay types, refer to the
chapters starting at 4.5.2 Bus Coupler Bays. The following chapter describes the Project engineering for the
distributed busbar protection.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
4.4 Configuration for the Distributed Busbar Protection

You have created a project, structured the single-line configuration to a certain extent, and created the
following devices:
• A 7SS85CU distributed busbar protection with the Significant features F to K
• At least one merging unit

For further information, refer to chapter 4.2.3 Creating Devices. The further procedure for the distributed
busbar protection differs from that of the distributed busbar protection (IEC 61850 compliant) and is
described in the following.
4.4.1 Creating and Checking the Network Topology
Network Topology
In the following figure, you can see the 7SS85 as an example of the target device (client), and the 6MU85 and
other modular SIPROTEC 5 devices as merging units.
Figure 4-32 Star Topology
All participating devices must have the same IEC 61850 edition 2.x. You can check or change this by opening
the Device information for each device in the project tree and selecting IEC 61850 Edition 2 or IEC 61850
Edition 2.1. Siemens recommends IEC 61850 Edition 2.1.
Every communication module of the distributed busbar protection 7SS85 can receive up to 15 current meas-
ured values. If you need more than 15 current measuring points, plug in another communication module and
use it to connect additional merging units. Keep the IP project engineering in mind for the different subnet-
works of the communication topology.
You can make the assignment to the subnetworks and the IP addresses later in the IEC 61850 System Config-
urator.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
In Figure 4-33, you see an HSR ring structure with 3 rings connected to a central unit as an example.
[dw_7ss85_HSR-ringstruktur, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-33 HSR Ring Topology
With the HSR ring topology, the bay units are connected to the central unit in up to 3 rings with up to
15 devices. The central unit in this surface mounting is the Grandmaster clock (GMC) IEEE 1588 for synchroni-
zation of the sampled values. Since an external switch is not required, this surface mounting is more cost-
effective than the star topology.
For further information, see manual IEEE 1588, C53000-L1840-C055-9.
Protocol Selection
• Select the ETH-BD-2FO communication module under Devices and networks in the Device view and
select the communication protocols in Properties under Protocols. Select for example 9-2 MU 7SS85CU
for the merging units and 9-2 CL 7SS85CU for the 7SS85.
• Activate the IEEE 1588 protocol necessary for time synchronization.
• Check and change the Ethernet addresses for the ETH-BD-2FO communication modules of the 7SS85CU
under Properties.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
[sc_dbbp_cu_bd, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-34 Protocol Selection for the Communication Module
You can find other descriptions of sample and time synchronization via IEEE 1588, as well as information on
the Ethernet modules, in the SIPROTEC 5 Communication Protocols manual.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
Network
Check the IP addresses and adapt them as needed. To do this, double-click the communication module in the
Device view. You can find the IP addresses under Properties in the Ethernet addresses section.
[sc_bbp8_proj_95_adr, 2, en_US]
Figure 4-35 Address Assignment Using the 7SS85 as an Example
4.4.2 Configuring Merging Units
Inserting Function Groups and Functions

Due to the application-template selection, some SIPROTEC 5 devices already contain the required function
groups.
Check and add the function groups or functions in the Project tree or directly in the Single-line configura-
tion. If necessary, drag and drop the following elements from the Global DIGSI 5 Library and insert them in the
merging unit under Settings.
• Protection function groups, for example, Line or VI 3ph
• Circuit breaker
• Disconnector
Assigning Device Functions in the Single-Line Editor.
• Change to the Single-line configuration.
• Connect the functions of the circuit breaker, measuring point, and disconnector of the merging unit to
their graphical representations in the bay.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
[sc_dBBP_SLE, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-36 Example Connection of System Parts to the Merging Unit
Connections between the switching devices and the functions of the merging units are shown as black dashed
lines.
Connections to the current transformers are shown as green lines.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
Assignment to the Distributed Busbar Protection

If a distributed busbar protection is present in the project, the Include in distributed busbar protection check
box is additionally available for current transformers, circuit breakers, and disconnectors in the Properties tab.
For example, if more than 1 current transformer is available in a bay, you can cancel the assignment of the
2nd current transformer to the distributed busbar protection or set it again if necessary. This eliminates further
consideration of this current transformer,for example, in the Topology and the CU – BU assignment. By
default, these elements are considered.
[sc_bbp8_SLE_incl, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-37 Expanded Properties Dialog Box for Existing Distributed Busbar Protection
4.4.3 Updating the Central Unit (Step 1)
After completing the engineering, you must update the central unit in the Single-line configuration. During
this update operation, the system configuration created in the Single-Line Editor is simulated in the 7SS85CU
using the representations of the connected bays, circuit breakers, disconnectors, and measuring points.
During this process, all necessary elements are automatically created in the 7SS85CU. These elements are
visible in the project tree of the 7SS85CU or in the information routing.
Proceed as follows:
• In the Single-line configuration > CU – BU Assignment tab, click the [Update central unit] button.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
[sc_bbp8_proj_SLE_update, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-38 CU - BU Assignment Tab in the Single-Line Configuration
The bays are automatically assigned to the central unit. The bays and the functions that are important func-
tions for busbar protection, such as current transformers, circuit breakers, and disconnectors are displayed in
the central unit. The designations are identical to those in the Single-line configuration.
You can find the bay assignment as a table in the Topology tab and the representation of the bays in the
project tree within the central unit.
NOTE
i The prerequisites for the assignment of bay functions to the central unit are:
• Assignment of the busbars to the busbar sections of the central unit
• Connection of the bays with the busbars
• Assignment of the current transformers and switching devices to the function groups
NOTE
i If you have made changes in the parameterization or in the Single-line configuration, also update the
central unit again.
Interaction of the Central Unit with the Merging Units

The bays are assigned to the central unit via the connections provided in the Single-line configuration. The
project tree displays logical representations of the bays and of the functions that are important for the corre-
sponding busbar protection such as current transformers, circuit breakers, and disconnectors under the central
unit. This representation serves to illustrate the bays used but not for direct parameterization purposes. The
designations are identical to those in the Single-line configuration.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
[sc_bbp8_proj_60_pnv, 2, en_US]
Figure 4-39 Representations shown in the Central Unit for the Bays, Including the Contained Functions for
Current Transformers, Circuit Breakers, and Disconnectors
4.4.4 IEC 61850 System Configurator
You must export the SMV information of the merging units from DIGSI to the IEC 61850 System Configu-
rator, assign them, and reimport them into DIGSI.
• Exporting the SMV values from DIGSI 5
• Assigning the merging units to the subnetworks (optional)
• Starting and checking the SMV assignment
• Importing the SMV assignment into DIGSI 5

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
Exporting the Measuring Points to the IEC 61850 System Configurator
Export the device data into an IID file for the IEC 61850 System configurator. Check the SMV assignments and
reimport them. Proceed as follows:
• Select the IEC 61850 station in the project tree and add a New station ..., if necessary.
• Incorporate the respective devices (client and merging units) into the IEC 61850 station.
• Export the IEC 61850 station for the system configurator. This starts the IEC 61850 System configurator.
[sc_bbp_proj_07_export_iid, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-40 Exporting the Device Data to the IEC 61850 System Configurator using the Left Marked
Button
Network View
Every communication module of the distributed 7SS85 can receive up to 15 current measuring points. If you
need more than 15 current measuring points, plug in an additional communication module and use it to
connect additional merging units.
In the Network view of the IEC 61850 System Configurator, you can assign the merging units to the subnet-
works based on the existing physical connection, and change the IP addresses.
[sc_bbp8_proj_syscon_net, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-41 Network Settings in the IEC 61850 System Configurator

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
SMV Assignment
In the IEC 61850 System Configurator, you start the automatic assignment of the physical measuring points of
the merging units to the central unit in the SMV view with the SMV Mapping Through Topology context
menu. Any completed assignment is indicated by an asterisk (*) in the Destination column.
[sc_syscon_smv_map, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-42 Logical Assignment of the Merging Units

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
4.4.5 Updating the Central Unit (Step 2)
Importing the Measuring Points from the IEC 61850 System Configurator
• To finish the measuring-point routing, open the IEC station in DIGSI and import the data from the IEC
61850 System Configurator.
To do this, use the context menu or the button Import changes from IEC 61850 system configurator.
[sc_bbp8_proj_syscon_import, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-43 Importing Data from the IEC 61850 System Configurator with the Confirmation Screen

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
• To check the assignment of the measuring points, open the Measuring-points routing in DIGSI.
• Select the desired current or voltage measuring point:

The Properties tab shows the external measuring point connected in the IEC 61850 system configurator
in the External source column.
[sc_dbbp_proj_11_smv_check, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-44 Checking the Measuring-Points Routing
When updating the central unit (steps 1 and 2) and editing in the IEC 61850 system configurator, the
following functions are also instantiated:
• Functions for sampled-value monitoring (7SS85 as well as 7SS85CU)
• Functions for monitoring the busbar-protection internal communication (7SS85CU only)

The following figure shows an example of the functions automatically instantiated in the central controller for
sampled-value monitoring of 2 sampling sources. This sampled-value monitoring is performed on both the
7SS85 and the 7SS85CU.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
[sc_dbbp_proj_15_sam_check, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-45 Functions for Sampled-Value Monitoring (7SS85 and 7SS85CU)
The following figure shows an example of a function for monitoring the busbar-protection internal communi-
cation to a connected bay unit 6MU85. This supervision function is automatically instantiated in the central
device. This type of monitoring is only performed on the 7SS85CU.
[sc_dbbp_proj_16_sam_check, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-46 Function for Monitoring the Busbar-Protection Internal Communication to a Bay Unit 6MU85
(7SS85CU only)
For more information, refer to 8.7 Supervision of Communication Connections.
4.4.6 Notes for Efficient Project Engineering of a Distributed Busbar Protection
For an efficient parameterization of the distributed busbar protection (Significant features F to K), Siemens
recommends using SIPROTEC 5 merging units with an identical product code. A SIPROTEC 5 merging unit can
be completely parameterized (typical) and then any number of them can be created using copy and paste.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
Create Typical
Using consistent devices facilitates project engineering because you can create typicals. For example, the
6MU85 for feeder bays and busbar couplers or the 7UT85 for transformer bays.
• Create a project with the 7SS85 and a merging unit as a typical. Drive this project as far as possible.
• Adjust all the settings for this merging unit (typical).

– Add the functions including all necessary elements (current measuring points, for example, with FG
VI 3ph, circuit breakers, for example, with circuit-breaker failure protection, disconnectors, etc.).
– In the information routing, route all information objects to binary inputs and outputs, to LEDs, logs,
etc.
– Assign meaningful device names, IEC 61850 names, and measuring point designations.
– On the ETH-BD-2FO module, activate the 9-2 MU 7SS85CU, IEEE 1588 protocols and adapt the IP
address.
• Prepare the single-line configuration.

– In the Single-Line Editor, add the busbars and connect them to the 7SS85.
– Create a bay with a current transformer and switching devices. Connect the graphical elements to
the device functions of the merging unit.
• Copy this edited bay including the merging unit and paste it (see the following figure).
– Drag and drop the connections to the busbars for the bays that were pasted.
– Adapt the bay name in each case, for example, E01 ⇒ E02.
– Adapt the device names, IEC names, and measuring-point designations, etc., via the project tree.
– Adapt the IP addresses of the integrated Ethernet interface (RJ45) and of the ETH-BD-2FO communi-
cation module.
• Repeat the previous points until there is a complete busbar protection system image.
• In the Single-Line Editor, switch to the CU – BU assignment tab, update the central unit, and check the
result, for example, in the project tree.
• Open the IEC 61850 station and add the pasted devices. Export the changes to the IEC 61850 System
Configurator and then import them again.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
[sc_bbp8_proj_55_SLE_cop, 2, en_US]
Figure 4-47 Selecting, Copying, Pasting, and Adapting the Bay and Merging Unit Together
4.4.7 Routing Manager
In order be able to access the bay units without separate station bus, the access is possible via the 7SS85
central unit. The 7SS85 central unit transmits the data to the bay units via the protection-device network. The
access is possible via DIGSI 5 as well as via the browser-based user interface. The PC with DIGSI 5 or the
browser-based user interface must be connected to the 7SS85 central unit via port J or via USB. The bay units
can be accessed via the IP address of Port J.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
[dw_applikation_7ss, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-48 Example Application for 7SS85 Central Unit and Merging Unit
NOTE
i The Routing Manager affects the bandwidth. Siemens therefore recommends using it during commis-
sioning only since delayed operate times are possible.
Assigning the IP Addresses
• In order to assure the transmission of data, the IP address assignment must be selected carefully.
• In order to transmit the DIGSI communication from the PC to the 7SS85 central unit, you must set the IP
addresses of the PC and of the devices accordingly.
• The PC and the 7SS85 central unit must be in a different subnetwork than the bay unit.
Table 4-2 Example for Port J
Device IP Address Subnetwork

PC 172.17.85.107 255.255.252.0
7SS85 CU, Port J 172.17.86.5 255.255.252.0
6MU85_1, Port J 172.17.86.10 255.255.255.0
6MU85_2, Port J 172.17.86.15 255.255.255.0
6MU85_3, Port J 172.17.86.20 255.255.255.0
In order to access the devices of the Merging Units via the 7SS85 central unit, proceed as follows:

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
For the example from Table 4-2:
• Open the command line with administrator rights on the DIGSI 5 PC.
• Enter the following command:

route add 172.17.86.0 mask 255.255.255.0 172.17.86.5 IF 15 -p
With:
IF xx Ethernet interface that must be set as per the information via the route print command.
-p permanent, keeping the routing intact after PC restart.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
• Enter the following command for information regarding the Ethernet interface:
route print
[sc_route_prt, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-49 Information on the Ethernet Interface
NOTE
i The IP addresses of the protection-device network via Port E, F, ... must be different from Port J.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
Table 4-3 Example of a Connection via USB
Device IP Address Subnetwork

PC (USB) 192.168.2.254 255.255.255.0
7SS85 CU, USB 192.168.2.1 255.255.255.0
6MU85_1, Port J 172.17.86.10 255.255.255.0
6MU85_2, Port J 172.17.86.15 255.255.255.0
6MU85_3, Port J 172.17.86.20 255.255.255.0
For the example from Table 4-3:
• Open the command line with administrator rights on the DIGSI 5 PC.
• Enter the following command:

route add 172.17.86.0 mask 255.255.255.0 192.168.2.1 IF 6 -p
Activation of the Routing Manager

You can activate the Routing Manager in the 7SS85 central device and in the bay units under the protocol
properties of the communication module.
7SS85 central unit:
[sc_protpropcu, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-50 Example: Communication Module 7SS85 Central Unit
Field Device:
[sc_protpropmu, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-51 Example: Communication Module Bay Unit
NOTE
i DHCP is not possible for port J addresses.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
4.5 Additional Engineering Information
4.5.1 General Information
Single-Line Configuration
NOTE
i The following figures of the single-line configuration show the centralized busbar protection as an
example.
Single-line configuration is the same for centralized busbar protection and distributed busbar protection (IEC
61850 compliant).
Synchronizing Single-Line Configuration

When creating the bays and their content in the project tree and the single-line configuration, the designa-
tions of the bays (Bay1) and the elements included, such as current transformers (BE1), circuit breakers, for
example CB 1/3-pole (QA1), and disconnector (QB1) are different. The names in the project tree correspond to
the designations in the Global DIGSI 5 Library and are different from those in the single-line configuration (in
brackets).
You can change the bay names, and, if desired, the elements they contain, directly in the single-line configura-
tion. In order to adopt the designations in the project tree, select the connected 7SS85 device and click the
button in the toolbar of the Single-Line Editor.
NOTE
i You can rename devices in the project tree. The change of device name comes into effect immediately.
4.5.2 Bus Coupler Bays
For bus coupler bays with circuit breaker, it is advisable to configure the End-fault protection function block.
The end-fault protection is effective for errors between the open circuit breaker and the transformer. The end-
fault protection guarantees the selectivity for open circuit breakers and thus a faster fault clearing compared
to the tripping by the circuit-breaker failure protection. For more information on the End-fault protection,
refer to chapter 6.6.5 Function Description.
Current-Transformer Assignments for Bus Couplers
For bus couplers with 2 current transformers, the following applies: Connect the circuit breaker for the bus
coupler bay to the current transformer that must be used for the circuit-breaker failure protection in the
busbar protection.
When using plants with transfer busbars and combined bus coupler bays, consider the specific parameter
settings during the assignment of the current transformer and circuit breaker. For more information on this,
refer to chapter 4.5.3 Combined Bus Coupler Bays.
NOTE
i If you have selected the current transformer icon in the single-line configuration, you can set the
grounding direction of the primary current transformer using the Change grounding direction context
menu. This means a change in the direction of electric current in the busbar differential protection.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
4.5.3 Combined Bus Coupler Bays
A combined bus coupler bay can function as a coupler or as a feeder. Its function depends on the respective
switch position of the busbar disconnector.
[sc_slkkzu, 2, en_US]
Figure 4-52 Example of a Combined Bus Coupler Bay
The dashed-line disconnector must not be drawn in the SLE and not parameterized.
Using the parameter Combi coupler = yes, you set the parameters for the combined bus coupler bay.
Under the following conditions, a combined bus coupler bay behaves like a normal bus coupler bay:
• At least one busbar disconnector is closed on both sides of the bus coupler.
• All busbar disconnectors on both sides of the bus coupler are open.
Under the following conditions, a combined bus coupler bay behaves like a feeder:
• At least one busbar disconnector is closed on one side, and the disconnectors on the other side are open.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
During feeder operation, the behavior depends on the setting of the Overlapping CT parameter.
• For parameter Overlapping CT = yes, there is always a feeder with line-side transformers in a
combined coupler bay with 2 current transformers. When using the end-fault protection, wiring of the
transfer tripping command to the opposite end is necessary. In order for the end-fault protection to
create the transfer-trip signal, you must always connect the line side current transformer with the circuit
breaker.
• For parameter Overlapping CT = no, there is a feeder with busbar side transformers. The transfer-trip
command must not be sent to the opposite end.
Use the Single-Line Editor to connect the busbar-side current transformer with the circuit breaker.
NOTE
i If the combined bus coupler operates in feeder mode, you must ensure that the current flows across the
current transformer and the circuit breaker. Otherwise, the busbar section cannot be protected.
The parameters Combi coupler and Overlapping CT can be found in the Bay under General.
You can find additional information about the bay image and the bay types in chapter 5.2.1 The Field in
Centralized or Distributed Busbar Protection (IEC 61850-Compliant) .
4.5.4 Transfer Busbars
In the circuit-breaker substitution mode, the feeder circuit breaker that is switched over to the transfer busbar
is replaced by the circuit breaker of the bus coupler. Monitoring the switch positions of the feeder discon-
nector and the bus coupler ensures that this occurs only after opening the busbar or line disconnector. Inter-
mediate switch positions occur until the final circuit-breaker substitution mode. The assignment of the respec-
tive feeder to the busbar section during that time depends on the arrangement of the current transformer
(internal or external).
In case of external transformers, a transfer busbar can be protected selectively. If a fault occurs, the circuit-
breaker substitute (bus coupler) trips and a transfer-trip command is triggered for tripping the circuit breaker
at the opposite end of the line.
Using the parameter Transfer bus disconnector, you specify for the disconnector QB7 of the bus
coupler whether the protection range ends at the transformer of the bus coupler.
• With the setting Transfer bus disconnector = no, the transfer busbar is protected with a closed
coupling disconnector. This applies if no feeders, or only feeders in the circuit-breaker substitution mode
with an external transformer, are assigned to the transfer busbar.
• With the setting Transfer bus disconnector = yes, the protection range with a closed coupling
disconnector ends at the transformer of the bus coupler. The transfer busbar is not protected. The current
of the bus coupler however is considered by the check zone measurement. This applies if no feeders, or
only feeders in the circuit-breaker substitution mode with internal transformers, are assigned to the
transfer busbar.
NOTE
i If the transfer busbar is to be protected, it must be configured as a busbar section with measuring system.
If you do not want any protection of the transfer busbar and are not configuring the QB7 (transfer busbar
disconnector) of the feeders, set the parameter Transfer busbar disconnector of the QB7 of the bus
coupler to yes.
In case of internal current transformers, the transfer busbar cannot be protected. With closed coupling discon-
nector, the current of the coupling however is included in the check zone measurement. The transfer busbar
can be planned with internal current transformers as a busbar section without measuring system.
If the bus coupler contains 2 current transformers, the behavior depends on the setting of the Overlapping
CT parameter. You can find the description in the section 4.5.3 Combined Bus Coupler Bays.
Combined bus couplers cannot be used with transfer busbars.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
NOTE
i Internal and external current transformers must not be operated simultaneously on a transfer busbar.
[sc_uskupl, 2, en_US]
Figure 4-53 Example of a Transfer Busbar
4.5.5 Bus Section without Measuring System
In the following section, you will find 2 examples of bus sections without a measuring system.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
You can assign bus sections without measuring system (BS without MS) to the 2 center busbars (BB3 and
BB4). When the busbar disconnectors left (E01) or right (E02) are closed, the center bus section is assigned to
the corresponding bus section and protected. If the disconnectors of both sides are closed, the higher-level
measuring system takes precedence. If the disconnectors of both sides are opened, the system is dead.
[sc_bbp_coupl_zone, 1, --_--]
Figure 4-54 Bus Section with Coupler Zone

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
If you use current transformers on the bus side as in the following configuration, the transfer busbar cannot
be protected. Use a bus section without measuring system for this bay. The protection range ends at the
current transformer of the bus coupler bay.
[sc_bbp_transf_bus, 1, --_--]
Figure 4-55 Transfer Bus with Current Transformers on the Bus Side

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
4.5.6 Bus-Section Bays
If the bus zones are connected by a bus section disconnector, you should insert a bay for this. The bay
contains only the disconnectors, but not any circuit breakers, current transformers, etc. There can be 1 or
more disconnectors in one bay. The disconnectors can be connected to any desired bay unit.
[sc_bbp_3discon, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-56 Bus-Section Bay with 3 Disconnectors
4.5.7 Detecting the Line Disconnector
In the normal case, the line disconnector QB9 is not needed. In case of double lines, the short-circuit current
can lead to the induction of a current in the line that is switched off and grounded. This current is processed
without QB9 as a differential current in the Busbar protection (see the following figure). Including the line
disconnector QB9 in the disconnector logic prevents an unwanted tripping.
[dw_bbp_line_discon, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-57 Double Line
A disconnector is detected automatically as a line disconnector based on the engineering. If a disconnector is

configured as a line disconnector, the feeder bay is assigned to one bus zone only if both the corresponding
busbar disconnector and the line disconnector are closed.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
4.5.8 Truck-Type Switchgear
The busbar protection can be used for truck-type switchgear that is common in the medium-voltage range. In
these systems, the circuit breaker also performs the task of the otherwise standard disconnectors. This means
that the position of the circuit breaker serves the busbar differential protection as a criterion for the assign-
ment of the current transformer to the bus sections. In the protection device, only 3-pole circuit breakers are
supported for truck-type switchgear.
In the case of the busbar protection, 4 types of bays are possible for truck-type switchgear. The truck-type
switchgear can be combined in any desired way with bays that are not structured as truck-type switchgear. It
is characteristic for these 4 possible bay types that the circuit breaker is always directly connected to a bus
section.
These 4 bay types are described below:
Line feeder on 2 bus sections: The line feeder is connected via 2 circuit breakers with 2 busbars. The feeder
current is assigned to these sections depending on the position of these circuit breakers. If both circuit
breakers are closed, both sections are unified into one measuring system (preferred).
[sc_bbp_tt_abzweig_1ct_2cb, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-58 Truck-Type Switchgear Bay: Feeder

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
Line feeder on 2 bus sections and with line disconnectors: In addition to the preceding configuration, a line
disconnector is present. The measured current is then assigned to the bus sections according to the circuit-
breaker switch position only if this disconnector is closed.
[sc_bbp_tt_abzweig_1ct_2cb_1dc, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-59 Truck-Type Switchgear Bay: Feeder with Line Disconnector
NOTE
i Keep in mind during engineering that a maximum of only 26 3-pole circuit breakers can be configured, for
example in a centralized busbar protection (significant features 9 to E). This limits the maximum possible
number of line sections for switchgear trucks to 13.
NOTE
i Keep in mind that, with truck-type switchgear, the auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker are also
processed according to the logic of not off = on (see the disconnector auxiliary contacts). As the circuit
breaker moves faster than the disconnector, it must be ensured that the definitive OFF position is exited
before (8 ms) the arcing distance is reached.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
Bus coupler with 1 current transformer on 2 bus sections: The bus coupler connects 2 bus sections. The
current is measured only with only one transformer. If both circuit breakers are closed, the measured current
is assigned to both sections.
[sc_bbp_tt_coupl_1ct_2cb, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-60 Truck-Type Switchgear Bay: Bus Coupler with 1 Current Transformer

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
Bus coupler with 2 current transformers on 2 bus sections: The bus coupler connects 2 bus sections. The
current is measured by 2 transformers. If both circuit breakers are closed, each measured current is assigned
to one section. The current assignment can be overlapping or non-overlapping.
[sc_bbp_tt_coupl_2ct_2cb, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-61 Truck-Type Switchgear Bay: Bus Coupler with 2 Current Transformers
4.5.9 Enabling of Tripping by Undervoltage Protection
Integrating Voltage Transformers

You can integrate the voltage transformers in a manner similar to that for the current transformers.
Proceed as follows:
• Insert a voltage measuring point using the global library.
• Insert the voltage measuring point V-3ph 1 in the measuring-point routing.
• In the Single-Line Editor, add the icon for the Voltage transformer and connect it to the bar and the
V-3ph 1 measuring point.
The connections are shown with blue lines.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
[sc_bbp_proj_V, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-62 Connections of the Voltage Transformers
You can make the tripping of a busbar or a bus section depend on an additional undervoltage criterion.
For the centralized busbar protection, proceed as follows:
• Create a Voltage 3-phase or VI 3ph function group type (see chapter 5.6.1 Overview) for each voltage
measuring point used as an additional tripping criterion.
• Create the appropriate voltage function in this function group, for example, undervoltage protection with
3-phase voltage (see chapter 6.16.1.1 Overview of Functions) and adapt the parameters according to
your plant.
• Create a CFC chart in the fast event-triggered process level.
• Place a CONNECT building block in this plan in order to connect the single-point indication values.
• Then connect the input of the building block to the output signal of the undervoltage function, for
example, the Group indicat.:Operate (General).
• Connect the output of the building block to the release signal, for example, Bus zone 1:>Trip release
[sc_bbp_cfc_trip, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-63 CFC Connection

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
Alternatively:
You can also establish the connection between the undervoltage function and the tripping release by routing
the operate indication to a binary output and the tripping release to a binary input and wiring them to each
other directly. Note that, as a function of the relay type used, this solution produces greater time delays than
the CFC solution (2 to 3 ms in the Fast Event-triggered process level).
For the distributed busbar protection (IEC 61850 compliant), proceed as follows:
• Create a VI 3ph function group type (see chapter 5.7.1 Overview) in the merging unit for each voltage
measuring point used as an additional tripping criterion.
• Create the appropriate voltage function in this function group, for example, undervoltage protection with
3-phase voltage (see chapter 6.16.1.1 Overview of Functions) and adapt the parameters according to
your plant.
You can also establish the connection between the undervoltage function of the merging unit and the tripping
release of the busbar protection by routing the operate indication to a binary output and the tripping release
to a binary input and wiring them to each other directly or by routing via GOOSE.
NOTE
i If you want to send an OFF signal directly to the circuit breaker for a voltage function, you have to connect
the corresponding circuit breaker with the function group VI 3ph or Voltage 3-phase in the Function-
group connections Editor. Then route the stages of the voltage function directly to the circuit breaker in
the Circuit-breaker interaction of the VI 3-phase or Voltage 3-phase.
4.5.10 Backup Protection Functions
In addition to the busbar differential protection of the 7SS85, you can use various backup protection functions
such as overcurrent protection in the bay.
For example, to trip via the overcurrent protection, proceed as follows:
• Create a suitable overcurrent protection function in the VI 3ph function group.
• In the circuit-breaker interaction matrix, assign the created overcurrent protection functions to the circuit
breakers and to the circuit-breaker failure protection if necessary.
4.5.11 Overview of Blocking
The busbar protection provides various options to block certain functions or entire busbar sections, that is,
selective zones.
You can set the following blocking via binary inputs.
• Superordinate blocking (blocking of all bus sections):

– Busbar differential protection
– Circuit-breaker failure protection
– External tripping busbar section (direct and from bay)
• Blocking of individual bus sections

– General blocking: Blocking of the Busbar differential protection, of the Circuit-breaker failure protec-
tion, and of the External tripping busbar section (direct and from bay)
– Blocking of the Busbar differential protection
– Blocking of the Circuit-breaker failure protection
In addition, you can set these blockings via controllable objects (controllables).

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
• Blocking of individual functions

– Circuit-breaker failure protection
– Inherent circuit-breaker failure protection
– External tripping busbar section (from bay)
– End-fault protection (1-pole/3-pole, 3-pole)
If blocking is set via a binary input, the blocking can only be canceled via this binary input.
If blocking is canceled and there is still a trip command, the trip command becomes active and trips the corre-
sponding function.
All blockings are retained in case of a restart or a loss of voltage. All blockings are deleted by controllables in
case of an initial start.
In case of disconnector faults, the blocking indication _:11881:312 Block. by discon.fault is issued
for the Busbar differential protection and the Circuit-breaker failure protection (refer to chapter 8.3.7.1 Over-
view of Functions ).
NOTE
i If one measuring system has precedence, for example, by installing a busbar shunt by disconnectors, then
the status of the higher-value measuring system applies.
Blocking Signal
End-Fault Protection
Busbar Differential
Failure Protection
External Tripping
External Tripping
Integrated CBFP
Circuit-Breaker
Protection
Bus Zone
from Bay
Busbar: Busbar protection:Diff.Prot. general: X - - - - -
>Block (1021.1831.11821.82)
Busbar: Busbar protection:CB fail. gen.: - X - - - -
>Block (1021.1831.11941.500)
Busbar: Busbar protection:Ext. trip BZ: - - - X X -
>Block (1021.1831.11971.503)
Busbar: Busbar protection:Bus zone #:>Block X X - X X -
Via BI (1021.1831.11881.500)
Via controllable (1021.1831.11881.320)
Busbar: Busbar protection:Bus zone #:>Block diff. prot. X - - - - -
Via BI (1021.1831.11881.503)
Busbar: Busbar protection:Bus zone #:>Block CB fail. prot. - X - - - -
Via BI (1021.1831.11881.504)
Bay_x: CB_x: 50BF Ad.CBF #:>Block function - X - - - -
(101.301.18781.82)
Bay_x: CB_x:50BF Inherent:>Block function - - X - - -
(101.301.12511.82)
Bay_x: CB_x:Ext. trip BZ:>Block function (101.301.12331.82) - - - - X -
Bay_x: CB_x:50EF 1/3pole:>Block function - - - - - X
(101.301.12361.82)
Bay_x: CB_x: EFP 3-pole:>Block function (102.201.12361.82) - - - - - X

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
Blocking Signal
End-Fault Protection
Busbar Differential
Failure Protection
External Tripping
External Tripping
Integrated CBFP
Circuit-Breaker
Protection
Bus Zone
from Bay
Busbar: Busbar protection:Bus zone 1:Block. by discon.fault X X - - - X
(11881.312)
Cause: Disconnector faults
X Function is blocked - No blocking
4.5.12 Further Information Regarding the Configuration
Information Routing
In the Project tree, select the Information routing editor to check the routing of the circuit breaker and
disconnector positions to the binary inputs. Add the routings you require for the function keys, binary outputs,
LEDs, and logs.
[sc_bbp8_proj_45_Info_rout, 2, en_US]
Figure 4-64 Example of Information Routing

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
NOTE
i Siemens recommends always using 2 binary inputs for detecting the position of a disconnector. If only one
binary input is available, the auxiliary contact with OH (open/active with voltage) or OL (open/active
without voltage) must be used for the routing.
Synchronizing Transformer Values
If you connect current transformers to the device functions in the single-line configuration, DIGSI 5 checks the
primary and secondary currents of the current transformer. If the currents of the single-line configuration are
different from those of the measuring point on the device, the bay frame is then colored red. When you select
a current transformer, you can change the transformer currents in the Properties tab under Details. If you
select the device in the single-line configuration and Synchronize it, the transformer values from the single-
line configuration are imported into the device.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
Breaker-and-a-Half Layout
[sc_bbp8_proj_54_SLE_1_5LS, 2, en_US]
Figure 4-65 Example for Breaker-and-a-Half Layout with 2 Circuit Breakers and 2 Current Transformers for
Distributed Busbar Protection (Excerpt from the Single-Line Configuration)
Checking Completeness of the Assignment in the Single-Line Configuration

You can check whether the project engineering of the device connections is complete using a filter function.
To do this, select the device to be checked in the list box.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
[sc_slfilt, 2, en_US]
Figure 4-66 List Box for the Device Completeness Check of the Assignment
In the working area, only the elements are shown that are connected to the selected device. The incomplete
or implausible parts of the configuration are shown under Info > Inconsistencies.
In this view, you also see the measured-value boxes that you can arrange and that serve as the default setting
for the online display of the single-line monitoring.
4.5.13 Further Information on the Distributed Busbar Protection (IEC 61850

Compliant)
Local Protection Functions of the Merging Units
You can instantiate local protection functions of the merging units, such as overcurrent protection, where
available and use them independently of busbar protection.
Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection

The Circuit-breaker failure protection can be instantiated either in the 7SS85 or in the merging units.
• If you instantiate the Circuit-breaker failure protection in the 7SS85, the use of the unbalanced oper-
ating mode is the default setting.
• If you use the Circuit-breaker failure protection locally in the merging unit, the unbalanced operating
mode cannot be activated in the busbar protection. In the case of a 7SS85 failure, it would thus be
possible to clarify a circuit-breaker failure at least at the opposite end of the feeder by the merging unit.
For the selective tripping of a busbar, first instantiate the function block Busbar external tripping (from the
bay) (Ext. trip BZ) in the circuit breaker of the 7SS85. If you instantiate the Circuit-breaker failure protection in
the 7SS85, keep in mind that the indications for the CBFP start (>Start 3-pole or >Start pole A,
>Start pole B, and >Start pole C) and optional release and CB positioning (Position 3-pole or
Position 1-pole phsA, Position 1-pole phsB, and Position 1-pole phsC) are required in the
7SS85. This can either be directly wired to the 7SS85 or detected in the merging unit and transmitted to the
7SS85 via GOOSE.
If the Circuit-breaker failure protection is used locally in the merging unit, Siemens recommends transmitting
the Trip T2 (reserve tripping) also to the busbar protection (via GOOSE). With the Trip T2, the binary
inputs >Start pole A ... C of the Ext. trip BZ block should be triggered. For security reasons, the >Release
should use a different signal, for example the pickup of the circuit-breaker failure protection or the pickup of
the feeder protection, directly.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
4.5.14 Additional Information on the Distributed Busbar Protection
General Information
With the distributed busbar protection, the protection functions are distributed to the bay units/merging units
and the 7SS85CU central unit.
In the 7SS85CU central unit, you configure busbar protection-specific functions:
• Busbar differential protection, for example, the number of bus zones
• Instantiate and configure the following functions and parameters in the central unit in the bay represen-
tations. You must have previously updated the central unit for this.
– Bus coupler differential protection
– For extensions of the Circuit breaker function-group type, refer to the following paragraph Special
Features in the Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker in the Central Unit
In the merging units, you configure their device-specific functions:
• Function-group type Circuit breaker

In the circuit breaker, you can instantiate busbar protection-specific functional enhancements:
– End-fault protection
– External tripping
– Inherent circuit-breaker failure protection
– After updating the central unit, the additional parameter CBFP interact. with dBBP is avail-
able in the circuit-breaker failure protection.
For a description of the parameter, refer to the chapter 6.3.4 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection in
Busbar Protection.
• Overcurrent protection
• Additional device-specific functions
Special Features in the Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker in the Central Unit
Only few of the parameters can be edited in the representations of the 7SS85CU. They are only displayed after
a successful update of the central unit. You can find the parameters in the project tree under [7SS85CU]
device > Settings > [Bay] > [Circuit breaker] > General.
• Op. mode BFP
• Current thres. trip release
• Current thr. trip rel. sens.

For a description of the parameters, refer to the chapter 5.3.3 Application and Setting Notes.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Engineering
[sc_dbbp_proj_12_CU_set, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-67 Distributed Busbar Protection with Settable Parameters in the Representations
Special Cases for Power-System Data

As a rule, the majority of parameters are merely displayed in the representations. You can set the parameters
in the merging units only. With the icon, you can jump directly to the measuring point of the corre-
sponding device.
[sc_dbbp_proj_13_CU_i3p, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-68 Distributed Busbar Protection with Jump Option to the Merging Units

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
5 Function-Group Types and Bay Proxy
5.1 Busbar Function-Group Type 314

5.2 Bay Proxy 319
5.3 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker 337
5.4 Current Transformer Function-Group Type 359
5.5 Disconnector Function-Group Type 363
5.6 Function-Group Type Voltage 3-Phase 367
5.7 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 3-Phase 370
5.8 Function-Group Type Analog Units 384
5.9 Function-Group Recording 385
5.10 Power-System Data 387

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Function-Group Types and Bay Proxy
5.1 Busbar Function-Group Type
5.1.1 Overview
The Busbar function group represents the primary busbar, including all busbar sections in the 7SS85.
It represents the protected object into which the appropriate protection and supervision functions are placed.
The Busbar function group exists one time per 7SS85 and is permanently pre-instantiated. In the function
group, the Busbar protection function is permanently pre-instantiated with a FB Bus zone. To protect the
sections of a busbar, you connect these sections in the Single-Line Editor (SLE) of DIGSI 5 to the appropriate
building blocks of the Busbar protection.
You will find the Busbar function group under the device type 7SS85 in the function library in DIGSI 5. The
Busbar function group contains all of the protection, control, and supervision functions that you can use for
this device type.
You can find the Bus zone, the Busbar section without measuring system, and the Cross stabilization func-
tion blocks under the Busbar protection function. In the Busbar function group, you can instantiate up to 6
(20) function blocks Bus zones and 3 (12) function blocks Busbar sections without measuring system.
Values in brackets apply to the distributed busbar protection.
Current transformers connected to a Busbar section without measuring system are only included in the
calculation of the check zone. Only via the preference, for example via a connected busbar-section discon-
nector, is this Busbar section without measuring system assigned to a Busbar section (with measuring
system).
[sc_fgbusb-bbp, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-1 Busbar Function Group – Functional Scope for Device Type 7SS85
You will find more information on the Busbar protection function in chapter 6.2.1 Overview of Functions.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
5.1.2 Structure of the Function Group
The Busbar function group represents a primary function of the 7SS85 .

Besides the main protection function Busbar protection, the Busbar function group contains other function
blocks and functionalities that are essential for general purposes and therefore cannot be deleted:
• FN Busbar protection (differential protection algorithm)
• FN Supervision (settings and indications for differential current supervision and zero-crossing supervi-
sion)
• FB General (control and higher-level functions)
• FB Group indications
• FB External tripping
• FB Circuit-breaker failure protection
• FB Bus zone
In addition, you can also instantiate the following function blocks under the Busbar protection function:
• FB Bus zone
• FB Bus section (without measuring system)
[dw_fg_bb01, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-2 Structure of the Busbar Function Group
The Busbar function group has interfaces to the following objects:
• Bays (Circuit breaker function group , Disconnector function group, and Current transformer func-
tion group)
• Superordinate topology information

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Interfaces to Bay/Bays
The Busbar function group contains the necessary information from the following function groups in the
appropriate bays:
• Circuit breaker
• Disconnector function group
• Current transformer function group

The Busbar function group reaches its trip decisions on the basis of the measuring results of the check-zone
measuring system and the selective measuring systems. The function group makes these trip decisions corre-
sponding to the disconnector positions of the connected Circuit breaker function group available in the bay
for further processing.
Interfaces to the Superordinate Topology Information

The busbar protection receives information on the current switch position of the switchgear via this interface.
Parameter: Mode
• Default setting (_:12151:1) Mode = on

You use the Mode parameter to set the Busbar function group to On, Off or Test.
You use the Mode parameter, setting Off, to deactivate the entire Busbar function group including the Busbar
protection function contained in it and the associated supervision.
The functionalities of a bay are not influenced by this:
• Bay currents are displayed
• Status indications of the disconnectors are generated
• Status indications of the circuit breakers are generated
• The Inherent circuit-breaker failure protection remains active in the bay, but can no longer be started
by a protection function.
You use the Mode parameter, setting Test, to switch on the entire Busbar function group including the Busbar
protection function contained in it and the associated supervision in the test mode.
• All indications within the FG Busbar are generated with a test flag.
The output relay is not controlled via the generated test flag, a busbar trip command is not sent to the
hardware.
• With an external CBFP start in the bay, only indications are generated, but no trip command sent to the
hardware.
The individual states of function control are discussed in 2.3 Function Control. For this reason, it is not
described in greater detail here.
You can find additional application and setting notes for the various functions in Protection Functions and
Supervision Functions.
Parameter: Coupler trip w. bus-shunt
• Default setting (_:12151:101) Coupler trip w. bus-shunt = No

With the parameter Coupler trip w. bus-shunt, you set how a bus coupler responds in the event of
tripping and a simultaneous existing busbar shunt by disconnectors.
The No setting prevents tripping of the busbar coupler circuit breaker.
The Yes setting causes the busbar coupler circuit breaker to trip as well.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Parameter: Check zone
• Default setting (_:12151:102) Check zone = on

With the parameter Check zone, you switch the measuring system of the check zone on or off. If the check
zone is switched off, the selective measuring systems alone decide about tripping. The measured values of the
check zone are not calculated, not displayed, not recorded and the differential-current supervision of the
check zone is switched off.
Parameter: Blk.busbar prot.trip relays
• Default setting (_:12151:103) Blk.busbar prot.trip relays = No

With the parameter Blk.busbar prot.trip relays, the binary input _:12151:507
>Blk.BB.prot.trip relay or the controllable _:12151:55 Blk.BB.prot.trip relay, you prevent
the busbar protection from actuating the trip relays. The relay to which the indication (_:4261:300)
Trip/open cmd. 3-pole is routed is blocked. All other relays are not affected. However, tripping
continues to appear as an indication entry and can be displayed using an LED. Tripping of the relays in the
device by other sources (for example, overcurrent protection, voltage protection) is not blocked by this
setting.
The following trip commands are blocked:
• Busbar trip command of the circuit-breaker failure protection (after time T2) by way of an external start in
a feeder
• Busbar trip command of the inherent circuit-breaker failure protection (after unbalancing) in the bus
coupler
• Busbar trip command by external tripping (directly to the busbar or from the bay)
The indication _:12151:56 BBP trip relays blocked signals that the trip relays for busbar protection
are blocked. If the function is activated, every tripping of the busbar differential protection issues the indica-
tion _:4261:326 BBP trip relays blocked. This indication is given for each circuit breaker.
Parameter: Blockings always 3-ph.
• Default setting (_:12151:104) Blockings always 3-ph. = No

With the parameter Blockings always 3-ph., you specify whether blocking is phase-selective or always
3-phase. For example, this applies to blocking by the pickup of differential-current supervision, blocking due to
zero-crossing supervision or blocking due to supervision of the additional criterion.
Parameter: Block. not bus-zone sel.
• Default setting (_:12151:105) Block. not bus-zone sel. = No

With the parameter Block. not bus-zone sel., you set whether the blocking always blocks all busbar
sections rather than only the affected busbar section.
The following blockings are affected:
• Blocking due to faulty measured values
• Blocking due to disconnector faults
• Blocking by differential-current supervision

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
5.1.4 Settings

General
_:12151:1 General:Mode • off on
• on
• test
_:12151:101 General:Coupler trip w. • no no
bus-shunt
• yes
_:12151:102 General:Check zone • off on
• on
_:12151:103 General:Blk.busbar • no no
prot.trip relays
• yes
_:12151:104 General:Blockings • no no
always 3-ph.
• yes
_:12151:105 General:Block. not bus- • no no
zone sel.
• yes

(Type)
General
_:12151:51 General:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:12151:506 General:>Test mode SPS I
_:12151:507 General:>Blk.BB.prot.trip relay SPS I
_:12151:55 General:Blk.BB.prot.trip relay SPC C
_:12151:54 General:Inactive SPS O
_:12151:52 General:Behavior ENS O
_:12151:53 General:Health ENS O
_:12151:56 General:BBP trip relays blocked SPS O
Group indicat.
_:4501:57 Group indicat.:Operate ACT O

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
5.2 Bay Proxy
5.2 Bay Proxy

In the 7SS85, the Bay proxy represents a feeder bay, bus coupler bay, or bus-section bay with all disconnec-
tors, current transformers, and the circuit breaker. On the primary side, the bay comprises the primary compo-
nents. On the secondary side, the Bay proxy comprises function groups and function blocks, that is, the
building blocks representing the primary components. The superordinate functions, information, and supervi-
sion functions are placed in the Bay proxy.
The following elements distinguish the centralized and the distributed busbar protection:
• For the centralized and the distributed busbar protection (IEC 61850 compliant), add the bays in the
7SS85 device with the function groups and functions contained therein, such as current transformer and
circuit breaker. The connections between busbar and the functions with graphical elements in the Single-
Line Editor, the assignment is done directly for the bay proxy. This is described in the following chapter.
• For the distributed busbar protection, only connect the busbar protection functions of the 7SS85 device
with the busbar protection in the Single-Line Editor. Connect the current transformers, circuit breakers,
and disconnectors of the bays in the single-line diagram with the corresponding merging-unit functions.
Open the CU – BU Assignment tab and click the Update central unit button to create the bay proxy or
update it. This creates or updates the bay representations in the central unit. Refer to chapter
4.4.3 Updating the Central Unit (Step 1) .
The following chapters from 5.2.2 Structure of the Function and the bay types also apply to all busbar-protec-
tion variants.
5.2.1 The Field in Centralized or Distributed Busbar Protection (IEC 61850-

Compliant)
In the 7SS85 (centralized or distributed IEC-compliant), the Bay proxy is present once for each feeder bay, bus
coupler bay, or bus section disconnector bay and is preinstantiated with the General function block. In the
Single-Line Editor (SLE) of DIGSI 5, you can connect the switching devices and current transformers with the
switching devices in the instantiated bays.
The Bay proxy:
• Provides the basis for bay-specific activities, for example, taking a bay out of service, and communicates
this to the busbar protection/disconnector image
• Organizes function groups hierarchically and bay-specifically

You will find the Bay proxy function group under the device type 7SS85 in the Global DIGSI 5 Library. The Bay
proxy contains all superordinate bay information and supervision functions.
The following figure shows the functional scope of the Bay proxy and the available function groups Circuit
breaker, Current transformer and Disconnector.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
5.2 Bay Proxy
[sc_aom_bay, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-3 Bay Proxy – Functional Scope for Device Type 7SS85
The Bay proxy represents a primary function of the 7SS85 .

Besides the user functions, the Bay proxy function group contains certain function blocks and functionalities
that are essential and therefore cannot be deleted:
• FB General (superordinate information)

In addition, you can instantiate the following function groups under the Bay proxy:
• FG Circuit breaker 1-pole/3-pole
• FG Circuit breaker 3-pole
• FG Current transformer
• FG Disconnector

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
5.2 Bay Proxy
[dw_fg_aom1, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-4 Structure of the Bay Proxy
The Bay proxy has interfaces to:
• The Busbar function group
• The measuring points
• The superordinate topology information
Interfaces to the Busbar Function Group

The Bay proxy receives the trip decisions of the check-zone measuring system and the individual selective
measuring systems directly from the connected Busbar protection function in the Busbar function group. The
Busbar function group receives the necessary information from the Circuit-breaker, Current-transformer,
and Disconnector function groups via the interfacing in the bay.
Interface with Measuring Points

The Circuit-breaker and Current-transformer function groups in the Bay proxy receive the necessary values
of the bay currents via the interface to the measuring points:
• 3-phase current + IN
The measurands from the 3-phase power system are supplied via this interface. The Circuit-breaker and
Current-transformer function groups must always be connected.
Interface to the Superordinate Topology Information

5.2.3 Bay Types
5.2.3.1 Overview
The following bay types are used in the busbar-protection system:
• Feeder bays
• Bus coupler bays
• Bus section bays

The DIGSI 5 engineering system recognizes the different bay types automatically.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
5.2 Bay Proxy
The bay types are connected to the busbar sections via a direct connection or disconnector. You must
configure all bay types individually.
5.2.3.2 Bay Type Feeder

The feeder-bay type always requires the Circuit-breaker and Current-transformer function groups.
The bay type feeder can be used for the following applications:
• Transformer, line and cable outputs
• Capacitor banks and compensation coils
• Transfer-busbar mode (interior and exterior current transformer)
• Bypass (interior and exterior current transformer)
• Truck-type switchgear
NOTE
i Here, busbar section disconnectors must not be used.
Several examples of a feeder bay are listed in the following.
[sc_bayty_1, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-5 Example of a Single Busbar without Disconnector

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
5.2 Bay Proxy
[sc_bayty_2, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-6 Example of a Double Busbar

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
5.2 Bay Proxy
[sc_bbp_bypass_cb, 2, en_US]
Figure 5-7 Bypass with Internal Transformer
In the case of an internal transformer and closed QB7, the current is always extracted from the measurement.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
5.2 Bay Proxy
[sc_bbp_bypass_cb-ct, 2, en_US]
Figure 5-8 Bypass with External Transformer

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
5.2 Bay Proxy
[sc_bbp_tt_bay, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-9 Truck-Type Switchgear Bay
5.2.3.3 Bay Type Bus Coupler

Busbar configurations are divided into several sections that form selectively protected subsystems. These
subsystems are also called zones or measuring systems. The subsystems are connected by bus couplers to
create all required operating states. Different bus coupler variants result depending on the number of current
transformers and type of switching element.
NOTE
i Siemens recommends that you instantiate the End-fault protection function for all connection types for
protection of the dead zone. The term dead zone is used to designate the busbar section between the
circuit breaker and current transformer in a bus coupler.
This prevents a possible overfunction of the busbar protection.
Only with instantiated End-fault protection and an open circuit breaker a fault between circuit breaker and
current transformer is tripped selectively and fast.
For a bus coupler with 2 current transformers, the busbar protection offers the possibility of protecting the
dead zone via a bus coupler differential protection.
You will find more information on the End-fault protection function in the chapter 6.6.1 Overview of Func-
tions .

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
5.2 Bay Proxy
You will find more information on the Bus coupler differential protection function in the chapter 6.9.1 Over-
view of Functions .
The permissible bus coupler types are listed in the following.
Bus Coupler with 1 Current Transformer

The bus coupler with a circuit breaker and one current transformer represents the most common variant and
economical solution. The drawback of this variant is delayed tripping of the faulty busbar section when the
bus coupler is closed in the event of a fault in the dead zone.
[sc_1ct1qa, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-10 Bus Coupler with One Current Transformer and Circuit Breaker

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
5.2 Bay Proxy
Bus Couplers with 2 Current Transformers
[sc_2ct1qa, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-11 Bus Coupler with 2 Current Transformers and Circuit Breaker
Bus couplers can also be configured with 2 current transformers, one on either side of the circuit breaker. The
currents are assigned to the zones here via the parameter Overlapping CT. The advantage of the Overlap-
ping setting is the instantaneous, but nonselective, tripping of both zones in the event of a fault between the
2 current transformers.
With the Non-overlapping setting, the zones can be tripped selectively by the Bus coupler differential
protection or by an external protection device, but with a time delay.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
5.2 Bay Proxy
Bus Coupler without Circuit Breaker
[sc_bbp_cpl_wo_cb, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-12 Bus Coupler with One Current Transformer and No Circuit Breaker
Some busbar sections are connected by a load breaking switch, not by a circuit breaker. Both of the coupled
busbar sections are tripped, since the load breaking switch cannot disconnect the short-circuit current. In
order to identify the section affected in the event of a fault, the current at the coupling point is acquired. The
indication Trip by transfer trip appears for the tripped busbar.
Combined Bus Coupler

The arrangement of the different switchgear elements is usually free and subject mainly to the operational
requirements. In some individual situations, switching elements such as circuit breakers, current transformers
and disconnectors are used in duplicate, either as a bus coupler or as feeder bay.
This special operating mode of the bus coupler bay is made possible by the Combi coupler parameter in the
engineering of the bay. This parameter can be used for all bus-coupler types with a circuit breaker. The default
setting is No. With the No setting, the bay acts as a bus coupler. With the Yes setting and in a coupled state
(switched on both sides or open disconnectors on both sides), there are also no differences; the bay acts as a
bus coupler.
If disconnectors are in the On position on only one side of the bus coupler with this parameterization, the
current is associated with the corresponding busbar and the check zone (QB10 or QB20). The bus coupler acts
as a feeder bay. The protection range ends after the current transformer associated with the busbar. All elec-
trical elements behind the current transformer are part of the line.
To expand the protection range with open circuit breaker and to increase the selectivity, use the End-fault
protection protection function.
Further information on the subject of combined bus couplers is available in chapter 4.5.3 Combined Bus
Coupler Bays

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
5.2 Bay Proxy
[sc_comcpl, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-13 Example of a Combined Bus Coupler
(1) The marked (dashed-line) part must not be drawn in the SLE and not parameterized.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
5.2 Bay Proxy
Truck-Type Switchgear
[sc_bbp_tt_coupler_1ct, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-14 Bus Coupler Truck-Type Switchgear with 1 Current Transformer

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
5.2 Bay Proxy
[sc_bbp_tt_coupler_2ct, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-15 Bus Coupler Truck-Type Switchgear with 2 Current Transformers
5.2.3.4 Bay Type Busbar-Section Disconnection

Busbar configurations are divided into several sections that form selectively protected subsystems. These
subsystems are also called zones or measuring systems. The subsystems are connected by bus couplers as well
as busbar section disconnectors to create all required operating states. These busbar-section disconnection
bays have neither current transformers nor circuit breakers. The cut between the busbar sections is achieved
by means of a disconnector switch or load breaking switch. In contrast to when bus couplers are used, one
selective zone (preference) is formed from the 2 selective zones when the disconnection is closed. If you want
to use several bus section disconnector switches in series, place the bus section disconnector switches in the
single-line diagram within the same bay.
[sc_1qbsec, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-16 Bay Type Busbar-Section Disconnection

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
5.2 Bay Proxy
Parameter: Overlapping CT
• Default setting (_:102) Overlapping CT = yes

Use the parameter Overlapping CT to set whether the protection range is assigned by the current trans-
former overlapping the busbars.
With the setting Yes, you set for the bus coupler bay with 2 current transformers so that the protection ranges
are assigned by the current transformers overlapping the busbars.
The setting No has the effect that the protection range is assigned by the current transformer non-overlapping
the busbars. This parameter becomes visible only when the system configuration detects bus coupler bays
with 2 current transformers.
For a bus coupler with 2 current transformers, the busbar protection offers the possibility of protecting the
dead zone via a bus coupler differential protection.
Parameter: Combi Coupler
• Default setting (_:103) Combi coupler = no

With the parameter Combi coupler, you can set whether the coupler bay can also be operated as a feeder bay.
The No setting indicates that the bus coupler bay may be operated only as a bus coupler.
The Yes setting allows operation of the bus coupler bay as a bus coupler as well as a feeder bay. The protec-
tion range ends after the current transformer associated with the busbar.
5.2.5 Operating State: Bay Out of Service
A configured bay in a 7SS85 or 7SS85CU device can be placed in the Bay out of service operating state. The
requirement for this is for the physical bay to actually be out of service on the primary side, that is, that
current cannot flow through the bay.
You can set the Bay out of service operating state via a control command or a binary input for the relevant
bay.
NOTE
i A bay can only be put back into operation in the same way that it was taken out of operation, that is via the
binary input or via a control command.
The following functions are deactivated by the operating state Bay out of service:
• Circuit-breaker failure protection
The disconnectors for the affected bay are processed as open by the 7SS85 or 7SS85CU device. The assign-
ment of the bay to the check zone (= disconnector-independent measuring system) is maintained even if all
disconnectors are detected as open. Furthermore, disconnector supervision in the bay and the resulting indi-
cations are blocked.
For more information, refer to 5.2.8 Deactivating the Sampled Value Monitoring and 5.2.9 Deactivating
GOOSE Monitoring.
5.2.6 Operating State: Measuring Point out of Operation
In case of a 7SS85CU-based distributed busbar protection system, alongside the previously described bay out
of operation operating state that can only be used on a bay in the 7SS85CU device, there is also the option of
taking a measuring point of the distributed busbar protection in a bay unit out of operation.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
5.2 Bay Proxy
For more information on decommissioning a measuring point, refer to 6.1.4 Operating State: Measuring Point
for Distributed Busbar Protection out of Service.
For more information, refer to 5.2.8 Deactivating the Sampled Value Monitoring and 5.2.9 Deactivating
GOOSE Monitoring.
5.2.7 Operating State: Bay Off
Physical bays that are not yet available or that have not yet been commissioned on the primary side, but which
have already been projected in the DIGSI configuration can be deactivated in the 7SS85 or the 7SS85CU device
via the Bay off operating mode for the affected bay. To do this, set the Mode parameter of the affected bay in
the General function block to Off.
This switches off all functions within this bay in the 7SS85 or 7SS85CU device. The current measured value
from this bay is not taken into account for the selective zone or for the check zone.
You can activate or deactivate this Bay off operating mode in the affected bay in the 7SS85 or the 7SS85CU
device via parameterization or via the control system.
NOTE
i A bay can only be switched on again in the same way that it was switched off, that is via parameterization
or via a control command.
NOTE
i Changing the operating state of a bay in the 7SS85CU affects the following points of monitoring communi-
cation to the bay units connected to the 7SS85CU:
• Monitoring of the sampled values
• Monitoring of GOOSE signals
• Monitoring of busbar-protection internal communication
For more information, refer to 5.2.8 Deactivating the Sampled Value Monitoring, 5.2.9 Deactivating GOOSE
Monitoring, and 8.7 Supervision of Communication Connections.
When a bay in a 7SS85CU device changes to the operating state Bay off, the monitoring of the communica-
tion to the associated merging unit is automatically deactivated in the 7SS85CU.
For more information, refer to Supervision of the Busbar-Protection Internal Communication (Only 7SS85CU),
Page 822.
5.2.8 Deactivating the Sampled Value Monitoring
If a bay that is projected in a distributed busbar protection system in DIGSI is placed into the Bay out of
service or Bay off operating mode or if an assigned measuring point in a bay unit is taken out of operation,
the sampled value monitoring that is automatically activated in the 7SS85 or 7SS85CU device is still active.
The sampled value monitoring is used for the sampled values received by this bay/measuring point. This
means, for example, that the relevant status and fault indications are issued if the sampled values fail to mate-
rialize.
If this is not required, switch off the relevant sampled value monitoring instance in this 7SS85 or 7SS85CU
device separately via corresponding control commands, or switch it on again when recommissioning the bay/
measuring point.
For details on control commands via IEC 61850, refer to the SIPROTEC 5 Communication protocols manual,
chapter 2.6.5 Control via IEC 61850.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
5.2 Bay Proxy
5.2.9 Deactivating GOOSE Monitoring
The contents of this chapter are only required if you have subscribed to GOOSE indications from the bay units
in the 7SS85 or 7SS85CU device for a distributed busbar protection system and if the GOOSE-indication super-
vision is additionally activated in the 7SS85 and 7SS85CU device.
For more details on activating/deactivating GOOSE supervision, refer to the SIPROTEC 5 Communication proto-
cols manual, chapter 11.1.14.3 GOOSE connection monitoring.
If a bay which is projected in a distributed busbar protection system in DIGSI is placed into the Bay out of
service or Bay off operating mode or if an assigned measuring point in a bay unit is taken out of operation,
the monitoring system for GOOSE indications received by this bay/measuring point, that may be automatically
activated in the 7SS85 or 7SS85CU device, is still active. This means, for example, that the relevant status and
fault indication are issued if the GOOSE indications fail to materialize.
If this is not required, switch off the relevant GOOSE-supervision instance in the 7SS85 or 7SS85CU device
separately via relevant control commands, or switch it on again when recommissioning the bay/measuring
point.
5.2.10 Operating State Acquisition Blocking
You can route the Acquisition blocking input signal to a binary input in the information routing for circuit
breakers and disconnectors.
During maintenance work on primary switches (disconnectors and circuit breakers), the feedback may not
correspond to the actual switch position, for example a switched-off feedback voltage.
With the Acquisition blocking, the instantaneous disconnector status is frozen. By combining the binary
signals, different switching devices can be assigned to a revision range. Several revision ranges can be defined
in one bay.
You can find more information on acquisition blocking in chapter 3.9.2 Acquisition Blocking and Manual
Updating and in chapter Commissioning of the SIPROTEC 5 Operating manual.
5.2.11 Settings

General
_:102 General:Overlapping CT • no yes
• yes
_:103 General:Combi coupler • no no
• yes

(Type)
General
_:501 General:>Out of service SPS I
_:305 General:Out of service cmd SPC C
_:54 General:Inactive SPS O
_:52 General:Behavior ENS O
_:53 General:Health ENS O
_:301 General:Out of service SPS O
_:302 General:Out of service by cmd SPS O
_:303 General:Out of service by BI SPS O

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
5.2 Bay Proxy

(Type)
_:310 General:Sw. gear op. prohibited SPS O
_:311 General:Sw. aux. volt. failure SPS O
_:312 General:Sw. fault alarm SPS O

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
5.3 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker
5.3.1 Overview
The Circuit-breaker function group combines all the user functions that relate to a circuit breaker. The Circuit-
breaker function group represents the physical circuit breaker in the SIPROTEC 5 device.
You can find the Bay, and below the Circuit-breaker 1-/3-pole and Circuit-breaker 3-pole function groups,
under the device type 7SS85 in the Global DIGSI 5 library. Both function groups contain all the protection,
control, and supervision functions that you can use for this device type.
[sc_fgls01, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-17 Circuit-Breaker Function Group - Example of the Functional Scope
These functions are described in chapter 6 Protection and Automation Functions.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
The FG Circuit breaker 1-pole/3-pole can issue the switching command both for 3 poles (phases A, B, and C)
as well as for 1 pole (phase A or B or C). The FG Circuit breaker 3-pole can issue the switching command only
for 3 poles.
The 1-pole CBFP (T1) of the 1-pole/3-pole circuit breaker trips via the Circuit-breaker failure protection
protection function in the bay and not via the Circuit-breaker function in the Circuit-breaker function group.
The Circuit-breaker function group contains specific functionalities that are needed in addition to the user
functions.
• FB General
• FB Trip logic
• FB Circuit breaker (representation of the physical circuit breaker)
• FB Circuit-breaker position recognition for protection functions
• Circuit-breaker supervision
• Circuit-breaker test
• Control
• Interlocking
Only the circuit-breaker test, the control, and the interlocking can be deleted from the Circuit-breaker func-
tion group.
In addition to the functions described, the following features can be created in the Circuit-breaker function
group.
• Circuit-breaker failure protection (CBFP)
• End-fault protection
• Trip-circuit supervision

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[dw_fg_ls_01, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-18 Structure of the Circuit-Breaker Function Group
(1) White – available with instantiating

(2) Gray – optionally available
The Circuit-breaker function group has interfaces with:
• Measuring points (Power-system data function group)
• Busbar function group
• Superordinate topology information
Interfaces with Measuring Points

The Circuit-breaker function group obtains the necessary bay-current values via the interface with the meas-
uring points:
The measurands from the 3-phase current system are supplied via this interface. The function group must
always be connected to this measuring point.
NOTE
i The Circuit-breaker function group must always be connected to this measuring point. The configuration
is done via the Function-group connections editor in DIGSI 5.
For more detailed information, refer to chapter 2.1 Function Embedding in the Device .
If a user function is used in the function group but the required measuring point is not connected to it,
DIGSI 5 reports an inconsistency. This inconsistency provides an indication of the missing measuring-point
connection.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Interface to the Busbar Function Group

All needed data are exchanged via the interface with the FG Busbar.
The Circuit-breaker function group receives the OFF decisions of the check-zone measuring system and the
appropriate selective measuring systems directly from the connected protection function of Busbar protec-
tion. The required information of the circuit-breaker position is provided by the FG Busbar via this interface.
For more detailed information on this, refer to chapter 2.2 Adjustment of Application Templates/Functional
Scope

Overcurrent Release
When a short circuit occurs in the busbar, busbar protection provides the option of disconnecting only the
feeders with currents above the limiting value that can be set. Set the limiting values for each feeder individu-
ally using the parameters (_:2311:121) Current thres. trip release and (_:2311:122)
Current thr. trip rel. sens.. The set threshold Current thres. trip release applies to trip-
ping cases of the busbar differential protection with the default characteristic curve. The threshold Current
thr. trip rel. sens. applies to tripping cases of the busbar differential protection with sensitive charac-
teristic curve and tripping cases of the busbar circuit-breaker failure protection. To satisfy the tripping crite-
rion, at least one of the phase currents must be greater than or equal to the threshold set by the parameter.
With the default setting of 0 A, the function has no effect and disconnection occurs without considering the
current.
You will find the settings in the 7SS85 device under -> Parameters -> Bay -> Circuit breaker -> General.
Release with External Criterion

In case of a busbar short circuit, you can make the tripping of a feeder dependent on an additional external
criterion apart from overcurrent release. This tripping release can occur, for example due to the feeder-protec-
tion pickup. Route the _:4261:505 >Trip release BBP indication to a binary input. If a feeder trips if
the binary input >Trip release BBP is not active, the (_:4261:327) no release of trip cmd
indication is issued. In the absence of the >Trip release BBP, the internal circuit-breaker failure protec-
tion does not start.
If you have configured truck-type switchgears, you must route the (_:4261:505)>Trip release BBP
indication to both circuit breakers.
Parameter: I Reference for % Values
• Default setting (_:2311:101) Rated normal current = 1000 A

With the Rated normal current parameter, you set the primary current, which serves as a reference for
all current-related % values within the Circuit-breaker function group. This applies both for operational meas-
ured values and for setting values in %.
Enter the primary rated current of the connected current transformer here.
NOTE
i If the device works with the IEC 61850 protocol, then you change the setting value of the parameter only
via DIGSI 5 and not directly on the device. If you change the setting value directly on the device, then the
IEC 61850 configuration of the metered values can be faulty.
Parameter: Current Threshold Circuit Breaker Open
• Default setting (_:2311:112) Current thresh. CB open = 0.10 A

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
With the Current thresh. CB open parameter, you specify the current threshold below which the circuit-
breaker pole or the circuit breaker is recognized as open.
Set the Current thresh. CB open parameter so that the current measured when the circuit-breaker pole
is open will certainly fall below the parameterized value. If parasitic currents (for example, due to induction)
are excluded with the line deactivated, you can make a secondary setting of the value with a high degree of
sensitivity, to 0.05 A for example.
If no special requirements exist, Siemens recommends retaining the setting value of 0.10 A for secondary
purposes.
Special Characteristics for the Distributed Busbar Protection

Only few of the parameters of the 7SS85CU can be edited in the representations. They are only displayed after
a successful update of the central unit. You can find the parameters in the project tree in [7SS85CU] device >
Settings > [Bay] > [Circuit breaker] > General.
• Current thresh. CB open
• Op. mode BFP
• Current thres. trip release
• Current thr. trip rel. sens.
[sc_dbbp_proj_12_CU_set, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-19 Distributed Busbar Protection with Adjustable Parameters in the Representations
Parameter: Operating Mode BFP
• Default setting (_:2311:136) Op. mode BFP = unbalancing

With the Op. mode BFP parameter, you set the operating mode for the circuit-breaker failure protection.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

unbalancing If the trigger and the necessary current-flow criterion (current release) are
present for the entire time delay, the feeder-current polarity is reversed,
that is, the measuring system is unbalanced in the unbalancing oper-
ating mode in busbar differential protection of the FG Busbar. Busbar differ-
ential protection issues the trip decisions to the appropriate circuit breaker
based on the set characteristic curve.
The Inherent circuit-breaker failure protection is unbalanced only in the bus-
coupler circuit-breaker. In the other bays, the Trip T2 is provided for inter-
tripping at the opposite end.
I> query If the trigger and the necessary current-flow criterion (current release) are
present for the entire time delay, the trip decision is issued to the appro-
priate circuit breaker by the Busbar differential protection in the I> query
operating mode. The disconnector image is responsible for tripping the
busbars.
The Inherent circuit-breaker failure protection is unbalanced only in the bus-
coupler circuit-breaker. In the other bays, the Trip T2 is provided for inter-
tripping at the opposite end.
With Trip T2 of the circuit-breaker failure protection in currentless operation Figure 6-27, disconnection
does not use unbalancing but rather the disconnector image. This does not affect the Inherent circuit-breaker
failure protection.
NOTE
i If you use the circuit-breaker failure protection locally in the merging unit in the distributed busbar protec-
tion (IEC 61850 compliant), the unbalancing operating mode cannot be activated in the busbar protection.
You can find more detailed information on this in the chapter 6.3.4 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection in
Busbar Protection
Parameter: Current thres. trip release

Default setting (_:2311:121) Current thres. trip release = 0.00 A
With the parameter Current thres. trip release, you set the current threshold. Tripping occurs in the
bay in the event of a bus fault exceeding this current threshold. This threshold is valid if the busbar differential
protection is operating with the standard characteristic curve. This parameter only acts on busbar differential
protection, not on external tripping or circuit-breaker failure protection.
Parameter: Current thr. trip rel. sens.

Default setting (_:2311:122) Current thr. trip rel. sens. = 0.00 A
With the parameter Current thr. trip rel. sens., you set the current threshold. Tripping occurs in
the bay in the event of a bus fault exceeding this current threshold. This threshold is valid if the busbar differ-
ential protection is operating with the sensitive characteristic curve or if busbar tripping is caused by the
circuit-breaker failure protection.
5.3.4 Settings
Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default

Setting
Ref. for %-values
_:2311:101 General:Rated normal 0.20 A to 100000.00 A 1000.00 A
current
_:2311:102 General:Rated voltage 0.20 kV to 1200.00 kV 400.00 kV

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default

Setting
Breaker settings
_:2311:112 General:Current thresh. 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.100 A
CB open 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.150 A to 50.000 A 0.500 A
_:2311:136 General:Op. mode BFP • unbalancing unbalancing
• I> query
_:2311:121 General: Current thres. 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.000 A to 25.000 A 0.000 A
trip release 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.00 A to 125.00 A 0.00 A
_:2311:122 General: Current thr. trip 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.000 A to 25.000 A 0.000 A
rel. sens. 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.00 A to 125.00 A 0.00 A
Circuit break.
_:4261:101 Circuit break.:Output 0.02 s to 1800.00 s 0.10 s
time
50BF Inherent
_:12511:1 50BF Inherent:Mode • off on
• on
• test
_:12511:102 50BF Inherent:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.500 A
phase current 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 2.500 A
_:12511:101 50BF Inherent:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.250 A
sensitive 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 1.250 A
_:12511:110 50BF Inherent:Delay T2 0.05 s to 60.00 s 0.13 s
for 3-pole trip
_:12511:112 50BF Inherent:Minimum 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.10 s
operate time
Control
_:4201:101 Control:Control model • status only SBO w. enh.
security
• direct w. normal secur.
• SBO w. normal secur.
• direct w. enh. security
• SBO w. enh. security
_:4201:102 Control:SBO time-out 0.01 s to 1800.00 s 30.00 s
_:4201:103 Control:Feedback moni- 0.01 s to 1800.00 s 1.00 s
toring time
_:4201:104 Control:Check switching • no yes
authority
• yes
_:4201:105 Control:Check if pos. is • no yes
reached
• yes
_:4201:106 Control:Check double • no yes
activat. blk.
• yes
_:4201:107 Control:Check blk. by • no yes
protection
• yes
CB test
_:6151:101 CB test:Dead time 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.10 s

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

(Type)
Trip logic
_:5341:300 Trip logic:Trip indication ACT O
_:5341:58 Trip logic:Trip ind.:Busbar diff.prt. ACT O
_:5341:59 Trip logic:Trip ind.:Busbar BFP ACT O
_:5341:60 Trip logic:Trip ind.:Busbar ext.trip ACT O
Circuit break.
_:4261:500 Circuit break.:>Ready SPS I
_:4261:501 Circuit break.:>Acquisition blocking SPS I
_:4261:502 Circuit break.:>Reset switch statist. SPS I
_:4261:503 Circuit break.:External health ENS I
_:4261:505 Circuit break.:>Trip release BBP SPS I
_:4261:53 Circuit break.:Health ENS O
_:4261:58 Circuit break.:Position 3-pole DPC C
_:4261:459 Circuit break.:Position 1-pole phsA DPC C
_:4261:460 Circuit break.:Position 1-pole phsB DPC C
_:4261:461 Circuit break.:Position 1-pole phsC DPC C
_:4261:300 Circuit break.:Trip/open cmd. 3-pole SPS O
_:4261:401 Circuit break.:Trip only pole A SPS O
_:4261:402 Circuit break.:Trip only pole B SPS O
_:4261:403 Circuit break.:Trip only pole C SPS O
_:4261:301 Circuit break.:Close command SPS O
_:4261:302 Circuit break.:Command active SPS O
_:4261:303 Circuit break.:Definitive trip SPS O
_:4261:304 Circuit break.:Alarm suppression SPS O
_:4261:326 Circuit break.:BBP trip relays blocked SPS O
_:4261:327 Circuit break.:no release of trip cmd SPS O
_:4261:306 Circuit break.:Op.ct. INS O
_:4261:407 Circuit break.:Op.ct. A INS O
_:4261:408 Circuit break.:Op.ct. B INS O
_:4261:409 Circuit break.:Op.ct. C INS O
_:4261:307 Circuit break.:ΣI Brk. BCR O
_:4261:308 Circuit break.:ΣIA Brk. BCR O
_:4261:309 Circuit break.:ΣIB Brk. BCR O
_:4261:310 Circuit break.:ΣIC Brk. BCR O
_:4261:311 Circuit break.:Break.-current phs A MV O
_:4261:312 Circuit break.:Break.-current phs B MV O
_:4261:313 Circuit break.:Break.-current phs C MV O
Reset LED Group
_:13381:500 Reset LED Group:>LED reset SPS I
_:13381:320 Reset LED Group:LED have been reset SPS O
50BF Inherent
_:12511:82 50BF Inherent:>Block function SPS I
_:12511:503 50BF Inherent:>CB defect SPS I
_:12511:500 50BF Inherent:>Threshold sensitive SPS I

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

(Type)
_:12511:54 50BF Inherent:Inactive SPS O
_:12511:52 50BF Inherent:Behavior ENS O
_:12511:53 50BF Inherent:Health ENS O
_:12511:55 50BF Inherent:Pickup ACD O
_:12511:306 50BF Inherent:Trip T2 ACT O
Supervision
_:12961:301 Supervision:CB runtime exceeded SPS O
_:12961:302 Supervision:CB disturbance SPS O
_:12961:305 Supervision:Off contact n.routed SPS O
Control
_:4201:53 Control:Health ENS O
_:4201:58 Control:Cmd. with feedback DPC C
Interlocking
_:4231:500 Interlocking:>Enable opening SPS I
_:4231:501 Interlocking:>Enable closing SPS I
_:4231:502 Interlocking:>Enable opening(fixed) SPS I
_:4231:503 Interlocking:>Enable closing (fixed) SPS I
_:4231:53 Interlocking:Health ENS O
CB test
_:6151:53 CB test:Health ENS O
_:6151:301 CB test:Test execution ENS O
_:6151:302 CB test:Trip command issued ENS O
_:6151:303 CB test:Close command issued ENS O
_:6151:304 CB test:Test canceled ENS O
_:6151:311 CB test:3-pole open-close SPC C
_:6151:312 CB test:Pole A open-close SPC C
_:6151:313 CB test:Pole B open-close SPC C
_:6151:314 CB test:Pole C open-close SPC C
5.3.6 Circuit Breaker
5.3.6.1 Overview
The basic tasks of this function block are the operation of the circuit breaker and the acquisition of the circuit-
breaker auxiliary contacts and other circuit-breaker information.
The Circuit-breaker function block also provides information about:
• Number of switching cycles
• Breaking current
• Summation breaking current
5.3.6.2 Tripping, Opening, and Closing the Circuit Breaker

The circuit breaker is operated in the following situations:
• Circuit-breaker tripping as a consequence of a trip command from Busbar differential protection
• Circuit-breaker tripping as a consequence of a trip command from Circuit-breaker failure protection
• Circuit-breaker tripping as a consequence of Ext. trip bus zone (via binary input)

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
• Circuit-breaker tripping as a consequence of Ext. trip bus zone (from bay)
• Opening of the circuit breaker in response to the circuit-breaker test function
• Opening of the circuit breaker as a result of control operations
• Closing of the circuit breaker as a result of control operations

Tripping is always the result of a protection function. The operate indications of the individual protection func-
tions are summarized in the Trip logic function block. The trip command that causes the tripping in the
Circuit-breaker function block is generated there.
The protection functions of the Busbar protection allow only 3-pole tripping by the circuit breaker.
The only exception is the 1-pole OFF repetition by the Circuit-breaker failure protection protection function.
To operate the circuit breaker, the Circuit-breaker function block provides the output signals (see Table 5-1).
You must route these output signals to the appropriate binary outputs of the device.
NOTE
i The following chapter is always describing the 1-pole/3-pole circuit breaker. The inputs for the phase-selec-
tive evaluation of the circuit-breaker switch position are not applicable for an only 3-pole circuit breaker.
[lo_lsausl, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-20 Tripping, Opening, and Closing the Circuit Breaker

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Table 5-1 Description of the Output Signals
Signal Description Routing Options

Trip/open cmd. 3- This signal executes all 3-pole tripping and opening oper- • Unlatched
pole ations.
• Only saved in the
The Output time parameter affects the signal. event of protection
The signal is pending for the duration of this period, with tripping (not when
the following exceptions: opened)
• Only when switched off by the control: The signal is

canceled before expiration of the period if the auxil-
iary contacts report that the circuit breaker is open
before expiration of the period.
• Only in the event of protection tripping: The signal
remains active as long as the trip command is still
active after expiration of the period.
• Only in the event of protection tripping: With the
routing option Only saved in the event of tripping,
the signal remains pending until it is acknowledged
manually.
Close command This signal executes all closing operations. Normal routing
The Output time parameter affects the signal.
The signal is pending for the duration of this period, with
the following exception: The signal is canceled before
expiration of the period if the auxiliary contacts report
that the circuit breaker is closed before expiration of the
period.
Closing operations are always 3-pole operations.
Command active This signal is active as long as one of the binary outputs Normal routing
assigned to the signals Trip/open cmd. 3-pole and
Close command is active because a switching command
is being executed by the control.
5.3.6.3 Acquisition of Circuit-Breaker Auxiliary Contacts and Further Information

To determine the circuit-breaker switch position, the Circuit-breaker function block provides position signals
(see next figure).
These signals are of the Double-point indication (DPC) type. A double-point indication can be routed to
2 binary inputs so that the open and closed circuit-breaker switch positions can be reliably acquired.
NOTE
i Siemens recommends always using 2 binary inputs for determining the circuit-breaker switch position. If
you set the circuit-breaker failure protection parameters taking the auxiliary contacts into consideration,
you must route the On position. For the end-fault protection and the correct detection of the disconnector
image in the truck-type switchgear, the Off position is needed.
Before loading the configuration into the device, DIGSI checks the prerouting of the OFF contacts of the
disconnectors and circuit breakers.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[lo_ls_info, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-21 Acquisition of the Circuit-Breaker Information
Signal Type Description

Position 3-pole DPC Acquisition of the 3-pole circuit-breaker switch position.
The position 3-pole circuit breaker open and/or the position 3-pole circuit
breaker closed can be acquired by routing to 1 or 2 binary inputs.
Position 1-pole DPC Acquisition of the 1-pole circuit-breaker switch position for phase A.
phsA The position 1-pole circuit-breaker phase A open and/or the position 1-pole
circuit-breaker phase A closed can be acquired by routing to 1 or 2 binary
inputs.
Position 1-pole DPC Acquisition of the 1-pole circuit-breaker switch position for phase B.
phsB The position 1-pole circuit-breaker phase B open and/or the position 1-pole
circuit-breaker phase B closed can be acquired by routing to 1 or 2 binary
inputs.
Position 1-pole DPC Acquisition of the 1-pole circuit-breaker switch position for phase C.
phsC The position 1-pole circuit-breaker phase C open and/or the position 1-pole
circuit-breaker phase C closed can be acquired by routing to 1 or 2 binary
inputs.
The signal or signals must be routed to the binary inputs that are connected to the circuit-breaker auxiliary
contacts. The open and closed signals do not necessarily have to be both routed. The advantage of parallel
routing is that it can be used to determine an intermediate or disturbed position. On the other hand, this is not
possible if only one signal is routed.
In the monitoring direction, the position signals generate the following information when the open and
closed positions are detected (see following table). This information is further processed by the Circuit-
breaker position recognition and Control function blocks.
Information Type Description
Off SPS Circuit-breaker switch position is opened.
On SPS Circuit-breaker switch position is closed.
Intermediate position SPS Circuit-breaker switch position is in intermediate position.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Information Type Description

Disturbed position SPS Circuit-breaker switch position is in disturbed position.
Not selected SPS The circuit breaker is not selected for a control operation.
You can find more information in the chapter 8.3.8.3 Function Description.
Other input signals are:
Signal Type Description
>Acquisition SPS The acquisition blocking of the circuit-breaker auxiliary contact is activated
blocking using this input signal
You can find more information on this in the chapters 3.9.2 Acquisition
Blocking and Manual Updating and 5.2.10 Operating State Acquisition Blocking
>Ready SPS The active signal indicates that the circuit breaker is ready for an OFF-ON-OFF
cycle.
The signal remains active as long as the circuit breaker is unable to trip. The
signal is used in the Circuit-breaker test function.
Another output signal is:

External health SPS This output signal can be used to indicate the health of the physical circuit
breaker. For this, you must acquire any disturbance information for the circuit
breaker via a binary input. This disturbance information can set the appropriate
state of the External health signal with a CFC chart (using the BUILD_ENS
block).
The signal has no effect on the health of the function block.
The following signals from the circuit breaker can be acquired
• Circuit breaker in the 3-pole On position (CB On)
• Circuit breaker in the 3-pole Off position (CB Off)
• Phase-selective circuit breaker in the 1-pole On position, phases A, B, C (CB On)
• Phase-selective circuit breaker in the 1-pole Off position, phases A, B, C (CB Off)
The signals must be routed to the binary inputs that are connected to the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts. For
safety reasons, Siemens recommends an external logical operation with phase-selective auxiliary contacts and
3-pole auxiliary-contact activation in the circuit breaker.
Circuit-Breaker Acquisition with 3-Pole Activation

If all 3 auxiliary contacts are closed, the final positions CB open and CB closed in the circuit breaker are
acquired. Siemens recommends this routing.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[dw_lser_3p, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-22 Acquisition of Circuit-Breaker Information with 3-Pole Activation
Circuit-Breaker Acquisition with 1-Pole/3-Pole Activation

If all 3 auxiliary contacts are closed, the final position CB open in the circuit breaker is recognized. If all 3 auxil-
iary contacts for the position CB closed phsx are closed, the final position CB closed is recognized. Siemens
recommends this routing.
[dw_lser_13, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-23 Acquisition of Circuit-Breaker Information with 3-Pole or 1-Pole Phase-Selective Activation
Circuit-Breaker Tripping Alarm Suppression

In certain systems, the user may wish to actuate an alarm (for example, a horn) when tripping (circuit-breaker
tripping) occurs. This alarm should not happen if the control is used to switch off or on.
Depending on how the alarm is generated (for example, triggered by a fleeting contact of the circuit breaker),
the Indication suppression signal is used to suppress the signal.
The signal is generated if it is switched on or off via the integrated control.
[lo_untbbp, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-24 Circuit-Breaker Tripping Alarm Suppression

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
5.3.6.4 Circuit Breakers in Truck-Type Switchgear

In truck-type switchgear with double busbars, the position of the circuit breaker serves the protection device
as a criterion for the assignment of the measured currents to the measuring systems (bus sections). For this
purpose, at least one auxiliary contact must be available as an input signal for the busbar protection for each
circuit breaker. Siemens recommends using both the 3-pole closed and the 3-pole open signal so that
disturbed positions can also be detected.
The following table contains an overview of the assignment of the current to the measuring system
depending on the states of the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts.
Circuit-Breaker Auxiliary Contact Assignment of the Current to the Measuring System
3-Pole Closed, 3-Pole Open
Unrouted Unrouted Yes
Inactive Unrouted No
Active Unrouted Yes
Unrouted Inactive Yes
Unrouted Active No
Inactive Active No
Active Inactive Yes
Inactive Inactive Yes
If the time set with parameter Max circuit-breaker runtime has
elapsed, an indication is given that the maximum circuit-breaker
runtime has been exceeded.
Active Active Yes
If the time set with parameter Max circuit-breaker runtime has
elapsed, an indication is given that the circuit breaker is in a
disturbed position.
With truck-type switchgear, it is possible that the circuit breaker has pulled out of the switching element. In
this case, the auxiliary contacts must correctly replicate the open state. The means the 3-pole closed signal (if
used) must be inactive and 3-pole open (if used) must be active. You can achieve this via an external intercon-
nection of these signals, for example:
[lo_bbp-tt-cb-open, 2, en_US]
Figure 5-25 Consideration of the Switchgear Truck Pulled Out Circuit-Breaker Signal
5.3.6.5 Tripping and Breaking Information

When a trip/opening command is issued, the breaking information shown in the next figure is saved in the
fault log.
[lo_ausinf, 2, en_US]
Figure 5-26 Breaking Information

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
The following statistics information is saved for the circuit breaker:
• Number of switching cycles:

All tripping, opening, and closing operations are counted.
• Total of breaking currents, cumulative and pole-selective

The statistics information can be individually set and reset via the device control. It is also possible to reset all
values via the binary input signal >Reset switch statist..
[lo_ls_stat, 2, en_US]
Figure 5-27 Statistics Information about the Circuit Breaker
Routings for Activation of the Circuit Breaker

The next image shows the routings needed:
• The device can execute 3-pole tripping via the Busbar protection.
• The device can execute 1-pole and 3-pole tripping via the Circuit-breaker failure protection.
• The device can execute 3-pole opening via the control.
• The device can execute 3-pole closing via the control.
[lo_ls_control, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-28 Activation of the Circuit Breaker
NOTE
i You must route the Trip/open cmd. 3-pole signal for 3-pole tripping/opening for each phase to 1
binary output.
By routing the Trip/open cmd. 3-pole signal to 1 or 2 binary outputs for each phase, you can carry out 1-
pole, 1.5-pole, and 2-pole activations of the circuit breaker. You can find a detailed description of this in
chapter 7.2.2.3 Connection Variants of the Circuit Breaker.
NOTE
i Do not confuse these 1-pole, 1.5-pole, and 2-pole activations of the circuit breaker with 1-pole or 3-pole
tripping of the circuit breaker.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Routing for Analysis of the Circuit-Breaker Switch Position

For certain functions of the device, it is required to detect the circuit-breaker switch position via its auxiliary
contacts. This applies, for example, to the following functions:
• Circuit-breaker position recognition function block
• Circuit-breaker failure protection function
• End-fault protection function
• Control function block

The operating principle of the auxiliary contacts is described in the individual functions.
Depending on the application, Siemens recommends the following different interfaces for the auxiliary
contacts:
• The device performs protection functions without any control functionality.
[lo_evaluation, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-29 Recommended Analysis of the Circuit-Breaker Switch Position when Used as a Protection
Device
Route to a binary input as C_ (closed). In the following figure, routing is executed as CH, in which H stands for
active with voltage.
[sc_polges, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-30 Pole Closed: Routing for the Acquisition of Pole Closed Information
• The device performs protection and control functions.

The Circuit breaker is open in 3 poles information must also be recorded via the auxiliary
contacts to ensure optimum operation of the control functionality. The device derives the information
Circuit breaker is closed in 3 poles (for the control functionality) automatically from the 1-
pole information.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[lo_evaluation2, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-31 CB 3-Pole: Recommended Analysis of the Circuit-Breaker Switch Position when Used as a
Protection and Control Device
[lo_ausw_3p, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-32 CB 1-Pole/3-Pole: Recommended Analysis of the Circuit-Breaker Switch Position when Used as
a Protection and Control Device
Execute the routing of the Position 3-pole signal as O_ (open). In the following figure, routing is
executed as OH, in which H stands for active with voltage.
[sc_polg3p, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-33 CB 3-Pole: Routing for Acquisition of the Circuit-Breaker Switch Position via 2 Auxiliary
Contacts
[sc_poloff, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-34 CB 1-Pole/3-Pole: Routing for the Acquisition that Circuit Breaker Is Open in 3 Poles

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Depending on the design of the circuit breaker, other auxiliary contacts can be available in the system. In this
case, the device allows all routing options and acquires the necessary information automatically.
The device can also function without the analysis from the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts. Routing of auxil-
iary contacts is not absolutely required, this rather depends on the protection function used.
Parameter: Output Time
• Default setting (_:101) Output time = 0.10 s

The (_:101) Output time parameter acts on the signals for tripping, opening, and closing of the circuit
breaker.
! CAUTION
Do not set a time that is too short.
If you set a time that is too short, there is a danger that the device contacts will interrupt the control
circuit. If this happens, the device contacts will burn out.
² Set a time that is long enough to ensure that the circuit breaker reliably reaches its final position
(open or closed) after a control operation.
Parameter: Indicat. of breaking values
• Default setting (_:105) Indicat. of breaking values = always

With the Indicat. of breaking values parameter, you define whether the measured values are to be
indicated if the circuit breaker is opened via the control function.
always With this setting, the measured values are reported if the circuit breaker is
opened either via the control function or via the trip command of a protec-
tion function.
with trip With this setting, the measured values are only reported if the circuit
breaker is opened via the trip command of a protection function.
Measured Values
If a protection function trips the circuit breaker, the following measured values are stored in the fault log.
• Break.-current phs A
• Break.-current phs B
• Break.-current phs C
• Break. current 3I0/IN
• Break. voltage phs A
• Break. voltage phs B
• Break. voltage phs C
The measured value Break. current 3I0/IN is the neutral-point current.
Output Signal: Indication Suppression

For switching operations in feeders, the motion detector of the circuit breaker (fleeting contact on circuit
breaker) must not trigger an alarm.
For this, the alarm activation circuit should be looped via a suitably routed output contact of the device
(output signal Alarm suppression). In the idle state and when the device is switched off, this contact is
permanently closed. For this, an output contact with a break contact must be routed. The contact opens

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
whenever the output signal Alarm suppression becomes active so that tripping or a switching operation
does not cause an alarm (see the logic in 5.3.6.3 Acquisition of Circuit-Breaker Auxiliary Contacts and Further
Information for more details).
[lo_schalt, 2, en_US]
Figure 5-35 Circuit-Breaker Tripping Alarm Suppression
5.3.6.7 Settings

Circuit break.
_:101 Circuit break.:Output 0.02 s to 1800.00 s 0.10 s
time
_:105 Circuit break.:Indicat. of • with trip always
breaking values
• always

(Type)
Circuit break.
_:4261:500 Circuit break.:>Ready SPS I
_:4261:501 Circuit break.:>Acquisition blocking SPS I
_:4261:502 Circuit break.:>Reset switch statist. SPS I
_:4261:459 Circuit break.:Position 1-pole phsA DPC C
_:4261:460 Circuit break.:Position 1-pole phsB DPC C
_:4261:461 Circuit break.:Position 1-pole phsC DPC C
_:4261:300 Circuit break.:Trip/open cmd. 3-pole SPS O
_:4261:401 Circuit break.:Trip only pole A SPS O
_:4261:402 Circuit break.:Trip only pole B SPS O
_:4261:403 Circuit break.:Trip only pole C SPS O
_:4261:301 Circuit break.:Close command SPS O
_:4261:302 Circuit break.:Command active SPS O
_:4261:303 Circuit break.:Definitive trip SPS O
_:4261:304 Circuit break.:Alarm suppression SPS O
_:4261:407 Circuit break.:Op.ct. A INS O
_:4261:408 Circuit break.:Op.ct. B INS O
_:4261:409 Circuit break.:Op.ct. C INS O

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

(Type)
_:4261:317 Circuit break.:Tripping current 3I0/IN MV O
5.3.7 Circuit-Breaker Position Recognition for Protection-Related Auxiliary

Functions
5.3.7.1 Overview
This function block calculates the position of the circuit breaker from the evaluation of the auxiliary contacts
and the current flow. The calculation is performed phase-selectively.
This information is needed in the following protection-related additional function:
Its use is described in the respective chapters.
The control does not use this information. The control evaluates the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts.
[lo_sf-status, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-36 Overview of the Circuit-Breaker Condition Position Function
Based on the connection between the information from the auxiliary contacts and the current flow, the circuit
breaker can assume the following conditions for each phase:
Circuit-Breaker Condition, Phase-Selective Description
Open The circuit-breaker pole is detected unambiguously as
open according to both criteria.
Closed The circuit-breaker pole is detected unambiguously as
closed according to both criteria.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Circuit-Breaker Condition, Phase-Selective Description

Possibly open, possibly closed These positions can occur if the information is incom-
plete due to the routing of the auxiliary contacts and
the condition can no longer be determined reliably.
These uncertain positions are evaluated differently
by certain functions.
Opening This is a dynamically occurring position that results
when, while a trip command is active and the auxil-
iary contact is still closed, the current is detected to
have fallen below the threshold value because the
current-flow criterion takes effect faster than the
auxiliary contact can open.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
5.4 Current Transformer Function-Group Type
5.4.1 Overview
The Current-transformer function group represents the physical current transformer in the SIPROTEC 5 device
together with the measuring point.
You can find the Bay under device type 7SS85 in the Global DIGSI 5 library, and the Current-transformer
function group below that.
[sc_bbp-fgct01, 2, en_US]
Figure 5-37 Current-Transformer Function Group – Functional Scope for Device Type 7SS85
The Current transformer function group contains certain functionalities that are essential for general
purposes and therefore cannot be loaded or deleted:
• General data
The following figure shows the structure of the Current transformer function group.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[dw_fg_ct_01, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-38 Structure of the Current-Transformer Function Group
The Current transformer function group has interfaces to:
• The measuring points (measured values from the measuring points)

From version V7.84 on, you can find the expanded overcurrent protection functions, for example directional
overcurrent protection, in the Global DIGSI 5 Library under Busbar protection > 7SS85 busbar protection >
Bay > FG Voltage/current 3ph > Current protection. Thus, in case of high processor load, you have a larger
variety of functions. For further information on monitoring resource consumption, refer to chapter 8.2.1 Load
Model.

The Current transformer function group obtains the necessary bay-current values via the interface with the
measuring points:
The measurands from the 3-phase current system are supplied via this interface.
NOTE
i The Current transformer function group must always be connected to this measuring point. The configu-
ration is done via the Function-group connections Editor or in the Single-Line Editor in DIGSI 5.
You can find more detailed information on this in the chapter 2.1 Function Embedding in the Device .
If a user function is used in the function group but the required measuring point is not connected to it,
DIGSI 5 reports an inconsistency. This inconsistency provides an indication of the missing measuring-point
connection.

To fulfill the protection task under different operating states of the protected object, the position of the
current transformer is important. The position of the current transformer in the different bays is automatically
determined from the configuration in the Single-Line Editor and processed in the protection.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[sc_ctloca, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-39 Current Transformer Possible Positions
• BE1: Current transformer internal, busbar side

The installation location of the current transformer is between the busbar disconnector QB1 and the
circuit breaker.
• BE2: Current transformer internal, line side

The installation location of the current transformer is before the line disconnector, that is, between the
circuit breaker and the line disconnector QB9.
• BE3: Current transformer external

The installation location of the current transformer is in the direction of the line behind the line discon-
nector QB9.
The designation current transformer internal/current transformer external is based on the transfer busbar.

(Type)
General

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

(Type)

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
5.5 Disconnector Function-Group Type
5.5.1 Overview
The Disconnector function group represents the physical disconnector in the SIPROTEC 5 device. The function
group detects the position of a disconnector and indicates its current position.
You will find the Bay proxy function group, and the Disconnector function group below that, under the
device type 7SS85 in the Global DIGSI 5 library. The Disconnector function group contains all switching and
supervision functions you can use for this device type.
[sc_fgdisc, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-40 Disconnector Function Group – Functional Scope for Device Type 7SS85
Various disconnectors are used in switchgear:
• Busbar disconnector
• Transfer-busbar disconnector
• Busbar-section disconnector
• Line disconnector
• Load breaking switches in a bus coupler

The DIGSI 5 system engineering system recognizes the different disconnector types automatically.
NOTE
i The Disconnector function group processes only disconnectors without activation (only the current posi-
tion). This also applies to representatives with distributed busbar protection.
For the merging units, you can use the correspondingly available disconnectors.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Besides the user functions, the Disconnector function group contains certain functionalities that are essential
for general purposes and therefore cannot be loaded or deleted:
• General data
• Representation of the physical disconnector
• Monitoring
Figure 5-41 Structure of the Disconnector Function Group
In IEC 61850, the disconnector corresponds to the Logical Node XSWI.

The Disconnector function group has interfaces with:

Additional Settings of Disconnector Switching Element
Properties Function Can Be Found in the Information

Routing in the Dialog Properties
Software filtering time Software filtering time for position Position of the Disconnector func-
detection tion block
Retrigger filter (yes/no) Switching retriggering of the Position of the Disconnector func-
filtering time on/off by changing tion block
the position
Message time before Consideration of the hardware Position of the Disconnector func-
filtering (yes/no) filtering time for position-detection tion block
time stamp
Disturbed position Suppression of the disturbed posi- Position of the Disconnector func-
suppression (yes/no) tion tion block
Chatter blocking (yes/no) Switching chatter blocking on/off Position of the Disconnector func-
tion block
Chatter-blocking parameters:
Number of permissible Chatter-blocking setting value: Device settings (to be found under
state changes Once for the entire device Settings)
Chatter test time
Number of chatter tests
Chatter dead time
Chatter test time

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Parameter: Transfer bus disconnector
• Default setting (_:2311:101) Transfer bus disconnector = no

This parameter only exists in a bus coupler.
Using the parameter Transfer bus disconnector, you set whether the current of a transformer flows in
the check zone.
The setting no means that the transformer current does not flow into the check zone.
The setting yes means that the transformer current flows into the check zone when the disconnector is closed
and either no feeders or only feeders with internal transformers are connected to the assigned transfer
busbar.
You can find more information for operation of a transfer busbar in chapter 4.5.4 Transfer Busbars.
Parameter: Switching-device type
• Default setting (_:5401:101) Switching-device type = disconnector
NOTE
i The parameter Switching-device type is effective only on the IEC 61850 interface. Use this param-
eter to set the disconnector type for communication via an IEC 61850 interface. This is a required data
object in the IEC 61850 Standard and has no effect on the functionality of the busbar protection.
Figure 5-42 Logical Inputs and Outputs of the Disconnector Function Block
Table 5-2 Inputs of the Disconnector Function Block
Signal Name Description Type Value if Signal

Quality = Invalid
>Acquisition The binary input activates acquisition blocking. You SPS Unchanged
blocking can also set this binary input with an external toggle
switch.
Position The binary input Position can be used to read the DPC Unchanged
disconnector position with double-point indication.
If the quality of the input signal assumes the status Quality = invalid, then the standby status (Health) of the
Disconnector function block is set to Warning.
The feedback is routed via the position with the disconnector.
You can find more detailed information on the disconnector supervision function in the chapter Supervision
Functions.
NOTE
i Siemens recommends always using 2 binary inputs for determining the position of a disconnector.
If there is only one binary input available, the auxiliary contact with OH (open/active with voltage) should
be used for the routing.
If none or only the On position is routed, the health state of the device switches to Warning and is
handled as closed in the disconnector image.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
5.5.4 Parameter

General
_:2311:101 General:Transfer bus • no no
disconnector
• yes
Disconnector
_:5401:101 Disconnector:Switching- • switch-disconnector disconnector
device type
• disconnector
• grounding switch
• fast grounding switch

(Type)
Disconnector
_:5401:500 Disconnector:>Acquisition blocking SPS I
_:5401:53 Disconnector:Health ENS O
_:5401:58 Disconnector:Position DPC C
Supervision
_:12631:301 Supervision:Disc. runtime exceeded SPS O
_:12631:302 Supervision:Disc. disturbance SPS O
_:12631:304 Supervision:Off contact n.routed SPS O

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
5.6 Function-Group Type Voltage 3-Phase
5.6.1 Overview
In the Voltage 3-phase function group, all functions can be used for protecting and for monitoring a
protected object or equipment which allows a 3-phase voltage measurement. The function group also
contains the operational measurement for the protected object or equipment (on this topic, see chapter
9 Measured Values and Supervision of the Primary System). Applicable functions are, for example, Voltage
protection or Frequency protection.
[sc_bbp_fg_u_01_de, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-43 Voltage 3-Phase Function Group – Functional Scope for Device Type 7SS85
5.6.2 Scope of Application
If you wish to use a busbar protection-related voltage protection function such as Release of tripping by
undervoltage protection, use the protection functions of the Voltage 3-phase function-group type.
The Voltage 3-phase function group has interfaces to the measuring points and the Circuit-breaker function
group.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[dw_bbp-3volt, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-44 Structure of the Voltage 3-Phase Function Group

You connect the Voltage 3-phase function group to the voltage measuring points via the interface to the
measuring points. This assignment can only be made in DIGSI via Project tree → Function group connec-
tions. To connect the interfaces, set a cross at the intersection between the row and column in the matrix.
[sc_3_voltage1, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-45 Connecting Measuring Points to the Voltage 3-Phase Function Group
If you add functions to the Voltage 3-phase function group, these are connected to the measuring point auto-
matically.
You can connect multiple measuring points with this interface. For more information, refer to chapter
6.23 Voltage Measuring-Point Selection.
The measurands from the 3-phase voltage system are supplied via the V 3-ph interface. Depending on the
connection type of the transformers, for example, VA, VB, VC, Vgnd. All values that can be calculated from the
measurands are also provided via this interface.
Operational Measured Values

The operational measured values are always present in the Voltage 3-phase function group and cannot be
deleted.
The following table shows the operational measured values of the Voltage 3-phase function group:
Table 5-3 Operational Measured Values of the Voltage 3-Phase Function Group
Measured Values Primary Secondary % with respect to

VA, VB, VC Phase-to-ground voltages kV V Operating rated voltage of primary
values/√3
VAB, VBC, VCA Phase-to-phase voltage kV V Rated operating voltage of the
primary values
V0 Zero-sequence voltage kV V Operating rated voltage of primary
values/√3
VNG Neutral-point displacement kV V Operating rated voltage of primary
voltage values/√3
f Frequency Hz Hz Rated frequency

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
NOTE
i If you intend to send an OFF signal of a voltage function directly to a circuit breaker, use the Function
group connections Editor to connect the respective circuit breaker with the function group Voltage 3-
phase. Then route the stages of the voltage function directly to the circuit breaker in the circuit-breaker
interaction of the FG Voltage 3-phase.
Parameter: Rated voltage
• Default setting (_:9421:102) Rated voltage = 400.00 kV

With the Rated voltage parameter, you set the primary rated voltage. The parameter Rated voltage set
here is the reference value for the percentage-measured values and setting values made in percentages.
5.6.5 Settings

Rated values

(Type)
General
Group indicat.
_:4501:55 Group indicat.:Pickup ACD O
RDT

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
5.7 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 3-Phase
5.7.1 Overview
In the Voltage-current 3-phase function group, you can use all the functions for protection and supervision
of a protected object or equipment that allows 3-phase current and voltage measurement. The function group
also contains the operational measurement for the protected object or equipment.
You will find the Voltage-current 3-phase function group under each device type in the Global DIGSI 5 library.
You will find all protection and supervision functions that you can use for this function-group type in the func-
tion group Voltage-current 3-phase.
For more information about the embedding of the functions in the device, refer to chapter 2 Basic Structure of
the Function.
5.7.2 Scope of Application
If you wish to use expanded backup protection functions such as directional overcurrent protection or impe-
dance protection etc. in the bay, use the protection functions of the Voltage/current 3-ph function-group
type.
The following additional protection functions are available to you in the FG VI
• Directional overcurrent protection, phases and ground
• Impedance protection
• Arc protection
• Inrush-current detection
NOTE
i Keep in mind that, when using resource-intensive functions such as the VI 3ph function group, for example
with impedance protection, the maximum possible number of line sections is reduced to 10. You can find
further information on monitoring resource consumption in chapter 8.2.1 Load Model.
The function group always contains the following blocks:
• Protected object/equipment data (FB General)
• Operational measured values
• Process monitor
• Output logic of the function group
• Reset the LED group

These blocks are essential for the function group under all circumstances, so they cannot be loaded or deleted.
You can load the protection and supervision functions required for your application in the function group. The
functions are available in the function library in DIGSI 5. Functions that are not needed can be deleted from
the function group.
The following figure shows the structure of the function group Voltage-current 3-phase:

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[dw_fg_ui3p, 4, en_US]
Figure 5-46 Structure of the Voltage-Current 3-Phase Function Group
The function group has interfaces with:
• Measuring points
• Function group Circuit breaker

The function group receives the required measured values via its interfaces with the measuring points. If you
are using an application template, the function group is already connected to the necessary measuring points.
If you add functions to the function group, they will automatically receive the measured values from the
correct measuring points. If you add protection functions to the function group but the necessary measuring
point is not connected, DIGSI 5 reports an inconsistency. Configure the measuring points in DIGSI 5 via the
Function-group connections Editor. For more detailed information, refer to 2 Basic Structure of the Function.
The function group has the following interfaces with the measuring points:
• 3-phase current
The measurands from the 3-phase current system are supplied via this interface. Depending on the
connection type of the transformers, these are, for example, IA, IB, IC, IN or 3I0. All values that can be
calculated from the measurands are also provided via this interface. The function group must always be
connected to the I-3ph measuring point.
You can connect the 3-phase current interface to a maximum of four 3-phase current measuring points,
(for example, for 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layouts). If 2 current measuring points have been connected with
the 3-phase current interface, the total current is also determined from measured values from both
measuring points in the function group. All functions in the function group have access to these values.
• 3-phase voltage (optional)

The measurands from the 3-phase voltage system are supplied via this interface. There are various types
of transformer connections possible. All values that can be calculated from the measurands are also
provided via this interface. Connecting the function group to the V-3ph measuring point is optional.
You can connect multiple measuring points with this interface. For more information, refer to
6.23 Voltage Measuring-Point Selection.
If you want to test or change the connection between the voltages and the V-3ph measuring point,
double-click in the DIGSI 5 project tree → (Name of the device) > Measuring point routing (Connection
type = 3 phase-to-ground voltage). For more information, refer to the description of the power-system
data starting with 5.10 Power-System Data.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Interface to the Circuit-Breaker Function Group

All required data are exchanged between the function groups Voltage-current 3-phase and Circuit breaker
via the interface of the Circuit-breaker function group.
This data includes, for example, the pickup and operate indications of the protection functions sent in the
direction of the Circuit-breaker function group and, for example, the circuit-breaker position information in
the direction of the protection function groups.
The Voltage-current 3-phase function group is connected to one or more Circuit-breaker function groups.
This connection generally determines:
• Which circuit breaker(s) is/are activated by the protection functions of the protection function group
• Starting the Circuit-breaker failure protection function (if available in the Circuit-breaker function group)
through the protection functions of the connected protection function group
• Starting the Automatic reclosing function (AREC, if available in the Circuit-breaker function group)
through the protection functions of the connected Protection function group
Besides the general allocation of the protection function group to the Circuit-breaker function groups, you can
also configure the interface for certain functionalities in detail. Configure the details in DIGSI 5 using the
Circuit-breaker interaction Editor in the protection function group.
In the detail configuration of the interface, you define:
• Which operate indications of the protection functions go into the generation of the trip command
• Which protection functions start the Automatic reclosing function
• Which protection functions start the Circuit-breaker failure protection function

If you are using an application template, the function groups are already connected to each other, because
this connection is absolutely essential to ensure proper operation. You can modify the connection in DIGSI 5
via the Function-group connections Editor.
Protected Object/Equipment Data (FB General)

The rated voltage and rated current as well as the neutral-point treatment of the protected object or the
equipment are defined here. These data apply to all functions in the Voltage-current 3-phase function group.
Resetting the LED Group

Using the Reset the LED group function, you can reset the stored LEDs of the functions in one specific func-
tion group while the activated, stored LEDs of other functions in other function groups remain activated.
For more detailed information, refer to 3.1.10 Resetting Stored Indications of the Function Group .
Process Monitor
The process monitor is always present in the Voltage-current 3-phase function group and cannot be
removed.
The process monitor provides the following information in the Voltage-current 3-phase function group:
• Current-flow criterion:
Detection of an open/activated protected object/equipment based on the flow of leakage current
• Closure detection:
Detection of the switching on of the protected object/equipment
• Cold-load pickup detection (optional, only for protection devices):

This information applies to all functions available in the Voltage-current 3-phase function group.
The description of the process monitor begins with 5.7.8 Process Monitor.
Operational Measured Values

The operational measured values are always present in the Voltage-current 3-phase function group and
cannot be deleted.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
The following table shows the operational measured values of the Voltage-current 3-phase function group:
Table 5-4 Operational Measured Values of the Voltage-Current 3-Phase Function Group
Measured Values Primary Secon- % Referenced to

dary
IA, IB, IC Phase currents A A Rated operating current of the primary values
3I0 Calculated zero-sequence A A Rated operating current of the primary values
current
IN Neutral-point phase current A A Rated operating current of the primary values
INS Sensitive ground current A mA Rated operating current of the primary values
VA, VB, VC Phase-to-ground voltages kV V Rated operating voltage of the primary values/
√3
VAB, VBC, VCA Phase-to-phase voltages kV V Rated operating voltage of the primary values
V0 Zero-sequence voltage kV V Rated operating voltage of the primary values/
√3
VNG Neutral-point displacement kV V Rated operating voltage of the primary values/
voltage √3
f Frequency Hz Hz Rated frequency
Ptotal Active power MW W Active power of the primary values
(total power) √3 · Vrated · Irated
Qtotal Reactive power Mvar var Reactive power of the primary values
Stotal Apparent power MVA VA Apparent power of the primary values
Cos φ Active factor (abs) (abs) 100 % corresponds to cos φ = 1
PA, PB, PC Phase-related active power MW W Active power of the phase
Vrated phsx · Irated phsx
QA, QB, QC Phase-related reactive power Mvar var Reactive power of the phase
Vrated phsx · Irated phsx
SA, SB, SC Phase-related apparent MVA VA Apparent power of the phase
power Vrated phsx · Irated phsx
For a more detailed explanation of the operational measured values, refer to 9.3 Operational Measured
Values.
Output Logic
The output logic treats the pickup and trip signals of the protection and supervision functions that are avail-
able in the function group separately, in a pickup logic and a trip logic, respectively. The pickup and trip logic
generate the overreaching indications (group indications) of the function group. These group indications are
transferred via the Protection information interface to the Circuit-breaker function group and are processed
further there.
The pickup signals of the protection and supervision functions in the Voltage-current 3-phase function group
are combined in a phase-selective manner and output as a group indication.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[lo_anrlin, 3, en_US]
Figure 5-47 Creation of the Pickup Indication of the Voltage-Current 3-Phase Function Group
The trip signals from the protection and supervision functions of the Voltage-current 3-phase function group
always result in 3-pole tripping of the device.
[lo_auslin, 3, en_US]
Figure 5-48 Creation of the Operate Indication of the Voltage-Current 3-Phase Function Group
Interface to the Circuit-Breaker Function Group

With this, you define which circuit breaker(s) is/are affected by the protection functions of the Protection func-
tion group. A feasible default setting has already been provided in the application templates. You can find
more information in chapter 2.
Protected Object/Equipment Data (FB General)

The set data applies to all functions in the function group.
Set the protected object/equipment data for your specific application.
Parameter: Rated current
• Default setting (_:9451:101) Rated current = 1000 A

With the Rated current parameter, you can set the primary rated current of the protected object or equip-
ment. The Rated current parameter is significant for protection functions if current values are set in
percentages. In this case it is the reference value. In addition it is the reference value for the measured values
in percent.
If the device works with the IEC 61850 protocol, then you change only the setting value of the parameter via
DIGSI 5 and not directly on the device. If you change the setting value directly on the device, then the
Parameter: Rated voltage
• Default setting (_:9451:102) Rated voltage = 400.00 kV

With the Rated voltage parameter, you can set the primary rated voltage of the protected object or equip-
ment. The Rated voltage parameter is significant for protection functions if current values are set in
percentages. In this case it is the reference value. In addition it is the reference value for the measured values
in percent.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
If the device works with the IEC 61850 protocol, then you change only the setting value of the parameter via
DIGSI 5 and not directly on the device. If you change the setting value directly on the device, then the
Parameter: Power-sys. neutral point
• Default setting (_:9451:149) Power-sys. neutral point = grounded

With the Power-sys. neutral point parameter, you specify whether the system neutral is grounded,
isolated or suppress. coil grounded (grounded via arc-suppression coil). Currently, the parameter
does not affect any protection function; only if the Automatic reclosing function uses the voltage measure-
ment.
5.7.5 Write-Protected Settings
Parameter: Rated apparent power
• Default setting (_:103) Rated apparent power = 692.82 MVA

With the Rated apparent power parameter, you can set the primary rated apparent power for the auto
transformer to be protected. The Rated apparent power parameter is relevant for the main protection
function of the device. The Rated apparent power set here is the reference value for the percentage-
measured values and setting values made in percentages.
NOTE
i If the device works with the IEC 61850 protocol, then you change the setting value of the parameter only
via DIGSI 5 and not directly on the device. If you change the setting value directly on the device, then the
The settings listed here are used primarily for understanding during configuration of the function groups. They
are calculated on the basis of other settings and cannot be directly changed.
Addr. Parameters C Range of Values Default Setting
Network data
_:103 General:rated apparent power 0.20 MVA to 5 000.00 MVA 692.82 MVA
NOTE
i For more detailed information on the process monitor, refer to 5.7.8 Process Monitor.
5.7.6 Settings

Rated values
_:9451:101 General:Rated current 1.00 A to 100000.00 A 1000.00 A
Power-system data
_:9451:149 General:Power-sys. • grounded grounded
neutral point
• suppress. coil grounded
• isolated
Measurements
_:9451:158 General:P, Q sign • not reversed not reversed
• reversed

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

(Type)
General
Group indicat.
Reset LED Group
Closure detec.
_:1131:4681:500 Closure detec.:>Disconnector open SPS I
_:1131:4681:300 Closure detec.:Closure SPS O
5.7.8 Process Monitor

All function groups that have functions with dependencies on the state of the protected object contain a
process monitor. The process monitor detects the current state of the protected object.

The Process monitor function is used in the Standard V/I 3-phase protection function group.
The Process monitor function is provided by the manufacturer with the following function blocks:
• Cold-load pickup detection (optional)
• Current-flow criterion
• Circuit-breaker condition
• Closure detection
[dw_pro3pt, 2, en_US]
Figure 5-49 Structure/Embedding of the Function
You can activate the cold-load pickup detection as needed. All other stages of the process monitor run perma-
nently in the background and are not displayed in DIGSI.
The following figure shows the relationships of the individual function blocks.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[lo_pro_3pt, 2, en_US]
Figure 5-50 Logic Diagram of the Overall Function Process Monitor
5.7.8.3 Current-Flow Criterion
Logic
[lo_proikr, 2, en_US]
Figure 5-51 Logic Diagram of the Current-Flow Criterion Function Block
The phase currents are provided via the interface to the protection function group.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
The I open signal of one phase is generated if one of the following conditions is met:
• A phase current falls below the set threshold of the Current thresh. CB open parameter. The
hysteresis stabilizes the signal.
• The corresponding phase current, for example, I A, falls below 10 % of the phase current when the trip
command arrives. If the current does not drop until after a delay due to current transformer influences,
an open pole can therefore be detected quickly even after a high-current fault on the line.
With the Current thresh. CB open parameter, you define the minimum current as the criterion for a
deactivated line. The parameter lies in the Circuit-breaker function group. It acts both in the Circuit-breaker
function group, for example circuit-breaker position recognition, and also for the process monitor in the
protection function group.
If a protection function group with integrated process monitor is connected to several Circuit breaker FGs,
the Current thresh. CB open parameter is present in each FG Circuit breaker. The smallest setting
value of the parameter Current thresh. CB open is used.
5.7.8.4 Application and Setting Notes (Current-Flow Criterion)
Parameter: Current thresh. CB open
• Recommended setting value (_:2311:112) Current thresh. CB open = 0.100 A

The Current thresh. CB open parameter is used to define the threshold for the leakage current as the
criterion for a deactivated line.
Set the Current thresh. CB open parameter so that the current measured when the feeder is deacti-
vated falls below the value of the Current thresh. CB open parameter with certainty. The hysteresis is
additionally active if the threshold is exceeded.
If parasitic currents, for example, due to induction, are ruled out when the feeder is deactivated, set the
Current thresh. CB open parameter sensitively.
Siemens recommends a setting value of 0.100 A.
5.7.8.5 Circuit-Breaker Condition for the Protected Object
Logic
[lo_prolsz, 2, en_US]
Figure 5-52 Logic Diagram of the Circuit-Breaker Condition for the Protected-Object Function Block
The circuit-breaker position recognition in the Circuit-breaker (CB) function group provides the circuit-breaker
condition by way of the internal signal CB pos. recogn. prot. obj..
If a protected object is supplied via 2 circuit breakers (CBs), for example with the 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layout,
then the circuit-breaker switch position of the protected object must be determined with the aid of both circuit
breakers. In this case, the Circuit-breaker position recognition for the protected object function block
connects the individual CB states. The connection provides the internal CB pos. recogn. prot. obj.
signal to the other function blocks of the process monitor and to other functions, for example, Trip in the
event of weak infeed and Echo function for teleprotection method, within the same function group.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
If one of the following 2 conditions is met, the CB pos. recogn. prot. obj. signal is in the Open state:
• All connected circuit breakers signal the Open state internally.
• The >Disconnector open input is active.

If the following 2 conditions are met, the CB pos. recogn. prot. obj. signal is in the Closed state:
• At least one of the connected circuit breakers signals the Closed state internally.
• The >Disconnector open input is not active.
5.7.8.6 Closure Detection

The closure detection enables the immediate tripping of selected protection functions or protection stages
when switching to a short circuit or the reduction of the responsivity. The closure detection determines
whether the protected object is switched on.
Logic
[lo_ein_6md, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-53 Logic Diagram of Closure Detection
For an applied binary input signal (_:6541:300) Detected (from function block Manual close), the indica-
tion (_:4681:300) Closure is active.
5.7.8.7 Application and Setting Notes (Closure Detection)
Parameter: Operating mode
• Default setting (_:4681:101) Operating mode=Manual close only

With the Operating mode parameter, you set the criteria with which the Closure-detection function block
operates.
Manual close only The detection of feeder closure is exclusively decided using the binary input
signal Detected (from Manual close function block).
Siemens recommends this setting, if both of the following conditions are
met:
• The binary input signal Manual On is available on the side of the

system.
• A closure detection must not happen due to an additional current and
voltage measurement, for example, after an automatic reclosing.
Iopen,Vopen,ManCl The closure detection is done additionally with the current and voltage
measurement.
If the voltage transformers are installed at the busbar side or if there is no
voltage connected, you must not use this setting.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

CB, Iopen, ManCl The closure detection is done additionally with the current measurement
and with the evaluation of connected circuit breaker position contacts.
Iopen, ManCl The closure detection is done additionally with the current measurement.
For this setting, make sure that the Current thresh. CB open param-
eter is set lower than the lowest possible load current. If this is not ensured,
open-circuit is detected continuously and each current value that exceeds
the Current thresh. CB open parameter is interpreted as closure.
Parameter: Min. time feeder open
• Recommended setting value (_:4681:103) Min. time feeder open = 0.25 s

To avoid incorrect closure detection, the protected object must be switched off for the minimum time of Min.
time feeder open before the Closure indication can become active. You define the duration of the
release delay with the Min. time feeder open parameter.
Siemens recommends a setting value of 0.25 s.
Parameter: Action time after closure
• Recommended setting value (_:4681:102) Action time after closure = 0.05 s

The Closure indication signals detected closure. With the Action time after closure parameter, you
set the Closure indication to a defined length.
Siemens recommends a setting value of 0.05 s.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
5.7.8.8 Cold-Load Pickup Detection (Optional)
Logic
[lo_pro_cls, 2, en_US]
Figure 5-54 Logic Diagram of the Cold-Load Pickup Detection Function Block
The Cold-load pickup detection function block detects that a specific time has been exceeded after deactiva-
tion of the line or protected object. If you want to connect the protected object again, you must note that an
increased load-current requirement exists for a limited time after connection. This results from the nature of
the load.
The Cold-load pickup detection function block ensures that different parameters are used for an adjustable
time after connection. For example, for the time of the Min. CB-open time parameter, you can increase
the threshold value of a protection function or you can select a special characteristic curve.
If the Cold-load pickup detection function block detects an open feeder and the set time of the Min. CB-
open time parameter has expired, the indication >Activate cold-load is generated.
With the >Activate cold-load indication, you can activate a parameter set of the Cold-load pickup func-
tion. Via the binary input signal >Activate cold-load, you can also activate the >Activate cold-load
indication directly.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
If the Cold-load pickup detection function block detects closure and the corresponding load current, it starts
the time set in the Dropout delay CB closed parameter. The >Activate cold-load indication and
the activated parameter set are deactivated after this time has elapsed.
If, for the time set in the Dropout delay curr.crit. parameter, the maximum phase current falls below
the threshold value Dropout threshold current, the parameter set for the Cold-load pickup detection
function block is also deactivated. As a result, if the load current is very low, the action time Dropout delay
curr.crit. of the >Activate cold-load indication can be shortened.
5.7.8.9 Application and Setting Notes (Cold-Load Pickup Detection)
NOTE
i The settings and indications described in this chapter are only available when using the optional Cold-load
pickup detection function block.
• Default setting (_:101) Operating mode = I open

With the Operating mode parameter, you set the criteria with which the Closure-detection function block
operates.
I open When the Current-flow criterion function block detects a clearing open
condition, the decision is made for pickup. For this setting, make sure that
the Current thresh. CB open parameter is set lower than the
possible load current. If this is not the case, open is detected continuously
and each fault current that exceeds the Current thresh. CB open
parameter is interpreted as closure.
CB and I open Closure is detected if one of the following conditions is met:
• Analysis of the circuit-breaker auxiliary contact detects a clearing open

condition in at least one phase.
• The current-flow criterion detects a clearing open condition.
Parameter: Dropout threshold current
• Default setting (_:102) Dropout threshold current = 1.00 A

With the Dropout threshold current parameter, you set the threshold at which the output signal
Cold-load pickup is deactivated when the current in at least one phase falls below this threshold.
Parameter: Dropout delay current criterion
• Default setting (_:103) Dropout delay curr.crit. = 600 s

With the Dropout delay curr.crit. parameter, you set the time for which the actual value must be
below the Dropout threshold current threshold so that the output signal Cold-load pickup can be
deactivated prematurely.
Parameter: Dropout delay CB closed
• Default setting (_:104) Dropout delay CB closed = 3600 s

With the Dropout delay CB closed parameter, you set the action time for the dynamic parameter set
switching in the event of cold-load pickup detection.
Parameter: Min. CB open time
• Default setting (_:105) Min. CB-open time = 3600 s

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
With the Min. CB-open time parameter, you set the time after which the dynamic parameter set is acti-
vated in the event of cold-load pickup when the line is opened.
5.7.8.10 Settings

Cold-load PU
_:1 Cold-load PU:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:101 Cold-load PU:Operating • I open I open
mode
• CB and I open
_:102 Cold-load PU:Dropout 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 1.000 A
threshold current 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 5.00 A
_:103 Cold-load PU:Dropout 1 s to 600 s 600 s
delay curr.crit.
_:104 Cold-load PU:Dropout 1 s to 21600 s 3600 s
delay CB closed
_:105 Cold-load PU:Min. CB- 0 s to 21600 s 3600 s
open time

(Type)
Cold-load PU
_:81 Cold-load PU:>Block stage SPS I
_:500 Cold-load PU:>Block fast dropout SPS I
_:501 Cold-load PU:>Activate cold-load SPS I
_:54 Cold-load PU:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Cold-load PU:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Cold-load PU:Health ENS O
_:300 Cold-load PU:Cold-load pickup SPS O

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
5.8 Function-Group Type Analog Units
5.8 Function-Group Type Analog Units
5.8.1 Overview
You can find a detailed description of the function group Analog units in the device manual Distance protec-
tion, line differential protection and switch management for 1-pole and 3-pole tripping 7SA87, 7SD87, 7SL87,
7VK87.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
5.9 Function-Group Recording
5.9.1 Overview
The device has a flash memory in which records can be saved. The recording documents operations within the
power system and how devices respond to them. You can read out records from the device and analyze them.
Depending on the recorder, the records are available in different file formats (see the following table).
Table 5-5 File Format Used by Individual Recorders
Interface File Format FR16 SSR17 CR18 TR19

DIGSI 5 SIPROTEC 5 X X X X
IEC 61850 SIPROTEC 5 – X – –
IEC 61850 COMTRADE 1999 or COMTRADE 2013 X X – –
IEC 61850 PQDIF – – X X
Browser-based user interface SIPROTEC 5 – X – –
Browser-based user interface COMTRADE 1999 or COMTRADE 2013 X X – –
Browser-based user interface PQDIF – – X X
T103 FRC X – – –
T103 COMTRADE 1999 or COMTRADE 2013 X – – –
T104 COMTRADE 1999 or COMTRADE 2013 X – – –
DNP COMTRADE 1999 or COMTRADE 2013 X – – –
The Recording function group consists of the following functionalities:
• General function block
• Fault recorder function
• Slow-scan recorder function
• Continuous recorder function
• Trend recorder function

The following figure shows the structure of the Recording function group. The function blocks are described
in the following chapters.
16 FR: Fault recorder

17 SSR: Slow-scan recorder
18 CR: Continuous recorder
19 TR: Trend recorder

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[dw_fg_recorder, 4, en_US]
Figure 5-55 Structure of the Recording Function Group
NOTE
i If you want to use one of the following functions, the device must be equipped with the CP300 CPU printed
circuit board assembly:
• Slow-scan recorder
• Continuous recorder
• Trend recorder
The Recording function group is a central device function. Both the recording criterion and the measured-
value and binary channels to be recorded are functionally preconfigured through the application templates.
You can individually adapt the configuration in DIGSI 5.
For more information on the Fault recorder function, refer to Fault Recording, starting at 3.5.1 Overview of
Functions .
For more information on the Recording function group, refer to the Manual for the Recording function group
(C53000-H5040-C089).

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
5.10 Power-System Data
5.10.1 Overview
The Power-system data are provided with each SIPROTEC 5 device and cannot be deleted. You will find them
in DIGSI 5 under Parameter → Power-system data.
The Power-system data function group (FG Power-system data) groups the user functions related to current
transformers and voltage transformers. Together with the measuring points created in the SIPROTEC 5 device,
the Power-system data represent the physical current transformer.
NOTE
i The FG Power-system data is automatically generated when creating a protection device.
The FG Power-system data only processes 3-phase measuring points with ground current (IN) in the busbar
protection device. The configuration is done using the Measured-value editor in DIGSI 5.
You can find more detailed information on this in chapter 2.1 Function Embedding in the Device
If the connection is missing, DIGSI 5 reports an inconsistency. This inconsistency provides an indication of the
missing phase routing or summation-current routing.
You can find further information on the Power-system data in chapter 6.1.2 Structure of the Power-System
Data.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
6 Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data 390

6.2 Busbar Differential Protection 402
6.3 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection (1-Pole/3-Pole) 427
6.4 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection (3-Pole) 451
6.5 Inherent Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection 473
6.6 End-Fault Protection in Busbar Protection 481
6.7 External Tripping Busbar Section (Direct) 488
6.8 External Tripping Busbar Section (from Bay) 494
6.9 Bus Coupler Differential Protection 498
6.10 Overcurrent Protection, Phases 504
6.11 Overcurrent Protection, Ground 514
6.12 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases 523
6.13 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground 538
6.14 Group Indications of Overcurrent Protection Functions 550
6.15 Negative-Sequence Protection 552
6.16 Voltage Protection 553
6.17 Frequency Protection 623
6.18 Impedance Protection 640
6.19 Arc Protection 657
6.20 Inrush-Current and 2nd Harmonic Detection 677
6.21 Temperature Supervision 687
6.22 Voltage-Jump Detection 688
6.23 Voltage Measuring-Point Selection 692

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1.1 Overview
The Power-system data are provided with each SIPROTEC 5 device and cannot be deleted. You will find them
in DIGSI under Parameter → Power-system data.
6.1.2 Structure of the Power-System Data
The Power-system data contain the block General and the Measuring points of the device. The following
figure shows the structure of the Power-system data:
[dw_power_7ke, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-1 Structure of the Power-System Data
In order to adjust its functions to the application, the device requires some data about the power system. The
necessary settings can be found in the Power-system data under General as well as in the Measuring points.
The busbar protection uses the Current 3-phase (Measuring point I 3-ph) and the Voltage 3-phase (Meas-
uring point V 3-ph) measuring points.
The measuring points have interfaces to the following function groups:
• Current transformer
• Voltage transformer
• Circuit breaker
6.1.3 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring-Point Current 3-Phase (I-3ph)
The following example of the Measuring-point current I-3ph (current 3-phase) describes the settings for the
current measuring points. The supervision function settings are also located in the current measuring point.
You can find the description of these settings in the chapter Supervision Functions.
Parameter: CT connection
• Default setting (_:8881:115) CT connection = 3-phase + IN

The parameter CT connection shows the connection type of the current transformers for the 3-phase
current measuring point. You can find the parameter in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name of the device →
Parameter → Power-system data → Measuring point I 3-phase. You cannot change the connection type of
the current transformer in the power-system data.
In the measuring point routing in DIGSI 5 under Name of the device → Measuring point routing → Current
measuring points, the connection type 3-phase + IN is set under Connection type.
The measured values must be routed to the terminals of the current measuring point in the Measuring point
routing.
You can find the support on selecting of the connection type in chapter A.6 Connection Examples for Current
Transformers.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Parameter: Tracking
• Default setting (_:8881:127) Tracking = active

With the Tracking parameter, you specify whether you would like to work with the sampling-frequency
tracking function.
active If the parameter Tracking = active has been set, the measuring point is
included when determining the sampling frequency. If possible, only the 3-
phase measuring points shall be considered.
Siemens recommends using the default setting.
Note: If the parameter is Tracking = active, the determined sampling
frequency applies to all functions in the device that do not use fixed
sampling rates.
inactive If the channels of the measuring point are not to be considered for deter-
mining the sampling frequency, select the setting value inactive.
NOTE
i To prevent unwanted frequency deviations for low-current feeders, switch off the sampling-frequency
tracking function.
Parameter: Rated primary current
• Default setting (_:8881:101) Rated primary current = 1000 A

With the Rated primary current parameter, you set the rated primary current of the current transformer.
The setting value is adopted as the default setting for the circuit breaker. If required due to the conditions in
the plant, you can change the value for the circuit breaker in the function group Circuit breaker.
Parameter: Rated secondary current
• Default setting (_:8881:102) Rated secondary current = 1 A

With the Rated secondary current parameter, you set the active rated secondary current of the current
transformer.
Parameter: Magnitude correction
• Default setting (_:3844:103) Magnitude correction = 1.000

With the Magnitude correction parameter, you adjust the magnitude (magnitude correction) for the
current input. This allows you to correct the tolerances of the primary transformer. The magnitude correction
may be required for highly precise measurements. Determine the setting value with a comparative measure-
ment. If a primary correction is not necessary, retain the default setting.
6.1.4 Operating State: Measuring Point for Distributed Busbar Protection out of
Service
In a 7SS85CU-based distributed busbar protection system, you can use the service function Measuring point
for distributed busbar protection out of service to revoke the assignment of a measuring point, that is, of
the feeder current to a selective measuring system of the distributed busbar protection at the bay unit. The
residual protection functionality of the merging unit is unaffected by this.
If the measuring point is assigned to a distributed busbar protection measuring system, deactivating the meas-
uring point at the bay unit deactivates the affected bay for the distributed busbar protection. The decommis-
sioning of a measuring point is reported in the affected bay proxy in the 7SS85CU device.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
The service function Measuring point for distributed busbar protection out of service is not pre-instanti-
ated by default in a measuring point for a bay unit. If required, the service function must be instantiated from
the DIGSI library into the desired measuring point of the respective bay unit.
The following figure shows the storage location for this service function in the DIGSI library, using the
example of the 6MU85 Merging Unit device type.
[sc_measure_poioutoford, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-2 DIGSI Library
If this service function is instantiated in a measuring point, you can take the measuring point out of operation
or put it back into operation using the control commands MP out of service cmd or via the binary input
>Out of service.
NOTE
i A measuring point can only be put back into operation in the same way that it was taken out of operation,
that is via the binary input or via a control command.
For more information on the Bay out of service and Measuring point out of service operating states, refer to
5.2.5 Operating State: Bay Out of Service and 5.2.6 Operating State: Measuring Point out of Operation.
6.1.5 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring Point Voltage 3‑Phase (V-3ph)
Settings for the supervision functions are also located in the voltage measuring point. You can find the
description of these settings in supervision functions.
Parameter: Rated primary voltage
• Default setting (_:8911:101) Rated primary voltage = 400.000 kV

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
With the parameter Rated primary voltage, you set the primary rated voltage of the voltage trans-
former.
Parameter: Rated secondary voltage
• Default setting (_:8911:102) Rated secondary voltage = 100 V

With the parameter Rated secondary voltage, you set the secondary rated voltage of the voltage trans-
former.
Parameter: Matching ratio Vph / VN
• Default setting (_:8911:103) Matching ratio Vph / VN = 1.73

With the parameter Matching ratio Vph / VN, you set the deviation between the calculated zero-
sequence voltage and the residual voltage measured directly via a measuring input. The different transmission
ratio of the voltage transformers is the cause for the deviation (see Figure 6-3).
The Matching ratio Vph / VN is equal to the ratio 3V0 sec/VN sec
with
V0 sec Calculated zero-sequence voltage
VN sec Measured residual voltage
The zero-sequence voltage is calculated as phase-to-ground voltages. The residual voltage is measured on the
broken-delta winding of the voltage transformer. For 1-phase voltage transformers, the residual voltage is
measured in the generator or the transformer neutral point.
NOTE
i The measurement residual voltage VN sec is converted to a zero-sequence voltage in the device as follows:
EXAMPLE 1:
[dw_bsp1uwdl_anpassfaktor, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-3 3-Phase Voltage Transformer: Connection = 3 Phase-to-Ground Voltage + VN

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
When the type of connection for the voltage transformer is 3 ph-to-gnd volt. + VN (parameter: VT
connection) and the voltage input V4 is connected to the broken-delta winding of the voltage transformer
(da/dn), the Matching ratio Vph / VN is as follows:
When changing the neutral point according to Figure 6-3, this results in the following values:
• The calculated secondary zero-sequence voltage V0 sec is equal to the secondary phase-to-ground voltage.
Expressed as secondary transformer rated voltage, then Vrated sec/√3.
• The measured residual voltage on the broken-delta winding is the sum of the voltage drops on the
3 sides. Expressed with the side ratio, the result is VN, sec = 3 Vrated sec /3.
Calculate the Matching ratio Vph / VN parameter as follows:
[fo_example_1, 2, en_US]
Set Matching ratio Vph / VN = 1.73.
In example 1 Vrated sec, the phase-to-ground voltage and the secondary voltage on the broken-delta winding
were identical. If these voltages are different, use the actual numerical values in the calculation.
EXAMPLE 2:
Phase-to-ground voltage Vrated sec = 100 V

Broken-delta winding (for Vrated sec = 500 V
example, grounding trans- The voltage input of the device is designed for a continuous operation,
former in generator protection) using 230 V max. Therefore, the voltage on the broken-delta winding (500
V) is reduced to a 5:2 ratio, using an ohmic divider. In order to calculate the
matching factor, the secondary voltage of 200 V will be applied.
Calculate the Matching ratio Vph / VN parameter as follows:
[fo_example_2, 1, en_US]
Set Matching ratio Vph / VN = 0.866.

Interpretation of the result:
The zero-sequence voltage calculated from the phase-to-ground voltage is 57.73 V (= 100V/√3). The meas-
ured residual voltage is 200 V. The calculated adaptation factor is 0.866. The measured residual voltage is
converted to a zero-sequence voltage inside the device:
[fo_conversion2, 2, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
NOTE
i During the ground-fault test, the set adaptation factor can be checked by comparing the operational meas-
ured values. The operational measured values contain the calculated zero-sequence voltage V0 sec and the
measured residual voltage VN sec. Proceed with the compilation as follows:
The Matching ratio Vph / VN parameter is significant for the following functions:
• Overvoltage protection with zero-sequence voltage/residual voltage
• Measured-value supervision
• Scaling of the faulty and measured values
Parameter: VT connection
• Default setting (_:8911:104) VT connection = 3 ph-to-gnd volt. + VN

The parameter VT connection shows the connection type of the voltage transformer for the 3-phase
voltage measuring point. You can find the parameter in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name of the device →
Settings → Power-system data → Measuring point V 3-phase. You cannot change the connection type of
the voltage transformer in the power-system data.
You can change the connection type of the voltage transformer only under measuring point routing in
DIGSI 5. Under Name of the device → Measuring-point routing → Voltage measuring points, select the
desired connection type under Connection type. The following types of connections are possible:
• 3 ph-to-ph volt. + VN
• 3 ph-to-ph voltages
Depending on the connection type selected, you must route the measured values to the terminals of the
voltage measuring point in DIGSI 5. You can find connection examples for voltage transformers in A.7 Connec-
tion Examples of Voltage Transformers for Modular Devices. The connection examples provide assistance
when selecting the type of connection.
Parameter: Inverted phases
• Default setting (_:8911:106) Inverted phases = none

The Inverted phases parameter is intended for special applications, for example, pumped-storage hydro-
power plants. This default setting can be retained for power-system protection applications.
Parameter: Tracking
• Default setting (_:8911:111) Tracking = active

The Tracking parameter is used to determine whether the measuring channels of this measuring point shall
be used to determine the sampling frequency.
The sampling frequency of the device is adjusted to the power frequency. The device selects a measuring
channel, through which the sampling frequency is determined. Preferably, this should be a voltage measuring
channel. This validity of the signal is monitored (minimum level, frequency range). If these values are invalid,

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
the device switches to another channel (etc.). Once switched to a current channel, the system automatically
switches back to this channel if a voltage channel is valid again.
active If you set the parameter Tracking = active, the measuring point will be
included when determining the sampling frequency. If possible, only the 3-
phase measuring points shall be considered.
Note: If the parameter Tracking is active, the determined sampling
frequency applies to all functions in the device not using fixed sampling
rates.
inactive If the channels of the measuring point are not to be considered for deter-
mining the sampling frequency, select the setting value inactive.
Parameter: Measuring-point ID
• Default setting (_:8911:130) Measuring-point ID = 1

The parameter Measuring-point ID is write-protected and displays the ID of the measuring point. If you
are using several measuring points, the Measuring-point ID is continuously incremented.
Parameter: Magnitude correction
• Default setting (_:3811:103) Magnitude correction = 1.000

With the parameter Magnitude correction, you adjust the magnitude (magnitude correction) for the
voltage input. This allows you to correct the tolerances of the primary current transformer phase-selectively.
The magnitude correction may be required for high-precision measurements. Use a comparison measurement
to determine the setting value (for example, a high-precision measuring-voltage transformer). If a primary
correction is not necessary, retain the default setting.
NOTE
i The Magnitude correction parameter has nothing to do with the internal adjustment of the input
circuit.
6.1.6 Settings
Measuring Point I-3ph

General
_:8881:115 CT 3-phase:CT connec- • not assigned 3-phase + IN
tion
• 3-phase + IN
• 3-phase
• 3-phase + IN-separate
• 3-phase, 2 primary CT
• 3ph,2prim.CT + IN-sep
_:8881:127 CT 3-phase:Tracking • inactive active
• active
_:8881:130 CT 3-phase:Measuring- 0 to 100 0
point ID

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

CT phases
_:8881:101 CT 3-phase:Rated 1.0 A to 100 000.0 A 1000.0 A
primary current
_:8881:102 CT 3-phase:Rated secon- • 1A 1A
dary current
• 5A
_:8881:117 CT 3-phase:Current • 100 x IR 100 x IR
range
_:8881:118 CT 3-phase:Internal CT • CT protection CT protection
type
CT 1
_:3841:103 CT 1:Magnitude correc- 0.010 to 10.000 1.000
tion
_:3841:117 CT 1:Phase • IA
• IB
• IC
• IN
Measuring Point V-3ph

General
_:8911:101 VT 3-phase:Rated 0.200 kV to 1200.000 kV 400.000 kV
primary voltage
_:8911:102 VT 3-phase:Rated secon- 80 V to 230 V 100 V
dary voltage
_:8911:103 VT 3-phase:Matching 0.10 to 9.99 1.73
ratio Vph / VN
_:8911:104 VT 3-phase:VT connec- • not assigned 3 ph-to-gnd
tion volt. + VN
_:8911:106 VT 3-phase:Inverted • none none
phases
• AC
• BC
• AB
_:8911:111 VT 3-phase:Tracking • inactive active
• active
_:8911:130 VT 3-phase:Measuring- 0 to 100 0
point ID
VT 1
_:3811:103 VT 1:Magnitude correc- 0.010 to 10.000 1.000
tion

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

_:3811:108 VT 1:Phase • VA
• VB
• VC
• V AB
• V BC
• V CA
• VN
• Vx
• VCB
VT 2
tion
_:3812:108 VT 2:Phase • VA
• VB
• VC
• V AB
• V BC
• V CA
• VN
• Vx
• VCB
VT 3
tion
_:3813:108 VT 3:Phase • VA
• VB
• VC
• V AB
• V BC
• V CA
• VN
• Vx
• VCB
VT 4
tion

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

_:3814:108 VT 4:Phase • VA
• VB
• VC
• V AB
• V BC
• V CA
• VN
• Vx
• VCB
Supv. balan. V
_:2521:1 Supv. balan. V:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2521:101 Supv. balan. V:Release 0.300 V to 170.000 V 50.000 V
threshold
_:2521:102 Supv. balan. V:Threshold 0.58 to 0.95 0.75
min/max
_:2521:6 Supv. balan. V:Delay 0.00 s to 100.00 s 5.00 s
failure indication
Supv. ph.seq.V
_:2581:1 Supv. ph.seq.V:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2581:6 Supv. ph.seq.V:Delay 0.00 s to 100.00 s 5.00 s
failure indication
Supv. sum V
_:2461:1 Supv. sum V:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2461:3 Supv. sum V:Threshold 0.300 V to 170.000 V 25.000 V
_:2461:6 Supv. sum V:Delay 0.00 s to 100.00 s 5.00 s
failure indication
VT miniatureCB
_:2641:101 VT minia- 0.00 s to 0.03 s 0.00 s
tureCB:Response time
General

(Type)
General
_:2311:321 General:Freq.out of oper.range SPS O
_:2311:322 General:f sys MV O
_:2311:323 General:f track MV O

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Measuring Point I-3ph

(Type)
General
_:8881:319 CT 3-phase:Phases AB inverted SPS O
_:8881:320 CT 3-phase:Phases BC inverted SPS O
_:8881:321 CT 3-phase:Phases AC inverted SPS O
CT 1
_:3841:300 CT 1:Sampled val. current SAV O
CT 2
CT 3
CT 4
Supv.ADC sum I
_:2401:82 Supv.ADC sum I:>Block function SPS I
_:2401:54 Supv.ADC sum I:Inactive SPS O
_:2401:52 Supv.ADC sum I:Behavior ENS O
_:2401:53 Supv.ADC sum I:Health ENS O
_:2401:71 Supv.ADC sum I:Failure SPS O
Measuring Point V-3ph

(Type)
General
_:8911:315 VT 3-phase:Phases AB inverted SPS O
_:8911:316 VT 3-phase:Phases BC inverted SPS O
_:8911:317 VT 3-phase:Phases AC inverted SPS O
VT 1
_:3811:300 VT 1:Sampled val. voltage SAV O
VT 2
VT 3
VT 4
Supv. balan. V
_:2521:82 Supv. balan. V:>Block function SPS I
_:2521:54 Supv. balan. V:Inactive SPS O
_:2521:52 Supv. balan. V:Behavior ENS O
_:2521:53 Supv. balan. V:Health ENS O
_:2521:71 Supv. balan. V:Failure SPS O
Supv. ph.seq.V
_:2581:82 Supv. ph.seq.V:>Block function SPS I
_:2581:54 Supv. ph.seq.V:Inactive SPS O
_:2581:52 Supv. ph.seq.V:Behavior ENS O
_:2581:53 Supv. ph.seq.V:Health ENS O

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

(Type)
_:2581:71 Supv. ph.seq.V:Failure SPS O
Supv. sum V
_:2461:82 Supv. sum V:>Block function SPS I
_:2461:54 Supv. sum V:Inactive SPS O
_:2461:52 Supv. sum V:Behavior ENS O
_:2461:53 Supv. sum V:Health ENS O
_:2461:71 Supv. sum V:Failure SPS O
Definite-T 1
_:2641:500 VT miniatureCB:>Open SPS I
Calc.VN
_:20221:300 Calc.VN:Sampled val. voltage SAV O

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
6.2 Busbar Differential Protection
The busbar protection is a selective, safe, and quick protection if busbar short circuits should occur and if
circuit breakers fail. The protection can be utilized for a variety of busbar configurations in medium, high, and
extra-high voltage systems.
Busbar protection is suitable for switchgear with closed iron core or linearized current transformers.
Busbar protection employs a phase-selective method of measurement.
The Busbar protection function is embedded in the Busbar function group.

The function structure is shown in the following figure.
[dw_struss, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-4 Embedding the Busbar Protection Function
The check zone function blocks, 1 busbar section, and the function-specific parameters are always available.
Additional busbar sections and the function blocks for the busbar sections without measuring system are
optional.
Interaction Check Zone and Busbar Sections

The following figure shows the protection principle of the Busbar differential protection function. The
protection functions consider the parameterized busbar sections and the check zone.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[dw_buszone, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-5 Interaction Check Zone and Busbar Section with Busbar Differential Protection
General
Busbar differential protection is characterized by the following functions and properties:
• Evaluation of the differential current and the restraint current
• Decision to trip based on 2 independent measurements. One measurement is performed for the bus
zone, the second measurement takes into account all bus zones without the disconnector image (check
zone).
• Fast tripping (typically 7 ms)
• Restraint to prevent unwanted tripping in the event of external faults and saturation of the current trans-
formers
• Pickup of differential-current supervision selectively for the busbar section and phase-selectively with and
without blocking
• Detecting disconnector faults, faults in the feeder, or measuring errors with and without blocking
• Zero-crossing supervision pickup with blocking
• Independently selectable operate curves for the check zone and the busbar zones. Both a normal pickup
characteristic and the sensitive characteristic are available.
• Adaptation to different transformation ratios of the current transformers without use of interposing
transformers
• Selective detection of short circuits, even on the transfer busbar (TB) with command output for tripping
of the circuit breaker at the opposite end.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
6.2.4 Method of Measurement and Characteristic Curves
Basis
The method of measurement is based on Kirchhoff's current law. This law states that the sum of all currents
flowing into a closed region is 0 if the sign is taken into account. This natural law applies to alternating
currents at all times. The sum of the currents from all feeders connected to a busbar must thus be 0 at all
times.
[dw_ssnabz, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-6 Busbar with n Feeders
In the healthy state, the following equation applies to the currents I1, I2, I3 to In in the feeders of the busbar.
I1 + I2 + I3 ... In = 0
A prerequisite is standardized orientation of the currents. For instance, currents flowing to the busbar are posi-
tive, currents flowing away are negative.
If this equation is not satisfied, current must be flowing along an impermissible path. There must be a fault.
This rule forms the basis for busbar differential protection. The sum of the currents is the only quantity that
identifies a healthy state. This quantity can be calculated at any time. The current sum remains 0 as long as
there is no fault.
The above considerations apply to the primary-side processes in the high-voltage system. The currents flowing
in the high-voltage system cannot be employed directly for the busbar protection measurements. The protec-
tion equipment is connected with current transformers. The current transformers reduce the currents precisely
on the basis of the transformation ratio of the current transformer. The vector orientation of the currents is
retained.
The installation location of the current transformer specifies the range limit for the busbar protection. The
following equation results from the proportional conversion of the primary currents (Iprim) into secondary
currents (Isec) for the healthy state:
I1 sec · w1 + I2 sec · w2 + I3 sec · w3 ..... + in sec · wn = 0
i1 sec, i2 sec ... in sec Secondary currents

w1, w2, w3 ... wn Transformation ratios of the current transformers
At the busbar level, the currents from all bays must be referenced to a common transformer ratio. This is why
the currents associated with the individual bays are normalized during the engineering for the system. The
normalization factor is calculated from the Irated (feeder) /Irated,obj ratio. Where Irated,obj is the common normaliza-
tion current for the entire system.
Busbar protection designed in this way detects every short circuit within the protection range. Transformation
errors in the transformers can result in unwanted disconnection, for example, in the event of a nearby short
circuit on a feeder. In this case, the current flowing in the short circuit is divided among several bays on the
infeed side. The transformers in the feeding bays each receive only a fraction of the short-circuit current to be
transformed. The transformer set in the faulty feeder conducts the full short-circuit current on the primary
side. With a very high short-circuit current, this transformer set can provide only a fraction of the set point
value on the secondary side as the result of saturation. The remaining current transformers operate correctly
because the current is divided. Although the sum of the currents is 0 on the primary side, the sum of the
secondary-side currents is not 0 in such a case.
To compensate for such situations during operation, busbar differential protection serves as a stabilizing func-
tion.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Stabilization
Stabilization reduces the effects of the different transformation ratios in the current transformers on the meas-
urement of the feeder currents and, in this way, prevents a faulty response of the protection. Busbar differen-
tial protection forms the vector sum of the secondary transformer currents and the sum of their magnitudes.
The vector sum acts in a triggering sense. The sum of the magnitudes acts in opposition to pickup.
[dw_istmod, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-7 Formation of the Restraint Current Irest,mod
The restraint current obtained in this manner is smoothed by the software in order to ensure stability even in
cases of extreme saturation.
Characteristic Curves
The range from the lowest to the highest short-circuit current can vary considerably, depending on the layout
of the system. In addition, the data and loads for the connected current transformers play a significant role.
Once the protection has been configured and set, the neutral point in the grid is important as well. For these
reasons, the busbar protection must have suitable adaptability.
Standard Characteristic Curve

The standard characteristic curve is determined by the 2 adjustable parameters Stabilization factor k
and Threshold Idiff.
The vector sum Idiff functions as the tripping quantity:
Idiff = |I1 + I2 .... + In|
The sum of the magnitudes Irest functions as the stabilizing quantity of all feeder currents:
Irest = |I1| + |I2| ... + |In|
The criterion for a triggering fault on the busbar is thus:
Idiff > k • Irest, mod
The modified stabilizing quantity Irest, modis derived from Irest (see Figure 6-7).

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[dw_char_sensitive, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-8 Standard Characteristic Curve
The diagram shows the operate curve for the busbar differential protection. The horizontal axis represents the
sum of the magnitudes of all currents Irest,mod flowing through the busbar. The vertical axis is assigned to their
vector sum Idiff. The horizontal and vertical axes have the same scaling.
In the event of a busbar short circuit with the same vector orientation as the infeed currents, Idiff equals Irest.
The fault characteristic then follows a straight line at an angle of 45 ° in the diagram. Differences in the vector
orientation of the fault currents result in an inconsequential lowering of the fault characteristic. Since Idiff is
approximately equal to 0 during healthy operation, the x-axis forms the operating characteristic.
The stabilization factors can be selected from within the range k = 0.10 to 0.80 for busbar-selective busbar
protection, and from within the range k = 0.10 to 0.80 for the check zone. Straight lines at a corresponding
angle represent the operate curves associated with the factors. The busbar differential protection determines
whether the value pairs Idiff/Irest lie within the tripping range or the stabilization range.
Sensitive Characteristic Curve

Low-current busbar faults, for example, a 1-phase short circuit in resistance-grounded networks, require a
higher sensitivity of the operate curves for busbar differential protection and circuit-breaker failure protection.
The more sensitive characteristic curves have their own parameter sets. The stabilization factor is the same as
that for the standard characteristic curve.
The characteristic curves can be switched with the routable input signal >Sens. characteristic.
A common criterion for the activation of the sensitive characteristic curve, for example for single-pole faults in
resistance-grounded networks, is the residual voltage V0. In place of the binary signal, an integrated voltage
protection function (for example according to chapter 6.16.7.1 Overview of Functions) can also be used for
direct activation.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[dw_empken, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-9 Sensitive Characteristic Curve
6.2.5 Measurands
Displacement
If the short circuit does not occur at the voltage maximum of the periodic cycle, the short-circuit current
initially has a direct-current component imposed on it. It decays with the time constant τ = L/R of the external
impedance. Time constant τ values of around 60 ms are encountered frequently in high-voltage power
systems. In the vicinity of large machinery, values of 100 ms and longer are possible.
Saturation
Direct-current components cause a one-sided, increasing bias in the transformer core. The transmission
behavior can be seriously compromised by transformer saturation.
The basic principle underlying the busbar differential protection must be augmented by additional measures
under these difficult operating conditions. In the protection device, these ensure the restraint of the protec-
tion in the event of external high-current short circuits. At the same time, they make a tripping decision
possible when an internal short circuit occurs within one period of the power system.
The following figures show the conditions for the extreme case of an initially fully displaced short-circuit
current. In addition, biasing of the current transformer being considered has been assumed to make the situa-
tion more difficult.
The curve representing the initially fully displaced primary current is shown. At the beginning of the process,
the direct-current component has the peak value of the short-circuit current and decays with τ = approx.
50 ms. It is assumed that the current is flowing through a current transformer that is just able to transmit the
alternating current without saturation if it and the magnetic flux in the iron are not displaced.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[dw_kl_prim, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-10 Qualitative Representation of the Primary and Secondary Current in a Transformer
Approaching Saturation in the Event of a Fault (Direct-Current Component with a Time
Constant of Approx. 50 ms).
Because of the superimposed direct-current component and the unfavorable magnetic flux at the start of the
short circuit, saturation occurs in the current transformer after about 6 ms. The magnetic flux can no longer
increase and the transformer induces no more current on the secondary circuit. Transmission to the secondary
circuit is possible only after current flows in the opposite direction following zero crossover. As a consequence,
the currents below the axis are transmitted correctly. From the currents above the axis, the current trans-
former can form on the secondary circuit only that amount of the current-time area that contains the previous
negative half wave.
External Short Circuit

The following example illustrates an external short circuit.
The current flows beyond the protection range into an external short circuit. It flows through at least 2 current
transformers. One current transformer models the current correctly. The other current transformer shows the
behavior in Figure 6-12.
[dw_klkurz, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-11 Differential and Restraint Current in the Event of an External Short Circuit and Transformer
Saturation

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
With a stabilizing factor of k = 0.65, the measurands lie in the tripping range after about 8 ms following the
start of the short circuit. This state lasts for about 4 ms before stabilization prevails. The current flowing in the
opposite direction following zero crossover is processed correctly and does not cause tripping.
As a consequence of the second positive half wave in the direction supported by the direct-current compo-
nent, the measurands once again lie in the tripping range. This condition lasts for about 3 ms. As time
progresses, the direct-current component decays. This restores the ability of the initially highly saturated
current transformer to function properly. The tripping differential current Idiff no longer equals the restraint
current k · Irest,mod.
The tripping quantity clearly increases beyond the restraining quantity twice. The algorithms used in the
protection device however ensure restraint and prevent an overfunction.
[dw_klglat, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-12 Differential and Restraint Current in the Event of an External Short Circuit - Restraint Current
Smoothed
Internal Short Circuit

The following example illustrates an internal short circuit.
The current flows into a short circuit lying within the protection range through a current transformer. The
current transformer reacts similar as in Figure 6-12. The restraining factor k = 0.65 is assumed.
The tripping differential current Idiff prevails from the start of the short circuit. Since the current transformer is
saturated, the trigger value disappears after 6 ms. The current wave in the opposite direction does not cause
tripping. As time progresses, the current causes tripping in the negative half wave as well.
[dw_klinks, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-13 Differential and Smoothed Restraint Current in the Event of an Internal Short Circuit
Comparison of the measured values in cases of an external and an internal short circuit illustrates 2 essential
product features:

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
• After several periods, during which the direct-current component has largely decayed, the correct meas-
ured values are present in each half wave. These measured values correspond to the location of the fault
in relation to the set operate curve.
• At the start of the short circuit, the correct measured value is likewise formed during each process. This
measured value corresponds to the location of the fault.
These 2 product features are used in the busbar protection to distinguish between external and internal short
circuits.
The following properties result:
• High stability during current-transformer saturation
• Short operate times in the event of an internal short circuit
• Correct behavior in the event of changing faults
6.2.6 Algorithms
6.2.6.1 Evaluation of the Measurands When a Fault Occurs

When operating under load, the magnetic flux in the iron core of the current transformer is relatively low. It is
at most a few percent of the value at which the iron begins to become saturated. With regard to their overcur-
rent factor, current transformers must be designed to ensure proper behavior of the connected protection
equipment in the event of large short-circuit currents.
Since the magnetic flux in the iron core of the current transformer is low during operation under load, a
certain amount of time passes at the start of the short circuit before the magnetic flux reaches the saturation
limit. This is true also under severe conditions. Severe conditions include, for instance, a very large short-
circuit current or a large direct-current component with a long time constant.
Usually, the process lasts for about a quarter to a half period. This applies to both common current trans-
formers with a closed iron core and to linearized transformers with air-gap cores.
Prior to the start of saturation, the current transformers still function properly. The secondary currents
produced during the first few milliseconds immediately following the start of the short circuit can thus be
used.
For this reason, the protection device contains logic that determines the start of the short circuit from the
currents and determines whether the short circuit is internal or external.
This involves forming the differential quotient dIrest/dt from the restraining quantity and comparing it with a
limiting value.
If this limiting value is exceeded, a check determines whether the value lies above the characteristic curve
(Figure 6-8). If the trip condition is satisfied, the protection trips on the basis of a single measurement (1 out
of 1) after 3 ms. Otherwise, the second measurement (2 out of 2) is used for tripping in the event of an
internal fault.
If the measuring result indicates an external fault, the first measurement (1 out of 1) is blocked for 150 ms.
6.2.6.2 Algorithm with Filtered Measured Values

By calculating the fundamental component, the direct-current components of the differential current are elim-
inated. With relatively small, displaced differential currents, this measure improves the accuracy and reduces
the operate times for protection. The magnitude of the fundamental component of the differential current is
formed with the aid of sine and cosine filters. The restraint current is calculated from the sum of the rectified
mean values of the feeder currents.
This algorithm works with the standard or sensitive characteristic. The algorithm that uses filtered quantities
works in parallel with the algorithm that uses instantaneous values. Each algorithm can reach a tripping deci-
sion independently of the other. In the event of an external fault, the algorithm that uses instantaneous
values blocks the algorithm that uses filtered quantities for 150 ms. This prevents an overfunction in the case
of highly saturated currents.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
6.2.7 Tripping
6.2.7.1 Busbar Differential Protection Trip Logic

Tripping occurs when all of the following criteria are satisfied:
• Idiff > Setting limit
• Idiff > k · Irest mod
• Release by 1-time measurement, 2-time measurement, or filter algorithm

The following figure presents an overview of the trip logic for the Busbar differential protection function.
[lo_ssdiff, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-14 Busbar Differential Protection Trip Logic

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Irest Restraint current

Idiff Differential current
(1) Error within the protection range detected if 2 successive measurements occurred
Optional release of busbar tripping is based on the input signals:
• Phase-segregated on the basis of an additional criterion
• For a busbar section, on the basis of a release command
6.2.7.2 Phase-Selective Release of Tripping

A phase-selective release of the tripping is possible via binary input signals >Add. criterion phs A, B, C possible.
A common criterion for release is the undervoltage V<. In place of the binary signals, an integrated voltage
protection function (for example, according to chapter 6.16.1.1 Overview of Functions) can also be used for
direct release (also see the engineering notes in chapter 4.5.9 Enabling of Tripping by Undervoltage Protec-
tion). The release applies to the selective measuring systems of the busbar sections and the check zone.
Phase-selective release of the tripping works independently of the measured value algorithm used for busbar
differential protection. The release affects only tripping by the busbar differential protection.
With the Add. trip criterion (p. ph.) parameter, you set whether the additional criterion should be
evaluated. If you set existent, all associated parameters are accessible.
The timing of the phase-selective release signal can be monitored. Use the parameter Superv. add. trip
criterion to set whether the monitoring reacts with or without blocking. The monitoring time for the
enabling signal is a fixed 15 s. Information about the supervision functions can be found in chapter
11.11 Differential Current Supervision.
The following figure shows the logic diagram for the phase-specific tripping release.
[lo_zuskrt, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-15 Logic Diagram for the Phase-Selective Release Signal
6.2.7.3 Zone-Specific Release of Tripping

Tripping of a busbar can be released or blocked by the >Trip release signal. This signal is available for
each busbar section. The signal is routed to a binary input, received via the protection interface or set via a
CFC chart by an internal device function (also see the engineering notes in chapter 4.5.9 Enabling of Tripping
by Undervoltage Protection). If the release signal is not routed, it is not taken into account for generation of
the trip commands.
The release signal affects only tripping by the differential protection. The circuit-breaker failure protection and
the external tripping of the busbar section (direct) are not affected.
When tripping is blocked by an inactive release signal, No release of operate is indicated.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
The timing of the release signal for tripping of a busbar can be monitored. Use the parameter Trip release
supervision to set whether the monitoring reacts with or without blocking. The monitoring time for the
release signal is fixed at 15 s.
[lo_auscom, 4, en_US]
Figure 6-16 Logic Diagram for the Zone-Specific Release Signal
6.2.7.4 Cross Stabilization

In 3-pole enclosed gas-insulated switchgears, a high 1-phase short-circuit current can induce significant error
currents in the secondary windings of the adjacent transformers. These error currents may simulate an
internal error. To avoid tripping of the busbar protection, there is the optional Cross stabilization function
block. The basic principle of cross stabilization is based on the fact that a higher current in one phase, for
example, in case of an external short circuit, is used to stabilize the other phases.
The algorithm considers the maximum restraint current of the 3 phases and multiplies it by the restraint factor
set. If a tripping criterion is met, a phase-selective blocking of the other phases occurs if its restraint current
falls below the previously acquired maximum restraint current.
With the parameters Cross.stab. factor BZ and Cross.stab. factor CZ, you set the magnitude of
the stabilization. You can set cross stabilization for all bus zones and for the check zone. The indication
Blocked by cross stab. is issued if the cross stabilization function has picked up, thereby preventing an
undesirable tripping. In addition, a fault record is started for a detailed analysis of the event.
6.2.8 Disconnector Image
The assignment of the feeder currents to the measuring systems of the bus zones is performed automatically
using the disconnector positions. For this purpose, the Off position is evaluated. As a result, there are no
special requirements for the disconnector auxiliary contacts (for example, adjustment). The On position is
used only for disconnector-status monitoring (disconnector disturbance, disconnector intermediate position).
The status changes of both information signals Disconnector off and Disconnector on are used to determine
the disconnector runtime. For this reason, a true image of the disconnector runtime results from the use of
limit switches such as those often used in systems control. The following figure shows the principle connec-
tion.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[dw_bbp_line_discon_image, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-17 Disconnector Position Indication
Preferably, you connect the 3 auxiliary contacts of the position feedback Off or On in series. This ensures that
one disconnector is treated as open only if all 3 poles are opened. In all other cases, the disconnector is
processed as closed. With the DIGSI 5 single-line monitoring, you see the entire disconnector image in graphic
form.
A bus coupler bay is assigned to the appropriate bus zones only when at least one disconnector is activated on
both sides of the bus coupler (left and right of the circuit breaker). Operational current flow is not possible
until then. The busbar feeding of the error trips immediately with closing of the 1st disconnector and short
circuit in the bus-coupler area, independent of the fault location and instantaneous circuit-breaker switch posi-
tion.
Preference with the Busbar Shunt by Disconnectors

If 2 busbars are rigidly coupled via the disconnectors of a feeder (busbar shunt by disconnectors), all feeders
of the coupled busbars are assigned to one preferred measuring system. The bus zone with the lower instance
number according to engineering is preferred. The currents in the bus coupler are disregarded for a busbar
shunt by disconnectors.
6.2.9 Check Zone
The measuring system for the check zone detects a short circuit in the entire busbar. In this case, the discon-
nector positions are not taken into account. The disconnector positions must be taken into account in conjunc-
tion with the check zone only in special cases, for example, for transfer busbars or combined busbars.
When the restraint current is calculated, overstabilization may result in the case of multiple busbars. The over-
stabilization is caused by the current flowing through the bays that are not connected to the faulty busbar.
To prevent overstabilization, the restraint current is obtained in the following manner:
Σ | Ip | = Sum of the magnitudes of the currents that are flowing to the busbar
Σ | In | = Sum of the magnitudes of the currents that are flowing away from the busbar
Irest = the smaller of the 2 sums
In this calculation, only half of the load current flowing acts as the restraint current.
The short-circuit current does not stabilize the check zone and acts only as a differential current.
The following figure and equations explain the behavior with and without special treatment.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[dw_stabcz, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-18 Treatment of the Restraint Current for the Check Zone
Idiff= | I1 + I2 + I3 + I4 − I3 − I4 | = | I1 + I2 |
Restraint current without special treatment:
Irestr = | I1 | + | I2 | + | I3 | + | I4 | + | I3 + I4 |
The load currents I3 and I4 are taken into account twice when calculating the restraint current. This results in
overstabilization.
With special treatment, the following situation results:
Σ | Ip | = | I1 | + | I2 | + | I3 | + | I4 |
Σ | In | = | I3 + I4 |
Irestr = Σ | In | = | I3 + I4 |
Irestr corresponds to half of the magnitude of the entire load current
The restraint current is modified for the characteristic-curve query. You will find information about this in the
chapter 6.2.4 Method of Measurement and Characteristic Curves under Restraint.
The phase-angle difference between the short-circuit and load currents can result in differences in the sum
obtained.
You can switch off the measuring system for the check zone using the Check zone parameter.
6.2.10 Supervision
Differential Current Supervision

Differential current supervision is described in chapter 8.3.5.1 Function Overview .
Here, the following information can be found:
• Function description of the differential current supervision function
• Application and setting notes
• Settings and information lists
6.2.11 Function Limits of the Busbar Differential Protection
In the following situations, a bus section of the differential protection becomes inactive (Health = Alarm):
• Invalid measured values, for example, pickup of the fast current-sum supervision, module-connection
errors (PCB link)
• Blocking by differential-current supervision for 3 phases 20
• Blocking by supervision of the additional criterion for 3 phases 20
• Blocking by supervision of the trip release signal
• Invalid input values, for example, faulty parameterization
• Frequency outside the permissible range of 10 Hz to 90 Hz (Health = ok)
20 With blocking of 1 or 2 phases, Health switches to the Warning mode, the state remains active.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
In the following situations, the check zone of the differential protection becomes inactive (Health = Alarm):
• Invalid measured values (for example, pickup of the fast current-sum supervision, module-connection
errors)
• Blocking by differential-current supervision for 3 phases 20
• Blocking by supervision of the additional criterion for 3 phases 20

For the permanent release of the check zone (invalid measured values, for example, pickup of the fast current-
sum supervision, module-connection errors), Health switches to the Warning mode, the state remains active.
The following conditions cause group indications and group warnings by the differential protection:
• Group warning:
– Invalid measured values, for example, pickup of the fast current-sum supervision, module-connec-
tion errors
– Frequency outside the permissible range of 10 Hz to 90 Hz
– Blocking by differential-current supervision
– Blocking by supervision of the additional criterion
– Blocking by zero-crossing supervision
– Blocking by supervision of the trip release signal
– Blocking by supervision of the release signal for the sensitive characteristic curve
– External tripping – Signal error (tripping, release)
• Group indication:
– Pickup of the differential-current supervision without blocking
– Pickup of the supervision of the additional criterion without blocking
– Pickup of the supervision of the trip release signal without blocking
6.2.12 Application and Setting Notes – Busbar Differential Protection – General
Parameter: Rated object current IrObjP
• Default setting (_:11821:101) Rated object current IrObj = 1000 A

Normalization current to which all threshold values with the dimension I/IrObj are referenced. It is used to
compensate for the different transformation ratios of the current transformers.
It applies (in %) to the calculated differential and restraint currents and the setting values and monitors.
The parameter setting should be based on consideration of the short-circuit behavior of the system and the
differential-current supervision.
The largest primary rated current of a current measuring point must be less than ten times the rated object
current.
Parameter: Add. trip criterion (p. ph.)
• Default setting (_:11821:102) Add. trip criterion (p. ph.) = nonexistent

You use this parameter to activate phase-selective release of tripping with a binary input or protection
communication. The release acts only on busbar differential protection, not on circuit-breaker failure protec-
tion or external tripping.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

nonexistent The additional criterion is not taken into account.
existent The additional criterion for tripping is active.
Phase-specific tripping can then be released with a binary input, for example
>Add. criterion phs A or in the course of protection communication.
The indications No add. criterion and Activ. add.crit. dist. are
generated.
Parameter: Trip release supervision
• Default setting (_:11821:103) Trip release supervision = off

You use this parameter to specify whether the input signal >Trip release is monitored. The input signal
provides the enabling signal for tripping of a busbar section.
Depending on the parameter setting, pickup of monitoring results in blocking of the busbar section.
off The enabling signal is not monitored.
alarm w/o prot. If the monitoring time is exceeded, the indication BI Trip release dist.
block. is generated.
The busbar section is not blocked.
protection blocking If the monitoring time is exceeded, the indication BI Trip release dist.
is generated.
The busbar section is blocked
Parameter: Superv. add. trip criterion
• Default setting (_:11821:104) Superv. add. trip criterion = off

You use this parameter to specify the behavior of the busbar protection during monitoring of the phase-
specific input signal, for example >Add. criterion phs A.
off Monitoring of the phase-selective input signal for the additional criterion is
inactive.
alarm w/o prot. In the event of a failure, both the phase-selective and the group indication
block. Activ. add.crit. dist. are output. The busbar differential protection is
not blocked.
protection blocking Busbar differential protection is blocked on a phase-selective basis for the dura-
tion of the failure. The indication >Block is output.
Parameter: Sens. characteristic
• Default setting (_:11821:105) Sens. characteristic = nonexistent

You use this parameter to adapt the busbar protection to the system conditions.
nonexistent The busbar protection uses only the standard characteristic curve.
existent With this setting, it is possible to switch to a sensitive characteristic curve.
Switching can be initiated with a binary input or in the course of protection
communication.
The sensitive characteristic curve has a lower threshold value for the differential
current. The threshold values for the check zone and the busbar are sent sepa-
rately.
Parameter: Superv.t. BI sens.char.
• Default setting (_:11821:106) Superv.t. BI sens.char. = off

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
You use this parameter to activate the monitoring of switching to the sensitive characteristic curve. If the
binary input for switchover of the sensitive characteristic curve is on for longer than 15 s, the activation of the
sensitive characteristic curve is withdrawn.
off Monitoring of the input signal >Sens. characteristic is deactivated.
on Monitoring of the input signal >Sens. characteristic is active.
Parameter: Measurement Repetition 1 of 1 Alg.
• Default setting (_:11821:107) Meas.rep. 1-of-1 algorithm = off

You use this parameter to specify whether the measurement is to be repeated if the 1-of-1 algorithm triggers.
This can make sense, if high differential currents, for example, caused by lightning strikes, can appear in the
system for a short moment in time (< 1 ms).
off Measurement repetition is deactivated.
on Measurement repetition is active.
6.2.13 Application and Setting Notes – Busbar – General
This chapter describes the parameters that apply to all busbar sections.
Parameter: Threshold Idiff
• Default setting (_:12091:100) Threshold Idiff = 1.00 I/IrObj

You use this parameter to set the threshold value for the sensitivity of the busbar-selective protection in the
case of low fault currents.
If the set threshold is exceeded, busbar differential protection trips. If the current drops below the limit, the
trip command drops out.
The maximum permissible setting value is based on the lowest fault current that can be expected in the event
of a busbar short circuit. In addition, the setting value should have a pickup margin about 20 %.
The lowest permissible setting value is 30 % above the maximum operating current of all feeders: Imax feeder +
30 %.
1.3 Imax feeder < Threshold Idiff < 0.8 Iscc min.
Iscc min corresponds to the minimum continuous short-circuit current.
Parameter: Threshold Id /sens.char.
• Default setting (_:12091:101) Threshold Id /sens.char. = 0.25 I/IrObj

You use this parameter to set the threshold value for the differential current of the sensitive characteristic for
the busbar-selective busbar protection.
The parameter is visible only if (_:11821:105) Sens. characteristic is set to existent.
If weak infeed conditions or the type of neutral-point grounding generate only short circuits to ground in the
load range, the limiting value must be set below the rated value. A separate characteristic curve is provided for
these cases. It should be noted, however, that under a high load the failure of a current transformer can then
trip the busbar. In this case, stability must be ensured through additional criteria. Additional release by a
feeder protection device through acquisition of the residual voltage, for example, is one such criterion.
Parameter: Threshold Is /sens.char.
• Default setting (_:12091:102) Threshold Is /sens.char. = 5.00 I/IrObj

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
With this parameter, you set the reach of the sensitive characteristic curve in regards to the restraint current.
For larger restraint currents, the standard characteristic curve is used. The parameter is used by busbar-selec-
tive busbar protection.
If the restraint current reaches the set value, the operating point exits the area of the sensitive characteristic
curve.
The setting depends on the maximum restraint current expected and the current transformer behavior.
Threshold Is /sens.char. = 1.2 · (Imax load + IEF).
Imax load = Sum of the magnitudes of all load currents flowing in and out
IEF = Ground-fault current
Parameter: Thresh. Is /sens.char/BFP
• Default setting (_:12091:103) Thresh. Is /sens.char/BFP = 5.00 I/IrObj

For larger restraint currents, the standard characteristic curve is used. The parameter is used by circuit-breaker
failure protection.
curve.
The setting depends on the maximum restraint current expected and the transformer data.
If the setting is 0.00, the sensitive characteristic curve of the busbar differential protection for circuit-breaker
failure protection is not used.
Parameter: Stabilization factor k
• Default setting (_:12091:104) Stabilization factor k = 0.65

You use this parameter to adapt the stabilization factor for busbar-selective busbar protection of all busbar
sections to the operating conditions.
A high setting value improves the stability in the case of faults outside the protection system, but reduces the
sensitivity to detection of busbar faults.
The stabilization factor is essentially determined by the transmission properties of the current transformers in
case of a short circuit. Non-ideal current transformers cause a differential current even with short circuits
outside the protection range. In these cases, the stabilization factor must be set sufficiently high.
The following calculations apply to closed iron core current transformers (for example, type P or TPX) with a
retention of up to +/- 70 % and a transient dimensioning factor tTD = 0.5. Furthermore, the calculations apply
to anti-retention current transformers (for example, type 5PR or TPY).
Determine the actual symmetric short-circuit current factor K´ssc (actual) and the required K´ssc (required) from
the transformer, burden, and network data. By comparison, check whether the default value of k=0.65 is suffi-
cient.
• Calculation of the actual symmetrical short-circuit current factor K'ssc

The actual symmetrical short-circuit current factor K´ssc can be calculated from the rated and RMS values
of the current transformer:
K´ssc = Kssc · (Rb + Rct) / (R´b + Rct)
where:
K´ssc = Factor of the actual symmetrical short-circuit current
Kssc = Factor of the symmetrical rated short-circuit current
Rb = Rated value of the rated burden
Rct = Secondary winding resistance
R´b = RI + Rdevice (connected burden = line resistance + protection burden)

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
• Calculation of the required short-circuit current factor K'SSC

The required short-circuit current factor K'ssc can be determined from the following formula:
K´ssc ≥ ktd · (Isscmax / Ipn)
with dimensioning factor Ktd = 0.5 results in:
K´ssc ≥ 0.5 · (Isscmax / Ipn)
where:
Isscmax = Maximum permanent short-circuit current
Ipn = Primary rated current
• Comparison
For the current transformer, the following must be satisfied: K´ssc (actual) > K´ssc (required)
Calculation example:
The following data are known for a transformer:
Transformer: 600/1, 5P10, 15 VA
Resistance, secondary winding (Rct): 4 Ω
Winding: 50 m, 4 mm2 CU
Device burden (Rdevice): 0.1 Ω
Resistivity of copper ρcu: 0.0179 Ω mm2/m
Calculation of the required K'ssc where Iscc max = 30 kA
Required K'ssc > K'td • Iscc max / IN = 0.5 • 30 kA / 600 A = 25
Calculation of the actual K'ssc = Kssc • (Rb + Rct) / (R'b + Rct) = 10 • (15 + 4) / (0.55 + 4) = 42
Thus, the requirement of K´ssc (actual) > K´ssc (required) is satisfied with the values selected in the
following.
Kssc = 10
Rb = Sn / Isn2 = 15 VA / 1 A2 = 15 Ω
Rct = 4
R'b = Rl + Rdevice = 2ρ • l / A = 2 • 0.0179 (Ω mm2/m) • 50 / 4 (m/mm2) + 0.1 Ω = 0.55 Ω
This calculation is an initial, rough estimate. If K´ssc (actual) is less than K´ssc (required), adjust the stabi-
lization factor k.
• Checking measuring range

Isscmax / Ipn ≤ 100
The equation references the measuring range 100 · Irated of the busbar protection device.
• Final evaluation
If the above-mentioned conditions are met, the current transformer is suitable for connection to busbar
protection and the default stabilization factor can be retained. More calculations are then unnecessary. Other-
wise, the stability can be increased by suitable selection of the stabilization factor. To do this, however, exten-
sive calculations would be necessary, for example, using the CTDim program.
Perform the tests for every current transformer. A relation between the smallest and largest current trans-
former ratio need not be considered.
6.2.14 Application and Setting Notes – Check Zone
The following settings are visible only if _:12151:102 Check zone is set to on.
Parameter: Threshold Idiff
• Default setting (_:11911:100) Threshold Idiff = 1.00 I/IrObj

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
You use this parameter to set the threshold value for the sensitivity of the check zone in the case of low fault
currents.
If the set threshold is exceeded, busbar differential protection picks up. If the current drops below the limit,
the trip command drops out.
The lowest permissible setting value is 30 % above the maximum operating current of all feeders: Imax feeder +
30 %.
1.3 Imax feeder < Threshold Idiff < 0.8 Iscc min.
Iscc min corresponds to the minimum continuous short-circuit current.
Parameter: Threshold Id /sens.char.
• Default setting (_:11911:101) Threshold Id /sens.char. = 0.25 I/IrObj

You use this parameter to set the threshold value of the differential current for the sensitive characteristic
curve used by the check zone measuring system.
Siemens recommends that you set the parameter to 70 % of the lowest fault current expected.
Parameter: Threshold Is /sens.char.
• Default setting (_:11911:102) Threshold Is /sens.char. = 4.50 I/IrObj

For larger restraint currents, the standard characteristic curve is used. The parameter is used for the measuring
system of the check zone.
curve.
Use the following procedure to set the parameter in accordance with the special treatment of the restraint
current in the check zone:
Threshold Is /sens.char. = 1.2 · 0.5 · Iload max.
Imax load = Sum of the magnitudes of all load currents flowing in and out.
Parameter: Thresh. Is /sens.char/BFP
• Default setting (_:11911:103) Thresh. Is /sens.char/BFP = 5.00 I/IrObj

For larger restraint currents, the standard characteristic curve is used. The parameter is used by circuit-breaker
failure protection.
curve.
The setting depends on the maximum restraint current expected and the transformer data.
If the setting is 0.00, the sensitive characteristic curve of the busbar differential protection for circuit-breaker
failure protection is not used.
Parameter: Stabilization factor k
• Default setting (_:11911:104) Stabilization factor k = 0.50

You use this parameter to adapt the stabilization factor for the check zone to the operating conditions.
For single busbars, use the same setting notes that apply to the stabilization factor for busbars (see Applica-
tion and Setting Notes – Busbars – General).
In the case of multiple busbars, Siemens recommends a stabilization factor of 0.5. This setting prevents over-
stabilization by the load currents in the bus sections that are not involved in the error.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Parameter: Delay permanent release
• Default setting (_:11911:110) Delay permanent release = No

Use this parameter to set whether the permanent release of the check zone should be delayed or not in the
event of a measured value fault. If the parameter is set to Yes, the permanent release is delayed by the time
delay of the differential-current supervision set as a parameter.
If the current measurement is disturbed in a bay and, at the same time, this bay is as assigned to an incorrect
bus section because of a disconnector fault, using the setting Yes increases safety compared to an overfunc-
tion. In this case, unauthorized tripping by the pickup of the differential-current supervision is blocked.
Siemens recommends keeping the default setting No if the 7SS85 is used as centralized busbar protection and
using the setting value Yes when the 7SS85 is used as distributed busbar protection.
6.2.15 Application and Setting Notes – Cross Stabilization
Parameter: Mode
• Default setting (_:12001:1)Mode = off

With the Mode parameter, you switch the Cross stabilization function on or off. Siemens recommends cross
stabilization if mutual interaction of the phase currents is expected, for example, in the case of 3-pole
enclosed gas-insulated switchgears.
Parameter: Cross.stab. factor BZ
• Default setting (_:12001:100) Cross.stab. factor BZ = 0.4

With the Cross.stab. factor BZ parameter, you set the stabilization factor for the cross stabilization of
all bus zones as a function of the system. Siemens recommends the default value of 0.4. This provides a good
balance between stability with transformer interaction and sensitivity to internal errors. A larger factor
improves stability, but reduces the sensitivity.
Parameter: Cross.stab. factor CZ
• Default setting (_:12001:101) Cross.stab. factor CZ = 0.4

With the Cross.stab. factor CZ parameter, you set the stabilization factor for the cross stabilization of
the check zone as a function of the system. Siemens recommends the default value of 0.4. This provides a
good balance between stability with transformer interaction and sensitivity to internal errors. A larger factor
improves stability, but reduces the sensitivity.
6.2.16 Settings

Diff.Prot. general
_:11821:101 Diff.Prot. general:Rated 100 A to 50000 A 1000 A
object current IrObj
_:11821:102 Diff.Prot. general:Add. trip • nonexistent nonexistent
criterion (p. ph.)
• existent
_:11821:103 Diff.Prot. general:Trip • off off
release supervision
• alarm w/o prot. block.
• protection blocking
_:11821:104 Diff.Prot. general:Superv. • off off
add. trip criterion
• alarm w/o prot. block.
• protection blocking

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

_:11821:105 Diff.Prot. general:Sens. • nonexistent nonexistent
characteristic
• existent
_:11821:106 Diff.Prot. general:Superv.t. • off off
BI sens.char.
• on
_:11821:107 Diff.Prot. general:Measure- • off off
ment repetition 1 of 1 Alg.
• on
Check zone
_:11911:100 Check zone:Threshold Idiff 0.20 I/IrObj to 4.00 I/IrObj 1.00 I/IrObj
_:11911:101 Check zone:Threshold Id / 0.05 I/IrObj to 4.00 I/IrObj 0.25 I/IrObj
sens.char.
_:11911:102 Check zone:Threshold Is / 0.00 I/IrObj to 25.00 I/IrObj 4.50 I/IrObj
sens.char.
_:11911:103 Check zone:Thresh. Is / 0.00 I/IrObj to 25.00 I/IrObj 5.00 I/IrObj
sens.char/BFP
_:11911:104 Check zone:Stabilization 0.10 to 0.80 0.50
factor k
_:11911:110 Check zone:Delay perma- • no no
nent release
• yes
Bus zone gen.
_:12091:100 Bus zone gen.:Threshold 0.20 I/IrObj to 4.00 I/IrObj 1.00 I/IrObj
Idiff
_:12091:101 Bus zone gen.:Threshold 0.05 I/IrObj to 4.00 I/IrObj 0.25 I/IrObj
Id /sens.char.
_:12091:102 Bus zone gen.:Threshold Is / 0.00 I/IrObj to 25.00 I/IrObj 5.00 I/IrObj
sens.char.
_:12091:103 Bus zone gen.:Thresh. Is / 0.00 I/IrObj to 25.00 I/IrObj 5.00 I/IrObj
sens.char/BFP
_:12091:104 Bus zone gen.:Stabilization 0.10 to 0.80 0.65
factor k
Ext. trip BZ
_:11971:100 Ext. trip BZ:Superv.t. Rel. 0.06 s to 1.00 s 0.06 s
ext. trip BZ
Cross stab.
_:1 Cross stab.:Mode • off off
• on
_:100 Cross stab.:Cross.stab. 0.00 to 1.00 0.40
factor BZ
_:101 Cross stab.:Cross.stab. 0.00 to 1.00 0.40
factor CZ

(Type)
Diff.Prot. general
_:11821:82 Diff.Prot. general:>Block SPS I
_:11821:500 Diff.Prot. general:>Sens. characteristic SPS I

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

(Type)
_:11821:502 Diff.Prot. general:>Add. criterion phs A SPS I
_:11821:503 Diff.Prot. general:>Add. criterion phs B SPS I
_:11821:504 Diff.Prot. general:>Add. criterion phs C SPS I
_:11821:306 Diff.Prot. general:Sens. characteristic SPC C
_:11821:54 Diff.Prot. general:Inactive SPS O
_:11821:52 Diff.Prot. general:Behavior ENS O
_:11821:53 Diff.Prot. general:Health ENS O
_:11821:301 Diff.Prot. general:Activ. sens.char.dist. SPS O
_:11821:302 Diff.Prot. general:Activ. add.crit. dist. ACT O
_:11821:303 Diff.Prot. general:No add. criterion ACT O
_:11821:304 Diff.Prot. general:Sensitive char. active SPS O
_:11821:305 Diff.Prot. general:BI Trip release dist. SPS O
Group indicat.
_:4501:57 Group indicat.:Operate diff. prot. ACT O
Check zone
_:11911:54 Check zone:Inactive SPS O
_:11911:52 Check zone:Behavior ENS O
_:11911:53 Check zone:Health ENS O
_:11911:57 Check zone:Operate diff. prot. ACT O
_:11911:301 Check zone:Operate CB fail. prot. ACT O
_:11911:308 Check zone:Blocked by cross stab. ACT O
_:11911:309 Check zone:Alarm diff.curr.sup. ACT O
_:11911:310 Check zone:Block. by diff.curr.sup. ACT O
_:11911:303 Check zone:Permanent release SPS O
_:11911:306 Check zone:I diff. WYE O
_:11911:307 Check zone:I restr. WYE O
_:11911:330 Check zone:Id A SAV O
_:11911:331 Check zone:Id B SAV O
_:11911:332 Check zone:Id C SAV O
_:11911:333 Check zone:Ir A SAV O
_:11911:334 Check zone:Ir B SAV O
_:11911:335 Check zone:Ir C SAV O
_:11911:336 Check zone:Id_f A SAV O
_:11911:337 Check zone:Id_f B SAV O
_:11911:338 Check zone:Id_f C SAV O
_:11911:339 Check zone:Ir_f A SAV O
_:11911:340 Check zone:Ir_f B SAV O
_:11911:341 Check zone:Ir_f C SAV O
Bus zone gen.
_:12091:54 Bus zone gen.:Inactive SPS O
_:12091:52 Bus zone gen.:Behavior ENS O
_:12091:53 Bus zone gen.:Health ENS O
_:12091:308 Bus zone gen.:Blocked by cross stab. ACT O
_:12091:309 Bus zone gen.:Alarm diff.curr.sup. ACT O
_:12091:310 Bus zone gen.:Alarm zero-cross.sup. SPS O

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

(Type)
Bus zone 1
_:11881:500 Bus zone 1:>Block SPS I
_:11881:503 Bus zone 1:>Block diff. prot. SPS I
_:11881:504 Bus zone 1:>Block CB fail. prot. SPS I
_:11881:501 Bus zone 1:>Ext. trip SPS I
_:11881:502 Bus zone 1:>Trip release SPS I
_:11881:320 Bus zone 1:Block SPC C
_:11881:321 Bus zone 1:Block diff. prot. SPC C
_:11881:322 Bus zone 1:Block CB fail. prot. SPC C
_:11881:54 Bus zone 1:Inactive SPS O
_:11881:52 Bus zone 1:Behavior ENS O
_:11881:53 Bus zone 1:Health ENS O
_:11881:57 Bus zone 1:Operate diff. prot. ACT O
_:11881:300 Bus zone 1:Operate CB fail. prot. ACT O
_:11881:301 Bus zone 1:Operate by ext. trip ACT O
_:11881:346 Bus zone 1:Trip by transfer trip SPS O
_:11881:308 Bus zone 1:Blocked by cross stab. ACT O
_:11881:309 Bus zone 1:Alarm diff.curr.sup. ACT O
_:11881:323 Bus zone 1:Block. by diff.curr.sup. ACT O
_:11881:310 Bus zone 1:Alarm zero-cross.sup. SPS O
_:11881:311 Bus zone 1:No release of operate SPS O
_:11881:312 Bus zone 1:Block. by discon.fault SPS O
_:11881:313 Bus zone 1:Blocked SPS O
_:11881:314 Bus zone 1:BI External trip dist. SPS O
_:11881:315 Bus zone 1:No Ext. trip release SPS O
_:11881:319 Bus zone 1:BI Trip release dist. SPS O
_:11881:325 Bus zone 1:Prefers BZ SPS O
_:11881:326 Bus zone 1:Preferred by BZ SPS O
_:11881:343 Bus zone 1:Block. by comm. failure SPS O
_:11881:344 Bus zone 1:Block. by sync. fault SPS O
_:11881:345 Bus zone 1:Block. by MV offset flt. SPS O
_:11881:342 Bus zone 1:Sw. over to CT overl. ACT O
_:11881:305 Bus zone 1:I diff. WYE O
_:11881:306 Bus zone 1:I restr. WYE O
_:11881:330 Bus zone 1:Id A SAV O
_:11881:331 Bus zone 1:Id B SAV O
_:11881:332 Bus zone 1:Id C SAV O
_:11881:333 Bus zone 1:Ir A SAV O
_:11881:334 Bus zone 1:Ir B SAV O
_:11881:335 Bus zone 1:Ir C SAV O
_:11881:336 Bus zone 1:Id_f A SAV O
_:11881:337 Bus zone 1:Id_f B SAV O
_:11881:338 Bus zone 1:Id_f C SAV O
_:11881:339 Bus zone 1:Ir_f A SAV O
_:11881:340 Bus zone 1:Ir_f B SAV O
_:11881:341 Bus zone 1:Ir_f C SAV O

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

(Type)
CB fail. gen.
_:11941:500 CB fail. gen.:>Block SPS I
_:11941:54 CB fail. gen.:Inactive SPS O
_:11941:52 CB fail. gen.:Behavior ENS O
_:11941:53 CB fail. gen.:Health ENS O
_:11941:301 CB fail. gen.:Operate ACT O
Ext. trip BZ
_:11971:503 Ext. trip BZ:>Block SPS I
_:11971:500 Ext. trip BZ:>Rel. ext. trip SPS I
_:11971:303 Ext. trip BZ:Rel. ext. trip bus zone SPC C
_:11971:54 Ext. trip BZ:Inactive SPS O
_:11971:52 Ext. trip BZ:Behavior ENS O
_:11971:53 Ext. trip BZ:Health ENS O
_:11971:301 Ext. trip BZ:Operate ACT O
_:11971:302 Ext. trip BZ:BI rel. ext.trip dist. SPS O

(Type)
Cross stab.
_:503 Cross stab.:>Block SPS I
_:54 Cross stab.:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Cross stab.:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Cross stab.:Health ENS O
_:300 Cross stab.:Blocked by cross stab. ACT O

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
6.3 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection (1-Pole/3-Pole)
6.3.1 Overview of Function
The Circuit-breaker failure protection function (ANSI 50BF) monitors the tripping of the associated circuit-
breaker (CB) and generates a backup trip signal if the circuit-breaker fails.
The circuit-breaker failure protection in the busbar protection has the following tasks:
• Tripping of the circuit breaker in the bay in the event of errors on the line.
The description for this function is in the following chapters.
• Tripping of all circuit breakers of a busbar section in the event of unsuccessful tripping by the circuit-
breaker failure protection in the bay.
The description of the additional operating modes for this function are in chapter 6.3.4 Circuit-Breaker
Failure Protection in Busbar Protection.
• Monitoring of all circuit breakers in the event of errors within the protection range of the busbar protec-
tion (internal tripping of the busbar section). In the event of unsuccessful tripping of the circuit breaker, a
transfer-trip signal can be transmitted to the opposite end.
The description of this function can be found in chapter 6.5.1 Overview of Functions .
Starting with version V7.50, the previous function CB failure has been replaced with the new circuit-breaker
failure protection with an adaptive algorithm Adaptive CB failure protection. In this way, you achieve a
faster, more reliable detection of the opening of the circuit breaker in the event of complex signal histories.
The 2 functions are identical, with the exception of a slightly increased processor load, in terms of setting
options, logic and indications. Siemens recommends using the adaptive circuit-breaker failure protection and
avoiding mixing the protection types in one device. You can find additional information on the processor load
in DIGSI for each device under Device information in the Resource consumption tab.
The function Circuit-breaker failure protection (CBFP) can be used in the Circuit-breaker function group.
[dw_strbfp, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-20 shows the functionalities and the function control of the function.
The start is initiated by an external protection. Along with the start, the current-flow criterion or the circuit-
breaker auxiliary contact criterion is used to check whether the circuit breaker is closed. If the circuit breaker is
closed, the function picks up and starts the time delay. During the time delay, the system continuously checks
whether the circuit breaker has opened. If this is the case, the function drops out. If the circuit breaker is not
opened, the function trips upon expiration of the time delay.
The following description elaborates on the detailed functionality of the individual function blocks.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[lo_svs_bfp, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-20 Function Logic Overview
The function is started via the device-internal protection functions and/or externally (via a binary input or
interface, for example, GOOSE). The start can be done 1-pole or 3-pole. Figure 6-21 and Figure 6-22 show the
functionality.
Internal Start
In the case of busbar protection, each device-internal protection, such as the differential protection, that has
to control the local circuit breaker starts the inherent circuit-breaker failure protection (see 6.5.1 Overview of
Functions ). You can configure other protection functions, such as overcurrent protection for the internal start,
via the circuit-breaker interaction matrix. The function is started by the tripping of the protection stage. In case
of phase-selective tripping, the start will also be phase-selective. In the default setting, the starting signal
Internal start (see Figure 6-21) is held when the pickup signal is cleared or the protection function has
tripped. The Circuit-breaker failure protection function can in this case only drop out if the circuit breaker is
detected to be open. This is detected using the current flow or circuit-breaker auxiliary-contact criterion. If
necessary, the Circuit-breaker failure protection function can also drop out when the pickup signal is cleared
or the protection function trips (internal starting signal is not held).
Using routing, you can specify whether individual protection stages or protection functions are to be used as
the starting source or whether starting happens only externally.
The internal starting sources are routed in the protection function groups via the Circuit-breaker interaction
entry (for this see 2.1 Function Embedding in the Device , Project tree in DIGSI 5 (excerpt)).

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[lo_intsta_bbp, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-21 Internal CBFP Start
External Start
The parameter Start via binary input is used to set whether the external start is initiated by a 1-
channel or 2-channel signal. The required routing of the input signals is compared with the setting. If a
routing is missing, an error message is generated. The Health signal changes to the state Warning.
[lo_anwext2, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-22 Configuration of the External Start of the Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection Function
In 1-channel mode, start for 1-pole tripping is initiated only with the binary input signals >Start pole A,
>Start pole B or >Start pole C. In the case of 3-pole tripping, start is initiated only with the input
signal>Start 3-pole (see Figure 6-23).
In 2-channel mode, to initiate the start, the binary input signal >Release 1-polemust also be activated, in
case of the 1-pole start, and >Release 3-pole in case of the 3-pole start. In the default setting, the internal
starting signals External start phsx and External start 3-pole drop out immediately when the

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
binary input signals are cleared (see Figure 6-23). If necessary, the internal starting signal can be held. In this
case, the start remains active when the binary input signals are cleared.
The input signals are monitored to avoid an unwanted pickup of the function.
If either of the signals >Start or >Release is active for more than the set monitoring time of the appro-
priate signal without the function picking up, a fault in the binary input circuit is assumed. The corresponding
signal is blocked to exclude an external pickup of the function. An indication to this effect is output, and the
Health signal changes to the state Warning. The blocking is reset as soon as the binary input signal drops out.
Supervision is disabled in the following cases:
• On pickup of the Circuit-breaker failure protection function (only in the case of an external start). This
prevents an unwanted pickup of the supervision if the external protection that starts the Circuit-breaker
failure protection function uses a lockout functionality. When the starting signal drops out, supervision is
enabled again.
• As long as the function or the device is in test mode. This allows to check the function without the super-
vision blocking the function.
If the >Start signal is active and no release signal is present after elapse of a settable monitoring time for the
starting signal, the pickup is blocked and an indication to this effect is output. The Health signal changes to
the state Warning. The blocking is reset with the dropout of the starting signal.
The binary input signals only take effect if the binary inputs are activated for at least 10 ms (SW filter, see
Figure 6-23).

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[lo_ex_lsvs, 4, en_US]
Figure 6-23 External Start of the Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection Function, Logic
1-Pole or Multi-Pole Start

Based on the starting signals, it is determined whether the start in question is 1-pole or multi-pole (see
Figure 6-24). This information is required for starting the various time delays.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[lo_veranw, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-24 Processing the Starting Signals of CBFP
Current-Flow Criterion
The current-flow criterion is the primary criterion for determining the circuit-breaker switch position. A circuit-
breaker pole is supposed to be closed, and the current-flow criterion fulfilled, as soon as one of the phase
currents exceeds the phase-current threshold value, and at the same time a plausibility current exceeds the
associated threshold value. The plausibility current can be either a 2nd phase current (to compare with the
threshold value for phase currents) or the zero-sequence or negative-sequence current (to compare with the
sensitive threshold value). The additional evaluation of the plausibility current increases the safety of a crite-
rion.
In the case of ground faults, the sensitive threshold value can be dynamically applied to the phase currents as
well. The current-flow criterion is in this case fulfilled when the currents exceed the sensitive threshold value.
The phase-current threshold value is then ineffective. The binary signal >Threshold sensitive is used for
the switchover.
If you set the parameter 3I0 criterion to Direct release, you block the plausibility check of the zero-
sequence current. In this way a pickup can only be achieved by way of this current. The Threshold 3I0
dir. release parameter is used to set the threshold value to be exceeded.
If you set the parameter I2 criterion to Direct release, you also switch off the plausibility check of
the negative-sequence current. The Threshold I2 dir. release parameter is used to set the threshold
value to be exceeded.
If you set the parameter I2 criterion to Direct release, plausibility is checked via the phase currents
with 1/3 * Threshold I2 dir. release. This is to prevent a false pickup of the current-flow criterion in
the open pole after a 1-pole OFF.
The measuring algorithm is optimized for fast dropout when the value drops below the threshold value.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[lo_currentk, 4, en_US]
Figure 6-25 Current-Flow Criterion
Circuit-Breaker Auxiliary-Contact Criterion

Settings allow you to specify whether the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts are permitted for determining the
circuit-breaker switch position.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
The following settings are possible:
• In this function, circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts are not used for determining the CB position.
• The position is determined (pole-selective) via the double-point indications Position phsx (from the
Circuit breaker function block).
• The double-point indication 3-pole position (from theCircuit breaker function block) is used to
determine whether all 3 poles of the circuit breaker are closed.
If the double-point indications are not routed, an error message is issued. The Health signal changes to the
state Warning. You must do the routing with the closed contact or the closed and open contact. If this is not
the case, an error message is output, and the Health signal changes to the Warning state.
A detected static disturbed position (not an intermediate position) has the effect that the circuit-breaker auxil-
iary-contact criterion is not used (the signals Aux.co.crit. CB Clsd phsx are inactive).
[lo_hikols, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-26 Circuit-Breaker Auxiliary-Contact Criterion
Pickup/Dropout
After the start, a check is performed whether the circuit breaker or the individual circuit-breaker pole is closed.
The current-flow criterion and the circuit-breaker auxiliary-contact criterion are available for this purpose.
Even if the circuit-breaker auxiliary-contact criterion is permitted, preference is given to the fulfilled current-
flow criterion because it is the most reliable criterion for determining whether the CB or CB pole is closed. This
means that the CB or CB pole is considered to be closed if it is closed according to the current-flow criterion
but, at the same time, open according to the circuit-breaker auxiliary-contact criterion.
If no current is flowing at the start time, the function can only pick up on the basis of the circuit-breaker auxil-
iary-contact criterion. For this purpose, the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts must be permitted as criterion.
When the current begins to flow after the start, the function switches over to the current-flow criterion.
If the circuit breaker or a circuit-breaker pole is detected as closed and a start occurs in this pole, the function
picks up.
The pickup starts a time delay (see Delay/Tripping). While the time delay is running, the system checks contin-
uously whether the circuit breaker or a CB pole has opened. In the default setting, the opening of the circuit
breaker is checked on the basis of the currently valid criterion, which is normally the current-flow criterion
because it is preferred. If until expiration of the time delay, no current flow above the set threshold values has
been detected, the circuit-breaker auxiliary-contact criterion becomes effective.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
The function has also a setting in which dropout is only possible if both criteria detect in parallel the CB or CB
pole to be open (dropout with auxiliary-contact and current-flow criterion).
In the default setting, the internal starting signal is held (see Figure 6-21 and Figure 6-23). This means that
dropout is controlled solely by the current or the circuit-breaker auxiliary-contact criterion. If dropout is also to
occur with a cleared starting signal (that is, with a cleared pickup signal or operate of the protection function),
holding of the start signal must be disabled.
[lo_pickup, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-27 Pickup/Dropout of the Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection Function
Delay/Tripping
In a first step, tripping at the local circuit breaker can be repeated. Tripping is repeated after expiration of the
settable delay T1. You can set various T1 times for a 1-pole and multipole start. In case of a 1-pole start, trip-
ping can be repeated in a 1-pole or 3-pole way depending on the setting. If the local CB was not yet tripped,
for example, in the event of an external start of the circuit-breaker failure protection, the trip logic of the
circuit breaker itself is activated when the time delay T1 elapses.
Time delay T2 (backup tripping) can commence in parallel either with the start of time T1 or after expiration of
time T1. You can set various T2 times for a 1-pole and multipole start.
If the assigned 1-pole period is initially started by a 1-pole start and a multiphase short circuit and multiphase
start occur subsequently, the corresponding multiphase period is also started so that the both periods run in
parallel. Tripping is determined by the period that expires first.
When there is a 1-pole start with 3-pole trip repeat, the 3-pole T2 time is started.
If time delay T2 expires without a dropout of the function, a circuit-breaker failure is assumed, and the backup
tripping signal Trip T2 is generated. The Trip T2 activates busbar protection. This tripping is always 3-

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
pole. A transfer-trip signal can be sent to the opposite end if necessary. Thus, the circuit breaker on the oppo-
site end can be tripped without delay.
If the >CB defect input signal is valid, any repetition of the trip signal is suppressed, and the backup tripping
signal T2 is generated immediately (without delay). The binary input of the >CB defect input signal must be
activated for at least 20 ms before the signal becomes valid.
With the CB failure pole indication, you can determine the phase currents that are above the set
threshold value at the tripping time T2.
The Minimum operate time parameter defines the minimum duration for tripping the function. In contrast
to other protection functions, the parameter is set within its own function. As a result, the setting is inde-
pendent of the identically named superordinate parameter that is set in the Device settings.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[lo_bbp-verzau-1ph, 6, en_US]
Figure 6-28 Delay/Tripping of the Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection Function
With the Immediate dropout parameter, you determine whether the circuit-breaker switch position is
checked continuously or before expiration of the T1 and T2 time delays. If the circuit-breaker switch position is
checked once the time delays have expired, the function picks up using Start.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
6.3.4 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection in Busbar Protection
The circuit-breaker failure protection in busbar protection specifies a circuit-breaker failure with a short circuit
in the feeder or with a short circuit in the busbar.
If a short circuit occurs in the feeder, a circuit-breaker failure leads to selective disconnection of the busbar
section on which the feeder with the defective circuit breaker is connected. In addition, an intertripping
command is output in order to also switch off the opposite line end.
If a short circuit in the busbar and a circuit-breaker failure occur, at the opposite end of the line the infeed of
the current must be interrupted. For this purpose, the Trip T2 is output.
If the circuit-breaker failure protection works together with the busbar protection, with pick up of Trip T2,
the busbar protection is activated. If the circuit breaker has not opened, the busbar protection trips the
assigned busbar section.
There are 2 operating modes available for tripping the busbar:
• Unbalancing
• I> Query
NOTE
i If an active end-fault protection has already set the feeder current to 0, no unbalancing will be performed.
The operating mode is set in the Circuit breaker function group under General separately for each bay. In this
way, the function can be optimally adapted to the operating conditions, for example to the type of feeder or
the short-circuit currents.
NOTE
i You must differentiate between the centralized busbar protection, the distributed busbar protection (IEC
61850 compliant), and the distributed busbar protection.
• Centralized: The start occurs in parallel with the Trip T2 for the busbar function group.
• Decentralized (IEC 61850-compliant): Route the Trip T2 from the merging unit to the external trip-
ping in the bay using GOOSE.
• Distributed: If you have set the CBFP interact. with dBBP parameter to Yes for the circuit-
breaker failure protection in the merging units, the starting signal is transferred.
[dw_ls_ssys, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-29 Interaction of Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection and Busbar Protection
The corresponding application and setting notes are in chapter 5.3.3 Application and Setting Notes

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Unbalancing Operating Mode

For Op. mode BFP = unbalancing, the polarity of the current measured in the feeder after elapse of T2 is
reversed if the feeder current exceeds the set threshold value. This unbalanced current is included in the calcu-
lation according to the differential protection principle. Thus, the threshold values of the circuit-breaker failure
protection (parameter (_:102) Threshold phase current or parameter (_:101) Threshold
sensitive) are used as threshold values for the differential protection. A differential current results from
the reverse polarity current in the feeder through which the busbar differential protection triggers all the
circuit breakers assigned to the busbar section via the disconnector image.
The advantages of this operating mode are:
• Extremely short dropout times by the use of instantaneous values
• No high demands on the dropout time of the feeder protection
• No danger of undesirable tripping even with longer dropout times since the current flow from the circuit
breaker is already interrupted and thus no differential current occurs due to the unbalancing.
• Use of the same algorithms and the same trip logic as the busbar differential protection.
Characteristic Curves for the Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection

For Op. mode BFP = unbalancing, the circuit-breaker failure protection can work with a standard charac-
teristic curve and a sensitive characteristic.
Low-current faults are recorded with more sensitive operate curves for the circuit-breaker failure.
The characteristic curves can be switched via the binary input >Sens. characteristic.
The stabilization factor k is set fixed to 0.2.
[dw_char_svs, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-30 Characteristic Curves of the Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection
I> Query Operating Mode

For Op. mode BFP = I> query, all the circuit breakers assigned directly via the disconnector image to the
busbar section are tripped if the feeder current exceeds the set threshold value.
CBFP interact. with dBBP

If you use a merging unit as the bay unit of the distributed busbar protection, the CBFP interact. with
dBBP parameter becomes visible following a successful central-unit update. With this parameter, you specify
whether the function interacts with the distributed busbar protection.
Figure 6-31 gives an overview of the functions involved in an external start of the CBFP function. In the case of
an internal start, there is no external protection device and the protection functionality is located in the CBFP
device.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[lo_aus_1bf, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-31 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection with External Pole-Selective Start, Pole-Selective Tripping
Repetition, and 3-Pole Tripping (T2)
Routing: Configuration of Internal Starting Sources (Internal Protection Function)

Configuration of the internal starting sources takes place in the protection function groups via the Circuit-
breaker interaction entry (for this, see 2.1 Function Embedding in the Device ).
Depending on the specific application, it can be necessary to exclude certain device-internal protection func-
tions from starting the CBFP. For instance, busbar disconnection following a local circuit-breaker failure may
be undesirable in the case of load-shedding applications or ground faults in isolated/resonant-grounded
systems.
Where a start exclusively from external sources is required, all internal protection functions must be routed so
that they are excluded as a starting source.
Manual routing is necessary only for overcurrent protection. The disconnector image provides the internal
start by way of the Integrated circuit-breaker failure protection (6.5.1 Overview of Functions ).

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Parameter: Mode (CBFP in the bay)
• Default setting (_:1) Mode = on

off The CBFP is switched off in the bay
on The CBFP is effective in the bay
If the mode of the Busbar function group (parameter (_:12151:1)
Mode) is also in the mode on, the trip command goes to the command
output.
test The CBFP in the bay is in test mode.
Blocking tripping in the CBFP for the appropriate bay.
Mode) is also in test mode, all indications are assigned the marker Test.
Operate indications do not go to the command output.
For additional information on the behavior of the circuit-breaker failure
protection in test mode, refer to 6.5.4 Application and Setting Notes.
Parameter: Start via binary input
• Default setting (_:107) Start via binary input = no

no If no external start is intended, the parameter is set to no.
2 channel 2-channel start is used if there is a danger that the circuit-breaker failure
protection causes a tripping due to a faulty activation of the start binary
input. This is the case in the following situations:
a) The CBFP pickup value (threshold value) is set to less than the load
current.
b) There may be operating conditions under which the current flow is
higher than the pickup value.
To avoid a possible overfunction, Siemens recommends using the 2-channel
start.
1 channel The 1-channel start must be used where only one control circuit is available
for starting the CBFP. Siemens AG also recommends in this case to use 2-
channel activation, so that, with a defective binary input, no overfunction
occurs.
Input Signals: >Start, >Release

The start and release input signals have a filtering time of 10 ms as default setting. If a transient control signal
to the binary inputs is to be expected due to the design of the external binary-input control circuits and due to
environmental conditions, the filtering time can be extended. This delays the start of the CBFP function.
Input Signals Description
>Start pole A The start input signal is linked with the tripping of the external protection
>Start pole B device. When the external protection trips phase-segregated, the CBFP can
>Start pole C be started phase-segregated using the input signals >Start phsx
(Figure 6-31).
>Start 3-pole
>Release 1-pole The release input signal is normally linked with the pickup of the external
>Release 3-pole protection device (Figure 6-31). Another common configuration is the
parallel wiring of the external trip initiation to both binary inputs (start and
release).
The inputs are not effective in the Bay not in operation mode.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Parameter: Supervision time f. release signal
• Default setting (_:108) Sup.time f. release signal = 0.06 s

The setting depends on the external function which generates the release signal. If the pickup or tripping of
the external protection is used as release signal, the default setting can be kept. If it is ensured that the release
signal is always present before the start signal, the time can be set to 0.
Parameter: Holding internal start ssignal
• Recommended setting value (_:105) Holding int. start signal = yes

yes In the case of an internal start, the start signal is hold. The dropout of the
CBFP depends exclusively on the determination of the circuit-breaker posi-
tion.
This setting must be selected if it is not ensured that all 3 poles of the CB
have opened when the pickup signal of the protection function has a falling
edge.
Siemens recommends using this method as the standard method.
no Latching of the start signal can be deactivated if it is ensured by the applica-
tion that the CB has reliably opened when the start signal has a falling edge.
If the CBFP is explicitly required to drop out when the start signal has a
falling edge, latching of the start signal can also be deactivated.
EXAMPLE
Holding Internal Start Signal (Setting Value: Yes)

In the presence of a 2-pole fault, only one contact of the CB opens. The fault current is thus reduced, and the
starting phase short-circuit protection drops out.
Parameter: Holding external start signal
• Recommended setting value (_:106) Holding ext. start signal = no

no The CBFP drops out when the external start signal has a falling edge. This
setting prevents the CBFP from generating a tripping signal when an
unwanted pulse is received at the binary input and the current flow is high
enough.
yes You can hold the start signal if it is not ensured that the circuit breaker is
open when the external start signal has a falling edge (pulse mode).
EXAMPLE
Holding External Start Signal (Setting Value: Yes)

The function is started from the opposite end via an auxiliary device for command transmission. This device
generates only a signal pulse.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
NOTE
i Siemens would like to point out that, with a hold signal, the CBFP generates a trip signal each time a
starting pulse is received and the current flow is high enough. Remember this particularly in the case of an
external start!
If you are working with the Off repetition, tripping only occurs in this feeder in the event of a false pickup.
Parameter: Threshold phase current/Threshold sensitive
• Recommended setting value (_:102) Threshold phase current = approx. 0.50 Isc, min
• Recommended setting value (_:101) Threshold sensitive = approx. 0.25 Isc,min
In order to ensure that the disconnection of the fault is promptly detected and the function can drop out
quickly, Siemens recommends setting both thresholds to half the minimum short-circuit current (Isc, min).
If – depending on the neutral-point treatment and/or load conditions – ground faults lead to relatively low
fault currents, a sensitive setting of the parameter Threshold sensitive must be selected according to
the rule (0.5 Isc, min). There can also be values which are noticeably below the rated or load current.
Input signal: >Threshold sensitive

In order to ensure that the function picks up reliably in all switch positions of the power system (examples:
opposite end of line open, switching onto a ground fault), the setting of the parameter Threshold sensi-
tive can be applied dynamically to all currents – including phase currents – in the presence of ground faults.
For this purpose, the binary signal >Threshold sensitive must be activated. The signal from a separate
ground-fault detection device can be injected using a binary input.
Parameter: Circuit-breaker auxiliary-contact criterion allowed
• Recommended setting value (_:103) CB aux.cont. crit. allowed = no

no If sufficient current flow is ensured under all conditions with the CB closed,
Siemens recommends not to permit the auxiliary contacts as a further crite-
rion for determining the CB position, because measurement based on the
current flow is the most reliable criterion.
w. 'CB pos. closed 3p.' The auxiliary contacts are permitted as a further criterion in applications
w. 'CB pos. closed Lx' (see the following examples) where the current is no reliable criterion for
determining the circuit-breaker position.
When the protection trips phase-segregated, it makes sense to link also the
auxiliary contacts to the device phase-segregated to ensure a pole-selective
detection of the position To do this, select w. 'CB pos. closed Lx'.
If pole-selective detection is not possible, set to w. 'CB pos. closed
3p.'. Observe that the CB is deemed open as soon as the 1st pole has
opened.
Parameter: 3I0 criterion
• Recommended setting value (_:120) 3I0 criterion = Plausibility check

Plausibility check The ground current is only used to check the plausibility of the phase
currents. The value set under the parameter Threshold sensitive is
used as the threshold for the ground current.
Direct release The current-flow criterion can be fulfilled only by the ground current
without the phase currents exceeding their set threshold value. The value
set under the parameter Threshold 3I0 dir. release is used in this
case as the threshold for the ground current.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
NOTE
i The setting value Direct release can cause inadvertent tripping of the circuit-breaker failure protection
when 1-pole tripping of the circuit breaker is set.
If you set the parameter 3I0 criterion to Direct release, Siemens recommends that you also set the
parameter Op. mode BFP to I> query. In the event of a tripping of the circuit-breaker failure protection
caused solely by a ground current, reversing the poles of the bay current does not result in a reliable fault
clearing by busbar protection.
If you have set the Threshold phase current to be larger than the maximum load current, overfunction
because of a false start is impossible. To ensure Circuit-breaker failure protection for smaller ground faults
even with this setting, you can select 3I0 criterion to be Direct release and Threshold 3I0 dir.
release to be appropriately smaller than Threshold phase current.
Parameter: I2 criterion
• Recommended setting value (_:121) I2 criterion = Plausibility check

Plausibility check The negative-sequence current is only used to check the plausibility of the
phase currents. The value set under the parameter Threshold sensi-
tive is used as the threshold for the negative-sequence current.
Direct release If a phase current exceeds 1/3 of the Threshold I2 dir. release, the
current-flow criterion can be fulfilled only by the negative-sequence current
without the phase currents exceeding their set threshold value. The
threshold for the negative-sequence current uses the value set in the
Threshold I2 dir. release parameter in this case.
If you set the parameter I2 criterion to Direct release, Siemens recommends that you also set the
caused only by a negative-sequence current, reversing the poles of the bay current does not result in a reliable
fault clearing by busbar protection.
because of a false start is impossible. To have Circuit-breaker failure protection function for smaller unbal-
anced faults even with this setting, you can select I2 criterion to be Direct release and Threshold
3I0 dir. release to be appropriately smaller than Threshold phase current.
Parameter: Threshold 3I0 dir. release

Recommended setting value (_:122) Threshold 3I0 dir. release = approx. 0.5 Iscmin
This parameter is effective only if the 3I0 criterionparameter is set to Direct release. Siemens
recommends setting the threshold to half the minimum short-circuit current (Iscmin) to ensure that the discon-
nection of the fault is promptly detected and the function can drop out quickly.
Parameter: Threshold I2 dir. release

Recommended setting value (_:123) Threshold I2 dir. release = approx. 0.5 I2min
This parameter is effective only if the I2 criterionparameter is set to Direct release. Siemens recom-
mends setting the parameter to half the permissible negative-sequence current (I2min) to achieve a fast fault
clearing in the event of an undesired negative-sequence system component.
Parameters: Monit. time for BI ">Start"/Monit.tm. f.BI ">Release"
• Default setting (_:124) Monit. time for BI ">Start" = 15 s
• Default setting (_:125) Monit.tm. f.BI ">Release" = 15 s

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
With these parameters, you set the monitoring time of the binary inputs >Start/>Release. If the Circuit-
breaker failure protection does not pick up during this monitoring time, a failure in the binary-input circuit is
assumed. Siemens recommends retaining the default setting of 15 s.
EXAMPLES
Applications which Require you to Permit the Circuit-Breaker Auxiliary-Contact Criterion:
• Tripping of protection functions whose tripping decision is not based on a current measurement in
combination with voltage or frequency protection functions
• Injection of the tripping signal from Buchholz protection
Parameter: Dropout
• Recommended setting value (_:104) Dropout = with effective criterion

The parameter Dropout is available if the circuit-breaker auxiliary contact criterion is permitted (see param-
eter CB aux.cont. crit. allowed).
with effective crite- Siemens recommends keeping the default setting, because it prefers the
rion current as a reliable criterion for detection of an open CB and thus for
dropout of the CBFP function.
w. aux.c. and Select this setting for applications on transformers or generators (see the
curr.crit. preceding examples) in which the current flow is such that the current is no
longer a reliable criterion for detecting the opening of the CB.
Parameter: Retrip
• Default setting (_:110) Retrip after T1 = no

no Where no redundant CB control is provided, a repetition of the trip signal to
the local CB is not required.
start T2 after T1 Where a redundant CB control (2nd trip coil with 2 trip circuits) is provided,
a repetition of the trip signal to the local CB makes sense.
Siemens recommends the setting start T2 after T1 because it
provides a clear chronological separation of the processes for trip repeat
and backup tripping. Remember here that the overall fault-clearance time in
case of a failure of the local CB is the sum of T1 and T2.
parallel start T2, T1 Alternatively to setting start T2 after T1, parallel start T2,
T1 can be started.
Parameter: Retrip 1-/3-pole
• Default setting (_:109)Retrip 1-/3-pole = 3-pole

In the case of 1-pole faults, you can select 1-pole or 3-pole for the trip repetition.
Parameters: Delay T1 for 1-pole retrip, Delay T1 for 3-pole retrip
• Default setting (_:113) Delay T1 for 1-pole retrip = 0.05 s

The parameters are visible only when the repetition of tripping is set.
For most applications, the time delays for the 1-pole and the 3-pole (multipole) start are set equally.
The setting depends on the user's philosophy.
The following settings make sense:

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
• If the minimum fault-clearing time has top priority, Siemens recommends setting the time to 0. This
setting causes initiation of the retrip immediately upon the start. The drawback is that a defect of the 1st
trip circuit is not detected.
• With a small time delay of, for instance, 50 ms, the defect of the 1st trip circuit can be detected based on
the evaluation of the fault record.
• With a long time delay, which reliably ensures the dropout of the CBFP with the CB open, the rising edge
indication of the trip repeat Retrip T1 is a sure signal for a fault in the 1st trip circuit. The following
example shows how this time is determined.
EXAMPLE
Determining the T1 Time that Reliably Ensures the Dropout of the CBFP with the CB Open:
Time of binary device output 5 ms

(when tripping is caused by device-internal protec-
tion)
CB inherent time up to current interruption 2 periods (assumed rated frequency = 50 Hz)
Dropout time of CBFP function 1 period
Subtotal 65 ms
Security Factor 2
Total (time T1) 130 ms
EXAMPLE
Different T1 Times, Depending on Whether the Start was 1-Pole or 3-Pole:

The protection tripping can be 1-pole. 1-pole tripping results in a 1-pole AREC. The trip repeat prompted by the
CBFP should be 3-pole on principle.
Under these circumstances, the T1 time can be set short (for example 50 ms) in a 3-pole start. The T1 time for
1-pole start, however, must be set to the full clearance time (for example, 130 ms) because the 2 healthy
phases are to be tripped only in case of an authentic circuit-breaker failure.
Parameter: Delay T2 for 1-pole trip, Delay T2 for 3-pole trip
• Default setting (_:114) Delay T2 for 1-pole trip = 0.13 s

This setting has to ensure that after opening of the local CB the function drops out reliably and that backup
tripping is avoided under all circumstances. The setting depends on the parameter Retrip after T1.
If T2 is started after T1, there is no need to consider the time T1 for the setting of T2.
EXAMPLE

tion)
Subtotal 65 ms
Security Factor 2

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
If T1 and T2 are started in parallel, take into account the time T1 for the setting of T2.
EXAMPLE
Simultaneous Start of T2 and T1
Time for a reliable dropout after the local CB has 130 ms

opened
Setting of T1 50 ms
Total (= T2) 180 ms
Various times can be set for a 1-pole and 3-pole (multipole) start. In the presence of 1-phase short circuits –
that do not jeopardize network stability – it can make sense to allow more time to the local CB (such as twice
the clearance time: 2 x 130 ms = 260 ms), expecting that the CB will open yet. This way, tripping of the
surrounding CBs can be avoided.

The Minimum operate time parameter is used to set the minimum duration for tripping the function.
! CAUTION
Too short setting times for the minimum tripping duration
If you set a time that is too short for tripping, there is a risk (dropout of the function without the
current-flow criterion) that the device contacts will interrupt the control loop. If this happens, the
device contacts will burn out.
² Set a minimum time period that is long enough to ensure that the circuit breaker reliably reaches the
end position Open after a control operation.
Input Signal: >CB defect

The input signal >CB defect has a default filtering time of 20 ms. This filtering time prevents the input
signal from becoming effective in the case of a transient activation of the physical binary input, which can be
caused by the pressure change when the CB opens.
This time can be set to 0 if such a transient pickup of the physical binary input can be excluded due to the CB
design.
Output Signal: Retrip T1

If only 1 control circuit is available for the local circuit breaker, the output signal does not necessarily have to
be routed because the signal also controls the circuit-breaker trip logic.
If a 2nd control circuit is present, the Retrip T1 output signal must be routed to the associated binary
output.
Output Signal: Trip T2

For operational handling of the adjacent circuit breakers, the backup tripping (indication Trip T2) must if
necessary, to a binary output or an interface (intertripping to opposite end). Thus, the circuit breaker on the
opposite end can be tripped without delay.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Parameter: CBFP interact. with dBBP
• Default setting (_:153) CBFP interact. with dBBP = No

If you use a merging unit as the bay unit of the distributed busbar protection, the CBFP interact.
with dBBP parameter becomes visible after the successful central-unit update in the merging unit.

no With this parameter, you specify that this function operates independently
from the distributed busbar protection.
yes With this parameter, the function will work with the distributed busbar
protection.
Parameter: Immediate dropout
• Recommended setting (_:154) Immediate dropout =

The criteria are checked on continuously and the circuit-breaker failure
protection drops out immediately once the criteria have no longer been
met.
Siemens recommends keeping this setting.
This setting is used to take alternating load cases into account in the event
of a fault, for example when using a breaker-and-a-half layout. The time
delays and function pickup are actuated only using a starter. The criteria for
determining a closed circuit breaker are only checked once the time delays
have expired. Select the monitoring times for the binary inputs >Start and
>Release in such a way that supervision for these inputs does not respond
prior to achieving the current or circuit-breaker auxiliary-contact criterion.
Parameter: BI start external latch
• Default setting (_:155) BI start external latch =

In the case of buffered sources (for example lock-out mechanism after trip-
ping) the start binary signal is latched externally after the protection trip.
This means that the binary-input supervision remains inactive until the
binary-input source has been reset. Supervision is only activated after this
has taken place.
In the case of sources that are not buffered for an external start, the expect-
ation is that they will drop out once the circuit-breaker failure protection
has picked up. If this is not the case, the binary input may fail. This is why
this setting results in binary-input supervision being reactivated once the
Circuit-breaker failure protection function drops out.
6.3.6 Settings

50BF Ad.CBF #
_:1 50BF Ad.CBF #:Mode • off on
• on
• test
_:105 50BF Ad.CBF #:Holding • no yes
int. start signal
• yes

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

_:107 50BF Ad.CBF #:Start via • no no
binary input
• 2 channel
• 1 channel
_:106 50BF Ad.CBF #:Holding • no no
ext. start signal
• yes
_:108 50BF Ad.CBF #:Sup.time 0.00 s to 1.00 s 0.06 s
f. release signal
_:103 50BF Ad.CBF #:CB • no no
aux.cont. crit. allowed
• w. 'CB pos. closed 3p.'
• w. 'CB pos. closed Lx'
_:104 50BF Ad.CBF #:Dropout • with effective criterion with effective
criterion
• w. aux.c. and curr.crit.
_:110 50BF Ad.CBF #:Retrip • no no
after T1
• start T2 after T1
• parallel start T2, T1
_:109 50BF Ad.CBF #:Retrip • 3-pole 3-pole
1-/3-pole
• 1-pole
_:102 50BF Ad.CBF #:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.500 A
_:111 50BF Ad.CBF #:Delay T1 0.000 s to 60.000 s 0.250 s
for 3-pole retrip
for 1-pole retrip
for 3-pole trip
for 1-pole trip
_:115 50BF Ad.CBF #:Minimum 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.10 s
operate time
_:120 50BF Ad.CBF #:3I0 crite- • Direct release Plausibility
rion check
• Plausibility check
_:121 50BF Ad.CBF #:I2 crite- • Direct release Plausibility
rion check
3I0 dir. release 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 1.25 A
I2 dir. release 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 1.25 A
_:124 50BF Ad.CBF #:Monit. 0.05 s to 60.00 s 15.00 s
time for BI ">Start"
_:125 50BF Ad.CBF 0.05 s to 60.00 s 15.00 s
#:Monit.tm. f.BI
">Release"

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

_:154 50BF Ad.CBF #:Imme- • 0 true
diate dropout
• 1
_:155 50BF Ad.CBF #:BI start • 0 true
external latch
• 1
Table 6-1 Starting with V8.40, the Merging Units have the Following Enhancement that is Especially
Intended for Use with the Distributed Busbar Protection and Evaluated there:

50BF Ad.CBF #
_:153 50BF Ad.CBF #:CBFP • no no
interact. with dBBP
• yes

(Type)
50BF Ad.CBF #
_:501 50BF Ad.CBF #:>Start 3-pole SPS I
_:502 50BF Ad.CBF #:>Start pole A SPS I
_:503 50BF Ad.CBF #:>Start pole B SPS I
_:504 50BF Ad.CBF #:>Start pole C SPS I
_:506 50BF Ad.CBF #:>Release 3-pole SPS I
_:505 50BF Ad.CBF #:>Release 1-pole SPS I
_:82 50BF Ad.CBF #:>Block function SPS I
_:507 50BF Ad.CBF #:>CB defect SPS I
_:500 50BF Ad.CBF #:>Threshold sensitive SPS I
_:54 50BF Ad.CBF #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 50BF Ad.CBF #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 50BF Ad.CBF #:Health ENS O
_:55 50BF Ad.CBF #:Pickup ACD O
_:309 50BF Ad.CBF #:Retrip T1 ACT O
_:310 50BF Ad.CBF #:Trip T2 ACT O
_:306 50BF Ad.CBF #:BI start routing miss. SPS O
_:308 50BF Ad.CBF #:BI aux.ct. rout. miss. SPS O
_:300 50BF Ad.CBF #:Fail. BI 'Start 3pole' SPS O
_:301 50BF Ad.CBF #:Fail. BI 'Start poleA' SPS O
_:302 50BF Ad.CBF #:Fail. BI 'Start poleB' SPS O
_:303 50BF Ad.CBF #:Fail. BI 'Start poleC' SPS O
_:305 50BF Ad.CBF #:Fail. BI 'release 3p.' SPS O
_:304 50BF Ad.CBF #:Fail. BI 'release 1p.' SPS O
_:311 50BF Ad.CBF #:Fail. no BI release 3p SPS O
_:312 50BF Ad.CBF #:Fail. no BI rel.pole A SPS O
_:313 50BF Ad.CBF #:Fail. no BI rel.pole B SPS O
_:314 50BF Ad.CBF #:Fail. no BI rel.pole C SPS O
_:315 50BF Ad.CBF #:Immediate Operate SPS O
_:316 50BF Ad.CBF #:CB failure pole ACD O

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
6.4 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection (3-Pole)
The Circuit-breaker failure protection function (ANSI 50BF) monitors the tripping of the associated circuit-
breaker (CB) and generates a backup trip signal if the circuit-breaker fails.
The circuit-breaker failure protection in the busbar protection has the following tasks:
• Tripping of the circuit breaker in the bay in the event of errors on the line.
The description for this function is in the following chapters.
• Tripping of all circuit breakers of a busbar section in the event of unsuccessful tripping by the circuit-
breaker failure protection in the bay.
The description of the additional operating modes for this function are in chapter 6.3.4 Circuit-Breaker
Failure Protection in Busbar Protection.
• Monitoring of all circuit breakers in the event of errors within the protection range of the busbar protec-
tion (internal tripping of the busbar section). In the event of unsuccessful tripping of the circuit breaker, a
transfer-trip signal can be transmitted to the opposite end.
The description of this function can be found in chapter 6.5.1 Overview of Functions .
Starting with version V7.50, the previous function CB failure has been replaced with the new Circuit-breaker
failure protection with an adaptive algorithm Adaptive CB failure protection. In this way, you achieve a
faster, more reliable detection of the opening of the circuit breaker in the event of complex signal histories.
The 2 functions are identical, with the exception of a slightly increased processor load, in terms of setting
options, logic and indications. Siemens recommends using the adaptive circuit-breaker failure protection and
avoiding mixing the protection types in one device. You can find additional information on the processor load
in DIGSI for each device under Device information in the Resource consumption tab.
The function Circuit-breaker failure protection (CBFP) can be used in the Circuit-breaker function group.
[dw_strbfp, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-20 shows the functionalities and the function control of the function.
The start is initiated by an external protection. Along with the start, the current-flow criterion or the circuit-
breaker auxiliary contact criterion is used to check whether the circuit breaker is closed. If the circuit breaker is
closed, the function picks up and starts the time delay. During the time delay, the system continuously checks
whether the circuit breaker has opened. If this is the case, the function drops out. If the circuit breaker is not
opened, the function trips upon expiration of the time delay.
The following description elaborates on the detailed functionality of the individual function blocks.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[lo_svs_bfp, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-33 Function Logic Overview
The circuit-breaker failure protection function is started by device-internal protection functions and/or exter-
nally (via a binary input or an interface, such as GOOSE). Figure 6-34 and Figure 6-35 show the functionality.
Internal Start
In the case of busbar protection, each device-internal protection, such as the differential protection that has to
control the local circuit breaker starts the integrated circuit-breaker failure protection (see 6.5.1 Overview of
Functions ). You can configure other protection functions, such as overcurrent protection for the internal start,
via the circuit-breaker interaction matrix. The function is started by the tripping of the protection stage. In the
default setting, the starting signal Internal start (see Figure 6-34) is held when the pickup signal has a
falling edge or the protection function has tripped. The circuit-breaker failure protection function can in this
case only drop out if the circuit breaker is detected to be open. This is detected using the current flow or
circuit-breaker auxiliary contact criterion. If necessary, the circuit-breaker failure protection function can also
drop out when the pickup signal has a falling edge or the protection function trips (internal starting signal is
not held).
You can use routing to determine whether individual protection stages or protection functions are used as a
starting source or whether the start is only supposed to be external.
The internal starting sources are routed in the protection function groups via the Circuit-breaker interaction
entry (for this, see 2.1 Function Embedding in the Device ).

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[lo_anwint, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-34 Internal Start of the Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection Function
External Start
The parameter Start via binary input is used to set whether the external start is initiated by a 1-
channel or 2-channel signal. The required routing of the input signals is compared with the setting. If a
routing is missing, an error message is generated. The Health signal changes to the state Warning.
[lo_anwext, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-35 Configuration of the External Start of the Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection Function
In 1-channel operation, the start is initiated with the binary input signal >Start only.
In 2-channel operation, the binary input signal >Release must also be activated to initiate the start. In the
default setting, the starting signal External start drops out immediately when the input signals have a
falling edge (see Figure 6-36). If necessary, the starting signal can be held. In this case, the start remains
active when the binary input signals have a falling edge.
The input signals are monitored to avoid an unwanted pickup of the function.
If either of the signals >Start or >Release is active for more than the set supervision time of the corre-
sponding signal without the function being picked up, an error in the binary input circuit is assumed. The
corresponding signal is blocked to exclude an external pickup of the function. An indication to this effect is
output, and the Health signal changes to the state Warning. The blocking is reset as soon as the binary input
signal drops out.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Supervision is disabled in the following cases:
• On pickup of the circuit-breaker failure protection function (only in the case of an external start). This
prevents an unwanted pickup of the supervision if the external protection that starts the circuit-breaker
failure protection function uses a lockout functionality. When the starting signal drops out, supervision is
enabled again.
• As long as the function or the device is in test mode. This allows to check the function without the super-
vision blocking the function.
If the >Start signal is active and no release signal is present after elapse of the settable supervision time for
the starting signal, the pickup is blocked and an indication to this effect is output. The Health signal changes
to the state Warning. The blocking is reset with the dropout of the starting signal.
The binary input signals only take effect if the binary inputs are activated for at least 10 ms (SW filter, see
Figure 6-36).
[lo_ext, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-36 External Start of the Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection Function, Logic
breaker pole is supposed to be closed, and the current-flow criterion fulfilled, as soon as one of the phase
currents exceeds the phase-current threshold value, and at the same time a plausibility current exceeds the
associated threshold value. The plausibility current can be either a 2nd phase current (to compare with the
threshold value for phase currents) or the zero-sequence or negative-sequence current (to compare with the

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
sensitive threshold value). The additional evaluation of the plausibility current increases the safety of the crite-
rion.
well. The current-flow criterion is fulfilled when the currents exceed the sensitive threshold value. The phase-
current threshold value is then ineffective. The binary signal >Threshold sensitive is used for the switch-
over.
If you set the parameter 3I0 criterion to Direct release, you block the plausibility check of the zero-
sequence current. In this way, a pickup can only be achieved by way of this current. The Threshold 3I0
dir. release parameter is used to set the threshold value to be exceeded.
If you set the parameter I2 criterion to Direct release, you also switch off the plausibility check of
the negative-sequence current. The Threshold I2 dir. release parameter is used to set the threshold
If you set the parameter I2 criterion to Direct release, a plausibility check is performed via the phase
currents with 1/3 * Threshold I2 dir. release.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[lo_current1, 4, en_US]
Circuit-Breaker Auxiliary Contact Criterion

Settings allow you to specify whether the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts are permitted for determining the
circuit-breaker switch position. The circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts are mainly used under low-current fault
conditions.
The double-point indication 3-pole position (from the Circuit-breaker function block) is used to deter-
mine whether all 3 poles of the circuit breaker are closed. If the double-point indication is not routed, the
output is an error message. Furthermore, the Health signal changes to the state Warning.
The detection of a static disturbed position (not an intermediate position) has the effect that the circuit-
breaker auxiliary contact criterion is not used (the internal signal Aux.co.crit.: CB Clsd is disabled).

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[lo_criter, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-38 Circuit-Breaker Auxiliary Contact Criterion
Pickup/Dropout
After the start, a check is performed whether the circuit breaker is closed. The current-flow criterion and the
circuit-breaker auxiliary contact criterion are available for this purpose.
Even if the circuit-breaker auxiliary contact criterion is permitted, preference is given to the fulfilled current-
flow criterion because the current-flow criterion is the most reliable criterion for detecting whether the circuit
breaker is closed. This means that the circuit breaker is deemed to be closed if it is closed according to the
current-flow criterion but at the same time open according to the circuit-breaker auxiliary contact criterion.
If no current is flowing at the start time, the function can only pick up on the basis of the circuit-breaker auxil-
iary contact criterion. For this purpose, the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts must be permitted as criterion.
When the current begins to flow after the start, the function switches over to the current-flow criterion.
If the circuit breaker is detected as closed and the starting condition is present, the function picks up.
The pickup starts a time delay (see Delay/Tripping). While the delay is running, the system checks continuously
whether the circuit breaker has opened. In the default setting, the opening of the circuit breaker is checked on
the basis of the currently valid criterion, which is normally the current-flow criterion because it is preferred. If
until expiration of the time delay, no current flow above the set threshold values has been detected, the
circuit-breaker auxiliary contact criterion becomes effective.
The function has also a setting in which dropout is only possible if both criteria in parallel detect the circuit
breaker to be open (dropout with auxiliary contact and current-flow criterion).
In the default setting, the internal starting signal is held (see Figure 6-34 and Figure 6-36). This means that
dropout is controlled solely by the current or the circuit-breaker auxiliary contact criterion. If dropout is also to
occur on the falling edge of the starting signal (that is, when the pickup signal has a falling edge or the protec-
tion function trips), holding of the start signal must be disabled.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[lo_pickup1, 4, en_US]
Figure 6-39 Pickup/Dropout of the Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection Function
Delay/Tripping
In a first step, tripping at the local circuit breaker can be repeated. Tripping is repeated after expiration of the
settable delay T1. If the local CB was not yet tripped, for example, in the event of an external start of the
circuit-breaker failure protection, the trip logic of the circuit breaker itself is activated when the time delay T1
elapses.
Time delay T2 (backup tripping) can commence in parallel either with the start of time T1 or after expiration of
time T1.
If time delay T2 expires without a dropout of the function, a circuit-breaker failure is assumed and the backup
tripping signal Tripping T2 is output. The Trip T2 activates the integrated circuit-breaker failure protec-
tion. If needed a transfer-trip signal is sent to the opposite end. Thus, the circuit breaker on the opposite end
can be tripped without delay.
If the >CB defect input signal is valid, any repetition of the trip signal is suppressed, and the backup tripping
signal T2 is generated immediately (without delay). The binary input of the >CB defect input signal must be
activated for at least 20 ms before the signal becomes valid.
With help of the CB failure pole indication, you can determine the phase currents that are above the
threshold value at the tripping time T2.
The Minimum operate time parameter defines the minimum duration for tripping the function. In contrast
to other protection functions, the parameter is set within its own function. As a result, the setting is inde-
pendent of the identically named global parameter that is set in the Device settings.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[lo_bbp-verza-3ph, 6, en_US]
Figure 6-40 Delay/Tripping of the Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection Function
With the Immediate dropout parameter, you determine whether the circuit-breaker switch position is
checked continuously or on expiration of the T1 and T2 time delays. If the circuit-breaker switch position is
checked once the time delays have expired, the function picks up using Start.
6.4.4 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection in Busbar Protection
The circuit-breaker failure protection in busbar protection specifies a circuit-breaker failure with a short circuit
in the feeder or with a short circuit in the busbar.
If a short circuit occurs in the feeder, a circuit-breaker failure leads to selective disconnection of the busbar
section on which the feeder with the defective circuit breaker is connected. In addition, an intertripping
command is output in order to also switch off the opposite line end.
If a short circuit in the busbar and a circuit-breaker failure occur, at the opposite end of the line the infeed of
the current must be interrupted. For this purpose, the Trip T2 is output.
If the circuit-breaker failure protection works together with the busbar protection, with pick up of Trip T2,
the busbar protection is activated. If the circuit breaker has not opened, the busbar protection trips the
assigned busbar section.
There are 2 operating modes available for tripping the busbar:
• Unbalancing
• I> Query

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
NOTE
i If an active end-fault protection has already set the feeder current to 0, no unbalancing will be performed.
The operating mode is set in the Circuit breaker function group under General separately for each bay. In this
way, the function can be optimally adapted to the operating conditions, for example to the type of feeder or
the short-circuit currents.
NOTE
i You must differentiate between the centralized busbar protection, the distributed busbar protection (IEC
61850 compliant), and the distributed busbar protection.
• Centralized: The start occurs in parallel with the Trip T2 for the busbar function group.
• Decentralized (IEC 61850-compliant): Route the Trip T2 from the merging unit to the external trip-
ping in the bay using GOOSE.
• Distributed: If you have set the CBFP interact. with dBBP parameter to Yes for the circuit-
breaker failure protection in the merging units, the starting signal is transferred.
[dw_ls_ssys, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-41 Interaction of Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection and Busbar Protection
The corresponding application and setting notes are in chapter 5.3.3 Application and Setting Notes
Unbalancing Operating Mode

For Op. mode BFP = unbalancing, the polarity of the current measured in the feeder after elapse of T2 is
reversed if the feeder current exceeds the set threshold value. This unbalanced current is included in the calcu-
lation according to the differential protection principle. Thus, the threshold values of the circuit-breaker failure
protection (parameter (_:102) Threshold phase current or parameter (_:101) Threshold
sensitive) are used as threshold values for the differential protection. A differential current results from
the reverse polarity current in the feeder through which the busbar differential protection triggers all the
circuit breakers assigned to the busbar section via the disconnector image.
The advantages of this operating mode are:
• Extremely short dropout times by the use of instantaneous values
• No high demands on the dropout time of the feeder protection
• No danger of undesirable tripping even with longer dropout times since the current flow from the circuit
breaker is already interrupted and thus no differential current occurs due to the unbalancing.
• Use of the same algorithms and the same trip logic as the busbar differential protection.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Characteristic Curves for the Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection

For Op. mode BFP = unbalancing, the circuit-breaker failure protection can work with a standard charac-
teristic curve and a sensitive characteristic.
Low-current faults are recorded with more sensitive operate curves for the circuit-breaker failure.
The characteristic curves can be switched via the binary input >Sens. characteristic.
The stabilization factor k is set fixed to 0.2.
[dw_char_svs, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-42 Characteristic Curves of the Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection
I> Query Operating Mode

For Op. mode BFP = I> query, all the circuit breakers assigned directly via the disconnector image to the
busbar section are tripped if the feeder current exceeds the set threshold value.
CBFP interact. with dBBP

If you use a merging unit as the bay unit of the distributed busbar protection, the CBFP interact. with
dBBP parameter becomes visible following a successful central-unit update. With this parameter, you specify
whether the function interacts with the distributed busbar protection.
Figure 6-43 gives an overview of the functions involved in an external start of the CBFP function. In the case of
an internal start, there is no external protection device and the protection functionality is located in the CBFP
device.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[lo_aus_3bf, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-43 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection with External Start, Tripping Repetition, and 3‑Pole Tripping
(T2)
Routing: Configuration of Internal Starting Sources (Internal Protection Function)

Configuration of the internal starting sources takes place in the protection function groups via the Circuit-
breaker interaction entry (2.1 Function Embedding in the Device ).
Depending on the specific application, it can be necessary to exclude certain device-internal protection func-
tions from starting the CBFP. For instance, busbar disconnection following a local circuit-breaker failure may
be undesirable in the case of load-shedding applications or ground faults in isolated/resonant-grounded
systems.
Where a start exclusively from external sources is required, all internal protection functions must be routed so
that they are excluded as a starting source.
Manual routing is necessary only for overcurrent protection. The disconnector image provides the internal
start by way of the Integrated circuit-breaker failure protection (6.5.1 Overview of Functions ).
Parameter Mode (CBFP in the bay)

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

off The CBFP is switched off in the bay
on The CBFP is effective in the bay
Mode) is also in the mode on, the trip command goes to the command
output.
test The CBFP in the bay is in test mode.
Blocking tripping in the CBFP for the appropriate bay.
Mode) is also in test mode, all indications are assigned the marker Test.
Operate indications do not go to the command output.
Additional information on the behavior of the circuit-breaker failure protec-
tion in test mode is in 6.5.4 Application and Setting Notes.
Parameter: Start via binary input
• Default setting (_:107) Start via binary input = no

no If no external start is intended, the parameter is set to no.
2 channel 2-channel start is used if there is a danger that the circuit-breaker failure
protection causes a tripping due to a faulty activation of the start binary
input. This is the case in the following situations:
a) The CBFP pickup value (threshold value) is set to less than the load
current.
b) There can be operating conditions under which the current flow is higher
than the pickup value.
To avoid a possible overfunction, Siemens recommends using the 2-channel
start.
1 channel The 1-channel start must be used where only one control circuit of a binary
input is available for starting the CBFP. Siemens also recommends in this
case to use 2-channel activation, so that, with a defective binary input, no
overfunction occurs.
Input Signals: >Start, >Release

The start and release input signals have a filtering time of 10 ms as default setting. If a transient control signal
to the binary inputs is to be expected due to the design of the external binary-input control circuits and due to
environmental conditions, the filtering time can be extended. This delays the start of the CBFP function.
Input Signals Description
>Start The start input signal is linked with the tripping of the external protection
device (Figure 6-43).
>Release The release input signal is normally linked with the pickup of the external
protection device (Figure 6-43). Another common configuration is the
parallel wiring of the external trip initiation to both binary inputs (start and
release).
The inputs are not effective in the Bay not in operation mode.
Parameter: Supervision time f. release signal

The setting depends on the external function which generates the release signal. If the pickup or tripping of
the external protection is used as release signal, the default setting can be kept. If it is ensured that the release
signal is always present before the start signal, the time can be set to 0.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Parameter: Holding internal start signal
• Recommended setting value (_:105) Holding int. start signal = yes

yes In the case of an internal start, the start signal is hold. The dropout of the
CBFP depends exclusively on the determination of the circuit-breaker posi-
tion.
This setting must be selected if it is not ensured that all 3 poles of the CB
have opened when the pickup signal of the protection function has a falling
edge.
no Holding of the start signal can be disabled if it is ensured by the application
that the CB has reliably opened when the start signal has a falling edge, or if
the CBFP is explicitly required to drop out when the start signal has a falling
edge.
EXAMPLE
Holding Internal Start Signal (Setting Value: yes)

In the event of a 2-pole fault, only one contact of the CB opens. The fault current is thus reduced, and the
starting phase short-circuit protection drops out.
Parameter: Holding external start signal
• Recommended setting value (_:106) Holding ext. start signal = no

no The CBFP drops out when the external start signal has a falling edge. This
setting prevents the CBFP from generating a tripping signal when an
unwanted pulse is received at the binary input and the current flow is high
enough.
yes You can hold the start signal if it is not ensured that the circuit breaker is
open when the external start signal has a falling edge (pulse mode).
EXAMPLE
Holding External Start Signal (Setting Value: Yes)

The function is started from the opposite end via an auxiliary device for command transmission. This device
generates only a signal pulse.
NOTE
i Siemens would like to point out that, with a hold signal, the CBFP generates a trip signal each time a
starting pulse is received and the current flow is high enough. Remember this particularly in the case of an
external start.
If you are working with the Off repetition, tripping only occurs in this feeder in the event of a false pickup.
Parameters: Threshold phase current/Threshold sensitive
• Recommended setting value (_:102) Threshold phase current = approx. 0.50 Isc, min
• Recommended setting value (_:101) Threshold sensitive = approx. 0.25 Isc,min

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
In order to ensure that the disconnection of the fault is promptly detected and the function can drop out
quickly, Siemens recommends setting both thresholds to half the minimum short-circuit current (Isc, min).
If – depending on the neutral-point treatment and/or load conditions – ground faults lead to relatively low
fault currents, a sensitive setting of the parameter Threshold sensitive must be selected according to
the rule (0.5 Isc, min). There can also be values which are noticeably below the rated or load current.
Input Signal: >Threshold sensitive

In order to ensure that the function picks up reliably in all switch positions of the power system (examples:
opposite end of line open, switching onto a ground fault), the setting of the parameter Threshold sensi-
tive can be applied dynamically to all currents - including phase currents – in the presence of ground faults.
For this purpose, the binary signal >Threshold sensitive must be activated. The signal can be coupled
from a separate device to sensitive ground-fault detection via a binary input.
Parameter: Circuit-breaker auxiliary-contact criterion allowed
• Recommended setting value (_:103) CB aux.cont. crit. allowed = no

no If sufficient current flow is ensured under all conditions with the CB closed,
Siemens recommends not to permit the auxiliary contacts as a further crite-
rion for determining the CB position, because measurement based on the
current flow is the most reliable criterion.
w. 'CB pos. closed 3p.' The auxiliary contacts are permitted as a further criterion in applications
(see the following examples) where the current is no reliable criterion for
determining the circuit-breaker position.

because of a false start is impossible. To ensure Circuit-breaker failure protection for smaller ground faults
even with this setting, you can select 3I0 criterion to be Direct release and Threshold 3I0 dir.
release to be appropriately smaller than Threshold phase current.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

because of a false start is impossible. To have Circuit-breaker failure protection function for smaller unbal-
anced faults even with this setting, you can select I2 criterion to be Direct release and Threshold
3I0 dir. release to be appropriately smaller than Threshold phase current.

Recommended setting value (_:122) Threshold 3I0 dir. release = approx. 0.5 Iscmin
This parameter is effective only if the 3I0 criterionparameter is set to Direct release. Siemens
recommends setting the threshold to half the minimum short-circuit current (Iscmin) to ensure that the discon-
nection of the fault is promptly detected and the function can drop out quickly.

This parameter is effective only if the I2 criterionparameter is set to Direct release. Siemens recom-
mends setting the parameter to half the permissible negative-sequence current (I2min) to achieve a fast fault
clearing in the event of an undesired negative-sequence system component.
Parameters: Monit. time for BI ">Start"/Monit.tm. f.BI ">Release"
• Default setting (_:124) Monit. time for BI ">Start" = 15 s
• Default setting (_:125) Monit.tm. f.BI ">Release" = 15 s

With these parameters, you set the monitoring time of the binary inputs >Start/>Release. If the Circuit-
breaker failure protection does not pick up during this monitoring time, a failure in the binary-input circuit is
assumed. Siemens recommends retaining the default setting of 15 s.
EXAMPLES
Applications which Require you to Permit the Circuit-Breaker Auxiliary-Contact Criterion:
• Tripping of protection functions whose tripping decision is not based on a current measurement in
combination with voltage or frequency protection functions
• Injection of the tripping signal from Buchholz protection
Parameter: Dropout
• Recommended setting value (_:104) Dropout = with effective criterion

The parameter Dropout is available if the circuit-breaker auxiliary contact criterion is permitted (see param-
eter CB aux.cont. crit. allowed).

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

with effective crite- Siemens recommends keeping the default setting, because it prefers the
rion current as a reliable criterion for detection of an open CB and thus for
dropout of the CBFP function.
w. aux.c. and Select this setting for applications on transformers or generators (see the
curr.crit. preceding examples) in which the current flow is such that the current is no
longer a reliable criterion for detecting the opening of the CB.
Parameter: Retrip
• Default setting (_:108) Retrip after T1 = no

no Where no redundant CB control is provided, a repetition of the trip signal to
the local CB is not required.
start T2 after T1 Where a redundant CB control (2nd trip coil with 2 trip circuits) is provided,
a repetition of the trip signal to the local CB makes sense.
Siemens recommends the setting start T2 after T1 because it
provides a clear chronological separation of the processes for trip repeat
and backup tripping. Remember here that the overall fault-clearance time in
case of a failure of the local CB is the sum of T1 and T2.
parallel start T2, T1 As an alternative to the setting start T2 after T1, the user can start T2
and T1 in parallel.
Parameter: Delay T1 for 3-pole retrip

The parameter is visible only when retripping is set.
The setting depends on the user's philosophy.
The following settings make sense:
• If the minimum fault-clearing time has top priority, Siemens recommends setting the time to 0. This
setting causes initiation of the retrip immediately upon the start. The drawback is that a defect of the 1st
trip circuit is not detected.
• With a small time delay of, for instance, 50 ms, the defect of the 1st trip circuit can be detected based on
the evaluation of the fault record.
• With a long time delay, which reliably ensures the dropout of the CBFP with the CB open, the rising edge
indication of the trip repeat Retrip T1 is a sure signal for a fault in the 1st trip circuit. The following
example shows how this time is determined.
EXAMPLE

tion)
Subtotal 65 ms
Security Factor 2

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Parameter: Delay T2 for 3-pole trip

tripping is avoided under all circumstances. The setting depends on the parameter Retrip after T1.
If T2 is started after T1, there is no need to consider the time T1 for the setting of T2.
EXAMPLE

tion)
Subtotal 65 ms
Security Factor 2
If T1 and T2 are started in parallel, take into account the time T1 for the setting of T2.
EXAMPLE
Simultaneous Start of T2 and T1
Time for a reliable dropout after the local CB has 130 ms

opened
Setting of T1 50 ms
Total (= T2) 180 ms

The Minimum operate time parameter is used to set the minimum duration for tripping the function.
! CAUTION
Input Signal: >CB defect

The input signal >CB defect has a default filtering time of 20 ms. This filtering time prevents the input
signal from becoming effective in the case of a transient activation of the physical binary input, which can be
caused by the pressure change when the CB opens.
This time can be set to 0 if such a transient pickup of the physical binary input can be excluded due to the CB
design.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Output Signal: Retrip T1

If only 1 control circuit is available for the local circuit breaker, the output signal does not necessarily have to
be routed because the signal also controls the circuit-breaker trip logic.
If a 2nd control circuit is present, the Retrip T1 output signal must be routed to the associated binary
output.
Output Signal: Trip T2

For operational handling of the adjacent circuit breakers, the backup tripping (indication Trip T2) must if
necessary, to a binary output or an interface (intertripping to opposite end). Thus, the circuit breaker on the
opposite end can be tripped without delay.
Parameter: CBFP interact. with dBBP
• Default setting (_:153) CBFP interact. with dBBP = No

If you use a merging unit as the bay unit of the distributed busbar protection, the CBFP interact.
with dBBP parameter becomes visible after the successful central-unit update in the merging unit.

no With this parameter, you specify that this function operates independently
from the distributed busbar protection.
yes With this parameter, the function will work with the distributed busbar
protection.
Parameter: Immediate dropout
• Recommended setting (_:154) Immediate dropout =

The criteria are checked continuously and the circuit-breaker failure protec-
tion drops out immediately once the criteria have no longer been met.
Siemens recommends keeping this setting.
This setting is used to take alternating load cases into account in the event
of a fault, for example when using a breaker-and-a-half layout. The time
delays and function pickup are actuated separately using a starter. The
criteria for determining a closed circuit breaker are only checked once the
time delays have expired. Select the monitoring times for the binary inputs
>Start and >Release in such a way that supervision for these inputs
does not respond prior to achieving the current or circuit-breaker auxiliary-
contact criterion.
Parameter: BI start external latch
• Default setting (_:155) BI start external latch =

In the case of buffered sources (for example lock-out mechanism after trip-
ping) the start binary signal is latched externally after the protection trip.
This means that the binary-input supervision remains inactive until the
binary-input source has been reset. Supervision is only activated after this
has taken place.
In the case of sources that are not buffered for an external start, the expect-
ation is that they will drop out once the circuit-breaker failure protection
has picked up. If this is not the case, the binary input may fail. This is why
this setting results in binary-input supervision being reactivated once the
Circuit-breaker failure protection function drops out.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Notes for Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection in Truck-Type Switchgear

For the 7SS85, truck-type switchgears with 2 circuit breakers per bay are possible. For each of these 2 circuit
breakers, you can configure a dedicated Circuit-breaker failure protection function. Each function can be
started separately via external signals. Tripping the bus section via the circuit-breaker failure protection always
generates a trip command to both circuit breakers of the bay.
If Circuit-breaker failure protection function is planned for each of the 2 circuit breakers, the following must be
observed for their parameterization:
• The mode (unbalancing / I> query), as well as the phase-current threshold values and ground-current
threshold values, must each be identical in the 2 circuit-breaker functions.
• Siemens recommends setting the time delays identically.
• External signals, for example, start, release for external start, switchover to sensitive characteristic curve,
must be routed to both circuit-breaker functions. In this case, the inputs of both circuit-breaker failure
protection functions can each be connected with an equivalent input signal in the information routing.
6.4.6 Settings

50BF Ad.CBF #
_:1 50BF Ad.CBF #:Mode • off on
• on
• test
_:105 50BF Ad.CBF #:Holding • no yes
int. start signal
• yes
_:107 50BF Ad.CBF #:Start via • no no
binary input
• 2 channel
• 1 channel
_:106 50BF Ad.CBF #:Holding • no no
ext. start signal
• yes
_:111 50BF Ad.CBF #:Sup.time 0.00 s to 1.00 s 0.06 s
f. release signal
_:103 50BF Ad.CBF #:CB • no no
aux.cont. crit. allowed
• w. 'CB pos. closed 3p.'
_:104 50BF Ad.CBF #:Dropout • with effective criterion with effective
criterion
• w. aux.c. and curr.crit.
_:108 50BF Ad.CBF #:Retrip • no no
after T1
• start T2 after T1
• parallel start T2, T1
for 3-pole retrip
for 3-pole trip
_:112 50BF Ad.CBF #:Minimum 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.10 s
operate time

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

_:120 50BF Ad.CBF #:3I0 crite- • Direct release Plausibility
rion check
_:121 50BF Ad.CBF #:I2 crite- • Direct release Plausibility
rion check
_:124 50BF Ad.CBF #:Monit. 0.05 s to 60.00 s 15.00 s
time for BI ">Start"
_:125 50BF Ad.CBF 0.05 s to 60.00 s 15.00 s
#:Monit.tm. f.BI
">Release"
_:154 50BF Ad.CBF #:Imme- • 0 true
diate dropout
• 1
_:155 50BF Ad.CBF #:BI start • 0 true
external latch
• 1
Table 6-2 Starting with V8.40, the Merging Units Have the Following Enhancement that is Especially
Intended for Use with the Distributed Busbar Protection and Evaluated there:

50BF Ad.CBF #
_:153 50BF Ad.CBF #:CBFP • no no
interact. with dBBP
• yes

(Type)
50BF Ad.CBF #
_:501 50BF Ad.CBF #:>Start SPS I
_:502 50BF Ad.CBF #:>Release SPS I
_:82 50BF Ad.CBF #:>Block function SPS I
_:503 50BF Ad.CBF #:>CB defect SPS I
_:500 50BF Ad.CBF #:>Threshold sensitive SPS I
_:54 50BF Ad.CBF #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 50BF Ad.CBF #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 50BF Ad.CBF #:Health ENS O
_:55 50BF Ad.CBF #:Pickup ACD O
_:305 50BF Ad.CBF #:Retrip T1 ACT O
_:306 50BF Ad.CBF #:Trip T2 ACT O
_:302 50BF Ad.CBF #:BI start routing miss. SPS O
_:304 50BF Ad.CBF #:BI aux.ct. rout. miss. SPS O
_:300 50BF Ad.CBF #:Fail. BI 'start' SPS O
_:307 50BF Ad.CBF #:Fail. no BI release SPS O
_:301 50BF Ad.CBF #:Fail. BI 'release' SPS O

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

(Type)
_:315 50BF Ad.CBF #:Immediate Operate SPS O
_:316 50BF Ad.CBF #:CB failure pole ACD O

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
6.5 Inherent Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection

You can use this function directly in the 7SS85 as a centralized busbar protection and as a distributed busbar
protection (IEC 61850 compliant). If you use a distributed busbar protection, you can instantiate this function
in the bay units/merging units as busbar protection-specific functional enhancements.
The Inherent circuit-breaker failure protection acts in the event of faults within the protection range of the
busbar protection system.
If external errors occur, you need the circuit-breaker failure protection for supervision purposes and for the
busbar protection reserve disconnection of all circuit-breakers that are assigned to the busbars.
The function Inherent circuit-breaker failure protection is preconfigured in the Circuit breaker function
group and does not need to be connected manually.
[dw_strinh, 1, en_US]
The function Inherent circuit-breaker failure protection monitors the opening of circuit breakers of a faulty
busbar section with the following functions:
• External tripping busbar section (direct)
• External tripping busbar section (bay)

When a busbar protection trips, the connected bays are identified from the disconnector image. Trip
commands then are being sent to the circuit breakers in these bays and the Inherent circuit-breaker failure
protection starts.
The following figure provides an overview of the functionality and control of the Inherent circuit-breaker
failure protection function.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[lo_int_svs, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-45 Overview of the Logic of the Inherent Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection Function
The function Inherent circuit-breaker failure protection is started by the trip command of the previously
mentioned protection functions. Upon starting, the current-flow criterion is used to determine whether the
circuit breaker is closed.
If the current-flow criterion determines that the circuit breaker is closed, the function is initiated and the time
delay T2 is started. While the time delay is running, the current-flow criterion is used to check whether the
circuit breaker has opened. If this is the case, the function drops out. If the circuit breaker has not opened, the
function trips upon expiration of time delay T2. The tripping is always 3-pole. The operate indication can be
used to open the circuit breaker at the opposite end since the error cannot be resolved locally (transfer-trip
signal).
If a coupling circuit breaker opens in response to an error on the busbar, the 2 busbars are disconnected. If the
coupling circuit breaker does not open, the faulty busbar continues to conduct current. In order to finally
resolve the error, the busbar must be switched off. In this case, the Inherent circuit-breaker failure protec-
tion disconnects the busbar. If the feeder bay is a bus coupler, the Inherent circuit-breaker failure protec-
tion always operates with unbalancing to disconnect the feeding busbar.
The Inherent circuit-breaker failure protection function can be blocked separately for each bay by the input
signal >Block function.
The function is also blocked if the bay to which the Circuit-breaker function group is assigned is not in opera-
tion.
Start
The busbar protection starts the Inherent circuit-breaker failure protection function in response to the trip
command sent to the circuit breaker. Starting is maintained by pickup of the function and the function does
not drop out until the value of the current falls below the current threshold for inherent circuit-breaker failure
protection.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[lo_staint, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-46 Start
breaker pole is supposed to be closed and the current-flow criterion fulfilled, as soon as one of the phase
currents exceeds the phase-current threshold value and a plausibility current exceeds the associated threshold
value at the same time. The plausibility current can be either a 2nd phase current (to compare with the phase-
current threshold value) or the zero-sequence or negative-sequence current (to compare with the sensitive
threshold value). The additional evaluation of the plausibility current increases the safety of the criterion.
well. The current-flow criterion is fulfilled when the currents exceed the sensitive threshold value. The phase-
current threshold value is then ineffective. The binary signal >Threshold sensitive is used for the switch-
over.
If you set the 3I0 criterion parameter to Direct release, you prevent the plausibility check of the
zero-sequence current. In this way, a pickup only by way of this current can be achieved. With the Threshold
3I0 dir. release parameter, you set the threshold value to be exceeded.
If you set the I2 criterion parameter to Direct release, you also switch off the plausibility check of
the negative-sequence current. With the Threshold I2 dir. release parameter, you set the threshold
If you set the I2 criterion parameter to Direct release, plausibility is checked via the phase currents
with 1/3 * Threshold I2 dir. release.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[lo_current1, 4, en_US]
Pickup/Dropout
After the start, a check is performed whether the circuit breaker is closed. Only the reliable current-flow crite-
rion in the inherent circuit-breaker failure protection is available in this case. If the current exceeds the pickup
threshold (parameter Threshold phase current or Threshold sensitive) the function picks up. The
time delay T2 starts on pickup and whether the circuit breaker has opened (see also Figure 6-37 or
Figure 6-25) is continuously checked via the current-flow criterion.
[lo_anrres, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-48 Pickup/Dropout

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Delay/Tripping
If time delay T2 expires without dropout of the function, a circuit-breaker failure is assumed, and the Trip T2
is generated. The tripping is always 3-pole.
The operate indication can also be routed to a binary output. A transfer trip signal can be sent to the opposite
end if necessary.
If the coupling circuit breaker does not open, after elapse of T2 the coupler current becomes unbalanced.
Through this, the busbar that is connected through the coupler is tripped and the error is finally cleared.
If the >CB defect input signal is valid, the T2 tripping is generated without a delay. For the >CB defect
input signal to be considered valid, the corresponding binary input must be active for at least 20 ms.
With the CB failure pole indication, you can specify the phase currents that exceed the set threshold
value at the time of the tripping T2.
[lo_bbp-verzaus-int, 5, en_US]
Figure 6-49 Delay/Tripping
Parameter: Mode

off The inherent circuit-breaker failure protection is switched off.
on The inherent circuit-breaker failure protection is effective.
All trip commands are submitted.
test In the inherent circuit-breaker failure protection is in test mode.
No trip commands of the inherent circuit-breaker failure protection are
generated.
All indications of the inherent circuit-breaker failure protection will be iden-
tified with the marker Test.
Parameter: Threshold phase current/Threshold sensitive
• Default setting (_:102) Threshold phase current = 0.50 A
• Default setting (_:101) Threshold sensitive = 0.25 A

Follow the setting instructions for 1-pole/3-pole and 3-pole circuit-breaker failure protection.
Parameter: Delay T2 for 3-pole trip
• Default setting (_:12511:110) Delay T2 for 3-pole trip = 0.13 s

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
tripping is avoided under all circumstances.
Follow the setting instructions for 1-pole/3-pole and 3-pole circuit-breaker failure protection.
• Default setting (_:12511:112) Minimum operate time = 0.10 s

The parameter is used to set the time for which the trip signal is present.
Follow the setting instructions for 1-pole/3-pole and 3-pole circuit-breaker failure protection described in
chapter 6.3.5 Application and Setting Notes and chapter 6.4.5 Application and Setting Notes.
! CAUTION



C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

Recommended setting value (_:122)Threshold 3I0 dir. release = approx. 0.25 Iscmin
This parameter is effective only if the 3I0 criterion parameter is set to Direct release. Siemens
recommends setting the threshold to one quarter of the minimum short-circuit current (Iscmin) to ensure that
the disconnection of the fault is promptly detected and the function can drop out quickly.

This parameter is effective only if the I2 criterion parameter is set to Direct release. Siemens recom-
mends setting the parameter to one quarter of the permissible negative-sequence current (I2min) to achieve a
quick fault clearing in the event of an undesired negative-sequence system component.
Notes for Inherent Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection in Truck-Type Switchgear

For the busbar protection, truck-type switchgears with 2 circuit breakers per bay are possible. When a bay is
tripped, both circuit breakers receive the trip command, regardless of whether their position is closed or open.
Therefore, the failure of one or both circuit breakers is conceivable.
For each of these 2 circuit breakers, the inherent circuit-breaker failure protection function must be coordi-
nated with each other.
When setting parameters, note the following:
• The mode (unbalancing / I> query), as well as the phase-current threshold values and ground-current
threshold values, must each be identical in the 2 circuit-breaker functions.
• Siemens recommends setting the time delays identically.
• External signals, for example, switchover to a sensitive characteristic curve, must be routed to both
circuit-breaker functions. In this case, the inputs of both inherent circuit-breaker failure protection func-
tions can each be connected with an equivalent input signal in the information routing.
6.5.5 Settings

50BF Inherent
_:1 50BF Inherent:Mode • off on
• on
• test
_:102 50BF Inherent:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.500 A
_:110 50BF Inherent:Delay T2 0.050 s to 60.000 s 0.130 s
for 3-pole trip
_:112 50BF Inherent:Minimum 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.10 s
operate time
_:120 50BF Inherent:3I0 crite- • Direct release Plausibility
rion check
_:121 50BF Inherent:I2 crite- • Direct release Plausibility
rion check

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022


(Type)
50BF Inherent
_:82 50BF Inherent:>Block function SPS I
_:503 50BF Inherent:>CB defect SPS I
_:500 50BF Inherent:>Threshold sensitive SPS I
_:54 50BF Inherent:Inactive SPS O
_:52 50BF Inherent:Behavior ENS O
_:53 50BF Inherent:Health ENS O
_:55 50BF Inherent:Pickup ACD O
_:306 50BF Inherent:Trip T2 ACT O
_:315 50BF Inherent:Immediate Operate SPS O
_:316 50BF Inherent:CB failure pole ACD O

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
6.6 End-Fault Protection in Busbar Protection

The end-fault protection protects the section between the current transformer and the open circuit breaker.
The switch position of the circuit breaker must be available for the effectiveness of the function.
The protection range is determined by the installation location of the current transformer.
• Busbar-side current transformer
• Line-side current transformer
• Current transformer in the bus coupler

Depending on the installation location of the current transformer, the end-fault protection prevents undesired
tripping of the busbar section or it causes a fast fault clarification.
6.6.2 End-Fault Protection in the Feeder
Busbar-Side Current Transformer

For current transformers installed on the busbar side, end-fault protection with an open circuit breaker
extends the protection range to the circuit breaker. Through this, the actual external errors become one
internal error, which can be switched off in the shortest time by the busbar protection function.
Without end-fault protection, feeder protection does recognize the fault but cannot clear it. Only the active
Circuit-breaker failure protection function can clear the fault with the corresponding time delay.
[dw_efpss_2, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-50 Busbar-Side Current Transformer
Line-Side Current Transformer

With line-side current transformers, end-fault protection with an open circuit breaker prevents overfunction of
the busbar protection.
Without end-fault protection, a fault between an open circuit breaker and a current transformer results in
unwanted tripping of the busbar protection.
In the event of this error, only the circuit breaker at the opposite end can disconnect the fault current. This is
possible by routing the intertripping command. Feeder protection considers this situation to be a fault in the
reverse direction and trips with the set delay. If no transmission channels are present at the opposite end of
the line, the fault is not cleared until the set grading time of the opposite end.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[dw_efpss_1, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-51 Line-Side Current Transformer
6.6.3 Protection with Faults in the Bus Coupler (Dead Zone)
In the normal case, the current transformer forms the limit of the protection range. The section between the
current transformer and circuit breaker is called the dead zone. By using the end-fault protection in the bus
coupler, improved behavior of the protection is achieved with an open circuit breaker. The protection range is
extended by the dead zone between the current transformer and circuit breaker.
[dw_dzpss_4, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-52 Fault in the Dead Zone of the Bus Coupler, Example 1 Current Transformer in the Bus Coupler
[dw_dzpss_3, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-53 Fault in the Dead Zone of the Bus Coupler, Example 2 Current Transformer in the Bus Coupler
End-fault protection is active only with the circuit breaker open. With the circuit breaker closed, the protection
behaves just like when there is no end-fault protection.
NOTE
i If you configure end-fault protection, you must route the open position of the circuit breaker. Otherwise,
the complete protection switches to the alarm state.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
With or without End-Fault Protection, Circuit Breaker Closed

With a bus coupler with 1 current transformer, first busbar A is switched off, however the fault current is not
yet interrupted. The circuit breaker opens and is detected by the busbar protection through its tap indication.
Following the trip command, the Integrated circuit-breaker failure protection starts. After time T2 has
expired, the final fault clarification takes place. The end-fault protection leads to a reduction in the fault shut-
down time.
For a bus coupler with 2 transformers the behavior is dependent on the setting of parameter Overlapping
CT.
If the parameter Overlapping CT = yes is set, the current of the current transformer BE1 is assigned to
busbar B, the current of the current transformer BE2 to busbar A. A fault between the current transformers
leads to instantaneous non-selective disconnection of both busbars.
If the parameter Overlapping CT = no is set, the current of the current transformer BE1 is assigned to
busbar A, the current of the current transformer BE2 to busbar B. A fault between the current transformers
does not lead to a differential current in any busbar.
In order to protect this section, you can use the integrated Bus coupler differential protection. You will find
more information on the Bus coupler differential protection function in the chapter 6.9.1 Overview of Func-
tions .
With End-Fault Protection, Circuit Breaker Open

The fault shutdown time is reduced with end-fault protection. Note that the circuit-breaker-off position may
only be processed after the main contacts have opened.
With 1 current transformer in the bus coupler and opened circuit breaker, the end-fault protection sets the
current of the bus coupler for the busbar differential protection measurement to 0.
If the bus coupler bay is assembled with 2 current transformers, the end-fault protection sets the current for
the busbar differential protection measurement to 0 for both transformers independently of the setting of the
parameter Overlapping CT. In this way, the end-fault protection always results in instantaneous, selective
fault clarification with open circuit breakers.
The End-fault protection function can be used in the Circuit breaker function group.
[dw_strefp, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-54 Embedding of the End-Fault Protection Function
Only one End-fault protection function block is assigned to the Circuit breaker function group.
Activating/Blocking
End-fault protection is active only with the circuit breaker open. The circuit-breaker switch position is detected
by way of the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts. The current-flow criterion is not used for evaluating the circuit-
breaker switch position.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Using an adjustable time delay Delay CB open, you can prevent the end-fault protection from being acti-
vated before the circuit breaker is actually open. This time delay is necessary because of the signal of the
circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts can precede the actual position of the circuit breaker.
End-fault protection is blocked during the following events and operating states:
• With the circuit breaker closed – in the case of a feeder with a truck-type switchgear, it is sufficient if one
of the circuit breakers is closed.
• After issuing the close command for the circuit breaker for a fixed 200 ms
• For backup breaker operation with external current transformers (line side)
For external current transformers and closed transfer disconnector, the circuit-breaker switch position
has no relation to the measured current.
• By setting the input signal >Block function
• By deactivating the function or the function group (parameter Mode=off)
• If the self-monitoring circuit picks up
• When invalid data are received
Logic
The active end-fault protection sets the current of the assigned current transformer for the busbar differential
protection to 0. Through this, the busbar differential protection can detect a fault for current transformers
arranged on the busbar side or for a busbar coupler with 1 or 2 current transformers. The calculated current
results in disconnection of the faulty busbar by the busbar differential protection.
In the case of current transformers arranged on the line side, the fault must be disconnected by the circuit
breaker at the opposite end. To explain such a fault, the end-fault protection monitors an adjustable threshold
value. If the operate indication is transferred to a protection device at the opposite end, the fault clearing can
be done there. The busbar remains connected because the end-fault protection has set the flowing current to
0.
The end-fault protection checks whether the measured current has exceeded an adjustable threshold
Threshold 1. If the threshold value is exceeded in at least one phase, the phase-specific indication Pickup
is issued. After the adjustable time delay Operate delay elapses, Operate delay expired and
Operate are indicated. The operate indication is maintained for an adjustable time (parameter Minimum
operate time).
For low-current faults, the threshold value of the phase current can be changed by the input signal >Thresh
change to a more responsive parameterized Threshold 2.
The following figure shows the logic diagram of the end-fault protection.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[lo_efp_bbp, 10, en_US]
Figure 6-55 Logic of the End-Fault Protection
CLOSE Control Command of the Circuit Breaker

With an open circuit breaker, the current for the busbar differential protection is set to zero. If a short circuit is
connected when closing the circuit breaker, it must be ensured that the current is available again in time for
the measurement. Through this, the stability of the healthy protection range is guaranteed. This is achieved by
the fact that the current of the current transformer is included in the protection algorithm when closing the
circuit breaker via a leading contact.
The close command for the circuit breaker must be detected by way of the input signal >Close command.
When an active input signal is detected, a time stage of 200 ms is started. After the time stage has elapsed,
the auxiliary contact of the circuit breaker must have exited the Open position.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
The feedback of the switch position must be ensured for all eventualities of a CLOSE control command. The
close command can be issued by manual closing using the control discrepancy switch, remote control of the
circuit breaker using remote or substation automation technology, or automatic reclosing.
Parameter: Threshold 1
• Default setting (_:101) Threshold 1 = 0.50 A

Set the parameter Threshold 1 for the specific application.
Parameter: Threshold 2
• Default setting (_:102) Threshold 2 = 0.25 A

Set the parameter Threshold 2 for the specific application.
Parameter: Dropout ratio
• Default setting (_:4) Dropout ratio = 0.95

Siemens recommends using the default setting for the parameter.
Parameter: Operate delay
• Default setting (_:111) Operate delay= 0 s

The Operate delay parameter is used to set the time delay for issuing the operate indication.

With the Minimum operate time parameter, you set how long the operate indication must persist.
Parameter: Sup. time BI ">Close cmd"
• Default setting (_:113) Sup. time BI ">Close cmd" = 15.0 s

With the Sup. time BI ">Close cmd" parameter, you define how long the binary input >Close
command is to be monitored until it is detected as faulty.
Parameter: Delay CB open
• Default setting (_:110) Delay CB open= 0 s

With the Delay CB open parameter, you set how long the end-fault protection remains blocked after the
circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts have indicated the circuit breaker as open.
NOTE
i When setting the parameter Delay CB open, consider that due to the cycle filter used, current will still be
measured for one period after disconnection by the circuit breaker. Add the period duration plus a safety
margin of 10 ms to the expected circuit breaker trip time.
Instructions for End-Fault Protection in Truck-Type Switchgear

The use of end-fault protection in bays of the coupling type makes no sense with truck-type switchgear,
because the assignment of the current to the bus section is canceled as soon as the circuit breaker has
opened.
A transfer trip takes place in the usual manner if the criteria required for it are fulfilled.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
6.6.7 Parameter

50EF 1/3pole
_:1 50EF 1/3pole:Mode • off on
• on
• test
_:101 50EF 1/3pole:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.500 A
1 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 2.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 2.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 2.500 A
_:102 50EF 1/3pole:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.250 A
2 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 1.25 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.250 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 1.25 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.250 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 1.250 A
_:4 50EF 1/3pole:Dropout 0.50 to 0.99 0.95
ratio
_:110 50EF 1/3pole:Delay CB 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
open
_:111 50EF 1/3pole:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
delay
_:112 50EF 1/3pole:Minimum 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.10 s
operate time
_:113 50EF 1/3pole:Sup. time 0.5 s to 60.0 s 15.0 s
BI ">Close cmd"

(Type)
50EF 1/3pole
_:82 50EF 1/3pole:>Block function SPS I
_:501 50EF 1/3pole:>Thresh change SPS I
_:502 50EF 1/3pole:>Close command SPS I
_:51 50EF 1/3pole:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:52 50EF 1/3pole:Behavior ENS O
_:53 50EF 1/3pole:Health ENS O
_:54 50EF 1/3pole:Inactive SPS O
_:301 50EF 1/3pole:Thresh. 2 active SPS O
_:302 50EF 1/3pole:Off contact n.routed SPS O
_:55 50EF 1/3pole:Pickup ACD O
_:303 50EF 1/3pole:Operate delay expired SPS O
_:304 50EF 1/3pole:Operate ACT O
_:305 50EF 1/3pole:BI ClsCmd defect SPS O

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
6.7 External Tripping Busbar Section (Direct)
The External tripping of a busbar section (direct) makes it possible to link an external signal for tripping all
bays of one busbar section. The busbar protection evaluates the disconnector image to determine which bays
are connected to the affected busbar section. The external trip signal can be sent from a binary input or via
protection communication. A typical application is tripping of a busbar section by an external arc protection.
The External tripping of a busbar section (direct) can be used in the Busbar protection function of the
Busbar function group.
[dw_strexb, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-56 Embedding the External Tripping of a Busbar Section (direct) Function
Tripping for the circuit breakers of all bays of a busbar section can be started by the external trip command
>Ext. trip. To increase the response reliability of the busbar protection, the busbar protection also
processes the release signal >Rel. ext. trip for the trip decision.
The external trip command is provided for each busbar section. The release signal is available once for the
function
The input signals for the trip command and the release signal are monitored. Time supervision is adjustable.
Time-outs are indicated. The supervision conditions are described in more detail in the following in the Time
Supervision section.
The External tripping of a busbar section (direct) trips the busbar section when the following conditions are
satisfied:
• The external trip command is activated.
• The release signal has been issued.

The tripping is indicated. The Operate is available for the function and for each busbar section.
In order for the external tripping of the busbar to occur, the release must occur within the set time delay
Superv.t. Rel. ext. trip BZ, beginning with the trip command.
If the release signal is not routed, the checking of the release is not in effect. The function enters the Alarm
operating mode.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[lo_dir_ein, 7, en_US]
Figure 6-57 Logic Diagram of the External Tripping of a Busbar Section (Direct)
Time Supervision
Time supervision of the inputs is always active and cannot be switched off. The external trip command and the
release signal are monitored.
Supervision picks up under the following conditions:

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
• If the trip command for a busbar section is active longer than the adjustable supervision time before the
release command is received, the No Ext. trip release indication is output.
The indication is provided for each busbar section.
The supervision time is set using the parameter Superv.t. Rel. ext. trip BZ.
This supervision detects faults in the control circuit of the release signal that cause signal outage.
[dw_fre_ino, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-58 Signal Form for Supervision (_:11881:315) No Ext. trip release
• If the release signal is present for longer than 15 s without a trip command for the busbar section
arriving, the indication BI rel. ext.trip dist. is output.
The indication is provided once for the function.
This type of supervision detects faults in the control circuit of the release signal that cause persistent acti-
vation of the signal.
[dw_bi_free, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-59 Signal Form for Supervision (_:11971:302) BI rel. ext.trip dist.
• If the trip command is present for longer than 15 s without a release signal arriving, the indication BI
External trip dist. is output for the busbar section.
The indication is provided for each busbar section.
This type of supervision detects faults in the control circuit of the external trip command that cause
persistent activation of the input signal.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[dw_bi_star, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-60 Signal Form for Supervision (_:11881:314) BI External trip dist.
If supervision picks up, all external tripping actions are blocked for all busbar sections.
The supervision drops out once all inputs of the function are inactive.
If an external trip signal results in tripping of the busbar section, all supervision actions of the inputs become
inactive. Even if the tripping is generated for longer than the permanently set supervision time, supervision no
longer picks up.
Parameter: Superv.t. Rel. ext. trip BZ
• Default setting (_:11971:100) Superv.t. Rel. ext. trip BZ = 0.06 s

You use the parameter to set the supervision time, which may lie at most between the arrival of the external
trip signal and the arrival of the release signal.
6.7.5 Settings

Ext. trip BZ
_:100 Ext. trip BZ:Superv.t. Rel. 0.06 s to 1.00 s 0.06 s
ext. trip BZ
Information External Tripping Busbar Section (direct)

(Type)
Ext. trip BZ
_:503 Ext. trip BZ:>Block SPS I
_:500 Ext. trip BZ:>Rel. ext. trip SPS I
_:303 Ext. trip BZ:Rel. ext. trip bus zone SPC C
_:54 Ext. trip BZ:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Ext. trip BZ:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Ext. trip BZ:Health ENS O
_:301 Ext. trip BZ:Operate ACT O
_:302 Ext. trip BZ:BI rel. ext.trip dist. SPS O

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Information Busbar Section

(Type)
Bus zone #
_:500 Bus zone #:>Block SPS I
_:503 Bus zone #:>Block diff. prot. SPS I
_:504 Bus zone #:>Block CB fail. prot. SPS I
_:507 Bus zone #:>Block external trip SPS I
_:501 Bus zone #:>Ext. trip SPS I
_:502 Bus zone #:>Trip release SPS I
_:320 Bus zone #:Block SPC C
_:321 Bus zone #:Block diff. prot. SPC C
_:322 Bus zone #:Block CB fail. prot. SPC C
_:324 Bus zone #:Block external trip SPC C
_:54 Bus zone #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Bus zone #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Bus zone #:Health ENS O
_:57 Bus zone #:Operate diff. prot. ACT O
_:300 Bus zone #:Operate CB fail. prot. ACT O
_:301 Bus zone #:Operate by ext. trip ACT O
_:346 Bus zone #:Trip by transfer trip SPS O
_:308 Bus zone #:Blocked by cross stab. ACT O
_:309 Bus zone #:Alarm diff.curr.sup. ACT O
_:323 Bus zone #:Block. by diff.curr.sup. ACT O
_:310 Bus zone #:Alarm zero-cross.sup. SPS O
_:311 Bus zone #:No release of operate SPS O
_:312 Bus zone #:Block. by discon.fault SPS O
_:313 Bus zone #:Blocked SPS O
_:314 Bus zone #:BI External trip dist. SPS O
_:315 Bus zone #:No Ext. trip release SPS O
_:319 Bus zone #:BI Trip release dist. SPS O
_:317 Bus zone #:Blocked BZ busbar prot SPS O
_:318 Bus zone #:Blocked BZ CB fail.prt SPS O
_:347 Bus zone #:Blocked BZ ext. trip SPS O
_:325 Bus zone #:Prefers BZ SPS O
_:326 Bus zone #:Preferred by BZ SPS O
_:343 Bus zone #:Block. by comm. failure SPS O
_:344 Bus zone #:Block. by sync. fault SPS O
_:345 Bus zone #:Block. by MV offset flt. SPS O
_:342 Bus zone #:Sw. over to CT overl. SPS O
_:305 Bus zone #:I diff. WYE O
_:306 Bus zone #:I restr. WYE O
_:330 Bus zone #:Id A SAV O
_:331 Bus zone #:Id B SAV O
_:332 Bus zone #:Id C SAV O
_:333 Bus zone #:Ir A SAV O
_:334 Bus zone #:Ir B SAV O
_:335 Bus zone #:Ir C SAV O

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

(Type)
_:336 Bus zone #:Id_f A SAV O
_:337 Bus zone #:Id_f B SAV O
_:338 Bus zone #:Id_f C SAV O
_:339 Bus zone #:Ir_f A SAV O
_:340 Bus zone #:Ir_f B SAV O
_:341 Bus zone #:Ir_f C SAV O

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
6.8 External Tripping Busbar Section (from Bay)

The External tripping of a busbar section (from bay) function makes it possible to connect a command to
externally trip a busbar section, for example, from an external CBFP device. The function incorporates this
external command into the busbar protection. The busbar protection evaluates the disconnector image to
determine which bays are connected to the affected busbar section. The external trip signal can be sent from a
binary input or via protection communication. A typical application is an external circuit-breaker failure protec-
tion device and tripping of the busbar by the busbar protection.
The External tripping busbar section (from bay) function block can be used in the Circuit-breaker function
group.
[dw_strexf, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-61 Embedding the External Tripping Busbar Section (from Bay) Function
The function picks up on a phase-selective basis if the input signals for the start and release signal were acti-
vated within a supervision time that can be set. The Busbar protection function trips without delay.
The function External tripping busbar section (from bay) continually monitors the input signal >Release
and the phase-specific input signals >Start pole A, >Start pole B and >Start pole C.
If you have only one input signal available for starting, route it to all 3 phase-specific input signals.
The function picks up on a phase-selective basis if the following conditions are fulfilled:
• The function is switched on.
• The external trip command is activated.
• The enable signal has been issued.

Tripping takes place without a delay.
An internal trip signal is sent to the disconnector image at the same time as the operate indication. The busbar
protection evaluates the disconnector image and trips all circuit breakers associated with the busbar section.
To prevent unwanted tripping, the time between arrival of the input signals is monitored statically and dynam-
ically. Time-outs are indicated, the function External tripping busbar section (from bay) switches to the
Alarm operating mode. Time supervision of the inputs is always active and cannot be switched off. Supervi-
sion works similar to supervision in the function External tripping busbar section (direct), 6.7.3 Function
Description).

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
If the release signal is not received within the set supervision time Sup.time f. release signal after
activation of the starting signal, for example >Start pole A, the failure indication Fail. no BI
release is issued.
If, 15 s after activation of one of the input signals, the other input signal remains inactive, the indication
Fault BI Start or Fault BI Release is issued. In addition, the duration of the starting signals is moni-
tored to ensure that it does not exceed 15 s.
If one of the monitored input signals becomes inactive, tripping drops out.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Logic
[lo_ext_ein, 5, en_US]
Figure 6-62 Logic Diagram of the External Trip of a Busbar Section from the Bay
Parameter: Sup.time f. release signal

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
With the Sup.time f. release signal parameter, you set the supervision time which may lie at most
between the phase-specific starting signal, for example, >Start pole A, and the arrival of the release signal
>Release.
6.8.5 Settings

Ext. trip BZ
_:1 Ext. trip BZ:Mode • off on
• on
• test
_:111 Ext. trip BZ:Sup.time f. 0.06 s to 1.00 s 0.06 s
release signal

(Type)
Ext. trip BZ
_:501 Ext. trip BZ:>Start pole A SPS I
_:502 Ext. trip BZ:>Start pole B SPS I
_:503 Ext. trip BZ:>Start pole C SPS I
_:504 Ext. trip BZ:>Release SPS I
_:82 Ext. trip BZ:>Block function SPS I
_:54 Ext. trip BZ:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Ext. trip BZ:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Ext. trip BZ:Health ENS O
_:306 Ext. trip BZ:Operate ACT O
_:307 Ext. trip BZ:Fail. no BI release SPS O
_:301 Ext. trip BZ:Fail. BI 'Start poleA' SPS O
_:302 Ext. trip BZ:Fail. BI 'Start poleB' SPS O
_:303 Ext. trip BZ:Fail. BI 'Start poleC' SPS O
_:304 Ext. trip BZ:Fail. BI 'release' SPS O

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
6.9 Bus Coupler Differential Protection

You can use the bus coupler differential protection in all busbar-protection variants. For the distributed busbar
protection, you must previously successfully update the central unit. Instantiate the bus coupler differential
protection in the representative of the bus coupler bay.
If you set the assignment to the zones as non-overlapping in a coupler bay with 2 current transformers,
the bus coupler differential protection is used to protect the section between the 2 current transformers (dead
zone). With this current transformer assignment, a fault between the 2 current transformers merely results in
the tripping of the circuit breaker in the bus coupler. The end-fault protection provides for a selective tripping
of the busbar involved in a 2nd step.
[dw_coup_deadzone, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-63 Fault in the Dead Zone of the Bus Coupler with 2 Current Transformers
Depending on the amount of the differential current measured in the bus coupler, the assignment of current
can temporarily be switched from non-overlapping to overlapping. As a result, a fault in the dead zone is
very quickly cleared by the busbar differential protection. Connected with this is the disadvantage of a non-
selective tripping of the 2 busbars that are connected at the bus coupler.
If you use a coupler bay with 2 current transformers, you can configure the bus coupler differential protection
as a part of the bay proxy. You can find the Coupler zone function in the bay under the function extensions.
The bus coupler differential protection uses the currents measured by the two current transformers that are
present in the bay. The trip command of the bus coupler differential protection acts on the circuit breaker that
is present in the bay.
To be able also to selectively trip the busbar section generating the fault, you must configure an end-fault
protection for the circuit breaker in the bus coupler.
Method of Measurement Bus Coupler Differential Protection

The method of measurement is based on the same algorithms as for the busbar differential protection. The
section between the 2 transformers of the bus coupler represents its own bus zone. The differential and stabi-
lization currents are calculated in a phase-segregated manner from the 2 measured currents of the respective
phases IA, IB and IC. Based on the position of the operating point resulting from this calculation, the bus
coupler differential protection initiates the operate command for the circuit breaker in the bus coupler.
To operate the circuit breaker, the pickup of the check zone of the busbar differential protection is also neces-
sary.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[lo_coup_diffprot, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-64 Bus Coupler Differential Protection Logic Diagram
Tripping of the Bus Section Generating the Fault in the Dead Zone
After the bus coupler differential protection has opened the circuit breaker in the bus coupler, the fault current
is still fed into the bus coupler, but only from one side. When the circuit breaker in the bus coupler opens, the
end-fault protection configured for the circuit breaker picks up. The end-fault protection sets the currents
measured by both bus coupler current transformers to 0 for the connected busbar section. The differential
current resulting for the busbar section then results in the selective tripping of the corresponding busbar
section.
If, when the coupler circuit breaker opens, end-fault protection is inactive (for example it is temporarily
blocked due to a close command) and the busbar sections feeding the error are not therefore disconnected,
the currents measured by the bus coupler current transformers get unbalanced once time stage T2 of the
inherent CBFP has expired. This unbalancing of currents will occur regardless of whether or not the inherent
CBFP is started. The type of unbalancing varies: When the inherent CBFP is started, the current polarities will
be negated, whereas if the inherent CBFP is not started, the currents will be set to 0 (after time T2 + 10 ms has
expired). This ensures safe fault clearing even when end-fault protection is inactive.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Supervision Functions in the Bus Coupler Differential Protection

The following supervision functions are available for the bus coupler differential protection:
• Differential-current supervision
The method of operation corresponds to the differential-current supervision for the busbar sections. The
same setting parameters apply as for differential-current supervision of the bus zones.
• Zero-crossing supervision
The method of operation is identical to the zero-crossing supervision for the bus zones.
Temporary Switchover of the Current Assignment in the Bus Coupler from Non-Overlapping to Overlapping
In order to achieve a very fast, but not busbar-selective fault clarification by the busbar differential protection
with high currents in the dead zone, there is the option of temporarily switching the current assignment from
non-overlapping to overlapping. To do this, the differential current of the 2 bus coupler current transformers is
compared to the 2 threshold values set as parameters Thres.1-ph.f.CT overl and Thresh.mul-
ph.f.CT overl.. As soon as the differential current exceeds the threshold Thres.1-ph.f.CT overl in
only 1 phase or as soon as the differential current exceeds the threshold Thresh.mul-ph.f.CT overl. in
2 or 3 phases, the assignment of current immediately switches over to overlapping. This protects the
section between the 2 current transformers within the measuring range of the 2 connected busbar sections.
The switchover of the current assignment is available for the respective busbar sections as an indication Sw.
over to CT overl.. If this switchover of the current assignment is not desired, the option exists to set the
threshold-value parameters used for the switchover to infinity (∞), thereby making it ineffective.
If the threshold-value parameter is set lower than the minimum differential current threshold, this results in
the corresponding fault type always being clarified quickly and on an unselective basis in overlapping mode.
The following figure shows an application in which the multiphase short circuits more critical for power
quality are always clarified in overlapping mode, but the non-critical 1-pole faults are not clarified until there
is a very high differential current.
[dw_coup_kl, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-65 Application Example Thres.1-ph.f.CT overl and Thresh.mul-ph.f.CT overl.
Parameter: Mode

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
With the parameter Mode, you can switch the bus coupler differential protection function on or off. The
setting on causes the bus coupler differential protection to be switched on. The setting off causes the bus
coupler differential protection to be switched off, that is, there is no protection in the dead zone.
If you do not use the bus coupler differential protection, remove it again and set the parameter Overlapping
CT = yes so that the dead zone is protected again.
Parameter: Thres.1-ph.f.CT overl
• Default setting (_:101) Thres.1-ph.f.CT overl = 4.0 I/IrObj

With the Thres.1-ph.f.CT overl parameter, you can set the magnitude of the differential current. Above
this magnitude, the assignment of current in the bus coupler bay is switched from non-overlapping to
overlapping in case of 1-phase faults. This switchover produces a very fast, but not busbar-selective,
clearing of a fault in the dead zone by the busbar differential protection. If this switching of the current assign-
ment in case of 1-phase faults is not desired, set the parameter to the value infinity (∞).
The magnitude of the setting value depends on the stability of the power system. Set the value at which the
power-system operator has doubts about the stability of the power system because of the delayed clearing of
the fault and prefers an unselective but fast fault clearing (see the following figures).
Parameter: Thresh.mul-ph.f.CT overl.
• Default setting (_:102) Thresh.mul-ph.f.CT overl. = 4.0 I/IrObj

With the parameter Thresh.mul-ph.f.CT overl., you can set the magnitude of the differential current.
Above this magnitude, the assignment of current in the bus coupler bay is switched from non-overlapping
to overlapping in case of multi-phase faults. This switchover produces a very fast, but not busbar-selective,
clearing of a fault in the dead zone by the busbar differential protection. If this switching of the current assign-
ment in case of multi-phase faults is not desired, set the parameter to the value infinity (∞). If you want multi-
phase faults always to be handled as overlapping, set a value of less than the Threshold Idiff.
The magnitude of the setting value depends on the stability of the power system. Set the value at which the
power-system operator has doubts about the stability of the power system because of the delayed clearing of
the fault and prefers an unselective but fast fault clearing (see the following figures).
[dw_coup_deadzone_err, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-66 Fault in the Coupler Bay

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[dw_coup_diffprot_time, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-67 Currents with Fault in the Bus Coupler Bay without Switchover to Current Transformer Over-
lapping
(1) The end-fault protection sets the bus coupler bay current to 0. This causes a differential current in
busbar section 1.
Settings and Supervision for the Bus Coupler Differential Protection

For the protection range of the bus coupler differential protection, the same setting parameters apply as for
the busbar sections.
Further information is available in the Application and Setting Notes starting in chapters 6.2.12 Application
and Setting Notes – Busbar Differential Protection – General and 8.3.5.4 Application and Setting Notes.
6.9.5 Settings

Coupler zone
_:1 Coupler zone:Mode • off on
• on
_:101 Coupler zone:Thres.1- 0.1 I/IrObj to 25.0 I/IrObj; ∞ 4.0 I/IrObj
ph.f.CT overl
_:102 Coupler 0.1 I/IrObj to 25.0 I/IrObj; ∞ 4.0 I/IrObj
zone:Thresh.mul-ph.f.CT
overl.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

(Type)
Coupler zone
_:500 Coupler zone:>Block SPS I
_:307 Coupler zone:Block diff. prot. SPC C
_:502 Coupler zone:>Trip release SPS I
_:52 Coupler zone:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Coupler zone:Health ENS O
_:54 Coupler zone:Inactive SPS O
_:56 Coupler zone:Operate ACT O
_:309 Coupler zone:Alarm diff.curr.sup. ACT O
_:310 Coupler zone:Alarm zero-cross.sup. SPS O
_:313 Coupler zone:Blocked SPS O
_:311 Coupler zone:No release of operate SPS O
_:312 Coupler zone:Block. by discon.fault SPS O
_:304 Coupler zone:I diff. WYE O
_:305 Coupler zone:I restr. WYE O
_:330 Coupler zone:Id A SAV O
_:331 Coupler zone:Id B SAV O
_:332 Coupler zone:Id C SAV O
_:333 Coupler zone:Ir A SAV O
_:334 Coupler zone:Ir B SAV O
_:335 Coupler zone:Ir C SAV O
_:336 Coupler zone:Id_f A SAV O
_:337 Coupler zone:Id_f B SAV O
_:338 Coupler zone:Id_f C SAV O
_:339 Coupler zone:Ir_f A SAV O
_:340 Coupler zone:Ir_f B SAV O
_:341 Coupler zone:Ir_f C SAV O

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
6.10 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
The Overcurrent protection, phases function (ANSI 50/51):
• Detects short circuits in electrical equipment
• Can be used as backup or emergency overcurrent protection in addition to the main protection
The Overcurrent protection, phases function is used in the Current-transformer function group. 2 kinds of
functions are available for the 3-phase overcurrent protection:
• Overcurrent protection, phases – advanced (50/51 OC-3ph-A)
• Overcurrent protection, phases – basic (50/51 OC-3ph-B)

Only the Basic function type is available in the busbar protection device. The Basic function type is provided for
standard applications. The Advanced function type offers more functionality and is provided for more complex
applications.
The Definite-time overcurrent protection stage is preconfigured for both function types.
In the Overcurrent protection, phases – basic function type, the following stages can be operated simulta-
neously:
• Maximum of 4 stages Definite-time overcurrent protection – basic
• 1 stage Inverse-time overcurrent protection – basic
[dw_ocp_bp_1, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-68 Structure/Embedding of the Function Overcurrent Protection, Phases – Basic

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
6.10.3 Stage with Definite-Time Characteristic Curve
6.10.3.1 Description
Logic of the Basic Stage
[lo_bbp-ocp_3b1, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-69 Logic Diagram of the Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (Phases) – Basic
Method of measurement (Basic and Advanced Stage)

You use the Method of measurement parameter to define whether the stage uses the fundamental
comp. or the calculated RMS value.
• Measurement of the fundamental component:

This method of measurement processes the sampled current values and filters out the fundamental
component numerically.
• Measurement of the RMS value:

This method of measurement determines the current amplitude from the sampled values according to
the defining equation of the RMS value. Harmonics are included in the analysis.
Blocking of the Stage

The following blocking resets the picked up stage completely:
• Via the binary input signal >Block stage from an external or internal source

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Blocking of the Time Delay (Basic and Advanced Stage)

You can use the binary input signal >Block delay & op. to prevent the start of the time delay and thus
also the operate signal. A running time delay is reset. The pickup is indicated and the fault logging and
recording takes place.
Parameter: Method of measurement
• Default setting (_:661:8) Method of measurement = fundamental comp.

With the Method of measurement parameter, you define whether the stage uses the fundamental
comp. (standard method) or the calculated RMS value.
fundamental comp. Select this method of measurement if harmonics or transient current peaks
are to be suppressed.
RMS value Select this method of measurement if you want the stage to take harmonics
into account (for example, at capacitor banks). Consider that aperiodic DC
components present in the secondary circuit are measured and can cause
an overfunction.
For this method of measurement, do not set the threshold value of the
stage to less than 0.1 Irated,sec. If currents from more than one measuring
point are added up in the current interface of a function group, the setting
value should not be set lower than 0.1 Irated,sec multiplied by the number of
added currents.
Parameter: Threshold, Operate delay
• Default setting (_:661:3) Threshold = 1.500 A (for the 1st stage)
• Default setting (_:661:6) Operate delay = 0.30 s (for the 1st stage)
Set the Threshold and Operate delay parameters for the specific application.
The following details apply to a 2-stage characteristic curve (1st stage = definite-time overcurrent protection
stage and 2nd stage = high-current stage).
1st stage (overcurrent stage):
The setting depends on the maximum occurring operating current. Pickup by overload must be excluded since
overcurrent protection operates with short tripping times as short-circuit protection and not as overload
protection. Therefore, set the Threshold parameter for lines to approx. 10 %, for transformers and motors to
approx. 20 % above the maximum load that is expected.
EXAMPLE
Overcurrent-protection stage: 110-kV overhead line, 150 mm2 cross-section
Maximum transmittable power
Pmax = 120 MVA
Correspondingly
Imax = 630 A
Current transformer = 600 A/5 A
Safety factor = 1.1
Settings in primary and secondary measurands result in the setting values:

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[fo_ocp_ph1, 2, en_US]
The Operate delay to be set is derived from the time-grading schedule that has been prepared for the
system. Where overcurrent protection is used in emergency mode, shorter time delays might be reasonable
(one grading time above fast tripping), since the emergency mode only operates if the main protection func-
tion fails.
2nd Stage (High-Current Stage):

This tripping stage can also be used for current grading. This applies in the case of very long lines with low
source impedance or ahead of high reactances (for example, transformers, shunt reactors). Set the
Threshold parameter to ensure that the stage does not pick up in case of a short circuit at the end of the
line.
Set the Operate delay parameter to 0 or to a low value.
Siemens recommends that the threshold values be determined with a system analysis. The following example
illustrates the principle of grading with a current threshold on a long line.
EXAMPLE
High-current stage: 110-kV overhead line, 150 mm2 cross-section
s (length) = 60 km
ZL/s = 0.46 Ω/km
Ratio of zero-sequence impedance and positive-sequence impedance of the line: ZL0/ZL1 = 4
Short-circuit power at the beginning of the line:
Ssc' = 2.5 GVA
Ratio of zero-sequence impedance and positive-sequence impedance of the source impedance at the begin-
ning of the line: ZP0/ZP1 = 2
Resulting in the following values for the line impedance ZL and the source impedance ZP:
[fo_ocp_002, 1, en_US]
The 3-phase short-circuit current at the end of the line is Isc end:
[fo_ocp_ph4, 1, en_US]
The settings in primary and secondary values result in the following setting values which include a safety
margin of 10 %:

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
If short-circuit currents exceed 2365 A (primary) or 19.7 A (secondary), there is a short circuit on the line to be
protected. The overcurrent protection can cut off this short circuit immediately.
Note: The amounts in the calculation example are accurate enough for overhead lines. If the source impe-
dance and line impedance have different angles, you have to use complex numbers to calculate the
Threshold .
6.10.3.3 Settings

General
_:661:1 Definite-T 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:661:2 Definite-T 1:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:661:8 Definite-T 1:Method of • fundamental comp. fundamental
measurement comp.
• RMS value
_:661:3 Definite-T 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
_:661:6 Definite-T 1:Operate 0.00 s to 100.00 s 0.30 s
delay
General
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
measurement comp.
• RMS value
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 10.00 A
delay

(Type)
Group indicat.
Definite-T 1
_:661:81 Definite-T 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:661:500 Definite-T 1:>Block delay & op. SPS I
_:661:54 Definite-T 1:Inactive SPS O
_:661:52 Definite-T 1:Behavior ENS O
_:661:53 Definite-T 1:Health ENS O
_:661:55 Definite-T 1:Pickup ACD O
_:661:56 Definite-T 1:Operate delay expired ACT O

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

(Type)
_:661:57 Definite-T 1:Operate ACT O
Definite-T 2

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
6.10.4 Stage with Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve
[lo_bbp-ocp_3b2, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-70 Logic Diagram Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (Phases) – Basic
Pickup and Dropout Behaviors of the Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve according to IEC and ANSI (Basic and
Advanced Stage)
When the input variable exceeds the threshold value by a factor of 1.1, the inverse-time characteristic curve is
processed. An integrating method of measurement summarizes the weighted time. The weighted time results
from the characteristic curve. For this, the time that is associated with the present current value is determined
from the characteristic curve. Once the weighted time exceeds the value 1, the stage operates.
When the measured value falls below the pickup value by a factor of 1.045 (0.95 ⋅ 1.1 ⋅ threshold value), the
dropout is started. The pickup will be indicated as clearing. You can influence the dropout behavior via setting
parameters. You can select between instantaneous dropout (totalized time is deleted) or dropout according to
the characteristic curve (reduction of totalized time depending on the characteristic curve). The dropout
according to characteristic curve (disk emulation) is the same as turning back a rotor disk. The weighted
reduction of the time is initiated from 0.9 of the set threshold value.
The characteristic curve and associated formulas are shown in the Technical Data.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Method of Measurement (Basic and Advanced Stage)





• Recommended setting value (_:691:8) Method of measurement = fundamental comp.

an overfunction.
added currents.
Parameter: Type of character. curve
• Default setting (_:691:130) Type of character. curve = IEC normal inverse

The device offers all the usual inverse-time characteristic curves according to IEC and ANSI. Select the Type
of character. curve required for your specific application. For more information about the parameter
Type of character. curve, refer to chapter 11.15.2 Stage with Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve.
Parameter: Threshold
• Default setting (_:691:3) Threshold = 1.500 A

Set the Threshold and Type of character. curve parameters for the specific application.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
The setting depends on the maximum occurring operating current. Pickup by overload must be excluded since
overcurrent protection operates with short tripping times as short-circuit protection and not as overload
protection. Set the Threshold parameter for lines to approx. 10 %, for transformers and motors to approx.
20 % above the maximum expected load.
Note that a safety margin is set between pickup value and threshold value. The stage only picks up at approx.
10 % above the Threshold.
EXAMPLE
Overcurrent-protection stage: 110-kV overhead line, 150 mm2 cross-section
Maximum transmittable power
Pmax = 120 MVA
Correspondingly
Imax = 630 A
Settings in primary and secondary measurands result in the setting values:
Parameter: Time dial
• Default setting (_:691:101) Time dial = 1.00

With the Time dial parameter, you displace the characteristic curve in the time direction.
The set value for the Time dial parameter is derived from the time-grading schedule that has been prepared
for the electrical power system. Where overcurrent protection is used in emergency mode, shorter time delays
might be reasonable (one grading time above fast tripping), since the emergency mode only operates if the
main protection function fails.
Where no time grading and therefore no displacement of the characteristic curve is required, leave the param-
eter Time dial at 1 (default setting).
Parameter: Reset
• Default setting (_:691:131) Reset = disk emulation

With the Reset parameter, you define whether the stage drops out according to the dropout characteristic
curve (in accordance with the behavior of a disk emulation = rotor disk) or instantaneously.
disk emulation Select this setting if the device is coordinated with electromechanical
devices or other devices which perform a dropout after a disk emulation.
instantaneous Select this setting if the dropout is not to be performed after disk emulation
and an instantaneous dropout is desired instead.
6.10.4.3 Settings

General
_:691:1 Inverse-T 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

_:691:2 Inverse-T 1:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:691:8 Inverse-T 1:Method of • fundamental comp. fundamental
measurement comp.
• RMS value
_:691:3 Inverse-T 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
_:691:130 Inverse-T 1:Type of char-
acter. curve
_:691:131 Inverse-T 1:Reset • instantaneous disk emulation
• disk emulation
_:691:101 Inverse-T 1:Time dial 0.00 to 15.00 1.00

(Type)
Group indicat.
Inverse-T 1
_:691:81 Inverse-T 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:691:500 Inverse-T 1:>Block delay & op. SPS I
_:691:54 Inverse-T 1:Inactive SPS O
_:691:52 Inverse-T 1:Behavior ENS O
_:691:53 Inverse-T 1:Health ENS O
_:691:59 Inverse-T 1:Disk emulation running SPS O
_:691:55 Inverse-T 1:Pickup ACD O
_:691:56 Inverse-T 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:691:57 Inverse-T 1:Operate ACT O

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
6.11 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
The Overcurrent protection, ground function (ANSI 50N/51N):
• Detects short circuits in electrical equipment
• Can be used as backup or emergency overcurrent protection in addition to the main protection
The Overcurrent protection, ground function is used in the Current-transformer function group. 2 kinds of
functions are available for the 3-phase overcurrent protection:
• Overcurrent protection, ground – advanced (50N/51N OC-gnd-A)
• Overcurrent protection, ground – basic (50N/51N OC-gnd-B)

Only the Basic function type is available in the busbar protection device. The Basic function type is provided for
standard applications. The Advanced function type offers more functionality and is provided for more complex
applications.
The Definite-time overcurrent protection stage is preconfigured for both function types.
In the function type Overcurrent protection, ground – basic the following stages can be operated simultane-
ously:
[dw_ocp_gb1, 4, en_US]
Figure 6-71 Structure/Embedding of the Function Overcurrent Protection, Ground – Basic

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[lo_bbp-ocp_gb1, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-72 Logic Diagram Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (Ground) – Basic





C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022


an overfunction.
added currents.
Parameter: Threshold, Operate delay
• Default setting (_:751:3) Threshold = 1.20 A (for the first stage)
• Default setting (_:751:6) Operate delay = 0.300 s (for the first stage)
Set the Threshold and Operate delay parameters for the specific application.
The following details apply to a 2-stage characteristic curve (1st stage = definite-time overcurrent protection
stage and 2nd stage = high-current stage).
1st stage (overcurrent stage):

The setting depends on the minimal occurring ground-fault current. This must be determined.
For very small ground-fault currents, Siemens recommends using the Ground-fault protection against high-
resistance ground faults in grounded systems function.
The Operate delay to be set is derived from the time-grading schedule that has been prepared for the
system. Where overcurrent protection is used in emergency mode, shorter time delays might be reasonable
(one grading time above fast tripping), since the emergency mode only operates if the main protection func-
tion fails.
2nd stage (high-current stage):

This tripping stage can also be used for current grading. This applies in the case of very long lines with low
source impedance or ahead of high reactances (for example, transformers, shunt reactors). Set the
Threshold parameter to ensure that the stage does not pick up in case of a short-circuit at the end of the
line.
Set the Operate delay parameter to 0 or to a low value.
Siemens recommends that the threshold values be determined with a system analysis. The following example
illustrates the principle of grading with a current threshold on a long line.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
EXAMPLE
High-current stage: 110-kV overhead line, 150 mm2 cross-section
s (length) = 60 km
ZL/s = 0.46 Ω/km
Ratio of zero-sequence impedance and positive-sequence impedance of the line: ZL0/ZL1 = 4
Short-circuit power at the beginning of the line:
Ssc' = 2.5 GVA
Ratio of zero-sequence impedance and positive-sequence impedance of the source impedance at the
beginning of the line: ZP0/ZP1 = 2
Resulting in the following values for the line impedance ZL and the source impedance ZP:
The 1-pole short-circuit current at the end of the line is IscG end:
The settings in primary and secondary values result in the following setting values which include a safety
margin of 10 %:
[fo_ocp_gr4, 3, en_US]
In case of short-circuit currents exceeding 1246 A (primary) or 10.39 A (secondary) there is a short-circuit on
the line to be protected. The overcurrent protection can cut off this short circuit immediately.
Note: The amounts in the calculation example are accurate enough for overhead lines. If the source impe-
dance, line impedance and zero-sequence impedance have very different angles, you have use complex
numbers to calculate the Threshold.
6.11.3.3 Settings

General
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

measurement comp.
• RMS value
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
delay

(Type)
Group indicat.
Definite-T 1

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[lo_bbp-ocp_gr2, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-73 Logic Diagram Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (Ground) – Basic
Pickup and Dropout Behaviors of the Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve According to IEC and ANSI (Basic and
Advanced Stage)

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022






an overfunction.
added currents.

of character. curve required for your specific application. For more information about the parameter
Type of character. curve, refer to chapter11.16.2 Stage with Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve.
Parameter: Additional time delay
• Recommended setting value (_:781:115) Additional time delay = 0.00 s

With the Additional time delay parameter, you define a definite-time delay in addition to the inverse-
time delay.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
If the setting is left on its default value of 0 s, this parameter has no effect on the inverse-time characteristic
curve.
This parameter is only required for time coordination in recloser schemes. For all other applications, Siemens
recommend keeping the default setting of 0 s.

The setting depends on the minimal occurring ground-fault current. This must be determined.
• Default setting (_:781:101) Time dial = 1

The set value for the Time dial parameter is derived from the time-grading schedule that has been prepared
for the electrical power system. Where overcurrent protection is used in emergency mode, shorter time delays
might be reasonable (one grading time above fast tripping), since the emergency mode only operates if the
main protection function fails.
Where no time grading and therefore no displacement of the characteristic curve is required, leave the Time
dial parameter at 1.
Parameter: Reset

With the Reset parameter, you define whether the stage drops out according to the dropout characteristic
instantaneous Select this setting if the dropout is not to be performed after disk emulation
6.11.4.3 Settings

General
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
measurement comp.
• RMS value
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
acter. curve
_:781:113 Inverse-T 1:Min. time of 0.00 s to 1.00 s 0.00 s
the curve
• disk emulation

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

_:781:115 Inverse-T 1:Additional 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
time delay

(Type)
Group indicat.
Inverse-T 1

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
6.12 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
The Directional overcurrent protection, phases function (ANSI 67):
• Detects short circuits at electrical equipment
• Can be used as backup overcurrent protection in addition to the main protection
• Ensures selective fault detection for parallel lines or transformers with infeed at one end
• Ensures selective fault detection in cable runs with infeed at both ends or in lines connected to form ring
topologies
The Directional overcurrent protection, phases function is used in protection function groups. 2 function
types are offered:
• Directional overcurrent protection, phases – advanced (67 Dir.OC-3ph-A)
• Directional overcurrent protection, phases – basic (67 Dir.OC-3ph-B)

Only the Basic function type is available in the busbar protection device 7SS85. The Basic function type is
provided for standard applications. The Advanced function type offers more functionality and is provided for
more complex applications.
Both function types are preconfigured by the manufacturer with 2 directional, definite-time overcurrent
protection stages and with 1 directional inverse-time overcurrent protection stage.
In the Basic function type Directional overcurrent protection, phases – basic the following stages can be
operated simultaneously:

Stages that are not preconfigured are shown in gray in the following figures. Apart from the tripping delay
characteristic, the stages are identical in structure.
The direction determination occurs on function level and has the same effects in all stages (see following
figure and 6.12.6.1 Description ). In this way, it is ensured that all stages of a function receive the same direc-
tion result. Every stage can be set to the forward or reverse direction.
The group-indication output logic generates the following group indications of the protection function by the
logical OR of the stage-selective indications:
• Pickup
• Operate

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[dw_diocba, 5, en_US]
Figure 6-74 Structure/Embedding the Function Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases – Basic
If the device-internal functions listed in the following are present in the device, these functions can influence
the pickup values and tripping delays of the stages or block the stages. The stage can also be affected by an
external source via a binary input signal.
• Binary input signal

If the device is equipped with the Inrush-current detection function, the stages can be stabilized against trip-
ping due to transformer-inrush currents.
6.12.3 Stage Control
Logic
The following figure represents the stage control. It applies to all types of stages.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[lo_docp_32, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-75 Stage-Control Logic Diagram
Blocking of the Stage with Measuring-Voltage Failure

The stage can be blocked if a measuring-voltage failure occurs. In the event of blocking, the picked up stage
will be reset. The following blocking options are available for the stage:
• From inside on pickup of the Measuring-voltage failure detection function (see chapter 8.3.2.1 Over-
view of Functions)
• From an external source via the binary input signal >Open of the function block Volt.-transf. c.
b., which links in the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker
The Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter can be set so that measuring-voltage failure detection
blocks the stage or does not block it.
Parameter: Blk. by meas.-volt. failure
• Recommended setting value (_:8131:10) Blk. by meas.-volt. failure = yes

You use the Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter to control the behavior of the stage when a
measuring-voltage failure is detected.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
A measuring-voltage failure can only be detected if one of the following two conditions is met:
• The device-internal supervision function Measuring-voltage failure detection is configured and

switched on.
• The binary input signal >Open of the function block VTCB is connected to the voltage-transformer circuit
breaker (see chapter 8.3.4.1 Overview of Functions).

yes The directional overcurrent-protection stage is blocked. Siemens recom-
mends that you retain the default setting, as correct direction determination
cannot be guaranteed if a measuring-voltage failure occurs.
no The directional overcurrent-protection stage is not blocked.
[lo_docg6b, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-76 Logic Diagram of the Directional, Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection, Phases - Basic
Directional Mode
You use the Directional mode parameter to define whether the stage works in a forward or reverse direc-
tion.
Direction determination itself works across stages (see section 6.12.6.1 Description ).

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Method of Measurement



The following blockings reset the picked up stage completely:
• Externally or internally via the binary input signal >Block stage (see chapter 6.12.3.1 Description )
• Measuring-voltage failure (see chapter 6.12.3.1 Description )
Blocking of the Time Delay

Parameter: Directional mode
• Default setting (_:8131:105) Directional mode = forward

You use the Directional mode parameter to define the directional mode of the stage.
forward Select this setting if the stage is to work in a forward direction (in the direc-
tion of the line).
reverse Select this setting if the stage is to work in a reverse direction (in the direc-
tion of the busbar).

an overfunction.
added currents.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
• Default setting (_:8131:3) Threshold = 1.50 A (for the first stage)

The same considerations apply to setting the threshold value as for non-directional overcurrent protection. For
further information, refer to section 6.10.3.2 Application and Setting Notes.
The Operate delay to be set is derived from the time-grading schedule that has been prepared for the system.
6.12.4.3 Settings

General
_:2311:102 General:Rotation angle -180 ° to 180 ° 45 °
of ref. volt.
General
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:8131:105 Definite-T 1:Directional • forward forward
mode
• reverse
measurement comp.
• RMS value
_:8131:10 Definite-T 1:Blk. by • no yes
meas.-volt. failure
• yes
_:8131:27 Definite-T 1:Blk. w. • no no
inrush curr. detect.
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
delay
General
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
mode
• reverse
measurement comp.
• RMS value
meas.-volt. failure
• yes
• yes

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 10.00 A
delay

(Type)
General
_:2311:501 General:>Test of direction SPS I
_:2311:301 General:Test direction ACD O
Group indicat.
Definite-T 1
_:8131:501 Definite-T 1:>Release delay & op. SPS I
_:8131:60 Definite-T 1:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:8131:300 Definite-T 1:Direction ACD O
Definite-T 2
_:8132:60 Definite-T 2:Inrush blocks operate ACT O

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[lo_doci6b, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-77 Logic Diagram of the Directional, Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection, Phases - Basic
Directional Mode
You use the Directional mode parameter to define whether the stage works in a forward or reverse direc-
tion.
The direction determination works across stages (see chapter 6.12.6.1 Description ).
Pickup and Dropout Behaviors of the Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve According to IEC and ANSI

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

• Externally or internally via the binary input signal >Block stage (see chapter 6.12.3.1 Description )
• Measuring-voltage failure (see chapter 6.12.3.1 Description )
Blocking of the Time Delay

also the operate signal. A running time delay is reset. The pickup is indicated and a fault record is opened.

You use the Directional mode parameter to define the directional mode of the stage.
forward Select this setting if the stage is to work in a forward direction (in the direc-
tion of the line).
reverse Select this setting if the stage is to work in a reverse direction (in the direc-
tion of the busbar).

an overfunction.
added currents.

of character. curve required for your specific application.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
The same considerations apply to setting the threshold value as for non-directional overcurrent protection.
Therefore, refer to chapter 6.10.4.2 Application and Setting Notes for further information.

Use the Time dial parameter to displace the characteristic curve in the time direction.
The set value for the Time dial parameter is derived from the time-grading chart that has been prepared for
the electrical power system.
dial parameter at 1 (default setting).
Parameter: Reset

You use the Reset parameter to define whether the stage drops out according to the dropout characteristic
instantaneous Use this setting if the dropout is not to be performed after disk emulation
6.12.5.3 Settings

General
_:2311:102 General:Rotation angle -180 ° to 180 ° 45 °
of ref. volt.
General
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:8341:111 Inverse-T 1:Directional • forward forward
mode
• reverse
_:8341:11 Inverse-T 1:1-pole • no no
operate allowed
• yes
measurement comp.
• RMS value
_:8341:10 Inverse-T 1:Blk. by • no yes
meas.-volt. failure
• yes
_:8341:27 Inverse-T 1:Blk. w. inrush • no no
curr. detect.
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
acter. curve

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

• disk emulation

(Type)
General
Group indicat.
Inverse-T 1
_:8161:60 Inverse-T 1:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:8161:300 Inverse-T 1:Direction ACD O
6.12.6 Direction Determination
General
Every phase has a separate direction-measuring element. If the threshold value in a phase is exceeded, the
direction determination is started for this phase. If there are multiphase short circuits, all measuring elements
involved perform direction determination independently. If one of the determined directions matches the set
direction, the stage picks up (see descriptions of the stage logic).
The direction is determined by calculating the phase angle between the short-circuit current and a reference
voltage.
Measurands for Direction Determining

The directional measuring element uses the short-circuit current of the phase concerned and the cross-polar-
ized phase-to-phase voltage (as the reference voltage) to determine the direction. This means that the direc-
tion can still be determined unambiguously and correctly, even if the short-circuit voltages collapse
completely when a 1-phase or 2-phase fault occurs (close-up fault).
The phase-to-phase voltages are calculated when phase-to-ground voltages are connected.
The cross-polarized voltage (reference voltage) is vertical in relation to the short-circuit voltages for 1-phase-
to-ground faults (Figure 6-78, left). For 2-phase short circuits, the position of the reference voltages changes
up to 30o, depending on the extent to which the short-circuit voltages collapse (Figure 6-78, right).

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[dw_docp_02, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-78 Cross-Polarized Voltages for Direction Determination
The following table shows how measurands are assigned for direction-determination purposes in the event of
different types of fault.
Table 6-3 Measurands for Direction Determining
Threshold- Measuring Element

Value A B C Ground
Exceeding Current Voltage Current Voltage Current Voltage Current Voltage
A IA VBC – – – – – –
B – – IB VCA – – – –
C – – – – IC VAB – –
Gnd – – – – – – Ir V0
A, Gnd – VBC – – – – Ir V0
B, Gnd – – IB VCA – – Ir V0
C, Gnd – – – – IC VAB Ir V0
A, B IA VBC IB VCA – – – –
B, C – – IB VCA IC VAB – –
A, C IA VBC – – IC VAB – –
A, B, Gnd IA VBC IB VCA – – Ir V0
B, C, Gnd – – IB VCA IC VAB Ir V0
A, C, Gnd IA VBC – – IC VAB Ir V0
A, B, C IA VBC IB VCA IC VAB – –
A, B, C, Gnd IA VBC IB VCA IC VAB Ir V0
Direction Determination
As mentioned in the General section, the direction is determined by calculating the phase angle between
short-circuit current and reference voltage. To take different system conditions and applications into account,
the reference voltage can be rotated through an adjustable angle (Rotation angle of ref. volt.
parameter). This moves the vector of the rotated reference voltage close to the vector of the short-circuit
current. Consequently, the result of direction determination is as reliable as possible. Figure 6-79 illustrates
the relationship based on a 1-phase ground fault in phase A. The short-circuit current IscA lags the short-circuit
voltage by the short-circuit angle φsc. The reference voltage, in this case VBC for measuring element A, is
rotated positively (counterclockwise) by the setting value of the Rotation angle of ref. volt. param-
eter. In the scenario illustrated here, the rotation is +45o.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Figure 6-79 Rotation of the Reference Voltage, Phase-Measuring Element
The rotated reference voltage defines the forward and reverse range, as shown in Figure 6-80. The forward
range is calculated as ±88o around the rotated reference voltage Vref,rot. If the short-circuit current vector is
located in this range, the device decides on the forward direction. In the mirrored range, the device decides on
the backward direction. In the intermediate range, the direction is undetermined.
Figure 6-80 Forward Characteristic of the Directional Function, Phase-Measuring Element
Direction Determination for Test Purposes

If you activate the binary input signal >Test of direction, the direction is determined and indicated even
without the current threshold being exceeded in one of the stages. The direction can be determined as soon
as current and voltage are greater than approx. 7 % of their secondary rated values.
Parameter: Rotation angle of ref. volt.
• Default setting (_:2311:102) Rotation angle of ref. volt.= 45o

The directional characteristic, that is, the position of the forward and reverse ranges, is set with the Rota-
tion angle of ref. volt. parameter. The short-circuit angle is typically to be found in a range from 30°

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
to 60° inductive. Therefore, in most cases, the default setting of +45o can be retained to position the reference
voltage, as it ensures a reliable directional result.
Some example settings for special applications appear in the following (Table 6-4). Please note that for phase-
to-ground faults (PG faults), the reference voltage (fault-free voltage) is vertical in relation to the short-circuit
voltage. This results in the following setting for the rotation angle:
Rotation angle of ref. volt. = 90 - φsh phase-measuring elements (PG faults)
Please also note that for phase-to-phase faults, the reference voltage is rotated between 0° (distant fault) and
30o (close-up fault) dependent upon the collapse of the faulted voltage (see Figure 6-79). You can take this
into account with an average value of 15°.
Rotation angle of ref. volt. = 90 - φsh - 15o phase-measuring elements (PP faults)
Table 6-4 Example settings
Application φsh typical Setting

Rotation angle of ref. volt.
60o Range 30o to 0o for PP faults
Selected: 15o

Selected: 45o

Selected: 45o
Input signal: >Test of direction

If you activate the binary input signal >Test of direction, the direction is determined and indicated even
without the current threshold being exceeded in one of the stages. This provides an easy means of checking
the direction during commissioning, without changing the threshold values of the stages.
6.12.7 Application Notes for Parallel Lines
Parallel Lines or Transformers

In parallel lines or transformers with infeed at one end (see Figure 6-81), if there is no directional measuring
element, a fault on feeder T1 will also trip the other feeder T2. In contrast, a directional measuring element in
the devices on busbar B prevents the tripping of the circuit breaker in the parallel feeder. Therefore, in
Figure 6-81, directional overcurrent protection is used in the places marked with direction arrows. Please note
that the forward direction of the protection device represents the direction towards the object to be protected.
This does not have to be the same as the power direction of normal power flow.
Set time grading in opposition to the power flow with increasing time. As load can only flow in one direction,
you can set the directional devices without time delay.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Figure 6-81 Parallel Line with Transformers
Legend for Figure 6-81

Stage ▶: Directional stage, forward direction set
Stage: Non-directional stage
T: Grading time

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
6.13 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground
The Directional overcurrent protection, ground function (ANSI 67N):
• Detects short circuits to ground affecting electric equipment
• Ensures selective ground-fault detection for parallel lines or transformers with infeed at one end
• Ensures selective ground-fault detection in cable runs with infeed at both ends or in lines connected to
form ring topologies
The Directional overcurrent protection, ground function can be used in protection function groups which
provide zero-sequence current and zero-sequence voltage measurements. 2 function types are offered:
• Directional overcurrent protection, ground – advanced (67N Dir.OC-gnd-A)
• Directional overcurrent protection, ground – basic (67N Dir.OC-gnd-B)

Only the Basic function type is available in the busbar protection device 7SS85. The basic function type shall
be used for standard applications. The advanced function type provides more functionalities and is intended
for more sophisticated applications.
Both function types are preconfigured by the manufacturer with 2 Definite-time overcurrent protection
stages and 1 Inverse-time overcurrent protection stage.
In the basic function type Directional overcurrent protection, ground – basic, the following stages can
operate simultaneously:
• A maximum of 4 Definite-time overcurrent protection – basic stages
• 1 Inverse-time overcurrent protection – basic stage

Referring to Figure 6-82, the stages not preconfigured are shown in gray. Apart from the operate-delay char-
acteristic curve, the stages are similar in structure.
The direction determination occurs on function level and has the same effects in all stages. In this way, it is
ensured that all stages of a function receive the same direction result. Every stage can be set to the forward or
reverse direction.
The group indication output logic generates the following group indications for the protection function by the
logic OR from the stage-selective indications:
• Pickup
• Operate

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[dw_rdirba, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-82 Structure/Embedding of the Function Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground – Basic
If the following listed device-internal functions are present in the device, these functions can influence the
pickup values and operate delays of the stages or block the stages. The stage can also be affected by an
external source via a binary input signal.
• Automatic reclosing (AREC)
• Cold-load pickup detection
• Binary input signal

If the device is equipped with the Inrush-current detection function, the stages can be stabilized against
operate due to transformer-inrush currents.
6.13.3 Stage Control
Logic
The following figure represents the stage control. It applies to all types of stages.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[lo_sta_con, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-83 Logic Diagram of the Stage Control
Blocking of Stage in Case of Measuring-Voltage Failure

The stages can be blocked if a measuring-voltage failure occurs. In the event of blocking, the picked up stage
will be reset. The following blocking options are available for the stage:
• From an internal source on the pickup of the Measuring-voltage failure detection function
• From an external source via the binary input signal >Open of the function block Voltage-transformer
circuit breaker, which links to the trip of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker
The Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter can be set to either block or not block the stage when the
Measuring-voltage failure detection function picks up.

You can use the Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter to control the response of the stage when a
A measuring-voltage failure can only be detected if one of the following 2 conditions is met:
• The device-internal Measuring-voltage failure detection function is configured and switched on.
• The binary input signal >Open of the function block Voltage-transformer circuit breaker is connected to
the voltage-transformer circuit breaker.

yes The directional overcurrent-protection stage is blocked when a measuring-
voltage failure is detected. Siemens recommends using the default setting,
as correct direction determination cannot be guaranteed if a measuring-
voltage failure occurs.
no The directional overcurrent-protection stage is not blocked when a meas-
uring-voltage failure is detected.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[lo_dirovb, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-84 Logic Diagram of the Directional Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection, Ground – Basic


This measuring procedure processes the sampled current values and filters out the fundamental compo-
nents numerically.

This measuring procedure determines the current amplitude from the sampled values according to the
defining equation of the RMS value. Harmonics are included in the analysis.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Blocking of the Stage (Basic and Advanced Stage)

• Externally or internally via the binary input signal >Block stage (see chapter 6.13.3.1 Description)
• Measuring-voltage failure (see chapter 6.13.3.1 Description)
Blocking of the Operate Delay (Basic and Advanced Stage)

You can use the binary input signal >Block delay & op. to prevent the start of the operate delay and thus
also the generation of the operate signal. A running operate delay is reset. The pickup is indicated. Fault
logging and fault recording take place.

You can use the Directional mode parameter to define the directional mode of the stage.
forward Select this setting if the stage is to work in forward direction (in the direction
of the line).
reverse Select this setting if the stage is to work in reverse direction (in the direction
of the busbar).

an overfunction.
added currents.
Parameter: Blk. w. inrush curr. detect.
• Default setting (_:4861:27) Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. = no

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

no The transformer inrush-current detection does not affect the stage.
Select this setting in the following cases:
• In cases where the device is not used on transformers.

• In cases where the device is used on transformers and the threshold
value of the stage is set above the maximum inrush current of the trans-
former. This applies, for example, to the high-current stage that is set
according to the short-circuit voltage Vsc of the transformer in such a
way that the stage only picks up on faults from the high-voltage side.
The transformer inrush current cannot become larger than the
maximum transmittable short-circuit current.
yes When the transformer inrush-current detection detects an inrush current that
would lead to an operate of the stage, the start of the operate delay and
operate of the stage are blocked.
Select this setting if the device is used on transformers and the threshold
value of the stage is set below the maximum inrush current of the trans-
former. This applies to the overcurrent-protection stage, which is used as a
backup stage with grading time for faults on the undervoltage side of the
transformer.

For setting the threshold value, the same considerations apply as for the non-directional overcurrent protec-
tion function.
For further information, refer to chapter 6.11.3.2 Application and Setting Notes .
The Operate delay to be set is derived from the time-grading chart that has been prepared for the system.
Typical examples of grading times are provided in sections 6.12.7 Application Notes for Parallel Lines .
6.13.4.3 Settings

General
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
mode
• reverse
measurement comp.
• RMS value
meas.-volt. failure
• yes
• yes

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

_:4861:101 Definite-T 1:Blk. w. 2nd • no no
harm. gnd. det.
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
delay

(Type)
General
_:2311:351 General:Phi(I,V) MV O
Group indicat.
Definite-T 1
_:4861:60 Definite-T 1:Inrush blocks operate SPS O

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[lo_diinvb, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-85 Logic Diagram of the Directional Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection, Ground – Basic


This measuring procedure processes the sampled current values and filters out the fundamental compo-
nents numerically.

This measuring procedure determines the current amplitude from the sampled values according to the
defining equation of the RMS value. Harmonics are included in the analysis.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Pickup and Dropout Behaviors of the Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve According to IEC and ANSI (Basic and
Advanced Stage)
Blocking of the Stage (Basic and Advanced Stage)

• Externally or internally via the binary input signal >Block stage (see chapter 6.13.3.1 Description)
• Measuring-voltage failure (see chapter 6.13.3.1 Description)
Blocking of the Operate Delay (Basic and Advanced Stage)

You can use the binary input signal >Block delay & op. to prevent the start of the operate delay and thus
also the generation of the operate signal. A running operate delay is reset. The pickup is indicated. Fault
logging and fault recording take place.
Blocking of the Operate Delay and Operate Signal via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function (Basic
and Advanced Stage)
Blocking of the operate delay and the operate signal via the device-internal Inrush-current detection function
is described in chapter Blocking of the Tripping by Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection

You can use the Directional mode parameter to define the directional mode of the stage.
forward Select this setting if the stage is to work in forward direction (in the
direction of the line).
reverse Select this setting if the stage is to work in reverse direction (in the
direction of the busbar).


C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

an overfunction.
added currents.

no The transformer inrush-current detection does not affect the stage.
Select this setting in the following cases:
• In cases where the device is not used on transformers.

• In cases where the device is used on transformers and the
threshold value of the stage is set above the maximum inrush
current of the transformer. This applies, for example, to the high-
current stage that is set according to the short-circuit voltage Vsc
of the transformer in such a way that the stage only picks up on
faults from the high-voltage side. The transformer inrush current
cannot become larger than the maximum transmittable shortcir-
cuit current.
yes When the transformer inrush-current detection detects an inrush
current that would lead to an operate of the stage, the start of the
operate delay and operate of the stage are blocked.
Select this setting if the device is used on transformers and the
threshold value of the stage is set below the maximum inrush current
of the transformer. This applies to the overcurrent-protection stage,
which is used as a backup stage with grading time for faults on the
undervoltage side of the transformer.

The setting depends on the minimal occurring ground-fault current. This must be detected.
Consider that a safety margin is set between pickup value and threshold value. The stage only picks up at
approx. 10 % above the Threshold.

of character. curve required for your specific application.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
You can use the Time dial parameter to displace the characteristic curve in the time direction.
The setting value for the Time dial parameter is derived from the time-grading chart that has been
prepared for the electrical power system.
dial parameter at 1 (default setting).
Parameter: Reset

You can use the Reset parameter setting to define whether the stage decreases according to the dropout
characteristic curve (in accordance with the behavior of a disk emulation = rotor disk) or instantaneously.
devices or other devices which perform a dropout after a disk emula-
tion.
instantaneous Select this setting if the dropout does not have to be performed after a
disk emulation and an instantaneous dropout is desired instead.
6.13.5.3 Settings

General
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:4891:111 Inverse-T 1:Directional • forward forward
mode
• reverse
measurement comp.
• RMS value
_:4891:10 Inverse-T 1:Blk. by • no yes
meas.-volt. failure
• yes
_:4891:27 Inverse-T 1:Blk. w. inrush • no no
curr. detect.
• yes
_:4891:102 Inverse-T 1:Blk. w. 2nd • no no
harm. gnd. det.
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
acter. curve
• disk emulation

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

(Type)
Inverse-T 1
_:4891:501 Inverse-T 1:>Release delay & op. SPS I
_:4891:60 Inverse-T 1:Inrush blocks operate SPS O
_:4891:300 Inverse-T 1:Direction ACD O

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
6.14 Group Indications of Overcurrent Protection Functions
6.14.1 Description
The function block Group indications of the overcurrent protection functions uses the pickup and operate
indications of the following functions:
• Overcurrent protection, phases
• Overcurrent protection, ground
• Voltage-dependent overcurrent protection
• Directional overcurrent protection, phases
• Directional overcurrent protection, ground
• Ground-fault protection for high-impedance ground faults in grounded systems
• Instantaneous high-current tripping

The group indications of the overcurrent protection are generated by a logical OR of the stage-selective pickup
and operate indications of the functions listed above (see also Figure 6-86):
• Pickup
• Operate
The pickup and operate indications are output, where present, with direction information.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[lo_oc_grin, 4, en_US]
Figure 6-86 Logic Diagram of the Overcurrent Protection Group Indications

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
6.15 Negative-Sequence Protection
6.15 Negative-Sequence Protection

For more information on this, refer to the Overcurrent Protection 7SJ82/7SJ85 Device manual.
The function Negative-sequence protection (ANSI 46):
• Detects 1-phase or 2-phase short circuits in the electrical power system with clearly increased sensitivity
compared to the classical overcurrent protection
• Protects electric machines during excessive unbalanced load
• Reports unbalanced load conditions in the electricity supply system
• Detects phase interruptions in the primary system
• Locates short circuits or inversions in the connections to the current transformers

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
6.16 Voltage Protection
6.16.1 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage

The function Undervoltage protection with 3-phase voltage (ANSI 27):
• Provides optional tripping release for the differential protection, zone-selective and/or phase-segregated
as a main use case
• Monitors the permissible voltage range
• Protects equipment (for example, plant components and machines) against damages caused by under-
voltage
• In the DIGSI 5 library, 2 variants of this function are available for the protection devices of the 87 series:
with and without blocking with 1-pole open circuit breaker.

The function Undervoltage protection with 3-phase voltage is used in protection function groups with
voltage measurement.
The function Undervoltage protection with 3-phase voltage comes factory-set with 2 stages. The stages
have an identical structure.
The protection function is structured such that a current-flow criterion can act on all the undervoltage protec-
tion stages. You can set the current-flow criterion as fulfilled via the corresponding binary input signal.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
6.16.1.3 Stage with Definite-Time Characteristic Curve
Logic of the Stage
[lo_bbp-uvp3ph-stage_control, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-87 Logic Diagram Stage Control

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[lo_uvp_3ph, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-88 Logic Diagram of the Definite-Time Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
With the Method of measurement parameter, you select the relevant method of measurement, depending
on the application.
• Measurement fundamental component:

This method of measurement processes the sampled voltage values and filters out the fundamental
• Measurement RMS value:

This method of measurement determines the voltage amplitude from the sampled values according to
Measured Value
With the Measured value parameter, you define whether the stage analyzes the phase-to-phase voltages
VAB, VBC, and VCA, or the phase-to-ground voltages VA, VB, and VC.
If the measured value is set to phase-to-phase, the function reports those measuring elements that have
picked up.
Pickup Stabilization
To enable the pickup stabilization, you set the Stabilization counter parameter to a value other than 0.
Then, if the input voltage keeps being below the Threshold for a specified number (1 + Stabilization

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
counter value) of successive measuring cycles, the stage picks up. For 50 Hz, the measuring cycle time is 10
ms.
If you set this parameter to 0 (default value), the stabilization is not applied. The pickup signal is issued after
the input voltage falls below the threshold value.
Pickup Mode
With the Pickup mode parameter, you define whether the stage picks up when there is a lower threshold-
value violation in one measuring element (1 out of 3) or when there is a lower threshold-value violation in
all 3 measuring elements (3 out of 3).
Pickup Delay
The Pickup delay parameter is only available and of relevance if you are using the current-flow criterion of
the function (parameter Current-flow criterion = on).
If the circuit breaker opens when the current-flow criterion is being used, the undervoltage detection and
current-flow dropout functions conflict with one another. Depending on the threshold value settings for
undervoltage detection and current-flow criterion, it is possible that the undervoltage is detected before the
current-flow criterion has dropped out. In this case, the stage picks up briefly. Use the Pickup delay param-
eter to prevent the stage from briefly picking up in this way when the circuit breaker opens. This is achieved
by delaying the pickup by approximately 40 ms.
The undervoltage protection stages work optionally with a current-flow criterion. The Current-flow
criterion works across all tripping stages.
When the Current-flow criterion setting is switched on, the undervoltage protection stages only pick
up when the current-flow criterion has been set to met via the binary input signal >Current flow-crite-
rion. The function reports when the current-flow criterion is fulfilled.
The previous figure illustrates the influence of the current-flow criterion.
NOTE
i If the (_:2311:104) Current-flow criterion parameter is deactivated, the device picks up imme-
diately if a missing measuring voltage is detected while the undervoltage protection is active. The param-
eter setting can be changed even when the device has picked up.
Blocking the Stage

In the event of blocking, the picked-up stage will be reset. The following blocking options are available for the
stage:
b., which links in the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker. The Blk. by meas.-volt.
failure parameter can be set so that measuring-voltage failure detection blocks the stage or does not
block it.

With the Method of measurement parameter, you define whether the stage uses the fundamental compo-
nent (standard method = default setting) or the calculated RMS value.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

fundamental comp. Select this method of measurement to suppress harmonics or transient
voltage peaks.
Siemens recommends using this parameter value as the default setting.
into account (for example at capacitor banks). Do not set the threshold
value of the stage under 10 V for this method of measurement.
Parameter: Measured value
• Recommended setting value (_:421:9) Measured value = phase-to-phase

With the Measured value parameter, you define whether the stage monitors the phase-to-phase voltages
VAB, VBC, and VCA, or the phase-to-ground voltages VA, VB, and VC. Parameter Value

phase-to-phase If you want to detect voltage dips caused by multiphase short circuits, or
generally monitor the voltage range, keep phase-to-phase as the default
setting. The function will not pick up on ground faults.
Siemens recommends the measured value phase-to-phase as the
default setting.
phase-to-ground Select the phase-to-ground setting if you want to detect voltage unbal-
ances or overvoltage conditions caused by ground faults.
• Default setting (_:421:3) Threshold = 80 V

The Threshold is set in accordance with the Measured value as either a phase-to-phase or phase-
to-ground variable.
Specify the Threshold (pickup threshold) for the specific application.
For the default setting, the lower limit of the voltage range to be monitored is assumed to be 80 % of the
rated voltage of the protected object.
EXAMPLE:
Rated voltage of the protected object: Vrated, obj.= 10 kV

Voltage transformer:
Threshold value: 80 % of Vrated, obj.
The secondary setting value is calculated as follows:
[fo_schw_lw, 2, en_US]
Parameter: Stabilization counter
• Default setting (_:2311:103) Stabilization counter = 0

You can configure the Stabilization counter parameter in the function block General.
For special applications, it could be desirable that a short falling of the input voltage below the pickup value
does not lead to the pickup of the stage, which starts fault logging and recording. This is achieved by setting
the Stabilization counter parameter to a value other than zero.
For example, if you set this parameter to 1, the pickup signal is issued when the voltage keeps being below
the Threshold for 2 successive measuring cycles. For 50 Hz, the measuring cycle time is 10 ms.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Parameter: Pickup mode
• Recommended setting value (_:421:101) Pickup mode = 1 out of 3

With the Pickup mode parameter, you specify whether the stage picks up when there is a lower threshold-
1 out of 3 Use this setting for protection applications or for monitoring the voltage
range.
Siemens recommends 1 out of 3 as the default setting. This reflects how
the function behaved in previous generations (SIPROTEC 4, SIPROTEC 3).
3 out of 3 Select this setting when using the stage to disconnect from the power
system (in the case of wind farms, for example).
Parameter: Pickup delay
• Default setting (_:421:102) Pickup delay = no

The Pickup delay parameter is only available if you are using the current-flow criterion of the function
(parameter Current-flow criterion = on). If the current-flow criterion is deactivated, no pickup delay is
required.
With the Pickup delay parameter, you set whether pickup of the stage is to be delayed by approximately
40 ms or not. The delay avoids possible brief pickup of the stage when the circuit breaker opens.
When applied in parallel, the pickup delay and the delay through pickup stabilization add up.
no Use this setting if you definitely do not want stage pickup to be subject to a
time delay in the event of a fault. This setting results in pickup and, where
applicable, tripping being performed as quickly as possible.
Note that switching procedures (opening of the CB) can result in brief
pickup of the stage, depending on the threshold-value settings for under-
voltage pickup and the current-flow criterion. To prevent unwanted trip-
ping, you must set a minimum tripping delay of 50 ms.
yes Use this setting when switching procedures (opening of the CB) are not
permitted to result in stage pickup.
Note that pickup is delayed by approximately 40 ms. This delay is added to
the operate time.
• Default (_:421:6) Operate delay = 3 s

The Operate delay must be set for the specific application.
• Recommended setting value (_:421:4) Dropout ratio = 1.05

The recommended setting value of 1.05 is appropriate for most applications. To achieve high-precision meas-
urements, the Dropout ratio can be reduced (to 1.02, for example).
• Default setting (_:421:10) Blk. by meas.-volt. failure = yes

With the Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter, you control the behavior of the stage when a meas-

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
A measuring-voltage failure can only be detected if one of the following two conditions is met:
breaker (see 8.3.4.1 Overview of Functions).

yes The protection stage is blocked (= default setting). Siemens recommends
using the default setting.
no The protection stage is not blocked.
Parameter: Current-flow criterion
• Recommended setting value (_:2311:104) Current-flow criterion = on

Depending on the system, the voltage transformers are arranged either on the supply side or the junction side.
These 2 possible voltage transformer locations induce a different behavior of the function after tripping and
opening of the circuit breaker:
• If they are located on the supply side, the voltage still exists.
• If they are located on the junction side, the voltage does not exist.

on If the binary input signal >current-flow criterion is no longer set, the
pickup drops out when the voltage transformer is located on the junction
side.
off In the case of undervoltage, the pickup of the undervoltage-protection
stage persists when the current-flow criterion is not used.
Operation as Supervision Function

If you want the stage to have a reporting effect only, generation of the operate indication and fault logging
can be disabled via the Operate & flt.rec. blocked parameter.
6.16.1.5 Settings

General
_:2311:104 General:Current-flow • off on
criterion
• on
_:2311:103 General:Stabilization 0 to 10 0
counter
Definite-T 1
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
meas.-volt. failure
• yes
_:421:9 Definite-T 1:Measured • phase-to-ground phase-to-phase
value
• phase-to-phase
measurement comp.
• RMS value
_:421:101 Definite-T 1:Pickup mode • 1 out of 3 1 out of 3
• 3 out of 3

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

_:421:102 Definite-T 1:Pickup delay • no no
• yes
_:421:3 Definite-T 1:Threshold 0.300 V to 175.000 V 80.000 V
_:421:4 Definite-T 1:Dropout 1.01 to 1.20 1.05
ratio
delay
Definite-T 2
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
meas.-volt. failure
• yes
value
• phase-to-phase
measurement comp.
• RMS value
• 3 out of 3
_:422:102 Definite-T 2:Pickup delay • no no
• yes
ratio
delay

(Type)
General
_:2311:500 General:>Current flow-criterion SPS I
_:2311:300 General:Current crit. fulf. SPS O
Group indicat.
Definite-T 1
_:421:300 Definite-T 1:Pickup loop AB SPS O
_:421:301 Definite-T 1:Pickup loop BC SPS O
_:421:302 Definite-T 1:Pickup loop CA SPS O

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

(Type)
Definite-T 2
6.16.1.7 Stage with Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve
Logic of the Stage
[lo_uvp_3ph_in_stage_control_7SS8x, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-89 Logic Diagram of the Stage Control

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
comp. or the RMS value.
• Measurement fundamental comp.:


Measured Value
With the Measured value parameter, you define whether the stage analyzes the phase-to-phase voltages
picked up.
To enable the pickup stabilization, you set the Stabilization counter parameter to a value other than
zero. Then, if the input voltage keeps being below the pickup value for a specified number (1 + Stabiliza-
tion counter value) of successive measuring cycles, the stage picks up. For 50 Hz, the measuring cycle
time is 10 ms.
If you set this parameter to 0 (default value), the stabilization is not applied. The pickup signal is issued after
the input voltage falls below the pickup value.
Pickup Mode
With the Pickup mode parameter, you define whether the stage picks up when there is a lower threshold-
Pickup and Operate Curve

When the input voltage falls below the threshold value by a settable value Pickup factor, the stage picks
up and the inverse-time characteristic curve is processed. The operate delay starts. The operate delay is the
sum of inverse-time delay and additional time delay.
Top=TInv+ Tadd
Where:
Top Operate delay
TInv Inverse-time delay
Tadd Additional time delay (Parameter Additional time delay)
After pickup the time value TInv is calculated for every input voltage less than the dropout value. An integrator
accumulates the value 1/TInv. Once the accumulated integral reaches the fixed value 1, the inverse-time delay
expires. The stage operates after the additional time delay.
The inverse-time delay is calculated with the following formula:
[fo_uvp_3ph_inverse, 2, en_US]
Where

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

Tp Time multiplier (Parameter Time dial)
V Measured undervoltage
VThresh Threshold value (Parameter Threshold)
k Curve constant k (Parameter Charact. constant k)
α Curve constant α (Parameter Charact. constant α)
c Curve constant c (Parameter Charact. constant c)
The inverse-time characteristic is shown in the following figure:
[dw_uvp_3ph_inverse, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-90 Inverse-Time Characteristics for Undervoltage Protection
Pickup Delay
current-flow criterion has dropped out. In this case, the stage picks up briefly. Use the Pickup delay param-
eter to prevent the stage from briefly picking up in this way when the circuit breaker opens. This is achieved
by delaying the pickup by approximately 40 ms.
Dropout Behavior
When the voltage exceeds the dropout value (1.05 x pickup factor x threshold value), the pickup signal is
going and the dropout is started. You can define the dropout behavior via parameter Reset time. Instanta-
neous reset takes place by setting Reset time to 0 s. A delayed reset takes place by setting the desired delay
time.
During the Reset time (> 0 s), the elapsed operate delay is frozen. If the stage picks up again within this
period, the stage operates when the rest of operate delay expires.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
The undervoltage protection stages work optionally with a current-flow criterion. The Current-flow
criterion works across all tripping stages.
When the Current-flow criterion setting is switched on, the undervoltage protection stages only pick
up when the current-flow criterion has been set to met via the binary input signal >Current flow-crite-
rion. The function reports when the current-flow criterion is fulfilled.
The previous figure illustrates the influence of the current-flow criterion.
NOTE
Blocking the Stage

In the event of blocking, the picked-up stage is reset. The following blocking options are available for the
stage:
block it.
• Recommended setting value (_:8) Method of measurement = fundamental comp.

voltage peaks.
into account (for example, at capacitor banks). Do not set the threshold
• Recommended setting value (_:9) Measured value = phase-to-phase


phase-to-phase If you want to detect voltage dips caused by multiphase short circuits, or
generally monitor the voltage range, keep phase-to-phase as the default
setting. The function will not pick up on ground faults.
default setting.
ances or overvoltage conditions caused by ground faults.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Parameter: Threshold, Pickup factor
• Default setting (_:3) Threshold = 80.000 V
• Default setting (_:109) Pickup factor = 0.90

The stage picks up when the measured voltage value falls below the pickup value Threshold × Pickup
factor.
Depending on the Measured value, the Threshold is set either as phase-to-phase quantity or as
phase-to-ground quantity.
With the Pickup factor parameter, you modify the pickup value. To avoid a long operate delay time after
pickup, Siemens recommends using the default value of Pickup factor.
Specify the Threshold (pickup threshold) and Pickup factor for the specific application.

For special applications, it could be desirable that a short falling of the input voltage below the pickup value
does not lead to the pickup of the stage, which starts fault logging and recording. This is achieved by setting
the Stabilization counter parameter to a value other than zero.
For example, if you set this parameter to 1, the pickup signal is issued when the voltage keeps being below
the pickup value for 2 successive measuring cycles. For 50 Hz, the measuring cycle time is 10 ms.
• Recommended setting value (_:101) Pickup mode = 1 out of 3

With the Pickup mode parameter, you specify whether the stage picks up when there is a lower threshold-
1 out of 3 Use this setting for protection applications or for monitoring the voltage
range.
• Default setting (_:102) Pickup delay = no

required.
With the Pickup delay parameter, you set whether pickup of the stage is to be delayed by approximately
When applied in parallel, the pickup delay and the delay through pickup stabilization add up.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

no Use this setting if you definitely do not want stage pickup to be subject to a
time delay in the event of a fault. This setting results in pickup and, where
applicable, tripping being performed as quickly as possible.
pickup of the stage, depending on the threshold-value settings for under-
voltage pickup and the current-flow criterion. To prevent unwanted trip-
ping, you must set a minimum tripping delay of 50 ms.
permitted to result in stage pickup.
the operate time.
Parameter: Charact. constant k, Charact. constant α, Charact. constant c
• Default setting (_:103) Charact. constant k = 1.00
• Default setting (_:104) Charact. constant α = 1.000
• Default setting (_:105) Charact. constant c = 0.000

With the Charact. constant k, Charact. constant α, and Charact. constant c parameters,
you define the required inverse-time characteristic.
• Default setting (_:106) Time dial = 1.00

As usually, there is no time grading for voltage protection and therefore no displacement of the characteristic
curve, Siemens recommends leaving the Time dial parameter at 1.00 (default setting).
Parameter: Reset time
• Default setting (_:108) Reset time = 0.00 s

With the Reset time parameter, you define the reset time delay which is started when the voltage exceeds
the dropout value. Set the parameter Reset time to 0 s when instantaneous reset is desired.
Under network conditions of intermittent faults or faults which occur in rapid succession, Siemens recom-
mends setting the Reset time to an appropriate value > 0 s to ensure the operation. Otherwise, Siemens
recommends keeping the default value to ensure a fast reset of the function.
• Default setting (_:107) Additional time delay = 0.00 s

time delay.
If the setting is left on its default value of 0 s, only the inverse-time delay is operative.
• Default setting (_:10) Blk. by meas.-volt. failure = yes

With the Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter, you control the behavior of the stage when a meas-
breaker (see 8.3.4.1 Overview of Functions).

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022


Depending on the system, the voltage transformers are arranged either on the supply side or the junction side.
These 2 possible voltage-transformer locations induce a different behavior of the function after tripping and
opening of the circuit breaker:
• If they are located on the junction side, the voltage does not exist.

on If the binary input signal >current-flow criterion is no longer set, the
pickup drops out when the voltage transformer is located on the junction
side.
off In the case of undervoltage, the pickup of the undervoltage protection
6.16.1.9 Settings

Inverse-T #
_:1 Inverse-T #:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2 Inverse-T #:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:10 Inverse-T #:Blk. by • no yes
meas.-volt. failure
• yes
_:9 Inverse-T #:Measured • phase-to-ground phase-to-phase
value
• phase-to-phase
_:8 Inverse-T #:Method of • fundamental comp. fundamental
measurement comp.
• RMS value
_:101 Inverse-T #:Pickup mode • 1 out of 3 1 out of 3
• 3 out of 3
_:102 Inverse-T #:Pickup delay • no no
• yes
_:3 Inverse-T #:Threshold 0.300 V to 175.000 V 80.000 V
_:109 Inverse-T #:Pickup factor 0.80 to 1.00 0.90
_:103 Inverse-T #:Charact. 0.00 to 300.00 1.00
constant k
constant α
constant c
_:106 Inverse-T #:Time dial 0.05 to 15.00 1.00

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

_:107 Inverse-T #:Additional 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
time delay
_:108 Inverse-T #:Reset time 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s

(Type)
Inverse-T #
_:81 Inverse-T #:>Block stage SPS I
_:54 Inverse-T #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Inverse-T #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Inverse-T #:Health ENS O
_:55 Inverse-T #:Pickup ACD O
_:300 Inverse-T #:Pickup loop AB SPS O
_:301 Inverse-T #:Pickup loop BC SPS O
_:302 Inverse-T #:Pickup loop CA SPS O
_:56 Inverse-T #:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:57 Inverse-T #:Operate ACT O
6.16.2 Undervoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage

The Undervoltage protection with positive-sequence voltage function (ANSI 27):
• Monitors the permissible voltage range
• Protects equipment (for example, plant components and machines) from damages caused by under-
voltage
2-phase short circuits or ground faults lead to an unbalanced voltage collapse. In comparison to three 1-phase
measuring systems, such events have no noticeable impact on the positive-sequence voltage. This makes this
function particularly suitable for the assessment of stability problems.

The Undervoltage protection with positive-sequence voltage function is used in protection function
groups, which are based on voltage measurement.
The Undervoltage protection with positive-sequence voltage function comes factory-set with 2 tripping
stages. The tripping stages have an identical structure.
The protection function is structured such that one current-flow criterion can act on all undervoltage protec-
tion stages. You can set the current- flow criterion as fulfilled via the corresponding binary input signal.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
6.16.2.3 Stage Description
Logic of the Stage
[lo_bbp-uvp-mit-3p, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-91 Logic Diagram of the Stage Undervoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage
The stage uses the positive-sequence voltage. The positive-sequence voltage is calculated from the measured
phase-to-ground voltages according to the defining equation.
Pickup Delay

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
current-flow criterion has dropped out. In this case, the tripping stage picks up briefly. Use the Pickup
delay parameter to prevent the tripping stage from briefly picking up in this way when the circuit breaker
opens. This is achieved by delaying pickup by approximately 40 ms.
The undervoltage-protection stages work optionally with a current-flow criterion. The current-flow criterion
works across all stages.
When the Current-flow criterion parameter is switched on, the undervoltage protection stages only
pick up when the current-flow criterion has been set to fulfilled via the binary input signal >Current flow-
criterion. The function reports when the current-flow criterion is fulfilled.
Figure 6-91 illustrates the influence of the current-flow criterion.
NOTE
i If the Current-flow criterion parameter is switched off, the device picks up immediately if a missing
measuring voltage is detected while the undervoltage protection is active. The parameter setting can be
changed even when the device has picked up.
Blocking the Stage

In the event of blocking, the picked up stage will be reset. The following blocking options are available for the
stage:
block it.

Specify the Threshold (pickup threshold) for the specific application. For the default setting, the lower limit
of the voltage range to be monitored is assumed to be 80 % of the rated voltage of the protected object.
• Default setting (_:481:101) Pickup delay = no

required.
With the parameter Pickup delay you set whether pickup of the stage is to be delayed by approximately

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

no Use this setting if you definitely do not want tripping-stage pickup to be
subject to a time delay in the event of a fault. This setting results in pickup
and, where applicable, tripping being performed as quickly as possible.
pickup of the tripping stage, depending on the threshold-value settings for
undervoltage pickup and the current-flow criterion. To prevent unwanted
tripping, you must set a minimum tripping delay of 50 ms.
permitted to result in tripping-stage pickup.
the operate time.
• Default setting (_:481:6) Operate delay = 3 s


The recommended setting value of 1.05 is sufficient for many applications. To obtain extremely accurate indi-
cations, the Dropout ratio can be reduced.

You use the Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter to control the behavior of the stage when a
A measuring-voltage failure can only be detected if the binary input signal >Open of the function block VTCB
is connected to the voltage-transformer circuit breaker (see chapter 8.3.4.1 Overview of Functions).

Depending on the system, the voltage transformers can be located on the supply or the output side. These 2
possible voltage transformer locations induce a different behavior of the function after tripping and opening
of the circuit breaker:
• If they are located on the output side, the voltage does not exist.

on If the binary input signal >Current flow-criterion is no longer set,
the pickup drops out when the voltage transformer is located on the output
side.
off In the case of undervoltage, the pickup of the undervoltage-protection

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

If you want the tripping stage to have a reporting effect only, generation of the operate indication and fault
logging can be disabled via the Operate & flt.rec. blocked parameter.
6.16.2.5 Settings

General
criterion
• on
Stage 1
_:481:1 Stage 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:481:2 Stage 1:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:481:10 Stage 1:Blk. by meas.- • no yes
volt. failure
• yes
_:481:101 Stage 1:Pickup delay • no no
• yes
_:481:3 Stage 1:Threshold 0.300 V to 200.000V 46.000V
_:481:4 Stage 1:Dropout ratio 1.01 to 1.20 1.05
_:481:6 Stage 1:Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 3.00 s
Stage 2
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:482:10 Stage 2:Blk. by meas.- • no yes
volt. failure
• yes
_:482:101 Stage 2:Pickup delay • no no
• yes
_:482:3 Stage 2:Threshold 0.300 V to 200.000 V 40.000V

(Type)
General
Group indicat.
Stage 1
_:481:81 Stage 1:>Block stage SPS I

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

(Type)
_:481:54 Stage 1:Inactive SPS O
_:481:52 Stage 1:Behavior ENS O
_:481:53 Stage 1:Health ENS O
_:481:55 Stage 1:Pickup ACD O
_:481:56 Stage 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:481:57 Stage 1:Operate ACT O
Stage 2
6.16.3 Undervoltage Protection with Any Voltage

The function Undervoltage protection with any voltage (ANSI 27) detects any 1-phase undervoltage and is
intended for special applications.

The Undervoltage protection with any voltage function is used in protection function groups, which are
based on voltage measurement.
The function Undervoltage protection with any voltage comes factory-set with 2 stages. The tripping stages
have an identical structure. The protection function is structured in such a way that a current-flow criterion
can affect all of the undervoltage protection stages.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Logic of a Stage
[lo_uvp_Vx_any-volt, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-92 Logic Diagram of a Stage: Undervoltage Protection with Any Voltage
The Method of measurement parameter allows you to define whether the function works with the funda-
mental component or the calculated RMS value.


Measured Value
The parameter Measured value allows you to select whether the stage uses a measured (directly
connected) voltage or a calculated phase-to-phase voltage.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
The undervoltage-protection stages work optionally with a current-flow criterion. The current-flow criterion
works across all stages.
When the Current-flow criterion parameter is switched on, the undervoltage protection stages only
pick up when the current-flow criterion has been set to fulfilled via the binary input signal >Current flow-
criterion. The function reports when the current-flow criterion is fulfilled.
Figure 6-92 illustrates the influence of the current-flow criterion.
NOTE
Blocking the Stage

In the event of blocking, the picked up stage will be reset. Blocking the stage is possible externally or internally
via the binary input signal >Block stage.

Use the Method of measurement parameter to define whether the tripping stage uses the fundamental
component (standard method = default setting) or the calculated RMS value.
voltage peaks.
value of the tripping stage under 10 V for this method of measurement.
• Default setting (_:571:9) Measured value = VA measured

The Measured value parameter is used to specify which voltage is monitored by the stage.
The scope of setting options depends on the connection type for the voltage transformers and the routing of
the measured values to the terminals of the voltage measuring point. You can find connection examples for
voltage transformers in the Appendix.
The following setting options can be available:
• Measured phase-to-ground voltage VA (VA measured)
• Measured phase-to-ground voltage VB (VB measured)
• Measured phase-to-ground voltage VC VC measured)
• Measured phase-to-phase voltage VAB (VAB measured)
• Measured phase-to-phase voltage VBC (VBC measured)
• Measured phase-to-phase voltage VCA (VCA measured)
• Calculated phase-to-phase voltage VAB (VAB calculated)
• Calculated phase-to-phase voltage VBC (VBC calculated)

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
• Calculated phase-to-phase voltage VCA (VCA calculated)
• Calculated voltage V0 (V0 calculated)

The selection depends on the corresponding application.
NOTE
i From V7.30 on, the value VN measured is no longer provided. If you have selected this value in earlier
versions, you can select the value V0 calculated instead after upgrading the configuration to V7.30 or a
later version.

Depending on the Measured value, the Threshold is set either as measured voltage or as a phase-
to-phase variable.
NOTE
i If the function is used in a Voltage-current 1-phase function group connected to the 1-phase voltage
measuring point with the voltage type VN broken-delta, you set the threshold value based on the
equivalent zero-sequence voltage.
Calculate the equivalent zero-sequence voltage V0 equiv. sec from the measured voltage VN sec with the
following formula:
For more information about the parameter Matching ratio Vph / VN, refer to 6.1.5 Application and
Setting Notes for Measuring Point Voltage 3‑Phase (V-3ph).


The recommended set value of 1.05 is appropriate for most applications. To achieve high measurement preci-
sion, the Dropout ratio can be reduced to 1.02, for example.

on Because of the application, it makes sense that the stage is only active (that
is, not blocked) when a certain current flow is present (see note).
off Current flow monitoring does not make sense for the application.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
NOTE
i Because of the flexible setting options of the voltage measurand, the function itself does not determine the
current associated with the voltage. A suitable current-flow monitoring function must be created by the
user with the Continuous Function Chart (CFC), and connected to the binary input signal >Current
flow-criterion.

6.16.3.5 Settings

General
criterion
• on
Stage 1
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:571:9 Stage 1:Measured value • VA measured VA measured
• VB measured
• VC measured
• VAB measured
• VBC measured
• VCA measured
• VAB calculated
• VBC calculated
• VCA calculated
• V0 calculated
_:571:8 Stage 1:Method of • fundamental comp. fundamental
measurement comp.
• RMS value
_:571:3 Stage 1:Threshold 0.300 V to 340.000 V 80.000 V
Stage 2
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

• VB measured
• VC measured
• VAB measured
• VBC measured
• VCA measured
• VAB calculated
• VBC calculated
• VCA calculated
• V0 calculated
_:572:8 Stage 2:Method of • fundamental comp. fundamental
measurement comp.
• RMS value

(Type)
General
Group indicat.
Stage 1
Stage 2

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
6.16.4 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage

The function Overvoltage protection with 3-phase voltage (ANSI 59) is used to:
• Monitor the permissible voltage range
• Protect equipment (for example, plant components, machines, etc.) against damages caused by over-
voltage
• Decouple systems (for example, wind power supply)

Abnormally high voltages in power systems are caused by voltage controller failure at the transformer or on
long transmission lines under low-load conditions.
When using common-mode reactors in the protected power system, the device must shut down the line
quickly if the reactors fail (for example, due to fault clearance). The insulation is endangered by the over-
voltage condition.
Overvoltages at capacitor banks can be caused by resonances with line or transformer inductances.
In power plants increased voltage levels can be due to one of these factors:
• Incorrect operation when controlling the excitation system manually
• Failure of the automatic voltage controller
• After full load shedding of a generator
• Generators which are disconnected from the network or in island mode

The Overvoltage protection with 3-phase voltage function is used in protection function groups with
voltage measurement.
The function Overvoltage protection with 3-phase voltage comes factory-set with 2 stages. The tripping
stages have an identical structure.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Logic of the Stage
[lo_3phas_i, 5, en_US]
Figure 6-93 Logic Diagram of the Definite-Time Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
Use the Method of measurement parameter to define whether the stage uses the fundamental comp.
or the RMS value.
• Measurement fundamental comp.:


C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

zero. Then, if the input voltage keeps exceeding the Threshold for a specified number (1 + Stabiliza-
time is 10 ms.
If you set this parameter to 0 (default value), the stabilization is not applied. The pickup signal is issued imme-
diately after the input voltage exceeds the Threshold.
Pickup Mode
The Pickup mode parameter defines whether the protection stage picks up if all 3 measuring elements
detect the overvoltage condition (3 out of 3) or if only 1 measuring element detects the overvoltage
condition (1 out of 3).
Measured Value
Use the Measured value parameter to define whether the tripping stage analyzes the phase-to-phase
voltages VAB, VBC, and VCA, or the phase-to-ground voltages VA, VB, and VC.
picked up.
Blocking the Stage

In the event of blocking, the picked up stage will be reset. Blocking is possible externally or internally via the
binary input signal >Block stage.

voltage peaks.
Siemens recommends this method of measurement as the default setting.
• Default setting (_:181:9) Measured value = phase-to-phase

VAB, VBC, and VCA or the phase-to-ground voltages VA, VB, and VC.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

phase-to-phase If you want to monitor the voltage range, keep phase-to-phase as the
default setting. In this case, the function will not pick up on ground faults.
default setting.
ances and overvoltage conditions caused by ground faults.

Depending on the Measured value, the Threshold is set either as phase-to-phase quantity or as phase-to-
ground quantity. The default setting assumes that the voltage range is monitored on long-distance transmis-
sion lines under low-load conditions.

For special applications, it could be desirable that a short exceeding of the input voltage above the pickup
value does not lead to the pickup of the stage, which starts fault logging and recording. This is achieved by
setting the Stabilization counter parameter to a value other than zero.
For example, if you set this parameter to 1, the pickup signal is issued when the voltage keeps exceeding the
Threshold for 2 successive measuring cycles. For 50 Hz, the measuring cycle time is 10 ms.


sion, the Dropout ratio can be reduced, to 0.98, for example.

With the Pickup mode parameter, you define whether the protection stage picks up if all 3 measuring
elements detect the overvoltage condition (3 out of 3) or if only 1 measuring element detects the over-
voltage condition (1 out of 3).
1 out of 3 Select the setting for protection applications or for monitoring the voltage
range.


C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
EXAMPLE
Example for 2-stage overvoltage protection
The example describes the possible settings for a 2-stage overvoltage protection function. We will look at the
settings of the parameters Threshold and Operate delay.
• 1. Stage:
To detect stationary overvoltages, set the threshold value of the first overvoltage-protection element at
least 10 % above the max. stationary phase-to-phase voltage anticipated during normal operation. When
setting the parameter Measured value to phase-to-phase voltage and a secondary rated voltage of
100 V, the secondary setting value of the first overvoltage-protection element is calculated as follows:
Threshold value: 10 % above Vrated
Vthreshold, sec = 1.1 Vrated, sec = 1.1 × 100 V = 110 V

This requires that the primary rated voltages of protected object and voltage transformer are identical. If they
are different, you have to adjust the pickup value.
For the Operate delay set a value of 3 s.
• 2. Stage:
The second overvoltage-protection stage is intended for high overvoltages with short duration. A high
pickup value is selected here, for example, 1.5 times the rated voltage. A time delay setting of 0.1 s to
0.2 s is sufficient then.
Stage Setting Values

Threshold value Time delay
1 1.1 Vrated 3s
2 1.5 Vrated 0.1 s to 0.2 s
6.16.4.5 Settings

General
_:2311:101 General:Stabilization 0 to 10 0
counter
Definite-T 1
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
value
• phase-to-phase
measurement comp.
• RMS value
• 3 out of 3
ratio
delay

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

Definite-T 2
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
value
• phase-to-phase
measurement comp.
• RMS value
• 3 out of 3
ratio
delay

(Type)
Group indicat.
Definite-T 1
Definite-T 2

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Logic of the Stage
[lo_3ph_inv, 4, en_US]
Figure 6-94 Logic Diagram of the Inverse-Time Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
Use the Method of measurement parameter to define whether the stage uses the fundamental comp.
or the RMS value .
• Measurement fundamental comp. :


C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
• Measurement RMS value :

zero. Then, if the input voltage keeps exceeding the pickup value for a specified number (1 + Stabiliza-
time is 10 ms.
If you set this parameter to 0 (default value), the stabilization is not applied. The pickup signal is issued imme-
diately after the input voltage exceeds the pickup value.
Pickup Mode
elements detect the overvoltage condition ( 3 out of 3 ) or if only 1 measuring element detects the over-
voltage condition ( 1 out of 3 ).
Measured Value
Use the Measured value parameter to define whether the stage analyzes the phase-to-phase voltages VAB,
VBC, and VCA, or the phase-to-ground voltages VA, VB, and VC.
picked up.

When the input voltage exceeds the threshold value by a settable value Pickup factor , the stage picks up
and the inverse-time characteristic curve is processed. Operate delay starts. The operate delay is the sum of
inverse-time delay and additional time delay.
Where
Top Operate delay
Tinv Inverse-time delay
Tadd Additional time delay (parameter Additional time delay )
After pickup, the time value Tinv is calculated for every input voltage that exceeds the threshold. An integrator
accumulates the value 1/Tinv. Once the accumulated integral reaches the fixed value 1, the inverse-time delay
expires. The additional time delay Tadd starts. The stage operates after the additional time delay expires.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
The inverse-time characteristic is shown in the following figure.
[dw_ovp_inv, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-95 Operate Curve of Inverse-Time Characteristic
Where
Tp Time multiplier (parameter Time dial )
V Measured voltage
Vthresh Threshold value (parameter Threshold )
k Curve constant k (parameter Charact. constant k )
α Curve constant α (parameter Charact. constant α )
c Curve constant c (parameter Charact. constant c )
When V/Vthresh is equal to or greater than 20, the inverse-time delay does not decrease any further.
Dropout Behavior
When the voltage falls below the dropout threshold (0.95 × pickup factor × threshold value), the pickup signal
is going and the dropout is started. You can define the dropout behavior via parameter Reset time . Instan-
taneous reset takes place by setting Reset time to 0 s. A delayed reset takes place by setting the desired
delay time.
During the Reset time (> 0 s), the elapsed operate delay is frozen. If the pickup value is exceeded again
within this period, the stage operates when the rest of operate delay expires.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Blocking the Stage

binary input signal >Block stage .
• Recommended setting value (_:8) Method of measurement = fundamental comp.

With the Method of measurement parameter, you define whether the tripping stage uses the fundamental
voltage peaks.
• Default setting (_:9) Measured value = phase-to-phase

With the Measured value parameter, you define whether the tripping stage monitors the phase-to-phase
voltages VAB, VBC, and VCA or the phase-to-ground voltages VA, VB, and VC.

phase-to-phase If you want to monitor the voltage range, keep phase-to-phase as the
default setting. In this case, the function will not pick up on ground faults.
default setting.
ances and overvoltage conditions caused by ground faults.

The stage picks up when the measured voltage value exceeds the pickup value Threshold × Pickup
factor.
Depending on the Measured value, the Threshold is set either as phase-to-phase quantity or as phase-to-
ground quantity.
With the Pickup factor parameter, you modify the pickup value. To avoid a long-time operate delay after
pickup when the measured value is slightly over the threshold, Siemens recommends using the default
setting.

For special applications, it could be desirable that a short exceeding of the input voltage above the pickup
value does not lead to the pickup of the stage, which starts fault logging and recording. This is achieved by
setting the Stabilization counter parameter to a value other than zero.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
For example, if you set this parameter to 1, the pickup signal is issued when the voltage keeps exceeding the
pickup value for 2 successive measuring cycles. For 50 Hz, the measuring cycle time is 10 ms.

elements detect the overvoltage condition (3 out of 3) or if only 1 measuring element detects the over-
voltage condition (1 out of 3).
1 out of 3 Select the setting for protection applications or for monitoring the voltage
range.

With the parameters Charact. constant k, Charact. constant α, and Charact. constant c,
you define the required inverse-time characteristic curve.

curve, Siemens recommends leaving the Time dial parameter at 1.00 (default setting).

time delay.
If the setting is left on its default value of 0 s, only the inverse-time delay is operative.

With the Reset time parameter, you define the reset time delay which is started when the voltage falls
below the dropout threshold. Set the parameter Reset time to 0 s when instantaneous reset is desired.
Under network conditions of intermittent faults or faults which occur in rapid succession, Siemens recom-
mends setting the Reset time to an appropriate value (> 0 s) to ensure the operation. Otherwise Siemens

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
6.16.4.9 Settings

Inverse-T #
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:9 Inverse-T #:Measured • phase-to-ground phase-to-phase
value
• phase-to-phase
measurement comp.
• RMS value
_:108 Inverse-T #:Pickup mode • 1 out of 3 1 out of 3
• 3 out of 3
constant k
constant α
constant c
time delay

(Type)
Inverse-T #
_:300 Inverse-T #:Pickup loop AB SPS O
_:301 Inverse-T #:Pickup loop BC SPS O
_:302 Inverse-T #:Pickup loop CA SPS O

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
6.16.5 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage

The function Overvoltage protection with positive-sequence voltage (ANSI 59) is used to:
• Detect symmetric stationary overvoltages
• Supervise the voltage range if the positive-sequence voltage is the decisive quantity
Unbalanced overvoltages, for example, caused by ground faults and unbalanced faults, are not detected due
to the evaluation of the positive-sequence voltage.

The Overvoltage protection with positive-sequence voltage function is used in protection function groups,
which are based on voltage measurement.
The function Overvoltage protection with positive-sequence voltage comes factory-set with 2 stages. The
tripping stages have an identical structure.
Logic of a Stage
[lo_govpu1, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-96 Logic Diagram of a Stage: Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage
The stage uses the positive-sequence voltage. The positive-sequence voltage is calculated from the measured
phase-to-ground voltages according to the defining equation.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Blocking the Stage


The Threshold is set according to the definition of the positive-sequence system.
• Default (_:211:6) Operate delay = 3 s


The default value of 0.95 is appropriate for most applications. To achieve high measurement precision, the
Dropout ratio can be reduced, to 0.98, for example.
General Notes
If the overvoltage is high, the first stage can trip with a short time delay. If overvoltages are lower, the second
stage can either only signal the threshold value violation (see Operation as monitoring function) or trip with a
longer delay to allow the voltage controller to regulate the voltage back into the nominal range.

6.16.5.5 Settings

Stage 1
• on
• test
_:211:2 Stage 1:Operate & flt.rec. • no no
blocked
• yes
Stage 2
• on
• test
blocked
• yes

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022


(Type)
Group indicat.
Stage 1
Stage 2
6.16.6 Overvoltage Protection with Negative-Sequence Voltage

The Overvoltage protection with negative-sequence voltage function (ANSI 47) monitors the electrical
power system for voltage unbalance.
• The most common cause is unbalanced load, caused by different consumers in the individual phases, for
example.
• Other causes can include faults in the primary system, for example, at the transformer or in installations
for reactive-power compensation.
• Voltage unbalance can also be caused by phase failure, for example, due to a tripped 1-phase fuse.

The Overvoltage protection with negative-sequence voltage function is used in protection function groups
with voltage measurement.
The Overvoltage protection with negative-sequence voltage function comes factory-set with 2 stages. The
stages have an identical structure.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Measurand
The average value of negative-sequence voltage is determined by a settable time interval (parameter: Meas-
uring window). With the parameter Measuring window, you can adapt this function to all power-system
conditions.
You can set the parameter Measuring window with a large value to get a more accurate calculated result,
which leads to a longer pickup time however.
Parameter: Measuring window
• Default setting (_:2311:101) Measuring window = 1 cycle

With the parameter Measuring window, you can optimize the measuring accuracy or the pickup time
of this function.
For sensitive settings of the parameter Threshold, for example, lower than 10 % of the rated voltage,
Siemens recommends using a higher number of cycles. Siemens recommends 10 cycles, and in this
case, the pickup time is increased.
For further information, refer to chapter 11.19.3 Overvoltage Protection with Negative-Sequence
Voltage .

You use the Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter to control the behavior of the function when a

switched on.

yes The protection function is blocked (= default setting). Siemens recommends
no The protection function is not blocked.
6.16.6.5 Settings

General
_:2311:10 General:Blk. by meas.- • no yes
volt. failure
• yes
_:2311:101 General:Measuring 1 cycles to 10 cycles 1 cycles
window

(Type)
General
_:2311:301 General:V2 average MV O

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Logic of a Stage
[lo_ovp_v2_3pol, 4, en_US]
Figure 6-97 Logic Diagram of the Stage: Overvoltage Protection with Negative-Sequence Voltage
The stage uses the average value of the negative-sequence voltage, which is calculated from the function
block General Functionality. For more information, refer to chapter 6.16.6.3 Description.
Blocking the Stage

In case of blocking, the picked up function is reset. The following blocking option is available for the function:
• From an external or internal source via the binary input signal >Block stage
• Default setting (_:271:3) Threshold = 5.800 V

The parameter Threshold is set according to the definition of the negative-sequence system.
The secondary voltage of the voltage transformer can be used if the voltage transformer is adapted to the
rated voltage. The value of the 10 % negative-sequence voltage at a 100 V rated secondary voltage is:
100 V / 1.73 * 0.1 = 5.77 V

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
• Default setting (_:271:4) Dropout ratio = 0.95

The default setting of 0.95 is appropriate for most applications.
You can decrease the dropout ratio to avoid chattering of the stage if the threshold value is low. For example,
for the stage with a 2 % setting, you can use a dropout ratio of 0.90.
• Default setting (_:271:6) Operate delay = 3.00 s

Specify the Operate delay for the specific application. 3.00 s is a practicable value.
For a higher threshold value, a shorter tripping delay is required.

Example 1:
Releasing an overcurrent protection stage for unbalanced faults
The following section describes how to set the function to release an Overcurrent-protection stage when
unbalanced faults occur. Set the Overcurrent-protection stage only slightly higher than the load current, that
is very sensitive. To prevent the Overcurrent-protection stage from picking up inadvertently, the Overcur-
rent-protection stage is released when the Negative-sequence voltage stage picks up. The Overcurrent-
protection stage remains blocked as long as the Negative-sequence voltage stage has not picked up.
Figure 6-98 shows the voltage phasors during a 2-phase local fault between phases B and C. The phase-to-
phase voltage VBC is virtually 0.
[dw_ua_zeig, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-98 Voltage Phasors during a 2-Phase Local Fault
A 2-phase local fault generates a relatively large negative-sequence voltage of up to 50 % referred to the
phase-to-ground voltage. The portion of the negative-sequence decreases in case of a remote fault. The lower
setting limit results from the possible unbalance at full load. If you assume for example 5 % negative-
sequence voltage, the pickup value must be higher. A setting value of 10 % warrants sufficient stability during
unbalanced operating states and sufficient sensitivity to release the Overcurrent-protection stage when a
fault occurs.
For a secondary rated voltage of 100 V, set the following secondary threshold value:
[fo_ovp_v2_secondary threshold, 1, en_US]
You can keep the default setting of 0.95 for the dropout ratio. This avoids chattering of the stage.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Set the Negative-sequence voltage stage so that it does not generate a fault when it picks up and does not
initiate tripping. The Overcurrent-protection stage generates a fault indication. The pickup of the Negative-
sequence voltage stage is used as the release criterion because the Short-circuit function must be released
immediately when the Negative-sequence voltage stage has picked up. The time delay is thus not relevant
and can be left at the default setting.
You implement the release of the Overcurrent-protection stage using a logic block chart. An inverter links
the pickup of the Negative-sequence voltage stage with the Overcurrent-protection stage blocking.
[lo_invert, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-99 Linking the Pickup of the Negative-Sequence Voltage Stage

Secondary Threshold Value Time Delay Dropout Ratio
1 5.800 V 3.00 s 0.95
The second stage is not needed. It is deleted or remains off.
Example 2:
A negative-sequence voltage in the auxiliary system of the power plant causes negative-sequence currents on
motors. This leads to a thermal overload of the rotors. The following estimation can be used as a basis: 1 %
negative-sequence voltage can lead to approximately 5 % or 6 % negative-sequence current.
A negative-sequence voltage can be caused by a broken conductor on the high-voltage side. If a negative-
sequence voltage occurs, this can, for example, initiate a switching of the infeed in order to prevent a protec-
tion trip of an unbalanced-load protection of the motors.
Siemens recommends using multiple stages for a better grading, whereby a sensitive setting of the threshold
permits an increased tripping delay.
For a reference, only 2 stages are discussed.
The first stage has a pickup threshold of 10 % with a time delay of 1.5 s. The second stage has a pickup
threshold of 3 % with a time delay of 8 s, see Table 6-5. Further, it is assumed that the voltage transformer is
well adapted to the rated voltage.
[fo_ovp_v2_secondary_threshold2, 1, en_US]
Table 6-5 Recommended Settings
Stage Threshold Operate Delay

Stage 1 5.800 V 1.50 s
Stage 2 1.730 V 8.00 s
6.16.6.9 Settings

Stage 1
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

Stage 2
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes

(Type)
General
_:2311:301 General:V2 average MV O
Group indicat.
Stage 1
Stage 2
6.16.7 Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage

The Overvoltage protection with zero-sequence voltage/residual voltage function (ANSI 59):
• Detects ground faults in isolated or arc-suppression-coil-grounded systems
• Determines which phase is affected by the ground fault

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

The Overvoltage protection with zero-sequence voltage/residual voltage function is used in protection
function groups with voltage measurement.
The Overvoltage protection with zero-sequence voltage/residual voltage function comes factory-set with
1 stage.
The stages have an identical structure.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Logic of the Stage
[lo_ovp_u_03, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-100 Logic Diagram of the Definite-Time Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/
Residual Voltage
Measured Value, Method of Measurement

The device measures the residual voltage at the broken-delta winding. The measured voltage is converted to
the zero-sequence voltage V0. If the residual voltage is not available to the device as a measurand, the

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
zero‑sequence voltage V0 is calculated from the measured phase-to-ground voltages VA, VB, and VC using the
defining equation.
With the parameter Method of measurement, you select the relevant method of measurement, depending
on the application:
• fundamental comp. (standard filter):

• RMS value (true RMS):

the defining equation of the RMS value.
• fund. comp. long filter (fundamental component over 2 cycle filters with triangular window):
component numerically. The extended filter length compared to the standard filter and the use of the
triangular window results in a particularly strong attenuation of harmonics and transient faults. The
extended filter length causes the pickup time to increase slightly compared to the standard filter (refer to
the technical data in 11.19.4 Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage ).
Pickup, Dropout
The stage compares the Threshold with the zero-sequence voltage V0. The parameter Pickup delay
allows you to delay the pickup of the stage depending on the residual voltage.
With the parameter Dropout ratio, you can define the ratio of the dropout value to the Threshold.
Determination of the Faulty Phase

You can use the parameter Detection of faulty phase to enable or disable the determination of the
phase affected by the ground fault. Determining is released when the stage picks up. If 2 phases exceed the
threshold value V> healthy ph-to-gnd volt. and 1 phase falls below the threshold value V< faulty
ph-to-gnd volt., the last phase is considered to be affected by the ground fault and is signaled as such.
Blocking the Stage
• Default setting (_:331:8) Method of measurement = fundamental comp.

With the parameter Method of measurement, you define whether the function works with the funda-
fundamental comp. This method of measurement suppresses the harmonics or transient voltage
peaks.
Siemens recommends using this setting as the standard method.
fund. comp. long filter To implement a particularly strong attenuation of harmonics and transient
faults, select this method of measurement. With this method, the length of
the filter is longer than that of the standard filter.
Note: In this case, the pickup time of the stage increases slightly (refer to
the technical data in 11.19.4 Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence
Voltage/Residual Voltage ).

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
• Recommended setting value (_:331:107) Pickup delay = 0.00 ms

The Pickup delay parameter allows you to delay the analysis of the measurand (to generate the pickup)
depending on the occurrence of the residual voltage. A pickup delay can be necessary if high transients are
anticipated after fault inception due to high line and ground capacitances.
Siemens recommends using the default setting Pickup delay = 0.00 ms.
• Default setting (_:331:3) Threshold = 30.000 V 21

The threshold value of the function is set as the zero-sequence voltage V0. The device calculates the zero-
sequence voltage V0 either from the residual voltage measured via the broken-delta winding or from the
3 phase-to-ground voltages.
The setting value depends on the system grounding:
• Since virtually the full residual voltage occurs during ground faults in isolated or arc-suppression-coil-
grounded systems, the setting value is uncritical there. It should range between 20 V and 40 V. A higher
sensitivity (= lower threshold value) can be necessary for high fault resistances.
• You should select a more sensitive (smaller) value in a grounded system. This value must be higher than
the maximum residual voltage anticipated during operation caused by system unbalances.
EXAMPLE
For an isolated system
The residual voltage is measured via the broken-delta winding:
• If the ground fault is fully unbalanced, a residual voltage of 100 V is present at the device terminals.
• The threshold value should be set so that the stage picks up on 50 % of the full residual voltage.
• At full residual voltage, the zero-sequence voltage is 100 V/√3 = 57.7 V

Setting value: 0.5 ⋅ 57.7 V = 28.9 V ≈ 30 V

The recommended set value of 0.95 is appropriate for most applications. The dropout ratio can be reduced
for example, to 0.98 to achieve a high measurement precision.

The Operate delay allows you to prevent transient residual voltages from initiating a trip. The setting
depends on the specific application.

With the parameter Blk. by meas.-volt. failure, you control the behavior of the stage when a meas-
21 The specific setting limits depend on the transformer data and transformer connections set.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

switched on.
• The binary input signal >Open of the function block Voltage-transformer circuit breaker is
connected to the voltage-transformer circuit breaker (refer to 8.3.4.1 Overview of Functions).

Parameter: Detection of faulty phase
• Default setting (_:331:109) Detection of faulty phase = no

With the parameter Detection of faulty phase, you control how the stage responds to determine
which phase is affected by the ground fault.
no The phase affected by the ground fault is not determined.
Select the default setting if you do not want to use the stage to detect
ground faults, for example, for applications in grounded systems.
yes After a pickup by the residual voltage, the device tries to determine which
phase is affected by the ground fault.
Select this setting for applications in isolated or arc-suppression-coil-
grounded systems.
Parameter: V< faulty ph-to-gnd volt.
• Default setting (_:331:104) V< faulty ph-to-gnd volt. = 40.000 V 22

With the parameter V< faulty ph-to-gnd volt., you set the threshold value for determining which
phase is affected by the ground fault. The setting value is a phase-to-ground quantity.
The setting value must be smaller than the minimum phase-to-ground voltage occurring during operation.
Siemens recommends using the default setting of 40.000 V.
Parameter: V> healthy ph-to-gnd volt.
• Default setting (_:331:101) V> healthy ph-to-gnd volt. = 75.000 V 22

With the parameter V> healthy ph-to-gnd volt., you set the threshold value for the 2 healthy phases.
The setting value is a phase-to-ground quantity.
The setting value must be greater than the maximum phase-to-ground voltage occurring during operation,
but smaller than the minimum phase-to-phase voltage occurring during operation. At Vrated = 100 V, set the
value, for example, to 75.000 V. Siemens recommends using the default setting of 75.000 V.

If you want the stage to have a reporting effect only, you can set the parameter Operate & flt.rec.
blocked to disable the generation of the operate indication and fault logging.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
6.16.7.5 Settings

Definite-T 1
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
meas.-volt. failure
• yes
_:331:109 Definite-T 1:Detection of • no no
faulty phase
• yes
measurement comp.
• fund. comp. long filter
• RMS value
ratio
_:331:107 Definite-T 1:Pickup delay 0.00 s to 320.00 s 0.00 s
delay
_:331:101 Definite-T 1:V> healthy 0.300 V to 200.000 V 75.000 V
ph-to-gnd volt.
_:331:104 Definite-T 1:V< faulty ph- 0.300 V to 200.000 V 40.000 V
to-gnd volt.

(Type)
Group indicat.
Definite-T 1
_:331:51 Definite-T 1:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:331:300 Definite-T 1:Faulty phase ACT O

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Logic of the Stage
[lo_ovp_V0_3pole_inverse, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-101 Logic Diagram of the Inverse-Time Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/
Residual Voltage
Measured Value, Method of Measurement

The device measures the residual voltage at the broken-delta winding. The measured voltage is converted to
the zero-sequence voltage V0. If the residual voltage is not available to the device as a measurand, the
zero‑sequence voltage V0 is calculated from the measured phase-to-ground voltages VA, VB, and VC using the
defining equation.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
With the parameter Method of measurement, you select the relevant method of measurement, depending
on the application:
• fundamental comp. (standard filter):

• RMS value (true RMS):

the defining equation of the RMS value.
• fund. comp. long filter (fundamental component over 2 cycle filters with triangular window):
component numerically. The extended filter length compared to the standard filter and the use of the
triangular window results in a particularly strong attenuation of harmonics and transient faults. The
extended filter length causes the pickup time to increase slightly compared to the standard filter (refer to
the technical data in 11.19.4 Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage ).

When the input voltage exceeds the threshold value by a settable value Pickup factor, the stage picks up
and the inverse-time characteristic curve is processed. The operate delay starts. The operate delay is the sum
of the inverse-time delay and the additional time delay.
Where
Top Operate delay
Tadd Additional time delay (parameter Additional time delay)
After pickup, the inverse-time delay Tinv is calculated for every input voltage that exceeds the threshold. An
integrator accumulates the value 1/Tinv. Once the accumulated integral reaches the fixed value 1, the inverse-
time delay expires. The additional time delay Tadd starts. The stage operates after the additional time delay
expires.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
The inverse-time characteristic curve is shown in the following figure.
[dw_ovp_inv, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-102 Operate Curve of Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve
Where
Tp Time multiplier (parameter Time dial)
V Zero-sequence voltage
Vthresh Threshold value (parameter Threshold)
k Curve constant k (parameter Charact. constant k)
α Curve constant α (parameter Charact. constant α)
c Curve constant c (parameter Charact. constant c)
When V/Vthresh is equal to or greater than 20, the inverse-time delay does not decrease any further.
Dropout Behavior
When the voltage falls below the dropout threshold (0.95 ⋅ pickup factor ⋅ threshold value), the dropout is
initiated. You can define the dropout behavior via the parameter Reset time. An instantaneous reset takes
place by setting Reset time to 0 s. A delayed reset takes place by setting the desired time delay.
During the Reset time (> 0 s), the elapsed operate delay is frozen. If the pickup value is exceeded again
within this period, the stage operates when the rest of the operate delay expires.
Determination of the Faulty Phase

You can use the parameter Detection of faulty phase to enable or disable the determination of the
phase affected by the ground fault. Determining is released when the stage picks up. If 2 phases exceed the

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
threshold value V> healthy ph-to-gnd volt. and 1 phase falls below the threshold value V< faulty
ph-to-gnd volt., the last phase is considered to be affected by the ground fault and is signaled as such.
Blocking the Stage
• Default setting (_:8) Method of measurement = fundamental comp.

With the parameter Method of measurement, you define whether the function works with the funda-
fundamental comp. This method of measurement suppresses the harmonics or transient voltage
peaks.
Siemens recommends using this setting as the standard method.
fund. comp. long filter To implement a particularly strong attenuation of harmonics and transient
faults, select this method of measurement. With this method, the length of
the filter is longer than that of the standard filter.
Note: In this case, the pickup time of the stage increases slightly (refer to
the technical data in 11.19.4 Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence
Voltage/Residual Voltage ).

The stage picks up when the measured voltage value exceeds the pickup value Threshold ⋅ Pickup
factor.
With the parameter Pickup factor, you modify the pickup value. To avoid a long-time operate delay after
pickup when the measured value is slightly over the threshold, Siemens recommends using the default
setting.

With the parameters Charact. constant k, Charact. constant α, and Charact. constant c,
you define the required inverse-time characteristic curve.

With the parameter Time dial, you displace the characteristic curve in the time direction.
curve, Siemens recommends leaving the parameter Time dial at 1.00 (default setting).

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

With the parameter Additional time delay, you define a definite-time delay in addition to the inverse-
time delay.
If you keep the default setting of 0.00 s, only the inverse-time delay is operative.

With the parameter Reset time, you define the reset time delay which is started when the voltage falls
below the dropout threshold. Set the parameter Reset time to 0.00 s when an instantaneous reset is
desired.
Under network conditions of intermittent faults or faults which occur in fast succession, Siemens recommends
setting the Reset time to an appropriate value (> 0.00 s) to ensure the operation. Otherwise, Siemens
• Default setting (_:10) Blk. by meas.-volt. failure = yes

With the parameter Blk. by meas.-volt. failure, you control the behavior of the stage when a meas-

switched on.
• The binary input signal >Open of the function block Voltage-transformer circuit breaker is
connected to the voltage-transformer circuit breaker (refer to 8.3.4.1 Overview of Functions).

Parameter: Detection of faulty phase
• Default setting (_:109) Detection of faulty phase = no

With the parameter Detection of faulty phase, you control how the stage responds to determine
which phase is affected by the ground fault.
no The phase affected by the ground fault is not determined.
Select the default setting if you do not want to use the stage to detect
ground faults, for example, for applications in grounded systems.
yes After a pickup by the residual voltage, the device tries to determine which
phase is affected by the ground fault.
Select this setting for applications in isolated or arc-suppression-coil-
grounded systems.
Parameter: V< faulty ph-to-gnd volt.
• Default setting (_:6) V< faulty ph-to-gnd volt. = 40.000 V 23

With the parameter V< faulty ph-to-gnd volt., you set the threshold value for determining which
phase is affected by the ground fault. The setting value is a phase-to-ground quantity.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
The setting value must be smaller than the minimum phase-to-ground voltage occurring during operation.
Siemens recommends using the default setting of 40.000 V.
Parameter: V> healthy ph-to-gnd volt.
• Default setting (_:5) V> healthy ph-to-gnd volt. = 75.000 V 23

With the parameter V> healthy ph-to-gnd volt., you set the threshold value for the 2 healthy phases.
The setting value is a phase-to-ground quantity.
The setting value must be greater than the maximum phase-to-ground voltage occurring during operation,
but smaller than the minimum phase-to-phase voltage occurring during operation. At Vrated = 100 V, set the
value, for example, to 75.000 V. Siemens recommends using the default setting of 75.000 V.

If you want the stage to have a reporting effect only, you can set the parameter Operate & flt.rec.
blocked to disable the generation of the operate indication and fault logging.
6.16.7.9 Settings

Inverse-T #
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:10 Inverse-T #:Blk. by • no yes
meas.-volt. failure
• yes
_:109 Inverse-T #:Detection of • no no
faulty phase
• yes
measurement comp.
• fund. comp. long filter
• RMS value
constant k
constant α
constant c
time delay
_:5 Inverse-T #:V> healthy 0.300 V to 200.000 V 75.000 V
ph-to-gnd volt.
_:6 Inverse-T #:V< faulty ph- 0.300 V to 200.000 V 40.000 V
to-gnd volt.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

(Type)
Inverse-T #
_:51 Inverse-T #:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:300 Inverse-T #:Faulty phase ACT O
6.16.8 Overvoltage Protection with Any Voltage

The function Overvoltage protection with any voltage (ANSI 59) detects any 1-phase overvoltages and is
intended for special applications.

The Overvoltage protection with any voltage function is used in protection function groups, which are
based on voltage measurement.
The function Overvoltage protection with any voltage comes factory-set with 2 stages. The tripping stages

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Logic of a Stage
[lo_ovp_Vx_any-volt, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-103 Logic Diagram of a Stage: Overvoltage Protection with Any Voltage
The Method of measurement parameter allows you to define whether the function works with the funda-
• Measurement of the fundamental comp.:

• Measurement of the parameter value RMS value:

Measured Value
The parameter Measured value allows you to select whether the stage uses a measured (directly
connected) voltage or a calculated phase-to-phase voltage.
Blocking the Stage


C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

Use the Method of measurement parameter to define whether the tripping stage uses the fundamental
voltage peaks.
• Default setting (_:391:9) Measured value = VA measured

The Measured value parameter is used to specify which voltage is monitored by the stage.
The scope of setting options depends on the connection type for the voltage transformers and the routing of
the measured values to the terminals of the voltage measuring point. You can find connection examples for
voltage transformers in the Appendix.
The following setting options can be available:
• Measured phase-to-ground voltage VA (VA measured)
• Measured phase-to-ground voltage VB (VB measured)
• Measured phase-to-ground voltage VC (VC measured)
• Measured phase-to-phase voltage VAB (VAB measured)
• Measured phase-to-phase voltage VBC (VBC measured)
• Measured phase-to-phase voltage VCA (VCA measured)
• Calculated phase-to-phase voltage VAB (VAB calculated)
• Calculated phase-to-phase voltage VBC (VBC calculated)
• Calculated phase-to-phase voltage VCA (VCA calculated)
• Calculated voltage V0 (V0 calculated)

The selection depends on the corresponding application.
NOTE
i From V7.30 on, the value VN measured is no longer provided. If you have selected this value in earlier
versions, you can use either the following methods instead after upgrading the configuration to V7.30 or a
later version:
• Select the value V0 calculated for the Measured value parameter in the function Overvoltage
protection with any voltage.
• Use the function Overvoltage protection with zero-sequence voltage/residual voltage.


C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Depending on the measured value, the Threshold is set either as Measured voltage or as Phase-to-
phase quantity.
NOTE
i If the function is used in a Voltage-current 1-phase function group connected to the 1-phase voltage
measuring point with the voltage type VN broken-delta, you set the threshold value based on the
equivalent zero-sequence voltage.
Calculate the equivalent zero-sequence voltage V0 equiv. sec from the measured voltage VN sec with the
following formula:
For more information about the parameter Matching ratio Vph / VN, refer to 6.1.5 Application and
Setting Notes for Measuring Point Voltage 3‑Phase (V-3ph).


sion, the Dropout ratio can be reduced, to 0.98, for example.

6.16.8.5 Settings

Stage 1
• on
• test
blocked
• yes
• VB measured
• VC measured
• VAB calculated
• VBC calculated
• VCA calculated
• V0 calculated
_:391:8 Stage 1:Method of measure- • fundamental comp. fundamental
ment comp.
• RMS value

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

Stage 2
• on
• test
blocked
• yes
• VB measured
• VC measured
• VAB measured
• VBC measured
• VCA measured
• VAB calculated
• VBC calculated
• VCA calculated
• V0 calculated
_:392:8 Stage 2:Method of measure- • fundamental comp. fundamental
ment comp.
• RMS value

(Type)
Group indicat.
Stage 1
Stage 2

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
6.16.9 Overvoltage Protection with Negative-Sequence Voltage/Positive-Sequence

Voltage

The function Overvoltage protection with negative-sequence voltage/positive-sequence voltage is used
to:
• Monitor the power system and electric machines for voltage unbalances
• Establish a release criterion of overcurrent protection for unbalanced faults

• The most common cause is unbalanced load, caused by different consumers in the individual phases, for
example.
• Voltage unbalance can also be caused by phase failure, for example due to a tripped 1-phase fuse, a
broken conductor, etc.
• Other causes can include faults in the primary system, for example, at the transformer or in installations
for reactive-power compensation.

The Overvoltage protection with negative-sequence voltage/positive-sequence voltage function is used
in protection function groups, which are based on voltage measurement.
The Overvoltage protection with negative-sequence voltage/positive-sequence voltage function comes
factory-set with 2 stages. A maximum of 3 stages can be operated simultaneously in the function. The stages
[lo_structure_V2_V1, 2, en_US]
Logic
The following figure represents the logic of the average-value calculation of the ratio of negative-sequence
voltage to positive-sequence voltage. The average value is forwarded to all subordinate stages.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[lo_V2-to-V1_FB general, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-105 Logic Diagram of the General Functionality
Measurand
The average value of the ratio of negative-sequence voltage to positive-sequence voltage is determined by a
settable time interval (parameter: Measuring window). With the parameter Measuring window, you can
adapt this function to all power-system conditions.
You can set the parameter Measuring window with a large value to get a more accurate calculated result,
which leads to a longer pickup time however.
Blocking the Function with Measuring-Voltage Failure Detection

In case of blocking, the picked up function is reset. The following blocking options is available for the function:
• From inside on pick up of the Measuring-voltage failure detection function (see section 8.3.2.1 Over-
view of Functions).
• From an external source via the binary input signal >Open of the function block Volt.-transf. c. b., which
links in the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker.
The parameter Blk. by meas.-volt. failure can be set so that the measuring-voltage failure detection
blocks the function or does not block it.
• Default setting (_:2311:102) Measuring window = 1 cycle

With the parameter Measuring window, you can optimize the measuring accuracy or the pickup time
of this function.
For sensitive settings of the parameter Threshold, for example, lower than 10 % of the rated voltage,
Siemens recommends using a higher number of cycles. Siemens recommends 10 cycles, and in this
case, the pickup time is increased.
For further information, refer to chapter 11.19.9 Overvoltage Protection with Negative-Sequence
Voltage/Positive-Sequence Voltage .

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
You use the Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter to control the behavior of the function when a

switched on.

yes The protection function is blocked (= default setting). Siemens recommends
no The protection function is not blocked.
6.16.9.5 Settings

General
_:2311:10 General:Blk. by meas.- • no yes
volt. failure
• yes
_:2311:102 General:Measuring 1 cycles to 10 cycles 1 cycles
window
_:2311:101 General:Minimum 0.300 V to 60.000 V 5.000 V
voltage V1

(Type)
General
_:2311:300 General:Undervoltage blocking SPS O
_:2311:301 General:V2/V1 MV O
6.16.9.7 Stage with Negative-Sequence Voltage/Positive-Sequence Voltage

You can find further details on the stage description in the following sections.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Logic of a Stage
[lo_V2_V1_Prov, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-106 Logic Diagram of the Stage: Overvoltage Protection with Negative-Sequence Voltage/Positive-
Sequence Voltage
The stage uses the average value of the negative-sequence voltage/positive-sequence voltage, which is calcu-
lated from the function block General Functionality. For more information, refer to chapter 6.16.9.3 Descrip-
tion.
Blocking the Stage

In case of blocking, the picked up function is reset. The following blocking option is available for the function:
• From an external or internal source via the binary input signal >Block stage
• Default setting (_:17071:3) Threshold = 10.00 %

The parameter Threshold is set in percentage according to the definition of the symmetrical compents. It is
the ratio of the negative-sequence voltage to positive-sequence voltage.
In the application with a lower threshold setting of about 2.00 %, there is a risk of an overfunction due to the
measuring errors with small values as well as an influence via disturbances.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
• Default setting (_:17071:4) Dropout ratio = 0.95

The default setting of 0.95 is appropriate for most applications if a higher threshold is used.
You can decrease the dropout ratio to avoid chattering of the stage if the threshold value is low. For example,
for the stage with a 2 % setting, you can use a dropout ratio of 0.90.

Specify the Operate delay for the specific application. When using the sensitive setting of the threshold
value that is described in this chapter, the function can be delayed by 3.00 s.
For a higher threshold value, a shorter tripping delay is required.

Example 1:
Releasing an overcurrent protection stage for unbalanced faults
The following section describes how to set the function to release an Overcurrent-protection stage when
unbalanced faults occur. Set the Overcurrent-protection stage only slightly higher than the load current, that
is very sensitive. To prevent the Overcurrent-protection stage from picking up inadvertently, the Overcur-
rent-protection stage is released when the Negative-sequence voltage stage picks up. The Overcurrent-
Protection stage remains blocked as long as the Negative-sequence voltage stage has not picked up.
Figure 6-107 shows the voltage phasors during a 2-phase local fault between phases B and C. The phase-to-
phase voltage VBC is virtually 0.
[dw_ua_zeig, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-107 Voltage Phasors during a 2-Phase Local Fault
A 2-phase local fault generates a relatively large negative-sequence voltage of up to 100 % referred to the
positive-sequence voltage. The portion of the negative-sequence decreases in case of a remote fault. The
lower setting limit results from the possible unbalance at full load. If you assume for example 5 % of the nega-
tive-sequence voltage to positive-sequence voltage, the pickup value must be higher. A setting value of 10 %
warrants sufficient stability during unbalanced operating states and sufficient sensitivity to release the Over-
current-protection stage when a fault occurs.
You can keep the default setting of 0.95 for the dropout ratio. This avoids chattering of the stage.
Set the Negative-sequence voltage stage so that it does not generate a fault when it picks up and does not
initiate tripping. The Overcurrent-protection stage generates a fault indication. The pickup of the Negative-
sequence voltage stage is used as the release criterion because the Short-circuit function must be released
immediately when the Negative-sequence voltage stage has picked up. The time delay is thus not relevant
and can be left at the default setting.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
You implement the release of the Overcurrent-protection stage using a logic block chart. An inverter links
the pickup of the Negative-sequence voltage stage with the Overcurrent-protection stage blocking.
[lo_pickup V2, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-108 Linking the Pickup of the Negative-Sequence Voltage Stage

Percentage of the Negative- Time Delay Dropout Ratio
Sequence Voltage to Positive-
Sequence Voltage
1 10.00 % 3.00 s 0.95
The second stage is not needed. It is deleted or remains off.
Example 2:
A negative-sequence voltage in the auxiliary system of the power plant causes negative-sequence currents on
motors. This leads to a thermal overload of the rotors. The following estimation can be used as a basis: 1 %
negative-sequence voltage can lead to approximately 5 % or 6 % negative-sequence current.
A negative-sequence voltage can be caused by a broken conductor on the high-voltage side. If a negative-
sequence voltage occurs, this can, for example, initiate a switching of the infeed in order to prevent a protec-
tion trip of an unbalanced-load protection of the motors.
Siemens recommends using multiple stages for a better grading, whereby a sensitive setting of the threshold
permits an increased tripping delay.
For a reference, only 2 stages are discussed.
The first stage has a pickup threshold of 10 % with a time delay of 1.5 s. The second stage has a pickup
threshold of 3 % with a time delay of 8 s, seeTable 6-6.
Table 6-6 Recommended Settings
Stage Threshold Operate Delay

Stage 1 10.00 % 1.50 s
Stage 2 3.00 % 8.00 s
6.16.9.10 Settings

Stage 1
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:17071:3 Stage 1:Threshold 0.50 % to 100.00 % 10.00 %
Stage 2
• on
• test

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:17072:3 Stage 2:Threshold 0.50 % to 100.00 % 15.00 %

(Type)
Stage 1
Stage 2

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
6.17 Frequency Protection
6.17.1 Overfrequency Protection

The Overfrequency protection function (ANSI 81O):
• Detect overfrequencies in electrical power systems or machines
• Monitor the frequency band and output failure indications
• Disconnect generating units when the power frequency is critical
• Provide additional turbine protection if the speed limiter fails

Frequency deviations are caused by an unbalance between the active power generated and consumed. Over-
frequency is caused by load shedding (island network), power system disconnection or disturbances of the
frequency controller. Overfrequency implies a risk of self excitation of machines which are connected to long
lines without load.
Overfrequency protection is available in two functional configurations (selectable from the DIGSI functions
library). The functional configurations differ in the frequency measurement method they use.

The Overfrequency protection function is used in protection function groups, which are based on voltage
measurement.
The overfrequency protection function comes with 2 factory-set stages. The tripping stages have an identical
structure.
The parameters Dropout differential and Minimum voltage are set for all stages.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
6.17.1.3 Overfrequency-Protection Stage
Logic of a Stage
[lo_stofqp, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-109 Logic Diagram of the Overfrequency-Protection Stage
Frequency-Measurement Method
Underfrequency protection is available in 2 functional configurations. These work with different frequency-
measurement methods. You select the frequency-measurement method in dependence of the application.
• Angle-difference method (method A):

The angle-difference method determines the phasor of the positive-sequence voltage in multiphase
systems. In the case of 1-phase connection, it always processes the phasor of the connected voltage.
Since the change of angle of the voltage phasor over a given time interval is proportional to the
frequency change, the current frequency can be derived from it.
• Filtering method (method B):

The filtering method processes the instantaneous voltage values and determines the current frequency
using a suitable combination of filters. The frequency-protection function selects automatically the
largest voltage as the measurand. In a multiphase connection, the phase-to-phase voltage is always the
largest. If in a multiphase connection the selected voltage is no longer available, the function changes
over automatically to the next maximum voltage. The function can even operate with just one voltage.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Both methods of measurement are characterized by a high measuring accuracy combined with a short
response time. Disturbance values such as harmonics, high frequency disturbances, phase-angle jumps during
switching operations and compensation processes due to power swings are effectively suppressed.
NOTE
i The angle difference method (method A) requires the sampling-frequency tracking.

If you use the angle difference method as method of measurement, ensure that sampling-frequency
tracking is active (see 3.3.2 Sampling-Frequency Tracking).
Functional Measured Value

The angle-difference method provides the following measured value:
f Frequency calculated with the angle-difference method
Behavior on Leaving the Operating Range

The sampling-frequency tracking makes a wide frequency operating range possible. If the stage has picked up
before leaving the frequency operating range and the measuring voltage is higher than the set minimum
voltage, the pickup is maintained. A dropout of the pickup is only possible by means of a blocking.
Blocking the Stage

In the event of blocking, a picked-up stage will be reset. The following blocking options are available for the
stage:
• Externally or internally via the logical binary input >Block stage
• Internally when the voltage drops below the Minimum voltage
The frequency measurement method is selected with the functional configuration from the DIGSI functions
library. The letter at the end of the function name describes the method of measurement.
Redundant solutions can be implemented by combining 2 different methods of frequency measurement. You
can implement a 2-out-of-2 decision by connecting the operate indications of both functions in a CFC with a
logical AND gate. This increases the reliability of protection.
Frequency-Measurement Description
Method
Angle difference method Select this method of measurement if the frequency protection stage is
(method A) used for the protection of machines.
Filtering method (method B) Select this method of measurement if the frequency protection stage is
used in an electrical power system.
• Recommended setting value (_:31:3) Threshold = 50.20 Hz for frated = 50 Hz
With the parameter Threshold, you define the pickup threshold of the overfrequency protection stage in
dependence of the application. 50.20 Hz is a typical warning threshold in 50-Hz systems.
• Recommended setting value (_:31:6) Operate delay = 10 s

With the parameter Operate delay, you set the stage so that overfunctions due to disturbing influences
(for example, switching operations) are avoided. Fairly high time delays are sufficient for warning indications.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Parameter: Minimum voltage
• Recommended setting value (_:2311:101) Minimum voltage = 37.500 V

For the Undervoltage blocking, Siemens recommends 65 % of the rated voltage of the protected object
as the setting value.
Calculate the secondary or primary setting value with the phase-to-ground voltage, that is, Vrated/√3.
For Vrated = 100 V secondary, the setting value of the Minimum voltage is calculated as follows:
[fo_minimal voltage A, 1, en_US]
In the angle-difference method, the setting value relates to the positive-sequence system.
NOTE
i If in DIGSI you switch over the settings view of the parameters to Percent, the phase-to-phase value of
the rated voltage is the reference value for the Minimum voltage in both methods of measurement.
Parameter: Dropout differential
• Recommended setting value (_:2311:109) Dropout differential = 20 mHz

Due to the high-precision frequency measurement, the recommended setting value for the Dropout
differential can remain at 20 mHz. If in your application you wish a subsequent dropout of the tripping
stage, then increase the setting value of the dropout differential. For example, if the pickup value (parameter
Threshold) of the tripping stage is set to 50.20 Hz and the Dropout differential to 100 mHz, the
stage will drop out at 50.10 Hz.
Application example of the overfrequency protection

Overfrequency protection can be used for monitoring the frequency range. If the frequency deviates from the
rated frequency by for example, 0.2 Hz, an alarm indication is generated. The trip command is delayed to
avoid overfunction due to disturbing influences (for example, switching operations). A delay of a few seconds
(for example, 10 s) is deemed to be a good value. You can leave the Dropout differential at the default
value of 20 mHz. The following table shows a setting recommendation.
For this application, 1 stage of the overfrequency protection is used. The following table shows a setting
suggestion.
Stage Caused by Setting Values
At frated = 50 Hz At frated = 60 Hz Delay
f1> Warning 50.20 Hz 60.20 Hz 10.00 s
f2> Not used (OFF) - - -
NOTE
i This table shows one example of a possible frequency protection setting. The setting values can differ
depending on the application.
6.17.1.5 Settings

General
voltage
_:2311:109 General:Dropout differ- 20 mHz to 2000 mHz 20 mHz
ential

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

Stage 1
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:31:3 Stage 1:Threshold Overfrequency A 40.00 Hz to 90.00 Hz 51.50 Hz
Overfrequency B 40.00 Hz to 70.00 Hz
Stage 2
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:32:3 Stage 2:Threshold Overfrequency A 40.00 Hz to 90.00 Hz 54.00 Hz
Overfrequency B 40.00 Hz to 70.00 Hz

(Type)
General
_:2311:301 General:f MV O
Group indicat.
Stage 1
Stage 2

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
6.17.2 Underfrequency Protection

The Underfrequency protection function (ANSI 81U) is used to:
• Detect underfrequencies in electrical power systems or machines
• Monitor the frequency band and output failure indications
• Decouple power systems
• Load shedding to ensure power system stability and protect motors
• Disconnect generating units when the power system frequency is critical (for example, f < 0.95 frated)
Frequency deviations are caused by an unbalance between the active power generated and consumed. Under-
frequency is caused by an increase of the consumers' active power demand or by a decrease of the power
generated. These conditions occur in the case of power system disconnection, generator failure, or distur-
bances of the power and frequency controller.
Underfrequency protection is available in 2 functional configurations (selectable from the DIGSI functions
library). The functional configurations differ in the frequency measurement method they use.

The Underfrequency protection function is used in protection function groups, which are based on voltage
measurement.
The Underfrequency protection function comes with 3 factory-set stages. The tripping stages have an iden-
tical structure.
The parameters Dropout differential and Minimum voltage are set for all stages.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
6.17.2.3 Underfrequency-Protection Stage
Logic of a Stage
[lo_stuf_qp, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-110 Logic Diagram of the Underfrequency-Protection Stage
Underfrequency protection is available in 2 functional configurations. These work with different frequency-
measurement methods. You select the frequency-measurement method in dependence of the application.
• Angle-difference method (method A):

The angle-difference method determines the phasor of the positive-sequence voltage in multiphase
systems. In the case of 1-phase connection, it always processes the phasor of the connected voltage.
Since the change of angle of the voltage phasor over a given time interval is proportional to the
frequency change, the current frequency can be derived from it.
• Filtering method (method B):

The filtering method processes the instantaneous voltage values and determines the current frequency
using a suitable combination of filters. The frequency-protection function selects automatically the
largest voltage as the measurand. In a multiphase connection, the phase-to-phase voltage is always the
largest. If in a multiphase connection the selected voltage is no longer available, the function changes
over automatically to the next maximum voltage. The function can even operate with just one voltage.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Both methods of measurement are characterized by a high measuring accuracy combined with a short
response time. Disturbance values such as harmonics, high frequency disturbances, phase-angle jumps during
switching operations and compensation processes due to power swings are effectively suppressed.
NOTE
i The angle difference method (method A) requires the sampling-frequency tracking.

If you use the angle difference method as method of measurement, ensure that sampling-frequency
tracking is active (see 3.3.2 Sampling-Frequency Tracking).
Behavior on Leaving the Operating Range

Sampling-frequency tracking makes an additional frequency operating range possible. If the stage has picked
up before leaving the frequency operating range and the measuring voltage is higher than the set minimum
voltage, the pickup is maintained. A dropout of the pickup is only possible by means of a blocking.
Blocking the Stage

In the event of blocking, a picked-up stage will be reset. The following blocking options are available for the
stage:
• Internally when the voltage drops below the Minimum voltage
The frequency measurement method is selected with the functional configuration from the DIGSI functions
library. The letter at the end of the function name describes the method of measurement.
Redundant solutions can be implemented by combining 2 different methods of frequency measurement. You
can implement a 2-out-of-2 decision by connecting the operate indications of both functions in a CFC with a
logical AND gate. This increases the security of protection.
Method of Measurement Description
Angle-difference method Select this method of measurement if the frequency protection stage is
(method A) used for the protection of machines.
Filtering method (method B) Select this method of measurement if the frequency protection stage is
used in an electrical power system.
• Recommended setting value (_:61:3) Threshold = 49.80 Hz for frated = 50 Hz
With the parameter Threshold, you define the pickup threshold of the underfrequency protection stage in
dependence of the application. 49.8 Hz is a typical warning threshold in 50-Hz systems.
• Recommended setting value (_:61:6) Operate delay = 10.00 s

With the parameter Operate delay, you set the stage so that overfunctions due to disturbing influences
(for example switching operations) are avoided. Fairly high time delays are sufficient for warning indications.

For the Undervoltage blocking, Siemens recommends 65 % of the rated voltage of the protected object
as the setting value.
Calculate the secondary or primary setting value with the phase-to-ground voltage, that is, Vrated/√3.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
For Vrated = 100 V secondary, the setting value of the Minimum voltage is calculated as follows:
[fo_minimal voltage A, 1, en_US]
In the angle-difference method, the setting value relates to the positive-sequence system.
NOTE
i If in DIGSI you switch over the settings view of the parameters to Percent, the phase-to-phase value of
the rated voltage is the reference value for the Minimum voltage in both methods of measurement.
• Recommended setting value (_:2311:109) Dropout differential = 20 mHz

Due to the high-precision frequency measurement, the recommended setting value for the Dropout
differential can remain at 20 mHz. If in your application you wish a subsequent dropout of the tripping
stage, then increase the setting value of the dropout differential. For example, if the pickup value (parameter
Threshold) of the tripping stage is set to 49.8 Hz and the Dropout differential to 100 mHz, the stage
will drop out at 49.9 Hz.
Application Example of Underfrequency Protection

Frequency protection can be used for load shedding. The UCTE has defined a 5-stage plan for the Western
European power grid. The setting values of the stages are based on that plan (see table below).
Table 6-7 Stage Plan
Frequency Activity
49.80 Hz Alarm and activation of reserves following an established plan
49.00 Hz Undelayed disconnection of 10 % to 15 % of the power system load
48.70 Hz Undelayed disconnection of another 10 % to 15 % of the power system load
48.40 Hz 3rd load-shedding stage. Another 15 % to 20 % of the power system load is
disconnected.
47.50 Hz Power plants are decoupled from the electrical power system
For this application, 3 stages of the underfrequency protection are used. 2 of these stages are used for load
shedding. The following table shows a setting suggestion.
Stage Caused by Setting Values
At frated = 50 Hz At frated = 60 Hz Delay
f1< Warning 49.80 Hz 59.80 Hz 10.00 s
f2< 1st load shedding 49.00 Hz 59.00 Hz 0.00 s
f3< 2nd load shedding 48.70 Hz 58.70 Hz 0.00 s
NOTE
i This table shows one example of a possible frequency protection setting. The setting values can differ
depending on the application.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
6.17.2.5 Settings

General
voltage
_:2311:109 General:Dropout differ- 20 mHz to 2000 mHz 20 mHz
ential
Stage 1
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:61:3 Stage 1:Threshold 30.00 Hz to 70.00 Hz 49.80 Hz
Stage 2
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
Stage 3
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes

(Type)
General
Group indicat.
Stage 1

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

(Type)
Stage 2
Stage 3
6.17.3 Rate of Frequency Change Protection (Undervoltage Check, df/dt Calculation)

The function Rate of frequency change protection is used to:
• Detect a frequency change quickly
• Prevent the system from not secure states caused by unbalance between the generated and consumed
active power
• Network decoupling
• Load shedding

The function Rate of frequency change protection can be used in protection function groups containing a
3‑phase voltage measurement.
2 function block types are available:
• df/dt rising
• df/dt falling
The function Rate of frequency change protection is preconfigured by the manufacturer with 1 df/dt rising
stage and 1 df/dt falling stage. A maximum of 5 df/dt rising stages and 5 df/dt falling stages can operate simul-
taneously within the function. Both of the function block types are similar in structure.
Undervoltage check and df/dt calculation are general functionalities and take place on the function level. All
stages use these general functionalities.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[dw_dfdt 01, 1, en_US]
Logic
The following figure represents the logic of undervoltage check and df/dt calculation. It applies to all types of
stages.
[lo_dfdtgf, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-112 Logic Diagram of General Functionality
Measurand
This function uses the frequency calculated via the angle difference algorithm.
For more information, refer to chapter 6.17.1.3 Overfrequency-Protection Stage.
The frequency difference is calculated over a settable time interval (default setting: 5 periods).
The ratio between the frequency difference and the time difference reflects the frequency change which can
be positive or negative.
A stabilization counter works to avoid overfunction. This counter is increased if the set threshold value is
exceeded. If the value drops below the threshold value, the counter is reset immediately. The counter is set to
8 internally and is activated at each half system cycle.
Undervoltage Blocking
If the measuring voltage drops below the Minimum voltage, the Rate of frequency change protection is
blocked because precise frequency values cannot be calculated anymore.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Value Description
df/dt Calculated rate of frequency change

For the Undervoltage blocking, 65 % of the rated voltage of the protected object is recommended.
The method of measurement uses the phasor of the positive-sequence voltage. When determining the setting
value, keep in mind that the absolute value of the sound positive-sequence voltage is equal to the absolute
value of the phase-to-ground voltage. The default setting is referred to this value.
• Default setting (_:13171:137) Measuring window = 5 periods

You can use the Measuring window parameter to optimize the measuring accuracy or the pickup time of
the function. For information regarding pickup time and measuring accuracy, refer to the technical data.
The default setting provides maximum measuring accuracy. If you do not have specific requirements for a
decreased pickup time, Siemens recommends using the default setting.
The default setting is a reasonable compromise between measuring accuracy and pickup time. For a non-
sensitive setting (high threshold value), you can set the parameter Measuring window to a smaller value.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Logic of the Stage
[lo_dfdt_st, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-113 Logic Diagram of Rate of Frequency Change Protection
(1) For the stage type df/dt rising, the value df/dt rising is used.
Frequency Rising/Falling
The stage df/dt falling is used to detect frequency falling and the stage df/dt rising is used to detect
frequency rising.
You set the threshold value as an absolute value. You define the frequency-change direction via the selected
stage type.

• Via the binary input signal >Block stage
• Via the undervoltage blocking when the voltage drops below the Minimum voltage
• Default setting (_:13231:3) Threshold = 3.000 Hz/s

The pickup value depends on the application and is determined by power-system conditions. In most cases, a
network analysis will be necessary. A sudden disconnection of loads leads to a surplus of active power. The

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
frequency rises and causes a positive frequency change. On the other hand, a failure of generators leads to a
deficit of active power. The frequency drops and results in a negative frequency change.
The following relations can be used as an example for estimation. They apply for the change rate at the begin-
ning of a frequency change (approximate 1 s).
Where:
frated Rated frequency
ΔP Active power change
ΔP = PConsumption - PGeneration
Srated Rated apparent power of the machines
H Inertia constant
Typical data for H:

For hydro generators (salient-pole machines) H = 1.5 s to 6 s
For turbine-driven generators (non-salient pole rotors) H = 2 s to 10 s
For industrial turbine-driven generators H = 3 s to 4 s
EXAMPLE
frated = 50 Hz
H=3s
Case 1: ΔP/Srated = 0.12
Case 2: ΔP/Srated = 0.48
Case 1: df/dt = -1 Hz/s
Case 2: df/dt = -4 Hz/s

You can use the Operate delay parameter to avoid overfunction due to disturbing influences (for example,
switching operations). If the protection function is supposed to respond quickly, set the Operate delay
parameter to 0 s.
For monitoring small changes (< 1 Hz/s), a small time delay is useful to avoid overfunctioning.
• Recommended setting value (_:13231:4) Dropout differential = 0.10 Hz/s

You can use the Dropout differential parameter to define the dropout value. The recommended value
is 0.10 Hz/s.
NOTE
i In case of power-system incidents, especially in case of transmission incidents and influence of voltage-
stabilizing measures via power-electronic components (reactive-power compensation through SVC), the
magnitude and the phase angle of the voltage can change. Sensitive settings can lead to overfunction.
Therefore, it is reasonable to block the Rate of Frequency Change Protection if other protection func-
tions, for example, residual voltage or negative-sequence voltage, pick up. To do this, use the blocking
input >Block stage and connect it via CFC.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
6.17.3.7 Settings

General
voltage
_:13171:137 General:Measuring 2 periods to 5 periods 5 periods
window
df/dt falling1
_:13231:1 df/dt falling1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:13231:2 df/dt falling1:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:13231:3 df/dt falling1:Threshold 0.100 Hz/s to 20.000 Hz/s 3.000 Hz/s
_:13231:4 df/dt falling1:Dropout 0.02 Hz/s to 0.99 Hz/s 0.10 Hz/s
differential
_:13231:6 df/dt falling1:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 1.00 s
delay
df/dt rising1
_:13201:1 df/dt rising1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:13201:2 df/dt rising1:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:13201:3 df/dt rising1:Threshold 0.100 Hz/s to 20.000 Hz/s 3.000 Hz/s
_:13201:4 df/dt rising1:Dropout 0.02 Hz/s to 0.99 Hz/s 0.10 Hz/s
differential
_:13201:6 df/dt rising1:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 1.00 s
delay

(Type)
General
_:13171:301 General:df/dt MV O
Group indicat.
df/dt falling1
_:13231:81 df/dt falling1:>Block stage SPS I
_:13231:54 df/dt falling1:Inactive SPS O
_:13231:52 df/dt falling1:Behavior ENS O
_:13231:53 df/dt falling1:Health ENS O
_:13231:55 df/dt falling1:Pickup ACD O
_:13231:56 df/dt falling1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:13231:57 df/dt falling1:Operate ACT O

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

(Type)
df/dt rising1
_:13201:81 df/dt rising1:>Block stage SPS I
_:13201:54 df/dt rising1:Inactive SPS O
_:13201:52 df/dt rising1:Behavior ENS O
_:13201:53 df/dt rising1:Health ENS O
_:13201:55 df/dt rising1:Pickup ACD O
_:13201:56 df/dt rising1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:13201:57 df/dt rising1:Operate ACT O

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
6.18 Impedance Protection
The Impedance protection function (ANSI 21):
• Protects transformers as backup protection for transformer differential protection
• Is used as a backup protection for the transformer and the generator in the block units of power stations
• Functions as backup protection in the event of energy recovery to faults in the upstream electrical power
system beyond a transformer
The Impedance protection function is used in protection function groups which provide current and voltage
measurement values.
The Impedance protection function is preconfigured at the factory with the function block (FB) General and
one zone. A maximum of 4 zones can be operated simultaneously in the function. The zones are structured
identically.
The protection function is structured in that way that the settings in the FB General are valid for all zones.
[dw_strimpedanceprot, 3, en_US]
6.18.3 Description
Impedance Measurement via the Transformer

Pay attention to the following features when measuring impedance in or via transformers:
• Impedance is transferred to the side to be measured using the quadrant of the transformer ratio.
• For star-delta transformers, an opposite phase rotation occurs in the positive-sequence and negative-
sequence system, depending on the vector group. This changes the fault situation on the other side. A
2‑phase short circuit on the star side appears as a 3-phase short circuit with different current distribution
on the delta side (see Figure 6-115).
Since star-delta transformers do not permit the zero-sequence system to be transferred, a 1-phase
ground fault on the star side appears as a 2-phase short circuit on the delta side (see Figure 6-116).
• In the case of auto transformers and transformers grounded on both sides in the star-star connection,
measurement through the transformer is possible. Here, distance protection for lines can be used
without any problems.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[dw_ratio-2pol-ifault, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-115 Transformation of a 2-Phase Short-Circuit Current
[dw_ratio-1pol-fault, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-116 Transformation of a 1-Phase Short-Circuit Current
The changed measurand mapping also leads to a different impedance mapping. Figure 6-117 and
Figure 6-118 show, for example, for a 2-phase or 1-phase short circuit on the star side, the resulting phasors
on the delta side. To simplify it, the transformer ratio was assumed to be 1.
[dw_imp-2pol-short-ciruit, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-117 Impedance Measurement with a 2-Phase Short Circuit

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[dw_imp-1pol-short-ciruit, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-118 Impedance Measurement with a 1-Phase Short Circuit
With a 2-phase short circuit, the phase-to-ground impedance of the phase corresponds to the double phase
current of the actual fault impedance via the transformer. The impedance is correctly measured. All other
impedances are measured as considerably larger. Subtracting the currents results in an infinite impedance
measured value for the C-A loop.
A 1-phase ground fault results in the smallest impedance value based on the calculation with phase-to-phase
voltages (in the example, C-A). Because the zero-sequence system cannot be transferred via a star-delta trans-
former, an impedance is measured that is too large by the amount of the zero-sequence impedances (trans-
former, line). The actual fault location is seen as being farther away.
With a 3-phase short circuit, the impedance measurement for all measuring loops is correct.
The following table summarizes the results of the impedance measurement for a star-delta transformer:
Table 6-8 Fault Mapping and Measuring Errors during the Impedance Measurement of a Star-Delta
Transformer
Power-System Incident Fault Mapping Correct Impedance Loop Measuring Error

on the Star Side on the Delta Side
3-phase short circuit 3-phase short circuit Phase-to-ground and Correct measurement
phase-to-phase loop
2-phase short circuit 3-phase short circuit, Phase-to-ground loop Correct measurement
different fault-current with largest fault current
distribution
1-phase ground fault 2-phase short circuit Phase-to-phase loop, but Impedance measured too
with measuring error large by the amount of
the zero-sequence impe-
dance (0.5 Z0)

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Logic of the Function
[lo_dis-impedance-protection, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-119 Logic Diagram for Impedance Protection

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[lo_block_imp, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-120 Logic Diagram for Impedance Protection (Continued)
Loop Selection
The function Impedance protection can be used in electrical power systems and plants with different neutral
points. With the Loop selection parameter, you control which parameters influence the loop release.
In power systems with effective neutral point grounding – solidly or low-impedance grounded neutral point –
all impedance loops (phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase loops) can work parallel to each other. When all
loops are working in parallel, the loop release is controlled by the parameter Min. phase-current
thresh (see following figure).
[lo_loopselect1 impprot, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-121 Effective Parameter for Loop Release for All Loops
In power systems with a non-effective neutral point grounding – isolated, grounded, or high-impedance
grounded neutral point – the control for the loop selection is necessary to avoid an overfunction, for example,
a ground fault. The loop selection is controlled by the Current-dependent parameter. The following figure
shows which parameter controls the loop selection.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[lo_loopselect2 impprot, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-122 Effective Parameter in Current-Dependent Loop Release
In case of a ground fault, the voltage collapsed – ideally to 0 – and the phase-to-ground loop measures either
a small impedance or 0 Ω. The phase-selective overcurrent detection releases the loops (parameter Overcur-
rent threshold). The undervoltage seal-in (parameter Undervoltage seal in) keeps the overcurrent
erect. The undervoltage seal-in is necessary for use in power plants when an exciting transformer is connected
to the generator bus. During a near short circuit, the excitation voltage collapses and results in a decreased
synchronous generated voltage. Thereby the fault current sinks below the rated current and thereby the
current threshold value (parameter Overcurrent threshold). The parameter V-seal-in threshold
monitors the positive-sequence voltage. The undervoltage seal-in drops out when the threshold value V-
seal-in threshold is topped or the undervoltage seal-in time (parameter Duration of V-seal-in
time) runs out.
The following rules apply for loop selection:
• In the event of 1-phase pickup, an associated phase-to-ground loop is used.
• In the event of 2-phase pickup, an associated phase-to-phase loop with the applicable phase-to-phase
voltage is used for the impedance calculation.
• In the event of a 3-phase pickup, the loop selection is dependent on the ratio of the current amplitudes of
the phases to one another.
The following table shows the measuring-loop selection:
Pickup Measuring Loops
1-phase A Phase-to-ground A-gnd
B B-gnd
C C-gnd
2-phase A, B Phase-to-phase A-B
B, C B-C
C, A C-A

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Pickup Measuring Loops

3-phase with unequal phase A, 2⋅ B, C When the current in 1 phase is B-gnd
current amplitudes B, 2⋅ C, A double the size, the phase-to- C-gnd
C, 2⋅ A, B ground loops are measured. A-gnd
(A, B) ≈ 2 ⋅ C When the current in 2 phases is A-B
(B, C) ≈ 2 ⋅ A double the size, the phase-to-phase B-C
(C, A) ≈ 2 ⋅ B loops are measured. C-A
3-phase with equal ampli- A, B, C When all voltages are almost equal, A-B
tudes the phase-to-phase loops are meas- B-C
ured. C-A
All 3 loops are released.
Impedance Measurement
From the sampled values of the phase currents and the phase-to-ground voltages, the fundamental phasors
are determined per period using an FIR filter (FIR = Finite Impulse Response). The impedances are calculated
from the fundamental phasors. By using the frequency-tracking sampled values, the impedance is measured
using another frequency range. This is advantageous for island networks or block-unit power plants, for
example, for start-up processes.
There is an impedance measuring element available for each of the 6 possible phase loops A-gnd, B-gnd, C-
gnd, A-B, B-C, C-A. If another fault occurs during analysis, the impedances are calculated using the current
cyclical measurands. The analysis thus always works with the measurands of the current fault condition.
The impedance for phase-to-phase loops is calculated as follows:
[fo_loop_ZLL, 2, en_US]
The impedance of phase-to-ground loops is calculated as follows:
[fo_loop_ZLE, 2, en_US]
Mode of Operation
If the phase currents exceed the set Min. phase-current thresh. All released impedance loops are
calculated.
To release phase-to-ground loops, it is sufficient if the corresponding phase current exceeds the Min.
phase-current thresh. For phase-to-phase loops, both phase currents and the loop current must exceed
the Min. phase-current thresh.
There is no special ground-fault detection, such as distance protection for lines.
If the released impedance loop(s) lie in one zone, the Impedance protection function generates a pickup indi-
cation with loop information. At the same time, a pickup indication in the picked up zone occurs with specifi-
cation of the relevant phase and direction. The direction is subsequently determined for all picked up impe-
dance loops and the associated time delay started. The output logic processes the pickup and trip signals of
the zones and forms the pickup and trip signals of the function.
The direction is determined either using a stored prefault voltage or negative-sequence system variables. If the
measured negative-sequence voltage or the negative-sequence current exceed 10 % of the rated values of the
device, the variables of the negative-sequence system are used exclusively. For the direction decision, the
angle between the negative-sequence current I2 and the negative-sequence voltage V2 is evaluated.
Figure 6-123 shows the defined directional areas on impedance level.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
For 3-phase symmetrical short circuits, there is no negative-sequence system. In this case, the memory voltage
is used. If the memory voltage is not available either, for example when switching onto a fault, all zones –
regardless of their parameterized direction – pick up and generate an operate indication after the time delay
has expired.
Optionally, you can link the Impedance protection function with the Instantaneous tripping at switch onto
fault function (see chapter 6.18.4 Application and Setting Notes). This enables the selected Impedance-
protection zones to trip without delay.
[dw_ritgkl, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-123 Direction-Characteristic Curve in the R-X Diagram
Inrush-Current Detection
If the device is equipped with the Inrush-current detection function, you can stabilize the zones against trip-
ping due to transformer inrush currents.
Impedance Polygon
The quadrilateral operate curve (impedance polygon) in the zone is a rectangle in the R-X plane. The polygon
is defined by the parameters X reach (ph-g), X reach (ph-ph), R reach (ph-g), and R reach
(ph-ph) and the Directional mode. This means that, in special situations, a different setting is possible
for phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground loops.
To stabilize the quadrilateral limits, the characteristics have a hysteresis of 5 %. If the fault impedance lies
within a polygon, the limits are increased by 5 % in all directions. The following figure shows an example with
2 non-directional zones:

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[dw_klpoly-impedanceprot, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-124 Operate Curve with Quadrilateral Characteristic
Sample Configuration
The following figure is an example of how the Impedance protection function is used at a feeder point in a
medium-voltage power system.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[dw_example-protection, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-125 Example of a Network Protection Application
The medium-voltage power system is fed on the high-voltage side with a YNd5 transformer. In addition, there
is an infeed that enables energy recovery to faults occurring on the high-voltage side.
The protection device installed on the delta side of the transformer functions as distance protection, which is
the backup protection for the medium-voltage power system.
In addition to distance protection, the protection device on the delta side functions as impedance protection,
which looks in the transformer direction. The power system on the high-voltage side is a meshed system and
also contains distance protection devices.
In the following, you can find recommendations for the protection setting values and a view of the setting
problems. Figure 6-126 shows a possible setting approach.
Zone TZ 1 should be coordinated with the protection system and delayed by approx. 100 ms. The delay makes
preferred tripping possible due to the differential protection and a dropout of the zone.
Zone TZ 2 is intended as a directional reserve stage, whose time must, without fail, be coordinated with the
protection system. At the same time, this stage can be used if, when switching the transformer on, it switches
onto a fault.
In exchange, the function Instantaneous tripping at switch onto fault must be present and set accordingly.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[dw_config-staffel, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-126 System Configuration and Possible Time Grading
For this example, the following data apply:
Table 6-9 Data for Sample Calculations
Transformer Vector group YNd5

Rated voltages Upper-voltage side Vrated, UV = 230 kV
Undervoltage side Vrated, LV = 20 kV
Rated power Srated = 50 MVA
Short-circuit voltage Vsc = 12 %
Overhead line Reactance per unit length X´ = 0.3 Ω/km
Length up to Z1, Dis L = 50 km
Transducer Voltage transformer 20 kV/√3 /100 V/√3 / 100V/3
Current transformer, Undervoltage side 1500 A/1 A
The primary side reactances are calculated as follows:

Transformer:
Line (transformed to
20 kV):
The sample calculation clearly shows that the line reactance can be disregarded compared to transformer
reactance due to the quadratic transformation.
To avoid overfunction, select the following setting values for the 1st zone (TZ 1)
X1 = 0.9 ⋅ XTr = 0.9 ⋅ 0.96 Ω = 0.864 Ω
For the 2nd zone, select the double transformer impedance and set the time delay correspondingly high.
X2 = 2 ⋅ XTr = 2 ⋅ 0.96 Ω = 1.92 Ω.
With the selected setting, Zone TZ 1 does not protect the transformer completely, especially if you take into
account the incorrect measurement for a 1-phase short circuit.
If you want to achieve a reliable tripping for all fault situations (see Table 6-8), the setting value must extend
far beyond the transformer. One possible strategy for the time grading is a setting value of approx. 1.5 XTr.
You must guarantee the selectivity using the Time criterion. The following figure shows the time-grading
chart:

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[dw_grading-x1-xtr, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-127 System Configuration and Possible Time Grading
The zone range in the R direction must take into account the fault resistance on the fault location. The fault
resistance is added to the impedance of the fault loop as an additional effective resistance. This fault resis-
tance is, for example, the arc resistance or the dissipation resistance of ground phases. For the zone range in
the R direction, you do not have to take the fault resistance on the upper-voltage side and the line resistance
into account. These are also divided by the transformer-ratio quadrant and can be mostly disregarded.
However, fault resistances on the upper-voltage side during high-current feed on the upper-voltage side also
impact the reactance and resistance measurement on the undervoltage side. This impact is unavoidable and
can result in a short circuit with fault resistance on the upper-voltage side not being detected by the under-
voltage side until the high-current feed on the upper-voltage side is cleared. Do not set the reserve resistance
any larger than necessary. The setting can be adjusted to the maximum load in the direction of the line section
to be protected, in other words, in the transformer direction. The setting value for the R range must be lower
than the resistance under maximum load conditions (RL max). For a sufficient distance to the load range,
Siemens recommends a value of about 20 % to 50 % RL max. This means an incorrect measurement is avoided
by the apparent impedances (seeFigure 6-117 and Figure 6-118).
Parameter: Loop selection
• Default setting (_:2311:102) Loop selection = All loops

With the parameter Loop selection, you control the measuring-loop selection.
All loops The function evaluates all 6 impedance loops.
Siemens recommends using this setting value for electrical power systems
or plants with an effective neutral-point grounding. For effective neutral-
point grounding the neutral point is either fixed or low-impedance
grounded.
Current-dependent Use this setting value for electrical power systems or plants with a non-
effective neutral-point grounding. For non-effective neutral-point
grounding the neutral point is isolated, grounded or high-impedance
grounded.
Siemens recommends this setting value for generator-protection applica-
tions.
Parameter: Min. phase-current thresh
• Default setting (_:2311:103) Min. phase-current thresh = 0.100 A

With the parameter Min. phase-current thresh, you set the lower pickup threshold for the current.
Set the Min. phase-current thresh parameter under the load current. A practical setting value is
approximately 10 % to 20 % of the rated current of the protected object.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
NOTE
i The parameter (_:2311:102) Loop selection = All loops is visible only if you set the parameter
Min. phase-current thresh.
Parameter: Overcurrent threshold
• Default setting (_:2311:104) Overcurrent threshold = 1.300 A

With the parameter Overcurrent threshold, you set the lower pickup threshold for the overcurrent.
Set the Overcurrent threshold parameter above the maximum possible load current. A practical setting
value is approximately 1.2 to 1.4 times the generator rated current.
EXAMPLE:
The rated generator current is calculated as:
[fo_1 irated gen, 2, en_US]
The primary setting value is calculated as follows:
Taking into account the transformer ratios, the secondary setting value is calculated as follows:
Parameter: Undervoltage seal in
• Default setting (_:2311:105) Undervoltage seal in = no

With the parameter Undervoltage seal in, you specify whether you would like to maintain pickup from
undervoltage.
no If the fault current is above the setting value of the parameter Overcur-
rent threshold during the entire error Fault duration, then keep the
default setting.
yes Siemens recommends using this setting value for generator-protection
applications, if during static excitation the exciting transformer is connected
to the generator bus.
In this situation, the excitation voltage dips in case of a near short circuit.
Thereby reducing the synchronous generated voltage, the fault current can
sink after an extended period of time after the fault occurred below the
generator rated current. If a fault occurs the fault current is noticeably
greater than the rated current. The undervoltage seal-in maintains the
pickup.
When selecting this setting value, the following parameters are visible:
• (_:2311:106) V-seal-in threshold

• (_:2311:107) Duration of V-seal-in time

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Parameter: V-seal-in threshold
• Default setting (_:2311:106) V-seal-in threshold = 46.200 V

With the parameter V-seal-in threshold, you set the lower pickup threshold for the undervoltage seal-
in.
80 % of the generator rated voltage is a typical setting value. As the voltage transformers are precisely
adapted to the object rated voltage, you can set 80 % of the secondary rated voltage. The parameter V-seal-
in threshold evaluates the positive-sequence voltage. With a secondary rated voltage V rated, sec = 100 V,
the setting value is determined as follows:
[fo_undervolt pickup, 2, en_US]
Parameter: Duration of V-seal-in time
• Default setting (_:2311:107) Duration of V-seal-in time = 4.00 s

With the Duration of V-seal-in time parameter, you set how long the pickup must persist. If the
Duration of V-seal-in time is exceeded, the pickup drops off. If the fault is cleared before the end of
the Duration of V-seal-in time, the Undervoltage seal in drops off. If the voltage exceeds
setting V-seal-in threshold again before the end of the Duration of V-seal-in time, the
Undervoltage seal in also drops.
Set the Duration of V-seal-in time above the maximum Operate delay. The default setting 4 s is a
practicable value.

The parameter is only visible when the Inrush-current detection function is present in the application. Use
the parameter to define whether the zone is blocked or not during transformer inrush-current detection.
Parameter: X reach (ph-g)
• Default setting (_:15301:102) X reach (ph-g) = 2.500 Ω

With the parameter X reach (ph-g), you set the polygon limit in the X direction for phase-to-ground impe-
dance loops. Determine the setting value for the specific application.
If the impedance protection has to be measured well beyond the transformer into the upstream power
system, Siemens recommends, as a setting value for the X reach (ph-g), approx. 1.5 times the trans-
former reactance. Adjust the associated delay time high enough so that short circuits downstream from the
transformer can be initially cleared selectively.
EXAMPLE:
For the calculation, the data from Table 6-9 apply.
X range = 150 %
The primary setting value is calculated as follows:
Xprim = 150 %/100 % ⋅ ZKT = 1.5 ⋅ 0.96 Ω = 1.44 Ω (primary)
[fo_Xrange_sec, 2, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Parameter: X reach (ph-ph)
• Default setting (_:15301:103) X reach (ph-ph) = 2.500 Ω

With the parameter X reach (ph-ph), you set the polygon limit in the X direction for phase-to-phase impe-
dance loops. Determine the setting value for the specific application.
If the impedance protection has to be measured well beyond the transformer into the upstream power
system, Siemens recommends, as a setting value for the X reach (ph-ph), approx. 1.5 times the trans-
former reactance. Adjust the associated delay time high enough so that short circuits downstream from the
transformer can be initially cleared selectively.
Because the phase-to-phase loop applies both to a 3-phase short circuit as well as a 1-phase short circuit, the
3-phase short circuit is taken as the basis.
You can estimate the range for 1-phase short circuits by taking into account the zero-sequence impedance
(reactance). The following applies:
ZSC = (ZKT + 0.5 ⋅ Z0T)
For star-delta transformers, the zero-sequence impedance amounts to approx. 0.8 ⋅ ZKT. This results in the
following impedance measured value:
ZSC = (ZKT + 0.5 ⋅ Z0T) = (ZKT + 0.5 ⋅ 0.8 ⋅ ZKT) = 1.4 ZKT
With a time grading of 1.5 ZKT, measure the entire transformer winding for a 1-phase ground fault.
In the example, the same setting values apply for the phase-to-phase loops as for the phase-to-ground loops.
Parameter: R reach (ph-g)
• Default setting (_:15301:104) R reach (ph-g) = 2.500 Ω

With the parameter R reach (ph-g), you set the polygon limit in the R direction for phase-to-ground loops.
For phase-to-ground faults, the fault resistance can be greater than that of phase-to-phase faults.
EXAMPLE:
The rated transformer current is assumed as the rated load current. The current is 1443 A on the 20 kV side.
The smallest impedance measured under maximum load conditions (Zmax) is calculated as follows assuming
10 % undervoltage and 10 % overcurrent:
[fo_Zmax_trafo_RLE, 2, en_US]
For the R reach, 20 % ⋅ Zmax is specified. This means the primary setting value of the R reach (ph-g)
parameter is calculated as follows:
R reach (ph-g) = 0.2 ⋅ 6.55 Ω = 1.31 Ω
This value corresponds to approx. the X value so that you can select, as a practical setting, R range = X range.
[fo_r_range_sek, 2, en_US]
Parameter: R reach (ph-ph)
• Default setting (_:15301:105) R reach (ph-ph) = 1.250 Ω

With the parameter R reach (ph-ph), you set the polygon limits in the R direction for phase-to-phase
loops.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
EXAMPLE:
Set the range for phase-to-phase loops just like for phase-to-ground loops. This results in the following setting
values:
R reach (ph-ph) = R reach (ph-g) = 1.45 Ω (primary)
R reach (ph-ph) = R reach (ph-g) = 10.9 Ω (secondary)
• Default setting (_:15301:109) Directional mode = reverse

With the parameter Directional mode, you can specify whether the zone operates forward, reverse,
or non-directional. Set the parameter Directional mode for the specific application.
If the Impedance protection function is present in a power-system protection device, the directional mode is
in the direction of the line forward. If you want to use the impedance zone as backup protection for a trans-
former, you have to set the parameter Directional mode = reverse.

With the parameter Operate delay, your set the grading time of the zone. Set the parameter Operate
delay for the specific application.
Select the associated time stage for Zone TZ so that it staggers the power-system protection devices of the
following lines. Therefore, check the grading times in the superposed power system as well as the range in the
power system if 1.5 ZKT is set.
6.18.5 Settings

General
• on
• test
_:2311:102 General:Loop selection • All loops All loops
• Current-dependent
_:2311:103 General:Min. phase- 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.100 A
current thresh 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.50 A
_:2311:104 General:Overcurrent 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.300 A
threshold 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.50 A
_:2311:105 General:Undervoltage • no no
seal in
• yes
_:2311:106 General:V-seal-in 0.300 V to 340.000 V 80.019 V
threshold
_:2311:107 General:Duration of V- 0.00 s to 60.00 s 4.00 s
seal-in time
TZ 1
_:15301:1 TZ 1:Mode • off on
• on
• test

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

_:15301:2 TZ 1:Operate & flt.rec. • no no
blocked
• yes
_:15301:27 TZ 1:Blk. w. inrush curr. • no no
detect.
• yes
_:15301:102 TZ 1:X reach (ph-g) 1A 0.100 Ω to 600.000 Ω 2.500 Ω
5A 0.020 Ω to 120.000 Ω 0.500 Ω
_:15301:103 TZ 1:X reach (ph-ph) 1A 0.100 Ω to 600.000 Ω 2.500 Ω
5A 0.020 Ω to 120.000 Ω 0.500 Ω
_:15301:104 TZ 1:R reach (ph-g) 1A 0.100 Ω to 600.000 Ω 2.500 Ω
5A 0.020 Ω to 120.000 Ω 0.500 Ω
_:15301:105 TZ 1:R reach (ph-ph) 1A 0.100 Ω to 600.000 Ω 1.250 Ω
5A 0.020 Ω to 120.000 Ω 0.250 Ω
_:15301:109 TZ 1:Directional mode • non-directional reverse
• forward
• reverse
_:15301:6 TZ 1:Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s; ∞ 0.30 s

(Type)
General
_:2311:82 General:>Block function SPS I
_:2311:55 General:Overcurrent pickup ACT O
_:2311:56 General:Pickup I>+V-seal-in ACT O
Group indicat.
_:4501:301 Group indicat.:Selected loop AG ACD O
_:4501:302 Group indicat.:Selected loop BG ACD O
_:4501:303 Group indicat.:Selected loop CG ACD O
_:4501:304 Group indicat.:Selected loop AB ACD O
_:4501:305 Group indicat.:Selected loop BC ACD O
_:4501:306 Group indicat.:Selected loop CA ACD O
TZ 1
_:15301:81 TZ 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:15301:54 TZ 1:Inactive SPS O
_:15301:52 TZ 1:Behavior ENS O
_:15301:53 TZ 1:Health ENS O
_:15301:55 TZ 1:Pickup ACD O
_:15301:56 TZ 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:15301:57 TZ 1:Operate ACT O

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
6.19 Arc Protection
6.19 Arc Protection
6.19.1 Overview of Function
The function Arc protection:
• Detects arcs in air-insulated switchgear parts without delay and in a fail-safe way
• Limits system damage through instantaneous high-speed tripping
• Protect systems from thermal overload
• Increases safety of personnel
• Trips in a 3-pole way
• Is suitable for use in all voltage levels
The Arc protection function can be added to function groups that provide current measured values.
The Arc protection function consists of the following blocks.
• General
• 3 stages
• Output logic 3-phase

The Arc protection function is preconfigured with 3 stages. A maximum of 17 tripping stages can be operated
simultaneously in the function. The tripping stages have an identical structure.
The following figure shows the basic structure of the Arc protection function.
[dw_structure_arcprot, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-128 Structure/Embedding of the Arc Protection Function

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
6.19 Arc Protection
General Logic of the Function Block
[lo_fb0_arcprot, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-129 General Logic Diagram of the Function Block

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
6.19 Arc Protection
Logic of the Stage
[lo_stage_arcprotection, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-130 Logic Diagram of the Stage
The Arc protection function uses a locally connected optical arc sensor or an external trip initiation by other
devices in order to detect arcs.
NOTE
i Install the arc sensors inside the switchgear in such a way that they are not hidden behind other system
components!
Shadowing of the arc sensors must be avoided!
NOTE
i Once an optical sensor has detected an arc, you must replace the affected optical sensor!
Within the Arc protection function, you can use a fast current-flow criterion as an additional release criterion.
The parameters for the current-flow criterion can be found in the General block. For each stage, you can
select individually whether the current-flow criterion must be evaluated as well.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
6.19 Arc Protection
Method of Measurement, Current-Flow Criterion

The current-flow criterion works with 2 different methods of measurement:

component numerically. A direct-current component is thus eliminated. The RMS value of the funda-
mental component is compared with the set threshold value.
• Evaluation of the unfiltered measurand:

If the current exceeds the threshold value set by the current ≥ 2 ⋅√2 ⋅ threshold value, the stage uses
additional unfiltered measurands. Thus, very short operate times are possible.
NOTE
i If using the current-flow criterion in addition to the light, prevent a potential overfunction caused by the
suddenly occurring light signal.
If you use the current-flow criterion, arcs are typically detected in 4 ms!
Self Monitoring
The Arc protection function uses a self-monitoring circuit. This circuit monitors the optical arc sensors and the
fiber-optic cables. The arc-protection module uses the fiber-optic cable to send a cyclic test signal (light) to the
arc sensors. If the channel is operating properly, the test signal is sent back to the arc protection module. If the
test signal is not returned to the arc protection module, the indication channel # Sensor failure is
generated.
If the self-monitoring function detects a fault, the indication Health is set to Alarm and the stage/function is
blocked.
6.19.4 Application and Setting Notes – General Settings
Go to General under the function Arc protection and set the following parameters. The setting values apply
to all stages.
Parameter: Sensor supervision
• Default setting (_:2311:2) Sensor supervision = yes

With the Sensor supervision parameter, you set whether you want to monitor the arc sensors or not.
Parameter: Threshold I>
• Default setting (_:2311:3) Threshold I>= 2.000 A

Use the parameter Threshold I> to define the trigger threshold of the phase currents. The Threshold I>
is relevant for the current-flow criterion of the Arc protection function.
Set the Threshold I> of the function Arc protection in such a manner that the RMS value of the inrush
current does not exceed the Threshold I> when activating the local circuit breaker.
For more information about how to calculate the setting value, refer to 6.10.3.2 Application and Setting
Notes.
Parameter: Threshold 3I0>
• Default setting (_:2311:4) Threshold 3I0>= 1.000 A

Use the parameter Threshold 3I0> to determine the tripping threshold for the zero-sequence current. The
Threshold 3I0> is relevant for the current-flow criterion of the Arc protection function.
Set the Threshold 3I0> of the function Arc protection in such a manner that the RMS value of the inrush
current does not exceed the Threshold 3I0> when activating the local circuit breaker.
For more information about how to calculate the setting value, refer to 6.11.3.2 Application and Setting Notes

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
6.19 Arc Protection
NOTE
i If you set the parameter CT connection = 3-phase, 2 primary CT for the 3-phase current meas-
uring point, the parameter Threshold 3I0> has no effect.
6.19.5 Application and Setting Notes for the Stage
Parameter: External trip initiation
• Default setting (_:14551:9) External trip initiation = no

With the External trip initiation parameter, you set whether an external input signal is used to
trigger the stage.
no The stage does not operate with an external input signal.
current The stage operates with an external input signal.
If the stage operates with an external input signal, the binary input signal
>External current must be routed in the DIGSI 5 information routing.
In this setting option, the binary input signal >External current is only
visible in the DIGSI 5 information routing
light The stage operates with an external input signal.
If the stage operates with an external input signal, the binary input signal
>External light must be routed in the DIGSI 5 information routing. In
this setting option, the binary input signal >External light is only
visible in the DIGSI 5 information routing
Note: When working with the light external trip initiation, do not select a
channel. If an additional channel is selected with this setting value, the
DIGSI 5 will signal an inconsistency.
• Default setting (_:14551:8) Operating mode = current and light

With the Operating mode parameter, you define the basic functionality of the stage.
current and light The stage operates with the input variables current and light.
The current-flow criterion ensures that the light signal originates from an
arc.
Siemens recommends using this setting value.
light only This stage operates only with the input signal 'light' and is triggered even if
current is not measured.
This operating mode can cause a overfunction if light is detected suddenly.
Use this setting value only if the effect caused by external light signals is
impossible.
Parameter: Sensor
• Default setting (_:14551:11) Sensor = point sensor

With the Sensor parameter, you set which sensor type is connected to the device.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
6.19 Arc Protection

point sensor A point sensor is connected to the device.
line sensor A line sensor is connected to the device.
custom If you select this setting option, the parameter Threshold light is
visible.
Siemens recommends the default setting values point sensor or line
sensor. This allows arcs to be detected reliably regardless of diffused light.
Parameter: Threshold light
• Default setting (_:14551:7) Threshold light = -20.00 dB

With the Threshold light parameter, you set the light sensitivity. If you set Threshold light to a
smaller value, the sensitivity increases. If you set Threshold light to a higher value, the sensitivity
decreases. If the sensors even pick up in case of a switching arc of the circuit breaker, set the Threshold
light parameter to a higher value.
Siemens recommends the default settings for point or line sensors.
Set the parameter Threshold light manually only if you have special default settings for light sensitivity.
Parameter: Channel
• Default setting (_:14551:10) Channel = No channel is selected

With the Channelparameter, you select which sensor channel the stage uses.
If the Arc protection function has several stages, a different channel must be selected for each stage.
For parameter Channel, the selection texts are identical to the name of the arc-protection module and its
channels.
6.19.6 Settings

General
• on
• test
_:2311:2 General:Sensor supervi- • no yes
sion
• yes
_:2311:3 General:Threshold I> 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 2.000 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 10.00 A
_:2311:4 General:Threshold 3I0> 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 5.00 A
Stage 1
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:14551:9 Stage 1:External trip • no no
initiation
• light
• current

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
6.19 Arc Protection

_:14551:8 Stage 1:Operating mode • light only current and light
• current and light
_:14551:11 Stage 1:Sensor • point sensor point sensor
• line sensor
• custom
_:14551:7 Stage 1:Threshold light -34.00 dB to -10.00 dB -20.00 dB
_:14551:10 Stage 1:Channel Setting options depend on
configuration
Stage 2
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
initiation
• light
• current
• line sensor
• custom
configuration
Stage 3
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
initiation
• light
• current
• line sensor
• custom
configuration

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
6.19 Arc Protection

(Type)
General
_:2311:82 General:>Block function SPS I
_:2311:51 General:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:2311:301 General:Current detected SPS O
Group indicat.
Stage 1
_:14551:82 Stage 1:>External light SPS I
_:14551:501 Stage 1:>External current SPS I
_:14551:51 Stage 1:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:14551:318 Stage 1:Fault arc counter INC C
_:14551:58 Stage 1:Arc detected SPS O
_:14551:301 Stage 1:Light detected SPS O
Stage 2
Stage 3

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
6.19 Arc Protection

(Type)
Information about the self-monitoring function of the arc protection module

(Type)
channel #
_:307 channel #:Sensor failure SPS O
Light Only
Overview
The example describes the Arc protection function in a medium-voltage switchgear with one infeed and
2 feeders. The Arc protection function operates with the Operating mode = light only.
The following items are considered in the example below:
• Positioning the optical point sensors in the switchgear
• Connecting the optical point sensors to the protection devices in the feeders and the infeed
• Number of necessary stages of the functions in the protection devices of the feeders and the infeed
• Setting notes about the selected parameters in the stages of the function
The following figure shows the arrangement and the connection of the optical point sensors:

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
6.19 Arc Protection
[dw_arcprot-light-only, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-131 Layout and Connection of the Optical Point Sensors (Operating Mode = Light only)
For this example, the following is assumed:
• The circuit breaker of the infeed must be switched off. This ensures that the arcs in the busbar compart-
ments of the infeed and the feeders or in the circuit-breaker compartment of the feeders are off.
Install the optical point sensors in the busbar compartments (BB compartment) of the infeed and feeders.
Install additional optical point sensors in the circuit-breaker compartment (CB compartment) of the
feeders. Connect all optical point sensors to the protection device of the infeed.
• The optical point sensors in the cable-connection compartment of the feeders detect arcs in this compart-
ment. Install one optical point sensor in the cable-connection compartment of the feeders and connect it
to the protection device of the feeder. This allows for the selective clearing of arcs inside the cable-
connection compartment.
Due to the pressure waves that occur during the formation of an arc, partitions can deform and cause
undesirable light influences in adjacent compartments. This can result in a non-selective tripping.
• If there is an arc in the circuit-breaker compartment and in the cable-connection compartment of the
infeed, the superordinate protection device must switch off.
NOTE
i If the Arc protection function operates in Operating mode = light only, the effects of external light
can result in non-selective tripping.
NOTE
i It must be considered that the number of arc protection modules connected to the device depends on the
hardware configuration of the device.
When using modular devices, a maximum of 15 sensors can be connected. If using non-modular devices, a
maximum of 6 sensors (3 sensors per module) can be connected.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
6.19 Arc Protection
General Notes
• Connect one optical point sensor from the cable-connection compartment in feeder 1 to the protection
device in feeder 1. Arcs in the cable-connection compartment are cleared selectively by the circuit
breaker in feeder 1.
• Connect one optical point sensor from the cable-connection compartment in feeder 2 to the protection
device in feeder 2. Arcs in the cable-connection are cleared selectively by the circuit breaker in feeder 2.
• Connect optical point sensors from all busbar compartments and all circuit-breaker compartments of
feeders 1 and 2 to the protection device in the infeed. Arcs in these compartments are detected and
cleared by the device in the infeed.
Setting Notes for the Protection Device in Feeder 1

The Arc protection function operates with one stage.
Set the parameters of the stage as follows:
• Parameter: Operating mode = light only
• Parameter: Sensor = point sensor
• Parameter: External trip initiation = no
• Parameter: Channel = Arc mod. 1 channel 1

The parameters in block General are not relevant since the Operating mode = light only.

The Arc protection function operates with one stage.

Setting Notes for the Protection Device in the Infeed

The Arc protection function operates with 5 stages.
Set the parameters of the stages as follows:
• Parameter: Operating mode = light only (applies to all stages)
• Parameter: Sensor = point sensor (applies to all stages)
• Parameter: External trip initiation = no (applies to all stages)
• Parameter: Channel = Arc mod. 1 channel 1 (Stage 1) → Busbar compartment supervision in

feeder 1
Parameter: Channel = Arc mod. 1 channel 2 (Stage 2) → Circuit-breaker compartment supervision
in feeder 1
Parameter: Channel = Arc mod. 1 channel 3 (Stage 3) → Busbar compartment supervision in
feeder 2
in feeder 2
Parameter: Channel = Arc mod. 2 channel 2 (Stage 5) → Busbar compartment supervision in the
infeed

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
6.19 Arc Protection
Light and Current
Overview
The example describes the Arc protection function in a medium-voltage switchgear with one infeed and 2
feeders. The Arc protection function operates with the Operating mode = current and light. In the
example, all arcs are detected by the protection device in the infeed.
The following items are considered in the example:
• Setting notes about selected parameters in the stages of the function
[dw_light-and-current, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-132 Layout and Connection of the Optical Point Sensors (Operating Mode = Current and Light)
• The current-flow criterion offers additional security to prevent unwanted tripping caused by sudden light
influences.
Depending on the arc location in the cable-connection compartment of the feeder, it is not always
possible to measure the current. If an arc is detected in the cable-connection compartment of the feeder,
the current will therefore be evaluated in the infeed.
• Install the optical point sensors in the busbar compartment, the circuit-breaker compartment, and the
cable-connection compartment of the feeders as well as the busbar compartment of the infeed. Connect
the optical point sensors to the protection device in the infeed.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
6.19 Arc Protection
• The protection device in the infeed clears all arcs in the busbar compartment, the circuit-breaker
compartment, and the cable-connection compartment of feeder 1 and 2. Furthermore, the protection
device clears arcs in the busbar compartment of the infeed.
• If the optical point sensors in the busbar compartment, the circuit-breaker compartment, and the cable-
connection compartment of the feeders, or in the busbar compartment of the infeed detect an arc, the
protection device in the infeed evaluates the current as well.
• If an arc occurs in the circuit-breaker compartment and in the cable-connection compartment of the
infeed, the superordinate protection device must trip.
NOTE
i If the Arc protection function operates with the Operating mode = current and light, the addi-
tional current-flow criterion prevents unwanted tripping caused by external light influences.
NOTE
i This application example requires the connection of several optical point sensors to a single protection
device. It must be considered that the number of arc-protection modules that are connected to the device
depends on the hardware configuration of the device.
When using modular devices, a maximum of 15 sensors can be connected. If you use non-modular devices,
a maximum of 6 sensors (3 sensors per module) can be connected.
General Notes
• Connect the optical point sensors from the busbar compartment, the circuit-breaker compartment, and
the cable-connection compartment of feeders 1 and 2 to the protection device in the infeed. Arcs in the
busbar compartment, the circuit-breaker compartment and the cable-connection compartment of
feeders 1 and 2 are detected and cleared by the device in the infeed.
• Connect an optical point sensor from the busbar compartment in the infeed to the protection device in
the infeed. Arcs in the busbar compartment of the infeed are cleared selectively by the circuit breaker in
the infeed.

• Parameter: Operating mode = current and light (applies to all stages)
• Parameter: Sensor = point sensor (applies to all stages)
• Parameter: External trip initiation = no (applies to all stages)

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
6.19 Arc Protection
• Parameter: Channel = Arc mod. 1 channel 1 (Stage 1) → Busbar compartment supervision in

feeder 1
in feeder 1
Parameter: Channel = Arc mod. 1 channel 3 (Stage 3) → Cable-connection compartment supervi-
sion in feeder 1
Parameter: Channel = Arc mod. 2 channel 1 (Stage 4) → Busbar compartment supervision in
feeder 2
in feeder 2
Parameter: Channel = Arc mod. 2 channel 3 (Stage 6) → Cable-connection compartment supervi-
sion in feeder 2
Parameter: Channel = Arc mod. 3 channel 1 (Stage 7) → Busbar compartment supervision in the
infeed
You can find more information about the settings of the parameters Threshold I> and Threshold 3I0>
in chapter 6.19.4 Application and Setting Notes – General Settings.
6.19.10 Application Example for Arc Protection with Point Sensors via External Trip
Initiation
Overview
The example describes the Arc protection function in a medium-voltage switchgear with one infeed and
2 feeders. The stages of the Arc protection function are triggered by External trip initiation.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
6.19 Arc Protection
[dw_arcprot-extern-input, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-133 Arc Protection with External Trip Initiation
cable-connection compartment of the feeder and the infeed. Connect the optical point sensors to the
respective protection device in the feeder and infeed.
• If the optical point sensors detect an arc in the busbar compartment or the circuit-breaker compartment
of the feeders, the Light detected indication is sent via binary inputs/outputs, a protection interface,
or IEC 61850 GOOSE to the protection device in the infeed. Then, the protection device in the infeed
evaluates the current as well. If the measured current exceeds the thresholds Threshold I> and/or
Threshold 3I0>, the protection device in the infeed switches off the malfunction.
You can find detailed information in chapter 6.19.10.2 Application and Setting Notes
• Arcs in the cable-connection compartment of the feeders can also be switched off selectively by the
protection device of the affected feeder. To do this, the Current detected pickup indication from the
infeed unit must be sent to the appropriate protection device in the feeder.
infeed, the superordinate protection device trips.
NOTE
i If the Arc protection function operates via the External trip initiation, only 3 optical point
sensors are required per feeder protection device in order to detect the arcs (only one arc-protection
module).
The number of GOOSE messages is not limited. Therefore, the number of feeders is not limited, and the
protection of complex systems is feasible.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
6.19 Arc Protection
General Notes:
cable-connection compartment of the feeders and the infeed to the respective protection devices.
• Arcs in the busbar compartment and the circuit-breaker compartment of the feeders must be switched
off by the protection device in the infeed. To do this, the protection devices in the feeder device must
send the indication Light detected to the infeed device. Use the binary inputs/outputs, a protection
interface, or IEC 61850 GOOSE.
The protection device in the infeed evaluates the current. If the measured current exceeds the
Threshold I> and/or Threshold 3I0> threshold values, the protection device in the infeed switches
off faults on the busbar and the circuit-breaker compartment of the feeders.
Connect the signals over 4 stages, using the external trip initiation or a CFC chart.
• Arcs in the cable-connection compartment of the feeders are switched off locally. The protection device
in the infeed evaluates the current. If the measured current exceeds the threshold values Threshold
I> and/or Threshold 3I0>, the Current detected indication is sent to the protection devices in
the feeders. If, at the same time, an optical sensor in a cable-connection compartment detects light, the
protection device trips in the corresponding feeder.

Stage 1 and 2 (supervision of busbar compartment and circuit-breaker compartment):
• Parameter: Operate & flt.rec. blocked = yes
• Parameter: Channel = Arc mod. 1 channel 1 (stage 1) → busbar-compartment supervision in

feeder 1
Parameter: Channel = Arc mod. 1 channel 2 (stage 2) → circuit-breaker compartment supervision
in feeder 1
Stage 3 (supervision of cable-connection compartment):
• Parameter: Operating mode = current and light
• Parameter: External trip initiation = current

The protection device in the infeed evaluates the current. If the measured current exceeds the threshold
values Threshold I> and/or Threshold 3I0>, the protection device in the infeed returns the indica-
tion Current detected to the protection device in the feeder.
Only if the indication in the feeder device Current detected is connected with the signal >External
current an external trip initiation for this stage is effective.
• Parameter: Operate & flt.rec. blocked = no

Stage 1 and 2 (supervision of busbar compartment and circuit-breaker compartment):

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
6.19 Arc Protection
• Parameter: Channel = Arc mod. 1 channel 1 (stage 1) → busbar-compartment supervision in

feeder 2
Parameter: Channel = Arc mod. 1 channel 2 (stage 2) → circuit-breaker compartment supervision
in feeder 2
Stage 3 (supervision of cable-connection compartment):
• Parameter: External trip initiation = current

The protection device in the infeed evaluates the current. If the measured current exceeds the threshold
values Threshold I> and/or Threshold 3I0>, the protection device in the infeed returns the indica-
tion Current detected to the protection device in the feeder.
Only if the indication in the feeder device Current detected is connected with the signal >External
current an external trip initiation for this stage is effective.

Stage 1 (busbar-compartment supervision):

If an arc is detected in the busbar compartment of the infeed and the thresholds Threshold I> and/or
Threshold 3I0> are exceeded, an operate indication is generated immediately.

Stage 2 (circuit-breaker compartment supervision):

If an arc is detected in the circuit-breaker compartment of the infeed (light-gray point sensors in
Figure 6-133), a pickup indication is generated immediately. The arc is switched off by a superordinate
protection device.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
6.19 Arc Protection
Stage 3 (cable-connection compartment supervision):

If an arc is detected in the cable-connection compartment of the infeed (light-gray point sensors in
Figure 6-133), a pickup indication is generated immediately. The arc is switched off by a superordinate
protection device.
Depending where the arc is generated in the cable-connection compartment of the infeed, it is not
always possible to measure the current. If an arc is detected in the cable-connection compartment of the
infeed, the current must be evaluated by the superordinate protection device.

Stage 4 to 7 (External trip initiation):
• Parameter: External trip initiation = light

If an arc is detected in the busbar compartment or the circuit-breaker compartment of the feeder, the
feeder device sends the Light detected indication to the infeed device. Only if the indication in the
infeed device Light detected is connected with the signal >External light, an external trip
initiation via these stages is effective.
The protection device in the infeed evaluates the current. If the measured current exceeds the
Threshold I> and/or Threshold 3I0> threshold values, the protection device in the infeed switches
off the arc.
6.19.11 Application Example for Arc Protection with a Line Sensor in Operating Mode:
Light and Current
Overview
The example describes the Arc protection function in a medium-voltage switchgear with 1 infeed and
2 feeders. The Arc protection function operates with the Operating mode = current and light. In the
example, all arcs are detected by the protection device in the infeed.
• Optical line sensor placement in the switchgear
• Optical line sensor connection to the protection device in the infeed
• Number of necessary stages of the functions in the infeed protection device

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
6.19 Arc Protection
[dw_line sensor, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-134 Layout and Connection of the Optical Line Sensors (Operating Mode = Current and Light)
• The current-flow criterion offers additional protection to prevent unwanted tripping caused by the
sudden effects of light.
• Figure 6-134 shows how the optical line sensors should be routed. Start in the infeed busbar compart-
ment and route the optical line sensor along the busbar and back again to the protection device in the
infeed. Connect the optical line sensor to the protection device in the infeed.
• Depending on the routing options in the control cabinet, you can also route the optical line sensor
through the circuit-breaker and cable-connection compartments of the feeders.
If this is not possible, you can detect arcs in these compartments using point sensors. For more detailed
information, see chapters 6.19.8 Application Example for Arc Protection with Point Sensors in Operating
Mode: Light Only and 6.19.9 Application Example for Arc Protection with Point Sensors in Operating
Mode: Light and Current.
infeed, the superordinate protection device will shut off.
NOTE
i If the Arc protection function operates with the Operating mode = current and light, the addi-
tional current-flow criterion will prevent unwanted tripping caused by external light effects.
NOTE
i Note that the number of arc protection modules that are connected to the device depend on the hardware
configuration of the equipment.
When using modular equipment, a maximum of 15 sensors can be connected. If using non-modular equip-
ment, a maximum of 6 sensors (3 sensors per module) can be connected.
Depending on the use case, you can combine point and line sensors.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
6.19 Arc Protection

The Arc protection function operates with 1 stage.
• Parameter: Sensor = line sensor
• Parameter: Channel = Arc mod. 1 channel 1 (Stage 1) → Busbar compartment supervision (infeed,
feeder 1, feeder 2)
You can find more information about the settings of the parameters Threshold I> and Threshold 3I0>
in chapter 6.19.4 Application and Setting Notes – General Settings.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
6.20 Inrush-Current and 2nd Harmonic Detection
6.20.1 Inrush-Current Detection

The function Inrush-current detection
• Recognizes an inrush process on transformers
• Generates a blocking signal for protection functions that protect the transformer (protected object) or for
protection functions that are affected in undesirable ways when transformers are switched on
• Allows a sensitive setting of the protection functions

The function Inrush-current detection is not an individual protection function. In the connection process of a
transformer, it transmits a blocking signal to other protection functions. For this reason, the inrush-current
detection must be in the same function group as the functions that are to be blocked.
The following figure shows the embedding of the function. The setting parameter Blk. w. inrush curr.
detect. establishes the connection between inrush-current detection and the functions that are to be
blocked. If the parameter is set to yes, the connection is effective.
A jump detection or the threshold value exceeding of the functions to be blocked is used as trigger signal for
synchronization of the internal measurement methods.
The jump detection reacts to changes in the current. The threshold value exceeding is recognized due to an
internal pickup of the protection function that is to be blocked.
[dw_irsh01, 1, en_US]

The function Inrush-current detection analyzes the trigger signal of the jump detection or the threshold-
value violation of the function to be blocked in a start logic, and synchronizes the method of measurement. In
order to securely record the inrush processes, the function uses the Harmonic analysis method of measure-
ment and the CWA method (current wave shape analysis). Both methods work in parallel and link the results
through a logical OR.
If you wish to work with only one process, deactivate the other method by way of the parameters Blocking
with 2. harmonic or Blocking with CWA .

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[lo_inru_02, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-136 Basic Structure of the Inrush-Current Detection
Harmonic Analysis
For this method of measurement, the content of the 2nd harmonic and the fundamental component (1st
harmonic) are determined for each of the phase currents IA, IB, and IC and the quotient I2nd harm / I1st harm is
formed from this. If this quotient exceeds the set threshold value, a phase-selective signal is issued.
If 75 % of the set threshold value is exceeded, this leads to a pickup reset (dropout ratio = 0.75).

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[lo_inrush_10, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-137 Logic of the Harmonic Analysis Function (T = 1 Period)
CWA Method (Current Wave Shape Analysis)

The CWA method executes a wave shape analysis of the phase currents IA, IB, and IC. If all 3 phase currents
show flat areas at the same point in time, the inrush-current detection signal will be issued. This signal applies
for all 3 phases simultaneously. The following figure shows a typical inrush-current characteristic, with the
simultaneously occurring flat areas clearly recognizable.
[dw_inrush_03, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-138 Inrush-Current Characteristic
The following figure shows the logic diagram of the CWA method.
From the present fundamental-component current (1st harmonic), the threshold value for identification of the
flat areas is derived via an internal factor.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Figure 6-139 Logic of the CWA-Method Function (T = 1 Period)
Logic of the Inrush-Current Detection

The following logic diagram shows the link of the 2 methods of measurement Harmonic Analysis and CWA
method.
The crossblock function influences the Harmonic Analysis process. If you have set the parameter Cross-
blocking to yes, you will receive in the event of threshold-value violation a blocking indication for all 3
phase currents and the measured or calculated zero-sequence current (l2nd harm / l1st harm). The crossblock func-
tion works via a timer. Set parameters for time depending on the expected duration factor via the parameter
Cross-blocking time.
If the phase current exceeds the maximum permissible current Operat.-range limit Imax, the inrush-
current detection will be blocked.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Figure 6-140 Logic Diagram of the Inrush-Current Detection
Parameter: Operat.-range limit Imax
• Recommended setting value (_:106) Operat.-range limit Imax = 7.5 A

With the parameter Operat.-range limit Imax, you can specify at which current the inrush-current
detection is blocked internally. Set the value to be greater than the RMS value of the maximum inrush
current of the transformer. A practicable value is 7.5 times the transformer rated current.
Parameter: Blocking with CWA
• Recommended setting value = (_:111) Blocking with CWA = yes

yes CWA process activated.
no CWA process deactivated.
Parameter: Blocking with 2. harmonic
• Recommended setting value (_:110) Blocking with 2. harmonic = yes

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

yes Harmonic analysis process activated.
no Harmonic analysis process deactivated.
NOTE
i Make sure that at least one process is activated. Siemens recommends retaining the advised setting values.
Parameter: 2nd harmonic content
• Recommended setting value (_:102) 2nd harmonic content = 15 %

With the parameter 2nd harmonic content, you can specify the pickup value of the harmonic anal-
ysis function. The setting value of 15 % is practicable for most transformers.
Parameter: Cross-blocking
• Recommended setting value (_:112) Cross-blocking = no

no Through the CWA process working in parallel in the inrush-current detec-
tion, the function is not activated as standard.
yes If a subfunction of the inrush-current detection is identified in the course of
the closure trials during commissioning, set the parameter Cross-
blocking to yes.
Parameter: Cross-blocking time
• Default setting (_:109) Cross-blocking time = 0.06 s

You define the duration of this blocking with the Cross-blocking time parameter. The default
setting of 0.06 s (about 3 periods) has proven practicable. Set the time as short as possible and check
the value during the closure trials. The parameter Cross-blocking time is inactive at Cross-
blocking = no.
Parameter: Start flt.rec
• Default setting (_:114) Start flt.rec = yes

With the Start flt.rec parameter, you determine whether a fault record should be started upon
pickup of the inrush-current detection. The following settings are possible:

no No fault recording starts with pickup.
yes The fault recording starts with pickup. When the protection function is
blocked by the inrush-current detection, a fault recording is started never-
theless.
6.20.1.5 Settings

Inrush detect.
_:1 Inrush detect.:Mode • off on
• on
• test
_:106 Inrush detect.:Operat.- 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 7.500 A
range limit Imax 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 37.50 A

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

_:111 Inrush detect.:Blocking • no yes
with CWA
• yes
_:110 Inrush detect.:Blocking • no yes
with 2. harmonic
• yes
_:102 Inrush detect.:2nd 10 % to 45 % 15 %
harmonic content
_:112 Inrush detect.:Cross- • no no
blocking
• yes
_:109 Inrush detect.:Cross- 0.03 s to 200.00 s 0.06 s
blocking time
_:114 Inrush detect.:Start • no yes
flt.rec
• yes

(Type)
Inrush detect.
_:81 Inrush detect.:>Block stage SPS I
_:54 Inrush detect.:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Inrush detect.:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Inrush detect.:Health ENS O
_:300 Inrush detect.:2.harmonic phase A SPS O
_:301 Inrush detect.:2.harmonic phase B SPS O
_:302 Inrush detect.:2.harmonic phase C SPS O
_:305 Inrush detect.:CWA SPS O
_:306 Inrush detect.:Cross-blocking SPS O
_:55 Inrush detect.:Pickup ACD O
6.20.2 2nd Harmonic Ground Detection

The 2nd harmonic to ground detection function:
• Detects the content of 2nd harmonics in the neutral-point phase current IN or in the calculated zero-
sequence current 3I0.
• Generates a blocking signal for protection functions that use the neutral-point phase current IN or the
calculated zero-sequence current 3I0 as a measured value
• Allows a sensitive setting of the protection functions

The following protection functions analyze the blocking signal:
• Overcurrent protection, ground
• Directional sensitive ground-fault detection
• Non-directional sensitive ground-fault detection

The 2nd harmonic ground detection function is not an autonomous protection function. In the connection
process of a transformer, it sends a blocking signal to other protection functions. For this reason, the 2nd

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
harmonic ground detection function must be in the same function group as the Inrush-current detection
function and the functions that are to be blocked.
Logic
[lo_2harm_detec_gnd, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-141 Logic of 2nd Harmonic Detection Ground
Harmonic Analysis
For this method of measurement, the content of the 2nd harmonic and the fundamental component (1st
harmonic) is determined for the neutral-point phase current IN or the calculated zero-sequence current 3I0
and the quotient I2nd harm/I1st harm is formed from this. If this quotient exceeds the set threshold value, a
blocking signal is issued.
NOTE
i During a transformer saturation, the high content of the 2nd harmonic in the ground current must not lead
to a pickup of the function.
NOTE
i If the ground current is measured in case of a sensitive transformer and the measured value exceeds the
saturation threshold of 1.6 ⋅ IN, the function switches to the calculated 3I0 value.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[lo_harmon-analyse, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-142 Logic of the Harmonic Analysis Function
• Default setting = (_:9) Measured value = IN measured

IN measured The function evaluates the measured neutral-point phase current IN.
3I0 calculated The function evaluates the calculated zero-sequence current 3I0.
Parameter: 2nd harmonic content
• Default setting (_:102) 2nd harmonic content = 15 %

With the parameter 2nd harmonic content, you can specify the percentage content of the 2nd harmonic
in IN measured or in 3I0 calculated at which the inrush-current detection is blocked internally.
6.20.2.5 Settings

2.hrm.det. gnd
_:1 2.hrm.det. gnd:Mode • off on
• on
• test
_:9 2.hrm.det. gnd:Meas- • 3I0 calculated IN measured
ured value
• IN measured
_:102 2.hrm.det. gnd:2nd 10 % to 45 % 15 %
harmonic content

(Type)
2.hrm.det. gnd
_:81 2.hrm.det. gnd:>Block stage SPS I
_:51 2.hrm.det. gnd:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:54 2.hrm.det. gnd:Inactive SPS O
_:52 2.hrm.det. gnd:Behavior ENS O

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

(Type)
_:53 2.hrm.det. gnd:Health ENS O
_:55 2.hrm.det. gnd:Pickup ACD O

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
6.21 Temperature Supervision

The Temperature supervision function checks the thermal state of the equipment.
The temperatures are measured at various locations of the protected object using temperature sensors (RTD =
Resistance Temperature Detector) and are sent to the device via one or more RTD units.
The Temperature supervision function receives its measured temperature values via the RTD unit Ether. or
Serial RTD unit functions from the Analog units function group.
If the function is implemented in the busbar protection, it must be inserted in the device from the Global
Library (7SS85 Busbar protection > FG busbar > Temperature supervision ).
The Temperature supervision function can work in all protection function groups. A maximum of 48 temper-
ature supervision locations can operate simultaneously in the Temperature supervision function. Each
temperature supervision location has 2 threshold stages.
A detailed description of the Temperature supervision is in the system manual Distance protection, line
differential protection and switch management for 1-pole and 3-pole tripping 7SA87, 7SD87, 7SL87, 7VK87.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
6.22 Voltage-Jump Detection
The Voltage-jump detection function has the following tasks:
• Recognition of jumps in the phase or zero-sequence voltage (ΔV)
• Generation of an indication when the measurands change by more than a configured threshold value
from one system cycle to the next.
The function for detecting jumps in the phase or zero-sequence voltage is an additional function used for indi-
cation purposes or for further processing in user-specific CFC logics. Pick up of the function therefore neither
opens a separate fault in the fault log nor generates an operate indication.
The Voltage-jump detection function is used in protection function groups based on voltage measurement. It
can be instantiated multiple times.
[dw_struku, 1, en_US]
Voltage-jump detection operates directly with the sampled values without numeric filtering. This provides very
short response times to sudden changes in the voltage. The method used is not sensitive to slow changes of
amplitude or frequency.
By using a configurable selection of measured values, you can select from phase-to-ground voltages, phase-to-
phase voltages or the zero-sequence voltage. Voltage-jump detection is phase-selective.
The difference from the previous sampled value of a system cycle is calculated for each sampled value. The
rectified average is then determined for a ½ system cycle from this differential signal Δv(t). The rectified
average for sinusoidal measurands is then converted to a RMS value ΔV by subsequent multiplication by 1.11.
The resultant measurand ΔV is then compared with the threshold value.
If the parameter (_:101) Threshold is exceeded, the output indication Jump is generated. If the measured
value is set to phase-to-phase, the sudden change in voltage is signaled selectively for the individual meas-
uring elements that have picked up (Jump VAB, Jump VBC or Jump VCA). If you have selected the phase-to-
phase or phase-to-ground voltages for measurement, the output indication data type used includes the sepa-
rate phase information. If you have selected the zero-sequence voltage for measurement, the output indica-
tion data type used includes the N information. If the voltage-jump detection responds (ΔVLimit), the general
information is generated in the output indication in all cases.
Dropout occurs with a dynamically increased threshold value ΔULimit in accordance with the information in
Figure 6-144. Dynamic increase of the dropout threshold value achieves optimally short dropout times.
A timing element is added to the indication Jump. The element generates a pulse from this. The length of this
pulse can be set using the parameter (_:102) Minimum pulse length. This gives the output indication
Pulse a reliable minimum size. If you activate the binary input >Pulse extension, you can prolong the
pulse duration even further. If the binary input >Pulse extension has been activated, the indication
Pulse drops off when the configured time has elapsed and the falling edge of the binary input is detected. If

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
the measured value is set to phase-to-phase, the pulse duration is signaled selectively for the individual meas-
uring elements that have picked up (Pulse VAB, Pulse VBC or Pulse VCA).
Logic
[lo_jump_uu, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-144 Voltage-Jump Detection Logic
• Default setting (_:9) Measured value = phase-to-ground

With the parameter Measured value , you specify which measured values of voltage are to be used for
determining the voltage jumps.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

phase-to-ground The tripping stage evaluates the phase-to-ground
voltages VA, VB and VC.
phase-to-phase The tripping stage evaluates the phase-to-phase
voltages VAB, VBC and VCA.
zero-sequence voltage The tripping stage evaluates the zero-sequence
voltage VN/V0.

With the parameter Threshold , you set the threshold value for the measurand which, when exceeded,
generates the output indication Jump .
Parameter: Minimum pulse length
• Default setting (_:102) Minimum pulse length = 0.10 s

With the parameter Minimum pulse length , you specify a consistent minimum size for the output indica-
tion Pulse .
6.22.5 Settings

V-jump det. #
_:1 V-jump det. #:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:9 V-jump det. #:Measured • phase-to-ground phase-to-ground
value
• phase-to-phase
• zero-sequence voltage
_:101 V-jump det. #:Threshold 0.300 V to 340.000 V 5.000 V
_:101 V-jump det. #:Threshold 0.300 V to 340.000 V 5.000 V
_:102 V-jump det. #:Minimum 0.01 s to 60.00 s 0.10 s
pulse length

(Type)
V-jump det. #
_:81 V-jump det. #:>Block stage SPS I
_:501 V-jump det. #:>Pulse extension SPS I
_:54 V-jump det. #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 V-jump det. #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 V-jump det. #:Health ENS O
_:301 V-jump det. #:Jump ACT O
_:302 V-jump det. #:Jump VAB SPS O
_:303 V-jump det. #:Jump VBC SPS O
_:304 V-jump det. #:Jump VCA SPS O

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

(Type)
_:305 V-jump det. #:Pulse ACT O
_:306 V-jump det. #:Pulse VAB SPS O
_:307 V-jump det. #:Pulse VBC SPS O
_:308 V-jump det. #:Pulse VCA SPS O

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
6.23 Voltage Measuring-Point Selection
6.23 Voltage Measuring-Point Selection
The function block Voltage measuring-point selection can:
• Provide the ability to switchover the voltage measuring points to be applied, if various voltage measuring
points are connected to the voltage interface of the function group
• Select the correct voltage based on the switch position of the plant
If more than one voltage measuring points are connected to the same voltage interface of the function group,
use the Voltage measuring-point selection function block in the function group to select the correct voltage
based on the switch position of the plant.
The Voltage measuring-point selection is a common functionality for the function groups of the protected
objects.
6.23.2 Further Information
You find detailed description in the device manual Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and
Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping 7SA87, 7SD87, 7SL87, 7VK87.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
7 Control Functions
7.1 Introduction 694

7.2 Switching Devices 697
7.3 Switching Sequences 714
7.4 Control Functionality 721
7.5 User-Defined Function Block [Control] 747
7.6 CFC-Chart Settings 752
7.7 Voltage Controller 755

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Control Functions
7.1 Introduction
7.1 Introduction
7.1.1 Overview
The SIPROTEC 5 series of devices offers powerful command processing capability as well as additional func-
tions that are needed when serving as bay controllers for the substation automation technology or when
providing combi-protection. The object model for the devices is based on the IEC 61850 standard, making the
SIPROTEC 5 series of devices ideally suited for use in systems employing the IEC 61850 communication
protocol. In view of the function blocks necessary for the control functions, other logs are also used.
7.1.2 Concept of Controllables
The concept of so-called controllables is based on the data model described in IEC 61850. Controllables are
objects that can be controlled, such as a switch with feedback. The model of a circuit breaker, for example,
contains controllables. The controllables are identifiable by their last letter C of the data type (for example,
DPC = Double Point Controllable/Double Command with feedback).

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Control Functions
7.1 Introduction
[sc_control, 1, en_US]
(1) Position (connect with binary inputs)

(2) Signalization of the current condition
(3) Command output (connect with relay)
The trip, opening, and the close commands are connected to the relays. For the trip command, a choice
between saved and unsaved output is possible. The position is connected with 2 binary inputs (double-point
indication). In addition, signals are available that display the current state of the switch (not selected, off, on,
intermediate position, disturbed position). These signals can be queried in CFC, for example, in order to
build interlocking conditions.
Control Models
You can set the operating mode of the controllables by selecting the control model.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Control Functions
7.1 Introduction
4 different control models are available:
• Direct without feedback monitoring (direct w. normal secur.)
• With reservation (SBO)24 without feedback monitoring (SBO w. normal secur.)
• Direct with feedback monitoring (direct w. enh. security)
• With SBO with feedback monitoring (SBO w. enh. security)

The next figure shows the command sources, command types, and control models.
[dw_steuer, 2, en_US]
Figure 7-1 Command Sources, Command Types, and Control Models
The figure shows the control models (right) with the respective control mechanisms (center). The standard
control model for a switching command in an IEC 61850 compliant system is SBO with feedback monitoring
(SBO w. enh. security). This control model is the default setting for newly created switching devices.
24 SBO: Select Before Operate

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices
7.2.1 Overview
The following switching devices are located in the DIGSI 5 library under the Circuit breaker 1-/3-pole and the
Circuit breaker 3-pole function groups.
[sc_cb13sw, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-2 Selection of the Switching Device Circuit Breaker 1/3-Pole
[sc_cb3swi, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-3 Selection of the Switching Device Circuit Breaker 3-Pole
NOTE
i The offered switching device disconnector (only status indication) cannot be controlled in the busbar
protection device.
[sc_trnosw, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-4 Select the Switching Device Disconnector
7.2.2 Switching Device Circuit Breaker
7.2.2.1 Structure of the Circuit-Breaker Switching Device

The Circuit-breaker function group has already been described in the chapter 5.3.6.1 Overview. The chapter
focuses on linking to the measured values and the protection functions.
This chapter describes the control properties of the Circuit-breaker switching device.
The Circuit-breaker switching device contains the following function blocks that are needed for control:
• Function block Circuit breaker
• Function block Control
• Function block Interlocking

This corresponds to the logical nodes XCBR, CSWI, and CILO in IEC 61850.
In the case of protection devices or combined protection and control devices, additional functions can be
contained in the Circuit-breaker switching device, for example Synchrocheck, Automatic reclosing (AREC),
or Trip logic. For a description of these functions, refer to Protection.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Control Functions
[dw_breake, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-5 Control Function Blocks of the Circuit-Breaker Switching Device
The circuit breaker in DIGSI 5 is linked with the binary inputs that acquire the switch position via information
routing. The circuit breaker in DIGSI 5 is also linked with the binary outputs that issue the switching
commands.
The Circuit-breaker switching device is available in the DIGSI 5 library in 2 different variants:
• 1-pole/3-pole circuit breaker

This switching device is intended for 3-pole tripping via the protection functions and additionally for 1-
pole trip repeats by an external start of the Circuit-breaker failure protection. The basic functions, such
as Inherent circuit-breaker failure protection, Circuit-breaker test, or Circuit-breaker monitoring are
available in the switching device.
• 3-pole circuit breaker

This switching device is intended for 3-pole tripping via the protection functions and contains the same
base function blocks for protection as the 1-pole/3-pole circuit breaker switching device.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Control Functions
Function Blocks of the Circuit Breaker
Table 7-1 Function Blocks of the Circuit-Breaker Function Group
Function Description Parameter Function

Block
Circuit The Circuit-breaker function Output time The circuit breaker forms the
breaker block in the SIPROTEC 5 switch position from the posi-
device represents the physical tions of the binary inputs and
switch. also outputs the command via
the binary outputs.
Control Command processing Control model Command check, communica-
SBO time-out tion with the command
Feedback monitoring time source and with the function
block Circuit breaker
Check switching
authority
Check if pos. is reached
Check double activat.
blk.
Check blk. by protection
Inter- Switchgear interlocking Interlocking condition (depos- The Interlocking functionality
locking protection ited in CFC) generates the releases for
switchgear interlocking
protection.
For the setting values of the parameter, refer to 7.2.2.2 Application and Setting Notes.
Additional Setting Options of the Circuit-Breaker Switching Element

The setting options of the circuit breaker are assigned to the function blocks on the basis of their relevance.
Additional setting options of the circuit breakers that cannot be directly assigned to one of the 3 function
blocks are nevertheless available:
Table 7-2 Setting Options of the Controllable Command with Feedback in the Control Function
Block of the Circuit Breaker.
Properties Function To Be Found in

Software filtering time Software filtering time for position Position of the Control function
detection block 25
Retrigger filter (yes/no) Switching retriggering of the Position of the Control function
filtering time on/off by changing block25
the position
Message time before Consideration of the hardware Position of the Control function
filtering (yes/no) filtering time for position-detection block25
time stamp
Suppress intermediate When activated, only the inter- Position of the Control function
position (yes/no) mediate position is suppressed by block25
the duration of the software
filtering time.
25 First click Position and then click the Details key in the Properties window (below).

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Control Functions

Treatment of spontaneous If you select the General soft- Position of the Control function
position changes (Gen. Soft- ware filter setting, the general block25
ware Filt./Spont. Software Filt.) settings for software filtering of
spontaneous position changes and
for position changes caused by a
switching command apply. By
selecting Spontaneous soft-
ware filter, a separate filtering
is activated for spontaneous posi-
tion changes.
Spontaneous software Software filtering time for sponta- Position of the Control function
filtering time neous position changes block25
Spontaneous retrigger Switching on/off retriggering of the Position of the Control function
filter (yes/no) filtering time by spontaneous posi- block25
tion change
Spontaneous indication Consideration of the hardware Position of the Control function
timestamp before filtering filtering time for position-detection block25
(yes/no) time stamp in case of a sponta-
neous change
Inhibit intermediate posi- When activated, only the sponta- Position of the Control function
tion for a spontaneous neous change to the intermediate block25
chng. (yes/no) position is suppressed by the dura-
tion of the software filtering time.
Table 7-3 Setting Options of the Controllable Position in the Circuit-Breaker Function Block (Chatter
Blocking)

Chatter blocking (yes/no) Switching chatter blocking on/off Position of the Circuit-breaker
function block25
Table 7-4 Additional Settings in the Device Settings Having Effects on the Circuit Breaker

Number of permissible Chatter-blocking setting value: Device settings (to be found under
status changes Once for the entire device Settings)
Chatter test time
Number of chatter tests
Chatter idle time
Chatter check time
The inputs and outputs as well as the setting options of the Circuit-breaker and Control function blocks are
described in the next section (refer to 7.2.2.3 Connection Variants of the Circuit Breaker).
Interlocking
The Interlocking function block generates the releases for switchgear interlocking protection. The actual
interlocking conditions are deposited in CFC.
Circuit Breaker
The Circuit-breaker function block in the SIPROTEC 5 device represents the physical switch device. The task of
the circuit breaker is to replicate the switch position from the status of the binary inputs.
The following figure shows the logical inputs and outputs of the Circuit-breaker function block.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Control Functions
[dw_func_ls, 2, en_US]
Figure 7-6 Logical Inputs and Outputs of the Circuit-Breaker Function Blocks
Table 7-5 and Table 7-6 list the inputs and outputs with a description of their function and type. For inputs,
the effect of Quality = invalid on the value of the signal is described.
EXAMPLE
If the signal >Ready has the Quality = invalid, then the value is set to cleared. In problematic operating
states, the circuit breaker should signal that it is not ready for an Off-On-Off cycle.
Table 7-5 Inputs of the Circuit-Breaker Function Block
Signal Name Description Type Default Value if

Signal Quality =
invalid
>Ready The signal >Ready indicates that the OFF-ON-OFF SPS Going
cycle is possible with the circuit breaker.
This signal is used for the AREC standby status.
>Acquisition The binary input activates acquisition blocking. You SPS Unchanged
blocking can also set this binary input with an external toggle
switch.
>Reset Acquisition blocking and the substitution of the circuit SPS Unchanged
AcqBlk&Subst breaker are reset with this input. If the input is acti-
vated, setting the acquisition blocking and the substi-
tution is blocked.
>Reset switch Among other things, the binary input sets the opera- SPS Unchanged
statist. tion counter for the switch to the value 0.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Control Functions
Signal Name Description Type Default Value if

Signal Quality =
invalid
External health The binary input External health reflects the ENS Unchanged
circuit-breaker status (EHealth).
This input will be set by the CFC using the BUILD_ENS
block. In turn, BUILD_ENS can query binary inputs that
represent the conditions OK, Warning, or Alarm (as
a result of the function Trip-circuit supervision).
Position The signal Position can be used to read the circuit- DPC Unchanged
breaker position with double-point indication.
If the quality of the input signal assumes the status Quality = invalid, then the standby status (EHealth) of the
Circuit-breaker function block is set to Warning.
Table 7-6 Outputs of the Circuit-Breaker Function Block
Signal Name Description Type

Definitive trip Protection has finally been tripped. SPS
Alarm suppression The signaling contact for external alarm inhibition is suppressed during SPS
the runtime of automatic reclosing (optional) as well as during the
command output of switching commands.
Op.ct. The information counts the number of switching cycles of the circuit INS
breaker.
Trip/open cmd. This logic output is responsible for the command output Off. SPS
Close command This logic output is responsible for the command output On. SPS
Command active The binary output Command active is responsible for signaling a SPS
running command (relay active or selected switching device (SEL)).
CB open hours The statistical value counts the hours the circuit breaker is open. INS
Operating hours The statistical value counts the hours where at least one phase current is INS
greater than the Current thresh. CB open parameter.
Control
It is the task of the controls to execute command checks and establish communication between the command
source and the circuit breaker. Using the control settings, you specify how the commands are to be processed.
Through the function SBO (Select Before Operate, reservation26), the switching device is reserved prior to the
actual switching operation, thus it remains locked for additional commands. Feedback monitoring provides
information about the initiator of the command while the command is in process, that means, informing
whether or not the command was implemented successfully. These 2 options can be selected individually in
the selection of the control model, so that 4 combinations in total are available (see the following table).
The control makes the following settings available (see next table).
Parameters Default Setting Possible Parameter Values
(_:4201:101) Control model SBO w. enh. direct w. normal secur.
security27 SBO w. normal secur.
direct w. enh. security
SBO w. enh. security
(_:4201:102) SBO time-out 30.00 s 0.01 s to 1800 s
(Increment: 0.01 s)
(_:4201:103) Feedback monitoring time 1.00 s 0.01 s to 1800 s
(Increment: 0.01 s)
26 In the IEC 61850 standard, reservation is described as Select before Operate (SBO).
27 This default setting is the standard control model for a switching command in an IEC 61850-compliant system.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Control Functions
Parameters Default Setting Possible Parameter Values

(_:4201:104) Check switching authority yes no
yes
advanced
(_:4201:105) Check if pos. is reached yes no
yes
(_:4201:106) Check double activat. blk. yes no
yes
(_:4201:107) Check blk. by protection yes no
yes
The following figure shows the logical inputs and outputs of the Control function block.
[dw_steue1, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-7 Logical Inputs and Outputs of the Control Function Block
Table 7-7 Control Function Block Input and Output
Signal Description Type Value if Signal

Name Quality=Invalid
Cmd. with With the Cmd. with feedback signal, the circuit- Controllable Unchanged
feedback breaker position is accepted via the double-point indi- (DPC)
cation of the Circuit-breaker function block and the Unchanged
command is issued.
In the information routing of DIGSI 5, you may select a function key as a possible command source. In addi-
tion, it is displayed here if the command is activated by CFC. The logging is routed here.
7.2.2.3 Connection Variants of the Circuit Breaker

For each switching device, you can establish the number of poles (for example, 1-pole, 1.5-pole or 2-pole)
that are switched with or without feedback. This results in the necessary amount of information to be
processed, thus establishing the command type.
Whether the circuit breaker is triggered 1-, 1.5-, or 2-pole, depends on the design of the auxiliary and control-
voltage system. In most cases, the activation of the opening coil of the circuit breaker is 1-pole.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Control Functions
Table 7-8 Meaning of the Abbreviations of the Connection Variants
Abbreviation Meaning of the Abbreviation of the Connection Variants

BO Binary output
L+; L- Control voltage
A Trip command
Gnd Close command
Table 7-9 Meaning of the Abbreviations in DIGSI
Abbreviation Description of the Input in DIGSI

V Unsaved trip command
Click the right mouse button and enter V.
X Close Command
Click the right mouse button and enter X for the respective binary output.
OH The switching-device feedback is in the position OFF, if there is voltage present at the
routed binary input (H).
Click the right mouse button and enter OH.
OL The switching-device feedback is in the position OFF, if there is no voltage present at
the routed binary input (L).
Click the right mouse button and enter OL.
CH The switching-device feedback is in the position ON, if there is voltage present at the
routed binary input (H).
Click the right mouse button and enter CH.
CL The switching-device feedback is in the position ON, if there is no voltage present at
the routed binary input (H).
Click the right mouse button and enter CL.
TL Trip command stored
Click the right mouse button and enter TL.
NOTE
i If not further described, in the following figures and tables, the 1/3-pole circuit breaker is always shown.
For a circuit breaker with only 3-poles, the following phase-selective features are omitted:
• The inputs for the phase-selective evaluation of the circuit-breaker position.
• The commands for the phase-selective evaluation of the circuit-breaker position.
• The corresponding tripping for the phases A, B, and C.
Connection Variant: 3-Pole Circuit Breaker

This is the standard type for the control function. All 3 individual poles of the circuit breaker are triggered
together by a double command.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Control Functions
[dw_3-pole_ls, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-8 3-Pole Circuit Breaker
1-Pole Triggering
[dw_1-pole, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-9 1-Pole Triggering

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Control Functions
[sc_ro1pol, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-10 1-Pole Triggering, Routing in DIGSI
You can select the contacts for On and Off as desired. They need not necessarily be next to one another. The
letter U represents an unlatched command. Alternatively, TL (latched tripping) can be selected.
1.5-Pole Triggering
[dw_5-pole, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-11 1.5-Pole Triggering

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Control Functions
[sc_r15pol, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-12 1.5-Pole Triggering, Routing in DIGSI
2-Pole Triggering
[dw_2-pole-open, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-13 2-Pole Triggering

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Control Functions
[sc_ro2pol, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-14 2-Pole Triggering, Routing in DIGSI
Connection Variant: 1-Pole Circuit Breaker

The 1-pole circuit breaker is used for separate activation and acquisition of the individual poles of a circuit
breaker. It is intended for use by 1-pole control functions in the busbar protection devices. You can set param-
eters for the 1-pole protection triggering (trip repeat) via the Circuit-breaker failure protection and route in
the information routing directly to the command relay.
NOTE
i The wiring of the Circuit-breaker function group with binary inputs and binary outputs occurs once per
device , see 5.3.6.1 Overview .
The control function in this type switches all 3 poles on or off simultaneously.
The close command is always 3-pole. Optionally, only the open poles are closed.
[dw_1polls, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-15 Circuit Breaker with 1-Pole Triggering

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Control Functions
For the circuit breaker with 1-pole triggering, triggering takes place via one relay per phase for the trip
command and via a 4th relay for the close command (see next figure).
[dw_1panls, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-16 1-Pole Connection of a Circuit Breaker
[sc_rang_1p_cb13pz, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-17 Routing in DIGSI
In the previous figure, the switch is connected 1-pole. The protection trip command is routed for the 3 phases
(Trip/open cmd. 3-pole). The control always switches off the 3 poles of the switch. In addition, the 3 U
(Unlatched) routings of the trip and open command are set to 3-pole. This routing is also used by protection
functions that trip 3 poles. The close command is issued simultaneously for all 3 phases.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Control Functions
Example: Trip Command during Transition from 1-Pole to 3-Pole

During a transition from 1-pole to 3-pole tripping, Trip only pole A remains active. To inform, for
example, an external AREC whether it is a 1-pole or 3-pole trip, you can use the indication Trip
logic:Trip indication:1-pole and Trip logic:Trip indication:3-pole.
[dw_trip-command_between_1p-3p, 1, en_US]
Acquisition of the Circuit-Breaker Position

The binary inputs for feedback of the switch position are routed as shown in the previous figure (also see
chapter 5.3.6.3 Acquisition of Circuit-Breaker Auxiliary Contacts and Further Information ).
[sc_ra13po, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-18 1-Pole/3-Pole Circuit Breaker: Routing of the 1-Pole in DIGSI

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Control Functions
[sc_ra3po, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-19 3-Pole Circuit Breaker: Routing in DIGSI
You can find the meaning of the abbreviations in Table 7-8 and Table 7-9.
The indication Command active can also be routed to a binary output. This binary output is always active if
either a close or trip command is pending, or the switching device was selected by the command control.
7.2.2.4 More Information

You can find a more detailed description of the following items, for example, in the device manual High-
voltage bay controller 6MD85/86 in the chapter Control functions:
• Control Functionality
• User-Defined Function Block
• Logic Block Chart Settings
7.2.2.5 Settings

Circuit break.
_:4261:101 Circuit break.:Output time 0.02 s to 1800.00 s 0.10 s
Control
_:4201:101 Control:Control model • status only SBO w. enh.
security
_:4201:102 Control:SBO time-out 0.01 s to 1800.00 s 30.00 s
_:4201:103 Control:Feedback moni- 0.01 s to 1800.00 s 1.00 s
toring time
_:4201:104 Control:Check switching • no yes
authority
• yes
_:4201:105 Control:Check if pos. is • no yes
reached
• yes
_:4201:106 Control:Check double • no yes
activat. blk.
• yes
_:4201:107 Control:Check blk. by • no yes
protection
• yes

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Control Functions

CB test
_:6151:101 CB test:Dead time 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.10 s

(Type)
Trip logic
_:5341:300 Trip logic:Trip indication ACT O
_:5341:58 Trip logic:Trip ind.:Busbar diff.prt. ACT O
_:5341:59 Trip logic:Trip ind.:Busbar BFP ACT O
_:5341:60 Trip logic:Trip ind.:Busbar ext.trip ACT O
Circuit break.
_:4261:500 Circuit break.:>Ready PLC I
_:4261:501 Circuit break.:>Acquisition blocking PLC I
_:4261:502 Circuit break.:>Reset switch statist. PLC I
_:4261:504 Circuit break.:>Reset AcqBlk&Subst PLC I
_:4261:300 Circuit break.:Trip/open cmd. 3-pole PLC O
_:4261:301 Circuit break.:Close command PLC O
_:4261:302 Circuit break.:Command active PLC O
_:4261:303 Circuit break.:Definitive trip PLC O
_:4261:304 Circuit break.:Alarm suppression PLC O
_:4261:317 Circuit break.:Break. current 3I0/IN MV O
_:4261:314 Circuit break.:Break. voltage phs A MV O
_:4261:315 Circuit break.:Break. voltage phs B MV O
_:4261:316 Circuit break.:Break. voltage phs C MV O
_:4261:322 Circuit break.:CB open hours INS O
_:4261:323 Circuit break.:Operating hours INS O
Manual close
_:6541:501 Manual close:>Block manual close PLC I
_:6541:500 Manual close:>Input PLC I
_:6541:300 Manual close:Detected PLC O
Reset LED Group
_:13381:500 Reset LED Group:>LED reset PLC I
_:13381:320 Reset LED Group:LED have been reset PLC O
Control
_:4201:503 Control:>Sw. authority local PLC I

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Control Functions

(Type)
_:4201:504 Control:>Sw. authority remote PLC I
_:4201:505 Control:>Sw. mode interlocked PLC I
_:4201:506 Control:>Sw. mode non-interl. PLC I
_:4201:53 Control:Health ENS O
_:4201:58 Control:Cmd. with feedback DPC C
_:4201:302 Control:Switching auth. station SPC C
_:4201:308 Control:Enable sw. auth. 1 SPC C
_:4201:313 Control:Switching authority ENS O
_:4201:314 Control:Switching mode ENS O
Interlocking
_:4231:500 Interlocking:>Enable opening PLC I
_:4231:501 Interlocking:>Enable closing PLC I
_:4231:502 Interlocking:>Enable opening(fixed) PLC I
_:4231:503 Interlocking:>Enable closing (fixed) PLC I
_:4231:53 Interlocking:Health ENS O
CB test
_:6151:53 CB test:Health ENS O
_:6151:301 CB test:Test execution ENS O
_:6151:302 CB test:Trip command issued ENS O
_:6151:303 CB test:Close command issued ENS O
_:6151:304 CB test:Test canceled ENS O
_:6151:311 CB test:3-pole open-close SPC C

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Control Functions
7.3 Switching Sequences
Switching sequences may be running inside the device that switch the switchgear automatically in a prespeci-
fied sequence.
A switching sequence consists of a special function block Switching sequence (Swi. seq.) from the DIGSI 5
Library and the project-specific list of the switching commands that are generated in the CFC.
The function block Switching sequence is located in folder User-defined functions in the DIGSI 5 Library.
[sc_udeffb, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-20 Function Block Switching Sequence in the Library
These function blocks can be used in the information matrix on the highest level (level of the function groups)
or in a user-defined function group.
One Switching sequence function block is used per switching sequence. The function block is the interface
for controlling and monitoring the condition of the CFC switching sequence. The task of the function block is
to verify the relative conditions for control commands, for example, switching authority, interlocking condi-
tions, etc. You can connect the signals of the function block with the CFC chart. They start and stop the
switching sequence and provide data about the status of the switching sequence (see Figure 7-21). The CFC
chart is used to activate the switching device that must be switched. The CFC blocks define, among other
things, the switching devices that must be switched.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Control Functions
[dw_swseq1, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-21 Switching Sequence Function Block
Starting and Canceling a Switching Sequence

One of the following methods can be used to start a switching sequence:
• On-site operation: menu or display page
• Input >Start during rising edge, for example, via binary input
• Controllable Start for the start via a communication protocol, for example, IEC 61850, T103, or DNP
• Input >Start via a function key
• Controllable Start via a function key

One of the following methods can be used to cancel a switching sequence:
• On-site operation: menu or display page
• Input >Cancel during rising edge, for example, via binary input
• Controllable Cancel for the cancelation via a communication protocol, for example, IEC 61850, T103, or
DNP
• Input >Cancel via a function key
• Controllable Cancel via a function key
On-Site Operation
If at least one Switching sequence function block is used in the device, a new Switching sequences entry is
shown in the first line of the Control menu. If this menu item is selected, an overview of all switching
sequences and the current status will be displayed (see Figure 7-22, example with 2 switching sequences).
You can start or cancel the switching sequences from this menu.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Control Functions
Figure 7-22
Overview of the Switching Sequences on the Device Display
The function block offers similar settings to the Control function block of a circuit breaker or disconnector (see
chapter 7.2.1 Overview).
[sc_ccs4pa, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-23 Settings of the Switching Sequence Function Block
Parameter: Check switching authority
• Default setting (_:101) Check switching authority = yes

With the Check switching authority parameter, you can determine whether the switching authority
should be checked before the execution of the switching sequence.
Parameter: Check double activat. blk.
• Default setting (_:102) Check double activat. blk. = yes

With the Check double activat. blk. parameter, you can determine whether the double activation of
switching devices should be checked. The setting value yes indicates that a switching sequence will be
started only if no switching commands for a circuit breaker and disconnector are active, provided that double-
activation blocking was activated for those switching devices.
Parameter: Time-out monitoring
With the Time-out monitoring parameter, you can determine whether the feedback from the process
should be evaluated. The feedback is gathered via the inputs >Successful and >Failed.
Parameter: Monitoring time
• Default setting (_:104) Monitoring time = 30.00 s

With the Monitoring time parameter, you can determine the duration of the monitoring time.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Control Functions
Parameter: Control model
• Default setting (_:105) Control model = SBO w. normal secur.

With the Control model parameter, you select between direct w. normal secur. or SBO w.
normal secur. to start the switching sequence.
It is not possible to set a control model for cancelation of the switching sequence. The control model direct
w. normal secur. is always used to cancel the function.
Information
The Switching sequence function block provides the following data:
[sc_infof1, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-24 Data Provided by the Switching Sequence Function Block
In the Switching sequence function block, the interlocking is analog to the Interlocking function block and it
is possible to use it in the switching sequence:
• >Enable start: Connection to interlocking conditions (CFC) for the start of the entire switching
sequence. Not in effect in the non-interlocked switching mode.
• >Enable start (fixed): Non-revocable interlocking conditions for the start of the entire switching
sequence. In effect regardless of the switching mode.
If the time-out monitoring is activated (parameter Time-out monitoring), the process feedback must take
place via the inputs >Successful and >Failed. If the last switching command of the switching sequence
was executed successfully, the input >Successful usually is set. To do this, connect the feedback of the last
switching command from the CFC with this input of the function block during the device parameterization.
If a switching command fails, this feedback can be captured by the input >Failed. The active switching
sequence will be ended immediately and does not have to wait for a time-out.
The indication Execution signals the current state of the switching sequence. The events running,
canceled, failed, and successful are generated only while the time-out monitoring is activated. The
event Start Trigger is used to start the switching sequence in the CFC chart.
Example for a Switching Sequence with CFC

The following figure shows a single-line diagram for a substation with 4 bays: Busbar grounding, infeed, bus-
coupler circuit-breaker, and feeder bay.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Control Functions
[dw_bspunt, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-25 Example of a Substation
The switching sequence C4 Off (Figure 7-26) should switch off feeder bay C4. The circuit breaker is opened;
followed by opening of one of the 2 busbar disconnectors.
[sc_ssc4as, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-26 CFC Switching Sequence C4 Off

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Control Functions
Command Execution
As described in section Starting and Canceling a Switching Sequence, Page 715, the display page or the
Control menu can be used to start the switching sequence. The Start Trigger signal for indication
Execution is used to recognize the start and initiates the switching sequence by pickup of TRIG in the DPC-
DEF building block of circuit breaker QA1. Building blocks DPC-DEF and DPC-EXE are always used in pairs. The
DEF building block controls the type and nature of the command
• VAL = Switching direction (0 = Off, 1 = On)
• SELECT = Select switching device (2 = Select with a value suitable for the preset control model SBO w.
enh. security)
• OPERATE = Switch switching device (1 = Switching device is switched on or off)

Using the connected DPC-EXE building block, the command checks can be deactivated (REL_...). In the appli-
cation example, all inputs are set to 0 and therefore, all checks are activated.
After the open command of circuit breaker QA1 is acknowledged via the auxiliary contacts, the OK output of
the CFC block DPC_EXE becomes active and triggers the next switching object. With the input PT the signal for
the OK output is time-delayed (in the example by 10 ms) and creates a dead time between individual
switching commands and the switching sequence. This dead time is important for the updating of the inter-
locking conditions.
If QB1 is closed, QB1 will be opened. If QB2 is closed, QB2 will be opened. In order to implement this logic, the
OK output signal of QA1 is linked with the respective positions of circuit breakers QB1 and QB2 via the logical
AND function. This signal serves as a trigger for the trip command of QB1 or QB2.
Because in this example the time-out monitoring is activated, the feedback about the successful or unsuc-
cessful execution of the switching sequence must be parameterized. The Switching sequence function block
provides the inputs >Successful and >Failed. In order to acknowledge the entire switching sequence
positively, the OR operation of the OK outputs for the disconnectors QB1 and QB2 is sufficient. The feedback
of all failed executions takes place via the OR operation of all ERR outputs of the switching devices. The
benefit of such assessment is the fact that, in case of a failure, waiting for the time-out is not necessary, but
the active switching sequence can be ended immediately.
In this example, the use of the EN_I input of building block DPC-DEF fulfills 2 tasks:
• Cancelation of the entire switching sequence
• Resetting of the outputs OK and ERR on building block DPC-EXE

By linking all EN_I inputs and EN_O outputs of building blocks DPC-DEF and DPC-EXE, the execution of the
switching sequence can be controlled centrally since the value is transmitted between the building blocks.
Only if input EN_I on the DPC-EXE is set to 1, a switching command is issued. If the input drops back to 0 while
a command is being processed, this command will be canceled. With this behavior, cancelation of an entire
switching sequence can be achieved. As recognition of a cancelation, the canceled signal of the indication
Execution is used in the CFC chart and connected with the input EN_I of the first switching device, in this
example, with the DPC-DEF building block of circuit breaker QA1.
Since the OK and ERR outputs of the DPC-EXE building block maintain their value until execution of the next
command, it is necessary to reset the continuous output after each execution of the switching sequence for
correct execution of the entire CFC switching sequence multiple times. In this case, the use of the EN_I input
is also helpful. In the input drops back to 0, the OK and ERR outputs are also reset to 0. The triggers for ending
the switching sequence are the events failed and successful. For this reason, in the above example, the
signals failed and successful of the indication Execution were connected with EN_I of the DPC-DEF
building block.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Control Functions
7.3.4 Settings

Swi. seq. #
_:101 Swi. seq. #:Check • no yes
switching authority
• yes
• advanced
_:102 Swi. seq. #:Check double • no yes
activat. blk.
• yes
_:103 Swi. seq. #:Time-out • 0 true
monitoring
• 1
_:104 Swi. seq. #:Monitoring 0.02 s to 3600.00 s 30.00 s
time
_:105 Swi. seq. #:Control • direct w. normal secur. SBO w. normal
model secur.
_:106 Swi. seq. #:SBO time-out 0.01 s to 1800.00 s 30.00 s
Switching authority
_:151 Swi. seq. #:Swi.dev. • 0 false
related sw.auth.
• 1
_:152 Swi. seq. #:Specific sw. • 0 true
authorities
• 1
_:115 Swi. seq. #:Specific • station station/remote
sw.auth. valid for
• station/remote
• remote
_:153 Swi. seq. #:Num. of 2 to 5 2
specific sw.auth.
_:154 Swi. seq. #:Multiple • 0 false
specific sw.auth.
• 1

(Type)
Swi. seq. #
_:501 Swi. seq. #:>Enable start SPS I
_:502 Swi. seq. #:>Enable start (fixed) SPS I
_:503 Swi. seq. #:>Start SPS I
_:504 Swi. seq. #:>Cancel SPS I
_:505 Swi. seq. #:>Successful SPS I
_:506 Swi. seq. #:>Failed SPS I
_:53 Swi. seq. #:Health ENS O
_:302 Swi. seq. #:Execution ENS O
_:304 Swi. seq. #:Start SPC C
_:305 Swi. seq. #:Cancel SPC C

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Control Functions
7.4 Control Functionality
7.4.1 Command Checks and Switchgear Interlocking Protection
Before switching commands can be issued by the SIPROTEC 5 device, several steps are used to check the
command:
• Switching mode (interlocked/non-interlocked)
• Switching authority (local/DIGSI/station/remote)
• Switching direction (set=actual)
• Bay interlocking and substation interlocking
• 1-out-of-n check (double-activation blocking)
• Blocking by protection function
Confirmation IDs (with Inactive RBAC)

SIPROTEC 5 devices can operate using role-based access control (RBAC). If RBAC is active in the device, the
authorizations to execute various actions are linked directly to the role concept.
If RBAC is inactive in the device, various actions are secured using the confirmation IDs. The following confir-
mation IDs from the Safety menu apply to the control functions:
[sc_conf, 2, en_US]
Figure 7-27 Confirmation IDs in DIGSI 5: Settings Menu
The following table identifies the meanings of the confirmation IDs:
Table 7-10 Relevant Confirmation IDs for Controls
Confirmation ID Meaning Description

Settings Changing settings The confirmation ID is requested before device
parameters can be changed..
Operation (function keys) Process data access via Access to process data is possible with the help of
function buttons push-buttons and function buttons. The confirma-
tion ID of Set/operation is requested.
Switching General release for control The confirmation ID is usually not needed for bay
of switching devices controllers. In the case of protection devices, this
confirmation ID can be used to safeguard control
of switching devices.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Control Functions
Confirmation ID Meaning Description

Switch./interl.check Switching non-interlocked Switching mode:
Release for switching without querying the inter-
locking conditions (S1 operation). The fixed
interlocking conditions (for example, >Enable
opening(fixed) and >Enable closing
(fixed)) are still queried if this is set in the
parameters.
The confirmation ID is queried only for devices
without a key switch; otherwise it is replaced with
the key switch position.
Switch./switch.auth. Release for switching The confirmation ID is queried only for devices
authority Local without a key switch; otherwise it is replaced with
the key switch position.
The confirmation IDs are preset with the following values:
• Settings 222222
• Switching 333333
• Switch./interl.check 444444
• Switch./switch.auth. 666666
If you have configured a device with key switches, the confirmation IDs for non-interlocked switching and
switching authority are not displayed or editable in DIGSI; the function is handled by the position of the key
switch.
To increase security, change these codes with DIGSI.
Switching Mode (Interlocked/Non-Interlocked)

The switching mode determines whether or not the switchgear interlocking that has been configured in the
CFC is checked before the command is output.
You can change the switching mode with the key switch S1 (interlocking off/normal). For devices without a
key switch, you can change the switching mode with a corresponding menu item on the display (after
entering a confirmation ID). You can also set the switching mode for switching commands from the sources
DIGSI, station or remote.
! DANGER
If the switching mode = non-interlocked, the switchgear interlocking protection is shut off.
Erroneous switching operations can lead to severe or fatal injuries.
² Ensure manually that all checks have been implemented.
In addition, you can set the switching mode directly with a binary input or CFC. Use the General function
block (see next figure).

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Control Functions
[sc_moscha, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-28 Switching Mode in Function Block General
The following table shows the effects of changing the switching mode to use command checks.
Table 7-11 Relationship Between Switching Mode and Command Checks
Command Check Switching Mode

Interlocked Non-Interlocked
Switching authority Checked Checked
Switching direction (set=actual) Checked Checked
Fixed interlocking conditions Checked Checked
Interlocking conditions Checked Not checked
1-out-of-n check (double-activation blocking) Checked Not checked
Blocking by protection function Checked Not checked

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Control Functions
Switching Authority
The switching authority determines which command source is allowed. The following command sources are
possible:
• Local:
A switching command from the local control (cause-of-error source Local) is possible only if the
switching authority is set to Local and the device is capable of on-site operation. Setting the switching
authority to Local is typically accomplished with key switch S5 (Local/Remote). In this case, commands
from all other sources are rejected. If the switching authority is set to Local, the setting cannot be
changed remotely.
• DIGSI:
A switching command from DIGSI (connected via USB or Ethernet, cause-of-error source Maintenance) is
accepted only if the switching authority in the device is set to Remote. Once DIGSI has signed on the
device for command output, no commands from other command sources or a different DIGSI PC will be
executed.
• Station:
This switching authority level can be activated via a parameter in the General function block. A switching
command from the station level (cause-of-error source Station or Automatic station) is accepted if the
switching authority is set to Remote and the controllable Station switching authority is set. This is
accomplished by a command from the substation automation technology. Switching commands from the
device or from outside the station (cause-of-error source Local, Remote or Automatic remote) are
rejected.
Full support of the switching authority level is assured only when using the IEC 61850 protocol.
• Remote:
This switching authority level stands from remote control directly from the network control center or (if
the switching authority level Station is not activated) generally for Remote control. The cause-of-error
source is Automatic remote. Commands from this level are accepted if the switching authority is set to
Remote and the controllable Station switching authority is not set. Switching commands from the
device or from the station (cause-of-error source Local, Station or Automatic station) are rejected.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Control Functions
[sc_moscha, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-29 Display of Switching Authority and Switching Mode in Information Routing (in Function Block
General)
Sw. authority key/set and Sw.mode key/set indicate the current state of the key switch or parameter for
switching authority or switching mode and provide this information for further processing in the CFC. In the
CFC, for example, it is possible to set up an automatic routine to ensure that the switching authority is auto-
matically set to Local when the key switch is set to non-interlocked.
The following table shows the dependency of the switching mode on the key-switch position and the
switching authority. In the case of switching commands from Remote, the information on whether a locked
or non-interlocked switching should take place is also sent. For this reason, the position of the key switch is
irrelevant for the switching mode in these cases. The information in the table assumes that, in the case of
remote switching commands or those from the station, the switching mode is interlocked in each case.
Table 7-12 Dependency of the Switching Mode on the Key-Switch Position and Switching Authority
Switching Authority
Key Switch for Switching Mode Local Remote Station
Interlocked Interlocked Interlocked Interlocked
Not interlocked Non-interlocked Interlocked Interlocked

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Control Functions
The signals shown in Figure 7-29 in DIGSI 5 information routing have the following relationship:
• In terms of switching authority and switching mode, the respective key switch position serves as the
input signal and the input signals in the matrix.
• The state of the switching authority and switching mode is indicated by corresponding output signals.
• The Switching authority and Switching mode functions link the input signals and in this way establish
the output signals (see Figure 7-30 and Figure 7-31).
[dw_authority, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-30 Establishing Switching Authority
[dw_modsch, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-31 Establishing Switching Mode
In the case of both functions, the input signals overwrite the state of the key switch. This allows external
inputs to also set the switching authority or switching mode, if desired (for instance, by querying an external
key switch).

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Control Functions
The following additional settings are available for the switching authority:
• Enable sw.auth. station (defined in IEC 61850 Edition 2):

If you would like to use this switching authority, set the check mark General/Control.
• Multiple sw.auth. levels:

This option permits switching commands from several command sources in the device if the switching
authority Remote is selected. Subsequently, a distinction between these command sources can also be
made. You can find more details in the following table. Activate this option by setting the check mark
General/Control.
• Specific sw. authorities:

You can enable additional options for the switching authority check. For more information, refer to
Specific Switching Authority, Page 728. By default, these are not used.
• Shows interlock.cond. HMI:

You can activate the parameter to show the status of interlocking conditions in the device. For more
information, refer to Specific Switching Authority, Page 728. By default, this parameter is inactive.
[sc_BB_akt_hoh, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-32 How to Activate the Station Switching Authority and to Enable Several Switching-Authority
Levels
Table 7-13 Effect on Switching Authority when Several Switching-Authority Levels Are Enabled with/
without Activation of the Station Switching Authority
Release Several Switching Status of DIGSI Station State of the Resulting

Switching Authority in the in the Device Switching Station Switching
Authority Device Authority Acti- Switching Authority
Levels vated Authority
Local – – – Local
No Signed on – – DIGSI
Remote No – Station and

Not signed on
remote
Yes Set Station
Not set Remote

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Control Functions
Release Several Switching Status of DIGSI Station State of the Resulting

Switching Authority in the in the Device Switching Station Switching
Authority Device Authority Acti- Switching Authority
Levels vated Authority
Local – – – Local
Yes Signed on – – DIGSI
Remote No – Local and station

Not signed on
and remote
Yes Set Local and station
Not set Local and station
and remote
The following table shows the result of the switching-authority check, based on the set switching authority
and the cause of the command. This overview represents a simplified normal case (no multiple command
sources when using Station and Remote).
Table 7-14 Result of a Switching-Authority Check
Cause Source Switching Authority

Local DIGSI Station Remote
Local Release Blocked Blocked Blocked
Station Blocked Blocked Release Blocked
Remote Blocked Blocked Blocked Release
Local automatic Release Release Release Release
operation
Station automatic Blocked Blocked Release Blocked
operation
Remote automatic Blocked Blocked Blocked Release
operation
DIGSI Blocked Release Blocked Blocked
Specific Switching Authority

Special switching authorities can be configured as extension of the switching-authority check. This makes it
possible to differentiate the Remote command sources at the bay level. Switching authority can be routed to
or revoked from different control centers that can, for example, belong to different companies. Thus, precisely
one of these command sources can switch at a certain time. This function is based on extending the
switching-authority check by verifying the identifier of the command source (field Originator/orIdent of
switching command). In order to turn on the function, go to General/Control and set the check mark for the
parameter Specific sw. authorities. More settings for the configuration of the identifiers and the
behavior of the function as well as additional signals appear (see Figure 7-34). In order to permit an additional
command source to switch, you must activate this specific switching authority. In order to do this, set the
controllable Enable sw. auth. 1 to Enable sw. auth. 5.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Control Functions
[sc_act additional options sw authority_BB, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-33 Activating Additional Options of the Switching Authority
The additional parameters allow you to set the following options:
• Specific sw.auth. valid for (for station/remote, only remote or only station):
With this parameter, you determine for which command source the extended switching-authority check
is used.
Table 7-15 Result Derived from the Combination of the Parameter Value Specific sw.auth. valid
for and the Level of the Command Source (Field Originator/orCat of the Switching
Command)
Command Source Specific sw.auth. valid for

station station/remote remote
Local, local automatic No check No check No check
Station, station automatic Check Check No check
Remote, remote auto- No check Check Check
matic
DIGSI No check No check No check
• Num. of specific sw.auth.:

With this parameter, you determine how many specific switching authorities are available. This deter-
mines the number of parameters Identifier switching authority as well as the controllable
Active. Sw. auth..

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Control Functions
• Identifier switching authority 1 to Identifier switching authority 5:

The number of names that appear corresponds to the number set in the previous parameter. You can
select the names as you wish, 1 to 64 characters are allowed. The command check verifies whether these
titles correspond with those sent by the command source. This applies to the switching commands as
well as to the activation of a specific switching authority. The requirement for this is the system interface
IEC 61850. The field Originator/orIdent is used.
• Multiple specific sw.auth. ensures the simultaneous validity of the various command sources.
The following table shows how to determine the resulting specific switching authority when activating
the command sources of Remote or Station. If this parameter is activated, all parameterized command
sources get permissible automatically (see last row in the table) and they cannot be deactivated via the
controllable Enable sw. auth. 1 to Enable sw. auth. 5. Otherwise, the enabled command
source with the lowest number has always the highest priority and prevails against the other numbers.
Table 7-16 Determining Switching Authority if Multiple Command Sources Are Available
Multiple Enable sw. Enable sw. Enable sw. Enable sw. Enable sw. Resulting
specific auth. 1 auth. 2 auth. 3 auth. 4 auth. 5 Specific
sw.auth. Switching
Authority
No On * * * * Switch. auth. 1
No Off On * * * Switch. auth. 2
No Off Off On * * Switch. auth. 3
No Off Off Off On * Switch. auth. 4
No Off Off Off Off On Switch. auth. 5
No Off Off Off Off Off None
Yes On On On On On All
The * symbol in the previous table refers to any value.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Control Functions
[sc_sw authority and mode in info routing, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-34 Display of Switching Authority and Switching Mode in the Information Routing (in Function
Block General), Example of 2 Activated Remote Switching Authorities
Individual Switching Authority and Switching Mode for the Switching Devices
In a standard case, the functionalities switching authority, switching mode, and specific switching authority as
described in the previous sections, are applicable to the entire bay unit and, therefore, are valid for all
switching devices that are controlled by this bay unit. In addition, you can configure an individual switching
authority and specific switching authority as well as individual switching modes for single switching devices.
Therefore, individual switching devices can accept various switching authorities and switching modes simulta-
neously.
This is offered for the following function groups and function blocks:
• Circuit-breaker function group
• Disconnector function group
• Transformer tap changer function group
• Switching sequence function block

This allows to select individual settings for each switching device. This is useful if, for example, switching
devices of different utilities are managed within a single bay.
In order to activate this option, go to the function block Control of a switching device and set the parameter
Check switching authority to advanced. An additional table containing initially 2 parameters is
displayed.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Control Functions
[sc_add parameters sw authority sw device, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-35 Additional Parameters for Switching Authorities in the Parameters of a Switching Device
When activating the parameter Swi.dev. related sw.auth., an individual switching authority as well as
an individual switching mode for this switching device are configured. Additional signals are displayed in the
Control function block of the corresponding switching device.
[sc_extended parameters sw authority sw device, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-36 Expanded Parameters for the Switching Authority in the Switching Device
[sc_switching auth sw mode changeable, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-37 Individually Modifiable Switching Authority and Switching Mode for Switching Devices
The new input signals that are displayed allow you to set the individual switching authority and switching
mode for the switching devices. For this switching device, these inputs overwrite the central switching

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Control Functions
authority and the switching mode. The outputs Switching authority and Switching mode indicate the
states only for this switching device.
When activating Specific sw. authorities, an individual specific switching authority for this switching
device is configured. Additional parameters are displayed.
[sc_parameters FB control all additional options, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-38 Parameters of the FB Control with All Additional Options
The functionality of the specific switching authority for the individual switching device and the significance of
the additional parameters is identical to the operating mode of the central specific switching authority. Addi-
tional signals are displayed in the Control function block.
[sc_specific sw authority changeable per sw device, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-39 Specific Switching Authority, Modifiable for Each Switching Device
Switching Direction (Set = Actual)

With this check, you avoid switching a switching device into a state that has already been achieved. For
instance, before a trip command is issued to a circuit breaker, its current position is determined. If this circuit
breaker is already in the Off position, no command is issued. This is logged accordingly.
Switchgear Interlocking Protection

Switchgear interlocking protection means avoiding maloperation by checking the bay and substation inter-
locking and thus preventing equipment damage and personal injury. The interlocking conditions are always
system-specific and for this reason are stored as CFC charts in the devices.
SIPROTEC 5 devices recognize 2 different types of interlocking conditions:
• Normal interlocking conditions:

These can be revoked by changing the switching mode to non-interlocked.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Control Functions
• Non-revocable (fixed) interlocking conditions:

These are still checked even if the switching mode is set to non-interlocked.
Application: Replacing mechanical interlocking, for example, that prevent actuation of a medium-
voltage switch.
Each of the 2 categories has 2 release signals (for the On and Off switching directions) that represent the
result of the interlocking plan, so that interlocking is in effect during the command check (see the figure
below). The default setting for all release signals is TRUE, so that no switchgear interlocking checks take place
if no CFC charts have been prepared.
[sc_verbbp, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-40 Interlocking Signals in Function Block Interlocking

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Control Functions
By default, the status of interlocking conditions are not visible in the device, see the following figure.
[sc_HMI_WO_Position, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-41 The Status fof Interlocking Conditions are not Visible in the Control Display
[sc_HMI_WO_Position2, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-42 The Status of Interlocking Conditions are not Visible in the Control Menu
But, if you activate the parameter Shows interlock.cond. HMI by navigating to Settings > Device
settings > General > Control in DIGSI 5, you can get the status of interlocking conditions in the device.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Control Functions
[sc_HMI_W_Position, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-43 The Status of Interlocking Conditions are Visible in the Control Display
[sc_HMI_W_Position2, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-44 The Status fof Interlocking Conditions are Visible in the Control Menu
EXAMPLE
For interlocking
For the making direction of the circuit breaker QA in bay E01 (see the figure below), it is necessary to check
whether the disconnectors QB1, QB2, and QB9 are in the defined position, that is, either On or Off. Opening
the circuit breaker QA should be possible at any time.
The interlocking equations are: QA_On = ((QB1 = On) or (QB1 = Off)) and ((QB2 = On) or (QB2 = Off)) and
((QB9 = On) or (QB9 = Off)). There is no condition for opening.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Control Functions
[sc_abgang, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-45 Feeder Bay for a Double Busbar System
The CFC chart that is required to implement the interlocking equation is shown in the next figure.
[sc_verpla, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-46 Interlocking Chart for Bay Interlocking
Since the Disconnector function block provides the defined position On or Off, the exclusive OR gate XOR is
not necessary for the linkage. A simple OR suffices.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Control Functions
As can be seen in the CFC chart, the result of the check is connected to the >Release on signal in the
Interlocking function block in the Circuit breaker QA function group (see Figure 7-46).
EXAMPLE
For system interlocking

This example considers the feeder = E01 from the previous example (bay interlocking) and additionally the
coupler bay = E02 (see the figure below).
[sc_system, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-47 System with Feeder and Coupler Bays
The circuit breaker QA in coupler bay = E02 will be considered next. As the multibay interlocking condition,
you must provide the bus-coupler circuit-breaker command block at the end:
If the 2 busbars in bay = E01 are connected, that is, if the 2 disconnectors QB1 and QB2 in bay =E01 are
closed, the circuit breaker QA in bay = E02 is not allowed to be switched off. Accordingly, bay = E01 in the CFC
of the device generates the indication Bus coupler closed from the positions of the switches QB1 and
QB2 and, using IEC 61850-GOOSE, transmits it to bay = E02 in the device. You must then store the following
interlocking condition in bay = E02:
QA_Off = NOT (= E01/Bus coupler closed)
In the CFC chart for the coupling device = E02, you must create the following CFC chart (see the figure below).
[sc_planve, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-48 Interlocking Chart for Substation Interlocking

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Control Functions
1-Out-of-n Check (Double-Activation Blocking)

The double-activation blocking prevents 2 commands from being executed in the device simultaneously. You
can set the device-internal check for each switching device as a parameter in the Control function block.
The default setting is Yes, that is, double-activation blocking is active (see the figure below).
[sc_double, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-49 Activating the Double-Activation Blocking
With SIPROTEC 5, it is also possible to achieve multibay double-activation blocking.

In this case, send the signal not selected to other devices for analysis using IEC 61850-GOOSE. This signal
is available under Position in every Circuit-breaker or Disconnector function block in the switching device
function groups (see figure below).
[sc_notselected, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-50 Signal Not selected in the Circuit-Breaker Function Block
The signal is then queried in the CFC interlocking conditions for the associated switching devices and is used
to generate the release signal (for example, >Release on).
Blocking by Protection Function
• Default setting (_:107) Check blk. by protection = yes

In devices with protection and control functions, Siemens recommends that no switching commands can be
issued while protection functions have picked up.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Control Functions
The default setting for blocking by the protection function is therefore yes. If necessary, you can disable this
blocking. You can find the settings on the same page as the double-activation blocking (see Figure 7-49).
NOTE
i Remember, for instance, that pickup of the thermal overload protection can create a fault as well and thus
prevent switching commands.
NOTE
i The command check Blocking by protection function is only available for controlling circuit breakers,
because in this case a unique relationship with protection functions has been configured. In disconnectors,
this relationship is not always unique, precisely with regard to the 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layout, and it must
be mapped for each system using CFC charts.
To carry out the command check Blocking by protection function for disconnectors, use the following
indications (if present) in your interlocking conditions:
• Group indication: Pickup
• Circuit-breaker failure protection: Pickup (Circuit-breaker failure protection)
7.4.2 Command Logging
All commands in the sequence are logged. The command log contains:
• Date and time
• Name of the switching device (or function group)
• Reason for the transmission (SEL = Selected, OPR = Operate, CMT = Command execution end, SPN =
Spontaneous)
• Status or switching direction
EXAMPLE
The following example illustrates control of a circuit breaker QA1 for various cases.
• Successful command output
• Interrupted command
• Command interrupted by switchgear interlocking
• Command ended due to missing feedback
• Spontaneous change of switch position without command output

The following figures indicate command logging for various scenarios of the standard control model SBO with
feedback monitoring.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Control Functions
[sc_bbcon_1, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-51 Positive Case (Display 1)

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Control Functions
Figure 7-54 Positive Case with Command Cancellation

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Control Functions
Figure 7-55 Negative Case (Blocked by Switchgear Interlocking)
Figure 7-56 Negative Case (Expiration of Feedback Supervision Time) (Display 1)

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Control Functions

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Control Functions
Figure 7-59 Spontaneous Status Change
Depending on the transmission reason, the desired control value or the actual state value of the controllable
and the switching device can be contained in the log.
The following table shows the relationship.
Table 7-17 Relationship between the Reason for Transmission and the Value Logged
Reason for Transmission Value

Selected (SEL) Desired value
Operate (OPR) Desired value
Command cancellation (CNC) Desired value
Command execution and termination (CMT) Actual value
Spontaneous change (SPN) Actual value
7.4.3 Settings

Control
_:101 Control:Control model • status only SBO w. enh.
security
_:102 Control:SBO time-out 0.01 s to 1800.00 s 30.00 s
_:103 Control:Feedback moni- 0.01 s to 1800.00 s 1.00 s
toring time
_:104 Control:Check switching • no yes
authority
• yes

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Control Functions

_:105 Control:Check if pos. is • no yes
reached
• yes
_:106 Control:Check double • no yes
activat. blk.
• yes
_:107 Control:Check blk. by • no yes
protection
• yes

(Type)
Control
_:53 Control:Health ENS O
_:58 Control:Cmd. with feedback DPC C

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Control Functions
7.5 User-Defined Function Block [Control]
The User-defined function block [control] allows the switching-authority check of a control command, the
check of whether the position has been reached, a double-activation blocking, and the definition of inter-
locking conditions for user-defined controllables.
The User-defined function block [control] is located in the folder User-defined functions in the DIGSI 5
Library.
You can instantiate the user-defined function blocks on the top level (in parallel to other function groups) as
well as within function groups and functions.
The task of the function block is to check the switching authority and the interlocking conditions for the user-
defined control commands instantiated within it. For these control commands, the function block checks
whether the required switch position is equal to the current switch position (actual/set point comparison). If
you activate the double-activation blocking, commands from switching objects and user-defined control
signals will be rejected as long as a command is still being performed for one of the other switching objects
for which double-activation blocking has also been set.
With the binary release signals, you can determine a switchgear interlocking protection for all the user-defined
control signals instantiated in the function block. Unlike the switching devices (circuit breaker, disconnector),
there is only one release input here, since there is only one switching direction for the signal types INC and
APC. The signal types DPC, SPC, and BSC have 2 switching directions, but still only one release input. This
release input can be operated based on the result of a logic created in the CFC, or can be directly connected to
a binary input or a variable. If the input >Enable is activated, the switching command can be performed. If it
is not activated, the switching command is rejected, with the reason Interlocking violation.
This applies in a similar way to the input >Enable (fixed), although with this input, the interlocking
cannot be revoked by key switch S1 or an unlocked switching authority.
The following table shows the reaction of the function to the assignment of its inputs.
Input >Enable Input >Enable (fixed) Effect on control command
1 0 Rejected
0 1 Successful if device mode = unlocked
Rejected if device mode = locked
1 1 Successful
0 0 Rejected
NOTE
i The default setting for the state of the inputs is 1, that is, the switching commands are not locked.
You can instantiate every user-defined signal (for example, SPS, DPC, INC) in the function block and route the
corresponding indications (see following figure).

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Control Functions
[sc_user_01, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-60 Information Routing with Inserted User-Defined Function Block [Control]: Process Indications
and Some Single-Point Indications
The function block contains the parameters (_:104) Check switching authority, (_:105) Check
if pos. is reached, (_:106) Check double activat. blk., and (_:150) Check swi.auth.
for Mode. The parameter settings Check switching authority and Check if pos. is reached
affect all controllables instantiated in the function block. Other signal types are not affected by these parame-
ters and objects.
On the other hand, the parameter setting Check swi.auth. for Mode affects the controllable Mode
(controllable) of the function block.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Control Functions
[sc_user_02, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-61 Parameterization Options of the User-Defined Function Block [Control]
Parameter: Check switching authority
• Default setting (_:104) Check switching authority = yes

With the Check switching authority parameter, you determine whether the command source of
switching commands must be checked (see chapter 7.4.1 Command Checks and Switchgear Interlocking
Protection).
Parameter: Check if pos. is reached
• Default setting (_:105) Check if pos. is reached = yes

With the Check if pos. is reached parameter, you check at a switching command whether the
switching direction equals the current position.
Parameter: Check double activat. blk.
• Default setting (_:106) Check double activat. blk. = no

With the Check double activat. blk. parameter, you check whether commands from switching
objects and user-defined control signals should be rejected, as long as a command is still being executed for
one of the other objects.
Parameter: Check swi.auth. for Mode
• Default setting (_:150) Check swi.auth. for Mode = no

With the Check swi.auth. for Mode parameter, you specify whether the switching authority for the
command source must be checked when switching the controllable Mode (controllable) to the mode
On, Off, or Test. If you set the parameter Check swi.auth. for Mode to yes, the switching command
is only executed with the appropriate switching authority (see chapter 7.4.1 Command Checks and Switch-
gear Interlocking Protection).

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Control Functions
7.5.4 Settings

U-def.FB ctl.#
_:104 U-def.FB ctl.#:Check • no yes
switching authority
• yes
• advanced
_:105 U-def.FB ctl.#:Check if • no yes
pos. is reached
• yes
_:106 U-def.FB ctl.#:Check • no no
double activat. blk.
• yes
Switching authority
_:150 U-def.FB ctl.#:Check • no no
swi.auth. for Mode
• yes
_:151 U-def.FB ctl.#:Swi.dev. • 0 false
related sw.auth.
• 1
_:152 U-def.FB ctl.#:Specific • 0 true
sw. authorities
• 1
_:115 U-def.FB ctl.#:Specific • station station/remote
sw.auth. valid for
• station/remote
• remote
_:153 U-def.FB ctl.#:Num. of 2 to 5 2
specific sw.auth.
_:155 U-def.FB ctl.#:Ident. Freely editable text
sw.auth. 1
sw.auth. 2
sw.auth. 3
sw.auth. 4
sw.auth. 5
_:154 U-def.FB ctl.#:Multiple • 0 false
specific sw.auth.
• 1

(Type)
U-def.FB ctl.#
_:501 U-def.FB ctl.#:>Enable SPS I
_:502 U-def.FB ctl.#:>Enable (fixed) SPS I
_:503 U-def.FB ctl.#:>Sw. authority local SPS I
_:504 U-def.FB ctl.#:>Sw. authority remote SPS I
_:505 U-def.FB ctl.#:>Sw. mode interlocked SPS I
_:506 U-def.FB ctl.#:>Sw. mode non-interl. SPS I
_:51 U-def.FB ctl.#:Mode (controllable) ENC C

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Control Functions

(Type)
_:52 U-def.FB ctl.#:Behavior ENS O
_:53 U-def.FB ctl.#:Health ENS O
_:302 U-def.FB ctl.#:Switching auth. station SPC C
_:308 U-def.FB ctl.#:Enable sw. auth. 1 SPC C
_:313 U-def.FB ctl.#:Switching authority ENS O
_:314 U-def.FB ctl.#:Switching mode ENS O

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Control Functions
7.6 CFC-Chart Settings
If you want to process a parameter in a CFC chart and this parameter is to be changeable during runtime using
DIGSI or HMI, you can use the function blocks CFC chart of Boolean parameters, the CFC chart of integer
parameters and the CFC chart of floating-point parameters. Instantiate the appropriate function block
depending on the parameter value needed (logical, integer, or floating point). In this way, the current value of
the parameter can then be used in the CFC chart at runtime.
You can find the CFC-chart parameters Chrt sett.Bool, Chart setting Int, and Chrt sett.real in
the DIGSI library in the User-defined functions folder. Drag and drop the desired function block into a func-
tion group or a function. Set the appropriate parameter value of the function block in DIGSI using the param-
eter editor or via HMI under the Settings menu item. You can then use the parameter as an input signal in CFC
charts.
With Exp. options, you define the range and the unit of the value. This prevents users from entering incorrect
setting values.
NOTE
i The user-defined function groups and the user-defined functions can be used to group the CFC-chart
parameters. You can rename for the function block and change the parameter value in the DIGSI Informa-
tion routing matrix to suit your specific application.
[sc_cfc_param, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-62 CFC-Chart Parameters within Information Routing

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Control Functions
Parameter: Chrt sett.Bool
• Default setting Chrt sett.Bool = False

You can use the parameter Chrt sett.Bool in a CFC chart as an input signal with a Boolean value. This
input value can then be changed during the runtime of the CFC chart.
Parameter: Chart setting Int
• Default setting Chart setting Int = 10

You can use the parameter Chart setting Int in a CFC chart as an input signal with an integer value.
This input value can then be changed during the runtime of the CFC chart.
Parameter: Chrt sett.real
• Default setting Chrt sett.real = 100.000

You can use the parameter Chrt sett.real in a CFC chart as an input signal with a floating-point number.
This input value can then be changed during the runtime of the CFC chart.
7.6.4 Settings

Chrt sett.Bool
_:105 Chrt sett.Bool:Value • 0 false
• 1

Chart setting Int
_:105 Chart setting Int:Value -2147483648 to 10
2147483647

Chrt sett.real
_:105 Chrt sett.real:Value -10000000000.000 % to 100.000 %
10000000000.000 %

(Type)
Chrt sett.Bool
_:305 Chrt sett.Bool:Setting value SPS O

(Type)
Chart setting Int
_:305 Chart setting Int:Setting value INS O

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Control Functions

(Type)
Chrt sett.real
_:305 Chrt sett.real:Setting value MV O

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Control Functions
7.7 Voltage Controller
7.7 Voltage Controller

The transformer voltage controller functionality (ANSI 90V) is used to control power transformers (two-
winding transformers, three-winding transformers, grid coupling transformers) and auto transformers using a
motor-operated tap changer. In addition, the voltage control can be used for two-winding transformers
connected in parallel.
For a detailed description of the function group Voltage controller and its functions and settings, refer to the
Device manual Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
7SA87, 7SD87, 7SL87, 7VK87.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
8 Supervision Functions
8.1 Overview 758

8.2 Resource-Consumption Supervision 759
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System 764
8.4 Supervision of the Device Hardware 815
8.5 Supervision of Device Firmware 820
8.6 Supervision of Hardware Configuration 821
8.7 Supervision of Communication Connections 822
8.8 Error Responses and Corrective Measures 826
8.9 Group Indications 835
8.10 Group Indications Specific to the Busbar Protection 837

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
8.1 Overview
8.1 Overview
SIPROTEC 5 devices are equipped with an extensive and integrated supervision concept. Continuous supervi-
sion:
• Ensures the availability of the technology used
• Avoids subfunction and overfunction of the device
• Protects persons and primary technical devices
• Offers effective assistance during commissioning and testing

The following areas are monitored:
• Supervision the resource consumption of the application
• Supervision of the secondary system, including the external auxiliary power supply
• Supervision of device hardware
• Supervision of device firmware
• Supervision of hardware configuration
• Supervision of communication connections

When the supervision functions pick up, that will be displayed and also indicated. Error responses are defined
for the device. The error responses are grouped in defect severities.
The supervision functions work selectively. When the supervision functions pick up - as far as possible - only
the affected parts of the hardware and firmware are blocked. If this is not possible, the device goes out of
operation into a secure state (fallback mode). In addition to safety, this warrants a high degree of availability.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
8.2 Resource-Consumption Supervision
8.2.1 Load Model
SIPROTEC 5devices are freely configurable. A load model is integrated in DIGSI 5. The load model prevents you
from overloading the device with an excessively large application.
The load model shows the device utilization and the response times for device functions. If it determines that
an application created is likely to overload the device, DIGSI prevents the application from being loaded into
the device.
In this rare case, you must then reduce the application in order to be able to load it into the device.
The load model can be found in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name of the device → Device information. In
the operating range, select the Resource consumption setting sheet. The following figure shows an example
of the view of the load model in DIGSI 5:
[sc_ress_bb, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-1 Visualization of the Load Model in DIGSI
A green total display for the processor response time indicates that the device is not overloaded by the present
application. On the other hand, if you see a red exclamation mark, the planned application is overloading the
device.
The list below the total display shows the individual functional areas. These areas combine functions with the
same real-time requirements in groups. A green display in front of an area indicates that the response times of
the functions grouped in this area can be maintained. A red exclamation point indicates that functions may
have longer response times than are specified in the Technical data for the device. In such a case, loading of
the application into the device is blocked.
The following table provides an overview of the functional areas and the most important influencing quanti-
ties on device utilization:

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Functional Brief Description Change in Load

Area
CFC event-trig- CFC charts that must be Adding or removing CFC charts in the fast event-triggered
gered, fast processed especially fast (for process range
example, to invoke interlock-
ings between protection func-
• Create CFC chart
tions) • Delete CFC chart
• Change the process range in the properties of the CFC
chart
Add to or remove from CFC charts in the fast event-trig-
gered process area
• FG • Interaction between indi- Adding or removing
connec- vidual function groups, for
tions example, between the
• Protection functions and their stages
Busbar function group and • Circuit-breaker function groups
• Fast
GOOSE the Circuit-breaker func- • Fast GOOSE connections
tion group
• Fast GOOSE communica-
tion
Measuring Provision of measured values Adding or removing
points for protection, control, and
measurement functions
• Measuring points (in the Measuring-points routing
Editor)
• Function groups that provide measured-value prepro-
cessing for insertable functions (for example, Circuit-
breaker function group)
Maximum Busbar differential protection Adding or removing busbar differential protection func-
priority protec- tions
tion, busbar
differential
• Bus sections with measuring system
protection • Bus coupler differential protection
Main protec- Protection functions with high Adding or removing functions
tion requirements for fast operate
times
Backup protec- Protection functions with Adding or removing functions

tion average requirements for fast
operate times
• Overcurrent protection and its tripping stages
Other protec- Protection functions with low Adding or removing functions

tion requirements for fast operate
times
• Voltage protection
• Frequency protection

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Functional Brief Description Change in Load

Area
CFC event-trig- CFC charts with a maximum Adding or removing CFC charts in the event-triggered
gered, processing time of 40 ms process range
standard
GOOSE
• Create CFC chart
• Delete CFC chart
• Change the process range in the properties of the CFC
chart
Add to or remove from CFC charts in the event-triggered
process area
• Control • Control and interlocking Adding or removing
• Other • CFC charts in the area of • Function blocks for control and interlocking
Contin- control, measured-value
uous preprocessing, and event-
• CFC charts in the control area
Function controlled • Switching devices (except circuit breakers), for
Chart example, Disconnector function groups
• Operational measured
• Opera- values • Operational measured values
tional • CFC charts in the measured values area
measured
values • FG Circuit breaker in the bays
If the load model displays a warning, bear in mind the following general instructions:
The areas named in the table are listed in descending order of real-time requirements. If a warning appears to
the effect that the guaranteed response times may be exceeded in an area, you can return to the permitted
area by taking the following measures:
• Reduce the functional scope in the marked area (red exclamation mark)
• Reduce the functional scope in another area with higher real-time requirements
When you have reduced the application, check the display in resource consumption! If a function has been
switched off, it will continue to represent a load for the area. If you do not need the function, delete it rather
than switching it off.
8.2.2 Function Points
When you order a SIPROTEC 5device, you are also ordering a function-points account for use of additional
functions.
The following figure illustrates consumption of function points in the current application with respect to the
existing function-points account.
[sc_fpunkt, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-2 Resource Overview: Function-Points Consumption
The remaining white bar shows the function points that have not yet been used up by your configuration. The
number of function points available in a device depends on the device purchase order (position 20 of the
product code). You can also order function points subsequently, and so increase the function-points account
for the device.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
NOTE
i Find out the function-points requirement for the desired application before ordering the device. For this,
you can use the device configurator. Alternatively, you order the device with 0 function points and create
the license file with the required point credits ad hoc using the SIPROTEC function point manager (see
2.2 Adjustment of Application Templates/Functional Scope).
Function-Point Requirement
The following table explains the function-point requirement.
Name Function Points
Circuit-breaker failure protection 3-pole (per circuit breaker) 15
Circuit-breaker failure protection 1-pole/3-pole 25
End-fault protection (per circuit breaker) 5
Per each additional bay 50
The number of already included bays differs depending on the significant features.
8.2.3 CFC Resources
Task Levels of the CFC Function

A CFC chart, and thus the configured CFC function, runs in the SIPROTEC 5 device on exactly one of the 4 task
levels. The individual task levels differ, on the one hand, in the priority of processing tasks and, on the other,
in the cyclic or event-triggered processing of the CFC charts.
You can select between the following task levels:
Task Level Description
High priority Event- Use the High priority Event-triggered task level for time-critical
triggered tasks, for example, if a signal should block a protection function within 2 ms
to 3 ms. Functions on this task level are processed in an event-triggered
way with the highest priority. Each change to a logical input signal is imme-
diately processed. Processing can interrupt the execution of protection func-
tions and functions on the Event-Triggered task level.
Event-triggered Use the Event-triggered task level preferably for logic functions that
need not be executed with highest priority. Each change to a logical input
signal is immediately processed. Protection functions or functions on the
High priority Event-triggered task level can disrupt processing.
Functions on the Event-triggered task level are typically processed
within a maximum of 5 ms in all devices. For busbar protection or line
protection, the functions on the Event-triggered task level are
processed within a maximum of 10 ms.
Low priority Cyclic- Use the Low priority Cyclic-triggered task level for processing
triggered measured values. Functions on this task level are processed cyclically every
500 ms.
Low priority Event- Use the Low priority Event-triggered task level preferably for logic
triggered functions that should be executed with lower priority than functions in the
Event-triggered task level. If the available ticks of the Event-trig-
gered task level shown in the following figure are sufficient for the
required CFC functionality, you do not need to use the Low priority
Event-triggered task level.
All CFC function blocks can be assigned to all the task levels. There are no device-specific function blocks. If
enough ticks are available, all CFC charts can be created in the same task level. A tick is the measure of the
performance requirement of CFC blocks.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
The number of available ticks for each task is calculated depending on the created device configuration. This
calculation is based on the previously described load model. In this process, it is recommended to create all
selected functions and objects first followed by configuration of the CFC charts so that a realistic information
about the remaining system capacitance for CFC charts is available. Significantly exceeding the typical
response time is prevented by the load model by limiting the number of CFC function blocks in the corre-
sponding task level via the number of ticks available.
The typical response times for CFC tasks are listed in the Technical Data.
The following figure shows an example of the CFC chart capacitances in DIGSI calculated by the load model.
The ticks available for each task are shown here. The green bars represent the ticks used in the task levels. You
reach this dialog with the following call: Device → Device information → Resource consumption.
[sc_cfc-statistic, 2, en_US]
Figure 8-3 CFC Statistics
NOTE
i High priority Event-triggered CFC charts have the highest priority and are processed before all other tasks.
At this level, a considerable smaller number of ticks are available than at all other tasks. It is recommended
to configure only very-high-priority logic functions at this task and to configure the other logic functions in
any other level.
NOTE
i Empty CFC charts also consume system resources. Empty charts that are not required any more should be
deleted.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
8.3.1 Overview
The secondary circuits establish a connection to the power system from the point of view of the device. The
measuring-input circuit (currents, voltages) as well as the command circuits to the circuit breakers are moni-
tored for the correct function of the device. The connection to the station battery is ensured with the supervi-
sion of the external auxiliary voltage. The secondary system has the following supervision systems:
• Measuring circuits (voltage):

– Measuring-voltage failure
– Voltage-transformer circuit breaker
• Measuring circuits (current):

– Differential current
– Zero-crossover of the current
• Supervision of the switching devices

– Disconnector supervision
– Circuit-breaker supervision
• Trip circuits
– Supervision of the relay activation
– Supervision of the control circuits for the circuit-breaker activation
• Supervision of binary inputs
• External auxiliary voltage

When these supervisions pick up, corresponding warning indications are output. Some supervisions lead
directly to the blocking of affected protection functions or to the marking of measuring points that have
become invalid, so that affected protection functions can go into a secure state.
A detailed description of the supervision mechanisms and their error responses can be found in the Function
Description and as overall overview at the end of chapter 8.
8.3.2 Measuring-Voltage Failure

The Measuring-voltage failure detection function monitors the voltage transformer secondary circuits:
• Non-connected transformers
• Pickup of the voltage transformer circuit breaker (in the event of short circuits in the secondary circuit)
• Broken conductor in one or more measuring loops

All these events cause a voltage of 0 in the voltage transformer secondary circuits which can lead to failures of
the protection functions.
Each of the following protection functions has the parameter Blk. by meas.-volt. failure. Using the
setting value of the parameter, you can specify whether the protection functions react to a measuring-voltage
failure or not (block/not block).
• Overvoltage Protection with Negative-Sequence Voltage
• Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage
• Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
• Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

The function is part of protection function groups which are connected with a 3-phase voltage and current
measuring point.
[dw_strffm, 1, en_US]
The function is broken down into 3 subfunctions (see Figure 8-5):
• Supervision for unbalanced measuring-voltage failure
• Supervision for 3-phase measuring-voltage failure
• Supervision for switching onto a 3-phase measuring-voltage failure
[lo_ffm-3p_zusamm, 3, en_US]
Figure 8-5 Breakdown of the Measuring-Voltage Failure Detection Function
Each subfunction creates its own monitoring indication. The function summarizes these indications via the
group indication Alarm.
The response to the detection of a measuring-voltage failure is explained in the specific protection-function
descriptions.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
8.3.2.3 Unbalanced Measuring-Voltage Failure
Logic
[lo_oppode, 5, en_US]
Figure 8-6 Logic Diagram Unbalanced Measuring-Voltage Failure Detection
The criterion for detection of an unbalanced measuring-voltage failure is the voltage unbalance. This unbal-
ance is determined based on the ratio between negative and positive-sequence voltage. If the threshold value
is exceeded and the monitoring is released and not blocked, the monitoring picks up (see Figure 8-6). The
indication Asym.fail.-inst.alarm is output.
The monitoring is released as soon as a certain minimum voltage is exceeded. This prevents a spurious
response in the presence of low voltage measurands or a measurand of 0 (for example, circuit breaker open).
Instantaneous monitoring also requires the presence of a minimum current. This prevents a spurious instanta-
neous pick up of the monitoring in the presence of a weak infeed (current < 10 % of rated current) combined
with a power-system incident.
If the voltage unbalance is blocked by unbalanced faults in the primary system, the supervision is blocked. The
device detects an unbalanced fault based on the ratio between negative-sequence and positive-sequence
current.
Delay/Seal-In
In the presence of a weak infeed (current < 10 % of rated current), certain protection functions require more
time for detection of a system incident. For this purpose, monitoring can be delayed using the parameter
Asym.fail. - time delay.
If a system incident is detected during the time delay, the supervision drops off. This is because the function
assumes that the unbalance - and consequently the pickup of the supervision - is due to the system incident.
After the time delay has elapsed, it definitely assumes a measuring-voltage failure. Monitoring seals in and the
Asym.fail.-alarm indication is output. The dropout does not happen until the voltage unbalance has
disappeared after a seal-in time of 10 s. In the presence of 3-pole close-in faults outside the protection zone,
this seal-in time prevents the monitoring from dropping off too quickly and thus releasing the protection func-
tions.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
The sealing-in function can be deactivated using the Asym.fail.-DO on netw.flt. parameter. As soon
as a system incident is detected, the monitoring drops off instantaneously.
8.3.2.4 3-Phase Measuring-Voltage Failure
Logic
[lo_symmet, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-7 Logic Diagram 3-Phase Measuring-Voltage Failure
Balanced Fault – VA, VB, VC <

A 3-phase measuring-voltage failure is detected if the following criteria are fulfilled simultaneously:
• All 3 phase-to-ground voltages drop below the threshold value 3ph.fail. - VA,VB,VC <
• A jump of the voltage (signal Jump V)

If these criteria are fulfilled and the monitoring is released and not blocked, the 3ph.failure-alarm indica-
tion is output. When the voltage returns (even as 1-phase), the monitoring drops out.
If the device incorporates the distance-protection function, the device checks the input threshold value
3ph.fail. - phs.curr.release against the minimum current setting of the distance protection for
plausibility. The threshold value 3ph.fail. - phs.curr.release must be set to less than or equal to the
release current of the distance protection.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Blocking in the Case of a System Incident

In the case of a 3-phase system incident, supervision must be blocked. The device detects a 3-phase system
incident with a jump in the current. This change is detected via the internal signal Jump I or when the
change in current of a phase current exceeds the threshold value 3ph.fail. - phs.curr. jump. The
change in current of phase currents is formed from the difference between the present current phasor and the
current phasor of the previous period. This allows to take into account a jump of the current phase.
NOTE
i If a voltage-transformer circuit breaker is installed in the secondary circuit of the voltage transformers, its
position is communicated to the device via a binary input (see chapter 8.3.4.1 Overview of Functions).
8.3.2.5 Switching onto a 3-Phase Measuring-Voltage Failure, Low Load
Logic
[lo_zuscha, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-8 Logic Diagram Switching to 3-Phase Measuring-Voltage Failure
Switching onto a 3-phase measuring-voltage failure is detected if the following criteria are fulfilled simultane-
ously:
• All 3 phase-to-ground voltages have dropped below the threshold value 3ph.fail. - VA,VB,VC <.
• The circuit breaker is detected to be in closed position. The detection takes place either via the phase
currents or via the ≥1-pole closed signal, which is generated via the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts.
For more detailed information, refer to 5.7.8.5 Circuit-Breaker Condition for the Protected Object.
A voltage jump – such as in a 3-phase measuring-voltage failure with closed circuit breaker (refer to 8.3.2.4 3-
Phase Measuring-Voltage Failure) – does not occur in the case of switching to a 3-phase measuring-voltage

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
failure. If the monitoring is not blocked, the time delay SO 3ph.fail. - time delay is started. After the
time has elapsed, the indication SO 3ph.failure-alarm is displayed. A dropout of the monitoring is only
possible by a recovery of the voltage.
The supervision is blocked as soon as a pickup of a protection function is detected within a protection function
group and the time delay of the supervision has not yet elapsed.
This subfunction also covers the situation of a low load with 3-phase measuring-voltage failure and closed
circuit breaker, because the circuit-breaker position is also determined from the circuit-breaker auxiliary
contacts. The subfunction for detecting a 3-phase measuring-voltage failure (refer to 8.3.2.4 3-Phase Meas-
uring-Voltage Failure) is not released in this situation, for example, because the current flow is too low.
This subfunction can be switched on or off separately using the Switch-on 3ph. failure parameter.
Parameter: Asym.fail. - time delay
• Recommended setting value (_:113) Asym.fail. - time delay = 10.00 s

The Asym.fail. - time delay parameter allows you to set the time during which a system incident
detected after the occurrence of the unbalance resets the monitoring. This setting is important in the case of
weak infeed (current < 10 % of rated current) in order to give certain protection functions (such as distance
protection) more time for detecting system incidents. As long as the time delay runs, it is assumed that the
unbalance is due to a system incident.
As soon as the time has elapsed, the supervision assumes a measuring-voltage failure and seals in.
If you want the seal-in function to operate sooner or at once, you can reduce the time.
Parameter: Asym.fail.-DO on netw.flt.
• Recommended setting value (_:115) Asym.fail.-DO on netw.flt. = No

no After elapse of the time delay the supervision function seals in. Even if the
system incident criterion is fulfilled, the protection functions concerned will
remain blocked.
This avoids an unselective tripping of the protection functions due to an
absence of the measuring voltage in the case of an unbalanced system inci-
dent.
This is the default setting.
yes The seal-in function is switched off. The supervision drops out immediately
when a system incident is detected. With this setting, the unbalanced meas-
uring-voltage failure is only reported, and in the event of a double failure
(measuring-voltage failure and system incident in parallel), unselective trip-
ping is preferred.
Parameter: 3ph.fail. - VA,VB,VC <
• Recommended setting value (_:101) 3ph.fail. - VA,VB,VC < = 5 V

The 3ph.fail. - VA,VB,VC < parameter allows you to set the pickup value of the monitoring.
If you expect major disturbances acting upon the voltage inputs, you can increase this value. Increasing the
values makes the supervision more sensitive to 3-phase system incidents.
Parameter: 3ph.fail. - phs.curr. jump
• Recommended setting value (_:103) 3ph.fail. - phs.curr. jump = 0.1 A for Irated = 1 A or
0.5 A for Irated = 5 A

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
The 3ph.fail. - phs.curr. jump parameter is used to set the differential current between the present
current phasor and the stored phasor (from the previous period). If the value is exceeded, the function detects
a system incident and blocks the monitoring.
Parameter: SO 3ph.fail. - time delay
• Recommended setting value (_:106) SO 3ph.fail. - time delay = 3.00 s

The SO 3ph.fail. - time delay parameter allows you to set the delay of the monitoring.
NOTE
i Adapt the SO 3ph.fail. - time delay parameter to the inherent time of protection functions which
are intended to block the monitoring function.
Note that with parameter values 0 s blocking of the monitoring function via a protection stimulation will
not be possible any more.
Parameter: Switch-on 3ph. failure
• Recommended setting value (_:107) Switch-on 3ph. failure = on

on The subfunction Switching to a 3-phase measuring-voltage failure is
active.
In the case of low loads, the subfunction for detection of a 3-phase meas-
uring-voltage failure is not released, for example, because the current flow
is too low. In this situation, the subfunction Switching to a 3-phase meas-
uring-voltage failure can perform the monitoring task.
Siemens recommends switching that subfunction on.
off With the setting off the subfunction Switching to a 3-phase measuring-
voltage failure is not active.
8.3.2.7 Settings

Mes.v.fail.det
_:1 Mes.v.fail.det:Mode • off on
• on
• test
_:115 Mes.v.fail.det:Asym.fail.- • no yes
DO on netw.flt.
• yes
_:113 Mes.v.fail.det:Asym.fail. 0.00 s to 30.00 s 10.00 s
- time delay
_:102 Mes.v.fail.det:3ph.fail. - 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.100 A
phs.curr.release 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.50 A
_:103 Mes.v.fail.det:3ph.fail. - 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.100 A
phs.curr. jump 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.50 A
_:101 Mes.v.fail.det:3ph.fail. - 0.300 V to 340.000 V 5.000 V
VA,VB,VC <
_:107 Mes.v.fail.det:Switch-on • off on
3ph. failure
• on

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

_:106 Mes.v.fail.det:SO 0.01 s to 30.00 s 3.00 s
3ph.fail. - time delay
_:114 Mes.v.fail.det:Asym.fail.- 10.00 s to 10.00 s 10.00 s
dropout delay

(Type)
Mes.v.fail.det
_:82 Mes.v.fail.det:>Block function SPS I
_:54 Mes.v.fail.det:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Mes.v.fail.det:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Mes.v.fail.det:Health ENS O
_:300 Mes.v.fail.det:Alarm SPS O
_:304 Mes.v.fail.det:Asym.fail.-inst.alarm SPS O
_:303 Mes.v.fail.det:Asym.fail.-alarm SPS O
_:301 Mes.v.fail.det:3ph.failure-alarm SPS O
_:302 Mes.v.fail.det:SO 3ph.failure-alarm SPS O
8.3.3 Signaling-Voltage Supervision

Signaling-voltage supervision is used to evaluate the validity of binary signals connected to the SIPROTEC
device via binary inputs. For this purpose, one binary input is used to monitor the signaling voltage. If the
signaling voltage fails, the associated binary signals are marked as invalid and a Signaling-voltage malfunc-
tion indication is issued.
Several signaling-voltage supervision groups can be created in one SIPROTEC device. Each of these groups
monitors an adjustable area with binary inputs.

The Signaling-voltage supervision function group contains, besides the general functionality, one preinstan-
tiated Supervision group stage. The Supervision group stage can be instantiated in DIGSI 5 multiple times.
[dw_ivsstr, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-9 Structure/Embedding of the Function Group

You can instantiate the Signaling-voltage supervision function group in the Global DIGSI 5 library. It
contains 1 pre-instantiated Superv.Grp. function block (see the following figure). You can instantiate a
maximum of 25 supervision groups.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[sc_ivslib, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-10 Entry in the Global Library
Following the instantiation of the function group in the DIGSI project tree, it appears in the information
routing of DIGSI (see the following figure). The status indications of the supervision groups can be routed
here, for example, to existing binary outputs and/or logs.
[sc_ivsrou, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-11 Information Routing
Set the binary input used for signaling-voltage supervision within one input/output module using the setting
option (see the following figure). This binary input monitors the presence of the signaling voltage. If the
signaling voltage fails, this sets the quality attribute for all other binary inputs of the parameterized input/
output module to invalid. The signal status of each of these binary inputs is frozen with its last valid value
prior to the occurrence of the fault. The quality attribute of the binary inputs for other input/output modules
are not taken into consideration by this.
If the signaling voltage again exceeds the binary threshold, the quality attribute of the binary inputs is reset to
valid.
[sc_ivsgrp, 2, en_US]
Figure 8-12 Parameterization Menu of the Supervision Group (I)

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
NOTE
i Each status change of the monitored binary inputs is delayed by 3 ms.
You can also combine binary inputs across modules in one Superv.Grp. function block and define any
binary input within this group for supervision of the signaling voltage. For this purpose, place a check mark at
the parameter (_:102) Enable variable group when configuring the supervision group. This extends
the parameterization menu by the sections Supervis. grp. start and Supervis. grp. end (see the
following figure).
[sc_gruppe_de, 2, en_US]
Figure 8-13 Parameterization Menu of the Supervision Group (II)
There, for example, you are able to combine 1 to n different binary inputs into one supervision group. When
doing so, the binary inputs on the input/output modules assignable to a supervision group must be related
logically. With 3 input/output modules, for example, this allows only consecutive binary inputs to be grouped
on the modules 1 and 2 or 2 and 3, but no binary inputs on modules 1 and 3. The binary inputs used for super-
vision can be located on any input/output module within the group defined in this manner.
If you have to monitor several binary inputs that, for example, work with different signaling voltages from
different sources, then you can also instantiate and configure several Superv.Grp. function blocks within
the Signaling-voltage supervision function group accordingly.
Within different supervision groups, only those consecutive binary inputs that are not already assigned to
another supervision group can be grouped. The overlapping of binary inputs in different supervision groups is
not permitted.
Error parameters are displayed to you by inconsistency indications in DIGSI.
Example
There are 4 input/output modules available.
Binary inputs of input/output modules 1 and 2 are already combined in supervision group 1. The 2 last binary
inputs on module 2 are not included in the grouping.
In supervision group 2, only these 2 binary inputs of the input/output module 2 not used in supervision group
1 as well as further consecutive binary inputs of the input/output modules 3 and 4 can be combined.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Parameter (General): Mode

With the Mode parameter, you specify whether you want to activate, deactivate, or test the supervision of the
signaling voltage for the appropriate group. If you put the group into test mode, the Sig. volt.
disturbed indication is given a test flag.
Parameter (Supervision Signal): I/O module ID
• Default setting (_:104) I/O module ID = I/O module 1

Using the I/O module ID parameter, you specify the I/O module for which you want to activate signaling-
voltage supervision. Counting of the I/O modules starts in increasing order with the binary inputs of the base
module. The binary inputs of the PS201 power-supply module permanently installed in the base module count
as the 2nd I/O module followed by additional I/O modules (3 to n) on the expansion boards of the device.
Parameter (Supervision Signal): Binary input
• Default setting (_:105) Binary input = 1

Using the Binary input parameter, you specify the binary input responsible for the supervision of the
signaling voltage for the parameterized I/O module. The quality attribute of all other binary inputs for this
module are set to valid or invalid depending on the presence of the signaling voltage at the parameterized
binary input.
Parameter (Supervision Signal): Enable variable group
• Default setting (_:102) Enable variable group = untrue

You can activate the parameter Enable variable group by placing the checkmark. If you have not set the
check mark (default setting), only these 2 parameters are available for the configuration of the supervision
signal. If you have set the check mark, the parameter menu is extended by the areas Start supervision group
and End supervision group. You can then use that to carry out the grouping of binary inputs for supervision
groups explained in the function description.
Parameter (Start Supervision Group): I/O module ID

Parameter I/O module ID is used to define the first I/O module that you want to assign to a supervision
group. As the counting of the I/O module starts in ascending order with the binary inputs of the base module,
this is the module with the lowest counter number that you can use for carrying out a grouping.
Parameter (Start Supervision Group): Binary input

Parameter Binary input is used to define the lowest binary input for the first I/O module (see (_:106)
I/O module ID) that you want to assign to a supervision group.
Parameter (End Supervision Group): I/O module ID

Parameter I/O module ID is used to define the last I/O module that you want to assign to a supervision
group. As the counting of the I/O module starts in ascending order with the binary inputs of the base module,
this is the module with the highest counter number that you can use for carrying out a grouping.
Parameter (End Supervision Group): Binary input

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Parameter Binary input is used to define the highest binary input for the last I/O module (see (_:108)
I/O module ID) that you want to assign to a supervision group.
8.3.3.5 Settings

General
_:1 Superv.Grp.#:Mode • off on
• on
• test
Superv. signal
_:104 Superv.Grp.#:I/O module • I/O module 1 I/O module 1
ID
• I/O module 2
• I/O module 3
• I/O module 4
• I/O module 5
• I/O module 6
• I/O module 7
• I/O module 8
• I/O module 9
• I/O module 10
• I/O module 11
• I/O module 12
• I/O module 13
• I/O module 14
• I/O module 15
_:105 Superv.Grp.#:Binary 1 to 256 1
input
_:102 Superv.Grp.#:Enable • 0 false
variable group
• 1
Supervis. grp. start
ID
• I/O module 2
• I/O module 3
• I/O module 4
• I/O module 5
• I/O module 6
• I/O module 7
• I/O module 8
• I/O module 9
• I/O module 10
• I/O module 11
• I/O module 12
• I/O module 13
• I/O module 14
• I/O module 15

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

input
Supervis. grp. end
ID
• I/O module 2
• I/O module 3
• I/O module 4
• I/O module 5
• I/O module 6
• I/O module 7
• I/O module 8
• I/O module 9
• I/O module 10
• I/O module 11
• I/O module 12
• I/O module 13
• I/O module 14
• I/O module 15
input

(Type)
Superv.Grp.#
_:52 Superv.Grp.#:Behavior ENS O
_:55 Superv.Grp.#:Sig. volt. disturbed SPS O
8.3.4 Voltage-Transformer Circuit Breaker

The function Voltage-transformer circuit breaker detects the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit
breaker due to short circuits in the voltage-transformer secondary circuits.
The Voltage-transformer circuit breaker function works independently of Measuring-voltage failure detec-
tion and should be used – if possible – in parallel to it.
The tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker impacts the quality of the recorded measured-value
data (refer to 3.4 Processing Quality Attributes).
The following protection functions are automatically blocked if the voltage-transformer circuit breaker trips:
• Distance protection
• Directional negative-sequence protection
• Ground-fault protection for high-resistive faults in grounded systems

For the following functions the reaction (block/not block) can be set within the function in cases of a tripping
of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker:
• Directional overcurrent protection, phases
• Overvoltage protection with negative-sequence voltage

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
• Overvoltage protection with zero-sequence voltage/residual voltage
• Undervoltage protection with 3-phase voltage
• Undervoltage protection with positive-sequence voltage
NOTE
i If the voltage signal is generated using the optional Merging unit function, the quality of the voltage signal
is sent as invalid in the sampled value stream, depending on the status of the voltage-transformer circuit
breaker. For more information about configuring the voltage-transformer circuit breaker function for
devices with merging unit and process-bus client, refer to the Process Bus manual.

The Figure 8-14 shows the position of the function in the device. Every voltage measuring point contains the
Voltage-transformer circuit breaker function.
[dw_mcbstr, 1, en_US]

The tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker is captured via the binary input signal >Open. With an
active input signal the information about the measuring-voltage failure is relayed to the affected functions
(see 8.3.4.1 Overview of Functions). The response to the detection of a measuring-voltage failure is explained
in the specific protection-function descriptions.

The function is always active and need not be switched on.
Input Signal: >Open
• Input signal: (_:500) >Open

The input signal >Open must be connected to the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker. As a rule,
this occurs via the routing to a binary input.
Parameter: Response time of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker
• Recommended setting value (_:101) Response time = 0 ms
8.3.4.5 Settings

VT miniatureCB
_:101 VT miniatureCB:Response 0.00 s to 0.03 s 0.00 s
time

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

(Type)
Definite-T #
_:500 VT miniatureCB:>Open SPS I
8.3.5 Differential Current Supervision
8.3.5.1 Function Overview

The function Differential current supervision picks up if the magnitude of the differential current exceeds a
parameterized value for a set time. Values calculated in Busbar differential protection are used for calcu-
lating the differential currents. Supervision is performed on a phase-selective basis for the selective zones and
for the check zone.
Possible sources of error:
• Incorrectly connected transformer
• Wire break at the transformer connections
• Transformer defect

The Differential current supervision function is part of the busbar protection and is located in the Busbar
function group.
[dw_strdcs, 1, en_US]

During healthy operation, the differential current of every measuring system is virtually 0. This means that the
sum of the instantaneous value of the currents flowing into the busbar is equal to the sum of the instanta-
neous value of the currents flowing out of the busbar (according to Kirchhoff's current law).
If the circuit is incorrectly connected to the protection device, transformer defects exist or the measured-value
acquisition in the protection device is defective, a differential current occurs with faulty acquisition of a
primary current. The differential current of each measuring system is monitored separately, that is, on a
phase-selective basis for each busbar section. If a measuring system is planned, but this measuring system is
not assigned to a bay, the flowing current plays no role in this measuring system for the supervision. The
differential current and the restraint current continue to be monitored (on a phase-selective basis) in the
check zone.
Differential current supervision picks up if the rectified mean value of the differential current is greater than
a limiting value over an adjustable time. You may set the limiting value for the check zone and for the selec-
tive zones separately. Once the differential current drops below the dropout threshold during the set time, the
time is restarted if the limiting value is exceeded again.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
The supervision pickup can be used to block the differential protection, but only the protection ranges
involved are blocked. To do this, you can set parameters for the following 3 operating modes:
• Blocking until dropout:

Pickup of the Differential current supervision results in blocking of the protection ranges involved and
their bay functions such as circuit-breaker failure protection. If the Differential current supervision of
the check zones or bus zones picks up, the phase involved or all 3 phases of all protection ranges are
blocked, depending on the parameter Blockings always 3-ph.. Blocking is reset once the supervi-
sion drops out.
• Blocking until Release:

Pickup of the Differential current supervision results in blocking of the protection ranges involved and
their bay functions such as circuit-breaker failure protection. If the Differential current supervision of
the check zones or the bus zones picks up, the phase involved or all 3 phases of all protection ranges are
blocked, depending on the parameter Blockings always 3-ph.. Once the supervision function has
dropped out, you can use an operator action to cancel the blocking. Depending on the parameter
Block. not bus-zone sel., all protection ranges or only the affected protection range are blocked.
• Only report:
Supervision pickup has no effect on operation of the differential protection, that is, no blocking occurs.
The Differential current supervision pickup for the protection ranges is indicated on a phase-selective basis
using a group indication.
Logic
[lo_dcsbuz_dbbp, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-16 Logic Diagram for Differential Current Supervision of the Selective Zones

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[lo_dcschz_dbbp, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-17 Logic Diagram for Differential Current Supervision of the Check Zone
The following figure shows an overview of the pickup indications for the Differential current supervision
function.
[lo_dcsgri, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-18 Group Indications of the Differential Current Supervision Function

Unless otherwise specified, you may use the DIGSI operating program to set all values.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
NOTE
i Limitations with regard to teletransmission may occur for some of the following parameters. If the device
works with the IEC 61850 protocol, then you change the setting value of the parameter only via DIGSI 5
and not directly on the device. If you change the setting value directly on the device, then the IEC 61850
configuration of the measured values can be faulty.
Parameter: Mode
• Recommended setting value (_:12031:1) Mode = on

With the Mode parameter, you can switch the Differential current supervision function on or off.
The on setting causes the Differential current supervision to be switched on. Differential current supervision
must remain switched on during normal operation.
The off setting causes the Differential current supervision to be switched off. For test purposes, differential
current supervision can be switched off (for example, when the operate curve is being recorded).
Parameter: Thresh. Id superv. BZ
• Recommended setting value (_:12031:100) Thresh. Id superv. BZ = 0.10 I/IrObj

The Thresh. Id superv. BZ parameter is used to set the limiting value Id/lno of the selective Differential
current supervision.
Siemens recommends setting the Thresh. Id superv. BZ parameter to twice the differential current
occurring during operation (up to 10 % of the normalization current). In addition, the value should be smaller
than the operating current of the feeder with the smallest rated operating current.
NOTE
i For low-load busbars, the unfavorable influence of current-transformer errors can lead to a higher differen-
tial current than with higher-loaded plants.
Parameter: Thresh. Id superv. CZ
• Recommended setting value (_:12031:101) Thresh. Id superv. CZ = 0.10 I/IrObj

The Thresh. Id superv. CZ parameter is used to set the limiting value Id/lno of the Differential current
supervision in the check zone.
Siemens recommends setting the Thresh. Id superv. CZ parameter to twice the differential current
occurring during operation (up to 10 % of the normalization current). In addition, the value should be smaller
than the operating current of the feeder with the smallest rated operating current.
Parameter: Id superv. t. delay
• Recommended setting value (_:12031:102) Id superv. t. delay = 2.00 s

With the Id superv. t. delay parameter, you set the time delay for blocking and the indication if the
Differential current supervision picks up.
Parameter: Id superv. reaction BZ
• Default setting (_:12031:103) Id superv. reaction BZ = Blocking until dropout

With the Id superv. reaction BZ parameter, you set the behavior for the protection if the Differential
current supervision for the selective zones picks up.
If you select the setting Blocking until dropout, the protection will be blocked on a phase-selective and
zone-selective basis for the duration of the fault.
If you select the setting Alarm only, the pickup of the Differential current supervision function will only
be indicated and the protection will not be blocked.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
If you select the setting Blocking until release, the protection will be blocked independent of the
duration of the fault. The protection can be released with the operation command Reset ID MonBlk or with
the binary input >Reset ID MonBlk if the fault is corrected.
Parameter: Id superv. reaction CZ
• Default setting (_:12031:104) Id superv. reaction CZ = Alarm only

With the Id superv. reaction CZ parameter, you set the behavior of the protection for the check zone if
the Differential current supervision picks up.
If you select the setting Alarm only, the pickup of the Differential current supervision function will only
be indicated and the protection will not be blocked. Siemens recommends this setting in order to provide a
protection as selective as possible.
If you select the setting Blocking until dropout, the protection will be blocked for the duration of the
fault. If a fault occurs in the check zone, the corresponding phase of the entire protection is blocked. Blocking
is canceled as soon as the pickup threshold is no longer exceeded.
If you select the setting Blocking until release, the protection will be blocked independent of the
duration of the fault. The protection can be released with the operation command Reset ID MonBlk or with
the binary input >Reset ID MonBlk if the fault is corrected.
NOTE
i Keep in mind that even small differential currents caused by faults (for example, closed current transformer
terminals) are detected and indicated. In the case of larger plants, large differential currents (up to 10 % of
the normalization current) resulting from operation may occur due to current transformers having major
faults while under low loads.
Rule: As sensitive as possible, as unresponsive as necessary.
You can find additional information under information routing in DIGSI and in the previous figure.
8.3.5.5 Settings

Diff. I superv
_:12031:1 Diff. I superv:Mode • off on
• on
_:12031:100 Diff. I superv:Thresh. Id 0.05 I/IrObj to 0.80 I/IrObj 0.10 I/IrObj
superv. BZ
_:12031:101 Diff. I superv:Thresh. Id 0.05 I/IrObj to 0.80 I/IrObj 0.10 I/IrObj
superv. CZ
_:12031:102 Diff. I superv:Id superv. t. 1.00 s to 10.00 s 2.00 s
delay
_:12031:103 Diff. I superv:Id superv. • Alarm only Blocking until
reaction BZ dropout
• Blocking until dropout
• Blocking until release
_:12031:104 Diff. I superv:Id superv. • Alarm only Alarm only
reaction CZ

(Type)
Diff. I superv
_:12031:500 Diff. I superv:>Block SPS I

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

(Type)
_:12031:501 Diff. I superv:>Reset diff.curr.sup. SPS I
_:12031:303 Diff. I superv:Reset diff.curr.sup. SPC C
_:12031:54 Diff. I superv:Inactive SPS O
_:12031:52 Diff. I superv:Behavior ENS O
_:12031:53 Diff. I superv:Health ENS O
_:12031:300 Diff. I superv:Alarm ACT O
8.3.6 Zero-Crossing Supervision

Decay processes without zero crossings can occur when switching off current transformers. These can simu-
late a differential current to the differential protection and possibly lead to tripping. The Zero crossing super-
vision checks the differential current for zero crossings and prevents disconnection.

The Zero crossing supervision function is part of the busbar protection and is located in the Busbar function
group.
[dw_strzcs, 1, en_US]

If the current is disconnected on the primary side, current continues to flow in the transformer circuit on the
secondary side. Linearized transformers show a relatively large angle error between the primary and secon-
dary current. The decay processes are characterized by substantial amplitude values, which can reach the
range of the pickup value of the differential protection. If the transformers show different behavior for the
individual feeders in response to decaying secondary-current components, a differential current can arise. The
Busbar differential protection cannot distinguish this current from a differential current caused by a bus
fault. Setting the Zero-crossing supervision to 50 % of the pickup value of the differential protection ensures
its stability.
Immediately after the shutdown process, the saved restraint current prevents unwanted tripping. The restraint
current decays as an exponential function with a time constant of 64 ms. The Zero-crossing supervision
function checks the differential current for zero crossovers and prevents a false shutdown, even when the
restraint current has decayed. If the zero crossings of the current do not recur after max. 32 ms (frated = 50 Hz)
or 27 ms (frated = 60 Hz), the measuring system detects a direct current and blocks the protection. This
blocking occurs for the affected phase or for all 3 phases depending on the parameter Blockings always
3-ph.. Blocking remains in effect until the current drops below the limiting value for the Zero-crossing
supervision.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[dw_zcsaus, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-20 Example of Satisfying the Tripping Criterion
The Zero-crossing supervision logic operates phase-selectively for the individual busbar sections. Pickup
results in blocking of the phase-selective busbar section.
The following indications are generated only if the tripping criteria for the corresponding system are satisfied:
• (_:11881:310) Alarm zero-cross.sup. for the individual busbars
• (_:12091:310) Alarm zero-cross.sup. as a group indication for all busbars

According to these indications, tripping has been suppressed on the basis of Zero-crossing supervision.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Logic Diagrams for Zero-Crossing Supervision
[lo_zcsbuz, 2, en_US]
Figure 8-21 Logic Diagrams for Zero-Crossing Supervision of the Selective Zones

(Type)
Zero-cross. superv.
_:12061:54 Zero-cross. superv.:Inactive SPS O
_:12061:52 Zero-cross. superv.:Behavior ENS O
_:12061:53 Zero-cross. superv.:Health ENS O
_:12061:300 Zero-cross. superv.:Alarm SPS O
Bus zone gen.
_:12091:310 Bus zone gen.:Alarm zero-cross.sup. SPS O
8.3.7 Disconnector Supervision

The Disconnector supervision function monitors the disconnectors for runtime, plausibility of the discon-
nector position and auxiliary voltage. The assignment of the measuring currents to the individual busbar
sections depends on the positions of the disconnector. The positions of the disconnectors that are connected
to the individual sections via the current transformer in the bay proxy are evaluated. For every possible discon-
nector position, an unambiguous assignment of Off or On is made for the differential protection.

Supervision of disconnector positions is part of the disconnector processing and superordinate functions.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
You can find additional information on the disconnector-supervision settings and indications in chapter
5.5.1 Overview
Disconnector Positions
Siemens recommends using the following 2 binary inputs for determining the position of a disconnector.
• 1 auxiliary contact for the On position (closed)
• 1 auxiliary contact for the Off position (open)

The protection device evaluates these auxiliary contacts. The following states are possible with the combina-
tion of these auxiliary contacts:
The assignment of a bay current to a busbar section is mainly controlled by the auxiliary contact for the Off
position. As soon as this information of the disconnector changes, the disconnector is assumed On, that is also
for example during its runtime from Off to On. Consequently, neither the runtime nor the adjustment of the 2
auxiliary contacts plays a role. It must only be ensured that the auxiliary contact for the Off position opens
5 ms earlier than the arc striking distance of the disconnector is reached. The auxiliary contact for On is used
for the runtime measurement and plausibility. For an acquisition value of the disconnector runtime that is an
accurate as possible, the end contacts of the disconnector should be used.
Table 8-1 Possible States of the Disconnector Positions and the Effect on the Protection Functions
Signal Discon- Signal Discon- Meaning Effect on the Busbar Failure Indication
nector On nector Off Differential Protec-
tion and Circuit-
Breaker Failure
Protection
Active Inactive On position clearly Disconnector is –
recognizable considered closed
Inactive Active Off position clearly The disconnector is –
recognizable considered open
Inactive Inactive If all disconnectors in a bay are not in this state:
Disconnector is in The disconnector state Indication Discon-
intermediate state is considered closed nector runtime
between Off and On exceeded after the
The disconnector is disconnector runtime
assumed to be in the has elapsed
operating position
If all disconnectors in a bay are in this state:
The disconnector Depending on the No disconnector
auxiliary voltage for parameter State in auxiliary voltage
the entire bay has the absence of indication after 0.5 s
failed voltage - closed or -
last valid position
Active Active The disconnector Disconnector is Disconnector distur-
state cannot be deter- considered closed bance indication after
mined. expiration of the set
The disconnector is disconnector runtime.
considered disturbed
Unrouted Unrouted Disconnector is not No effect No supervision and no
used failure indication
One feature of the Disconnector supervision function is the following operating modes:
• Bay out of service
• Acquisition blocking

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
In these states, all supervision involving the disconnectors is deactivated.

Only when a binary input is used is the supervision omitted. In this case, the disconnector Off signal must be
routed.
Disconnector Input Logic

For better understanding of the Disconnector acquisition blocking, part of the logic for disconnector
processing is described in the following text.
As long as Acquisition blocking is not set, the inputs for acquisition of the disconnector position are
converted directly into the appropriate internal signals. If Acquisition blocking is set, the last acquired state is
frozen and used for the internal processing.
Disconnector Supervision Logic
Disconnector Runtime Error and Disconnector Disturbed Position

When a disconnector leaves its position, for instance, the Off position, it needs a certain amount of time
(disconnector runtime) to reach the other position (0-0, intermediate position). When the Off and On discon-
nector positions occur simultaneously, that is, the disconnector position is not valid, the disconnector is in a
disturbed position (1-1, disturbed position). During the runtime and in the disturbed position, the discon-
nector for the disconnector image or for the internal processing in the protection is considered to be On. The
disconnector supervision logic recognizes the states Intermediate position and Disturbed position. In both
cases, a time stage is started that creates the appropriate failure indication Disc. runtime exceeded or
Disc. disturbance and the group failure indication Sw. fault alarm after the disconnector runtime
set in the parameters expired. The indication Sw. fault alarm results, with the appropriate parameteriza-
tion, in selective blocking of the differential protection. If the disconnector supervision is set to Alarm only,
differential protection is not blocked.
Detection of Disconnector Auxiliary Voltage Outage

The auxiliary voltage of the disconnectors for a bay is protected individually. If all disconnectors for a bay (that
is, for a feeder) are in the intermediate position (logical state 0-0), it is assumed that the auxiliary voltage for
the disconnector state signals has failed. Instead of Disc. runtime exceeded, the indication Disc.pos.
aux. volt. lost will then be output. To prevent error messages, there is a short delay of 500 ms in
response and indication of the auxiliary-voltage failure. To differentiate between runtime errors, at least 2
disconnectors are monitored. The reaction to an outage of the disconnector auxiliary voltage for the internal
processing can be set using the Disc.pos. aux. volt. lost parameter. Either the last valid discon-
nector state is used or the disconnector is evaluated as On. When truck-type switchgears are used, the indica-
tion Disc.pos. aux. volt. lost is also output when there is an auxiliary-voltage failure.
Broken-Wire Detection
When there is a wire break, apparent intermediate position is signaled (see below) and evaluated for the
disconnector image as On.
Preference
If all the following conditions are met, the preference can cause a non-selective disconnection if a bus fault
occurs:
• A wire break in the wire that provides feedback about the disconnector position
• The disconnector is in the Off position.
• The 2nd disconnector for the feeder is switched on.
• A fault on a busbar
The first 3 items result in a preference because of the wire break. A simultaneous fault on a busbar results in
an unselective disconnection. Non-selective disconnection can be avoided through additional measures. One
such measure is, for example, interlocking of Off in the bay via additional CFC logic for overcurrent querying.
Wire breaks are indicated as a disconnector runtime error.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Releasing the Disconnector Supervision after Pickup

The user can set parameters for different actions in this situation:
• Blocking the Busbar differential protection/Circuit-breaker failure protection remains in effect as long
as the criteria for pickup of disconnector supervision are satisfied.
Blocking is canceled only in response to a suitable control action after the criteria for pickup are no longer
satisfied.
• Blocking of the Busbar differential protection/Circuit-breaker failure protection starts with pickup of
disconnector supervision. Even if the pickup criteria are still present, you can remove the blocking by
appropriate control actions.
In this case, the indication Sw. gear op. prohibited is output as long as the criteria for pickup of
supervision are still present. The differential protection would not correctly recognize a change in the
disconnector position and the internal image of the protection range might no longer agree with reality,
which could cause non-selective tripping as a consequence
• When setting the disconnector monitor to Alarm only, acknowledgment is not required. With this
setting, the indication Sw. gear op. prohibited is not generated.
The states of the disconnector supervision are presented in the following table.
Acquisition of the Disconnector Meaning Protection Response
Position (Binary Input) Indication to Busbar Protection
On Off
1 0 Disconnector in On position Disconnector On
Disconnector off = closed
0 1 Disconnector in Off position Disconnector Off
Disconnector open
1 1 Disconnector in disturbed position Disconnector On
Disconnector closed
0 0 Disconnector in intermediate posi- Disconnector On (not Off)
tion
Disconnector closed
Runtime error
Wire break
Auxiliary-voltage failure
Values such as On, Off, Disturbed position can vary. A disconnector disturbance associated with the indica-
tion Disc.pos. aux. volt. lost, Disc. runtime exceeded or Disc. disturbance, issues the
indication Sw. fault alarm. This is cleared by the indication Sw. gear op. prohibited once the
disconnector disturbance has been acknowledged.
If a bay is in the state Bay out of operation or Acquisition blocking active, the disconnector feedback and
the plausibility of the disconnector position are not monitored.
If one busbar prefers another, the indication Prefers BZ appears after the disconnector runtime elapses.
The busbar preferred by another also indicates this by Preferred by BZ after the disconnector runtime
elapses. The appropriate indications are output as cleared without delay with the cleared preference.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[lo_disconnector_supervision, 3, en_US]
Figure 8-22 Logic Diagram of Disconnector Supervision
(1) While in intermediate position and if auxiliary voltage has not failed: after 200 ms have elapsed,
switch the previous position to On.
(2) With truck-type switchgear, the supervision of the circuit breaker is linked in the logic:
- If all circuit breakers and disconnectors of the bay are in the intermediate position, the auxiliary-
voltage failure of the bay is detected. In this case, as with the disconnectors, the parameter
Disc.pos. aux. volt. lost is used for the circuit-breaker switch position.
- Circuit-breaker failure and runtime errors are treated in the same manner as in the case of the
disconnectors.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Disconnector Alarm Acknowledgement

Depending on the setting of the parameter Reaction on disc. flt alarm, various types of blocking
behavior are generated, refer to the following figures. The function is acknowledged with the command Reset
DI MonBlk or the binary input >Reset blk. sw. fault.
[dw_trfaul, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-23 Indications and Commands in the Event of Disconnector Disturbance
[dw_trblok, 2, en_US]
Figure 8-24 Blocking Behavior in the Event of Disconnector Runtime Error or Disturbed Position
[dw_tralt1, 2, en_US]
Figure 8-25 Disconnector Processing

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[dw_spgaux, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-26 Indications and Commands in the Event of Auxiliary-Voltage Failure
[dw_veraux, 2, en_US]
Figure 8-27 Behavior in the Event of Auxiliary-Voltage Failure
[dw_tralt2, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-28 Disconnector Processing in the Event of Auxiliary-Voltage Failure

You can find the following parameters in the project tree under Parameters, Device Settings.
NOTE
i Any changes made here affect all disconnectors in this device.
Parameter: Max. disc. runtime
• Recommended setting value (_:102) Max. disc. runtime = 7.00 s

The Max. disc. runtime parameter allows you to set the limiting value of the disconnector runtime.
If the disconnector final position is not indicated after this time expires, the protection considers this to be a
failure and outputs an indication. Set the disconnector runtime here for all the disconnectors at one time. The
raising of the indications Prefers BZ and Preferred by BZ is output after a delay set in the parameter
Max. disc. runtime. The clearing of both indications, on the other hand, is always output without delay.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Parameter: Disc.pos. aux. volt. lost
• Default setting (_:104) Disc.pos. aux. volt. lost = old

With the Disc.pos. aux. volt. lost parameter, you select which disconnector position is taken from
the disconnector image when there is no auxiliary voltage for disconnector feedback in the bay. When truck-
type switchgear is used, the setting value also applies for the circuit breaker used.
If the parameter is set to old, the previous disconnector position will be used.
If the parameter is set to on, the disconnector position On is used.
Parameter: Reaction on disc. flt alarm
• Default setting (_:105) Reaction on disc. flt alarm = Alarm only

With the Reaction on disc. flt alarm parameter, you select the response of the protection for discon-
nector disturbance (runtime error, plausibility error, and auxiliary-voltage failure). When truck-type switchgear
is used, the setting value also applies for the circuit breaker used.
The Alarm only setting causes disconnector faults to be only indicated. There is no blocking.
The Blocking until dropout setting causes indication of disconnector faults and blocking of the
connected busbar section. If all disconnector faults are eliminated, the blocking is canceled automatically.
The Blocking until release setting causes indication of disconnector faults and blocking of the protec-
tion system. Blocking is canceled only after the fault has been corrected and the blocking acknowledged inten-
tionally via the binary input >Reset Blk. DI Ctrl..
The Blocking until ackn. setting causes indication of disconnector faults and blocking of the connected
busbar section. If blocking was reset intentionally via the binary input > Reset Blk. DI Ctrl., even if the fault
continues, blocking is canceled. The indication Sw. gear op. prohibited is generated as a warning. The
failure-indication entry in the operational log corresponds to the actual occurrence of the disconnector distur-
bance.
Depending on the parameter Block. not bus-zone sel., all protection ranges or only the affected
protection range are blocked.
8.3.7.5 Settings

Switch superv.
_:102 Switch superv.:Max. disc. 1.00 s to 180.00 s 7.00 s
runtime
_:104 Switch superv.:Disc.pos. • old old
aux. volt. lost
• on
_:105 Switch superv.:Reaction on • Alarm only Alarm only
disc. flt alarm
• Blocking until ackn.

(Type)
General
_:310 General:Sw. gear op. prohibited SPS O
_:311 General:Sw. aux. volt. failure SPS O
_:312 General:Sw. fault alarm SPS O
Supervision
_:12631:301 Supervision:Disc. runtime exceeded SPS O
_:12631:302 Supervision:Disc. disturbance SPS O

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
8.3.8 Circuit-Breaker Monitoring

The query of the circuit-breaker switch position in the bays is required both for the End-fault protection and
for the Circuit-breaker failure protection (with authorization of the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts). The
Circuit-breaker supervision function responds when the position signal indicated via the auxiliary contact is
not plausible. Pickup of the supervision leads to an error message (see the following table).
The position of the circuit breaker affects the following protection functions:
– In the feeder
– In the dead zone of the bus couplers

Trip decision that is not based on a current measurement but rather on the circuit-breaker switch position
of closed (low-load situation).
A non-plausible circuit-breaker switch position can be detected only if the auxiliary contacts for the closed
position as well as for the open position are detected by the protection device.

In busbar protection, Circuit-breaker supervision is distributed in the following components among different
functions:
• Circuit-breaker position recognition:

Acquisition of the binary inputs with detection of the states
– Closed
– Open
– Intermediate position
– Disturbed position
These positions are formed without delay from the respective auxiliary-contact input signals. In addition,
these positions are issued as information (indications).
• End-fault protection with blocking/release logic based on circuit-breaker switch position
• Circuit-breaker failure protection with blockage/release logic via circuit-breaker switch position if
circuit-breaker switch position is activated according to parameter (_:103) CB aux.cont. crit.
allowed.
• If using circuit breakers as disconnectors in truck-type switchgear or in the event of transfer-busbar

mode, the circuit-breaker position recognition also affects the disconnector image.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[dw_cbrsup, 1, en_US]

The busbar protection has the ability to acquire the signals >Circuit breaker closed and >Circuit breaker
open in a 3-pole or 1-pole phase-selective way, depending on whether it is configured with 3-pole or 1-/3-pole
circuit breakers. You can find more information in chapter 5.3.6.3 Acquisition of Circuit-Breaker Auxiliary
Contacts and Further Information.
The following signals from the circuit breaker can be acquired:
• Circuit breaker in the 3-pole On position (CB On)
• Circuit breaker in the 3-pole Off position (CB Off)
• Phase-selective circuit breaker in the 1-pole On position, phases A, B, C (CB On)
• Phase-selective circuit breaker in the 1-pole Off position, phases A, B, C (CB Off)
• Circuit breaker ON control command (CB ON command)

You can find a detailed description of the signal CB ON command in chapter 8.3.13 Supervision of Binary
Inputs.
The following table provides an overview of the protection responses based on the position of the circuit-
breaker auxiliary contacts.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Table 8-2 Possible States of the Circuit-Breaker Auxiliary Contacts and Effect on the Protection Functions
CB pole Auxiliary-Contact Signal of the Meaning Protection Response

Circuit-Breaker Switch Position
Circuit breaker Circuit breaker End-fault protec- CBFP (auxiliary-
closed signal open signal tion contact evalua-
tion)
3-pole Active Inactive 3-pole closed Blocked Effective
Active Unrouted 3-pole closed Blocked Effective
Inactive Active 3-pole open Time delay active Blocked
1)
Unrouted Active 3-pole open Time delay active Blocked

1)
Inactive Unrouted Not 3-pole closed Blocked Blocked

Unrouted Inactive Not 3-pole open Blocked Blocked
Unrouted Unrouted Unknown state Blocked Blocked
Inactive Inactive Intermediate posi- Blocked Time delay blocked
tion or 2)
1-pole open or
Auxiliary-voltage
failure
Active Active Disturbed position Blocked Time delay blocked
2)
Polex 3) Active Inactive Polex closed Blocked Effective 4)

Active Unrouted Polex closed Blocked Effective 4)
Inactive Active Polex open Time delay active Blocked
1)
Unrouted Active Polex open Time delay active Blocked

1)
Inactive Unrouted Polex not closed Blocked Blocked

Unrouted Inactive Polex not open Blocked Effective
Unrouted Unrouted Unknown state Blocked Blocked
Inactive Inactive Intermediate posi- Blocked Time delay blocked
tion or 2)
Auxiliary-voltage
failure
Active Active Disturbed position Blocked Time delay blocked
2)
1)Time delay active implies that the Open position during the transition from closed to open is effective
after the set time delay has elapsed.
2)Time delayed blocking indicates that the incoming blocking is delayed by the preset circuit-breaker supervi-
sion time (applicable only if the previous state was active).
3) Polex applies to all A, B, and C.
4) Only effective if the active signal is also available for all 3 poles (refer to Figure 8-15)
Behavior in the Event of Acquisition Blocking

With Acquisition blocking activated, the signals acquired from the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts are
frozen. Status changes thus no longer have any effect on the processing and supervision of the circuit-breaker
position.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[lo_cbsvab, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-30 Input Logic of the Circuit-Breaker Switch Position in the Event of Acquisition Blocking
The following figure shows parts of the blocking/release logic for End-fault protection that evaluates the
circuit-breaker switch position. Preprocessing of the auxiliary-contact signals provides the input signals used
for this purpose. These signals are formed from the auxiliary-contact states acquired via the inputs (usually,
binary inputs) without consideration of the current flow.
[lo_cbsvef, 2, en_US]
Figure 8-31 Release Logic Based on the Circuit-Breaker Switch Position for End-Fault Protection
(1) Linking the Closed signal and Open signal, if routed to the input.
(2) Intermediate position and Disturbed position are possible only if the Open as well as the
Closed position are detected.
The following figure shows parts of the blocking/release logic for the low-current operating mode of the
Circuit-breaker failure protection that evaluates the circuit-breaker auxiliary contact. Preprocessing of the
auxiliary-contact signals provides the input signals used for this purpose. These signals are formed from the
auxiliary-contact states acquired via the inputs (binary inputs) without consideration of the current flow.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[lo_cbsvbf, 2, en_US]
Figure 8-32 Release Logic of the Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection with Circuit-Breaker Auxiliary-Contact
Evaluation
(1) Linking the Closed signal and Open signal, if routed to the input.
(2) Intermediate position and Disturbed position are possible only if the Open as well as the
Closed position are detected.
(3) Switching to Intermediate position and Disturbed position delayed by the parameter Circuit-
breaker supervision time
The states of the by circuit-breaker supervision are presented in the following table.
Indication of Circuit-Breaker Meaning Protection Response
Switch Position (Binary Input) Busbar Protection Indication
On Off
1 0 Circuit breaker in On position Circuit breaker On
Circuit breaker closed
0 1 Circuit breaker in Off position Circuit breaker Off
Circuit breaker open
1 1 Circuit breaker in disturbed posi- Circuit breaker On
tion
0 0 Circuit breaker in intermediate Circuit breaker On (not Off)
position
Runtime error
Wire break
Auxiliary-voltage failure

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Parameter: Max. CB runtime
• Recommended setting value (_:101) Max. CB runtime = 7.00 s

With the Max. CB runtime parameter, you set the limiting value for the disconnector runtime.
If the circuit-breaker final position is not indicated after this time has expired, the protection considers this to
be a fault and generates an indication. The setting for circuit-breaker runtime supervision is used to improve
the adaptation of the flow of switching operations (restart cycles of the circuit breaker). The circuit-breaker
supervision time is set jointly for all circuit breakers and thus depends on the longest circuit-breaker runtime
encountered.
8.3.8.5 Settings

Supervision
_:101 Supervision:Max. CB 1.00 s to 180.00 s 7.00 s
runtime

(Type)
Supervision
_:301 Supervision:CB runtime exceeded SPS O
_:302 Supervision:CB disturbance SPS O
8.3.9 Voltage-Balance Supervision

In healthy system operation, a certain balance between voltages can be assumed.
The Voltage-balance supervision function detects the following errors:
• Unbalance of phase-to-phase voltages in the secondary circuit
• Connection errors during commissioning or short circuits and interruptions in the secondary circuit
The voltage measurement is based on the RMS values of the fundamental component.

The Voltage-balance supervision function is located in the Power-system data of each 3-phase voltage
measuring point.
[dw_strusy, 2, en_US]

The voltage balance is checked by a magnitude supervision function. This function relates the smallest phase-
to-phase voltage to the largest phase-to-phase voltage. Unbalance is detected if

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
|Vmin| / |Vmax| < Threshold min/max, as long as Vmax > Release threshold
[lo_kenuns, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-34 Characteristic of the Voltage-Balance Supervision
Logic
[lo_sp_asym, 5, en_US]
Figure 8-35 Logic Diagram of the Voltage-Balance Supervision

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
The Threshold min/max parameter is the criterion by which a phase-to-phase voltage unbalance is meas-
ured. The device calculates the ratio between the minimum (Vmin) and the maximum (Vmax) phase-to-phase
voltage.
Enter the lower limit of the maximum phase-to-phase voltage (Vmax) with the parameter Release
threshold. This specifies the lower limit of the operating range of this function.
Delay failure indication

If it falls below the balance factor Threshold min/max and at the same time the maximum phase-to-phase
voltage exceeds the Release threshold, the delay of the failure indication (parameter: Delay failure
indication) starts. If both conditions persist during this time, the indication Failure is generated.
Blocking the Function

The following blockings reset the picked up function completely:
• Externally or internally via the binary input signal >Block function
• A protection pickup
The pickup signal of a protection function blocks the Failure indication.
Parameter: Threshold min/max
• Recommended setting value (_:102) Threshold min/max = 0.75

The Threshold min/max parameter is used to set the ratio between the minimum (Vmin) and the maximum
(Vmax) phase-to-phase voltage. Siemens recommends using the default setting.
Parameter: Release threshold
• Recommended setting value (_:101) Release threshold = 50 V

With the Release threshold parameter you set the lower limit of the maximum phase-to-phase voltage
(Vmax). Siemens recommends using the default setting.
Parameter: Delay failure indication
• Recommended setting value (_:6) Delay failure indication = 5.00 s

Set the Delay failure indication parameter so that overfunctions due to disturbing influences (such as
switching operations) are avoided. Siemens recommends using the default setting.
8.3.9.5 Settings

Supv. balan. V
_:1 Supv. balan. V:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:101 Supv. balan. V:Release 0.300 V to 170.000 V 50.000 V
threshold
_:102 Supv. balan. V:Threshold 0.58 to 0.95 0.75
min/max
_:6 Supv. balan. V:Delay 0.00 sto 100.00 s 5.00 s
failure indication

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

(Type)
Supv. balan. V
_:82 Supv. balan. V:>Block function SPS I
_:54 Supv. balan. V:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Supv. balan. V:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Supv. balan. V:Health ENS O
_:71 Supv. balan. V:Failure SPS O
8.3.10 Voltage-Sum Supervision

In healthy system operation, the sum of all voltages at one measuring point must be approximately 0. The
Voltage-sum supervision monitors the sum of all voltages of one measuring point in the secondary circuit. It
detects connection errors during commissioning or short circuits and interruptions in the secondary circuit. For
summation of the voltages, the 3 phase-to-ground voltages and the residual voltage (da-dn - voltage of an
open-circuited delta winding) are required.
The voltage measurement is based on the RMS values of the fundamental component.
NOTE
i For the Voltage-sum supervision, the externally generated residual voltage must be connected to the 4th
voltage measuring input.
For the Voltage-sum supervision to work correctly, the Matching ratio Vph / VN parameter must be
set accordingly.

The Voltage-sum supervision function is located in the Power-system data function group of each 3-phase
voltage measuring point.
[dw_strvss, 2, en_US]

The voltage sum is generated by addition of the voltage phasors. Errors in the voltage circuits are detected if
VF = |VA + VB + VC - Vph/VN • VN| > Threshold, where Vph/VN forms the Matching ratio Vph / VN
parameter.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[lo_kenvss-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-37 Characteristic of the Voltage-Sum Supervision
Logic
[lo_volt-sum-supervision, 5, en_US]
Figure 8-38 Logic Diagram of the Voltage-Sum Supervision
The device measures the phase-to-ground voltage and the ground voltage of the lines to be protected. The
sum of the 4 voltages must be 0.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Threshold
If the calculated fault voltage (VF) exceeds the Threshold the parameter Delay failure indication
triggers the indication Failure.
The device calculates the fault voltage (VF) with the formula:
VF = |VA + VB + VC - Vph/UN • UN|, where Vph/VN forms the Matching ratio Vph / VN parameter.
The Matching ratio Vph / VN parameter takes into account the differing transformation ratios between
the residual voltage input and the phase-voltage inputs.
You can find more information in this respect in chapter 8.3.10.1 Overview of Functions ).

When the threshold value for the delay of the failure indication (parameter: Delay failure indication)
is exceeded, the indication Failure is generated.
Blocking the Function

The following blockings reset the picked up function completely:
• Externally or internally via the binary input signal >Block function
• A protection pickup
The pickup signal of a protection function blocks the Failure indication.
• Recommended setting value (_:3) Threshold = 25 V

The Threshold parameter is used to set the voltage which the device uses to recognize the calculated fault
voltage (VF) as a failure of the voltage sums. Siemens recommends using the default setting.

8.3.10.5 Settings

Supv. sum V
_:1 Supv. sum V:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:3 Supv. sum V:Threshold 0.300 V to 170.000 V 43.300 V
_:6 Supv. sum V:Delay 0.00 sto 100.00 s 5.00 s
failure indication

(Type)
Supv. sum V
_:82 Supv. sum V:>Block function SPS I
_:54 Supv. sum V:Inactive SPS O

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

(Type)
_:52 Supv. sum V:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Supv. sum V:Health ENS O
_:71 Supv. sum V:Failure SPS O
8.3.11 Voltage Phase-Rotation Supervision

The Voltage phase-rotation supervision function monitors the phase sequence of the secondary-circuit
voltages by monitoring the sequence of the zero crossings (with same sign) of the voltages. This enables the
device to detect connections that were inverted during commissioning. The criterion for the check is the
setting of the Phase sequence parameter.

The Voltage phase-rotation supervision function is located in the Power-system data of each 3-phase
voltage measuring point.
[dw_strvrs, 3, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Logic
[lo_volt-phs-rotation-supervision, 5, en_US]
Figure 8-40 Logic Diagram of the Voltage Phase-Rotation Supervision
The phase rotation is important for protection functions which process phase, loop, and directional informa-
tion. You can set the phase sequence with the Phase sequence parameter in the function block General of
the power-system data (see chapter 5.10 Power-System Data).
To supervise the phase rotation, the device compares the measured phase sequence with the set phase
sequence. For abnormal phase sequences, the indication Failure is generated.
The connection of the voltages to the device does not depend on the selected phase sequence. The connec-
tion diagrams are shown in chapter A Appendix.
Release Condition
The supervision of the voltage phase rotation is carried out when all measured phase-to-phase voltages are
greater than 40 V.
Blocking of the Function

The following blockings reset the function completely:
• Via the binary input signal >Block function from an external or internal source
• Via a protection pickup

The pickup signal from a protection function blocks the indication Failure.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

When the device detects an inverted phase-rotation direction for the duration of the Delay failure indi-
cation, the indication Failure is generated.

8.3.11.5 Settings

Supv. ph.seq.V
_:1 Supv. ph.seq.V:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:6 Supv. ph.seq.V:Delay 0.00 s to 100.00 s 5.00 s
failure indication

(Type)
Supv. ph.seq.V
_:82 Supv. ph.seq.V:>Block function SPS I
_:54 Supv. ph.seq.V:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Supv. ph.seq.V:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Supv. ph.seq.V:Health ENS O
_:71 Supv. ph.seq.V:Failure SPS O
8.3.12 Trip-Circuit Supervision

The Trip-circuit supervision function recognizes disruptions in the trip circuit. When 2 binary inputs are used,
the function recognizes all disruptions in the trip circuit. If only 1 binary input is available, it will not recognize
disruptions at the circuit-breaker.
The control voltage for the circuit breaker must be greater than the sum of the minimum voltage drops at the
binary inputs VCtrl > 2 VBImin. At least 19 V are required for each binary input. This makes the supervision usable
only with a system-side control voltage of > 38 V.

The trip-circuit supervision is integrated into the Circuit-breaker function group. Depending on the number of
available binary inputs, it works with 1 or 2 binary inputs.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[dw_tcsueb, 1, en_US]
8.3.12.3 Trip-Circuit Supervision with 2 Binary Inputs

In order to recognize disruptions in the trip circuit for each switch position, you need 2 binary inputs. One
input is connected parallel to the respective command relay of the protection, the other parallel to the circuit-
breaker auxiliary contact.
The following figure shows the principle of the trip-circuit supervision with 2 binary inputs.
[dw_1pole_2bi, 2, en_US]
Figure 8-42 Principle of Trip-Circuit Supervision with 2 Binary Inputs
CR Command relay
CB Circuit breaker (open)
CB coil Circuit-breaker coil
AuxCon1 Circuit-breaker auxiliary contact (make contact)
AuxCon2 Circuit-breaker auxiliary contact (break contact)
V-Ctrl Control voltage (tripping voltage)
V-BI1 Input voltage for binary input 1
V-BI2 Input voltage for binary input 2
Supervision with 2 binary inputs identifies disruptions in the trip circuit and the outage of the control voltage.
It also monitors the reaction of the circuit breaker by way of the position of the circuit-breaker auxiliary
contacts.
Depending on the switch position of the command relay and circuit breaker, the binary inputs are either acti-
vated (H) or not (L). If both binary inputs are not activated, there is a fault. The fault can be a disruption or a
short circuit in the trip circuit, an outage of the battery voltage or a fault in the mechanics of the circuit

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
breaker. With intact trip circuits, this state will occur only briefly while the command relay is closed and the
circuit breaker has not yet been opened.
No. Command CB AuxCon1 AuxCon2 BI 1 BI 2 Dynamic State Static State
Relay
1 Open ON Closed Open H L Normal operation with closed circuit
breaker
2 Open OFF Open Closed H H Normal operation with open circuit
breaker
3 Closed ON Closed Open L L Transmission or fault Fault
4 Closed OFF Open Closed L H CR successfully activated the circuit
breaker
With the Alarm delay parameter, you can set the time delay. After fixing the fault in the trip circuit, the
failure indication will automatically expire after the same time.
If the binary input signals >Trip relay phsA to >Trip relay phsC or >CB aux.contact phsA to
>CB aux.contact phsC are not routed to the binary inputs of the device (Information routing in DIGSI 5),
then the indications PhA input sig.n.routed to PhC input sig.n.routed are generated and the
Trip-circuit supervision function is ineffective.
The following figure shows the logic diagram of the trip-circuit supervision with 2 binary inputs.
[lo_1po_2be, 2, en_US]
Figure 8-43 Logic Diagram of Trip-Circuit Supervision with 2 Binary Inputs
8.3.12.4 Trip-Circuit Supervision with 1 Binary Input

When using 1 binary input, you will not identify any disruptions on the circuit breaker. The binary input is
connected in parallel with the respective command relay of the protection device. The circuit-breaker auxiliary
contact is bridged by means of a high-ohmic equivalent resistance R.
The following figure shows the principle of the trip-circuit supervision with 1 binary input.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[dw_1pole_1bi, 2, en_US]
Figure 8-44 Principle of Trip-Circuit Supervision with 1 Binary Input
CR Command relay
CB Circuit breaker (activated)
CBC Circuit-breaker coil
AuxCon1 Circuit-breaker auxiliary contact (make contact)
AuxCon2 Circuit-breaker auxiliary contact (break contact)
V-Ctrl Control voltage (tripping voltage)
V-BI Input voltage for binary input
R Equivalent resistance
The supervision with 1 binary input identifies disruptions in the trip circuit and the failure of the control
voltage.
In normal operation, the binary input is activated with the command relay open and the trip circuit intact (H).
The supervision circuit is closed by means of the equivalent resistance R or by means of the auxiliary contact
AuxCon1 of the closed circuit breaker. The binary input is not activated while the command relay is closed (L).
If the binary input is not activated for a prolonged time, there is a disruption in the trip circuit or the control
voltage has failed.
No. Command CB AuxCon1 AuxCon2 BI Dynamic State Static State
Relay
1 Open ON Closed Open H Normal operation with closed circuit breaker
2 Open OFF Open Closed H Normal operation with open circuit breaker
3 Closed ON Closed Open L Transmission or fault Fault
4 Closed OFF Open Closed L CR successfully activated the circuit breaker
With the Blk.by trip/open cmd from parameter, you set which functions act on the trip circuit that is
being supervised. While these functions are active (for example, protection tripping), the trip-circuit supervi-
sion is blocked. The closed contact of the command relay does not lead to a failure indication in this case.
If the command contacts of other devices work in parallel on the trip circuit, the failure indication must be
delayed. With the Alarm delay parameter, you can set the time delay. After fixing the fault in the trip
circuit, the failure indication will automatically expire after the same time.
If the binary input signals >Trip relay phsA to >Trip relay phsC are not routed to the binary inputs
of the device (Information routing in DIGSI 5), indications PhA input sig.n.routed to PhC input
sig.n.routed are generated and the Trip-circuit supervision function is ineffective.
The following figure shows the logic diagram of the trip-circuit supervision with 1 binary input.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[lo_1po_1_be, 2, en_US]
Figure 8-45 Logic Diagram of Trip-Circuit Supervision with 1 Binary Input
Equivalent Resistance R
The equivalent resistance R must be dimensioned such that the circuit-breaker coil is no longer activated when
the circuit breaker is open. Simultaneously, the binary input must still be activated when the command relay is
open.
In order to ensure the minimum voltage for activating the binary input, Rmax results in:
[fo_r_max, 1, en_US]
So that the circuit-breaker coil does not remain activated, Rmin results in:
[fo_r_min, 1, en_US]
with:
VCtrlst Control voltage for the trip circuit
VBI min Minimum activate voltage for BI
RCBC Ohm's resistance of the CB coil
IBI(High) Constant current with activated BI
VCBC (Low max) Maximum voltage at the CB coil that does not lead to a tripping
You can calculate the optimal value for the equivalent resistance R from the 2 values Rmin and Rmax:

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[fo_r, 1, en_US]
The following applies for the power consumption of the equivalent resistance R:
[fo_pr, 1, en_US]
Parameter: Alarm delay
• Recommended setting value (_:100) Alarm delay = 2 s (Trip-circuit supervision with 2 binary
inputs)
• Recommended setting value (_:100) Alarm delay = 300 s (Trip-circuit supervision with 1 binary
input)
With the parameter Alarm delay, you can set the time for the delayed output of the indication Trip-
circuit fail.phsA to Trip-circuit fail.phsC.
For Trip-circuit supervision with 2 binary inputs, you set the Alarm delay parameter so that the short-
term transient states do not cause the function to activate.
For the Trip-circuit supervision with 1 binary input, you set the Alarm delay so that the longest duration
of a trip command is bridged without fail. This ensures that the indication is emitted only if the trip circuit is
actually interrupted.
Parameter: Blk.by trip/open cmd from
• Possible settings, application-dependent

The parameter works only with the trip-circuit supervision with 1 binary input.
With the Blk.by trip/open cmd from parameter, you select whether the blocking command comes
from the circuit breaker or from the circuit-breaker failure protection. The parameter appears only in
DIGSI.
8.3.12.6 Settings

74TC sup.1BI #
_:1 74TC sup.1BI #:Mode • off on
• on
• test
_:100 74TC sup.1BI #:Alarm 0.50 s to 600.00 s 300.00 s
delay
_:102 74TC sup.1BI #:Blk.by Setting options depend on
trip/open cmd from configuration
74TC sup.2BI #
_:1 74TC sup.2BI #:Mode • off on
• on
• test
_:100 74TC sup.2BI #:Alarm 0.50 s to 30.00 s 2.00 s
delay

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

(Type)
74TC sup.1BI #
_:82 74TC sup.1BI #:>Block function SPS I
_:500 74TC sup.1BI #:>Trip relay phsA SPS I
_:501 74TC sup.1BI #:>Trip relay phsB SPS I
_:502 74TC sup.1BI #:>Trip relay phsC SPS I
_:54 74TC sup.1BI #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 74TC sup.1BI #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 74TC sup.1BI #:Health ENS O
_:300 74TC sup.1BI #:Trip-circuit fail.phsA SPS O
_:301 74TC sup.1BI #:Trip-circuit fail.phsB SPS O
_:302 74TC sup.1BI #:Trip-circuit fail.phsC SPS O
_:303 74TC sup.1BI #:PhA input sig.n.routed SPS O
_:304 74TC sup.1BI #:PhB input sig.n.routed SPS O
_:305 74TC sup.1BI #:PhC input sig.n.routed SPS O
74TC sup.2BI #
_:82 74TC sup.2BI #:>Block function SPS I
_:500 74TC sup.2BI #:>Trip relay phsA SPS I
_:501 74TC sup.2BI #:>Trip relay phsB SPS I
_:502 74TC sup.2BI #:>Trip relay phsC SPS I
_:503 74TC sup.2BI #:>CB aux.contact phsA SPS I
_:504 74TC sup.2BI #:>CB aux.contact phsB SPS I
_:505 74TC sup.2BI #:>CB aux.contact phsC SPS I
_:54 74TC sup.2BI #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 74TC sup.2BI #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 74TC sup.2BI #:Health ENS O
_:300 74TC sup.2BI #:Trip-circuit fail.phsA SPS O
_:301 74TC sup.2BI #:Trip-circuit fail.phsB SPS O
_:302 74TC sup.2BI #:Trip-circuit fail.phsC SPS O
_:303 74TC sup.2BI #:PhA input sig.n.routed SPS O
_:304 74TC sup.2BI #:PhB input sig.n.routed SPS O
_:305 74TC sup.2BI #:PhC input sig.n.routed SPS O
8.3.13 Supervision of Binary Inputs
Binary inputs are monitored if their error behavior will most likely cause a fault of the protection function. This
supervision consists of configuring a second input, a so-called release input, or allowing the signal to remain
at the binary input for only a maximum permissible time.
The following table displays binary inputs important for the protection functions and the type of supervision.
Binary Input Release via the 2nd Binary Time Supervision of the
Input Binary Input
General
>Sensitive characteristic curve active – x
Function: Busbar protection
>Tripping release – x
>Release, ext. Tripping x x

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Binary Input Release via the 2nd Binary Time Supervision of the
Input Binary Input
>Ext. Tripping busbar section x x x
>Additional criterion for A – x
>Additional criterion for B – x
>Additional criterion for C – x
Function: Circuit-breaker failure protection
>Release, 3-pole x x
>Release, 1-pole x x
>Start, 3-pole 1) x x
>Start, A 1) x x
>Start, B 1) x x
>Start, C 1) x x
Function: External tripping (bay)
>Start, A x x
>Start, B x x
>Start, B x x
>Release x x
Function: End-fault protection
>Close Command – x
Disconnector status
>Disconnector x – Status closed Plausibility check (see –
>Disconnector x – Status open chapter 11.13 Disconnector –
Supervision)
Circuit-breaker switch position
>Circuit-breaker switch position closed Plausibility check (see –
>Circuit-breaker switch position open chapter 11.14 Circuit-Breaker –
Supervision)
1) If starting in the 1-channel mode, release is not necessary.
Supervision: >Sensitive characteristic curve active

You can find additional information about the supervision of binary inputs for the sensitive characteristic of
the differential protection in chapter 6.2.4 Method of Measurement and Characteristic Curves
You can also find all parameters and settings of this function in the specified chapter.
Supervision: >Additional criterion A, B, and C

You can find additional information about the supervision of binary inputs for the additional criterion of A, B,
and C of the busbar differential protection in chapter 6.2.7.1 Busbar Differential Protection Trip Logic
Supervision: >External tripping release

You will find further information for supervision of the binary inputs in chapter 6.7.3 Function Description.
Supervision: >Circuit-breaker failure protection Start/Release, 1-pole

You can find additional information about the supervision of binary inputs for the start and release of the 1-
pole circuit-breaker failure protection in chapter 6.3.3 Function Description.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Supervision: >Circuit-breaker failure protection Start/Release, 3-pole

You can find additional information about the supervision of binary inputs for the start and release of the 3-
pole circuit-breaker failure protection in chapter 6.4.3 Function Description.
Supervision: >External tripping Start/Release

You will find further information for supervision of the binary inputs in chapter 6.8.3 Function Description.
Supervision: >Switch-on Command End-fault protection

You can find additional information about the supervision of the binary inputs for the close command of the
circuit breaker in chapter 6.6.1 Overview of Functions , Protection Functions, End-Fault Protection in Busbar
Protection.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
8.4 Supervision of the Device Hardware
8.4.1 Overview
The correct state of the device hardware is a requirement for the correct functioning of the device. The failure
or erroneous function of a hardware component leads to device malfunctions.
The following modules of the device hardware are monitored:
• Base module
• Expansion modules
• Plug-in modules on the interface locations

The error responses result, depending on type and degree of the error, as follows:
Hardware errors where the device remains in operation.
The error is indicated. The signals/data affected by the failure are marked as invalid. In this way, the affected
protection functions can go into a secure state. Such errors are, for example:
• Communication-module failure (module x)
• Measuring-transducer module failure (module x)
• USB interface
• Integrated Ethernet interface
• Real-time clock device
• A/D converter (fast current sum)
• Battery voltage
• Faulty or missing compensation values (magnitude/phase)

Failures which can partially be corrected by a restart of the device. The device goes briefly out of opera-
tion.
Such errors are, for example:
• Memory error (RAM) in the base module
• Defective module
• Module-connection error (PCB Link)
• Control circuit error binary output
• Outage of an internal auxiliary voltage
NOTE
i If the error has not be rectified after 3 unsuccessful attempts, the system automatically recognizes it as a
severe device malfunction. The device goes permanently out of operation into a secure state (fallback
mode).
Fatal device errors with outage of central components: The device goes permanently out of operation
into a secure state (fallback mode).
• Memory error (flash) in the base module
• CPU/Controller/FPGA error in the base module
• 3 unsuccessful restarts in a row

You can find the detailed description of the error responses in table form at the end of this chapter. You will
find corresponding corrective measures there.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Device Operating Hours

The Device operating hours statistical value counts the operating hours of the physical device. The
starting time and the time in Fallback mode are not considered.
You can neither reset nor change the statistical value.
8.4.2 Analog-Channel Supervision via Fast Current-Sum

The function Supervision of the device-internal analog-digital converters monitors the entire input circuit
and it performs the following tasks:
• Supervision of the correct functioning of the device-internal analog-digital converters, based on the sum
of all currents of one measuring point in the secondary circuit.
• Detection of failures in the device-internal measuring circuits (Current input circuits)
• Blocking of protection and control functions that process the measured values from this current meas-
uring point (for example, differential protection). This avoids an overfunction of the device.
The supervision principle is based on fast current-sum supervision with connection of the neutral-point current
to the 4th current measuring input. In order to ensure that even the fast tripping stages of the protection
functions can be blocked in time before a spurious pickup, the fast current measurement is based on instanta-
neous values.
For Analog-digital converter supervision, the neutral-point current of the line to be protected must be
connected to the 4th current measuring input (IN). The 4th current measuring input must be routed via the
current-transformer neutral point (IN neutral point) (see next figure).
[ti_phase_2, 4, en_US]
Figure 8-46 Connection to a 3-Phase Current Transformer and Measured Zero-Sequence Current (Current
in Common Return Conductor)
NOTE
i The analog channel supervision via fast current sum is only available when the 4th current input is a
protection-class current transformer. In the DIGSI 5 project tree, under Device → Measuring-point
routing, set the connection type 3-phase + IN for the current measuring point. When using this func-
tion, check the correct connection of the neutral conductor/ground current by supplying an asymmetrical
current. Otherwise, a 1-pole or 2-pole fault could result in an unwanted blocking of the protection.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

The Supervision of the device-internal analog-digital converters function is located in the Power-system
data function group of each 3-phase current measuring point.
[dw_schstr, 1, en_US]

Errors in the current circuits are detected if
IF = |iA + iB + iC + iN| > Threshold value + Slope of the characteristic 1 •Σ| i | and
IF > Slope of the characteristic 2 • (Σ| i | - Base point 2)
The device uses the current inputs (iA, iB, iC, and iN) to calculate:
• Fault current IF = |iA + iB + iC + iN|
• Maximum current Σ| i | = |iA|+|iB|+|iC|+ |iN|
[lo_kenisu, 2, en_US]
Figure 8-48 Characteristic Curve of the Supervision of the Device-Internal Analog-Digital Converters

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Logic
[lo_sumsch, 4, en_US]
Figure 8-49 Logic Diagram of the Supervision of the Device-Internal Analog-Digital Converters
When the output signal A/D converter monit. is active, certain protection functions are blocked to avoid
failures (see 11.32 Analog Channel Supervision via Fast Current Sum ).
NOTE
i The parameters are fixed in the device and cannot be changed.

It is not necessary to change the parameters depending on the application.
Threshold Value
The threshold value is the lower limit of the operating range of the Supervision of the device-internal
analog-digital converters function.
The threshold value is permanently set to 10 % of the device rated current.
Slope of the Characteristic 1

The component Slope of the characteristic 1 • Σ | i | takes into account permissible errors of the current input
that can occur in the case of small overcurrents.
The Slope of the characteristic 1 is permanently set to 0.1.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Slope of the Characteristic 2

The component Slope of the characteristic 2 takes into account permissible errors of the current input that
can occur in the case of high overcurrents (high short-circuit currents).
The Slope of the characteristic 2 is permanently set to 0.95. The base point of the Slope of the character-
istic 2 is permanently set to 10.
When the output signal A/D converter monit. is active, the following protection functions are blocked to
avoid failures:
• Busbar tripping by the Circuit-breaker failure protection

Supervision of the device-internal analog-digital converters picks up before the fast tripping stage (1-of-1
measurement) of the Busbar differential protection can make a trip decision.
If the measurands are implausible, a fault in the measuring circuits is presumed. The measured-value cycle is
identified and the calculation of the protection algorithms blocked for this cycle.
The following figure shows the interaction of the fast current-sum supervision with the Busbar differential
protection. When the supervision picks up, this results in blocking of those selective zones that use the faulty
current measured values. The check zone needs all currents for calculation and this results in a permanent
release as long as faulty current measured values are present.
[lo_fcsbbp, 2, en_US]
Figure 8-50 Influence of the Fast Current-Sum Supervision on Busbar Differential Protection
If fast current-sum supervision is present for less than 1 s, selective blocking occurs if the bay is connected to
the busbar. This blocking is reset after the failure is cleared.
If the fast current-sum supervision is present for more than 1 s, this failure is maintained permanently, even if
the measured values are detected as healthy again. This results in blocking for all zones assigned to the faulty
bay. To eliminate this permanent failure, you must restart the device assuming that the measured values are
not still faulty. The check zone is released immediately when the current-sum supervision picks up.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
8.5 Supervision of Device Firmware
8.5 Supervision of Device Firmware

The device firmware determines essentially the functionality of the device.
The following supervisions ensure the stable function of the device:
• Supervisions of the data and version consistency
• Supervision of the undisturbed sequential activity of the device firmware
• Supervision of the available processor performance

When you start the device, load data via the interfaces and these supervisions of the device firmware will be in
effect during the continuous operation. Depending on the type and severity of error, the following error
responses will result:
Firmware failures where the device remains in operation.

The error is indicated. The signals/data affected by the failure are marked as invalid. In this way, the affected
protection functions can go into a secure state. Such errors are, for example, errors in time synchronization
(loss and errors).
Failures which can partially be corrected by a restart of the device. The device goes briefly out of
operation.
• Device startup with faulty new parameter set. The old parameter set is still present.
• Overloading of the processor
• Program-sequence error
Fatal firmware error. The device goes permanently out of operation into a secure state (fallback mode).
• Device startup with faulty new parameter set. No usable parameter set is present.
• Device startup with version error
• CFC-runtime error
• 3 unsuccessful restarts in a row

You can find the detailed description, in table form, of the fault responses at the end of chapter 8.8 Error
Responses and Corrective Measures. You will find corresponding corrective measures there.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
8.6 Supervision of Hardware Configuration
8.6 Supervision of Hardware Configuration

The modular hardware concept requires adherence to some rules within the product family and the modular
system. Configuration errors show that the hardware configuration saved in the device does not agree with
the hardware actually detected. Impermissible components and unallowed combinations must be detected
just as missing configured components are.
Depending on the type and severity of error, the following error responses will result: The identified hardware
configuration errors are assigned to the defect severities as follows:
Configuration errors for which the device remains in operation.

The failure is indicated. The signals/data affected by the failure are marked as invalid. In this way, the affected
protection functions can go into a secure state.
Fatal configuration error: The device goes permanently out of operation into a secure state (fallback
mode).
• Missing hardware module (module x)
• Incorrect hardware module (module x)
• Incorrect hardware combination
• Incorrect plug-in module (module x)

You can find the detailed description of the error responses in table form at the end of this chapter. You will
find corresponding corrective measures there. You can resolve configuration errors through another synchro-
nization with DIGSI.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
8.7 Supervision of Communication Connections

SIPROTEC 5devices offer extensive communication possibilities via fixed and optional interfaces. Beyond the
hardware supervision, the transferred data must be monitored with respect to their consistency, failure, or
outage.
Supervision
With the supervision of the communication connections, every communication port is monitored selectively.
• Failures are detected and indicated via the operational log. The device remains in operation!
• Each port additionally is equipped with a separate communication log, with which details of the failures
(for example, error rate) are displayed.
Marking Fault Signals/Data

The signals/data affected by the failure are marked as invalid. In this way, the affected protection functions
can go into a secure state. In the following, some examples are named:
• GOOSE signals can automatically be set to defined values in case of disturbed IEC 61850 communication.
• Disturbed protection interfaces set phasor values, analog measured values, and binary information to
invalid, for example for the differential protection. Binary signal traces can be set to defined values in
cases of failures.
• Disturbed time-synchronization signals can lead to an automatic change of the source of time synchroni-
zation.
You can correct communication failures by checking the external connections or by replacing the affected
communication modules.
For further information on failures responses, refer to 8.8.2 Defect Severity 1 to 8.8.4 Defect Severity 3. The
corresponding corrective measures are described there.
Supervision of the Busbar-Protection Internal Communication (Only 7SS85CU)

During the project engineering of merging units and the central unit as well as when updating the central unit
(step 1), functions for monitoring the busbar-protection internal communication between the central unit and
the merging units are also instantiated. The functions are instantiated both in the 7SS85CU central unit and in
the connected merging units.
For the 7SS85CU and the merging units, the following extensions for monitoring the busbar-protection
internal communication are available after these project-engineering and update steps (see DIGSI 5 project
tree under Settings and in the Information routing):
• In the 7SS85CU central unit:

– The function group Subnet
DIGSI instantiates the functions for monitoring the busbar-protection internal communication in this
function group Subnet, and this per connected merging unit, for example, 6MU85.
• In the individual merging units:

– The function group Central unit (counterpart of Subnet in 7SS85CU)
DIGSI instantiates the functions for monitoring the busbar-protection internal communication to the
central unit in the function group Central unit.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
EXAMPLE: Central Unit 7SS85CU

The following figure shows the messages in the 7SS85CU of a 6MU85 merging unit connected to the
Subnet 1 communication ring/communication module, including the communication failure indications
Failure and Communication failure.
[sc_dbbp_proj_17_notifi, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-51 Indications in the 7SS85CU for Monitoring the Busbar-Protection Internal Communication to a
Merging Unit
If the 7SS85CU central unit does not receive any data from the 6MU85 merging unit, for example, because the
merging unit is switched off or the entire bay including the merging unit is not present, this is signaled in the
7SS85CU by sending the communication failure indications Failure and Communication failure.
The indication Failure is a group indication that includes, among others, the indication Communication
failure. It is sent when no more data is received from a merging unit or the indications Group alarm or
Group warning have been sent in the associated merging unit.
In addition, the indication Compatibility state with the value unknown is sent, because no compati-
bility data is received from the merging unit.
NOTE
i If these communication failure indications are unwanted in the 7SS85CU, you can suppress the communi-
cation failure indications by switching off the representative of the corresponding bay in the 7SS85CU
device. For this, refer to 5.2.7 Operating State: Bay Off.
If the indications Failure and Communication failure were sent in the 7SS85CU, these indications drop
out in the 7SS85CU after the representative of the bay is switched off.
The value of the indication Compatibility state changes to the value ignored.
Alternatively, you can use an IEC 61850 control command to set the controllable Mod of the representative of
the bay in the 7SS85CU to off.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[sc_dbbp_proj_18_contr, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-52 Controllable Mod of the Representative for the Bay Bay1 in the 7SS85CU
EXAMPLE: Bay Unit 6MU85

Figure 8-53 shows the indications for monitoring the busbar-protection internal communication for a Central
unit 1 connected to the merging unit 6MU85.
[sc_dbbp_proj_19_contr_comm, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-53 Example of Communication Failure Indications in a Merging Unit
If a merging unit does not receive data from the 7SS85CU central unit, this is signaled in the merging unit by
issuing the communication failure indications Failure and Communication failure.
In addition, the indication Compatibility state with the value unknown is issued, because no compati-
bility data is received from the central unit.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
NOTE
i The communication failure indications Failure and Communication failure cannot be suppressed in
a merging unit.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
8.8 Error Responses and Corrective Measures
8.8.1 Overview
When device errors occur and the corresponding supervision functions pick up, this is displayed on the device
and also indicated. Device errors can lead to corruption of data and signals. These data and signals are marked
and tagged as invalid, so that affected functions automatically go into a secure state. If the supervision func-
tions pick up, this will lead to defined error responses.
How Do Device Errors Make Themselves Noticeable

In case of a device error the supervision functions of the device pickup. The device responds according to the
type and severity of the error. To report an error, supervision functions use outputs on the device and indica-
tions.
Run LED (green) The external auxiliary voltage is present. The device is ready for operation.
Error LED (red) The device is not ready for operation. The life contact is open.
Life contact Signaling of device readiness following successful device startup.
Group-warning indication The device remains in operation and signals an error via the prerouted LED
Group warning and the log.
Log of the device Indications of causes for defects and corrective measures
Determination of Causes for Defects and Corrective Measures

To determine the cause for defect and the corresponding corrective measure, proceed step by step.
Step 1: Pick up of supervisions leads to one of the following defect severities in all cases.
• Defect severity 1:
Internal or external device error that is reported. The device remains in operation.
Severe device failure, the device restarts (reset) to correct the cause for defect.
Severe device failure, the device goes to a safe condition (fallback mode), as the
correction of defects cannot be implemented by a restart. In fallback mode, the
protection and automated functions are inactive. The device is out of operation.
Severe device-external failure, the device switches the protection and automatic
functions to inactive for safety, but remains in operation. Normally, the user can
correct the fault by himself.
Step 2: For every defect severity, you will find detailed tables with information about causes
for defects, error responses, and corrective measures in the following chapters.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Table 8-3 Error Responses
All Protection and Automation Functions

Group-Warning Indication
Device-Diagnosis Log
Indication of the
Operational Log
Group Warning
Fallback Mode
Device restart
Indication in
Indication in
Life Contact
are inactive
(Reset)
Defect Severity 1 x x x – – – –
Defect Severity 2 – – x x During the x –
starting time of
the device
Defect Severity 3 – – x x x – x
Defect Severity 4 – x – x x – –
8.8.2 Defect Severity 1
Defect severity 1 faults allow the continued safe operation of the device. Defect severity 1 faults are indicated.
The device remains in operation.
When the supervision functions pick up, corrupted data and signals are marked as invalid. In this way, the
affected functions can go into a secure state. Whether functions are blocked is decided in the appropriate
function itself. For more detailed information, refer to the function descriptions.
Life contact Remains activated
Red error LED Is not activated
Log
For every device fault, a corresponding supervision indication is generated. The device records these indica-
tions with a real-time stamp in the operational log. In this way, they are available for further analyses. If super-
visions in the communication interfaces area of the device pick up, there is a separate communication log
available for each port. Extended diagnostic indications and measured values are available there. The device-
diagnosis log contains expanded fault descriptions. There you also receive recommendations of corresponding
corrective measures for each detected device error.
Group-Warning Indication Group Warning

As delivered, all monitoring indications of Defect Severity 1 are routed to the signal (_:301)Group
warning. In this way, a device error can be indicated with only one indication. The majority of supervision
indications are permanently connected to the Group warning (Group warning column = fixed). However,
some supervision indications are routed flexibly to the Group warning via a logic block chart (Group
warning column = CFC). If necessary, the routings via a CFC chart can be taken from the group indication
again.
In delivery condition, the Group warning is routed to an LED.
The following logic diagram shows the correlation.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[lo_warning_indication, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-54 Forming the Warning Group Indication Group Warning
Overview of Errors
Indication Type Group Explanation

Warning
General:
(_:53) Health ENS CFC If the Health of an individual function block, for example
(_:53) Health = Warning SPS a protection stage or an individual function, goes to the
Warning or Alarm state, this state generates up to the
(_:53) Health = Alarm SPS
general group indication Health (_:53) via the associated
function group.
Check from the operational log from which function or
function block the error originates. In the associated func-
tion description, there is additional information as to why
the Standby of the function or a function block can
change.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

Warning
Device:
_:320 Auxiliary Power Fail SPS Fixed Fault with the auxiliary power supply:
Check the external power supply.
This message does not appear if the device has a redun-
dant PS204 power supply module, and is replaced by the
messages described below for a device with PS204.
(_:305) Battery failure SPS Battery fault:
Replace the device battery.
To avoid data loss, Siemens recommends replacing the
device battery with the device supply voltage switched on.
You can find more information on battery disposal in the
hardware manual from version V07.80 (order number:
C53000-G5040-C002-D).
_:312 Compensation error x ENS Calibration error in module x:
Contact the Customer Support Center.
Quality: Measured values are marked with the quality
attribute of questionable (measured value display with
≈).
_:314 Offset error x ENS Offset error on module x:
If this indication persists after the device start, contact the
Customer Support Center.
Quality: Measured values are marked with the quality
attribute of questionable (measured value display with
≈).
_:306 Clock fail SPS Internal time failure
• Check the time settings first.

• Then replace the device battery.
• If the fault is not remedied, contact the Customer
Support Center.
Quality: The internal time is marked with the quality
attribute of Clock Failure.
(_:319) Error memory SPS Checksum (cyclic redundancy check) error in monitored
memory areas of the device
Measuring transducer error ENS Hardware failure on the measuring-transducer module on
(x) plug-in module position E/F/M/N/P:

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

Warning
Device with redundant PS204 power supply module:
_:330 Power sup. Module INS CFC Internal device error on the power supply module at posi-
fail. x tion x28:
• The device remains in operation because it has a

redundant power supply module, provided it is intact.
• Exchange the defective power supply module so that
redundancy is reestablished!
_:331 Power sup. Module OK x INS No internal device error in the power supply module at
position x28.
_:332 Pow. sup. aux. pow. INS Error in the external auxiliary power supply module at posi-
fail. x tion x28:
• The device remains in operation because it has a

redundant power supply module, provided it is intact.
• Check the auxiliary power supply module.
_:333 Power sup.aux.pow.OK x INS The external auxiliary power supply module at position x28
is OK.
_:334 Power sup. Module SPS Fixed At least one power supply module has an internal device
fail. x error
_:335 Pow. sup. aux. pow. SPS Fixed At least one power supply module does not have an
fail. x adequate auxiliary power supply
Handling an alarm:
(_:504) >Group Warning SPS Fixed Input signal for user-defined generation of group warning
(_:302) Group indication Group indication Group indication
SPS
This indication is generated if the parameter Reaction
on disc. flt alarm is set to Indication without
blocking (Failure without blocking).
Time sync.:
(_:305) Time sync. error SPS Fixed Time synchronization error, the timing master is faulty:
• Check the external time source first.

• Check the external connections.
Support Center.
Quality: The internal time is marked with the quality
attribute of Clock not synchronized.
Power-system data:meas. point Failure of the fast current sum (see 8.4.2.1 Overview of
SPS CFC
I-3ph:superv.ADC sum.I: Functions)
(_:71) Failure The failure indication indicates a fault in the analog-digital
converter at the power input.
• Check the exterior wiring.

Support Center.
Quality: The internally managed current measured values
are marked with the invalid quality attribute.
Blocking: The protection functions based on current meas-
urement are blocked.
28 x refers to the PCB assembly slot (x =1,2,3...)

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

Warning
Power-system data:meas. point V-3ph: Voltage-transformer circuit breaker is open.
SPS CFC
Volt.Trans.Cir.B: Blocking: Appropriate functions are either blocked defi-
(_:500) >Open nitely or the blocking can be set individually.
Power-system data:meas. point V-3ph: Failure of the voltage balance (see 8.3.9.1 Overview of
SPS CFC
Superv. of Bal. V: Functions )
(_:71) Failure
Power-system data:meas. point V-3ph: Failure of the voltage phase-rotation supervision (see
SPS CFC
Superv. Phsseq.V: 8.3.11.1 Overview of Functions )
(_:71) Failure
Power-system data:meas. point V-3ph: Failure of the voltage sum (see 8.3.10.1 Overview of Func-
SPS CFC
Superv. of Sum V: tions )
(_:71) Failure
2 devices prot. comm.: Protection inter- Protection interface connection defective:
face #:
• Check the connections and the external communica-
(_:303) Connection broken SPS CFC29 tion infrastructure.
SPS
(_:316) Error rate / min
exc.
Support Center.
(_:317) Error rate / hour SPS
Transferred Signals: Faulty or not received telegrams are
exc.
detected at the receive end and discarded. They do not
(_:318) Time delay exceeded SPS result in failure of the applications. Configured binary
(_:320) Time delay jump SPS signals are reset after a time that can be set.
Device: SPS SEU memory fault:
(_:343) SEU happened Cosmic radiation can result in a Single Event Upset, which
can be detected through bit flips (changes in the status of
a bit) in the memory blocks. A reset to reinitialize the
memory is initiated. You will find additional explanations
on the physical background in a special SEU whitepaper.
Faults of defect severity 2 are fatal device faults that lead to an immediate restart of the device (reset).
This occurs when the device data is corrupted (for example, RAM memory), if a restart prevents restoration of
data consistency. The device goes briefly out of operation, a failure is avoided.
Life contact Is terminated during the restart
Red error LED Is activated during the restart
NOTE
i If the fault of defect severity 2 has not been removed after 3 unsuccessful restarts (reset), the fault is auto-
matically assigned to defect severity 3. The device will automatically turn to the fallback mode.
Log
For every device error with a subsequent restart (reset), only the restart can be detected in the operational log.
The actual supervision indication is entered in the device-diagnosis log at the point in time of the fault detec-
tion and before the restart. These indications are recorded with a real-time stamp and are thus available for
later analyses. The device-diagnosis log contains expanded fault descriptions. There, you also receive recom-
mendations of corresponding corrective measures for each detected device error.
29 The indications are not pre-routed in the logic block chart. The indications must be added to by the user in the logic block chart!

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
For further information on handling the logs, refer to chapter 3.
Overview of Errors
Number Device-Diagnosis Log

826 Processor error on the base module:
If the fault occurs numerous times, contact the Customer Support Center.
830 FPGA hardware error on the base module:
834 Memory error (short term):
Reset initiated.
3823 Program run error:
826 CPU overload:
11160 SEU memory fault (short term): Reset initiated
Miscellaneous Internal firmware error:
Faults of defect severity 3 are fatal device faults that lead to device immediately going into the fallback mode.
The signal (_:301) Device status goes to the Alarm state. The Warning state is not supported for this
signal.
Fatal device errors are errors that cannot be resolved by a restart of the device. In this case, contact the
Customer Support Center. The device goes permanently out of operation, a failure is avoided. In the fallback
mode, minimal operation of the device via the on-site operation panel and DIGSI is possible. In this way, for
example, you can still read out information from the device-diagnosis log.
Life contact Is terminated in the fallback mode
Red error LED Is activated in the fallback mode
Log
For every device error that immediately leads to entry into the fallback mode, entries from supervision
messages and from the signal (_:301) Device status into the operational log are not possible. The
actual supervision indication is entered in the device-diagnosis log at the point in time of the fault detection,
that is, before entry into the fallback mode. These indications are recorded with a real-time stamp and are thus
available for later analyses. The device-diagnosis log contains expanded fault descriptions. There, you are
offered recommendations of corresponding corrective measures for each detected device error.
You can find further information on handling the logs in chapter 3.
Overview of Errors

2822 Memory error (continuous)
4727, 5018-5028 Hardware failure at module 1-12:
4729 Device bus error (repeated):
• Check the module configuration and the module connections.

• Contact the Customer Support Center.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

4733 Incorrect hardware configuration:
Synchronize the hardware configuration of the device with DIGSI.
5037-5048 Wrong module 1-12 detected:
5031-5035 Identified wrong plug-in module on plug-in module position E/F/M/N/P:
Wrong application configuration:
Search for the cause in the operational log and load a valid configuration to the device.
3640, 4514 Data-structure error:
956 Firmware-version error:
2013, 2025 Signature error:
CFC error:
In DIGSI, check your CFC chart for the cause.
5050-5061 Binary-output error in module 1 - 12:
5088, 5089 A missing display configuration was established:
Further information:
6232, 6236, 6362, Internal firmware error:
6367, 6368, 6327, Contact the Customer Support Center.
6384
8.8.5 Defect Severity 4 (Group Alarm)
Errors of defect severity 4 are not device failures in the classical meaning. These errors do not affect the device
hardware and are not detected or reported by internal device supervision functions. The condition of the
defect severity 4 – the group alarm – is set user-specifically by the binary input signal (_:503) >Group
alarm. If the binary input signal is reset, the device is no longer in the Group alarm condition and all func-
tions return to the normal operating state.
If the group alarm is generated, the device reacts as follows:
• The group indication (_:300) Group alarm is generated and recorded in the operational log.
• The life contact is terminated.
• The red Error LED is activated.
• All protection and automation functions are blocked.
• The device remains in operation, does not carry out any restart (reset), and does not switch to the safe
condition (Fallback mode).
• The signals managed internally are marked with the invalid quality attribute. Signals managed inter-
nally are, for example, measured values, binary input and output signals, GOOSE and CFC signals.
In the delivery condition, every device has the CFC chart Process mode inactive, that initiates the Group
alarm (see chapter 8.9 Group Indications).
Life contact Is terminated in case of Group alarm
Red error LED Is initiated in case of Group alarm

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Log
The group indication (_:300) Group alarm is recorded in the operational log. Depending on the cause of
the initiation, further information can be found in the operational log.
You can find further information on handling the logs in chapter 3.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
8.9 Group Indications

The following group indications are available:
• (_:300) Group alarm

• (_:301) Group warning
• (_:302) Group indication
You can find the signals in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name of the device → Information routing. In the
operating range, you can find the signals under Alarm handling (see the following figure).
[sc_grwarn, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-55 Group Monitoring Indication in the DIGSI 5 Information Routing Matrix
Group Indication Group Alarm

The indication (_:300) Group alarm is the group indication for defect severity 4 monitoring. This moni-
toring has a special purpose, as it is set user-specifically by a binary input signal and not by internal device
supervision. Nevertheless, the response of the device is serious, such as blocking all protection and automatic
functions (see chapter 8.8.5 Defect Severity 4 (Group Alarm)).
If the binary input signal (_:503) >Group Alarm is set, the group indication (_:300) Group alarm
becomes active. If the binary input signal (_:503) >Group Alarm is reset, the signal (_:300) Group
alarm is also reset and the device returns to the normal operating state.
In the delivery condition, every device has the CFC chart Process mode inactive, that initiates the >Group
Alarm. This CFC chart checks whether the device is still accidentally in the simulation or commissioning
mode.
You can adapt the CFC chart as needed. You can find the CFC chart in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name of
the device → Charts.
Group Indication Group Warning

The indication (_:301) Group warning is the group indication for defect severity 1 monitoring. Some
error messages of defect severity 1 are firmly linked to the signal (_:301) Group warning, others are
connected flexibly in the device delivery condition via a CFC chart. This assignment is described in chapter
8.8.2 Defect Severity 1.
In the delivery condition, every device has the CFC chart Group warning, that initiates the Group warning.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
You can adapt the CFC chart as needed. You can find the CFC chart in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name of
the device → Charts.
The group-warning indication (_:301) Group warning is prerouted to an LED of the base module.
Group Indication
If the binary input signal (_:505) >Group indication is set, the indication (_:302) Group indica-
tion becomes active and is recorded in the operational log. This warning indication does not result in
blocking a protection function. If the binary input signal is reset, the signal (_:302) Group indication
drops out. Using a CFC chart, you can define when the binary input signal (_:505) >Group indication is
to be set.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
8.10 Group Indications Specific to the Busbar Protection
8.10 Group Indications Specific to the Busbar Protection

Besides the general group indications mentioned previously, there are also group indications specific to the
busbar protection.
You can find the signals in the DIGSI 5 project tree under 7SS85 > Information routing. In the working area,
you can find the signals under Group indication (see the following figure). If the indication Sw. gear op.
prohibited is produced, for example, in Bay 1, then the respective group indication also appears. You can
find the description of the indications in the respective subchapters.
[sc_bbp-message, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-56 Group Indications Specific to the Busbar Protection in the DIGSI 5 Information Routing Matrix

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
9 Measured Values and Supervision of the Primary
System
9.1 Overview of Functions 840

9.2 Structure of the Function 841
9.3 Operational Measured Values 842
9.4 Fundamental and Symmetrical Components 843
9.5 Average Values 844
9.6 Minimum/Maximum Values 846
9.7 User-Defined Metered Values 848
9.8 Statistical Values of the Primary System 851
9.9 Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU) 852
9.10 Measuring Transducers 877
9.11 Circuit-Breaker Monitoring 884

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Measured Values and Supervision of the Primary System
9.1 Overview of Functions
9.1 Overview of Functions

The measurands are recorded at the measuring points and forwarded to the function groups.
Within the function groups, further measurands are calculated from these measured values, which are
required for the functions of this function group.
Measuring transducers are an exception as they already form various calculation parameters from the analog
current and voltage inputs themselves.
[dw_om_verf, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-1 Structure of Measured-Value Acquisition and Processing
For the display, the measured values of a SIPROTEC 5 device are summed up in the following groups:
• Fundamental and symmetrical components
• Function-specific measured values
• Minimum values, maximum values, average values
• User-defined measured and metered values
• Statistical values

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
9.2 Structure of the Function
9.2 Structure of the Function

Depending on the interconnection of the function groups, these can contain different measured-value groups.
A typical function group is displayed below.
Circuit-Breaker Function Group

The Circuit-breaker function group may contain the following measured values:
[dw_om_vls1, 1, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
9.3 Operational Measured Values
9.3 Operational Measured Values

Operational measured values are assigned to different function groups.
The values can be displayed as primary and secondary values and as percentage values. They are updated
every 180 ms.
The frequency is calculated using the filter algorithm, which is derived from the voltage or current. The
voltage input has higher priority than the current input. If no voltage or current is present, the value contains
the last valid frequency. – is displayed on the user interface.
The operational measured values are calculated according to the following definition equations:
RMS values

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
9.4 Fundamental and Symmetrical Components
9.4 Fundamental and Symmetrical Components

The fundamental components are calculated from the frequency-tracked instantaneous values through a
Fourier filter (integration interval: one period). The results are phasor values that are described by way of the
amount and phase angle.
In accordance with the transformation matrix, the symmetrical components are calculated from the voltage
and current phasors. These are also phasor quantities.
Fundamental Components
Table 9-1 Fundamental Components
Values Primary Secon- Phase % Referenced to

dary Angle
V A, V B, V C Phase-to-ground voltage kV V ° Rated operating voltage of primary
values/√3
VN Measured neutral-point displace- kV V ° Rated operating voltage of primary
ment voltage values/√3
V 12, V 23, Phase-to-phase voltage kV V ° Rated operating voltage of the
V 31 primary values
I A, I B, I C Phase currents A A ° Rated operating current of the

primary values
IN Neutral-point phase current A A ° Rated operating current of the
primary values
Symmetrical Components
Table 9-2 Symmetrical Components
Values Primary Secon- Phase % Referenced to

dary Angle
V0 Zero-sequence component of the kV V ° Rated operating voltage of primary
voltage values/√3
V1 Positive-sequence component of kV V ° Rated operating voltage of primary
the voltage values/√3
V2 Negative-sequence component of kV V ° Rated operating voltage of primary
the voltage values/√3
I0 Zero-sequence component of the A A ° Rated operating current of the
current primary values
I1 Positive-sequence component of A A ° Rated operating current of the
the current primary values
I2 Negative-sequence component of A A ° Rated operating current of the
the current primary values

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
9.5 Average Values
9.5 Average Values
9.5.1 Function Description of Average Values
Average values can be formed based on different measurands:
• Symmetrical components
Through the settings, you can set how and when the average values are formed. The settings describe:
• Time slot over which the average value is formed

(Parameter: Average calc. interval )
• Update interval for the display of the average values

(Parameter: Average update interval )
• Synchronization time for establishing the date of commencement updating information, for example, at
the top of the hour (hh:00) or at one of the other times (hh:15, hh:30, hh:45).
(Parameter: Average synchroniz. time )
Average values are formed through the following measurands:
• Operational measured values except for phase-related ratings
• Amounts of the symmetrical components

You reset the average value formation via the
• Binary input >Reset average value
• DIGSI
• The integrated operation panel
9.5.2 Application and Setting Notes for Average Values
The average value formation functionality is not preconfigured with the devices in the function group. If you
use the functionality, you must load it from the library into the respective function group.
The following settings listed for the calculation of the average values can be set with DIGSI and at the device.
You find the setting parameters in DIGSI in the project tree under Settings > Device settings.
Parameter: Average calc. interval
• Default setting: (_:104) Average calc. interval = 60 min

1 min to 60 min Time slot for averaging, for example 60 minutes
Parameter: Average update interval
• Default setting: (_:105) Average update interval = 60 min

1 min to 60 min Update interval for displaying the average value, for example 60 minutes
Parameter: Average synchroniz. time
• Default setting: (_:106) Average synchroniz. time = hh:00

The parameter describes the synchronization time for average value formation.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
9.5 Average Values

hh:00 The parameter Average update interval will be
effective on the full hour
effective 15 minutes after the full hour
NOTE
i The average value calculation restarts after
• Changing one of the 3 settings for the average-value calculation
• Resetting the device (initial or normal reset)
• Changing the time
• Resetting the average values

The average values are reset immediately. The display changes to "---".
The following examples explain how to set parameters and to make a change.
Average calc. interval = 60 min

Average update interval = 30 min
Average synchroniz. time = hh:15.
A new average value is formed every 30 min, at hh:15 (15 min after the top of the hour) and hh:45 (15 min
before the top of the hour). All measured values obtained during the last 60 min are used for average value
formation.
If these settings are changed to 11:03:25, for instance, the average values are first reset and "---" appears in
the display. The 1st average value is then formed at 12:15:00.
In this example, the Average synchroniz. time = hh:45 acts as described above for = hh:15.

A new average value is formed every 60 min at hh:15 (15 min after the top of the hour). All measured values
obtained during the last 60 min are used for average value formation.

A new average value is formed every 10 min at hh:00, hh:10, hh:20, hh:30, hh:40, hh:50. All measured
values obtained during the last 5 min are used to form the average value.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
9.6 Minimum/Maximum Values
9.6.1 Function Description of Minimum/Maximum Values
Minimum and maximum values can be formed based on different measured or calculated measurands:
• Symmetrical components
• Selected values
You can set which measurand will be used. The measurands for the minimum/maximum formation are loaded
from DIGSI.
Calculation and resetting of the minimum and maximum values are controlled through settings. The settings
describe the following points:
• Memories of the minimum/maximum values are reset to 0 cyclically or not at all.

(Setting Min/Max cyclic reset )
• Point in time when the memories of the minimum/maximum values are reset to 0.
(Setting Min/Max reset each and setting Min/Max reset minute )
• Point in time at which the cyclical reset procedure of the minimum/maximum values begins (after the
parameterization)
(Setting Min/Max days until start )
The following figure shows the effect of the settings.
[dw_min_max, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-2 Minimum and Maximum-Value Formation
Minimum and maximum values are time-stamped.

Minimum/maximum values are formed through:
• Operational measured values except for phase-related ratings
• Amounts of the symmetrical components
• Average values
The minimum and maximum values are reset on a regular basis or via the
• Binary input >Reset min/max
• DIGSI
• The integrated operation panel
9.6.2 Application and Setting Notes for Minimum/Maximum Values
The minimum/maximum values functionality is not preconfigured. If you want to use the functionality, you
must load it from the library into the respective function group.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
The following settings listed for the calculation of the minimum/maximum values can be set with DIGSI or at
the device. You find the setting parameters in DIGSI in the project tree under Settings > Device settings.
Parameter: Min/Max cyclic reset
• Default setting: (_:107) Min/Max cyclic reset = yes

Yes Cyclical resetting of the minimum and maximum value memories is acti-
vated
No Cyclical resetting of the minimum and maximum value memories is deacti-
vated
None of the following parameters are visible
Parameter: Min/Max reset each
• Default setting: (_:108) Min/Max reset each = 1 day

1 day to 365 days Resetting of the minimum value and the maximum value, cyclically on all
specified days, for example each day (1 day)
Parameter: Min/Max reset minute
• Default setting: (_:109) Min/Max reset minute = 0 min

0 min to 1439 min Resetting the minimum value and the maximum value at the specified
minute of the day, which is stated in the parameter Min/Max Reset
takes place every, for example 0 min 0 min (= 00.00)
Parameter: Min/Max days until start
• Default setting: (_:110) Min/Max days until start = 1 day

1 day to 365 days Indication of when the cyclical reset procedure of the minimum values and
maximum values begins, for example in 1 day (after the parameterization)

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
9.7 User-Defined Metered Values
9.7.1 Function Description of Pulse-Metered Values
NOTE
i You can define additional metered values through DIGSI for user-specific applications.
Use pulse meters; then you can define the respective metered values through DIGSI and set parameters for
them analogously to the energy values. You can read out the metered values on the display of the device or
via DIGSI.
Through settings, you can individually set how each pulse-metered value is processed:
• Parameter Restore time

Hour-related point in time when the device will provide a metered value at the communication interface
for transmission. After this, the transfer takes place in accordance with the selected protocol.
Note: If the parameter is activated through a time setting, the parameter Restore interval will
automatically be deactivated.
• Parameter Restore interval

Adjustable period in minutes until the first and every further transfer of the metered value to the commu-
nication interface of the device. After this, it will be transferred in accordance with the selected log.
Note: If the parameter is activated through a time setting, the parameter Restore time will automati-
cally be deactivated.
In addition, restoring can be triggered via a routable binary input ( >Restore trigger ) or via a logical
internal binary input. The rising edge of the binary input leads to restoring and thus to provision of the
metered value at the communication interface.
The counter pulse of any external/internal pulse generator is connected to the device via a routable binary
input ( >Pulse input ). If this does not deliver any plausible values, this can be signaled to the device via
another routable binary input ( >External error ).
In compliance with IEC 61850, in the event of an external error, the quality of the pulse-metered value
changes to the state Questionable. No more pulses are added as long as the external error persists. Once the
external fault condition has been cleared, pulses are added again.
The quality of the pulse-metered value remains Questionable until a new meter content is specified for the
pulse-metered value by:
- Confirmation of the current meter content via Setting
- Setting a new meter content
- Resetting the meter content to 0
• Parameter Edge trigger

Through settings, you can select between counting only with a rising edge or with rising and falling
edges on the pulse input.
The pulse counter can be reset to 0. You can perform this resetting via the rising edge of a routable binary
input ( >Reset ) or via operation on the device.
To display the counting amount at the device display, use DIGSI to set the desired weighting of the counter
pulses, the unit of the metered value and a multiplication factor for every pulse generator. You can also assign
a user-specific name.
To do this, open the functional area Pulse-metered value in DIGSI information routing. (see Figure 9-3).
Select the metered value and enter the settings under Properties.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[sc_omvimp, 2, en_US]
Figure 9-3 Setting with DIGSI, General Settings, Pulse-Metered Values
9.7.2 Application and Setting Notes for Pulse-Metered Values
The functionality Pulse-metered values is not preconfigured. If you want to use the functionality, you must
load it from the library into the respective function group.
The parameters can be set individually for every pulse counter. You will find the setting parameters in DIGSI in
the project tree under Parameter > Function group. The maximum repetition rate when detecting the pulse-
metered values is 50 Hz.
For pulse-metered values, the following described settings and binary inputs are available.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Parameter: Restore time
• Default setting (_:101) Restore time = none

none Deactivated
hh:00 Transfer on the full hour
hh:15 Transfer 15 minutes after the full hour
Note: If the parameter is activated through a time setting, the parameter Restore interval is not in effect
and will be deactivated automatically.
Parameter: Restore interval
• Default setting (_:102) Restore interval = 0 min

0 min Deactivated
1 min to 60 min Cyclical transfer after the set time 1 minute to 60 minutes
Note: If the parameter is activated through a time setting, the parameter Restore time is not in effect and
will be deactivated automatically.
Parameter: Edge trigger
• Default setting (_:103) Edge trigger = rising edge

rising edge Counting with rising edge at the pulse input
rising & falling edge Counting with rising and falling edge at the pulse input
Parameter: Restore by absolute time
• Default setting: (_:104) Restore by absolute time= False

False Deactivated
True The cyclic restoring of setting Restore interval after the set time is also
synchronized with the system time. Example: Restore interval = 30
min; current system time: 12:10 o'clock. First restoring operation: 12:30
o'clock; next restoring operation: 13:00 o'clock, etc.
Input Signals: >Pulse input, >External error, >Restore trigger, >Reset
Binary inputs Description

>Pulse input Input for the counting pulses of an external pulse generator
>External error Indication that the counter pulses of the external pulse generator are faulty.
The indication has an effect on the quality identifier of the pulse value.
>Restore trigger The transfer of the metered values is initiated via a binary input.
>Reset The rising edge at the binary input resets the pulse counter to 0.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
9.8 Statistical Values of the Primary System
9.8 Statistical Values of the Primary System

The device has statistical values for circuit breakers and disconnectors.
The following values are available for each circuit breaker:
• Total number of trippings of the circuit breaker initiated by the device.
• Number of trippings of the circuit breaker initiated by the device, separately for each circuit breaker pole
(if 1-pole tripping is possible)
• Total sum of primary breaking currents
• Sum of the primary breaking currents, separately for each breaker pole
• Hours with open circuit breaker
• Hours under load

The following values are available for each disconnector switch:
• Total number of switching operations of the disconnector switch initiated by the device
• Number of switching operations of the disconnector switch initiated by the device, separately for each
switch pole (if 1-pole switching is possible)

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
9.9 Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)
A Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU) measures the phasor values of current and voltage. These values get a high
precision time stamp and together with the values of power frequency, power frequency change rate and
optional binary data that are also time stamped are transmitted to a central analysis station. The standardized
transmission protocol IEEEC 37.118 is used to do this.
The PMU function group is activated by selecting the protocol IEEE C37.118PMU on an Ethernet module
(electrical or optical). The PMU obtains the measured values from the measuring points and the precise time
from time synchronization. The time-stamped synchrophasors for current and voltage are formed from this
and transferred together with additional values via the communication module to a server (PDC, Phasor Data
Concentrator).
[dw_strpmu, 2, en_US]
The synchrophasors, sent from the PMU in a continuous data stream to a PDC, are provided with time stamps
and thus are comparable with the measured values of other PMUs. The power frequency, the power frequency
change rate and optional binary information are also transmitted as time-stamped measured values. There-
fore, you receive an overview of the transient processes in a distributed energy transfer system, for example
network fluctuations and compensating processes.
The following table shows the differences between the PMU measured values and the remaining measured
values of the device.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Table 9-3 Comparison of Synchrophasors and Conventional Measured Values
Synchrophasors of the PMU Measured Values from the Measuring Points

Continuous updating (measured value of current) Slow updating (typically every 5 seconds)
with, for example, 10 values per second (reporting
rate)
Every measured value has a time stamp No time stamp for the measured values
Phasor values of current and voltage (amplitude and RMS values without phase angle
phase angle)
The following figure shows the structure of such a Wide Area Monitoring System. The data delivered from the
PMUs on the PDC are transmitted via the Inter-Control Center Communications Protocol (ICCP) according to
DIN EN 60870-6 to the network control center.
[dw_strwam, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-5 Structure of a Wide-Area Monitoring System with Phasor Measurement Units
The phasor measurement units each have 2 communication interfaces: an Ethernet module for synchrophasor
communication via IEEE C37.118 and another module for communication with the substation automation
technology, for example, through the IEC 61850 protocol. If you use an ETH-BD-2FO communication module,
you can activate IEEE C37.118 and IEC 61850-8-1 on the same module.
The central evaluation system, for example SIGUARD PDP Phasor Data Processor, receives the data, files,
archives them and graphically displays them on a User Interface. In this system, a self-checking function may
also be performed, for example, on undamped power swings. The further distribution of information to other
PDCs or to a control center is done here.
To maintain the required maximum errors (TVE) required in the standard IEEE C37.118, the time tolerance
relative to the UTC time reference (UTC = Universal Time Coordinated) may be maximum 10 μs. Therefore, the
device must be directly synchronized with a GPS precise time signal for the correct function of the PMU.
Phasors
A phasor u(t) = Uejωt can be displayed as a phasor that moves counterclockwise in the complex plane at the
angular frequency ω. Therefore, the voltage function u(t) = Re{u(t)} is obtained as a projection of the phasor
u(t) on the real axis.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[dw_geopdc, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-6 Geometric Representation of a Phasor
Reference Point for Determining the Angle

The phase angle of a measuring signal Xm is determined relative to a cosine function having a rated frequency,
which is synchronized with the UTC time reference (see Figure 9-7).
[dw_utcphi, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-7 Determination of Phase Angle ρ of Measuring Signal Xm Relative to the Cosine Function

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
The number of phasors that are transmitted per second is configurable. The transmission rate is defined
according to IEEE C37.118 as the reporting rate. The reporting rate defines the number of phasors that are
transmitted per second. Extremely precise time synchronization is essential so that phasor measurement can
be carried out to enable phasors from different sites to be compared via GPS.
Reporting Rate
You use the configurable reporting rate (parameter (_:10621:102) Reporting rate) to specify the
number of telegrams that are generated and sent to the PDC per second. It is adjustable, depending on the
rated frequency, and applies to all currents and voltages of the relevant PMU function group. If several PMU
function groups are created on the device, these can work with different reporting rates.
Total Vector Error (TVE)

The TVE describes the error between the actual and the measured values of the input signal. The Synchro-
phasor Standard IEEE 37.118 defines upper limiting values of 120 % VN and 200 % IN, among other things. Up
to these limiting values, the TVE of 1 % must not be exceeded for stationary signals. The standard defines the
2 performance classes, Class P and Class M, as ranges within which influencing variables are acceptable and
the TVE of ≤1 % must be maintained. The SIPROTEC 5 devices support Class P and Class M, which specify the
following influencing variables for a TVE of 1 %:
• Signal frequency (relative to fN)
• Signal magnitude (relative to 100 % nominal magnitude) for voltage and current
• Phase angle (relative to 0°)
• Harmonic distortions (relative to < 0.2 % (THD) up to the 50th harmonic

The following figure graphically represents the total vector error. As well as the amplitude, the TVE also enters
into the angle error.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[dw_klatve, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-8 Representation of the Total Vector Error
The TVE is defined as follows:
[fo_utcphi_new, 1, en_US]
Where:
• Xr(n) = Real part of measured signal
• Xi(n) = Imaginary part of measured signal
• Xr = Real part, input signal
• Xi = Imaginary part, input signal
Variables that influence the TVE are:
• Amplitude errors
• Phase errors
• Synchronization accuracy (deviation from the UTC)

Synchronization accuracy is affected by a GPS timer and the precise correction of the time delay within the
GPS receiver module, as well as by the optimal mounting arrangement of the GPS antenna.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
9.9.4 Transmitted Data
The following data is transmitted from the PMU to the PDC:
• Current and voltage phasors
• Frequency
• Frequency rate of change
• Analog-channel data (active/reactive power)
• Binary information
The current and voltage channels transferred from a PMU function group are selected through the Function
group connections editor in DIGSI 5. The frequency and frequency change rate are determined once per
PMU. In this case, only the current and voltage channels selected via the Function group connections editor
for this PMU are taken into consideration. You may route the binary information in the information routing
matrix of DIGSI 5. You can instantiate the analog-channel data from the Global DIGSI 5 library in the PMU
function group.
The channel used for specifying the frequency is selected dynamically during the device runtime. Each
channel is checked for the presence of a signal in the following order:
1. 3-phase voltage measuring points
2nd 1-phase voltage measuring points
3rd 3-phase current measuring points
4th 1-phase current measuring points
The 1st measuring point found with a valid signal is used for specifying the frequency in the PMU function
group.
In the case of 3-phase measuring points, the positive-sequence system can also be transmitted instead of or in
addition to 3 individual sychrophasors. You can make the selection using the (_:10621:103) Positive
sequence parameter, see 9.9.8 Application and Setting Notes, Parameter: Positive sequence, Page 874.
9.9.5 PMU Communication (IEEE C37.118)
PMU communication according to standard IEEE C37.118 is a client-server communication format in which the
PDC (Phasor Data Concentrator) functions as both the client and the server.
Once the PDC has been successfully connected to the device PMU and the PMU configuration data has been
queried, the PDC initiates transmission of the synchrophasor data by sending a close command to the PMU. If
you use the method of spontaneous data transmission via UDP, data output starts immediately after the
device boots without a close command to the PMU.
The values and names for the values are transmitted for the phasors, binary information, and analog channels.
The names for the phasors and binary information are automatically generated by the respective PMU function
groups. You must enter the analog-channel names yourself.
If necessary, you can edit the names for the phasors, binary information, and analog-channel data and assign
your own designations for them. For more information, see chapter 9.9.6 Parameterizing the PMU with DIGSI.
As an example, the names (generated) for measuring points or binary information may be as follows:

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Table 9-4 Possible Measuring-Points Names
Name Displayed in the DIGSI Function Depending on the Connection Type, Name Transferred to the
Group Connections PDC (in case it cannot be assigned automatically)
Measuring point V-3ph 1[ID 1] MP-V3ph VAB ID01
MP-V3ph VBC ID01
MP-V3ph VCA ID01
MP-V3ph VA ID01
MP-V3ph VB ID01
MP-V3ph VC ID01
MP-V3ph V1 ID01
MP-V3ph VN ID01
Measuring point I-3ph 1[ID 2] MP-I3ph IA ID02
MP-I3ph IB ID02
MP-I3ph IC ID02
MP-I3ph I1 ID02
MP-I3ph IN ID02
Measuring point I-1ph 1[ID 3] MP-I1ph ID03
Measuring point V-1ph 1[ID 4] MP-V1ph ID04
Table 9-5 Possible Binary-Information Names
Path Displayed in DIGSI 5 Name Transferred to the PDC

(Can Be Edited)
PMU 1: BIN-01-INFO-6
Transf.bin.1:
>BinaryInfo.6
Transf.bin.2:
>BinaryInfo.8
Transf.bin.10:
>BinaryInfo.3
Data is transmitted continuously from the PMU to the PDC at the configured reporting rate. The transmission is
terminated by a corresponding trip command from the PDC or when the connection between the PDC and the
PMU is interrupted.
Communication between the PMU and the PDC can be passed via TCP or UDP protocols.
The following ports are used for data transmission by default:
• TCP: Port 4712
• UDP: Port 4713

You can configure the ports anyway you wish in a range of 1 to 65535 using the TCP port and UDP port
parameters.
NOTE
i When configuring the ports, do not set any ports already being used by other communication protocols.
Configuring ports used elsewhere prevents communication with the PMU. In this case, data packets from
the PDC cannot be received, and inquiries from the PMU cannot be transmitted.
If you are using the UDP protocol for communication between the PMU and the PDC, you can set either
command mode or asynchronous response mode as the communication mode. In asynchronous
response mode, data can be transmitted continuously to preset PDC destination addresses in IEEE C37.118

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
format without a PDC having to request transmission of the synchrophasor data via a close command to the
PMU.
Up to 4 different PDCs can be connected to one device PMU at the same time. The IP addresses of the
maximum 4 PDCs are set in the PMU function group. If 4 device PMUs are configured, this enables support for
up to 16 PDCs.
9.9.6 Parameterizing the PMU with DIGSI
You configure and parameterize the Phasor Measurement Unit with DIGSI. After a device has been added in a
DIGSI project, one or more communication modules that support synchrophasors can be configured as PMUs.
The device module supports a maximum of 2 communication modules that can be configured as PMUs. If
more than 2 PMUs are needed, the device must be expanded with a CB202 plug-in module assembly (expan-
sion module), which can accommodate 2 more communication modules.
The following communication modules support synchrophasors:
• ETH-BA-2EL (2 x Ethernet electric, RJ45)
• ETH-BB-2FO (2 x Ethernet optical, 2 km, LC duplex)
• ETH-BD-2FO (2 x Ethernet optical, 2 km, LC duplex)

These modules are then freely assignable to ports E, F, N, or P of the device, see Figure 9-9. You can view the
selected port in the (_:10621:104) Port. This parameter is automatically managed by DIGSI and cannot
be changed.
[sc_commod, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-9 Placement of Communication Modules
NOTE
i Port M of the CB202 plug-in module assembly is used to accommodate measuring-transducer modules and
cannot be used for the installation of communication modules.
Addressing
You must configure the respective Ethernet address (IP address, subnet mask, etc.) for each communication
module in DIGSI. This is done in the DIGSI General settings properties dialog of the communication module in
item Ethernet addresses and so forms the IP address for the respective PMU.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[sc_ethern, 2, en_US]
Figure 9-10 Ethernet-Address Configuration
In the Protocols – Communication menu, select the synchrophasor protocol; see the following figure.
[sc_protoc, 2, en_US]
Figure 9-11 Protocol Selection
After you have selected the synchrophasor protocol for the communication module, a settings dialog for PMU-
specific configuration opens in Settings; see the following figure.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[sc_wildcard, 3, en_US]
Figure 9-12 PMU-Specific Configuration
You configure the specific settings for the communication protocol in the top section of this settings dialog. In
the bottom section, you specify the corresponding PMU-specific settings.
In order to permit a better configuration of larger wide-area supervision systems, changes have been imple-
mented in the IEEE C37.118 communication configuration that permit a flexible IP configuration without the
loss of safety aspects in the networks administered.
Configurable placeholders are allowed for every PDC/IP address with the TCP PMU transmission protocol in
general and with UDP in the Communication mode Commanded operation. These placeholders allow you
to define a range of IP addresses where they are accepted within these accesses. The purpose of this is to
permit each individual device or system access within the respective network without limits with regard to
their hierarchy level. Therefore, with regard to security aspects, the limitation to individual IP addresses is
eliminated. You are thus allowed to configure complete sections of IP addresses in each PMU and, as a result,
very flexible when making changes to the configuration of the entire network, for example. The placeholder
character must follow consecutively at the bit level, starting with the bit with the lowest value.
EXAMPLE of Placeholder Characters:

Example 1:
• binary 00000000.00000000.00000000.00101011 is not permitted
• binary 00000000.00000000.00000000.00111111 is permitted

Example 2:
• The PDC IP address is: 192.172.16.1
• Placeholder: 0.0.0.127
The device accepts requests within the IP address range of 192.172.16.1 to 192.172.16.127.
Example 3:
• The PDC IP address is: 192.172.16.100
• Placeholder: 0.0.0.3
The device accepts requests within the IP address range of 192.172.16.100 to 192.172.16.103.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
If a PDC attempts to establish a connection to the device, the PDC IP addresses and corresponding place-
holders are checked in the same order as they had been configured (IP address PDC1, IP address PDC2,
IP address PDC3). Running through the list is stopped with the first match of the IP address, placeholder, and
requested IP-address range and the connection is built-up. If there are no matches, the attempt to connect is
rejected.
If you have configured the IP address 0.0.0.0 and the placeholder 255.255.255.255, every IP address received
is accepted as valid. This could be of use in the course of commissioning measures.
NOTE
i You must have configured at least one IP address to establish a connection between the device and the
PDC.
If you set UDP as the transmission protocol, you can transmit PMU data to groups of PDCs using IP multicast.
Using multicast, considerably more PDCs can be reached via one communication module than when every
PDC connects in unicast mode. Usually, the address range from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255 is used.
NOTE
i The router used must support the IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) V3 protocol.
[sc_PMU_multicast01, 1, en_US]
Make a checkmark at the Use multicast parameter. If Use multicast is checked, you can set up to
2 multicast IP addresses. If you do not put the checkmark in place, the settings for the multicast IP addresses
are not displayed.
NOTE
i DIGSI does not check the validity of the set multicast IP address. A multicast IP address of 0.0.0.0 is ignored.
You can set the settings for the multicast IP addresses and the PDC IP addresses in the Access Control List. If
Use multicast is active, all data packages of the PMU are transmitted to the parameterized multicast
IP addresses, but not to the PDC IP addresses. Commands from PDCs in the Access Control List are processed as
if operating without multicast. Responses are only transmitted by way of the multicast IP addresses. In the
Command mode UDP communication mode, you need at least one additional PDC IP address in the Access
Control List to start PMU data transmission (see Figure 9-13).

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[sc_PMU_Multicast_Access, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-13 Access Control List
EXAMPLE
Multicast Operation
[dw_PMU_multicast_config_with_whitellist_PDC, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-14 PMU Multicast Configuration in Asynchronous Response Mode
Select the communication module in the Hardware and protocols menu in DIGSI. Set the IP address of the
PMU (192.168.100.1) under Properties → Ethernet addresses.
[sc_IP_comm-mode_de, 1, en_US]
After you have selected the synchrophasor protocol for the communication module, a settings dialog for PMU-
specific configuration opens in Settings; see the following figure. Set the communication mode to Asyn-
chronous response mode.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[sc_general_spon_mode, 2, en_US]
Figure 9-15 PMU Settings
In the following dialog, you set the IP addresses of the multicast routers:
Figure 9-16 Additional Multicast IP Addresses During PMU Transport: UDP and Multicast
If you are using the asynchronous data transmission method, set the PMU transport parameter to UDP
and the Communication mode parameter to Spontaneous operation. The PMU data are then sent cycli-
cally via UDP to every PDC/IP address permanently configured in DIGSI. You may not configure placeholders for
PDC/IP address ranges in this communication mode.
Data output starts immediately after the device has booted. In this way, a starting signal from the PDC is not
necessary to start data transmission.
[sc_spontan, 2, en_US]
Figure 9-17 PMU Configuration for Spontaneous Transmission
The configuration dataset is transmitted 1x per minute. With the Spont. mode config type parameter,
you select the type for the configuration data record. With the Reporting rate parameter, you configure
the number of cyclic repetitions of the data packages. As UDP is a connectionless protocol, a preconfigured
destination device with its PDC/IP address is not required to be physically present and/or connected. This
allows uninterrupted provision of the data without bidirectional communication.
NOTE
i If you have not configured valid PDC/IP addresses and still activate option for spontaneous data transmis-
sion, no cyclic data telegrams are sent.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
NOTE
i It is possible to configure IP addresses for various PDCs that are not present in the same subnetwork as the
COM module. Such configurations are considered valid and can be loaded into the device. However, if the
device transmits spontaneous data and configuration packages to these IP addresses, the PDC cannot be
reached with the deviating subnetwork destination addresses.
NOTE
i Commands or requests from an invalid PMU IP address are ignored.
EXAMPLE
COM-Module Address Configuration
• IP address: 192.168.100.1
• Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0

PDC Address Configuration
• IP address for PDC1: 192.168.100.160
• IP address for PDC2: 86.168.100.161

Only PDC1 receives the data because the IP address is in the same subnetwork as the COM module.
PDC2 cannot be reached because the subnetwork address (86.x) differs from the subnetwork address of the
COM module (192.x). The PMU cannot transmit data to this address.
In addition to the PDCs IP addresses, the port can also be configured, which ensures the communication
between the PMU and PDC. You can find the TCP or UDP port parameter in place for this purpose, depending
on the configured transmission protocol. With the parameters, you can configure the port in a range of 1 to
65 535. The setting for these parameters is stored, even when the parameter is not visible due to the configu-
ration of the transmission protocol. If, for example, TCP has been configured as a transmission protocol, the
TCP port is not visible, but the setting has been stored in the background in DIGSI and is still available for use
later on.
Measuring-Point Assignment
After adding measuring points to the device, you can assign these measuring points to each configured PMU.
Figure 9-18 shows an example of how the device configuration can be supplemented with 2 additional input/
output modules. You connect the current and voltage inputs of these I/O modules to measuring points via the
DIGSI routing matrix, see example in Figure 9-19.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[sc_addios, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-18 Adding Additional Input/Output Modules
[sc_routin, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-19 Assignment of the Current and Voltage Inputs of the Added Input/Output Modules on Meas-
uring Points
NOTE
i Consider that the maximum amount of measuring points that can be routed is limited by the device.
The maximum numbers of measuring points that can be routed for one PMU are:
• 20 x 3-phase voltage measuring points
• 20 x 3-phase current measuring points
• 40 x 1-phase voltage measuring points
• 40 x 1-phase current measuring points

You can assign all supported measuring points to any PMU, see the following figure. Each PMU must be
connected to at least one measuring point, and the total number of phasors (a 3-phase measuring point = 4

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
phasors) must not exceed 80 per PMU. The limitation of the load model must also be considered, depending
on the device configuration.
[sc_fgconn, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-20 Connecting Measuring Points to the Configured PMU Function Groups
When these setting steps have been completed, the PMUs are fully configured. The PMU is a function group
that functions independently of all the other function groups instantiated in the device.
Changing the Channel Names of Phasors

You can edit the names of the individual phasor channels for voltages and currents in DIGSI. Clearly structured
channel designations support the testing and commissioning of PMU systems. Furthermore, only the names
visible in the IEEE C37.118 interface can be changed. The function block designations themselves cannot.
The IEEE C37.118 defines the ASCII character set for changing the channel names. Due to the protocol, the
designation length is limited to 255 ASCII characters per channel for CFG3, and to 16 ASCII characters per
channel for CFG2.
In order to define your own channel names, firstly instantiate the required number of Phasor names function
blocks in the PMU function group. Assignment to the corresponding measuring points is performed by the
Measuring point selection. For this purpose, DIGSI shows all measuring points routed to the PMU in the
function group connections (see following figure).
[sc_phasor_edit, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-21 Options for Editing the Names of the Individual Phasors

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
NOTE
i You can only rename each individual phasor when you set the parameter Positive sequence to no or
additionally in the function settings. Otherwise you will only be offered one single phasor for each 3-
phase measuring point for renaming.
Changing the Channel Names of Binary Channels

You can edit the names of the binary channels in DIGSI. Clearly structured channel designations support the
testing and commissioning of PMU systems. You can edit the names of the binary channels visible in the
IEEE C37.118 interface in DIGSI. To do this, tick the My binary info names check box in the Binary info
transmission function block (see Figure 9-22).
The IEEE C37.118 defines the ASCII character set for changing the channel names. Due to the protocol, the
designation length is limited to 255 ASCII characters per channel for CFG3, and to 16 ASCII characters per
channel for CFG2.
[sc_PMU_bin_info_edit, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-22 Options for Editing the Names of the Individual Binary Channels
Routing Binary Signals

You can connect binary inputs via DIGSI information routing to binary channels of the PMU. As an alternative,
you can also route the binary inputs via a function chart (CFC). You will find, in the Phasor Measurement
Unit (PMU) folder, the Binary information transmission function block in the DIGSI function library (see the
following figure). You can instantiate this function block up to 10 times in one PMU function group. Each of
these function blocks contains 8 options for routing binary channels.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[sc_pmu_bif, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-23 Information Routing in DIGSI 5
Routing Analog-Channel Data

In a PMU function group, you can instantiate the analog-channel data using the FBs AnalogCh 1ph or
AnalogCh 3ph. In this case, a maximum of 30 instances per function-block type can be used.
With the parameters of the FBs AnalogCh 1ph or AnalogCh 3ph, you can assign the measuring points. You
can only use the measuring points that have previously been assigned to the PMU function group.
You can also adjust whether the active or reactive power must be transmitted and assign a name to the analog
channel. Due to the protocol, the designation length is limited to 255 ASCII characters for CFG3 and to 16
ASCII characters for CFG2.
[sc_analog_channel, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-24 Routing Analog-Channel Data

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Routing Indications
The routable indication ChannelLive of the PMU log
• raises when the PMU is connected to the PDC
• clears when the connection to the PDC is interrupted.
[sc_parami, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-25 Log Indication for Display of the PMU/PDC Connection
9.9.7 Parameterizing the PMU on the Device
You can also change the PMU settings directly on the device. To do this, select the desired PMU instance on
the device display. By selecting menu item Settings you then access the editable setting values (see
Figure 9-26). Note that the parameter Port cannot be changed, because this corresponds to the physical slot
position of the communication module in question.
[sc_devpmu, 2, en_US]
Figure 9-26 Changing the PMU Setting Values via the Device Display
You can also change the communication settings in the same way. To do this, select the corresponding
communication port in the Communication menu on the device display. From the Channel 1 menu item, you
can then access the detailed setting options for the IP or PMU communication settings (see Figure 9-27).

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[sc_compmu, 2, en_US]
Figure 9-27 Changing the Communication Setting Values via the Device Display
Time Synchronization
In order to ensure the time accuracy of the PMU, you must select IRIG-B as the protocol for the GPS clock
(Figure 9-28) or, if an ETH-BD-2FO communication module is present, IEEE 1588 (Figure 9-29). With other
settings, the PMU function function group indicates that it is not time synchronized.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Setting Time Synchronization – IRIG-B
[sc_setting time source, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-28 Setting Time Synchronization – IRIG-B
To detect a lack of synchronization quickly, also set the waiting time for the failure indication of the loss of
time synchronization to the smallest possible value, thus to 1 s.
Setting Time Synchronization – IEEE 1588 (Precision Time Protocol (PTP))

Activate IEEE 1588 on the ETH-BD-2FO communication module.
NOTE
i For PMU applications, use the IEEE 1588 protocol on the ETH-BD-2FO communication module, because the
IEEE 1588 protocol that can be activated on the ETH-BA-2EL and ETH-BB-2FO modules does not deliver the
required accuracy.
[sc_activate_ieee_1588, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-29 IEEE 1588 Activation for the ETH-BD-2FO Module

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Ensure that the domain number in the IEEE 1588 settings matches that of the switch used.
[sc_para_ieee_1588, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-30 IEEE 1588 settings on the ETH-BD-2FO module
Select IEEE 1588 as the time source in the time configuration.
[sc_choose_of_time, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-31 Selection of Time Source
When selecting the switch used, make sure it supports the PTP standard IEEE 1588. Siemens recommends the
RUGGEDCOM RSG2488.
Parameter: Mode

With the parameter Mode, you activate or deactivate the PMU, or you switch it to test mode. The possible
setting values are on, off, and test. In Test mode, the PMU data is marked as invalid.
Parameter: Reporting rate
• Default setting (_:10621:102) Reporting rate = 10 frames/s

With the parameter Reporting rate, you specify the number of telegrams that are compiled and sent to
the PDC per second.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
NOTE
i Different setting values are shown or hidden, depending on the rated frequency set. You can set a
reporting rate of 200 frames/s (50 Hz) or 240 frames/s (60 Hz) only when using an ETH-BD-2FO module.
Parameter: Positive sequence
• Default setting (_:10621:103) Positive sequence = no

With the parameter Positive sequence, you can set whether the PMU transmits the positive-sequence
system. The following setting values can be used:
Parameter Value Meaning
no The PMU only transmits the 3 individual synchrophasors for the 3-phase
measuring points.
only The PMU only transmits the positive-sequence system instead of the 3 indi-
vidual synchrophasors for the 3-phase measuring points.
additionally The PMU transmits the positive-sequence system in addition to the 3 indi-
vidual synchrophasors for the 3-phase measuring points.
The setting you make here is then valid for all PMUs with 3-phase measuring points.
Parameter: Transmit measured VN, IN
• Default setting (_:10621:104) Transmit measured VN, IN = no

This parameter is only visible if you route the Measuring point V-3ph or the Measuring point I-3ph with VN
or IN to the PMU in DIGSI 5. The routing option is in the DIGSI 5 project tree in Device Name → Function-
group connections in the Measuring points ↔ Function group settings sheet.
With this parameter, you define whether or not the PMU transmits VN and IN.
Parameter: Class
• Default setting (_:10621:101) Class = Class P

With the parameter Class, you set which performance class is used for the calculation of the measured
values. Class P is the standard case for PMUs. In this case, filters are used that provide a short response time
and that are therefore suitable for recording dynamic processes. Class M is intended for applications that are
unfavorably affected by alias effects and in which short response times are not relevant.
Parameter: Global PMU ID
• Default setting (_:10621:142) Global PMU ID = Freely editable text

With the parameter Global PMU ID, you enter a global ID for the PMU, which can contain up to 16 charac-
ters.
Parameter: PMU Latitude
• Default setting (_:10621:143) PMU Latitude = 0.00000000 °

With the parameter PMU Latitude, you set the latitude to a value between -90,00000000 ° and
+90,00000000 °.
Parameter: PMU Longitude
• Default setting (_:10621:144) PMU Longitude = 0.00000000 °

With the parameter PMU Longitude, you set the current longitude to a value between -180,00000000 ° and
+180,00000000 °.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Parameter: PMU Elevation
• Default setting (_:10621:145) PMU Elevation = 0.00 m

With the parameter PMU Elevation, you set the current height above sea level to a value between
-50 000.00 m and +50 000.00 m.
Parameter: Port
This parameter cannot be set, because the Port results from the physical position where the corresponding
communication module is inserted.
9.9.9 Settings

Func. settings
_:10621:1 Func. settings:Mode • off on
• on
• test
_:10621:101 Func. settings:Class • Class P Class P
• Class M
_:10621:142 Func. settings:Global Freely editable text
PMU ID
_:10621:143 Func. settings:PMU Lati- -90.000000 ° to 90.000000 ° 0.000000 °
tude
_:10621:144 Func. settings:PMU -180.000000 ° to 180.000000 0.000000 °
Longitude °
_:10621:145 Func. settings:PMU -50000.00 m to 50000.00 m 0.00 m
Elevation
_:10621:102 Func. settings:Reporting • 1 frame/s 10 frames/s
rate
• 5 frames/s
• 6 frames/s
• 10 frames/s
• 12 frames/s
• 15 frames/s
• 20 frames/s
• 25 frames/s
• 30 frames/s
• 50 frames/s
• 60 frames/s
• 100 frames/s
• 120 frames/s
• 200 frames/s
• 240 frames/s
_:10621:103 Func. settings:Positive • no no
sequence
• only
• additionally
_:10621:105 Func. settings:Transmit • no no
measured VN, IN
• yes

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

_:10621:104 Func. settings:Port • port F port F
• port E
• port P
• port N
_:10621:141 Func. settings:Freq 1 to 100 1
tracking group ID

(Type)
General
_:10621:52 Func. settings:Behavior ENS O
_:10621:53 Func. settings:Health ENS O

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
9.10 Measuring Transducers
Measuring transducers with an input rated at 20 mA can be used in the devices. 4 such inputs are available as
module ANAI-CA-4EL, which can be plugged into a communication module slot (for instance, port E or F). Up
to 4 such modules can be plugged in. Typically, slowly changing process variable such as temperature or gas
pressure are recorded with such 20-mA measured values and reported to the substation automation tech-
nology.
The measuring-transducer blocks are embedded in the Analog units function group and contain input and
output channels that are configurable independently of each other.
[dw_strumu, 1, en_US]
The 20-mA inputs typically transmit a value which represents a physical quantity such as a temperature or a
pressure. Therefore, the device must contain a characteristic curve that assigns the physical quantity to the
20-mA value. If the parameter Range active is not activated (no x in the check box), the function operates
over the range -25.6 mA to +25.6 mA. The setting of the range for the scaled value goes from a usable range
of -25.6 mA to +25.6 mA. The following figure shows an example.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[dw_klbsp_1, 3, en_US]
Figure 9-33 Characteristic Curve of a 20-mA Input (Example 1)
In this example, the measured value 0 mA means a temperature of 0 degrees Celsius and the measured value
20 mA means a temperature of 100 degrees Celsius. Thus, Unit = °C and Conversion factor = 100 are
entered. The resolution (decimal place) of the temperature value can be selected; for one decimal place, select
Resolution = 0.1.
[sc_transd, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-34 Parameter Settings for Example 1
If a value smaller than -25.6 mA or larger than +25.6 mA is applied to the measuring-transducer input, the
measured value is marked as outside the range of values. If the parameter Range active is activated, the 2
additional parameters Upper limit and Lower limit appear. Both limiting values indicate the input
currents in mA, for which the value set by the Conversion factor (Upper limit) and the value 0
(Lower limit) of the calculated measurand are valid (see following figure).

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[dw_kl_example_2, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-35 Characteristic Curve of a 20-mA Input (Example 2)
In this example, Range active is selected. The Upper limit is at 15 mA, the Lower limit is at 5 mA
and the Conversion factor remains at 100. Overall, this results in a characteristic curve as shown in the
following figure, taking into account all possible valid measured values from -25.6 mA to +25.6 mA. The
parameter Upper limit - Sensor is the calculated measured value if the input current corresponds to the
value in the Upper limit setting. The parameter Lower limit - Sensor is the calculated measured
value if the input current corresponds to the value in the Lower limit setting.
[dw_klges_2, 3, en_US]
Figure 9-36 Total Characteristic Curve in Example 2

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[sc_trans2, 2, en_US]
Figure 9-37 Parameter Setting for Example 2
Each measuring-transducer input provides the scaled measured value (these are the temperature values in the
examples) and the original current measured value in mA in the information routing for further processing.
Table 9-6 Measuring-Transducer Measured Values
Measured Value Display

TD scale MV (_:301)
Primary Measured value converted to the sensor
Secondary –
Percent 100 % ≙ parameter (_:104) Conversion factor
(for (_:107) Range active = false)
100 % ≙ max. absolute value of the parameter (_:109) Upper limit - Sensor
or of the parameter (_:110) Lower limit - Sensor
(for (_:107) Range active = true)
TD direct MV (_:302)
Primary –
Secondary -20.000 mA to +20.000 mA or -10 V to +10 V
Percent 100 % ≙ 20 mA or 10 V
The measuring-transducer values can be displayed in the display image and processed with CFC charts.
Parameter: Unit
• Recommended setting value (_:103) Unit = °C

With the Unit parameter, you set the physical unit of measurement the measured values. The possible setting
values are listed in the settings table.
Parameter: Conversion factor

With the (_:104) Conversion factor parameter, you set the conversion factor for the measuring trans-
ducer.
Parameter: Resolution
• Default setting (_:108) Resolution = 0.1

With the Resolution parameter, you set the resolution of the scaled values.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Parameter: Range active
• Default setting (_:107) Range active = false

If you do not activate the parameter Range active (no cross in the check box), the function operates over
the range -25.6 mA to +25.6 mA. The setting of the range for the scaled value goes from a usable range of
-25.6 mA to +25.6 mA.
If you activate the parameter Range active, the 4 additional parameters Upper limit, Upper limit -
Sensor, Lower limit, and Lower limit - Sensorappear.
Parameter: Upper limitLower limitUpper limit - Sensor and Lower limit - Sensor
• Default setting (_:105) Upper limit = 20.000 mA
• Default setting (_:109) Upper limit - Sensor = 100
• Default setting (_:106) Lower limit = 4.000 mA
• Default setting (_:110) Lower limit - Sensor = 100

If you activate the parameter Range active, the 4 additional parameters Upper limit, Lower limit,
Upper limit - Sensor, and Lower limit - Sensor appear. The parameter Upper limit -
Sensor is the calculated measured value if the input current corresponds to the value in the Upper limit
setting. The parameter Lower limit - Sensor is the calculated measured value if the input current corre-
sponds to the value in the Lower limit setting.
If you keep the preset limiting values, the following conditions are possible:
• If the input current is < 2.000 mA

The function issues the indication Broken wire and the quality of the output value is invalid. The func-
tions that use the output value as the measured value can be deactivated.
• If the input current is > 2.500 mA

The indication Broken wire drops out.
9.10.5 Settings

MT in #
_:101 MT in #:Meas. transduc. • Voltage input Current input
I/O type
• Current input
• Voltage output
• Current output
• Temperature input

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

_:103 MT in #:Unit • % m
• °
• °C
• °F
• Ω
• Ω/km
• Ω/mi
• 1/s
• A
• As
• cos φ
• cycles
• dB
• F/km
• F/mi
• h
• Hz
• Hz/s
• in
• J
• J/Wh
• K
• l/s
• m
• mi
• min
• p.u.
• Pa
• periods
• rad
• rad/s
• s
• V
• V/Hz
• VA
• VAh
• var
• varh
• Vs
• W
• W/s
• Wh

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

_:108 MT in #:Resolution • 1 0.1
• 0.1
• 0.01
• 0.001
_:107 MT in #:Range active • 0 false
• 1
_:104 MT in #:Conversion 1 to 10000 100
factor
_:105 MT in #:Upper limit -20.00 mA to 20.00 mA 20.00 mA
_:109 MT in #:Upper limit - -10000 to 10000 100
Sensor
_:106 MT in #:Lower limit -20.00 mA to 20.00 mA 4.00 mA
_:110 MT in #:Lower limit - -10000 to 10000 100
Sensor

(Type)
MT in #
_:307 MT in #:Broken wire SPS O
_:302 MT in #:TD scale MV MV O
_:306 MT in #:TD scale SAV SAV O

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
9.11 Circuit-Breaker Monitoring
The Circuit-breaker monitoring function:
• Detects the abrasion of the circuit breakers phase-selectively
• Allows an adaptation of maintenance intervals for switching contacts of the circuit breakers according to
the real abrasion
• Sends a warning signal when the abrasion of the circuit breaker reaches a certain degree
• Allows the supervision of the circuit-breaker make time
• Allows the supervision of the circuit-breaker break time

One of the main advantages of this function is the reduction of maintenance and service costs.
The function Circuit-breaker monitoring can be used in the function group Circuit-breaker.
The function offers 5 independent operating methods with different measuring methods:
• ΣIx-method
Sum of the breaking-current potentials
• 2P-method
2 points method for calculating the remaining switching cycles
• I2t-method
Sum of all breaking-current square integrals
• Make time
Monitoring of the circuit-breaker make time
• Break time
Monitoring of the circuit-breaker break time
9.11.3 General Functionality
Start Criterion for the Function Circuit-Breaker Monitoring

The methods ΣIx, 2P and I2t are started if one of the following criteria is met:
• The circuit breaker is opened via a command or a protection tripping.
• The binary input signal >Start calc. for open is initiated, for example, via an external signal.
• The signal for the closed position of the circuit breaker is going. This signal is built via the circuit-breaker
auxiliary contacts. Thus, a manual opening of the circuit breaker is detected.
The method Make time is started if one of the following criteria is met:
• The circuit breaker is closed via a command.
• The binary input signal >Start calc. for close is initiated, for example, via an external signal.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
The method Break time is started if one of the following criteria is met:
• The circuit breaker is opened via a command.
• The circuit breaker is opened via a protection tripping.
• The binary input signal >Start calc. for open is initiated, for example, via an external signal.
Definition of the Times when Opening and Closing the Circuit Breaker
With the paramter Make time, you define the point in time when the circuit-breaker poles are closed and the
current has reached a constant value.
[dw_maketime, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-38 Definition of Make time
With the parameter Opening time, you define the point in time when the circuit-breaker poles begin to
open. With the parameter Break time, you define the point in time when the circuit-breaker poles are sepa-
rated and the arc is extinct. The following graphic shows the relation between these 2 points in time of the
circuit breaker.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[dw_breaktime, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-39 Circuit-Breaker Times
Parameter: Apply PhaseA config to all
• Default setting (_:2311:1) Apply PhaseA config to all = inactiv

If the parameter Apply PhaseA config to all is activated, all settings of phase A are adopted for
phases B and C.
NOTE
i The following parameters apply to one phase. The descriptions apply similarly to the parameters of the
remaining phases.
Parameter: Opening time
• Default setting (_:23971:101) Opening time = 65 ms

With the parameter Opening time, you define the interval between the activation of the shunt release for
the circuit breaker and the moment, when the circuit-breaker poles open.
For information on the setting value, refer to the technical data of the used circuit breaker. For futher informa-
tion, refer to Figure 9-39.
Parameter: Break time
• Default setting (_:23971:102) Break time = 80 ms

With the parameter Break time, you define the interval between the activation of the shunt release for the
circuit breaker and the moment, when the arc extincts (and the circuit-breaker poles are open).
For information on the setting value, refer to the technical data of the used circuit breaker. For further infor-
mation, refer to Figure 9-39.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Parameter: Make time
• Default setting (_:23971:103) Make time = 80 ms

With the parameter Make time, you define the typical time interval between the activation of the closing
procedure for the circuit breaker and the point in time when the first current flows.
For information on the setting value, refer to the technical data of the used circuit breaker.
9.11.3.3 Settings

General
_:2311:1 General:Apply PhaseA • 0 false
config to all
• 1
General
_:23971:1 Phase A:Mode • off on
• on
• test
_:23971:101 Phase A:Opening time 1 ms to 500 ms 65 ms
_:23971:102 Phase A:Break time 1 ms to 600 ms 80 ms
_:23971:103 Phase A:Make time 1 ms to 600 ms 80 ms
General
_:24002:1 Phase B:Mode • off on
• on
• test
_:24002:101 Phase B:Opening time 1 ms to 500 ms 65 ms
_:24002:102 Phase B:Break time 1 ms to 600 ms 80 ms
_:24002:103 Phase B:Make time 1 ms to 600 ms 80 ms
General
_:24033:1 Phase C:Mode • off on
• on
• test
_:24033:101 Phase C:Opening time 1 ms to 500 ms 65 ms
_:24033:102 Phase C:Break time 1 ms to 600 ms 80 ms
_:24033:103 Phase C:Make time 1 ms to 600 ms 80 ms

(Type)
General
_:2311:500 General:>Start calc. for open SPS I
_:2311:501 General:>Start calc. for close SPS I

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
9.11.4 ΣIx Method
[lo_Ix-calc, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-40 Logic of the ΣIx-Method
Determination of the Tripping/Opening Current Value

RMS values of the fundamental components are stored for each phase in a buffer during the time between the
start criterion and the pole-opening-starts criterion. With the coming pole-opening-starts criterion, the latest
value in the buffer is searched for whose value is above the setting of parameter Current thresh. CB
open. The one period prior value is used as tripping/opening current for further calculation.
If no value within the buffer is above the setting value, this circuit-breaker opening affects only the mechan-
ical lifetime of the circuit breaker and is consequently not considered by this method.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[lo_cb_wixf, 2, en_US]
Figure 9-41 Logic of the Determination of the Tripping Current Value
(1) Current-flow criterion fulfilled

(2) 1 period prior value
Calculation of the Wear

If the ΣIx-method stage receives the logic release signal, the determined tripping current is used in the calcula-
tion of wear. The calculation results are then added to the existing statistic values of the ΣIx method as
follows, with phase A as example.
[fo_CB-WI-xA, 1, en_US]
Where:
x Parameter exponent
q No. of circuit-breaker switching cycle
Tripping/opening current of phase A to the power of x in the qth circuit-breaker operation
Rated normal current to the power of x
Statistic value of current phase A calculated with the ∑Ix method
m Total number of switching cycles
The phase-selective ΣIx value is available as statistical value. You can reset or preset the statistics according to
the specific application.
To simplify the interpretation of the sum of the tripping current powers, the values are set in relation to the
exponentiated rated normal current Irated of the circuit-breaker (see also Setting notes).
Circuit-Breaker Maintenance Warning

If the summated ΣIx value of any phase is greater than the threshold, a phase-selective warning signal is
generated.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
NOTE
remaining phases.
Parameter: Active
• Default setting (_:23971:120) Active = inactive

With the parameter Active, you switch on the method.
Parameter: Exponent
• Default setting (_:23971:121) Exponent = 2.0
You use the Exponent parameter to specify the exponent for the ΣIx method.
A typical value is the default setting of 2. However, due to practical experiences with individual circuit
breakers, slightly different values may be requested.
• Default setting (_:23971:122) Threshold = 10 000.00

You use the parameter Threshold to define the threshold of the statistic value.
The relation of the tripping current powers to the exponentiated rated normal current Irated allows the limiting
value of the ΣIx method to correspond to the maximum number of make-break operations. For a circuit
breaker, whose contacts have not yet been worn, the maximum number of make-break operations can be
entered directly as limiting value.
9.11.4.3 Settings

ΣIx-method
_:23971:120 Phase A:Active • 0 false
• 1
_:23971:121 Phase A:Exponent 1.0 to 3.0 2.0
_:23971:122 Phase A:Threshold 0 to 10000000 10000
ΣIx-method
_:24002:120 Phase B:Active • 0 false
• 1
_:24002:121 Phase B:Exponent 1.0 to 3.0 2.0
_:24002:122 Phase B:Threshold 0 to 10000000 10000
ΣIx-method
_:24033:120 Phase C:Active • 0 false
• 1
_:24033:121 Phase C:Exponent 1.0 to 3.0 2.0
_:24033:122 Phase C:Threshold 0 to 10000000 10000

(Type)
Phase A
_:23971:51 Phase A:Mode (controllable) ENC C

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

(Type)
_:23971:54 Phase A:Inactive SPS O
_:23971:52 Phase A:Behavior ENS O
_:23971:53 Phase A:Health ENS O
_:23971:310 Phase A:ΣIx BCR O
_:23971:311 Phase A:Warning ΣIx SPS O
Phase B
_:24002:51 Phase B:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:24002:54 Phase B:Inactive SPS O
_:24002:52 Phase B:Behavior ENS O
_:24002:53 Phase B:Health ENS O
_:24002:310 Phase B:ΣIx BCR O
_:24002:311 Phase B:Warning ΣIx SPS O
Phase C
_:24033:51 Phase C:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:24033:54 Phase C:Inactive SPS O
_:24033:52 Phase C:Behavior ENS O
_:24033:53 Phase C:Health ENS O
_:24033:310 Phase C:ΣIx BCR O
_:24033:311 Phase C:Warning ΣIx SPS O

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
9.11.5 2P Method
Logic of the Stage
[lo_2P-calc, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-42 Logic 2P-Method
Calculation of Remaining Switching Cycles

A double-logarithmic diagram provided by the circuit-breaker manufacturer illustrates the relationship of
permitted switching cycles and the tripping/opening current, see the following figure. According to the
example, this circuit breaker can operate approximately 1000 times at a tripping current of 10 kA.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
2 points and their connecting line determine the relationship of switching cycles and tripping current. Point P1
is determined by the number of permitted switching cycles at rated normal current Irated. Point P2 is deter-
mined by the maximum number of switching cycles at rated short-circuit breaking current Isc. The 4 associated
values can be configured with the parameters Rated normal current, Switching cycles at Ir,
Rated short-circ.cur. Isc, and Switching cycles at Isc.
[dw_CB_WOpC, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-43 Diagram of Switching Cycles for the 2P Method
As shown in the preceding figure, a double-logarithmic diagram, the straight line between P1 and P2 can be
expressed by the following exponential function:
[fo_CB-W2-P1, 1, en_US]
Where:
Itrip Tripping/opening current
Irated Rated normal current
m Slope coefficient
b Switching cycles at rated normal current
n Number of switching cycles
The general line equation for the double-logarithmic representation can be derived from the exponential func-
tion and leads to the coefficients b and m.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
NOTE
i Since a slope coefficient of m < -4 is technically irrelevant, but could theoretically be the result of incorrect
settings, the slope coefficient is limited to -4. If a coefficient is smaller than -4, the exponential function in
the switching-cycles diagram is deactivated. The maximum number of switching cycles with Isc is used
instead as the calculation result for the current number of switching cycles, as the dashed line with m =
-4.48 shows in following figure.
[dw_CB_WSlo, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-44 Value Limitation of Slope Coefficient
(1) Applied function from m < -4

(2) Parameterized function with m = -4.48
(3) Parameterized function with m = -1.77
If the 2P-method stage receives the logic release signal, the current number of used up switching cycles (in
relation to the number of switching cycles at rated normal current) is calculated based on the determined trip-
ping current. This value is subtracted from the the remaining lifetime (switching cycles). The remaining life-
time is available as statistic value. For better understanding, refer to the example below.
You can reset or preset the statistical values according to the specific application. The reset operation changes
the statistic values to 0, and not to their default values of 10 000.
The statistic value of the residual switching cycles is calculated according to the following formula:
[fo_CB-2P-wear-rest_01, 1, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Where:
i No. of latest circuit-breaker switching cycle
2p wear resti Residual switching cycles with rated normal current, after the ith switching cycle
nrated Overall permissible switching cycles at rated normal current
ntrip Overall permissible switching cycles at tripping current Itrip
nrated/ntrip Lost switching cycles referring to rated normal current
EXAMPLE
For calculating the residual switching cycles of a circuit breaker, the following is assumed:
P1 (2.5 kA, 10 000)
P2 (50.0 kA, 50)
The circuit breaker has made 100 opening operations with rated normal current, 2 tripping operations with
rated short-circuit breaking current, and 3 tripping operations with 10 kA tripping current. Then, the residual
switching cycles with rated normal current are:
[fo_CB-2P-wear-rest_02, 1, en_US]
There are still 9465 possible break operations at rated normal current.
Cumulated Abrasion and Abrasion of the Last Switching Operation

In addition to the remaining switching cycles, the cumulated wear and the wear of the last switching opera-
tion is calculated. These are available as percentage values 2P abrasion cumulated and 2P abrasion
last sw.op..
Circuit-Breaker Maintenance Warning and Alarm

If the adjustable threshold values are undershot, phase-selective warnings and alarms are generated.
NOTE
remaining phases.
Parameter: Active

Parameter: Switching cycles at Ir
• Default setting (_:23971:111) Switching cycles at Ir = 10 000

You use the Switching cycles at Ir parameter to define the number of permitted switching cycles at
rated normal current.
You can find the information on the setting value in the technical data of the used circuit breaker.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Parameter: Rated short-circ.cur. Isc
• Default setting (_:23971:112) Rated short-circ.cur. Isc = 25 000 A

You use the Rated short-circ.cur. Isc parameter to define the rated short-circuit breaking current.
Parameter: Switching cycles at Isc
• Default setting (_:23971:113) Switching cycles at Isc = 50

You use the Switching cycles at Isc parameter to define the number of permitted switching cycles at
rated short-circuit breaking current.
Parameter: Abrasion warn. threshold
• Default setting (_:23971:114) Abrasion warn. threshold = 1000

With the parameter Abrasion warn. threshold, you define the threshold value for the remaining
switching cycles with rated operating current. If the statistical value is below the threshold value, a warning
signal is generated.
Parameter: Abrasion alarm threshold
• Default setting (_:23971:115) Abrasion alarm threshold = 500

With the parameter Abrasion alarm threshold, you define the threshold value for the remaining
switching cycles with rated operating current. If the statistical value is below the threshold value, an alarm
signal is generated.
Example
Here is an example that shows you how to set the threshold parameters. Assuming a circuit breaker with the
same technical data as provided in the example for residual switching cycles, 50 breaking operations with
rated short-circuit breaking current are permitted.
A warning signal should be issued when the number of possible breaking operations with rated short-circuit
breaking current is less than 3. For that condition, you set the threshold value based on the following calcula-
tion:
[fo_CB-W2-P4, 1, en_US]
9.11.5.3 Settings

2P-method
• 1
_:23971:111 Phase A:Switching cycles 100 to 10000000 10000
at Ir
_:23971:112 Phase A:Rated short- 10 A to 100000 A 25000 A
circ.cur. Isc
_:23971:113 Phase A:Switching cycles 1 to 1000 50
at Isc
_:23971:114 Phase A:Abrasion warn. 0 to 10000000 100
threshold

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

_:23971:115 Phase A:Abrasion alarm 0 to 10000000 50
threshold
2P-method
• 1
_:24002:111 Phase B:Switching cycles 100 to 10000000 10000
at Ir
_:24002:112 Phase B:Rated short- 10 A to 100000 A 25000 A
circ.cur. Isc
_:24002:113 Phase B:Switching cycles 1 to 1000 50
at Isc
_:24002:114 Phase B:Abrasion warn. 0 to 10000000 100
threshold
_:24002:115 Phase B:Abrasion alarm 0 to 10000000 50
threshold
2P-method
• 1
_:24033:111 Phase C:Switching cycles 100 to 10000000 10000
at Ir
_:24033:112 Phase C:Rated short- 10 A to 100000 A 25000 A
circ.cur. Isc
_:24033:113 Phase C:Switching cycles 1 to 1000 50
at Isc
_:24033:114 Phase C:Abrasion warn. 0 to 10000000 100
threshold
_:24033:115 Phase C:Abrasion alarm 0 to 10000000 50
threshold

(Type)
Phase A
_:23971:300 Phase A:2P abrasion remaining INS O
_:23971:301 Phase A:2P abrasion cumulated MV O
_:23971:302 Phase A:2P abrasion last sw.op. MV O
_:23971:303 Phase A:2P abrasion warning SPS O
_:23971:304 Phase A:2P abrasion alarm SPS O
Phase B
_:24002:300 Phase B:2P abrasion remaining INS O
_:24002:301 Phase B:2P abrasion cumulated MV O

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

(Type)
_:24002:302 Phase B:2P abrasion last sw.op. MV O
_:24002:303 Phase B:2P abrasion warning SPS O
_:24002:304 Phase B:2P abrasion alarm SPS O
Phase C
_:24033:300 Phase C:2P abrasion remaining INS O
_:24033:301 Phase C:2P abrasion cumulated MV O
_:24033:302 Phase C:2P abrasion last sw.op. MV O
_:24033:303 Phase C:2P abrasion warning SPS O
_:24033:304 Phase C:2P abrasion alarm SPS O

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
9.11.6 I2t Method
Logic of the Stage
[lo_I2t-calc, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-45 Logic of the I2t-Method
Calculation of the Wear

The I2t method evaluates the wear of a circuit breaker based the sampled measuring values of the phase
currents during the arc time. The duration of the arc time is defined by the difference between the 2 settings
of parameters Break time and Opening time (see also Start Criterion for the Function Circuit-Breaker
Monitoring , Page 884). The stage determines the ending point of the arc time by searching backward the
zero-crossing point of the phase currents after it receives the logic release signal. Then, the squared fault
currents during the arc time are integrated phase-selectively. The integrals are referred to the squared rated
normal current of the circuit breaker as shown in the following formula, with phase A as example.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
[fo_CB-WI-2T, 1, en_US]
Where:
Irated Rated normal current
iA(t) Sampled measured current value of phase A
The calculated squared tripping current integrals are added to the existing statistic values.You can reset or
preset the statistic value according to the specific application.
Circuit-Breaker Maintenance Warning

If the statistic value of any phase lies above the threshold, a phase-selective warning signal is generated.
Parameter: Active

• Default setting (_:24033:131) Threshold = 10 000.00 I/Ir*s

You use the Threshold parameter to specify the maximum permitted integral of squared sampled measured
values of the phase currents. The same applies to the threshold values of the other phases.
9.11.6.3 Settings

I2t-method
• 1
_:23971:131 Phase A:Threshold 0.00 I/Ir*s to 21400000.00 I/ 10000.00 I/Ir*s
Ir*s
I2t-method
• 1
_:24002:131 Phase B:Threshold 0.00 I/Ir*s to 21400000.00 I/ 10000.00 I/Ir*s
Ir*s
I2t-method
• 1
_:24033:131 Phase C:Threshold 0.00 I/Ir*s to 21400000.00 I/ 10000.00 I/Ir*s
Ir*s

(Type)
Phase A

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

(Type)
_:23971:320 Phase A:ΣI²t BCR O
_:23971:321 Phase A:Warning ΣI²t SPS O
Phase B
_:24002:320 Phase B:ΣI²t BCR O
_:24002:321 Phase B:Warning ΣI²t SPS O
Phase C
_:24033:320 Phase C:ΣI²t BCR O
_:24033:321 Phase C:Warning ΣI²t SPS O

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
9.11.7 Make Time
Logic of the Stage
[lo_LS-Überwachung_Einschaltzeit, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-46 Logic of the Make Time
Operating Mode
The stage for the monitoring of the circuit-breaker make time calculates phase-selectively the time between
the circuit-breaker closing command and the point in time when the current exceeds the Oper.current
threshold. If this threshold has not been exceeded after 2.5 times the value of the parameter Make time,
the measurement is canceled and the output value Make time is set to 0 and marked with the quality invalid.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
If one phase of the current has exceeded the parameter Oper.current threshold or the parameter
Current thresh. CB open at the time of the circuit-breaker closing command, the measurement is
canceled and the output value Make time is marked with the quality invalid.
You can define 2 independent thresholds for the monitoring of the measured make time. When these thresh-
olds are exceeded or undershot, the corresponding outputs Make-time warning and Make-time alarm
are activated for 100 ms. These can be routed in the log.
NOTE
remaining phases.
Parameter: Active

Parameter: Threshold for warning
• Default setting (_:23971:141) Threshold for warning = 5 %

With the parameter Threshold for warning, you define the percentage the measured value is allowed to
exceed or undershot the parameter Make time at the output Make time, before the output Make-time
warning is set. The output Make-time warning then drops out after 100 ms.
Parameter: Threshold for alarm
• Default setting (_:23971:142) Threshold for alarm = 10 %

With the parameter Threshold for alarm, you define the percentage the measured value is allowed to
exceed or undershot the parameter Make time at the output Make time, before the output Make-time
alarm is set. The output Make-time alarm then drops out after 100 ms.
Parameter: Oper.current threshold
• Default setting (_:23971:143) Oper.current threshold = 0.100 A

With the parameter Oper.current threshold, you define the current threshold. If the measured value
exceeds this threshold, the measured value is detected as flowing operating current. As soon as an operating
current flows, the end of the time interval Make time is detected.
Parameter: Delay correction time
• Default setting (_:23971:144) Delay correction time = 0.000 s

With the parameter Delay correction time , you define a correction value which will be subtracted
from the Make time during calculation. This allows you to compensate delays caused by the system, for
example, relay residual times, if necessary.
9.11.7.3 Settings

Supv.CB mak.t.
_:1 Supv.CB mak.t.:Mode • off off
• on
• test

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

_:101 Supv.CB mak.t.:Level of 1 % to 100 % 5%
warning 1
_:102 Supv.CB mak.t.:Level of 1 % to 100 % 10 %
warning 2
_:103 Supv.CB 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.100 A
mak.t.:Oper.current 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.50 A
threshold
_:104 Supv.CB mak.t.:Delay -0.050 s to 0.050 s 0.000 s
correction time

(Type)
Phase A
_:23971:330 Phase A:Make time MV O
_:23971:331 Phase A:Make-time warning SPS O
_:23971:332 Phase A:Make-time alarm SPS O
Phase B
_:24002:330 Phase B:Make time MV O
_:24002:331 Phase B:Make-time warning SPS O
_:24002:332 Phase B:Make-time alarm SPS O
Phase C
_:24033:330 Phase C:Make time MV O
_:24033:331 Phase C:Make-time warning SPS O
_:24033:332 Phase C:Make-time alarm SPS O

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
9.11.8 Break Time
Logic of the Stage
[lo_LS-Überwachung_Ausschaltzeit, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-47 Logic of the Break Time
Operating Mode
The stage for the monitoring of the circuit-breaker break time calculates phase-selective the time between the
circuit-breaker opening command and the point to which no load current flows. In the event of a restrike after
the current was lost, the measurement of the break time is extended accordingly. If a current is still measured
after 2.5 times of the value parameter Break time, the measurement is canceled and the output value
Break time is set to 0 and marked with the quality invalid.
If no load current is measured at the time of the break time command, the measurement for the relevant
phase is canceled and the output value Break time is marked with the quality invalid.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
You can define 2 independent thresholds for the monitoring of the measured break time. When these thresh-
olds are exceeded or undershot, the corresponding outputs Break-time warning and Break-time
alarm are activated for 100 ms. These can be routed in the log.
NOTE
remaining phases.
Parameter: Active

Parameter: Threshold for warning
• Default setting (_:23971:151) Threshold for warning = 5 %

With the parameter Threshold for warning, you define the percentage the measured value is allowed to
exceed or undershot the parameter Break time at the output Break time, before the output Break-
time warning is set. The output Break-time warning then drops out after 100 ms.
Parameter: Threshold for alarm
• Default setting (_:23971:152) Threshold for alarm = 10 %

With the parameter Threshold for alarm, you define the percentage the measured value is allowed to
exceed or undershot the parameter Break time at the output Break time, before the output Break-
time alarm is set. The output Break-time alarm then drops out after 100 ms.
Parameter: Delay correction time
• Default setting (_:23971:153) Delay correction time = 0.000 s

With the parameter Delay correction time, you define a correction value which will be subtracted from
the Break time during calculation. This allows you to compensate delays caused by the system, for
example, relay residual times, if necessary.
9.11.8.3 Settings

Break time
• 1
_:23971:151 Phase A:Threshold for 1 % to 100 % 5%
warning
_:23971:152 Phase A:Threshold for 1 % to 100 % 10 %
alarm
_:23971:153 Phase A:Delay correction -50 ms to 50 ms 0 ms
time
Break time
• 1
_:24002:151 Phase B:Threshold for 1 % to 100 % 5%
warning

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

_:24002:152 Phase B:Threshold for 1 % to 100 % 10 %
alarm
_:24002:153 Phase B:Delay correction -50 ms to 50 ms 0 ms
time
Break time
• 1
_:24033:151 Phase C:Threshold for 1 % to 100 % 5%
warning
_:24033:152 Phase C:Threshold for 1 % to 100 % 10 %
alarm
_:24033:153 Phase C:Delay correction -50 ms to 50 ms 0 ms
time

(Type)
Phase A
_:23971:340 Phase A:Break time MV O
_:23971:341 Phase A:Break-time warning SPS O
_:23971:342 Phase A:Break-time alarm SPS O
Phase B
_:24002:340 Phase B:Break time MV O
_:24002:341 Phase B:Break-time warning SPS O
_:24002:342 Phase B:Break-time alarm SPS O
Phase C
_:24033:340 Phase C:Break time MV O
_:24033:341 Phase C:Break-time warning SPS O
_:24033:342 Phase C:Break-time alarm SPS O

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
10 Functional Tests
10.1 General Notes 910

10.2 Checking the System Configuration and the Disconnector Image 911
10.3 System Visualization 912
10.4 Checking with Secondary Quantities - General Information 915
10.5 Pickup Characteristic of Busbar Protection 916
10.6 Differential Current Supervision 919
10.7 Testing with Primary Values 921
10.8 Tests for Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection 923
10.9 Circuit-Breaker Test 927
10.10 Functional Test of the Trip-Circuit Supervision 930
10.11 Functional Test Protection Interfaces 931
10.12 Functional Test of the Inrush-Current Detection 933

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Functional Tests
10.1 General Notes
10.1 General Notes

Various tests have to be performed for commissioning to warrant the correct function of the device.
For tests using secondary test equipment, make sure that no other measurands are locked in and trip and
close commands to the circuit breakers are interrupted, unless otherwise indicated.
Secondary tests can never replace primary tests because they cannot include connection faults. They can be
used to check the setting values.
Primary tests may be done only by qualified personnel who are familiar with the commissioning of protection
systems, with the operation of the system, and with safety regulations and provisions (switching, grounding,
etc.).
Switching operations also have to be performed for the commissioning. The described tests require that these
be capable of being performed safely. They were not conceived for operational checks.
You can find commissioning information in the manual SIPROTEC 5 Operation.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Functional Tests
10.2 Checking the System Configuration and the Disconnector Image
10.2 Checking the System Configuration and the Disconnector Image

The configuration of the busbars, the bay types, and the transformer data must be defined in DIGSI 5 and they
must correspond to the power-system data. Inspect in connection with the feeder protection devices and the
control systems. When using DIGSI 5, you can activate individually binary inputs, standard relays, and LEDs.
This allows you to control the proper connection to the system.
² Check the routing of the binary inputs, relays, and LEDs according to your specifications.
² Perform a function check of the binary inputs. Check the binary inputs for all functions, for example,
circuit-breaker failure protection, releases, and auxiliary functions.
² Verify the displayed indications and LEDs.
² Check the current-transformer circuits. In addition to the previous inspection of the wiring, check the
polarity, the transformer ratio, and the state of the grounding of the current transformer.
² Check the disconnector image. Use the status display in the event list and in the online mode of the
Single-Line Editor to check the correct detection of the disconnector feedback.
² Check the status indications of the circuit breakers using the event list, LEDs and in the online mode of
the Single-Line Editor.
² Use the circuit breakers to perform a function control of the OFF contacts. The circuit-breaker test allows
you to perform a 1-pole or 3-pole trip test.
You can find more information about commissioning in the SIPROTEC 5 Operation manual.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Functional Tests
10.3 System Visualization

General
The single-line diagram you created with the DIGSI Single-line Editor is used for the configuration of the
busbar protection and can also be used for visualizing the switchgear from the protection point of view. After
starting system visualization, a current representation of the measured values, switch positions, and the asso-
ciation to busbars is available.
To start the single-line monitoring of a protection device with DIGSI, proceed as follows:
² Open the protection device in DIGSI in the project tree via the Online access and your network adaptor.
- or -
² Once you have selected the device, open it by way of the Connect to device and request data context
menu.
² Double-click Single-line monitoring.
Display
After starting system visualization, you can see the current switchgear diagram in the application window. You
cannot change the structure of the switchgear diagram here. However, you can edit it using the Single-line
Editor and transfer it to the device again.
[sc_bbp_sle_online, 2, en_US]
Figure 10-1 Online Display: Single-Line Monitoring
The following objects change, depending on the real circumstances on site:
• Values in the measured-value boxes
• Switch position of disconnectors and circuit breakers (system view)
• Topological coloring of busbars, lines, disconnectors, and circuit breakers. In overlapping sections of the
protection zones in the bus coupler, the lines are displayed in alternating colors (protection view).

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Functional Tests
The up-to-date phase currents of the current transformers and measuring systems are displayed in measured-
value boxes. The 1st row of each measured-value box shows the designation of the measuring system or of
the bay and of the current transformer. Measured-value boxes for transformers display the transformer
current, optionally the primary, secondary, or in percent.
NOTE
i The percentage values of the differential and restraint currents refer to the normalization currents. The
percentage values of the feeder currents refer to the transformer rated current of the corresponding
feeder.
NOTE
i If the check zone is disabled, no measured values are displayed in the measured-value box of the check
zone.
NOTE
i For an easier analysis of the protection response, the current values are displayed in the fault record from
the view of the protection, thus following algorithmic processing. That is, for example, the stabilization
factor k is taken into account in the restraint current. The restraint currents of the check zone must be
mentioned as a special feature: In an extreme case (bus fault with all currents directed to the busbar), the
resulting restraint current of the check zone is 0 because the outgoing current is 0.
NOTE
i The filtered differential and restraint currents are displayed in the measured-value boxes of the bus
sections.
NOTE
i If 2 busbars are connected to one another with a busbar shunt by disconnectors, then only the measured-
value boxes of the busbar with the higher priority (with the lower instance number such as BB1) are visible.
The measured-value box for a transformer shows the up-to-date feeder currents assigned to the transformer.
You can show/hide the measured-value boxes.
²
In the toolbar, click . The configuration of the measured-value boxes is displayed just like you speci-
fied in the Single-line Editor.
System View and Protection View

The system view of the circuit breakers and disconnectors corresponds to the true states of the binary inputs
On, Off and Disturbed/intermediate position of the circuit breakers and disconnectors. The switch position is
shown directly in the circuit symbols. The zone coloring corresponds to the protection view. A disconnector in
the intermediate position is treated as On.
The association of the feeders to each busbar is displayed using color. That is, the line path and the icons of
the switching devices are the same color as the busbar. Sections not protected by busbar protection are
always shown in black color.
If a bus-section disconnection or a busbar shunt by disconnectors is closed, the bus section with the lower
instance number has higher priority over the bus section with the higher instance number (preference). The
bus section with the higher instance number takes on the color of the bus section with the lower instance
number.
The color changes in accordance with the actual measuring range of the protection. This extends to the
current transformer or circuit breaker, depending on the circuit-breaker switch position, the location of the
current transformer, and the use of the end-fault protection. Only the measured-value boxes of the busbar

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Functional Tests
with the higher priority are displayed. You can specify the colors used in the display during engineering in the
Single-line Editor with the selected object using the right mouse button via the Object properties menu.
² Check the display and change it if necessary in the Single-line Editor.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Functional Tests
10.4 Checking with Secondary Quantities - General Information
10.4 Checking with Secondary Quantities - General Information

All commissioning preparation procedures must be completed.
Note the following information:
• There may be hazardous voltages in all switching components connected to the power supply and to
measurands or test quantities.
• Hazardous voltage may be present in the device even after the supply voltage has been removed (capaci-
tors can still be charged).
• Never exceed the limiting values indicated in chapter Technical Data, even during testing and commis-
sioning.
• The measuring accuracy to be attained depends on the electrical data of the test sources. Due to the
phase-selective measuring principle, two 1-phase current sources that can be controlled separately are
sufficient for the tests.
! WARNING
Warning of danger from secondary tests
Noncompliance with safety notes means that death, serious injuries, or significant material damage
can occur.
² Secondary tests may be done only by qualified electrical engineering personnel who are familiar with
the commissioning of protection systems, with the operation of the system and with safety regula-
tions and provisions (switching, grounding, etc.).
² Make sure that there are no connections to the primary system during the secondary test.
! DANGER
Danger due to hazardous voltages during the operation of electric devices
Noncompliance with the safety notes will result death or severe injuries.
² Before disconnecting the power supply to the equipment, short circuit the secondary connections of
the current transformer.
² If a test switch is installed that automatically short circuits the secondary wires of the current trans-
former, check the short-circuiting device and turn the test switch to its Test position.
² Ground the device before establishing a connection to the grounding terminal.
NOTE
i Observe the information regarding testing with secondary quantities in chapter Commissioning in the
manual SIPROTEC 5 Operating.
² Perform all necessary functional tests.

Tests for the busbar protection, the circuit-breaker failure protection, and the circuit breaker are
described in the following chapters.
² Remove all devices for testing with secondary quantities and restore the original condition (turn off test
switch, etc.).

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Functional Tests
10.5 Pickup Characteristic of Busbar Protection
10.5.1 Overview
The test setup for the busbar-selective protection is shown in Figure 10-2. The trip command of the feeders
switches off the test equipment.
The test setup for the check zone is shown in Figure 10-4. In order to test the busbar selectivity, at least one
bay must be switched to a second busbar (applies also to disconnector-position simulation).
² Connect the test currents directly to the measuring inputs of the bay currents.
Depending on the setting, the rated current of the bays is 1 A or 5 A.
10.5.2 Busbar-Selective Protection
Test Setup
² For the test, use 2 bays with the same normalization factor (transformer ratio). Do not use a busbar
section disconnection bay or bus coupler bay.
² Connect both bays to the same busbar.
[dw_prkess, 1, en_US]
Figure 10-2 Test Setup for Recording the Characteristic Curve of the Busbar-Selective Measuring System
Test Items
² Switch off the differential current supervision function. This prevents blocking the protection during the
test (parameter (_:12031:1) Mode).
² Set the differential current limit and the restraint factor for the busbar-selective protection (parameter
(_:12091:100) Threshold Idiff and (_:12091:104) Stabilization factor k) and for
the check zone (parameter Threshold Idiff and Stabilization factor k) as desired.
² Test currents I1 and I2 must have a phase displacement of 180°. Use the same current to check bay 1 and
bay 2 (1 x IN) in order to determine the phase position.
If the connection is correct, the differential current must be close to 0 and the restraint current should be
equal to twice the input current.
² Set current I1 and I2 = 0. Increase the current I1 until a trip command is generated.
The current in the bay must be identical to the differential current limit set in parameter (_:12091:100)
Threshold Idiff.
² Supply a constant current to bay 1 and bay 2 of the test equipment.
(Idiff =0, Irest = I1 + I2, I1 = I2). The current must exceed the set differential current limit.
² Slowly decrease the current I2 until a trip command is generated.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Functional Tests
The following equations apply:

Differential current Idiff = | I1 + I2 |
Restraint current Irest = | I1 | + | I2 |
Stabilizing factor k = Idiff / Is = | I1 + I2 | / (| I1 | + | I2 |)
The following applies to the characteristic curve | I1 - I2 | = k (| I1 | + | I2 |)
Since the currents I1 and I2 are phase-shifted by 180°, the following applies
I1 (1 - k) = I2 (1 + k) and I1 = I2 (1 + k) / (1 - k) and
I1 = 4.71 x I2 , if k = 0.65
[dw_char_ss, 2, en_US]
Figure 10-3 Pickup Characteristic of the Busbar Differential Protection
The following history shown in Figure 6-9 applies to the sensitive characteristic curve.
² Repeat the test by using different constant currents.
² After the test, switch on the differential current supervision function with parameter (_:12031:1)
Mode.
10.5.3 Check Zone
The trip decision of the check zone can be queried phase-selectively. This allows a test that is independent
from the busbar-selective protection.
Test Setup
² For the test, use 3 bays with the same normalization factor (transformer ratio). Do not use a bus section
bay or bus coupler bay.
² Connect bay 1 and bay 2 to the same busbar.
² Switch the current inputs of bay 1 and bay 2 against each other.
² Connect bay 3 to another busbar.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Functional Tests
[dw_prkecz, 1, en_US]
Figure 10-4 Test Setup for the Characteristic Curve Support of the Check Zone
Test Items
² Switch off the differential current supervision function. This prevents blocking the protection during the
test (parameter (_:12031:1) Mode).
² Set the differential current limit and the restraint factor:
Busbar-selective protection (parameters (_:12091:100) Threshold Idiff and (_:12091:104)
Stabilization factor k) and
check zone (parameters (_:11911:100) Threshold Idiff and (_:11911:104) Stabiliza-
tion factor k).
² Test current I1 must have a phase displacement of 180° in bay 1 and bay 2
(Idiff = 0, Irestr = 2 x I1 of the assigned busbar).
If the connection is correct, the differential current must be close to 0 and the restraint current should be
equal to twice the input current.
² Set the current I1 = 0. Increase current I2 until the phase-specific indication Operate diff. prot. is
issued for the check zone.
The current I2 must correspond with the differential current limit set in parameter (_:11911:100)
Threshold Idiff for the check zone.
² Supply a constant current I1 to bay 1 and bay 2 of the test equipment.
² Slowly increase current I2 in bay 3 until the protection trips.
Subsequently, the differential current is I2 and the restraint current is I1. Therefore, it follows that the stabiliza-
tion factor k of the check zone is equal the ratio I2 to I1
² Repeat the test by using various restraint currents I1. The characteristic curve is shown in Figure 6-8.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Functional Tests
10.6 Differential Current Supervision
10.6.1 Busbar-Selective Protection
In order to check the busbar-selective protection, the busbar-selective protection must be set to a more sensi-
tive level than the check zone. This ensures that the supervision function of the differential current of the
check zone picks up later.
Test Setup
² Refer to chapter 10.5.2 Busbar-Selective Protection to assemble the test setup.
Test Items
² Set the differential current limit (_:12031:100) Thresh. Id superv. BZ and the time delay
(_:12031:102) Id superv. t. delay as desired.
If the parameter (_:12031:103) Id superv. reaction BZ is set to Blocking until dropout or
Blocking until release, follow the next steps:
² Connect bay 1 and bay 2 to separate busbars.
² Slowly increase current I1 in bay 1 until the indication of the differential current supervision function is
issued. The current must match the pickup threshold set in parameter (_:12031:100) Thresh. Id
superv. BZ.
This blocks this busbar. Even increasing current I1 again does not initiate tripping.
² Switch the current in bay 2 to 4 times the rated current Irated.
This trips the busbar section. Subsequently, the protection system initiates the trip command for the circuit
breaker in bay 2.
The last 2 test items ensure that differential current supervision is busbar-selective.
If the parameter (_:12031:103) Id superv. reaction BZ is set to Alarm only or , follow the next
steps:
² Connect bay 1 and bay 2 to the same busbar.
² Slowly increase current I1 in bay 1 until the indication of the differential current supervision function is
issued. The current must match the pickup threshold set in parameter (_:12031:100) Thresh. Id
superv. BZ .
² Continue increasing the current until the busbar section trips.
Subsequently, the protection system switches off the current in bay 1 and bay 2.
10.6.2 Check Zone
In order to verify the check zone, the sensitivity of the check zone must be set higher than the busbar-selective
protection function. This ensures that the supervision of the check zone picks up earlier.
Test Setup
² Refer to chapter 10.5.2 Busbar-Selective Protection to assemble the test setup.
Test Items
Checking the pickup threshold and time delay:
² Slowly increase the current in bay 1 until the supervision function of the check zone trips. The measured
current must be identical to the set current (_:12031:101) Thresh. Id superv. CZ.
² Follow chapter 10.6.3 Time Delay to perform the time measurement.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Functional Tests
Checking the blocking:

² Set the parameter (_:12031:104) Id superv. reaction CZ to Blocking until dropout or
Blocking until release.
² Connect bay 1 and bay 2 to different busbars.
² Slowly increase the current in bay 1 until the supervision function of the check zone trips.
² Switch the current in bay 2 to 4 times the rated current Irated.
Trip commands do not follow.
10.6.3 Time Delay
Conventional test equipment for protection equipment can be used for measuring the time.
² Use the test equipment to start a current in bay 1 that is twice as high as the set differential current limit
(_:12031:100) Thresh. Id superv. BZ.
The message of the differential current supervision function terminates the test equipment. The measured
time corresponds to the set time delay in parameter (_:12031:102) Id superv. t. delay.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Functional Tests
10.7 Testing with Primary Values
10.7.1 General
NOTE
i Also observe the information regarding testing with primary quantities in chapter Commissioning in the
SIPROTEC 5 Operation manual.
The test procedure of the system with primary quantities depends on whether the system is being commis-
sioned for the first time or if the system has been operated before.
² Use a test current to check the system.
- or -
² Use the operating current to check the system.
10.7.2 Testing with a Test Current
When performing a primary test with a test current, check the correct parameterization of the current trans-
former for the following settings:
• Polarity
• Transformer ratio
• Proper state of the current-transformer grounding

The following figure shows the test setup.
[dw_fctpan, 1, en_US]
Figure 10-5 Example of a Double-Busbar Test with Coupler
² In the reference bay, connect the phase to be tested to the current generator by way of the closed line
grounding switch.
² Open the solid connection to the ground.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Functional Tests
² Connect the other side of the current generator to ground.

² Connect the line grounding switch in the bay to be checked.
² Supply a current to the busbar system. The current must be at least 5 % of the normal operating current.
If the polarity, the ratio, and the grounding correspond with the configured data of the current transformer,
the differential current = 0 and the restraint current in the check zone is as high as the supplied current. In
both busbar sections, the restraint current is twice as high as the supplied current.
² Repeat the test for all bays and phases.
² Remove all test devices.
This concludes the system test with primary quantities.
10.7.3 Testing with Operating Current
If the system is already in operation, it is often not possible to use a test generator. In this case, the operating
current is used for testing the correct parameterization of the current transformer for the following settings.
• Polarity
• Transformer ratio
• Proper state of the current-transformer grounding

² Use DIGSI 5 to read the configuration data of the system.
² Use the Online mode of the Single-Line Editor to check the current system status.
² Set all bays to the operating state Not in Operation.
² Use the Online mode of DIGSI 5 or the control panel of the device to read the operating currents of the
bays.
If the configured data corresponds to the system, the differential current of the check zone is displayed as
being nearly 0.
The restraint current is equal to the operating current of all bays without bus coupler bay.
The differential and restraint currents of the busbar sections are 0.
² Read the operating currents of each individual bay and verify the configured transformer ratio.
² Start up the bay with the highest current on the busbar.
The display for the differential current and the restraint current of the busbar shows the value of the feeder
current (Idiff = Irestr).
² Determine whether the bay is a feeder or an infeed.
² If the bay is an infeed, start all other infeeds subsequently.
The values of the differential current and restraint currents increase (Idiff = Irestr).
² Start all other feeders subsequently.
The differential current decreases and the restraint current increases.
If all bays are operating and the polarity, the ratio, and the grounding correspond with the configured data of
the current transformer, the differential current must be close to 0. The restraint current is equal to the sum of
all bay currents.
This concludes the system test with primary quantities.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Functional Tests
10.8 Tests for Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection
10.8.1 General
Integration of the Protection Function into the Station

The integration of the protection function into the station must be tested in the real-life application. Because
of the multitude of possible applications and possible system configurations, the required tests cannot be
described here in detail.
NOTE
i Always keep in mind the local conditions, the station plans, and protection plans.
NOTE
i Siemens recommends isolating the circuit breakers of the tested feeders at both ends before starting the
tests.
General Precautions
! CAUTION
Tests on the local circuit breaker of the feeder cause a trip command to the output to the adjacent (busbar)
circuit breakers.
Noncompliance with the following measure can result in minor personal injury or material damage.
² In a first step, interrupt the trip commands to the adjacent (busbar) circuit breakers, for example, by
disconnection of the corresponding control voltages.
For testing the circuit-breaker failure protection, it must be ensured that the protection (external protection
device or device-internal protection functions) cannot operate the circuit breaker. The corresponding trip
command must be interrupted.
Although the following list does not claim to be complete, it can also contain points, which have to be ignored
in the current application.
Test Modes
The device and the function can be switched to test mode. These test modes support the test of the function
in different ways:

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Functional Tests
Test Modes Explanation

Device in test mode This operating mode is relevant for the following tests:
1. Approach of current thresholds in the case of an
external start: Supervision of the binary input signals in
the case of an external start is disabled. This setting allows
a static activation of the starting signals in order to
approach the current threshold.
2. Check whether the issued trip commands actuate the
corresponding circuit breakers, because, in the device test
mode, depending on the parameter (_:91:151)
Oper.bin.outp. under test , the device contacts
are also actuated.
CBFP function in test mode (device is NOT in test This operating mode is important for function tests in
mode) which the generated operate indications are NOT
supposed to actuate the binary outputs.
NOTE
i When the function or device is in test mode, all indications are given a test bit.
The function must also be tested in its normal, switched-on condition.

Consider the following in this case:
² The device contacts are actuated.
² Binary input signal supervision (in the case of an external start) is enabled and blocks the function.
² All indications generated are generated without test bit.
Circuit-Breaker Auxiliary Contacts

If circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts are connected to the device – and if they are properly parameterized – they
form an important input variable of the circuit breaker fault protection.
² Make sure that the correct assignment has been checked.
External Starting Conditions (Trip Command from External Protection Function)

If external protection devices are also able to start the circuit-breaker failure protection, the external starting
conditions require checking.
² Check the settings of the circuit-breaker failure protection.
Refer also to the chapter Application and Setting Notes.
² For the circuit-breaker failure protection to be able to pick up, a phase current (see current-flow criterion)
must be present. This can be generated by a device-internal test sequence (see description in the Oper-
ating manual). It can also be a secondary test current.
² Activate the binary input or inputs to which the start signal and possibly also the release signal for the
CBFP function are routed.
² Check the start input signal, and if available, check the release input signal in the spontaneous or fault
messages.
² Check the pickup indication in spontaneous or fault indications.
² The trip command(s) and their time delay compared to the pickup, depending on the parameterization.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Functional Tests
Start Caused by a Trip Command of an External Protection Device without Current Flow
² If it is possible to start without current flow, for example, pickup by routing the CB auxiliary contacts,
proceed as described before.
Repetition of the Local Tripping (T1)

² Make sure that the trip repeat signal controls a 2nd circuit (2nd coil) for switching off the circuit breaker.
Backup Tripping in the Case of a Circuit-Breaker Failure (T2)

For tests in the station, it is important to check that the distribution of trip commands to the adjacent circuit
breakers in the case of a circuit-breaker failure is correct. Adjacent circuit breakers refers to those circuit
breakers that are connected to the same busbar section.
² Test the busbar-specific circuit-breaker failure protection according to chapter 10.8.2 Pickup Threshold of
the Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection and 10.8.3 Time Delay of the Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection.
Backup Tripping on Circuit-Breaker Failure (T2), Tripping of the Opposite End

² Check the communication channel for remote trip if the trip command of the circuit-breaker failure
protection must also trip the circuit breaker at the opposite end of the section being considered.
Termination
² All temporary measures taken for testing must be undone, such as special switch positions, interrupted
trip commands, changes to setting values, or individually switched off protection functions.
10.8.2 Pickup Threshold of the Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection
Test Setup
[dw_pr_svsv, 1, en_US]
Figure 10-6 Test Setup for Recording the Characteristic Curve of the Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection
Test Items
² Block the differential current supervision function to prevent the protection to initialize blocking during
the test.
² Set the parameter of the circuit-breaker failure protection to (_:102) Threshold phase current
the desired value.
² Use the busbar disconnector to connect bays 1 and 2 to the same busbar.
² Test currents I1 and I2 must have a phase displacement of 180°. Use the same current to check bay 1 and
bay 2 (0.5 x IN) in order to determine the phase position. If the connection is correct, the differential
current must be close to 0 and the restraint current should be equal to twice the input current.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Functional Tests
² Supply bay 1 and bay 2 with constant current I (I1 = I2) from the test equipment. The test current must lie
below the threshold for the phase current
² After triggering the feeder protection, instead of using the 1-channel or 2-channel binary input, for
example, using the definite time-overcurrent protection, increase the current in the bays, until it exceeds
the set threshold.
The protection is tripped (circuit-breaker failure protection trip).
10.8.3 Time Delay of the Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection
Test Setup
The test setup for measuring the time delay is shown in Figure 10-6.
Test Items
² Ensure the bays are supplied with a current that is equal to twice the value of the parameter (_:102)
Threshold phase current of the CBFP in the bay. This current matches an external error. The differ-
ential current should be approximately 0.
² Simulate the trip command from the feeder protection for bay 2 and start measuring the time.
² Use the trip command of the busbar protection to stop the time measurement.
The displayed time is equal to the preset time delay, plus the tripping time of the protection.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Functional Tests
10.9 Circuit-Breaker Test

The Circuit-breaker test function enables you to easily perform a complete test of the trip circuit, the closing
circuit, and the circuit breaker. If the circuit breaker can be opened for 1-poles, you can perform the test sepa-
rately for each circuit-breaker pole.
The circuit-breaker test carries out an automatic open-closed cycle or an open-only cycle of the circuit breaker
during operation. In addition, you can take a current-flow criterion into consideration for the test. The current-
flow criterion causes the circuit-breaker test to be executed only if the current flow through the circuit breaker
is below the parameterizable threshold value.
The following test programs are available for you to carry out the circuit-breaker test. 1-pole tests are only
possible if the respective circuit breaker is capable of being opened on 1 pole.
No. Test Program
1 3-phase open/closed cycle
2 1-pole open/closed cycle A
3 1-pole open/closed cycle B
4 1-pole open/closed cycle C
Structure of the Function

The Circuit-breaker test function is used in protection function groups for circuit breakers.
[dw_cbch01, 1, en_US]
Figure 10-7 Embedding of the Function
[dw_zecbc1p2, 2, en_US]
Figure 10-8 Structure of the Function
Test Procedure
The following conditions must be satisfied before the circuit-breaker test can start:

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Functional Tests
² If a circuit-breaker auxiliary contact reports the position of the breaker pole to the device via the binary
inputs of the signal Position, the test cycle is not initiated unless the circuit breaker is closed.
² If the circuit-breaker auxiliary contact has not been routed, you must ensure that the circuit breaker is
closed.
² The circuit breaker must be ready for an open-closed cycle or an open-only cycle (indication >Ready).
² A protection function must not have been picked up in the circuit-breaker protection function group
responsible for the circuit breaker.
[sc_cbtest3p, 1, en_US]
Figure 10-9 Circuit-Breaker Test Parameters
Figure 10-10 shows the chronological sequence of an open-closed cycle as an example. If you have activated
the Open only option, the close command is not executed and the dead time not taken into consideration.
If a circuit-breaker auxiliary contact is connected, the function waits for the indication circuit breaker Posi-
tion = open after the trip command is generated. When the indication Position = open is received, the
close command is transmitted during an open-closed cycle after a dead time (parameter (_:6151:101)
Dead time). If the feedback from the circuit-breaker positions is not received within the maximum transmis-
sion time (Dead time + 2 · Output time + 5 s), the circuit-breaker test is aborted and considered to be
failed. The proper functioning of the circuit breaker is monitored via the feedback on the circuit-breaker posi-
tions.
[dw_cbch03, 1, en_US]
Figure 10-10 Progress over Time of a Circuit-Breaker Test Cycle
With the Use current-flow criterion parameter, you can also specify that a circuit-breaker test is only
executed if the current flowing through the circuit breaker does not exceed a specific current threshold
(Current threshold parameter). Otherwise, the circuit-breaker test is not started.
² If the current-flow criterion is disabled, the current threshold is not evaluated. Then, the circuit-breaker
test is performed independent of the magnitude of current flowing through the circuit breaker.
You can start the test program as follows:
• Via the device-control panel
• Via DIGSI
• Via communication protocols
• Via control commands, which you can also connect in the CFC
The following figure illustrates operation of the circuit-breaker test in DIGSI.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Functional Tests
[sc_cb_1-3pol, 1, en_US]
Figure 10-11 Circuit-Breaker Test in the Test Suite in DIGSI
² Select the function in the project tree on the left in the online access.
² Start the desired test program in the upper portion of the working area.
² The corresponding feedback is displayed in the bottom portion of the working area. Additional informa-
tion about the behavior of other functions while the circuit-breaker test is being performed can be read in
the operational log.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Functional Tests
10.10 Functional Test of the Trip-Circuit Supervision
10.10 Functional Test of the Trip-Circuit Supervision

General
² For the test, make sure that the switching threshold of the binary inputs is clearly below half the rated
value of the control voltage.
2 Binary Inputs
² Make sure that the binary inputs used are isolated.
1 Binary Input
² Make sure that, in the circuit of the 2nd circuit-breaker auxiliary contact, an equivalent resistance R is
connected.
² Observe the dimensioning notes under the section Equivalent resistance R.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Functional Tests
10.11 Functional Test Protection Interfaces
10.11.1 Checking the Communication
If the devices are connected to one another via the protection interface and switched on, they contact each
other automatically. If, for example, device 1 recognizes device 2, the successful connection is indicated (see
next figure). Accordingly, each device signals to all devices that a communication is available.
The following information is provided via the protection interfaces by the devices in the device combination:
• Address of the device in the device combination
• Circuit-breaker switch position (open/closed/undefined); only for protection interfaces of type 1
• Availability of the protection-interface communication within the last minute, as percentage

Availability of the protection-interface communication within the last hour, as percentage
• Signal-transit time in the transmission and reception direction of the telegrams between the local device
and the neighboring device
You can find this diagnostic data in DIGSI under the following menu structure:
[sc_protec, 1, en_US]
Figure 10-12 Diagnostic Data of the Protection-Interface Channels – Device Address
NOTE
i To reset the measured values for the protection interface directly in the device, proceed as follows:
Device functions > x Device protection comm. > Protection interface y > Release measured values.
Proper communication of the devices among each other can be supervised during operation.
² Check the connections for each protection interface in DIGSI 5.
If a connection is successfully established, the Status of topo recog. field shows the indication valid in DIGSI
5 (see Figure 10-12).

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Functional Tests
If 2 devices are parameterized incorrectly, the Status of topo recog. field shows the indication invalid (see
Figure 10-12).
In Figure 10-13 there is no communication between device 1 and device 2, that is, the protection interfaces 1
and 2 of device 1 do not receive data. One reason for this can be a remote control with DIGSI via the protec-
tion interface. In this case, the protection connection is interrupted and the connection is used exclusively for
DIGSI.
[sc_protcocol, 1, en_US]
Figure 10-13 Communication Deactivated

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Functional Tests
10.12 Functional Test of the Inrush-Current Detection
10.12 Functional Test of the Inrush-Current Detection

General
² For the test, make sure that the test current reflects the typical inrush current.
² Perform the test with transient signals. These can be recorded inrush currents or simulated currents from
a transient system model.
² When using synthetic signals, observe the notes on the individual measuring principles.
Harmonic Analysis
² Superimpose on the fundamental-component current a test current of double frequency (2nd harmonic)
and test the pickup behavior with this.
² Cause a threshold value excess (internal pickup) for one of the protection functions that you want to
block.
- or -
² Apply a test current with a load current as lead (current step).
The inrush current detection creates a blocking signal.
CWA Process
² Create a test current that has flat ranges of a minimum width of 3 ms simultaneously in all 3 phase
currents.
The inrush current detection creates a blocking signal.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
11 Technical Data
11.1 General Device Data 937

11.2 Date and Time Synchronization 951
11.3 Busbar Differential Protection 952
11.4 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection 1-Pole/3-Pole 954
11.5 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection 3-Pole 956
11.6 Inherent Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection 958
11.7 End-Fault Protection Disconnector Supervision 959
11.8 External Tripping Busbar Section (Direct) 960
11.9 External Tripping Busbar Section (from Bay) 961
11.10 Bus Coupler Differential Protection 962
11.11 Differential Current Supervision 963
11.12 Zero-Crossing Supervision 964
11.13 Disconnector Supervision 965
11.14 Circuit-Breaker Supervision 966
11.15 Overcurrent Protection, Phases 967
11.16 Overcurrent Protection, Ground 977
11.17 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases 981
11.18 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground 985
11.19 Voltage Protection 989
11.20 Frequency Protection 1000
11.21 Voltage-Jump Detection 1003
11.22 Measuring-Voltage Failure Detection 1004
11.23 Voltage-Transformer Circuit Breaker 1006
11.24 Voltage-Balance Supervision 1007
11.25 Voltage-Sum Supervision 1008
11.26 Voltage Phase-Rotation Supervision 1009
11.27 Impedance Protection 1010
11.28 Arc Protection 1011
11.29 Inrush-Current Detection 1012
11.30 2nd Harmonic Detection Ground 1014
11.31 Trip-Circuit Supervision 1016
11.32 Analog Channel Supervision via Fast Current Sum 1017
11.33 Operational Measured Values and Statistical Values 1018
11.34 Analog-Units Function Group 1021

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data
11.35 Temperature Supervision 1022

11.36 Protection Interface and Protection Topology 1023
11.37 Phasor Measurement Unit 1025
11.38 Measuring Transducers 1026
11.39 Circuit-Breaker Monitoring 1027
11.40 CFC 1028

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data
11.1 General Device Data
11.1.1 Analog Inputs
Current Inputs
All current, voltage, and power data are specified as RMS values.
Rated frequency frated 50 Hz, 60 Hz
Protection-class current trans- Rated current Irated Measuring range
formers
5A 0 A to 500 A
1A 0 A to 100 A
Consumption per current input at Approx. 0.1 VA
rated current
Thermal rating 500 A for 1 s
(protection-class current trans- 150 A for 10 s
formers) 20 A continuously
25 A for 3 min
30 A for 2 min
Dynamic load-carrying capacity 1250 A one half wave
GIS Low-Power Current Input (via Module IO240)
GIS-LPCT input Primary rated current Irated Measuring range
Kr ⋅ GIS-LPCT secondary rated value Kpcr = 50 (protection channel)
Kr = Transformation ratio of the Kpcr = 1.6 (measuring channel)
GIS-LPCT (DIGSI setting)
Refer to the GIS manual for the GIS-
LPCT secondary rated value.
Power consumption per current Max. 40 mVA
circuit at rated current Burden = 9.5 kΩ
Thermal rating Max. input voltage = 20 V
Accuracy Class 5TPE (protection channel)
Class 0.2S (measuring channel)
Voltage Input
Input and output modules IO102, IO202, IO208, IO211, IO215
IO214
Measuring range 0 V to 200 V 0 V to 7.07 V
Burden < 0.1 VA < 0.01 VA
Thermal rating 230 V continuously 20 V continuously
GIS Low-Power Voltage Input (via Module IO240)

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data
GIS-LPVT input Primary rated voltage Vrated Measuring range

Kr ⋅ GIS-LPVT secondary rated value Kpcr = 2
Kr = Transformation ratio of the
GIS-LPVT (DIGSI setting)
Refer to the GIS manual for the GIS-
LPVT secondary rated value.
Power consumption per current Max. 1 mVA
circuit at rated current Burden = 50 Ω
Thermal rating Max. input current = 4.4 mA
Accuracy Class 0.1
Measuring-Transducer Inputs (via Module ANAI-CA-4EL)
Insulation class PELV (Protective Extra Low Voltage) (according to IEC 60255-27)
Connector type 8-pin terminal spring
Input channels 4 differential current inputs
Measuring range DC -20 mA to +20 mA
Tolerance 0.5 % of the measuring range
Maximum measuring range DC -25.6 mA to +25.6 mA
Input impedance 140 Ω
ADC type 16-Bit Delta-Sigma
Permissible potential difference DC 20 V
between channels
Galvanic separation from ground/ AC 500 V, DC 700 V
housing
Permissible overload DC 100 mA continuously
Sampling rate 5 Hz
Fast Measuring Transducer Inputs, Voltage (via Module ANAI-CE-2EL, Channel 2)
Insulation class HLV (Hazardous Live Voltage) (in accordance with IEC 60255-27)
Connector type 8-pin terminal spring
Input channels 1 DC voltage input, channel 2 (CH2)
Measuring range DC 0 V to + 300 V
Tolerance 0.2 % of measuring range
Input impedance 260 kΩ
Galvanic separation against DC 4.6 kV
ground/housing
Max. permissible voltage against DC 300 V
ground on the measuring inputs
Sampling rate 16 kHz
Inputs for Optical Sensors for Arc Protection (via Module ARC-CD-3FO)
Connector type AVAGO AFBR-4526Z

Number of transceivers 3
Fiber type Plastic Optical Fiber (POF) 1 mm
Receiver
Maximum -10 dBm ± 2 dBm
Minimum -40 dBm ± 2 dBm
Spectrum 400 nm to 1100 nm

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data
Attenuation In the case of plastic optical fibers, you can expect a path attenuation of
0.2 dB/m. Additional attenuation comes from the plug and sensor head.
Optical budget30 Minimal 25 dB
Analog sampling rate 16 kHz
ADC type 10-bit successive approximation
Transmitter
Type LED
Wavelength λ = 650 nm
Transmitter power Minimum 0 dBm
Maximum 2 dBm
Numerical aperture 0.5 31
Signal rate connection test 1 pulse per second
Pulse duration connection test 11 μs
Fast Measuring Transducer Inputs, Voltage/Current (via IO210, IO212)
NOTE
i Current and voltage must not be connected at the same time to one measuring transducer input. Instead,
only connect either current or voltage. For EMC reasons, do not connect a line to an unused input (current
or voltage).
Use shielded cables.
Table 11-1 Fast Measuring Transducer Inputs, Voltage
Differential voltage input channels IO210: 432

IO212: 833
Measuring range DC -10 V to +10 V
Fault < 0.5 % of measuring range
Input impedance 48 kΩ
Max. permissible voltage with 300 V
respect to ground on the meas-
uring inputs
Permissible overload DC 20 V continuously
DC 60 V continuously (IO210 MU3 terminal point C9)
Table 11-2 Fast Measuring Transducer Inputs, Current
Differential current input channels IO210: 434

IO212: 835
Measuring range DC -20 mA to +20 mA
Fault < 0.5 % of measuring range
Input impedance, current 12 Ω
Permissible potential difference DC 3.5 kV
between channels
30 All values in combination with sensors approved by Siemens.

31 Numerical aperture (NA = sin θ (launch angle))
32 The IO210 has 4 fast measuring transducer inputs. They can be used either as a voltage or current input.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data
Galvanic separation with respect to DC 3.5 kV

ground/housing
Permissible current overload DC 100 mA continuously
Table 11-3 Combined Data for Fast Measuring Transducer Voltage/Current Inputs
Conversion principle Delta-sigma (16 bit)

Insulation test voltage between the DC 3.5 kV
channels
Insulation test voltage with respect DC 3.5 kV
to ground/housing
Measured value repetition 62.5 μs
Insulation class IO210 ELV (Extra Low Voltage) (as per IEC 60255-27)
Insulation class IO212 SELV (as per IEC 60255-27)
Temperature Inputs
Settings Value Note

Insulation class PELV (Protective Extra Low Voltage) –
(acc. to IEC 60255-27)
Measurement mode • Pt 100 Ω –
• Ni 100 Ω
• Ni 120 Ω
3-wire connection, shielded cables
Connector type 16-pin, 17-pin terminal spring –
Temperature measuring range -65 °C to +710 °C For PT100
-50 °C to +250 °C For NI100
-50 °C to +250 °C For NI120
Temperature Inputs (via Module IO240)
Settings Value
Sensor Type PT100 (Class F 0.3 EN 60751)
4-wire shielded cable connection
Measurement range -50 °C to +180 °C
Accuracy ±1 °C
LPIT Digital Input (via Module IO240)
Shield Cover Input

Sensor type Dry contact input
Measurement type Output voltage of 1 mA current injection @ max. DC 5 V

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data
11.1.2 Supply Voltage
Integrated Power Supply

For modular devices, the following modules contain a power supply:
PS201 – Power supply of the base module and of the 1st device row
PS203 – Power supply of the 2nd device row
PS204 – Redundant power supply
CB202 – Plug-in module assembly with integrated power supply, for example, to accommodate communica-
tion modules
Permissible voltage DC 19 V to DC 60 V DC 48 V to DC 300 V
ranges AC 80 V to AC 265 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz
(PS201, PS203, PS204,
CB202)
Auxiliary rated voltage VH DC 24 V/DC 48 V DC 60 V/DC 110 V/DC 125 V/DC 220 V/
(PS201, PS203, PS204, DC 250 V or
CB202) AC 100 V/AC 115 V/AC 230 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz
Permissible voltage DC 19 V to DC 60 V DC 48 V to 150 V DC 88 V to DC 300 V
ranges (PS101) AC 80 V to AC 265 V,
Only for non-modular 50 Hz/60 Hz
devices
Auxiliary rated voltage VH DC 24 V/DC 48 V DC 60 V/DC 110 V/ DC 110 V/ DC 125 V/
(PS101) DC 125 V DC 220 V/DC 250 V
Only for non-modular or
devices AC 100 V/AC 115 V/
AC 230 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz
Superimposed alternating ≤ 15 % of the DC auxiliary rated voltage (applies only to direct voltage)
voltage, peak-to-peak,
IEC 60255-11,
IEC 61000-4-17
Inrush current ≤ 18 A
Recommended external Miniature circuit breaker 6 A, characteristic C according to IEC 60898
protection
Internal fuse
– DC 24 V to DC 48 V DC 60 V to DC 125 V DC 24 V to DC 48 V
AC 100 V to AC 230 V
PS101 4 A inert, AC 250 V, 2 A time-lag, AC 250 V, DC 300 V, UL recognized
Only for non-modular DC 150 V, SIBA type 179200 or Schurter type SPT 5x20
devices UL recognized
SIBA type 179200 or
Schurter type SPT 5x20
PS201, PS203, CB202 4 A inert, AC 250 V, 2 A time-lag, AC 250 V, DC 300 V, UL recognized
(to device version xA) DC 150 V, SIBA type 179200 or Schurter type SPT 5x20
UL recognized
SIBA type 179200 or
PS201, PS203, PS204 4 A inert, AC 250 V, 3.15 A time-lag, AC 250 V, DC 300 V, UL recognized
(Device version xB and DC 150 V, SIBA type 179200 or Schurter type SPT 5x20
higher) UL recognized
SIBA type 179200 or

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data
Integrated Power Supply

Power consumption (life relay active)
– DC AC 230 V/50 Hz AC 115 V/50 Hz
1/3 module, non-modular 7 W 16 VA 12.5 VA
Without plug-in modules
1/3 base module, modular 13 W 55 VA 40 VA
Without plug-in modules
1/6 expansion module 3W 6 VA 6 VA
1/6 plug-in module 3.5 W 14 VA 7 VA
assembly without plug-in
modules (modules CB202)
Plug-in module for base <5W < 6 VA < 6 VA
module or plug-in module
assembly (for example,
communication module)
Stored-energy time for auxiliary voltage outage or For V ≥ DC 24 V ≥ 50 ms
short circuit, modular devices For V ≥ DC 110 V ≥ 50 ms
IEC 61000-4-11 For V ≥ AC 115 V ≥ 50 ms
IEC 61000-4-29
Stored-energy time for auxiliary voltage outage or For V ≥ DC 24 V ≥ 20 ms
short circuit, non-modular devices For V ≥ DC 60 V ≥ 50 ms
IEC 61000-4-11 For V ≥ AC 115 V ≥ 200 ms
IEC 61000-4-29
11.1.3 Binary Inputs
Standard Binary Input
Rated voltage range DC 24 V to 250 V

The binary inputs of SIPROTEC 5 are bipolar, with the exception of the
binary inputs on the modules IO230, IO231, and IO233.
Current consumption, excited Approx. DC 0.6 mA to 2.5 mA (independent of the control voltage)
Power consumption, max. 0.6 W
Pickup time Approx. 3 ms
Dropout time36 Capacitive load (supply-line capaci- Dropout time
tance)
< 5 nF < 4 ms
< 10 nF < 6 ms
< 50 nF < 10 ms
< 220 nF < 35 ms
36 For time-critical applications with low-active signals, consider the specified dropout times. If necessary, provide for active discharge
of the binary input (for example, a resistor in parallel to the binary input or using a change-over contact).

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data
Control voltage for all modules Adapt the binary-input threshold to be set in the device to the control
with binary inputs, except voltage.
module IO233 Range 1 for 24 V, 48 V, and 60 V Vlow ≤ DC 10 V
Control voltage Vhigh ≥ DC 19 V
Range 2 for 110 V and 125 V Vlow ≤ DC 44 V
Range 3 for 220 V and 250 V Vlow ≤ DC 88 V
Control voltage for binary inputs of Range for 125 V Vlow ≤ DC 85 V
the IO233 module Control voltage Vhigh ≥ DC 105 V
Maximum permitted voltage DC 300 V
The binary inputs contain interference suppression capacitors. To ensure EMC immunity, use the terminals
shown in the terminal diagrams/connection diagrams to connect the binary inputs to the common potential.
Special Binary Input with Maximized Robustness against Electrical Disturbances and Failures (IO216)
Rated voltage range DC 220 V

The special binary inputs of the SIPROTEC 5 with maximized robustness
against electrical disturbances and failures are bipolar and available only
on the module IO216.
Input impedance 50 kΩ to 60 kΩ
Rejection pulse charge > 200 µC
Current consumption, excited Approx. DC 1.2 mA to 2.0 mA (additionally to the current consumption
of the input impedance)
Power consumption, max. 1.5 W at DC 242 V
Pickup time Approx. 3 ms
Dropout time37 Capacitive load (supply-line capaci- Dropout time
tance)
< 5 nF < 3 ms
< 10 nF < 4 ms
< 50 nF < 5 ms
< 220 nF < 10 ms
Control voltage for the module Range for 220 V control voltage
IO216 Threshold pickup 158 V to 170 V
Threshold dropout 132 V to 154 V
Maximum permitted voltage DC 300 V
The binary inputs contain interference suppression capacitors. To ensure EMC immunity, use the terminals
shown in the terminal diagrams/connection diagrams to connect the binary inputs to the common potential.
11.1.4 Relay Outputs
Standard Relay (Type S)
Rated voltage (AC and DC) 250 V

Rated current (continuous) and total permissible 5A
current for contacts connected to common potential
37 For time-critical applications with low-active signals, consider the specified dropout times. If necessary, provide for active discharge
of the binary input (for example, a resistor in parallel to the binary input or using a change-over contact).

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data
Permissible current per contact (switching on and 30 A for 1 s (make contact only)
holding)
Short-time current across closed contact 250 A for 30 ms
Breaking capacity Max. 30 W (L/R = 40 ms)
Max. 360 VA (power factor ≥ 0.35, 50 Hz to 60 Hz)
Switching time OOT (Output Operating Time) Make time: typical: 8 ms; maximum: 10 ms
Additional delay of the output medium used Break time: typical: 2 ms; maximum: 5 ms
Max. rated data of the output contacts in accordance DC 24 V, 5 A, general purpose
with UL certification DC 48 V, 0.8 A, general purpose
DC 240 V, 0.1 A, general purpose
AC 240 V, 5 A, general purpose
AC 120 V, 1/6 hp
AC 250 V, 1/2 hp
B300
R300
Interference suppression capacitors across the 4.7 nF, ± 20 %, AC 250 V
contacts
Safety/monitoring 2-channel activation
Fast Relay (Type F)
Rated voltage (AC and DC) 250 V

Rated current (continuous) and total permissible 5A
current for contacts connected to common potential
Permissible current per contact (switching on and 30 A for 1 s (make contact only)
holding)
Max. 360 VA (power factor ≥ 0.35, 50 Hz to 60 Hz)
Switching time OOT (Output Operating Time) Make time: typical: 4 ms; maximum: 5 ms
Max. rated data of the output contacts in accordance DC 24 V, 5 A, general purpose
with UL certification DC 48 V, 0.8 A, general purpose
DC 240 V, 0.1 A, general purpose
AC 240 V, 5 A, general purpose
AC 120 V, 1/6 hp
AC 250 V, 1/2 hp
B300
R300
contacts
Safety/monitoring 2-channel activation with cyclic testing (for make
contact only)
High-Speed Relay with Semiconductor Acceleration (Type HS)
Rated voltage AC 200 V, DC 250 V

Rated current (continuous) 5 A (in accordance with UL approval)
10 A (not UL approved; AWG 14 / 2.5 mm2copper
conductors necessary)
Permissible current per contact (switching on and 30 A for 1 s
holding)

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data

Switching time OOT (Output Operating Time) Make time: typical: 0.2 ms; maximum: 0.2 ms
Max. rated data of the output contacts in accordance B150
with UL certification Q300
contacts
Safety/monitoring 2-channel activation
11.1.5 ETH-BD-2FO
Description Communication module for the transmission of Ethernet protocols via

2 optical interfaces, suitable for Process-bus client, Merging Unit, and
ultrafast GOOSE
Product code P1Z3034
Figure
Connector type 2 x duplex LC

Baud rate 100 Mbit/s
Protocol DIGSI 5 protocol (secure Web service protocol)
IEC 61850 (MMS and GOOSE)
IEC 61850-8-1 (9-2 Client and 9-2 Merging Unit)
IEC 60870-5-104
DNP3
Modbus TCP
PROFINET IO
Synchrophasor protocol (IEEE C37.118 – PMU)
You can switch other network services such as HSR, SNMP, RSTP, PRP,
SNTP, SUP, and IEEE 1588v2/PTP on and off.
Max. line length 2 km for 62.5 µm/125 µm optical fibers
Transmitter Power Minimum Typical Maximum

50 μm/125 μm, NA38 = 0.2 -24.0 dBm -21.0 dBm -17.0 dBm
62.5 μm/125 μm, NA38 = 0.275 -20.0 dBm -17.0 dBm -14.0 dBm
Receiver sensitivity Maximum -12.0 dBm

Minimum -31.0 dBm
Optical budget Minimum 7.0 dB for 50 μm/125 μm, NA38 = 0.2
Minimum 11.0 dB for 62.5 μm/125 μm, NA38 = 0.275
38 Numerical Aperture (NA = sin θ [launch angle])

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data
Interface design Corresponds to IEEE 802.3, 100Base-FX

Laser class 1 as per EN 60825-1/-2 With the use of 62.5 μm/125 μm and 50 μm/125 μm optical fibers
NOTE
i The firmware must be updated to version ≥ V7.90 if using the ETH-BD-2FO module. If the module is
connected to a device with a previous version, a hardware failure is reported that disappears with an FW
update to V7.90. As this is not an actual hardware failure, there is no need to send in the device.
The ETH-BD-2FO module offers the possibility of replacing the SFPs (Small Form-Factor Pluggable) delivered by
default for a communication route of up to 2 km by SFPs that can be ordered separately in order to adapt the
interface to different transmission media and longer routes.
SFP with Optical Interface for 24 Km, Single Mode
Description SFP for distances up to 24 km when using singlemode optical fibers

Connector type Duplex LC
Protocol See information for the module ETH-BD-2FO
Max. line length 24 km for 9 µm/125 µm optical fibers
Distance 24 km
Laser class 1 as per EN 60825-1/-2 With the use of 9 µm/125 µm optical fibers
Transmitter Power Minimum Maximum

Transmitter power coupled in -15 dBm -8 dBm
singlemode optical fibers
Receiver sensitivity -8 dBm -31dBm
Optical budget 16 dB –
SFP (Small Form-Factor Pluggable) with Electrical Interface
Description SFP with RJ45 connector, for Ethernet protocols via an electrical inter-
face
Connector type RJ45
Protocol
Max. line length 20 m with Ethernet patch cable CAT 6 S/FTP, F/FTP, or SF/FTP
Interface design Corresponds to IEEE 802.3, 100BaseTX

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data
Removing SFP Pluggable Transceivers
! CAUTION
Risk of burns due to high temperatures of the SFP pluggable transceivers
Noncompliance with the safety notes may result in medium or light injuries.
² The SFP pluggable transceivers can be disconnected and plugged in while in operation. Siemens
recommends switching off the device.
² Allow the SFP pluggable transceiver to cool as much as possible.
✧ Remove the connecting cables or the dust protection cap that was plugged on in the delivery state from
the SFP pluggable transceiver.
✧ In order to release the interlocking, open the bracket on the SFP pluggable transceiver.
✧ Pull on the bracket in order to pull the SFP pluggable transceiver out of the slot. The removal must be
possible with free movement and without great exertion of force.
✧ Provide the SFP pluggable transceiver with the dust protection cap so that the optics are protected from
contamination.
Mounting SFP Pluggable Transceivers
✧ Check whether the bracket on the SFP pluggable transceiver is closed.

The bracket must be closed.
✧ Insert the pluggable transceiver into the slot until it audibly locks in place.
The SFP pluggable transceiver is securely fixed in the slot.
NOTE
i Check for secure positioning of the transceiver in the slot and whether it is locked in place in order to avoid
unintentional removal by pulling on the connection line.
11.1.6 Design Data
Masses
Device Size
Weight of the Modular Devices
Type of construction 1/3 1/2 2/3 5/6 1/1
Flush-mounting device 4.4 kg 7.2 kg 9.9 kg 12.7 kg 15.5 kg
Surface-mounted device with inte- 7.4 kg 11.7 kg 15.9 kg 20.2 kg 24.5 kg
grated on-site operation panel
Surface-mounted device with 4.7 kg 7.8 kg 10.8 kg 13.9 kg 17.0 kg
detached on-site operation panel
Devices with IO240 weigh 0.9 kg more.

Size Weight
Detached on-site operation panel 1/3 1.9 kg
Detached on-site operation panel 1/6 1.1 kg

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data
Dimensions of the Base and Expansion Modules
Type of Construction Max. Total Width x Max. Total Height x

Max. Total Depth39, Each Rounded up to
the Next Full mm (in Inches)
Flush-mounting device Base module 150 mm x 266 mm x 231 mm (5.91 x
10.47 x 9.09)
Base module with IO240 150 mm x 266 mm x 277 mm (5.91 x
10.47 x 10.91)
Base module with IO111 150 mm x 266 mm x 243 mm (5.91 x
10.47 x 9.57)
Expansion module 75 mm x 266 mm x 231 mm (2.95 x 10.47
x 9.09)
Expansion module with IO240 75 mm x 266 mm x 277 mm (2.95 x 10.47
x 10.91)
Expansion module with IO111 75 mm x 266 mm x 243 mm (2.95 x 10.47
x 9.57)
Surface-mounted device with Base module 150 mm x 315 mm x 231 mm (5.91 x 12.4
integrated on-site operation x 9.09)
panel Expansion module 75 mm x 315 mm x 341 mm (2.95 x 12.4 x
13.43)
Surface-mounted device with Base module 150 mm x 315 mm x 231 mm (5.91 x 12.4
detached on-site operation x 9.09)
panel Base module with IO240 150 mm x 315 mm x 277 mm (5.91 x 12.4
x 10.91)
Base module with IO111 150 mm x 315 mm x 243 mm (5.91 x 12.4
x 9.57)
Expansion module 75 mm x 315 mm x 231 mm (2.95 x 12.4 x
9.09)
Expansion module with IO240 75 mm x 315 mm x 277 mm (2.95 x 12.4 x
10.91)
Expansion module with IO111 75 mm x 315 mm x 243 mm (2.95 x 12.4 x
9.57)
Dimensions of the Device Rows
Type of Max. Total wWidth x Max. Total Height x Max. Total Depth40, Rounded to full mm (in
Construction Inches)
Device width 1/3 1/2 2/3 5/6 1/1
Flush-mounting 150 mm x 225 mm x 300 mm x 375 mm x 450 mm x
device 266 mm x 266 mm x 266 mm x 266 mm x 266 mm x
231 mm 231 mm 231 mm 231 mm 231 mm
(5.91 x 10.47 x (8.86 x 10.47 x (11.81 x 10.47 x (14.76 x 10.47 x (17.72 x 10.47 x
9.09) 9.09) 9.09) 9.09) 9.09)
device with 266 mm x 266 mm x 266 mm x 266 mm x 266 mm x
IO240 277 mm 277 mm 277 mm 277 mm 277 mm
(5.91 x 10.47 x (8.86 x 10.47 x (11.81 x 10.47 x (14.76 x 10.47 x (17.72 x 10.47 x
10.91) 10.91) 10.91) 10.91) 10.91)
39 Including current terminal, excluding USB port cover


C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data
Type of Max. Total wWidth x Max. Total Height x Max. Total Depth40, Rounded to full mm (in
Construction Inches)
device with 266 mm x 266 mm x 266 mm x 266 mm x 266 mm x
IO111 243 mm 243 mm 243 mm 243 mm 243 mm
(5.91 x 10.47 x (8.86 x 10.47 x (11.81 x 10.47 x (14.76 x 10.47 x (17.72 x 10.47 x
9.57) 9.57) 9.57) 9.57) 9.57)
Surface- 150 mm x 225 mm x 300 mm x 375 mm x 450 mm x
mounted device 315 mm x 315 mm x 315 mm x 315 mm x 315 mm x
with integrated 341 mm 343 mm41 343 mm41 343 mm41 343 mm41
on-site operation (5.91 x 12.4 x (8.86 x 12.4 x (11.81 x 12.4 x (14.76 x 12.4 x (17.72 x 12.4 x
panel 13.43) 13.43) 13.43) 13.43) 13.43)
with detached 231 mm 231 mm 231 mm 231 mm 231 mm
panel 9.09) 9.09) 9.09) 9.09) 9.09)
panel with 10.91) 10.91) 10.91) 10.91) 10.91)
IO240
panel with 9.57) 9.57) 9.57) 9.57) 9.57)
IO111
Plug-In Module Dimensions
Type of Construction Max. Width x Max. Height x Max. Depth (in Inches)
USART-Ax-xEL, ETH-Bx-xEL 61 mm x 45 mm x 121 mm (2.4 x 1.77 x 4.76)
USART-Ax-xFO, ETH-Bx-xFO (without protective cover) 61 mm x 45 mm x 133 mm (2.4 x 1.77 x 5.24)
ANAI-CA-4EL, ANAI-CE-2EL 61 mm x 45 mm x 120 mm (2.4 x 1.77 x 4.72)
ARC-CD-3FO 61 mm x 45 mm x 121 mm (2.4 x 1.77 x 4.76)
Minimum Bending Radii of the Connecting Cables Between the On-Site Operation Panel and the Base Module
Fiber-optic cable R = 50 mm
Pay attention to the length of the cable protection
sleeve, which you must also include in calculations.
D-Sub cable R = 50 mm (minimum bending radius)
Degree of Protection According to IEC 60529
For equipment in the surface-mounting housing IP5442 for front

For equipment in the flush-mounting housing IP5442 for front

41 Including connecting rail
42 The supplied plug-in strips must be used for expansion modules with LEDs.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data
For operator protection (back side) IP2x for current terminal (installed)
IP2x for voltage terminal (installed)
Degree of pollution, IEC 60255-27 2
Maximum operating altitude above sea level 2000 m (6561.68 ft)
UL Note
Type 1 if mounted into a door or front cover of an enclosure.

When expanding the device with the 2nd device row, then they must be mounted completely inside an
enclosure.
Tightening Torques for Terminal Screws
Type of Line Current Terminal Voltage Terminal with Voltage Terminal with
Spring-Loaded Terminals Screw Connection
Stranded wires with ring- 2.7 Nm No ring-type lug No ring-type lug
type lug
Stranded wires with boot- 2.7 Nm 1.0 Nm 0.6 Nm
lace ferrules or pin-type
lugs
Solid conductor, bare 2.0 Nm 1.0 Nm –
(2 mm2)
Blank stranded wire Not permitted 1 Nm 0.6 Nm
NOTE
i For current and voltage terminals, the maximum speed of the tool must not exceed 640 rpm.
NOTE
i Use copper cables only.
Torques for Other Screw Types
Screw Type Torque

M4 x 20 1.2 Nm
M4 x 8 1.2 Nm
M2.5 x 6 0.39 Nm
Countersunk screw, M2.5 x 6 0.39 Nm
Countersunk screw, M2.5 x 8 0.39 Nm
Collar screw, M4 x 20 0.7 Nm

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data

Date format DD.MM.YYYY (Europe)
MM/DD/YYYY (USA)
YYYY-MM-DD (China)
Time source 1, Time source 2 None
IRIG B 002(003)
IRIG B 006(007)
IRIG B 005(004) with extension according to
IEEE C37.118-2005
DCF77
PI (protection interface) 43
SNTP
IEC 60870-5-103
DNP3
IEEE 1588
T104
Time zone 1, time zone 2 Local
UTC
Failure indication after 0 s to 3600 s
Time zone and daylight saving time Manually setting the time zones
Time zone offset with respect to GMT -720 min to 840 min
Switching over to daylight saving time Active
Inactive
Beginning of daylight saving time Input: day and time
End of daylight saving time Input: day and time
Offset daylight saving time 0 min to 120 min [Steps 15 min]
43 if provided

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data

General Differential Protection Setting Values
Rated object current Irated obj. 100 A to 50000 A Increments of 1
Check Zone Setting Values
Threshold value Idiff 0.20 to 4.00 Increments of 0.01

Threshold value Idiff (sensitive characteristic curve) 0.05 to 4.00 Increments of 0.01
Threshold value Irestr. (sensitive characteristic curve) 0.00 to 25.00 Increments of 0.01
Threshold value Irestr. (sensitive characteristic curve/ 0.00 to 25.00 Increments of 0.01
CBFP)
Stabilization factor k 0.10 to 0.80 Increments of 0.01
General Busbar Section Setting Values
Threshold value Idiff 0.20 to 4.00 Increments of 0.01

Threshold value Idiff (sensitive characteristic curve) 0.05 to 4.00 Increments of 0.01
Threshold value Irestr. (sensitive characteristic curve) 0.00 to 25.00 Increments of 0.01
Threshold value Irestr. (sensitive characteristic curve/ 0.00 to 25.00 Increments of 0.01
CBFP)
Stabilization factor k 0.10 to 0.80 Increments of 0.01
Setting Values for Differential-Current Supervision
Current limiting value I/Irated,obj. 0.05 to 0.80 Increments of 0.01

(Irated,obj. = Rated-current object)
Time delay 1.00 s to 10.00 s Increments of 0.01
for check zone and busbar-selective protection
Setting Values for Cross Stabilization
Restraint current ratio, selective zones 0.00 to 1.00 Increments of 0.01

Restraint current ratio, check zone 0.00 to 1.00 Increments of 0.01
Operate Time
Minimum operate time Fast relay (type F) 8 ms (-1 ms/+ 4 ms)

Delay for signal transmission via communication (for Approx. 3 ms
example, GOOSE)
Delay for SMV transmission Approx. 1 ms
Frequency
Frequency range 50 Hz or 60 Hz

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data
Frequency Operating Range
0.9 ≤ f/frated ≤ 1.1 According to specified tolerances

10 Hz ≤ f < 0.9 frated Expanded tolerances
1.1 frated < f ≤ 90 Hz
f < 10 Hz Inactive
f > 90 Hz
Tolerances
Current 5 % of the setting value or 50 mA

Overcurrent release of the circuit breaker (for busbar- 5 % of the setting value or 50 mA
protection tripping)
k factor 5 % of the setting value
Times 5 % of the setting value or 50 ms
Remanence of the current transformers Stable for external errors with up to 80 % remanence

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data
11.4 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection 1-Pole/3-Pole

Starting Conditions
For circuit-breaker failure protection 1-pole tripping internal or external44

3-pole tripping internal or external45
Setting Values
Phase-current threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A

values 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A Increments of 0.01 A
Threshold value sensitive 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A Increments of 0.01 A
Supervision time of release signal 0.00 s to 1.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Time delays T1 0.000 s to 60.000 s Increments of 0.001 s
Supervision times of the binary inputs 0.05 s to 60.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Dropout
The larger dropout differential (= | pickup threshold – dropout threshold |) of the following 2
criteria is used:
Dropout differential derived from the parameter Dropout ratio
If this parameter is not available, a dropout ratio of 95 % applies to the current threshold values.
Minimum absolute dropout differential
Protection-class current transformers 15 mA sec. (Irated = 1 A) or
75 mA sec. (Irated = 5 A)
Instrument transformers 0.5 mA sec. (Irated = 1 A) or
2.5 mA sec. (Irated = 5 A)
Circuit-Breaker Supervision
Supervision of circuit-breaker auxiliary-contact position

For 3-pole CB tripping 1 input each for make contact and break contact
For 1-pole CB tripping 1 input each for auxiliary contact per pole or
1 input for each series connection make contact and
break contact
NOTE
i The circuit-breaker failure protection can also work without the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts stated.
Auxiliary contacts are required for circuit-breaker failure protection in cases where the current flow is
absent or too low for tripping (for example with a transformer or a Buchholz protection).
Times
Pickup time, in the case of an internal start < 1 ms

Pickup time, in the case of an external start < 5 ms
Dropout time for unbalancing operating mode Approx. 2 ms
44 Via binary inputs


C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data
Typical dropout time < 15 ms

Dropout time, via circuit-breaker auxiliary-contact < 5 ms
criterion
NOTE
i If you use the setting Direct release for the parameters 3I0 criterion or I2 criterion, this can
result in extended dropout times.

10 Hz ≤ f < 0.9 frated Slightly expanded tolerances
f < 10 Hz Active
f > 90 Hz
Tolerances
Threshold values, dropout thresholds 2 % of the setting value or 1 % of the rated current

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data
11.5 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection 3-Pole

Starting Conditions
For circuit-breaker failure protection 3-pole tripping internal or external46
Setting Values

1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A Increments of 0.001 A
Sensitive threshold value 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
Setting Values

Sensitive threshold value 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
Dropout
The greater dropout differential (= | pickup threshold – dropout threshold |) of the following
2 criteria applies:
Circuit-Breaker Supervision
Position supervision via circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts

For 3-pole CB tripping One input each for make contact and break contact

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data
NOTE
i The circuit-breaker failure protection can also work without the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts stated.
Auxiliary contacts are required for circuit-breaker failure protection in cases where the current flow is
absent or too low for tripping (for example with a transformer or a Buchholz protection).
Times

Pickup time, in the case of an external start < 5 ms
Dropout time for unbalancing operating mode Approx. 2 ms
Typical dropout time < 15 ms
Dropout time, via circuit-breaker auxiliary contact < 5 ms
criterion
NOTE
i Using the setting Direct release with the parameters 3I0 criterion or I2 criterion can result
in extended dropout times.

f < 10 Hz Active
f > 90 Hz
Tolerances

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data

Setting Values
Phase-current threshold For Irated = 1 A 0.030 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A

values
For Irated = 5 A 0.15 A to 175.00 A Increments of 0.01 A
Threshold value sensitive For Irated = 1 A 0.030 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
Time delay T2 for 3-pole trip 0.050 s to 60.000 s Increments of 0.001 s
Dropout
criteria is used:
Dropout differential 95 % of the pickup value

f < 10 Hz Active
f > 90 Hz
Tolerances
Threshold values 2 % of the setting value or 1 % of the rated current

Times

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data
11.7 End-Fault Protection Disconnector Supervision
11.7 End-Fault Protection Disconnector Supervision

Setting Values
Phase-current threshold For Irated = 1 A 0.030 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A

values
Time delay T, CB open 0.00 s to 15.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Tripping delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Minimum operate time 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
If the end-fault protection is active, the current for the busbar differential protection is immediately set to 0 in
case of a trigger (irrespective of the tripping delay and of the threshold values for the end-fault protection).
This tripping delay corresponds to the minimum operate time for the busbar differential protection, see also
Operate Time, Page 952.
Dropout
The larger dropout differential (= | pickup threshold – dropout threshold |) of the following
2 criteria is used:
Dropout differential 95 % of the pickup value

f < 10 Hz Active
f > 90 Hz
Tolerances

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data

Setting Values
Supervision time 0.06 s to 1.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Operate Time
Minimum operate time Fast relay (type F) approx. 8 ms
Tolerance
Process tolerance for the supervision time 1 % of the setting value or 10 ms

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data

Setting Values
Operate Time
Minimum operate time Fast relay (type F) approx. 9 ms
Tolerances
Process tolerance for the supervision time 1 % of the setting value or 10 ms

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data

The vast majority of settings for the bus coupler differential protection is identical to the settings of the
busbar-selective protection of the busbar differential protection 11.3 Busbar Differential Protection.
Setting Values
Thres.1-ph.f.CT overl 0.1 I/IrObj to 25.0 I/IrObj; Increments of 0.1

∞
Thresh.mul-ph.f.CT overl. 0.1I/IrObj to 25.0 I/IrObj; Increments of 0.1
∞

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data

You can find information on the Technical Data of the Differential-current supervision in chapter 11.3 Busbar
Differential Protection.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data
11.12 Zero-Crossing Supervision
11.12 Zero-Crossing Supervision

Times
Pickup time 32 ms for frated= 50 Hz

27 ms for frated= 60 Hz
Setting Values
Threshold for zero-crossing supervision 0.5 * Idiff busbar section

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data
11.13 Disconnector Supervision
11.13 Disconnector Supervision

Setting Values
Disconnector runtime 1.00 s to 180.00 s Increments of 0.01 s

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data
11.14 Circuit-Breaker Supervision
11.14 Circuit-Breaker Supervision

Setting Values

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data
Setting Values
Method of measurement Fundamental component –

RMS value
Threshold value47 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
Dropout ratio 0.90 to 0.99 Increments of 0.01
Operate delay 0.00 s to 100.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Dropout delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Pickup delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Dropout
The greater dropout differential (= | pickup value – dropout value |) of the following 2 criteria
applies:
If this parameter is not available, a dropout ratio of 95 % applies for overcurrent and of 105 % for undercur-
rent functionality.
Protection-class current transformer 15 mA sec. (Irated = 1 A) or
Instrument current transformer 0.5 mA sec. (Irated = 1 A) or
Times
Operate time with time delay = 0 ms Approx. 25 ms + OOT 48 at 50 Hz

Approx. 22 ms + OOT at 60 Hz
Extension of the operate time during operation with Approx. 10 ms
transformer inrush-current detection
Dropout time Approx. 20 ms + OOT

f < 10 Hz Active
f > 90 Hz
47 If you have selected the method of measurement = RMS value, do not set the threshold value under 0.1 lrated,sec.
48 OOT (Output Operating Time): additional delay of the output medium used, for example 5 ms with fast relays

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data
Tolerances
Currents, method of measurement = fundamental 1 % of the setting value or 5 mA (Irated = 1 A)

component or 25 mA (Irated = 5 A)
Currents, method of measurement = RMS value
(33 % harmonics, in relation to fundamental component)
Up to 30th harmonic 1 % of the setting value or 5 mA (Irated = 1 A)
or 25 mA (Irated = 5 A)
Up to 50th harmonic, frated = 50 Hz 3 % of the setting value or 20 mA (Irated = 1 A)
Time delays 1 % of the setting value or 10 ms
Influencing Variables for Threshold Values
Transient excess pickup in method of measurement = < 5 %

fundamental component, for τ > 100 ms (with
complete unbalance)
Setting Values

RMS value
Threshold value 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
Dropout Disk emulation –
Instantaneous
Time multiplier 0.00 to 15.00 Increments of 0.01
Minimum time of the curve 0.00 s to 1.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Additional time delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Dropout
applies:
Dropout 95 % of 1.1 ⋅ threshold value
Reset of the Integration Timer
Instantaneous With dropout

Disk emulation Approx. < 0.90 ⋅ threshold value

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data
Operate Curves and Dropout-Time Characteristic Curves according to IEC

[dw_ocp_ki1, 1, en_US]
Figure 11-1 Operate Curves and Dropout-Time Characteristic Curves According to IEC

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data
[dw_ocp_ki2, 1, en_US]
Figure 11-2 Operate Curves and Dropout-Time Characteristic Curves According to IEC

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data
[dw_iec-short-inverse, 1, en_US]
Figure 11-3 Operate Curves and Dropout-Time Characteristic Curves According to IEC (Advanced Stage)

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data
Operate Curves and Dropout-Time Characteristic Curves According to ANSI/IEEE
[dw_ocp_ka1, 2, en_US]
Figure 11-4 Operate Curves and Dropout-Time Characteristic Curves According to ANSI/IEEE

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data
NOTE
i In the preceding operate curves according to IEC and ANSI/IEEE, the inverse-time delays for I/Threshold
value I > 20 are identical to the inverse-time delay for I/Threshold value I = 20.

f < 10 Hz Active
f > 90 Hz
Tolerances

(33% harmonics, in relation to fundamental component)

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data
Operate time for 2 ≤ I/I threshold value ≤ 20 5 % of the reference (calculated) value
+2 % current tolerance or 30 ms
Dropout time for I/I threshold value ≤ 0.90 5 % of the reference (calculated) value

complete unbalance)

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data
Setting Values

RMS value
Time delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Dropout
applies:
rent functionality.
Times
Operate time with time delay = 0 ms Approx. 25 ms + OOT50 at 50 Hz


f < 10 Hz Active
f > 90 Hz
50 OOT (Output Operating Time): additional delay of the output medium used, see 11.1.4 Relay Outputs

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data
Tolerances
3I0 measured via I451, method of measurement = 1 % of the setting value or 5 mA (Irated = 1 A)
fundamental component or 25 mA (Irated = 5 A)
3I0 measured via I452, method of measurement = RMS value
Pickup delay 1 % of the setting value or 10 ms
Dropout delay 1 % of the setting value or 10 ms
Operate delay for the basic stage 1 % of the setting value or 10 ms
Operate delay for the Operate delay mode = 1 % of the setting value or 10 ms
advanced stage Running dur. DO-delay
Operate delay mode = 1 % of the reference value or 10 ms
Frozen dur. DO-delay (Reference value = Setting value + Frozen time)

complete unbalance)
Setting Values

RMS value
Instantaneous
Dropout
applies:
51 Slightly expanded tolerances will occur during the calculation of 3I0, maximum factor of 2
52 Slightly expanded tolerances will occur during the calculation of 3I0, maximum factor of 2
53 If you have selected the method of measurement = RMS value, do not set the threshold value under 0.1 l
rated,sec.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data


Normal inverse: type A See Figure 11-1 in chapter 11.15.2 Stage with
Very inverse: type B Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve
Extremely inverse: type C See Figure 11-2 in chapter 11.15.2 Stage with
Long-time inverse: type B Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve
Short-time inverse See Figure 11-3 in chapter 11.15.2 Stage with
(Only in the advanced stage) Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve
Operate Curves and Dropout-Time Characteristic Curves according to ANSI/IEEE
Inverse: type C See Figure 11-4 in chapter 11.15.2 Stage with

Short inverse Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve
Long inverse See Figure 11-5 in chapter 11.15.2 Stage with
Moderately inverse Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve
Very inverse See Figure 11-6 in chapter 11.15.2 Stage with
Extremely inverse Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve
Definite inverse See Figure 11-7 in chapter 11.15.2 Stage with
Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve

f < 10 Hz Active
f > 90 Hz
Tolerances
3I0 measured via I454, method of measurement = 1 % of the setting value or 5 mA (Irated = 1 A)
fundamental component or 25 mA (Irated = 5 A)
3I0 measured via I455, method of measurement = RMS value
54 Insignificantly increased tolerances will occur during the calculation of 3I0, maximum factor of 2
55 Insignificantly increased tolerances will occur during the calculation of 3I0, maximum factor of 2

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data

Dropout time for 2 ≤ I/threshold value I ≤ 0.90 5 % of the reference (calculated) value

complete unbalance)

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data
Setting Values
Rotation angle of the reference voltage -180° to +180° Increments of 1°

Directional mode Forward –
Reverse
RMS value
Dropout
applies:
rent functionality.
Type With healthy voltages

With voltage memory 2 s
Forward range Vref,rot ±88°
Dropout differential forward/reverse range 1°
Directional sensitivity For 1 and 2-phase short circuits: unlimited
For 3-phase short circuits: dynamically unlimited,
stationary
Approx. 13 V phase-to-phase
Times


C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data
Dropout time, typical Approx. 25 ms + OOT

Dropout time, maximum Approx. 30 ms + OOT

f < 10 Hz Active
f > 90 Hz
Tolerances

Time delay 1 % of the setting value or 10 ms
Direction-determination angle error 1°

complete unbalance)
Setting Values
Rotation angle of the reference voltage -180° to +180° Increments of 1°

Directional mode Forward –
Backward
RMS value
Instantaneous

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data
Dropout
applies:


Type With healthy voltages

With voltage memory 2 s
Forward range Vref,rot ±88°
Dropout differential forward/reverse range 1°
Directional sensitivity For 1 and 2-phase short circuits: unlimited
For 3-phase short circuits: dynamically unlimited,
stationary
Approx. 13 V phase-to-phase

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data
Times


f < 10 Hz Active
f > 90 Hz
Tolerances

Operate time for 2 ≤ I/threshold value I ≤ 20 5 % of the reference (calculated) value
Dropout time for I/threshold value I ≤ 0.90 5 % of the reference (calculated) value
Direction-determination angle error 1°

complete unbalance)

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data
Setting Values for the Function Direction Determination
Method for direction determination Zero sequence –

Negative sequence
Minimum V0 or V2 threshold 0.150 V to 20.000 V 0.001 V
Rotation angle of the reference voltage -180° to 180° 1°
Forward range 0° to 180° 1°
Setting Values
Direction mode Forward –

Reverse
RMS value
Dropout
applies:
rent functionality.
Times
The maximum pickup time with operate delay = 0 ms Approx. 30 ms + OOT at 50 Hz

inrush-current detection

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data

f < 10 Hz Active with reduced sensitivity
f > 90 Hz
Tolerances

(33 % part of harmonic, referring to fundamental component)
Direction-determination angle error 1º

complete unbalance)
Setting Values for the Function Direction Determination
Method for direction determination Zero sequence –

Negative sequence
Minimum V0 or V2 threshold 0.150 V to 20.000 V 0.001 V
Rotation angle of the reference voltage -180° to 180° 1°
Forward range 0° to 180° 1°
Setting Values
Direction mode Forward –

Reverse
RMS value
Type of characteristic curve Characteristic curves according to IEC and ANSI
Instantaneous

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data

Dropout
applies:


Times
The maximum pickup time with operate delay = 0 ms Approx. 30 ms + OOT at 50 Hz

inrush-current detection

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data

f < 10 Hz Active with reduced sensitivity
f > 90 Hz
Tolerances

(33 % part of harmonic, referring to fundamental component)
+ 2 % current tolerance or 30 ms
Dropout time for I/I threshold value ≤ 0.90 5 % of the reference (calculated) value
+ 2 % current tolerance or 30 ms
Direction-determination angle error 1º

complete unbalance)

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data
11.19.1 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
Setting Values for the Function
Stabilization counter 0 to 10 Increments of 1
Setting Values for Stage Type Definite-Time Overvoltage Protection
Measured value Phase-to-phase

Phase-to-ground
Method of measurement Fundamental component
RMS value
Pickup mode 1 out of 3
3 out of 3
Pickup value60 0.300 V to 340.000 V Increments of 0.001 V
Setting Values for Stage Type Inverse-Time Overvoltage Protection

Phase-to-ground
RMS value
Pickup mode 1 out of 3
3 out of 3
Pickup value 0.300 V to 340.000 V Increments of 0.001 V
Pickup factor 1.00 to 1.20 Increments of 0.01
Characteristic constant k 0.00 to 300.00 Increments of 0.01
Characteristic constant α 0.010 to 5.000 Increments of 0.001
Characteristic constant c 0.000 to 5.000 Increments of 0.001
Reset time 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Operate Curve for Stage Type Inverse-Time Overvoltage Protection
Where
Top Operate delay
Tadd Additional time delay (parameter Additional time delay)
60 If you have selected the method of measurement = RMS value, do not set the threshold value under 10 V.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data
Where
Tp Time multiplier (parameter Time dial)
V Measured voltage
Vthresh Threshold value (parameter Threshold)
k Curve constant k (parameter Charact. constant k)
α Curve constant α (parameter Charact. constant α)
c Curve constant c (parameter Charact. constant c)
Dropout
applies:
If this parameter is not available, a dropout ratio of 95 % applies for the overvoltage and of 105 % for the
undervoltage functionality.
Minimum absolute dropout differential 150 mV sec.
Times
Operate time with time delay = 0 ms, typical Approx. 25 ms + OOT61 at 50 Hz

Operate time with time delay = 0 ms, maximum Approx. 30 ms + OOT at 50 Hz

f < 10 Hz Active
f > 90 Hz
Tolerances for Stage Type Definite-Time Overvoltage Protection
Voltages 0.5 % of the setting value or 0.05 V

61 OOT (Output Operating Time): additional delay of the output medium used, see chapter 11.1.4 Relay Outputs

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data
Tolerances for Stage Type Inverse-Time Overvoltage Protection

Operate time for 5 % of the setting value or 30 ms
1.2 ≤ V/V threshold value ≤ 20
Reset time delay 1 % of the setting value or 10 ms
11.19.2 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage
Setting Values
Pickup value 0.300 V to 200.000 V Increments of 0.001 V

Dropout
applies:
Times


f < 10 Hz Active
f > 90 Hz
Tolerances

11.19.3 Overvoltage Protection with Negative-Sequence Voltage
Measuring window 1 cycle to 10 cycles Increments of 1 cycle

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data
Setting Values
Pickup value of V2 0.300 V to 200.000 V Increments of 0.001 V

Dropout
applies:
Times
Pickup times 55 ms to 210 ms + OOT 63

(depends on the measuring-window length) at 50 Hz
48 ms to 185 ms + OOT
Dropout time 20 ms to 70 ms + OOT
(depends on the measuring-window length)

f < 10 Hz Inactive
f > 90 Hz
Tolerances

Time delays 1.00 % of the setting value or 10 ms
11.19.4 Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage
Setting Values
Method of measurement RMS value

Fundamental component
Fundamental component
over 2 cycle filters
Block. on measuring-voltage outage Yes
No
Determ. ph. aff. by grd. flt. Yes
No
Threshold value64 0.300 V to 340.000 V Increments of 0.001 V

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data

V< faulty ph-gnd vltg. 0.300 V to 200.000 V Increments of 0.001 V
V> healthy ph-gnd. vltg. 0.300 V to 200.000 V Increments of 0.001 V
Dropout
applies:
Times
Operate time with time delay = 0 ms

Standard filter, true RMS Approx. 25 ms + OOT65 at 50 Hz
2 cycle filters Approx. 45 ms + OOT at 50 Hz
Dropout time
Standard filter, true RMS Approx. 20 ms + OOT at 50 Hz
2 cycle filters Approx. 31 ms + OOT at 50 Hz

f < 10 Hz Active
f > 90 Hz
Tolerances

65 OOT (Output Operating Time) additional delay of the output medium used, see chapter 11.1.4 Relay Outputs

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data
11.19.5 Overvoltage Protection with Any Voltage
Setting Values
Measured value Measured phase-to-ground voltage VA

Measured phase-to-ground voltage VB
Measured phase-to-ground voltage VC
Measured phase-to-phase voltage VAB
Measured phase-to-phase voltage VBC
Measured phase-to-phase voltage VCA
Calculated voltage V0
RMS value
Pickup value66 0.300 V to 340.000 V Increments of 0.001 V
Dropout
applies:
Times


f < 10 Hz Active
f > 90 Hz

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data
Tolerances

11.19.6 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
Setting Values for Stage Type Definite Time-Undervoltage Protection

Phase-to-ground
RMS value
Current-flow criterion On
Off
Setting Values for Stage Type Inverse Time-Undervoltage Protection

Phase-to-ground
RMS value
Off
Threshold value 0.300 V to 175.000 V Increments of 0.001 V
Pickup factor 0.80 to 1.00 Increments of 0.01
Characteristic constant k 0.00 to 300.00 Increments of 0.01
Characteristic constant α 0.010 to 5.000 Increments of 0.001
Characteristic constant c 0.000 to 5.000 Increments of 0.001
Reset time 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Operate Curve
Top=TInv+ Tadd
Where:
Top Operate delay
Tadd Additional time delay (Parameter Additional time delay)
[fo_uvp_3ph_1_3pol_inverse, 2, en_US]
68 If you have selected the Method of measurement = RMS value, do not set the threshold value to less than 10 V.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data
Where
Tp Time multiplier (Parameter Time dial)
V Measured undervoltage
Vthresh Threshold value (Parameter Threshold)
k Curve constant k (Parameter Charact. constant k)
α Curve constant α (Parameter Charact. constant α)
c Curve constant c (Parameter Charact. constant c)
Dropout
applies:
Times
Pickup time Approx. 25 ms + OOT69 at 50 Hz


f < 10 Hz Inactive
f > 90 Hz
Tolerances for Stage Type Definite Time-Undervoltage Protection

Tolerances for Stage Type Inverse Time-Undervoltage Protection

Operate time for 0 < V/VThresh< 0.9 5 % of the setting value or 30 ms
Reset time delay 1 % of the setting value or 10 ms
11.19.7 Undervoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage
Setting Values
Threshold value 0.300 V to 200.000 V Increments of 0.001 V

69 OOT (Output Operating Time) additional delay of the output medium used, see chapter 11.1.4 Relay Outputs

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data

Off
Dropout
applies:
Times


f < 10 Hz Inactive, maintained;
f > 90 Hz Dropout of the pickup induced by blocking or by
increasing the measurand beyond the dropout
threshold
Tolerances

Currents 1 % of the setting value or 5 mA (Irated = 1 A) or
25 mA (Irated = 5 A),
valid for protection-class current transformers
1 % of the setting value or 0.1 mA (Irated = 1 A) or
0.5 mA (Irated = 5 A),
valid for instrument transformers

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data
11.19.8 Undervoltage Protection with Any Voltage
Setting Values
Measured value Measured phase-to-ground voltage VA

Measured phase-to-ground voltage VB
Measured phase-to-ground voltage VC
Calculated phase-to-phase voltage VAB
Calculated phase-to-phase voltage VBC
Calculated phase-to-phase voltage VCA
Calculated voltage V0
RMS value
Dropout
applies:
Times


f < 10 Hz Inactive, maintained;
f > 90 Hz Dropout of the pickup induced by blocking or by increasing the
measurand beyond the dropout threshold

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data
Tolerances

11.19.9 Overvoltage Protection with Negative-Sequence Voltage/Positive-Sequence

Voltage
Measuring window 1 cycle to 10 cycles Increments of 1 cycle

Minimum voltage V1 0.300 V to 60.000 V Increments of 0.001 V
Setting Values for Stage Types
Pickup value of V2/V1 0.50 % to 100.00 % Increments of 0.01 %

Dropout
applies:
Times
Pickup times 55 ms to 210 ms + OOT73

Dropout times 22 ms to 55 ms + OOT

f < 10 Hz Inactive
f > 90 Hz
Tolerances

Time delays 1.00 % of the setting value or 10 ms

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data
11.20.1 Overfrequency Protection
Setting Values
Pickup values f> Angle difference method

40.00 Hz to 90.00 Hz Increments of 0.01 Hz
Filtering method
40.00 Hz to 70.00 Hz Increments of 0.01 Hz
Dropout differential 20 mHz to 2 000 mHz Increments of 10 mHz
Time delay T 0.00 s to 600.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Minimum voltage 3.000 V to 175.000 V Increments of 0.001 V
Times
Pickup times f> Angle difference method

50 Hz Approx. 70 ms + OOT74
60 Hz Approx. 60 ms + OOT
Filtering method
Dropout times f> 60 ms to 80 ms
Dropout
The larger dropout differential (= | pickup value – dropout threshold |) of the following 2 criteria
is used:
If this parameter is not present, a dropout ratio of 99.97 % applies to the overfrequency protection.
Minimum absolute dropout differential 5 mHz
Operating Ranges
Voltage range 5 V to 230 V (phase-phase)

Frequency range Angle difference method 10 Hz to 90 Hz
Filtering method 25 Hz to 80 Hz
Tolerances
Frequency f>
frated - 0.20 Hz < f < frated + 0.20 Hz ± 5 mHz at V = Vrated
Time delay T(f>) 1 % of the setting value or 10 ms
Minimum voltage 1 % of the setting value or 0.5 V
74 OOT (Output Operating Time): Additional delay of the output medium used, for example, 5 ms with fast relays, see chapter

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data
11.20.2 Underfrequency Protection
Setting Values
Pickup values f< 30.00 Hz to 70.00 Hz Increments of 0.01 Hz

Dropout differential 20 mHz to 2 000 mHz Increments of 10 mHz
Time delay T 0.00 s to 600.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Times
Pickup times f< Angle difference method

50 Hz Approx. 70 ms + OOT75
Filtering method
Dropout times f< 60 ms to 80 ms
Dropout
is used:
If this parameter is not present, a dropout ratio of 100.03 % applies to the underfrequency protection.
Minimum absolute dropout differential 5 mHz
Operating Ranges
Voltage range 5 V to 230 V (phase-phase)

Frequency range Angle difference method 10 Hz to 90 Hz
Filtering method 25 Hz to 80 Hz
Tolerances
Frequency f<
Time delay T(f<) 1 % of the setting value or 10 ms
11.20.3 Rate of Frequency Change Protection

Measuring window 2 periods to 5 periods Increments of 1 period

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data
Setting Values for Stage Types
Threshold value 0.100 Hz/s to 20.000 Hz/s Increments of 0.025 Hz/s

Dropout differential 0.02 Hz/s to 0.99 Hz/s Increments of 0.01 Hz/s
Dropout
Frequency Parameterizable dropout differential

Minimum voltage
The larger dropout differential (= | pickup value – dropout threshold |) of the following
2 criteria is used:
Dropout differential derived from Dropout ratio 105 % for the Minimum voltage parameter
Minimum absolute dropout differential 150 mV secondary
Times
Pickup time Approx. 160 ms + OOT76 to 220 ms + OOT (depends on measuring

window length)
at 50 Hz
Approx. 140 ms + OOT to 200 ms + OOT (depends on measuring
window length)
at 60 Hz
Dropout time Approx. 160 ms + OOT to 220 ms + OOT (depends on measuring
window length)
at 50 Hz
Approx. 140 ms + OOT to 200 ms + OOT (depends on measuring
window length)
at 60 Hz

f < 10 Hz Inactive
f > 90 Hz
Tolerances
Threshold, Approx. 3 % or 0.060 Hz/s

measuring window > 3 periods
Threshold, Approx. 5 % or 0.060 Hz/s
measuring window ≤ 3 periods
Value Description
df/dt Calculated rate of frequency change

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data

Times


f < 10 Hz Inactive
f > 90 Hz
Tolerances
Voltages 2 % of the setting value or 0.100 V

for amplitude changes of sinusoidal measurands
Pulse time 1 % of the setting value or 10 ms
77 OOT (Output Operating Time) additional delay of the output medium used, for example 5 ms with fast relays

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data
11.22 Measuring-Voltage Failure Detection

Setting Values
3ph.fail. - VA,VB,VC < 0.300 V to 340.000 V Increments of 0.001 V

3ph.fail. - phs.curr.release 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
3ph.fail. - phs.curr. jump 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
Asym.fail. - time delay 0.00 s to 30.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
SO 3ph.fail. - time delay 0.00 s to 30.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Dropout
is used:
If this parameter is not available, a dropout ratio of 95 % applies to the current threshold value and a dropout
ratio of 105 % applies to the voltage threshold value.
Times

Times
Use in function group Line

Use in other function group types


f < 10 Hz Active
f > 90 Hz
78 OOT (Output Operating Time) Additional delay of the output medium used, see chapter 11.1.4 Relay Outputs
79 OOT (Output Operating Time) Additional delay of the output medium used, for example 5 ms with fast relays, see chapter
80 OOT (Output Operating Time) Additional delay of the output medium used, for example 5 ms with fast relays, see chapter

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data
Tolerances
Currents 1 % of the setting value or 5 mA (Irated = 1 A)

or 25 mA (Irated = 5 A), (frated ± 10 %)

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data
11.23 Voltage-Transformer Circuit Breaker
11.23 Voltage-Transformer Circuit Breaker

Setting Values
Response time 0.000 s to 0.030 s Increments of 0.001 s

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data
11.24 Voltage-Balance Supervision
11.24 Voltage-Balance Supervision

Setting Values
Release threshold 0.300 V to 170.000 V Increments of 0.001 V

Threshold min/max 0.58 to 0.95 Increments of 0.01
Delay failure indication 0.00 s to 100.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Dropout Ratio
Overvoltage dropout ratio Approx. 0.97

Undervoltage dropout ratio Approx. 1.05
Times
Tripping time Approx. 500 ms

Dropout time Approx. 500 ms

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data
11.25 Voltage-Sum Supervision
11.25 Voltage-Sum Supervision

Setting Values
Threshold 0.300 V to 170.000 V Increments of 0.001 V

Delay failure indication 0.00 s to 100.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Dropout Ratio
Dropout ratio Approx. 0.97
Times


C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data
11.26 Voltage Phase-Rotation Supervision
11.26 Voltage Phase-Rotation Supervision

Setting Values
Tripping delay 0.00 s to 100.00 s Increments of 0.01 s

Phase-rotation direction ABC
ACB
Times


C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data

Setting Values
Min. phase-current thresh 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 100.000 A Increments of 0.001 A

X reach (ph-g) = reach of For Irated = 1 A 0.100 Ω to 600.000 Ω Increments of 0.001 A
reactance, phase-to-
For Irated = 5 A 0.020 Ω to 120.000 Ω Increments of 0.001 A
ground
X reach (ph-ph) = reach of For Irated = 1 A 0.100 Ω to 600.000 Ω Increments of 0.001 A
reactance, phase-to-phase
R reach (ph-g) = reach of For Irated = 1 A 0.100 Ω to 600.000 Ω Increments of 0.001 A
resistance, phase-to-
ground
R reach (ph-ph) = reach of For Irated = 1 A 0.100 Ω to 600.000 Ω Increments of 0.001 A
resistance, phase-to-
phase
Dropout Ratios
Currents About 0.95

Voltage About 1.05
Impedances About 1.05
Times

Dropout time Approx. 30 ms + OOT at 50 Hz

f < 10 Hz Active
f > 90 Hz
Tolerances
Currents 1 % of the setting value or 5 mA (Irated = 1 A)

or 25 mA (Irated = 5 A), (frated ± 10 %)
Voltage 0.5 % of the setting value or 0.05 V
Impedances
Measurement tolerances for sinusoidal values
81 OOT (Output Operating Time) additional delay of the used output medium, such as 5 ms with quick-acting relay

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data
11.28 Arc Protection
11.28 Arc Protection

Setting Values
Threshold I> 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A

Threshold 3I0>> 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
External trip initiation no
current
light
Operating mode light only
current and light
Sensor point sensor
line sensor
custom
Threshold light -28.00 dB to 0.00 dB Increments of 0.01
Channel Possible settings, application-dependent
Dropout
criteria is used:
Times
Shortest operate time Approx. 2.6 ms + OOT 82

Operating mode = light only
Shortest operate time
Approx. 4.0 ms + OOT at 50 Hz
Operating mode = Current and light
Approx. 3.8 ms + OOT at 60 Hz
82 OOT (Output Operating Time): Additional delay of the output medium used, for example, 5 ms with fast relay, see chapter

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data
11.29 Inrush-Current Detection

Setting Values
Operating limit Imax 0.030 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A

at Irated = 1 A Increments of 0.01 A
0.15 A to 175.00 A
at Irated = 5 A
Content 2nd harmonic 10 % to 45 % Increments of 1 %
Duration of the crossblock function 0.03 s to 200.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Times
Operating times Approx. 29 ms
Pickup
Harmonic: I2nd harm/I1st harm Setting value or at least

Protection-class current transformers I1st harm = 10 mA sec.
and I2nd harm = 10 mA sec.
(Irated = 1 A)
I1st harm = 50 mA sec.
(Irated = 5 A)
Instrument transformers I1st harm = 1 mA sec.
(Irated = 1 A)
(Irated = 5 A)
Dropout
criteria is used:
If this parameter is not available, a dropout ratio of 95 % applies for the overcurrent protection and a dropout
ratio of 105 % applies for the undercurrent protection.
Harmonic: I2nd harm/I1st harm 0.75
Protection-class current transformers I2nd harm = 5 mA sec. (Irated = 1 A) or
I2nd harm = 25 mA sec. (Irated = 5 A)
Instrument transformers I2nd harm = 0.5 mA sec. (Irated = 1 A) or
I2nd harm = 2.5 mA sec. (Irated = 5 A)

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data

f < 10 Hz Inactive
f > 90 Hz
Tolerances
Current measurement Imax 1 % of the setting value or 5 mA

Harmonic: I2nd harm/I1st harm 1 % of the setting value

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data
11.30 2nd Harmonic Detection Ground

Setting Values
Measured value IN measured

3I0 calculated
2nd harmonic content 10 % to 45 % Increments of 1 %
Times
Operating times Approx. 29 ms
Pickup
Harmonic: I2nd harm/I1st harm Setting value or at least

Protection-class current transformer I1st harm = 10 mA sec.
and I2nd harm = 10 mA sec. (Irated = 1 A)
Instrument transformers I1st harm = 1 mA sec.
Dropout
2 criteria applies:
If this parameter is not available, a dropout ratio of 95 % applies for the overcurrent protection and a dropout
ratio of 105 % applies for the undercurrent protection.
Harmonics: I2nd harm/I1st harm 0.75 or
Protection-class current transformers I2nd harm = 5 mA sec. (Irated = 1 A) or
I2nd harm = 25 mA sec. (Irated = 5 A)
Instrument transformers I2nd harm = 0.5 mA sec. (Irated = 1 A) or
I2nd harm = 2.5 mA sec. (Irated = 5 A)

f < 10 Hz Inactive
f > 90 Hz

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data
Tolerances
Harmonics: I2nd harm/I1st harm 1 % of the setting value

for setting values l2nd harm/1st harm

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data
11.31 Trip-Circuit Supervision
11.31 Trip-Circuit Supervision

Setting Values
Number of monitored circuits per circuit-breaker function group 1 to 3

Operating mode per circuit With 1 binary input
With 2 binary inputs
Pickup and dropout time Approx. 1 s to 2 s
Adjustable indication delay with 1 binary input 1.00 s to 600.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Adjustable indication delay with 2 binary inputs 1.00 s to 30.00 s Increments of 0.01 s

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data
11.32 Analog Channel Supervision via Fast Current Sum
11.32 Analog Channel Supervision via Fast Current Sum

Setting Values
Threshold value 10 % of the rated value of the current transformer

Slope of the characteristic 0.1
curve
Times
Pickup times 0.25 ms (faster than the fastest protection function)

Dropout time Approx. 100 ms (after response > 1s continuous blocking)
Blockings
Blocked protection functions Busbar differential protection, busbar tripping by the circuit-breaker
failure protection

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data
11.33 Operational Measured Values and Statistical Values

The following applies to the tolerances of the currents and voltages:
• The values apply both to the RMS values and the absolute value and phase angle of the fundamental
components.
• These values were determined for pure sinusoidal signals – without harmonics.
• All measured values also have a tolerance of 1 DIGIT.
Voltages
VA, VB, VC V secondary

Voltage range < 200 V secondary
Secondary rated voltage 100 V to 125 V
Measuring range 0.1 Vrated to 2 Vrated
Frequency range 49 Hz to 51 Hz at frated = 50 Hz
59 Hz to 61 Hz at frated = 60 Hz
Tolerance 0.2 % of the measured value in the above mentioned
measuring range
Frequency range (expanded) 45 Hz to 55 Hz at frated = 50 Hz
measuring range
VAB, VBC, VCA V secondary
Voltage range < 200 V
Secondary rated voltage 100 V to 125 V AC
measuring range
measuring range
V1, V2, V0 V secondary
Voltage range < 200 V
Secondary rated voltage 100 V to 125 V AC
Tolerance 0.25 % of the measured value in the above
mentioned measuring range or 0.05 V
mentioned measuring range or 0.05 V

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data
Currents, Protection-Class Current Transformer
Feeder currents IA, IB, IC, 3I0 A secondary

Differential currents (of all busbar sections and the % Irated
check zone) IdA, IdB, IdC
Restraint currents (of all busbar sections and the % Irated
check zone) IsA, IsB, IsC
Rated currents 1 A, 5 A
Measuring range 0.1 Irated to 5 Irated
measuring range or 0.001 Irated
mentioned measuring range or 0.002 Irated
Power Factor
Voltage range 0.8 Vrated to 1.2 Vrated

Current range 0.1 Irated to 2 Irated
Tolerance 0.02 in the above mentioned measuring range
Frequency
Frequency f Hz
Range frated - 0.20 Hz ≤ f ≤ frated + 0.20 Hz
Tolerance ± 2 mHz at V = Vrated or at I = Irated
Range frated - 3.00 Hz ≤ f < frated + 3.00 Hz
Range 25 Hz to 80 Hz; operational measured values
10 Hz to 90 Hz; functional measured values, system
frequency
Statistical Values, Device
Device operating hours h

Range 0 to 9999999 h
Tolerance 1h
Statistical Values, Circuit Breaker
Op.cnt. (operation counter)

Range 0 to 999999999
Tolerance None
∑I Off (sum of the primary currents switched off) A, kA, MA, GA, TA, PA primary

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data
Range 0 to 9.2e+15
Operating hours h
Tolerance 1h
Circuit breaker open hours h
Tolerance 1h
Statistical Values, Disconnector
Op.cnt. (operation counter)

Range 0 to 999999999
Tolerance None

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data
11.34 Analog-Units Function Group
11.34 Analog-Units Function Group

20-mA Inputs, Ethernet Interface 7XV5674-0KK00-1AA1
Max. number of connected 20-mA units 4

Max. number of channels per 20-mA unit 12
20-mA Unit Serial 7XV5674-0KK30-1AA1 (RS485) and 7XV5674-0KK40-1AA1 (Fiberglass)
Max. number of connected 20-mA units 4

Max. number of channels per 20-mA unit 12
RTD Unit (Ziehl TR1200) 7XV5662-6AD10
Max. number of connected RTD units 4

Max. number of sensors per RTD unit 12
Sensor type Pt 100 to EN 60751; connection of Ni 100 and Ni 120
sensors possible. The measured values must be
converted in the evaluation unit.
Temperature Measured Values
Unit of measurement for temperature °C or °F, adjustable

Pt 100 -199 °C to 800 °C (-326 °F to 1472 °F)
Ni 100 -54 °C to 278 °C (-65 °F to 532 °F)
Ni 120 -52 °C to 263 °C (-62 °F to 505 °F)
Resolution 1 °C or 1 °F
Tolerance ±0.5 % of the measured value ±1 °C (±0.56 °F)

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data

Setting Values
Pickup value -50 °C to 250 °C Increments of 1°C

-58 °F to 482 °F Increments of 1°F
Time delay 0 s to 60 s Increments of 1 s
or ∞
Dropout
Dropout differential 3 °C or 6 °F
Tolerances
Tripping delay ±1 % of the setting value or ±10 ms

Measured temperature value ±0.5 % of the setting value or ±1 °C or ±2 °F

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data
11.36 Protection Interface and Protection Topology

Setting Values
Mode On
Off
Synchronization External synchron. off
Telegr. and ext. synch.
Telegr. or ext. synch.
External synch. only
Blocking of the unbalanced Yes
runtimes No
Maximum signal runtime threshold 0.1 ms to 30.0 ms Increments of 0.1 ms
Maximum runtime difference 0.000 ms to 3.000 ms Increments of 0.001 ms
Failure indication after 0.05 s to 2.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Transm. fail. alarm after 0.0 s to 6.0 s Increments of 0.1 s
Max. error rate/h 0.000 % to 100.000 % Increments of 0.001 %
Max. error rate/min 0.000 % to 100.000 % Increments of 0.001 %
PPS failure indication after 0.5 s to 60.0 s Increments of 0.1 s
Transmission Rate
Direct connection:
Transmission rate 2048 kbit/s
Connection via communication networks:
Supported network interfaces IP protection communication
C37.94 with 64 kBit/s or 128 kBit/s or 512 kBit/s
G703.1 with 64 kBit/s
G703-T1 with 1.455 MBit/s
G703-E1 with 2.048 MBit/s
X.21 with 64 kBit/s or 128 kBit/s or 512 kBit/s
Pilot wires with 128 kbit/s
Transmission Rate Transmission rate 64 kBit/s at G703.1
1.455 MBit/s at G703-T1
2.048 MBit/s at G703-E1
512 kBit/s or 128 kBit/s or 64 kBit/s at X.21
128 kBit/s for pilot wires
Transmission Times
NOTE
i The times apply to devices without line differential protection for fiber-optic connections with 2 Mbit/s.
Priority 1
Response time, total approx. Minimum 5 ms
Typical 10 ms
Priority 2
Response time, total approx. Minimum 5 ms
Typical 12 ms

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data
Priority 383
Response time, total approx. Typical 18 ms
83 Times cannot be determined because the signals are transmitted in fragments.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data
11.37 Phasor Measurement Unit
11.37 Phasor Measurement Unit

Accuracy
IEEE Standard for Synchrophasor
Measurements
IEEE Std C37.118.1aTM-2014
Data Transfer
IEEE Standard for Synchrophasor
Data transfer
IEEE Std C37.118.2TM-2011

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data

Current Inputs
Value Setting Range

Rated current measuring range ± 20 mA
Maximum current measuring range ± 24 mA
Tolerances
± 124 μA (0.62 % at 20 mA)
• without trimming ± 60 μA (0.3 % at 20 mA)
• with offset trimming ± 20 μA (0.1% at 20 mA)
• with full trimming
Sampling rate ≥ 3 Hz
Number of channels per measuring transducer 2 or 4
module
Analog-digital converter 16 Bit Sigma/Delta

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data

Setting Values
Threshold value ΣIx-method 0 to 10 000 000 Increments of 1

2P-method 0 to 10 000 000 Increments of 1
I2t-method 0.00 I/Ir*s to 21 400 000.00 I/Ir*s Increments of 0.01
Make time 1 % to 100 % Increments of 1 %
Break time 1 % to 100 % Increments of 1 %
CB opening time 1 ms to 500 ms Increments of 1 ms
CB break time 1 ms to 600 ms Increments of 1 ms
CB make time 1 ms to 600 ms Increments of 1 ms
Exponent for the ΣIx method 1.0 to 3.0 Increments of 0.1
Switching cycles at Irated 100 to 10 000 000 Increments of 1
Rated short-circuit current Isc 10 A to 100 000 A Increments of 1 A
Switching cycles at Isc 1 to 1000 Increments of 1
Operating 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
current threshold 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A Increments of 0.01 A
Delay correction time -50 ms to 50 ms Increments of 1 ms
Tolerances
Tolerance of the measured value make time ± 2 ms

Tolerance of the measured value break time ± 2 ms

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data
11.40 CFC
11.40 CFC
Typical response times and maximum number of ticks of the CFC task levels:
Task Level Time (in ms) Ticks CP300
High priority Event-trig- <1 1000
gered
Event-triggered <10 15 359
Low priority Event-trig- <10 149 603 in total
gered
Measurement 250
The times describe the response time of a typical CFC chart at the respective task level. The maximum number
of ticks applies to a typical load for the device based on the application template Basics.
The task level Measurement runs in cycles every 500 ms. All other task levels are event-triggered.
In order to estimate the tick consumption of a CFC chart, you can use the following formula:
TChart = 5 ∙ nInp + 5 ∙ nOutp + TTLev + ∑i Tint + ∑j TBlock
Where:
nInp Number of indications routed as input in the CFC chart
nOutp Number of indications routed as output in the CFC chart
TTLev 101 Ticks in the High priority Event-triggered level
104 Ticks in the Event-triggered level
54 Ticks in Measurement level
74 Ticks in the Low priority Event-triggered level
Tint Number of internal connections between 2 CFC blocks in one chart
TBlock Used ticks per CFC block (see Table 11-4)
Table 11-4 Ticks of the Individual CFC Blocks
Element Ticks
ABS_D 2.3
ABS_R 1.5
ACOS_R 6.9
ADD_D4 3.4
ADD_R4 3.3
ADD_XMV 6.4
ALARM 1.8
AND_SPS 1.1
AND10 2.9
APC_DEF 1.2
APC_EXE 1.0
APC_INFO 3.9
ASIN_R 1.3
ATAN_R 1.2
BLINK 1.3
BOOL_CNT 2.0
BOOL_INT 1.5
BSC_DEF 1.3
BSC_EXE 1.1

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data
11.40 CFC
Element Ticks
BSC_INFO 2.7
BUILD_ACD 2.9
BUILD_ACT 2.2
BUILD_BSC 1.2
BUILD_CMV 2.3
BUILD_DEL 2.1
BUILD_DPS 1.4
BUILD_ENS 1.3
BUILD_INS 0.5
BUILD_Q 0.8
BUILD_SPS 0.6
BUILD_WYE 3.2
BUILD_XMV 2.9
BUILDC_Q 3.0
CHART_STATE 5.9
CMP_DPS 1.5
CON_ACD 0.7
CON_ACT 0.5
CONNECT 0.4
COS_R 2.5
CTD 1.8
CTU 1.6
CTUD 2.3
DINT_REAL 3.0
DINT_UINT 3.0
DIV_D 2.9
DIV_R 1.6
DIV_XMV 2.2
DPC_DEF 0.4
DPC_EXE 0.4
DPC_INFO 1.1
DPC_OUT 1.3
DPS_SPS 1.0
DRAGI_R 1.7
ENC_DEF 3.6
ENC_EXE 3.8
EQ_D 1.0
EQ_R 1.9
EXP_R 1.5
EXPT_R 2.7
F_TRGM 0.3
F_TRIG 0.3
FF_D 0.9
FF_D_MEM 1.4
FF_RS 0.7
FF_RS_MEM 1.2
FF_SR 0.8

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data
11.40 CFC
Element Ticks
FF_SR_MEM 1.1
GE_D 0.9
GE_R 1.1
GT_D 0.9
GT_R 1.2
HOLD_D 1.1
HOLD_R 1.0
INC_INFO 0.9
LE_D 1.1
LE_R 1.1
LIML_R 1.5
LIMU_R 1.5
LN_R 3.3
LOG_R 1.2
LOOP 1.5
LT_D 0.9
LT_R 0.9
MAX_D 0.9
MAX_R 1.4
MEMORY_D 0.9
MEMORY_R 1.1
MIN_D 0.7
MIN_R 1.3
MOD_D 1.5
MUL_D4 2.5
MUL_R4 2.7
MUL_XMV 2.8
MUX_D 1.2
MUX_R 0.9
NAND10 3.5
NE_D 0.9
NE_R 0.9
NEG 1.2
NEG_SPS 0.8
NL_LZ 3.8
NL_MV 5.6
NL_ZP 2.7
NOR10 3.2
OR_DYN 1.1
OR_SPS 1.3
OR10 2.6
R_TRGM 0.4
R_TRIG 0.4
REAL_DINT 3.0
REAL_SXMV 3.0
SIN_R 0.8
SPC_DEF 0.4

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Technical Data
11.40 CFC
Element Ticks
SPC_EXE 0.4
SPC_INFO 0.4
SPC_OUT 0.4
SPLIT_ACD 3.4
SPLIT_ACT 1.0
SPLIT_BSC 1.3
SPLIT_CMV 2.2
SPLIT_DEL 2.0
SPLIT_DPS 1.0
SPLIT_INS 0.5
SPLIT_Q 0.7
SPLIT_SPS 0.8
SPLIT_WYE 2.6
SPLIT_XMV 2.1
SQRT_R 0.6
SUB_D 1.3
SUB_R 1.6
SUB_XMV 2.4
SUBST_B 1.0
SUBST_BQ 1.5
SUBST_D 1.0
SUBST_R 1.0
SUBST_XQ 1.4
SXMV_REAL 3.0
TAN_R 1.1
TLONG 2.2
TOF 1.0
TON 1.1
TP 2.5
TSHORT 1.9
UINT_DINT 3.0
XOR2 2.6

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
A Appendix
A.1 Order Configurator and Order Options 1034

A.2 Ordering Accessories 1035
A.3 Typographic and Symbol Conventions 1037
A.4 Standard Variants for 7SS85 1040
A.5 Requirements for Phase Current Transformers 1044
A.6 Connection Examples for Current Transformers 1049
A.7 Connection Examples of Voltage Transformers for Modular Devices 1050
A.8 Preroutings 7SS85 1056

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Appendix
A.1 Order Configurator and Order Options
A.1 Order Configurator and Order Options

Order Configurator
The order configurator assists you in the selection of SIPROTEC 5 products. The order configurator is a Web
application that can be used with any browser. The order configurator can be used to configure complete
devices or individual components, such as communication modules, expansion modules, or other accessories.
At the end of the configuration process, the product code and a detailed presentation of the configuration
result are provided. The product code unambiguously describes the selected product and also serves as an
order number.
Ordering Options
The following ordering options are possible for SIPROTEC 5 products:
• Device
• Single part
• DIGSI 5
• Functional enhancement
NOTE
i To order single parts in the order configurator, use the Single part link.
Individual parts are:
• Expansion module
• Plug-in module
• Sensors for arc protection
• Operation panel
• Terminal
• Accessories

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Appendix
A.2 Ordering Accessories
NOTE
i To order terminals, terminal accessories, and mechanical accessories in the order configurator, use the
Single part link.
Table A-1 Accessories
Group Accessories
Terminal Voltage terminal, terminal block, 14-pole
Terminal Voltage terminal (power supply)
Terminal block, 2-pole84
Terminal Type A current terminal, 4 x protection
(for modular devices)
Terminal Type A current terminal, 3 x protection and 1 x measurement
Terminal Type A current terminal, 4 x measurement
Terminal Type B current terminal, 4 x protection
(for non-modular devices)
Terminal Type B current terminal, 3 x protection and 1 x measurement
(for non-modular devices)
Terminal 2-pole cross connector for current terminal
Terminal Terminals for IO110, IO112, IO11384
Terminal Terminals and shielding for IO11184,85,86
Terminal Terminal set only for IO23x84
Terminal 2-pole cross connector for voltage terminal
Terminal Cover for current terminal block
Terminal Cover for voltage terminal block
Terminal Transport safety, current terminal
Terminal Transport safety, voltage terminal
Terminal Terminal set for direct connection to 400 V low voltage
Accessories USB covers (10 each for CP 100, 150, 200, 300)
Accessories Cable, integrated operation panel, 0.43 m
Accessories Cable, detached operation panel, 2.50 m
Accessories Cable, detached operation panel, 5.00 m
Accessories Cable set, COM link cable
Accessories Cover plate for plug-in modules
Accessories Cover panel 1/6, 5 pcs
Accessories Set of angle rails
Accessories 10 x labeling strip, LEDs/function keys
Accessories 5 x labeling strips, push-buttons
Accessories Set of parts, mounting bracket 1/2
84 Recommended tightening torque when screwing down the terminal on the rear plate: 0.3 Nm
85 The set consists of terminals and shielding for the IO111 for the terminal positions M and N.
86 Only for non-modular devices 7xx82

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Appendix
Group Accessories
Accessories 4 x screw cover 1/3, type C11
Accessories 2 x bus termination plate
Accessories Assembly frame for panel surface mounting for non-modular
devices 7xx81 and 7xx82 devices
Accessories SDHC memory card for 7KE85
Accessories 10 x battery holder
Accessories Connecting cable for 2nd row
Accessories DIGSI 5 USB cable 2.0
Accessories SFP RJ45, 10 units
Accessories SFP Single-mode, 24 km, 10 units
Sensors for arc protection Point sensor with line length of 3 m
Sensors for arc protection Line sensor, length 3 m
Sensors for arc protection Supply line for line sensors, length 3 m

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Appendix
A.3 Typographic and Symbol Conventions

The following typefaces are used to characterize parameters in the text:
Mode Parameter name
_:661:1 Parameter address
_ stands for the address combination from function
group:function
661, for example, stands for the address of the
setting parameter
off Parameter state
The following symbols are used in drawings:

Icon Description
Parameter
Parameters with setting values

The default setting is in the 1st position and is
displayed in italics.
Parameters with application-dependent setting values
Dynamic settings:
State logic
Health of a function, stage, or function block
External binary input signal with indication number
External output signal with indication number and

additional information
External output signal without indication number
Measured output value

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Appendix
Icon Description
Binary input signal derived from an external output
signal
Internal input signal
Internal output signal
Analog input signal
Reset/block a logic element
AND gate
OR gate
XOR gate
Negation
Threshold stage exceeded
Threshold stage exceeded with

reset of input
Threshold stage shortfall
Threshold stage shortfall with

reset of input

dropout delay
dropout delay and reset of input

dropout delay
dropout delay and reset of input
Comparators
Pickup delay
Dropout delay
Pickup and dropout delay

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Appendix
Icon Description
Trigger the pulse of duration T with a positive signal
edge
Trigger the pulse of duration T with a negative signal

edge
SR-flip-flop, RS-flip-flop, D-flip-flop
Characteristic curve
Minimum operate time

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Appendix
A.4 Standard Variants for 7SS85
[lo_svs_typc1, 1, en_US]
Figure A-1 Standard Variant Type V1

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Appendix

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Appendix

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Appendix
[sv_7ss8x_bbp8, 1, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Appendix
A.5 Requirements for Phase Current Transformers

The protection functions require current transformers that are dimensioned properly. This section describes
the characteristics required for the dimensioning of the current transformer. The specified rules pertaining to
dimensioning apply the definition of a protection current transformer from IEC 61869-2 (previ-
ously IEC 60044-1 and IEC 60044-6) as well as IEC TR 61869-100. Dimensioning according to ANSI C57.13 is
also described.
Current Transformers
Parameter Description
ALF Accuracy limit factor
ALF' Operational accuracy limit factor
The operational accuracy limit factor is derived from the connected burden Rbc:
Rct Secondary winding resistance; corrected to 75 °C or another temperature as per the

specification
Rb Rated resistive burden
Rbc Connected resistive operating burden
Sr Rated power
KSSC Rated symmetrical short-circuit current factor
Ipsc Rated primary short-circuit current

Ipr Rated primary current
Isr Rated secondary current
Ktd Transient dimensioning factor
Ek Rated knee-point EMF
Vtc Current terminal voltage with 20-fold rated current and connected burden Rbc
(ANSI C57.13)
Protected Object
Parameter Description
ISC Max Max. symmetrical short-circuit current
Definition of the Requirements for the Dimensioning of the Current Transformers

Compare the current transformer with the requirements and check whether the current transformer is suitable
for busbar protection and whether the default stabilization factor k = 0.65 is sufficient.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Appendix
IEC Class Requirement

Required ALF'
5P, 10P87
(up to 70 % remanence)
5PR, 10PR87
Required product Ktd · KSSC

TPX, TPY, TPZ
Burden: Rb ≥ Rbc
Required knee-point voltage Ek
PX, PXR
ANSI class
Required transformer terminal voltage Vtc
C (Isr = 5 A)
NOTE
i Avoid using different classes of transformers at the measuring points. This is particularly the case for
combining P class and TP class transformers, especially TPZ.
In contrast to class P transformers, class TP transformers heavily suppress the direct current component in
the short-circuit current. Additional differential currents will occur when you mix transformer classes.
You can find examples of different classes of current transformer and application examples in the following
sections:
• Application of IEC Current Transformers Class P, Page 1045
• Application of IEC Current Transformers Class TP, Page 1047
• Application of Current Transformers Class ANSI C, Page 1047
Application of IEC Current Transformers Class P

For this example, a check is carried out to see whether an existing 5P10 current transformer meets the
requirements.
Ipr 600 A Rated primary current of the current transformer
Isr 1A Rated secondary current of the current transformer
Sr 15 VA Rated power
ALF 10 Accuracy limit factor
Rct 4Ω Secondary winding resistance at 75 °C
lCable 50 m Length of the secondary current transformer supply
lines
87 The phase displacement is not specified in IEC 61869-2. Classes 10P and 10PR are not recommended for differential protection for
this reason.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Appendix

ACable 4 mm2 Core cross section of the secondary current trans-
former supply lines
ρCu 0.0213 Ω mm2/m Specific copper cable resistance at 75 °C (the value is
0.0175 Ω mm2/m at 25° C)
SDevice 0.1 VA Protection device burden at the rated current
ISC Max 30 kA Max. symmetrical short-circuit current
Calculation of the connected burden:

The burden Rbc that is connected to the terminals of the current transformer is derived from the double supply-
line resistance (supply and return line) and the device burden as indicated below.
Conditions:
Requirement:
Comparison: ALF´current transformer > ALF´requirement

Result: 41 > 25
The current transformer meets the requirements and the default stabilization factor can be maintained. You
don't have to carry out any additional calculations.
Check each current transformer. A relation between the smallest and largest current transformer ratio needs
not be considered.
NOTE
i If the requirement is not met or just met, you can use the current transformer by increasing the stabiliza-
tion factor.
Extensive calculations are required for determining the stabilization factor. Use the CTDim tool from
Siemens to do this.
Checking the measuring range:

Condition: ISC Max/Ipr ≤ 100
The equation refers to the measuring range 100 Irated of the protection device.
Calculation: 30 kA/600 A = 50
Result: 50 ≤ 100

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Appendix
Application of IEC Current Transformers Class TP

The current transformers are specified by KSSC, Ktd and Rb. The current transformer above should be replaced
by a TPY class current transformer with the following parameters:
KSSC = 30
Ktd = 2
Rb = 1 Ω
The requirements are compared with the data from the current transformer.
Rated symmetrical short-circuit current factor:
Required product:
Current transformer:
Result: 60 > 25
NOTE
i The KSSC factor is determined by the maximum symmetrical short-circuit current. The minimum require-
ment in the example is KSSC = 50 and Ktd = 0.5. As the product is crucial for the design of the current trans-
former, the standard permits KSSC and Ktd values to be freely chosen, subject to certain limits (see
IEC TR 61869-100, Section 11.5.3.3.5 and Section 9.2). The KSSC = 25 and Ktd = 1.0 specification is
permitted.
The required resistive dimensioning burden Rb of the current transformer must be greater than the connected
resistive burden Rbc that was previously calculated.
Requirement: Rb > Rbc
Result: 1 Ω > 0.633 Ω
The TPY class current transformer meets the requirements.
Application of Current Transformers Class ANSI C
This class is specified with a maximum secondary terminal voltage Vt. In this example, the current trans-
former uses the following parameters:
Class: C200
Transformer terminal voltage at a rated burden of 2 Ω:
Rated secondary current: Isr = 5 A
The rated secondary current of Isr = 5 A causes the connected burden to change.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Appendix
Required current trans-

former terminal voltage:
Current transformer Vt = 200 V

terminal voltage:
Result: 200 V > 67.13 V
The class C200 current transformer meets the requirements.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Appendix
A.6 Connection Examples for Current Transformers
A.6 Connection Examples for Current Transformers
[ti_phase_2, 4, en_US]
Figure A-5 Connection to 3 Phase Current Transformers and a Measured Zero-Sequence Current (Current
in Common Return Conductor)
NOTE
i The switchover of the current polarity at the 3-phase current transformer causes a rotation in the direction
of electric current for current input I4 (IN)!

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Appendix
A.7 Connection Examples of Voltage Transformers for Modular Devices
[tvvolta1-260313-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure A-6 Connection to 3 Star-Connected Voltage Transformers
Figure A-7 Connection to 3 Star-Connected Voltage Transformers and to the Broken-Delta Winding

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Appendix
Figure A-8 Connection to 3 Star-Connected Voltage Transformers and to the Broken-Delta Winding of a
Separate Voltage Transformer (for Example Busbar)

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Appendix
Figure A-9 Connection to 3 Star-Connected Voltage Transformers and to the Phase-to-Phase Voltage of a
Busbar Voltage Transformer (for Example for Synchrocheck Applications)

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Appendix
Figure A-10 Connection to V-Connected Voltage Transformer (Delta-Connected Device Input Transformer)
and Connection to the Phase-to-Phase Voltage of a Busbar Voltage Transformer
NOTE
i When using the connection type 3-phase-to-phase voltage, the zero-sequence voltage cannot be detected.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Appendix
Figure A-11 Connection to V-Connected Voltage Transformer (Delta-Connected Device Input Transformer)
and Connection to the Broken-Delta Winding of a Busbar Voltage Transformer
[tvvol2ll-260313-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure A-12 Connection to V-Connected Voltage Transformer (Measurement of 2 Phase-to-Phase Voltages)

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Appendix
[tvl2lluu-260313-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure A-13 Connection to V-Connected Voltage Transformer (Measurement of 2 Phase-to-Phase Voltages)

and Connection to the Broken-Delta Winding of a Busbar Voltage Transformer
Figure A-14 Connection to a 1-Pole Insulated Voltage Transformer (Phase-to-Ground Voltage)

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Appendix
A.8 Preroutings 7SS85
A.8 Preroutings 7SS85

Meaning of the abbreviations in DIGSI 5, see Table 7-9
Light-Emitting Diodes
Table A-2 Preset LED Display, for Example Busbar Protection 7SS85
LEDs Signal Number Signal Type Configuration

LED1 Alarm handling:Group warning 5971.301 SPS U
LED2 Alarm handling:Group indication 5971.302 SPS U
LED3 Busbar: busbar protection supervision 1021.1841.12031.300 SPS U
Diff. current supervision:Alarm:general
LED4 Group indication:Sw. aux. volt. outage 4501.302 SPS U
LED5 Group indication:Sw. fault alarm 4501.303 SPS U
LED6 Busbar:General:Inactive 1021.12151.54 SPS U
LED7
LED8
LED9 Group indicat.:Sw. gear op. prohibited 4501.301 SPS U
LED10
LED11 Busbar:Group indicat.:Operate:general 1021.4501.57 SPS L
LED12 Busbar:Group indicat.:Operate:phs A 1021.4501.57 SPS L
LED13 Busbar:Group indicat.:Operate:phs B 1021.4501.57 SPS L
LED14 Busbar:Group indicat.:Operate:phs C 1021.4501.57 SPS L
LED15
LED16 Device: Process mode inactive SPS U
General: Functions in test mode 91 329 SPS U
Table A-3 Siemens recommends Routing the Additional Following Bay-Related Indications to LEDs.
LEDs Signal Number Signal Type Configuration

LED5 CB:Supervision:CB running time xxx.yyy.12961.301 SPS U
exceeded xxx.yyy.12961.302 SPS U
CB:Supervision:CB failure
LED7 General:Out of operation xxx.12181.301 SPS U
LED8 CB:Supervision:CB running time xxx.yyy.12961.301 SPS U
exceeded

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Literature
/1/ Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping – 7SA82,
7SD82, 7SL82, 7SA84, 7SD84, 7SA86, 7SD86, 7SL86, 7SJ86
C53000-G5040-C010
/2/ Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping – 7SA87,
7SD87, 7SL87, 7VK87
C53000-G5040-C011
/3/ Overcurrent Protection – 7SJ82/7SJ85
C53000-G5040-C017
/4/ Overcurrent Protection – 7SJ81
C53000-G5040-C079
/5/ Motor Protection – 7SK82/85
C53000-G5040-C024
/6/ Transformer Differential Protection – 7UT82, 7UT85, 7UT86, 7UT87
C53000-G5040-C016
/7/ Generator Protection – 7UM85
C53000-G5040-C027
/8/ Busbar Protection 7SS85
C53000-G5040-C019
/9/ High-Voltage Bay Controller – 6MD85/86
C53000-G5040-C015
/10/ Paralleling Device – 7VE85
C53000-G5040-C071
/11/ Universal Protection – 7SX82/7SX85
C53000-G5040-C607
/12/ Merging Unit 6MU85
C53000-G5040-C074
/13/ Fault Recorder – 7KE85
C53000-G5040-C018
/14/ Compact Class – 7SX800
C53000-G5040-C003
/15/ Hardware Description
C53000-G5040-C002
/16/ Communication Protocols
C53000-L1840-C055
/17/ Process Bus
C53000-H3040-C054
/18/ DIGSI 5 – Software Description
C53000-D5040-C001

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Literature
/19/ SIPROTEC 5 – Security

C53000-H5040-C081
/20/ PIXIT, PICS, TICS, IEC 61850
C53000-G5040-C013
/21/ Operation
C53000-G5040-C003
/22/ Engineering Guide
C53000-G5040-C004
/23/ High-Speed Busbar Transfer – 7VU85
C53000-G5040-C090

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Glossary
ACD
IEC 61850 data type: Directional protection activation information
ACK
Data transfer acknowledgment
ACT
IEC 61850 data type: Protection-activation information
APC
Controllable analog set point information – information regarding a controllable analog value
ASDU
ASDU stands for Application Service Data Unit. An ASDU can consist of one or more identical information
objects. A sequence of the same information elements, for example measured values, is identified by the
address of the information object. The address of the information object defines the associated address of the
1st information element of the sequence. A consecutive number identifies the subsequent information
elements. The number builds on this address in integral increments (+1).
BAC
Binary controlled analog process value
Back-up battery
The back-up battery ensures that specified data areas, flags, timers, and counters are held as retentive.
Bay controller
Bay controllers are devices with control and supervision functions without protection functions.
BCR
IEC 61850 data type: Binary Counter Reading
Best Master Clock Algorithm

A PTP network consists of communicating clocks. The best master clock algorithm (BMCA) is used to deter-
mine the device that indicates the most precise time. This device serves as a reference clock and is called the
grandmaster. In case of changes to the network topology, the BMC algorithm is performed again for network
segments which might be cut off from the grandmaster. If a participating device assumes the role of master
and slave at the same time, it is also referred to as a boundary clock.
Big-endian
The terms big-endian and little-endian are used to describe the arrangement of the bytes when saving. In case
of big-endian, the upper limiting value byte is saved at the lowest address. Little-endian saves the upper
limiting value byte at the highest address.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Glossary
Binary Controlled Analog Process Value

The data type BAC models a command with or without feedback. The BAC is used to control an arc-suppres-
sion coil, for example. The commands Higher, Lower, and Stop can be issued. The process delivers an analog
value as feedback.
Binary Controlled Step Position

The data type BSC can, for example, be used to control a transformer tap changer. The commands up, down
can be given.
Bit pattern indication

Bit pattern indication is a processing function with which items of digital process information applicable across
several inputs can be detected together in parallel and further processed. The bit pattern length can be
selected as 1, 2, 3, or 4 bytes.
BMCA
Best Master Clock Algorithm
Boundary clock
The PTP protocol recognizes different types of clock: An Ordinary Clock (OC), Boundary Clock (BC), and Trans-
parent Clock (TC). The boundary clock transmits time information beyond a network limit. For example in a
router which connects different switched networks. As a slave, the clock of the router receives time informa-
tion and passes it on as a master.
BRCB
Buffered Report Control Block
BSC
Binary Controlled Step Position
Buffered Report Control Block

Buffered Report Control Block (BRCB) is a form of report controlling. Internal events trigger the immediate
sending of reports or saving of events for the transfer. Data values cannot therefore be lost on account of
transport flow control conditions or connection interruptions. BRCB provides the functionality SOE (see
sequence of events).
CB
Circuit breaker
CBFP
Sampled Value Supervision
CDC
Common Data Class
CFC
Continuous Function Chart
Chatter blocking
A rapidly intermittent input (for example, due to a relay contact fault) is disconnected after a configurable
supervision time and can thus not generate any further signal changes. The function prevents overloading of
the system when a fault occurs.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Glossary
CID
Configured IED Description
CIT
Conventional Instrument Transformer
CMV
Complex measured value
Combination Device
Combination devices are bay units with protection functions and with feeder mimic diagram.
Common Data Class

Generic term for a data class according the IEC 61850 model.
Communication branch
A communication branch corresponds to the configuration of 1 to n participants that communicate via a
common bus.
Configured IED Description

A Configured IED Description (CID) is a file for data exchange between the IED Configuration Tool and the IED
itself.
Continuous Function Chart

The Continuous Function Chart (CFC) is a programming language. It is used for programmable logic control-
lers. The programming language Continuous Function Chart is not defined in the standard IEC 61131-3, but
represents a common extension of IEC programming environments. CFC is a graphic programming language.
Function blocks are linked to one another. This represents an essential difference from conventional program-
ming languages, where sequences of commands are entered.
Control display
The control display becomes visible for devices with a large display after pressing the CTRL key. The diagram
contains the switching devices to be controlled in the feeder, with status representation. The control display
serves for the bushing of the switching operations. Defining this display is part of the project engineering.
Controllable Integer Status

The data type INC can be used to issue a command (to one or more relays, selectable in information routing)
which is then monitored via a whole number as feedback.
Controller
The controller initiates the IO data communication.
COT
Cause of Transmission
CRC
Cyclic redundancy check
DAN
Double Attached Node

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Glossary
DANP
Double Attached Node PRP
Data Type
The data type is a value set of a data object, together with the operations allowed on this value set. A data
type contains a classification of a data element, such as the determination whether it consists of integers,
letters, or suchlike.
Data unit
Information item with a joint transmission source. Abbreviation: DU – Data Unit
Data window
The right section of the project window visualizes the content of the section selected in the navigation
window. The data window contains for example, indications or measured values of the information lists or the
function selection for parameterization of the device.
DCF
Device Configuration File
DCF77
The high-precision official time is determined in Germany by the Physikalisch-Technische Bundesanstalt PTB in
Brunswick. The atomic clock unit of the PTB transmits this time via the long-wave time signal transmitter in
Mainflingen near Frankfurt/Main. The emitted time signal can be received within a radius of approx. 1500 km
from Frankfurt/Main.
DCP
Discovery and Basic Configuration Protocol
DCP Protocol
The DCP protocol is used to detect devices without an IP address and to assign addresses to these devices.
DDD
DIGSI 5 Device Driver – SIPROTEC 5 device driver which must be loaded in DIGSI.
DEL
Phase-to-phase related measurements of a 3-phase system
Device 5 Export Format

DEX5
DEX5
Device 5 Export Format
You can archive the data from an individual SIPROTEC 5 device in DEX5 format.
DHCP
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
DIGDNP
DIGSI 5 protocol settings for DNP3

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Glossary
File extension for a file which is generated from DIGSI when the protocol configuration is exported from DIGSI
5.
DIGMOD
DIGSI 5 protocol settings for Modbus TCP
5.
DIGSI
Configuration software for SIPROTEC
DIGSI 5 Display Pages

You can archive individual or all display pages from a SIPROTEC 5 device in DSP5 format. You can also use this
format to exchange display pages between SIPROTEC 5 devices. The DSP5 format is based on XML.
DIGSI 5 protocol settings for DNP3

If the protocol DNP3 is configured for a system interface, you can export the protocol settings in DIGDNP
format. The DIGDNP format is specially designed to transfer interface data from DIGSI 5 into the substation
automation system SICAM PAS.
DIGSI 5 protocol settings for IEC 60870-5-103

If the protocol IEC 60870-5-103 is configured for a system interface, you can export the protocol settings in
DIGT103 format. The DIGT103 format is specially designed to transfer interface data from DIGSI 5 into the
substation automation system SICAM PAS.

If the protocol IEC 60870-5-104 is configured for a system interface, you can export the protocol settings in
DIGT104 format. The DIGT104 format is specially designed to transfer interface data from DIGSI 5 into the
DIGSI 5 protocol settings for Modbus TCP

If the protocol Modbus TCP is configured for a system interface, you can export the protocol settings in
DIGMOD format. The DIGMOD format is specially designed to transfer interface data from DIGSI 5 into the
DIGSI 5 Test Sequences

You can archive individual or all test sequences from a SIPROTEC 5 device in SEQ5 format. You can also use
this format to exchange test sequences between SIPROTEC 5 devices. The SEQ5 format is based on XML.
DIGT103
5.
DIGT104
5.
DNP3
DNP3 is a communication standard for telecontrol engineering. DNP3 is used as a general transmission
protocol between control systems and substations, as well as between bay devices and the systems controls.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Glossary
Double command
Double commands (DPC – Double Point Control) are process outputs which represent 4 process states at 2
outputs: 2 defined states (for example ON/OFF) and 2 undefined states (for example disturbed positions).
Double-point indication
A double-point indication (DPS – Double Point Status) ia a process information that represents 4 process states
at 2 inputs: 3 defined states (for example, On/Off and disturbed position) and 1 undefined state (00).
DPC
IEC 61850 data type: Double Point Control - double command
DPS
IEC 61850 data type: Double Point Status - double-point indication
Drag and drop

Copying, moving, and linkin function, used in graphic user interfaces. Objects are selected with the mouse,
held and moved from one data area to another.
DSP5
DIGSI 5 Display Pages
DU
Data Unit
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol

In order to configure PCs automatically, centralized and uniformly in a TCP/IP network, a dynamic assignment
of IP addresses is used. DHCP is utilized. The system administrator determines how the IP addresses are to be
assigned and specifies the time lapse over which they are assigned. DHCP is defined in the Internet standards
RFC 2131 (03/97) and RFC 2241 (11/97).
In the case of SIPROTEC 5, the device can also be assigned an IP address via DIGSI and DHCP.
ELCAD
Electrical CAD
Electrical CAD
You can import the topology information contained in an ELCAD file into a project and use it as the basis for a
single-line configuration. The other information contained in the ELCAD file is not included in this process.
Electromagnetic compatibility
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) means that an item of electric equipment functions without error in a
specified environment. The environment is not influenced in any impermissible way here.
ENC
Enumerated Status Controllable
ENS
Enumerated Status

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Glossary
ESD protection
The ESD protection is the entirety of all means and measures for the protection of electrostatic-sensitive
devices.
Far End Fault Indication

Far End Fault Indication (FEFI) is a special setting of switches. It is always only possible to log a line interrup-
tion on the receive line. If a line interruption is detected, the link status of the line is changed. The status
change leads to deletion of the MAC address assigned to the port in the switch. However, outage of the
receive line from the aspect of the switch can only be detected in the receiver, that is, by the switch. The
receiver then immediately blocks the transmit line and signals the connection failure to the other device. The
FEFI setting in the switch triggers detection of the error on the receive line of the switch.
FC
Ferrule Connector
FEFI
Far End Fault Indication
FG
Function group
Fleeting indication
Fleeting indications are single-point indications present for a very short time, in which only the coming of the
process signal is logged and further processed time-correctly.
Floating
Floating means that a free potential of the output voltage that is not connected to ground is generated. There-
fore, no current flows through the body to ground in the event of touching.
Function group
Functions are brought together into function groups (FG). The assignment of functions to current and/or
voltage transformers (assignment of functions to measuring points), the information exchange between the
function groups via interfaces as well as the generation of group indications are important for this bringing
together.
GaAs
Gallium arsenide
General Interrogation
The state of all process inputs, of the status, and of the fault image are scanned on system startup. This infor-
mation is used to update the system-side process image. Likewise, the current process state can be interro-
gated after data loss with a general interrogation (GI).
General Station Description Mark-up Language

GSDML is an XML-based data description language for the creation of a GSD file.
Generic Object-Oriented Substation Event

GOOSE. Protocol of IEC 61850 for communication between bay units.
GI
General Interrogation

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Glossary
GIN
Generic Identification Number
Global Navigation Satellite System

A global navigation satellite system or GNSS is a system for determining position and for navigation on the
ground and in the air. Position is determined by the receipt of signals from navigation satellites and pseudo-
lites.
GNSS
Global Navigation Satellite System
GOOSE
Generic Object-Oriented Substation Event
Ground
The conductive ground whose electric potential can be set equal to 0 at every point. In the area of grounding
conductors, the ground can have a potential diverging from 0. The term reference ground is also used for
this situation.
Grounding
The grounding is the entirety of all means and measures for grounding.
GSDML
General Station Description Mark-up Language
Hierarchy level
Within a structure with higher-level and lower-level objects a hierarchy level is a level of equivalent objects.
HMI
Human-Machine Interface (HMI)
HSR
High Availability Seamless Redundancy Protocol
HSR Protocol
Like PRP (Parallel Redundancy Protocol), HSR (High-Availability Seamless Redundancy Protocol) is specified in
IEC 62439-3. Both protocols offer redundancy without switching time.
The principal function can be found in the definition of PRP. With PRP, the same indication is sent via 2 sepa-
rated networks. In contrast to this, in the case of HSR the indication is sent twice in the 2 directions of the ring.
The recipient receives it correspondingly via 2 paths in the ring, takes the 1st indication and discards the 2nd
indication (see PRP protocol).
Whereas NO indications are forwarded in the end device in the case of PRP, a switch function is installed in the
HSR node. Thus, the HSR node forwards indications in the ring that are not directed at it.
In order to avoid circular indications in the ring, corresponding mechanisms are defined in the case of HSR.
SAN (Single Attached Node) end devices can only be connected with the aid of a RedBox in the case of HSR.
PRP systems and HSR systems can be coupled redundantly with 2 RedBoxes.
HV bay description
The HV project description file contains details of bays which exist in a ModPara project. The actual bay infor-
mation of each bay is stored in a HV field description file. Within the HV project description file, each bay
receives an HV field description file through a reference to the file name.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Glossary
HV project description
If the configuring and parameterization of PCUs and submodules is completed with ModPara, all the data will
be exported. This data is distributed to several files. One file contains details about the fundamental project
structure. This also includes, for example, information detailing which bays exist in this project. This file is
called a HV project description file.
ICD
IED Capability Description
IEC
International Electrotechnical Commission - International Electrotechnical Standardization Body
IEC 60870-5-103
International standard protocol for communication with IEDs (especially protection devices) Many protection
devices, bay units, bay controllers, and measured-value acquisition devices use the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
to communicate with SICAM PAS.
IEC 60870-5-104
Standard international telecontrol protocol. Transmission protocol based on IEC 60870-5-101 for connecting
the substation control level to the telecontrol center via TCP/IP protocols using a wide area network connec-
tion (WAN).
IEC 60870-5-104 is also used for communicating with IEDs.
IEC 61850
IEC 61850 is an international standard for continuous communication in switchgear. It defines the communi-
cation between devices in a switchgear and the corresponding system requirements. All automation functions
of a switchgear and their engineering are supported this way. IEC 61850 can also be transferred to automa-
tion systems in other applications, for example for controlling and monitoring decentralized power genera-
tion.
IEC address
A unique IEC address must be assigned to each SIPROTEC device within an IEC bus. A total of 254 IEC
addresses per IEC bus are available.
IEC communication branch

Within an IEC communication branch, the participants communicate on the basis of the protocol
IEC 60870-5-103 via an IEC bus.
IED
Intelligent Electronic Device
IED stands for a physical part of a device (hardware, etc.)
IED Capability Description

Data exchange from the IED configuration software (DIGSI) to the system configurator. This file describes the
performance properties of an IED.
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Glossary
IEEE 1588
Time-synchronization protocol according to the standard IEEE 1588-2008. Precision Clock Synchronization
Protocol for Networked Measurement and Control Systems (IEEE 1588 v2) and the standard IEEE
C37.238-2011: IEEE Standard Profile for Use of IEEE 1588 PTP protocol in Power System Applications (Power
Profile).
IEEE 1588v2/PTP
PTP has many optional features and often offers more than one way of doing things. Meaning that it is not
mandatory for PTP devices to work together. Provided that they are configured with a compatible set of selec-
tion options for IEEE 1588 options and settings. The solution for this is profiles. Profiles are rule sets with
restrictions for PTP that are designed to be used to meet the requirements for specific applications or a set of
similar applications. The IEEE 1588 standard itself only defines 1 profile, which is designated as the Default
profile. 2 profiles are used in the power industry: IEC 61850-9-3 (Power Utility Profile) and C37.238-2017
(Power Profile).
IID
Instantiated IED Description
INC
Controllable Integer Status
Input data/input direction

Data is sent from the protocol slave to the protocol master.
INS
Integer Status
Instantiated IED Description

Files in IID format are ICD files adapted for the specific use case in the project. This format is mainly suitable
for exchanging data between DIGSI 5 and an external system configurator or a substation automation system
such as SICAM PAS. The ICD format uses SCL as the description language for this.
International Electrotechnical Commission

IEC
Internet Protocol
An Internet protocol (IP) enables the connection of participants which are positioned in different networks.
IO
Input-Output
IO Provider Status
The transmitter (provider) of an IO data element uses this to indicate the state (good/bad, including fault loca-
tion).
IOPS
IO Provider Status
IP
Internet Protocol

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Glossary
IPv4
Internet-Protocol Version 4
ISC
Integer Step Controlled Position Information
LAN
Local Area Network
Link address
The link address indicates the address of a SIPROTEC device.
Link Layer Discovery Protocol

The Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) serves as the basis for topology detection and configuration determi-
nation.
List view
The right area of the project window displays the names and icons of the objects which are within a container
selected in the tree view. As the visualization is in the form of a list, this area is also referred to as list view.
LLDP
Link Layer Discovery Protocol
Local Area Network

A Local Area Network (LAN) is a regional, local PC network. The PCs are all equipped with a network interface
card and work with one another via data exchange. The LAN requires an operating system on each PC and
standardized data transport software. The operating systems can be different, as can the data transport soft-
ware, but both must support a common transmission protocol (= TCP/IP protocols), so that all PCs can
exchange data with one another.
LPIT
Low-Power Instrument Transformer –
AKA NCIT – Non Conventional Instrument Transformer. Examples: Low-power current transformer, C dividers,
R dividers, RC dividers, optical sensors
LPVT
Low-Power Voltage Transformer
LSB
Least Significant Bit
MAC address
The MAC address (Media Access Control) is the hardware address of each individual network adaptor. It serves
to identify the devices in the network unambiguously.
Management Information Base

A Management Information Base (MIB) is a database which continuously saves information and statistics
concerning each device in a network. The performance of each device can be monitored with this information
and statistics. In this way, it can also be ensured that all devices in the network function properly. MIBs are
used with SNMP.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Glossary
Manufacturing Message Specification

The standard Manufacturing Message Specification (MMS) serves for data exchange. The standard is used for
the transmission protocols IEC 61850 and IEC 60870-6 TASE.2.
Master Clock
The Master Clock (MC) contains a mechanical or electric mechanism and a contact device, which periodically
transmits drive pulses to the slave clocks.
MC
Master Clock
Measured Value
This data type provides a measured value that can be used as a CFC result, for instance.
Merging Unit
The Merging Unit (MU) is used (also for IEC 61850 plant) for the field-signal bus interface. The publisher/
server of the sampled measured values is designated as the merging unit.
Metered value
Metered values are a processing function, used to determine the total number of discrete similar events
(counter pulses), for example, as integral over a time span. In the power utility field, electrical energy is often
recorded as a metered value (energy import/delivery, energy transport).
MIB
Management Information Base
MICS
Model Implementation Conformance Statement
MMS
Manufacturing Message Specification
Modbus
The Modbus protocol is a communication protocol. It is based on a master/slave or client/server architecture.
Model Implementation Conformance Statement

MICS
The Model Implementation Conformance Statement describes in detail the standard data object models that
are supported by the system or by the device.
Module
Unit of a device. This can either be a physical module or a functional unit of a device.
MSB
Most Significant Bit
MU
Merging Unit

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Glossary
MV
Data type Measured Value
NACK
Negative acknowledgment
Navigation window
The left area of the project window displays the names and icons of all containers of a project in the form of a
folder tree structure.
Network Time Protocol

The Network Time Protocol is an international standard for time synchronization.
NTP
Network Time Protocol
Object
Each element of a project structure is designated as an object in DIGSI 5.
Object property
Each object has properties. These might be general properties that are common to several objects. Otherwise,
an object can also have object-specific properties.
Offline
If there is no communication connection between a PC program (for example, configuration program) and a
runtime application (for example, a PC application), the PC program is offline. The PC program executes in
Offline mode.
Online
If there is a communication connection between a PC program (for example configuration program) and a
runtime application (for example a PC application), the PC program is online. The PC program executes in
Online mode.
Optical Switch Module

An Optical Switch Module (OSM) is a process for switching over switches in Ethernet networks that are ring-
shaped in structure. OSM is a proprietary process from Siemens, which later became standard under the term
MRP. OSM is integrated in the optical Ethernet module EN100-O. OSM is hardly used in IEC 61850 networks.
RSTP is used there, this having become established as an international standard.
OSM
Optical Switch Module
Output data/output direction

Data is sent from the protocol master to the protocol slave.
Parallel Redundancy Protocol

Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP) is a redundancy protocol for Ethernet networks that is specified in
IEC 62439-3. Unlike conventional redundancy procedures, such as RSTP (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol,
IEEE 802.1D-2004), PRP offers uninterruptible switchover, which avoids any downtime in the event of a fault,
and thus the highest availability.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Glossary
PRP is based on the following approach: The redundancy procedure is generated in the end device itself. The
principle is simple: The redundant end device has 2 Ethernet interfaces with the same address (DAN, Double
Attached Node). Now the same indication is sent twice, in the case of PRP (parallel) over 2 separate networks,
and unambiguously marks both with a sequence number. The receiver takes the information that it receives
first, stores its ID based on the source address and the sequence number in a duplicate filter and thus recog-
nizes the 2nd, redundant information. This redundant information is then discarded. If the 1st indication is
missing, the 2nd indication with the same content comes via the other network. This redundancy avoids a
switching procedure in the network and is thus interruption-free. The end device relays no indications to the
other network. Since the process is realized in the Ethernet layer (same MAC address), it is transparent and
usable for all Ethernet user data protocols (IEC 61850, DNP, other TCP/IP based protocols). In addition, it is
possible to use one of the 2 networks for the transmission of non-redundant indications.
There are 2 versions of PRP: PRP-0 and its successor PRP-1. Siemens implements PRP-1.
Parameterization
Comprehensive term for all setting work on the device. You can set parameters for the protection functions
with DIGSI 5 or sometimes also directly on the device.
Parameter set
The parameter set is the entirety of all parameters that can be set for a SIPROTEC device.
Participant address
A participant address comprises the name of the participant, the national code, the area index and the partici-
pant-specific phone number.
PB Client
Process-Bus client. The sampled measured values subscriber is designated as a process-bus client.
PICS
Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement
PROFIBUS
PROcess FIeld BUS, German process and fieldbus standard (EN 50170). The standard specifies the functional,
electrical, and mechanical characteristics for a bit-serial fieldbus.
PROFIBUS address
An unambiguous PROFIBUS address must be assigned to each SIPROTEC device within a PROFIBUS network. A
total of 254 PROFIBUS addresses per PROFIBUS network are available.
Profile_ID
Together with an API, the Profile_ID unambiguously defines the access and behavior of an application.
PROFINET IO
PROFINET is the open Industrial Ethernet Standard of PROFIBUS for automation.
Programmable Logic
The programmable logic is a function in Siemens devices or station controllers, enabling user-specific func-
tionality in the form of a program. This logic component can be programmed by various methods: CFC
(Continuous Function Chart) is one of these. SFC (Sequential Function Chart) and ST (Structured Text) are
others.
Programmable Logic Block

Building blocks are parts of the user program delimited by their function, structure, and intended use.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Glossary
Programmable Logic Controller

Programmable logic controllers (PLC) are electronic controllers whose function is saved as a program in the
control unit. The construction and wiring of the device do not therefore depend on the function of the control.
The programmable logic controller has the structure of a computer; it consists of CPU with memory, input/
output modules (for example, DI, AI, CO, CR), power supply (PS) and rack (with bus system). The peripherals
and programming language are oriented towards the circumstances of the control engineering.
Project
Content-wise, a project is the image of a real energy supply system. Graphically, a project is represented as a
number of objects which are integrated in a hierarchical structure. Physically, a project consists of a number of
directories and files containing project data.
Project tree
The project tree contains a representation of the data structure. This data structure represents the content of
the project and is created with a generic browser.
Protection communication
Protection communication includes all functionalities necessary for data exchange via the protection interface.
Protection communication is created automatically during configuration of communication channels.
Protection device
A protection device detects erroneous states in distribution networks, taking into consideration various
criteria, such as fault distance, fault direction, or fault duration, triggering a disconnection of the defective
network section.
Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement

The performance properties of the system to be tested are summarized in the report on the conformity of
implementation of a protocol (PICS = protocol implementation conformance statement).
PRP
Parallel Redundancy Protocol
PTP
Precision-Time Protocol
PTP Protocol
The PTP protocol causes the time settings of several devices in a network to synchronize. PTP is defined in
IEEE 1588. The focus of PTP is on higher accuracy and networks that are locally restricted. PTP can achieve an
accuracy in the range of nanoseconds in a hardware variant, and in the range of a few milliseconds in a soft-
ware variant.
Real Time
Real time
RedBox
Redundancy box
The RedBox is used to connect a device with only one interface redundantly to both PRP networks LAN A and
LAN B. The RedBox is a DAN (Double Attached Node) and functions as a proxy server for the devices (VDANs)
connected to it. The RedBox has its own IP address for configuration, administration, and monitoring.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Glossary
Relay Information by OMICRON

You can use files in RIO format to exchange data between test systems from the company OMICRON and any
other desired project-protection planning system. With DIGSI 5, you can export different settings from protec-
tion functions in RIO format, which the OMICRON test equipment 7VP15 can then continue to process. The
relevant settings are described in the test equipment manual.
RIO
Data format Relay Information by OMICRON
RSTP
The Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) is a standardized redundancy process with a short response time. In
the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP protocol), structuring times in the multidigit second range apply in the case of
a reorganization of the network structure. These times are reduced to several 100 milliseconds for RSTP.
RSTP
Rapid-Spanning Tree Protocol
Sampled Measured Value

IEC 61850 is a communication protocol for electrical substation automation systems. The abstract data models
defined in IEC 61850 can be mapped with various protocols. At present, there are mappings in the standard
for the following protocols:
MMS (Manufacturing Message Specification)
GOOSE (Generic Object Oriented Substation Event)
SMV (Sampled Measured Value)
Web services (coming soon)
These protocols can run with fast-switching Ethernet via TCP/IP networks or substation LANs to achieve the
required response times for protection functions of under 4 ms.
Sampled value
Sampling is the registration of measured values for discrete, mostly equidistant periods of time. This can be
used to extract a discrete time signal from a continuous time signal.
Sampling rate
In signal processing, sampling is reducing a continuous time signal (for example current and voltages) to a
discrete time signal. A common example is converting soundwave (a continuous signal) into a sampling
sequence (a discrete time signal).
SAN
Single Attached Node
An SAN is a non-redundant node in a PRP network. It is connected with a single port to a single network (LAN
A or LAN B). It can only communicate in the connected network via nodes. Devices with only one connection
can be connected to both networks, LAN A and LAN B, redundantly via a RedBox. In order to keep LAN A and
LAN B symmetrical, Siemens recommends avoiding SANs and to connect the devices either via a RedBox or in
a separate network without PRP support.
SBO
Select before operate
SC
Single command

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Glossary
SCD
Substation Configuration Description
SCL
Substation Configuration Description Language
SED
System Exchange Description
SEQ
Data type sequence
SEQ5
DIGSI 5 Test Sequences
Sequence of Events
Acronym: SOE. An ordered, time-stamped log of status changes at binary inputs (also referred to as state
inputs). SOE is used to restore or analyze the behavior, or an electrical power system itself, over a certain
period of time.
Service interface
Device interface for interfacing DIGSI 5 (for example, through a modem)
SFP
Small Form-Factor Pluggable
SICAM SAS
Substation Automation System – Modular substation automation system based on the SICAM SC substation
controller and the HMI system SICAM WinCC.
SICAM WinCC
The operator control and monitoring system SICAM WinCC graphically displays the state of your network.
SICAM WinCC visualizes alarms and indications, archives the network data, provides the option of intervening
manually in the process and manages the system rights of the individual employees.
SIM
Simulation data format for single/multiple devices
Simulation data format for single/multiple devices

You can export simulation-related files of a SIPROTEC 5 device in SIM format. This new functionality in DIGSI 5
makes it possible to export the simulation data and to create a simulation of all devices in the DIGSI 5 project
for testing and commissioning purposes. The simulation is achieved by importing the simulation file into a
signal processing and automation system, which then simulates the device/devices using the process data like
in a real-time system. This feature allows a device to be tested for various real-time conditions.
Single command
Single commands (SPC – Single Point Control) are process outputs which represent 2 process states (for
instance on/off) at one output.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Glossary
Single-line diagram
A single-line diagram (SLD) is a simplified electrical overview diagram of the switchgear. Instead of all 3
phases, only a single line is shown, hence the name single-line.
Single-Line Editor
The Single-Line Editor (SLE) contains the catalog with the topological elements of a single-line diagram. Using
the single-line components, the customer can configure the topological part of the plant.
Single-point indication
Single-point indications (SPS) are a type of process information which represents 2 process states (for instance
on/off) at one output.
SIPROTEC
The registered trademark SIPROTEC designates the product family of Siemens protection devices and fault
recorders.
SIPROTEC 5 device
This object type represents a real SIPROTEC device with all the contained setting values and process data.
Slave device
A slave may only exchange data with a master after being prompted to do so by the master. SIPROTEC devices
work as slaves. A master computer controls a slave computer. A master computer can also control a peripheral
device.
SLD
Single-Line Diagram
SLE
Single-Line Editor
SMV
Sampled Measured Value
SNMP
The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is an Internet standard protocol and serves for the admin-
istration of nodes in an IP network.
SNMP
Single Network Management Protocol
SNTP
The Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) is a protocol for the synchronization of clocks via the Internet. With
SNTP, client computers can synchronize their clocks via the Internet with a time server.
SNTP
Single NetworkTime Protocol
SOE
Sequence of Events

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Glossary
SP
Single-point status
SP
Single-Point Indication
SPC
IEC 61850 data type: Single Point Control
SPS
IEC 61850 data type: Single Point Status
SPS
Programmable Logic Controller
SSD
System Specification Description
ST
Structured Text file
Structured Text file

You can import function charts (CFC) from DIGSI 4 in ST format. Before doing so, export your function charts
from DIGSI 4.83 or higher.
Substation Configuration Description

A substation configuration description is an IEC 61850-compliant file for data exchange between the system
configurator and the IED configurator. The substation configuration description contains information on the
network structure of a substation. The substation configuration description contains for example, information
on the assignment of the devices to the primary equipment, as well as on the station-internal communication.
Substation Configuration Description Language

Substation Configuration Description Language (SCL) is a description language standardized in IEC 61850 and
based on XML. This description language allows all information relevant to an IEC 61850 substation to be
documented consistently. This format is therefore suitable for exchanging IEC 61850-specific data between
different applications, even if these come from different manufacturers. The described import checks are
generally carried out for all SCL formats, not only for SCD imports.
SV Stream
Sampled Value Stream
The SV stream is a set of current and voltage values that are transmitted in a fast and cyclical fashion. Informa-
tion exchange is based on a publisher/subscriber mechanism. SV transmission is a continuous stream of
layer-2 Ethernet telegrams in one direction. The content of an SV stream can be configured in anyway you
wish in accordance with IEC 61869-9. IEC 61850-9-2 LE defines a fixed set of 4 voltage and 4 current values
for each SV stream.
System Exchange Description

With files in SED format, you can exchange interface information between DIGSI 5 projects and thus between
substations. To do this, the project extracts the data for the other projects from the file during import and
writes its own data in the same file during export. The contents of an SED file are formulated in SCL.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Glossary
System Specification Description

Files in SSD format contain the complete specification of a substation automation system including a single-
line configuration of the substation. The assignment of logical nodes from IEC 61850 to primary equipment
can also be described in SSD files. This allows device requirements to be defined in the SSD file so that the
devices can be used in the substation. The contents of an SED file are formulated in SCL.
TAI
Temps Atomique International - International atomic time
TC
Tap-position command
TCP
Transmission Control Protocol
TEA-X
You can archive the data from individual SIPROTEC 5 devices or whole projects in TEA-X format. This format is
also suitable for data exchange between different applications, such as DIGSI 5 and Engineering Base (EB). The
TEA-X format is based on XML.
Time stamp
A time stamp is a value in a defined format. The time stamp assigns a point in time to an event, for example,
in a log file. Time stamps ensure that events can be found again.
TOCT
Trench Optical Current Transformer – Optical current transformer manufactures by Trench
Topological view
The Topological View is oriented to the objects of a system (for example, switchgear) and their relationship to
one another. The topological view describes the structured layout of the system in hierarchical form. The
Topological View does not assign the objects to the devices.
Transmission Control Protocol

The Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) is a transmission protocol for transport services in the Internet. TCP is
based on IP and ensures connection of the participants during the data transmission. TCP ensures the correct-
ness of the data and the correct sequence of the data packets.
Transparent clock
The Precision Time Protocol protocol (PTP) recognizes different types of clocks: a standard clock (referred to as
Ordinary Clock, OC for short), a Boundary Clock (BC) and a Transparent Clock (TC). The transparent clock was
integrated in the specification retrospectively in 2008 and serves to improve the transmission of time informa-
tion within a network by receiving PTP messages and modifying (correcting) them before passing them on.
Tree view
The left area of the project window displays the names and icons of all containers of a project in the form of a
folder tree structure. This area is called the tree view.
Tunneling
Technology for connecting two networks via a third network, whereby the through traffic is completely
isolated from the traffic of the third network.

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Glossary
UDP
User Datagram Protocol
Unbuffered Report Control Block

Unbuffered Report Control Block (URCB) is a form of report controlling. Internal events trigger the immediate
sending of reports based on best effort. If no association exists or if the transport data flow is not fast
enough, events can be lost.
URCB
Unbuffered Report Control Block
USART
Universal Synchronous/Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter
User Datagram Protocol (UDP)

UDP is a protocol. The protocol is based on IP as TCP. In contrast to this, however, UDP works without a
connection and does not have any safety mechanisms. The advantage of UDP in comparison to IP is the higher
transmission rate.
UTC
Universal Time Coordinated
Vendor ID
Manufacturer-specific part of the device labeling for PROFINET.
Virtual device
A virtual device (VD) comprises all communication objects, as well as their properties and states, which a
communication user can utilize in the form of services. A VD can be a physical device, a module of a device or
a software module.
VLAN
Virtual Local Area Network
WYE
Phase-to-ground related measurements of a 3-phase system

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Index
A Communication-supervision log 69
Configuring merging units 276
ACD 200 Control functions
Acknowledgment Command logging 740
Spontaneous fault display 73 Controllables 694
Acquisition blocking 207 User-defined objects 196
ACT 199 Control Functions
Advanced protection communication Command Checks 721
Assignment of the protection FG to the FG Protec- Current transformer 264
tion communication 179
Advances protection interface
Indications and measured values of the external
D
synchronization 175
Arc protection 657
Detecting the line disconnector 298
Device-diagnosis log 66
Dimensions 948
B Directional overcurrent protection, phases 523
Disconnector 248, 266
Battery fault 829 Distributed busbar protection 242
Bay proxy DPC 199
Circuit-breaker function group 319 DPS 198
Current-transformer function group 319
Bay type
Bus coupler bay 321
E
Busbar section disconnection bay 321
Feeder bay 321
ENC 201
Bay unit 226
End-fault protection 481
Bus coupler bay 236, 248, 292
Structure of the function 483
Bus coupler differential protection 498
Bus Section without measuring system 295
Bus zone 245
Bus-coupler variants 326 F
Bus-section bays 298
Busbar 246 Fault display
Busbar-section disconnection bay 332 Configuration 72
Spontaneous 72
Fault log 60
Fault record 385
C
Feeder bay 248, 322
Feeder unit 248
Circuit breaker 265
FG Analog units
Trip-circuit supervision 337
Technical data 1021
Circuit-breaker failure protection
Function group
CBFP 427, 451
Bay proxy 319
Client 226
Busbar 314
Combined bus coupler bays 293
Circuit breaker 337
Communication log 67
Current transformer 359

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Index
Disconnector 363 N
Switching devices 363
Function group VI 3-phase Negative-sequence protection 552
Overview 370
Structure of the function group 370
O
G Operational log 59
Operational measured values 842
General Functionalities (Undervoltage Check, df/dt Calcu- Optical fiber
lation) 634 Multimode 114
Group Indications Multiplexer 114
Time Overcurrent Protection Functions 550 Repeater 114
Singlemode 114
Order configurator 1034
Ordering
H
Accessories 1035
Individual components 1034
Hardware 240
Other functions
Acquisition blocking 203
Chatter blocking 203
I Manual updating 203
Persistent commands 203
IEC 60529 949 Stored outputs 203
INC 199 Overcurrent protection, ground 514
Indication display Structure of the function 514
Spontaneous 72 Overcurrent protection, phases 504
Indications 52 Structure of the function 504
Displays 55
Read out 52
Reading 52
P
Reading with DIGSI 54
Inherent circuit-breaker failure protection
Power Quality Basics 229
Inherent circuit-breaker failure protection 473
Preference 332
INS 198, 199
Protection communication 112, 150
Constellation measured values 121, 145, 168
Protection interface
L Advanced protection interface, remote data 170,
176
Lockout 75 Checking the protection-data communication 931
Log 57 Indications and measured values in the classic
Configuring 58 protection interface 136
Deleting 70 Indications and measured values of the advanced
Logs 70 protection interface 160
Management 58 Remote data, data bar 141
Setting notes for the classic protection interface 131
Time synchronization 127, 156, 163
M
Manual updating 207
Q
Merging Unit 226
Quality attributes 56
Quality processing for GOOSE Later Binding 88

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
Index
R Function structure 688

Voltage protection
Routing Manager 287 Overvoltage protection with 3-phase voltage 579
Overvoltage protection with any voltage 611
Overvoltage protection with negative-sequence
voltage 593
S Overvoltage protection with positive-sequence
voltage 591
Security log 65 Undervoltage protection with any voltage 573
SEQ 201 Undervoltage protection with positive-sequence
Setting-history log 61 voltage 568
Significant features 240, 242 Voltage Transformer 302
Single-Line Editor 236 Voltage-jump detection
SIPROTEC 5 device Overview of functions 688
Adjustment of aplication templates/Functional
scope 41
Function control 43
Function embedding 34
Reference number for parameters and indica-
tions 48
SPC 198, 199
SPS 197
SPS unsaved 197
Stage Control 539
Stage Description 636
Standard variants 240, 242
Stored indications 74
Supervision
Disconnector supervision 785
Zero crossing supervision 783
Supervision functions
Binary inputs 812
Circuit-breaker supervision 793
Differential Current Monitoring 778
T
Temperature Monitoring
Technical Data 1022
Topology
Chain topology 112
Ring topology 112
Transfer Busbars 294
Truck-type switchgear 299, 322
U
User log 63
V
Voltage jump detection

C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022
C53000-G5040-C019-G, Edition 07.2022

SIP5 7SS85 V09.30 Manual C019-G en

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

SIP5 7SS85 V09.30 Manual C019-G en

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

SIP5 7SS85 V09.30 Manual C019-G en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Preface

Disclaimer of Liability Copyright

Purpose of the Manual

SIPROTEC 5, Low-Impedance Busbar Protection, Manual 3

• Communication protocol manual

• Process bus manual

• DIGSI 5 online help

• SIPROTEC 5/DIGSI 5 Tutorial

4 SIPROTEC 5, Low-Impedance Busbar Protection, Manual

The technical data of the product is approved in accordance with UL.

IND. CONT. EQ.

Customer Support Center

SIPROTEC 5, Low-Impedance Busbar Protection, Manual 5

Qualified Electrical Engineering Personnel

• Proper storage, setup and installation

• Proper operation and maintenance

6 SIPROTEC 5, Low-Impedance Busbar Protection, Manual

Selection of Used Symbols on the Device

No. Symbol Description

1 Direct current, IEC 60417, 5031

2 Alternating current, IEC 60417, 5032

3 Direct and alternating current, IEC 60417, 5033

4 Earth (ground) terminal, IEC 60417, 5017

5 Protective conductor terminal, IEC 60417, 5019

6 Caution, risk of electric shock

7 Caution, risk of danger, ISO 7000, 0434

8 Protective Insulation, IEC 60417, 5172, Safety Class II devices

9 Guideline 2002/96/EC for electrical and electronic devices

10 Guideline for the Eurasian Market

11 Mandatory Conformity Mark for Electronics and Electrotechnical Products in Morocco

SIPROTEC 5, Low-Impedance Busbar Protection, Manual 7

2 Basic Structure of the Function.................................................................................................................. 33

SIPROTEC 5, Low-Impedance Busbar Protection, Manual 9

3.4 Processing Quality Attributes.............................................................................................87

10 SIPROTEC 5, Low-Impedance Busbar Protection, Manual

3.7 Date and Time Synchronization....................................................................................... 188

SIPROTEC 5, Low-Impedance Busbar Protection, Manual 11

12 SIPROTEC 5, Low-Impedance Busbar Protection, Manual

4.5.11 Overview of Blocking................................................................................................. 304

5 Function-Group Types and Bay Proxy.......................................................................................................313

SIPROTEC 5, Low-Impedance Busbar Protection, Manual 13

5.4.3 Application and Setting Notes....................................................................................360

6 Protection and Automation Functions..................................................................................................... 389

14 SIPROTEC 5, Low-Impedance Busbar Protection, Manual

SIPROTEC 5, Low-Impedance Busbar Protection, Manual 15

6.5.4 Application and Setting Notes....................................................................................477

16 SIPROTEC 5, Low-Impedance Busbar Protection, Manual

6.11.2 Structure of the Function........................................................................................... 514

SIPROTEC 5, Low-Impedance Busbar Protection, Manual 17

6.16 Voltage Protection.......................................................................................................... 553

18 SIPROTEC 5, Low-Impedance Busbar Protection, Manual

6.16.7.2 Structure of the Function..................................................................................... 599

SIPROTEC 5, Low-Impedance Busbar Protection, Manual 19

6.18.4 Application and Setting Notes....................................................................................648

20 SIPROTEC 5, Low-Impedance Busbar Protection, Manual

6.23.2 Further Information................................................................................................... 692

7 Control Functions..................................................................................................................................... 693